Abel, G.G., Blanchard, E.B., Barlow, D.H., & Mavissakalian, M. (1975).
Identifying specific erotic cues in sexual deviations by audiotaped
descriptions. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 8, 247-260. #(3)

Abeson, A. (1972). Government and the education of handicapped children.
Exceptional Children, 39, 63-66. #(23)

Abeson, A. (1974). Movement and momentum: Government and the education of
handicapped children--II. Exceptional Children, 41, 109-115. #(23)

Abeson, A. (1976). Litigation. In F.J. Weintraub, A. Abeson, J. Ballard, &
M.L. LaVor (Eds.), Public policy and the education of exceptional children
(pp. 240-257). Reston, VA: Council for Exceptional Children. #(10), #(38)

Abeson, A., & Ballard, J. (1976). State and federal policy for exceptional
children. In F.J. Weintraub, A. Abeson, J. Ballard, & M.L. LaVor (Eds.),
Public policy and the education of exceptional children (pp. 83-95). Reston,
VA: Council for Exceptional Children. #(23), #(38)

Abeson, A., Bolick, N., & Hass, J. (1975). A primer on due process: Education
decisions for handicapped children. Reston, VA: Council for Exceptional
Children. #(23), #(34)

Abeson, A., Bolick, N., & Hass, J. (1975). A primer on due process: Education
decisions for handicapped children. Exceptional Children, 42, 68-74. #(23),
#(34)

Abeson, A., Bolick, N., & Hass, J. (1976). Due process of law: Background and
intent. In F.J. Weintraub, A. Abeson, J. Ballard, & M.L. LaVor (Eds.), Public
policy and the education of exceptional children (pp. 22-32). Reston, VA:
Council for Exceptional Children. #(10), #(38)

Abeson, A., & Zettel, J. (1977). The end of the quiet revolution: The edu- 
cation for all handicapped children act of 1975. Exceptional Children, 44,
115-128. #(10)

Abramson, L.Y., Seligman, M.E.P., & Teasdale, J.D. (1978). Learned helpless-
ness in humans: Critique and reformulation.Journal of Abnormal Psychology,
87, 49-74. #(4), #(32)

Abt, W.P. (1978). Design issues in policy research: A controversy. Policy
Analysis, 4, 91-122. #(43), #(23)

Achenbach, T.M., & Edelbrock, C.S. (1978). The classification of child
psychopathology: A review and analysis of empirical efforts. Psychological
Bulletin, 85, 1275-1301. #(32), #(2)

Ackland, H. (1979). Are randomized experiments the Cadillacs of design?
Policy Analysis, 5, 223-240. #(43)

Ackrill, J.C. (1980). Aristotle the philosopher. Oxford: Oxford University
Press. #(34), #(35)

Adams, E.R., & McGuire, F.A. (1986). Is laughter the best medicine? A study
of the effects of humor on perceived pain and affect. Adaptation and Aging,
8(3-4), 157-175. #(3), #(18)

Adams, J.L. (1975). An education curriculum for the moderately, severely, and
profoundly mentally handicapped pupil. Springfield, IL: Charles C Thomas.
#(5), #(45), #(34), #(21), #(5)

Adams, K.A. (1983). Needs sensing: The yeast for R & D organizations.
Educational Evaluation and Policy Analysis, 5, 55-60. #(8)

Adams, M.J. (1990). Beginning to read: Thinking and learning about print.
Cambridge, MA: MIT Press. #(34), #(17)

Aeschleman, S.R., & Higgins, A.F. (1982). Concept learning by retarded
children: A comparison of three discrimination learning procedures. Journal
of Mental Deficiency Research, 26, 229-238. #(6)

Aeschleman, S.R., & Schadenhauffen, J. (1984). Acquisition, generalization,
and maintenance of grocery shopping skills by severely mentally retarded adol-
scents. Applied Research in Mental Retardation, 5, 245-258. #(45), #(7), 
#(33)

Agras, W.S. (1973). Toward the certification of behavior therapists? Journal
of Applied Behavior Analysis, 6, 167-173. #(3)

Agras, W.S., Jacob, R.G., & Lebedeck, M. (1980). The California drought: A
quasi-experimental analysis of social policy. Journal of Applied Behavior
Analysis, 13, 561-570. #(43), #(23)

Ainsworth, M., & Bell, S. (1974). Mother-infant interaction and the
development of competence. In K. Connolly & J. Bruner (Eds.), The growth of
competence (pp. 97-118). New York: Academic Press. #(25), #(38)

Akamatsu, J.T., & Thelen, M.H. (1974). A review of the literature on observer
characteristics and imitation. Developmental Psychology, 10, 38-47. #(3),
#(41), #(32)

Albers, A.E., & Greer, R.D. (1991). Is the three-term contingency a predictor
of effective instruction? Journal of Behavioral Education, 1, 337-354. #(3),
#(9)

Albert, R.S. (1975). Toward a behavioral definition of genius. American
Psychologist, 30, 140-151. #(3)

Alberto, P.A., & Troutman, A.C. (1990). Applied behavior analysis for
teachers (3rd ed.). Columbus, OH: Charles E. Merrill. #(34), #(3), #(48),
#(29)

Albin, J.B. (1977). The treatment of pica (scavenging) behavior in the
retarded: A critical analysis and implications for research. Mental
Retardation, 15(5), 14-17. #(21), #(45)

Albin, J.B. (1977). Some variables influencing the maintenance of acquired
self-feeding behavior in profoundly retarded children. Mental Retardation,
15(5), 49-52. #(21), #(45)

Albin, R.W., & Horner, R.H. (1988). Generalization with precision. In R.H.
Horner, G. Dunlap, & R.L. Koegel (Eds.), Generalization and maintenance:
Lifestyle changes in applied settings (pp. 99-120). Baltimore: Paul H.
Brookes. #(3), #(34), #(7)

Aldridge, B.G. (1983). A mathematical model for mastery learning. Journal of
Research in Science Teaching, 20, 1-17. #(26)

Alevizos, P., DeRisi, W., Liberman, R., Eckman, T., & Callahan, E. (1978).
The behavior observation instrument: A method of direct observation for
program evaluation. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 11, 243-257. #(29) 

Alexander, T. (1974). Social controls and the individual. Intellect, 103,
41-44. #(3)

Algozzine, B. (1978). A statistical interpretation primer for the practitio-
ner (test of means). Exceptional Children, 45, 94-98. #(22)

Allegheny Intermediate Unit. (1976). Special techniques for teaching the
severely and profoundly retarded. Allegheny, PA: Author. #(5), #(34), #(21)

Allen, K., & Lattal, K.A. (1989). On conditioned reinforcing effects of nega-
tive discrimination stimuli. Journal of the Experimental Analysis of Behavior,
52, 335-339. #(14)

Allen, K.D., Barone, V.J., & Kuhn, B.R. (1993). A behavioral prescription for
promoting applied behavior analysis within pediatrics. Journal of Applied Be-
havior Analysis, 26, 493-502. #(3)

Allen, K.D., & Fuqua, R.W. (1985). Eliminating selective stimulus control: A
comparison of two procedures for teaching mentally retarded children to
respond to compound stimuli. Journal of Experimental Child Psychology, 39,
55-71. #(3), #(6), #(45)

Allen, K.E. (1976). Early intervention. In M.A. Thomas (Ed.), Hey, don't
forget about me! (pp. 46-63). Reston, VA: Council for Exceptional Children.
#(25), #(38)

Allen, K.E., & Harris, F.R. (1966). Elimination of a child's excessive
scratching by training the mother in reinforcement procedures. Behaviour
Research and Therapy, 4, 79-84. #(3), #(14)

Allen, K.E., Hart, B.M., Buell, J.S., Harris, F.R., & Wolf, M.M. (1964).
Effects of social reinforcement on isolate behavior of a nursery school
child. Child Development, 35, 511-518. #(25), #(14), #(3)

Allington, R.L. (1976). Color as an attentional cue in discrimination
learning. Journal of Reading Behavior, 8, 183-192. #(6), #(1)

Allison, M.G., & Ayllon, T. (1980). Behavioral coaching in the development of
skills in football, gymnastics, and tennis. Journal of Applied Behavior
Analysis, 13, 297-314. #(3)

Alloway, R., & Bebbington, P. (1987). The buffer theory of social support--
A review of the literature. Psychological Medicine, 17, 91-108. #(25), #(48),
#(32)

Alpern, G.D., & Boll, T.J. (Eds.). (1971). Education and care of moderately
and severely retarded children. Seattle, WA: Special Child Publications.
#(21), #(34) 

Alpert, C.L., & Rogers-Warren, A.K. (1986). Communications in autistic
persons: Characteristics and Intervention. In S. Warren & A.K. Rogers-Warren
(Eds.), Teaching functional language: Generalization and maintenance of
language skills (pp. 123-151). Baltimore: University Park Press. #(2), #(30)

Altman, K., Havik, S., & Cook, J. (1978). Punishment of SIB in natural settings
using contingent aromatic ammonia. Behaviour Research and Therapy, 16, 85-96.
#(14), #(3)

Altschuld, J.W., & Downhower, S.G. (1980). Issues in evaluating the
implementation of Public Law 94-142. Educational Evaluation and Policy
Analysis, 2, 31-38. #(8)

Altschuld, J.W., & Hines, C.V. (1982). Factors affecting the validity of
field tests in education. Educational Evaluation and Policy Analysis, 4,
331-339. #(29)

Amabile, T.M. (1983). The social psychology of creativity. New York:
Springer-Verlag. #(34), #(50)

Aman, M.G. (1978). Drugs, learning, and the psychotherapies. In J.S. Werry
(Ed.), Pediatric psychopharmacology: The use of behavior modifying drugs in
children (pp. 79-108). New York: Brunner/Mazel. #(38), #(3)

Aman, M.G. (1983). Psychoactive drugs in mental retardation. In J.L. Matson
& F. Andrasik, (Eds.), Treatment issues and innovationa in mental retardation 
(pp. 455-513). New York: Plenum. #(38), #(45), #(3)

Aman, M.G. (1991). Review and evaluation of instruments for assessing
emotional and behavioural disorders. Australia and New Zealand Journal of
Developmental Disabilities, 17, 127-145. #(32), #(2), #(44)

Aman, M.G., & Singh, N.N. (1986). Aberrant Behavior Checklist: Manual. East
Aurora, NY: Slosson. #(3), #(34), #(44)

Amarel, M. (1983). The classroom: An instructional setting for teachers, 
students, and the computer. In A.C. Wilkinson (Ed.), Classroom computers 
and cognitive science (pp. 15-29). New York: Academic Press. #(38), 
#(16), #(5)

American Association of School Administrators (1982). Time on task: Using
instructional time more effectively. Arlington, VA: Author. #(9), #(34)

American Psychiatric Association. (1987). Diagnostic and statistical manual
of mental disorders (3rd ed., rev.) (DSM-III-R). Washington, DC: Author.
#(21), #(22), #(34)

Ameriks, K. (1982). Kant's theory of mind. Oxford: Oxford University Press.
#(34), #(35)

Amicus. (1977). PL 94-142: Education for all handicapped children act.
Author, 2(3). #(10)

Ammons, R., & Ammons, H. (1948). Full Range Picture Vocabulary Test.
Missoula, MT: Psychological Test Specialists. #(44)

Anastasi A. (1958). Heredity, environment, and the question "How?" Psycholog-
ical Review, 65, 197-208. #(25)

Anastasi, A. (1982). Psychological testing. New York: MacMillan. #(34), #(20)

Anders, T.F., Halpern, L.F., & Hua, J. (1992). Sleeping through the night: A
developmental perspective. Pediatrics, 90, 554-560. #(25), #(18)

Anderson, C.S. (1982). The search for school climate: A review of the
research. Review of Educational Research, 52, 368-420. #(15), #(32)

Anderson, D.R., Hodson, G.D., & Jones, W.G. (1975). Instructional programming
for the handicapped student. Springfield, IL: Charles C Thomas. #(9), #(5),
#(34)

Anderson, F.B. (1974). Fay's first fifty: Activities for the young and the
severely handicapped. Augusta, GA: Fay Anderson Commercial Transactions.
#(5), #(21), #(34)

Anderson, F.B. (1975). Fay's second fifty: Activities for the young and the
severely handicapped. Augusta, GA: Fay Anderson Commercial Transactions.
#(5), #(21), #(34)

Anderson, F.B. (1976). Fay's third fifty: Activities for the young and the
severely handicapped. Augusta, GA: Fay Anderson Commercial Transactions.
#(5), #(21), #(34)

Anderson, G.M., & Nelson, N.W. (1988). Integrating language intervention and
education in an alternate adolescent language classroom. Seminars in Speech
and Language, 9, 341-353. #(30), #(9)

Anderson, J.R. (1990). Cognitive psychology and its implications (3rd ed.).
New York: Freeman. #(34), #(25)

Anderson, L.W. (1976). An empirical investigation of individual differences
in time to learn. Journal of Educational Psychology, 68, 226-233. #(26)

Anderson, L.W. (1981). Instruction and time-on-task: A review. Journal of
Curriculum Studies, 13, 289-303. #(9), #(32)

Anderson, N.B., & Rincover, A. (1982). The generality of overselectivity in
developmentally disabled children. Journal of Experimental Child Psychology,
34, 217-230. #(6), #(7), #(45)

Anderson, R.C., & Faust, G.W. (1967). The effects of strong formal prompts in
programmed instruction. American Education Research Journal, 4, 345-352.
#(3), #(9)

Anderson, R.C., & Spiro, R.J. (Eds.). (1977). Schooling and the acquisition
of knowledge. Hillsdale, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum. #(34), #(5)

Anderson, R.M., & Greer, J.G. (1976). Educating the severely and profoundly
retarded. Baltimore: University Park Press. #(5), #(9), #(21), #(34)

Anderson R.M., Greer, J.R., & Rick, H.L. (1982). An introduction to severely
and multiply handicapped persons. In J.G. Greer, R.M. Anderson, & S.J. Odle
(Eds.), Strategies for helping severely and multiply handicapped citizens
(pp. 1-42). Baltimore: University Park Press. #(38), #(21)

Anglin, J.M. (1977). Word, object, and conceptual development. New York: W.W.
Norton. #(34)

Anselmo, S. (1981). Bloom's human characteristics and school learning in
perspective. Educational Researcher, 10(10), 29-30. #(26)

Antinucci, F., & Parisi, D. (1975). Early semantic development in child
language. In E.H. Lenneberg & E. Lenneberg (Eds.), Foundations of language
development: A multidisciplinary approach (Vol. 1, pp. 189-201). New York:
Academic Press. #(30), #(38)

Apolloni, T., Cooke, S.A., & Cooke, T.P. (1976). Establishing a normal peer
as a behavioral model for developmentally delayed toddlers. Perceptual and
Motor Skills, 43, 1155-1165. #(3), #(36), #(45)

Appel, J.B. (1963). Punishment and shock intensity. Science, 141, 528-529.
#(3), #(8), #(14)

Appell, L., & Hurley, K. (1984). Individualizing instruction with microcom-
puter software. Focus on Exceptional Children, 16(5), 1-12. #(16), #(21) 

Aquilina, R.I. (1976). Revolutionary legislation for a bicentennial year.
Education and Training of the Mentally Retarded, 11, 189-196. #(10), #(45)

Aram, D.M., Ekelman, B.L., & Nation, J.E. (1984). Preschoolers with language
disorders: 10 years later. Journal of Speech and Hearing Research, 27,
232-244. #(30)

Archibald, W.P. (1974). Alternative explanations for self-fulfilling
prophecy. Psychological Bulletin, 81, 74-84. #(35), #(25)

Arends, R., Hersh, R., & Turner, J. (1979). Inservice education and the six
o'clock news. Theory Into Practice, 17, 196-205. #(42), #(23) 

Arendt, R.E., Maclean, W.E., & Baumeister, A.E. (1988). Critique of sensory
integration therapy and its application in mental retardation. American
Journal of Mental Retardation, 92, 401-411. #(12), #(45)

Argyris, C., & Schon, D.A. (1976). Evaluating theories of action. In W.G.
Bennis, K.D. Benne, R. Chin, & K.E. Corey (Eds.), The planning of change (3rd
ed., pp. 137-147). New York: Holt, Rinehart and Winston. #(42), #(38)

Arick, J.R., & Krug, D.A. (1978). Autistic children: A study of learning
characteristics and programming needs. American Journal of Mental Deficiency,
83, 200-202. #(9), #(21), #(2)

Arlin, M. (1984). Time, equality, and mastery learning. Review of Educational
Research, 54, 65-86. #(9), #(26)

Arlin, M. (1984). Time variability in mastery learning. American Educational
Research Journal, 21, 103-120. #(15), #(26)

Arlin, M., & Webster, J. (1983). Time costs of mastery learning. Journal of
Educational Psychology, 75, 187-195. #(26)

Arter, J.A., & Jenkins, J.R. (1979). Differential diagnosis prescriptive
teaching: A critical appraisal. Review of Educational Research, 49, 517-555.
#(9)

Asher, S.R. (1983). Social competence and peer status: Recent advances and
future directions. Child Development, 54, 1427-1434. #(37)

Asher, S.R., & Coie, J.D. (Eds.). (1990). Peer rejection in childhood. New
York: Cambridge University Press. #(34), #(37)

Ashman, A. (1983). On the theory and practice of remediating coding
deficiencies. Australia and New Zealand Journal of Developmental Disabili-
ties, 9, 8-15. #(11)

Ashton, P.T. (1975). Cross-cultural Piagetian research: An experimental
perspective. Harvard Educational Review, 45, 475-506. #(13)

Ashton-Warner, S. (1963). Teacher. New York: Simon & Schuster. #(34), #(15)

Aslin, R.N., & Smith, L.B. (1988). Perceptual development. Annual Review of
Psychology, 39, 435-473. #(11)

Astington, J.W., Harris, P.L., & Olson, D.R. (Eds.). (1988). Developing
theories of mind. Cambridge, England: Cambridge University Press. #(38),
#(25)

Atkinson, R.C. (1968). Computer-based instruction and the learning process.
American Psychologist, 23, 225-239. #(26)

Atkinson, R.C. (1974). Teaching children to read using a computer. American
Psychologist, 29, 169-178. #(17) 

Atkinson, R.C., & Shriffin, R.M. (1968). Human memory: A proposed system and
its control processes. In K.W. Spence & J.T. Spence (Eds.), The psychology of
learning and motivation (Vol. 2, pp. 89-195). New York: Academic Press.
#(34), #(11), #(35)

Austin, D.M. (1972). Resident participation: Political mobilization of
organizational cooptation? Public Administration Review, 32, 409-420. #(42)

Austin, G.R., Rogers, B.G., & Walbesser, H.H. (1972). The effectiveness of
summer compensatory education: A review of the research. Review of Education-
al Research, 42, 181-191. #(15), #(32)

Austin, J.L. (1962). How to do things with words. Cambridge, MA: Harvard
University Press. #(30), #(34)

Ausubel, D.P. (1978). In defense of advance organizers: A reply to the
critics. Review of Educational Research, 48, 251-257. #(5)

Ausubel, D.P., Novak, J.D., & Hanesian, H. (1978). Educational psychology: A
cognitive view (2nd ed.). New York: Holt, Rinehart and Winston. #(25), #(34)

Auxter, D. (1971). Motor skill development in the profoundly retarded.
Training School Bulletin, 68, 5-9. #(13), #(21), #(45)

Aveno, A. (1987). A survey of activities engaged in and skills most needed by
adults in community residences. Journal of The Association for Persons with
Severely Handicaps, 12, 125-130. #(27)

Averich, J.A., Carroll, S.J., Donaldson, T.S., Kiesling, H.J., & Pincus, J.
(1972). How effective is schooling: A critical review and synthesis of
research findings. Santa Monica, CA: Rand Corp. #(34), #(42), #(32)

Axelrod, S. (1983). Behavior modification for the classroom teacher (2nd
ed.). New York: McGraw-Hill. #(34), #(3)

Axelrod, S. (1992). Disseminating an effective educational technology.
Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 25, 31-35. #(3), #(9)

Axelrod, S., & Apsche, J. (1983). The effects of punishment on human
behavior. New York: Academic Press. #(14), #(34)

Axelrod, S., Brantner, J.P., & Maddock, T.P. (1978). Overcorrection: A review
and critical analysis. Journal of Special Education, 12, 367-392. #(3),
#(14), #(32)

Axelrod, S., Hall, R.V., & Maxwell, A. (1972). Use of peer attention to
increase study behavior. Behavior Therapy, 3, 349-351. #(3), #(36), #(1)

Axelrod, S., Moyer, L., & Berry, B. (1990). Why teachers do not use behavior
modification procedures. Journal of Educational and Psychological Consulta-
tion, 1, 309-320. #(3), #(9)

Ayllon, T. (1975). Behavior modification in institutional settings. Arizona
Law Review, 17, 3-19. #(3), #(40)

Ayllon, T., & Azrin, N.H. (1966). Punishment as a discriminative stimulus and
conditioned reinforcer with humans. Journal of the Experimental Analysis of
Behavior, 9, 411-419. #(3), #(14)

Ayllon, T., & Azrin, N.H. (1968). Reinforcer sampling: A technique for
increasing the behavior of mental patients. Journal of Applied Behavior
Analysis, 1, 13-20. #(3), #(14) 

Ayllon, T., & Azrin, N.H. (1968). The token economy: A motivational system
for therapy and rehabilitation. New York: Appleton-Century-Crofts. #(3),
#(14), #(34)

Ayllon, T., & Haughton, E. (1962). Control of the behavior of schizophrenic
patients by food. Journal of the Experimental Analysis of Behavior, 5,
343-352. #(3)

Ayllon, T., & Michael, J. (1959). The psychiatric nurse as a behavioral
engineer. Journal of the Experimental Analysis of Behavior, 2, 323-334. #(3)

Ayllon, T., & Roberts, M.D. (1974). Eliminating discipline problems by
strengthening academic performance. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 7,
71-76. #(3)

Ayres, A. (1978). Learning disabilities and the vestibular system. Journal of
Learning Disabilities, 11, 18-29. #(28)

Ayres, A. (1973). Sensory integration and learning disorders. Los Angeles:
Western Psychological Services. #(12), #(34)

Azrin, N.H. (1961). Time-out from positive reinforcement. Science, 133,
382-383. #(14), #(3)

Azrin, N.H. (1977). A strategy for applied research: Learning based but
outcome oriented. American Psychologist, 32, 140-149. #(43)

Azrin, N.H., & Armstrong, P.M. (1973). The "mini-meal" -A method for teaching
eating skills to the profoundly retarded. Mental Retardation, 11(1), 9-13.
#(18), #(21), #(45)

Azrin, N.H., & Foxx, R.M. (1971). A rapid method of toilet training the
institutionalized retarded. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 4, 89-99.
#(21), #(3)

Azrin, N.H., & Foxx, R.M. (1974). Toilet training in less than a day. New
York: Pocket Books. #(3), #(21), #(34)

Azrin, N.H., Gottlieb, L., Hughart, L., Wesolowski, M.D., & Rahn, T. (1975).
Eliminating self-injurious behavior by educative procedures. Behaviour
Research and Therapy, 13, 101-111. #(3), #(21)

Azrin, N.H., & Holz, W.C. (1966). Punishment. In W.K. Honig (Ed.), Operant
behavior: Areas of research and application (pp. 380-447). New York:
Appleton-Century-Crofts. #(3), #(14), #(38)

Azrin, N.H., Hutchinson, R.R., & Hake, D.F. (1966). Extinction induced
aggression. Journal of the Experimental Analysis of Behavior, 9, 191-204.
#(3)

Azrin, N.H., Kaplan, S.J., & Foxx, R.M. (1973). Autism reversal: Eliminating
stereotyped self-stimulation of retarded individuals. American Journal of
Mental Deficiency, 78, 241-248. #(3), #(21), #(2)

Azrin, N. H., & Powell, J. (1969). Behavioral engineering: The use of
response priming to improve prescribed self-medication. Journal of Applied
Behavior Analysis, 2, 39-42. #(3), #(9), #(49)

Azrin, N.H., & Powers, M.A. (1975). Eliminating classroom disturbances of
emotionally disturbed children by positive practice procedures. Behavior
Therapy, 6, 525-534. #(3)

Azrin, N.H., Schaeffer, R.M., & Wesolowski, M.D. (1976). A rapid method of
teaching profoundly retarded persons to dress by a reinforcement-guidance
method. Mental Retardation, 14(6), 29-33. #(3), #(14), #(45)

Azrin, N.H., & Sneed, T.J., & Fox, R.M. (1973). Dry-bed: A rapid method of
eliminating bedwetting (enuresis) of the retarded. Behaviour Research and
Therapy, 11, 427-434. #(3), #(18)

Azrin, N.H., & Wesolowski, M.D. (1974). Theft reversal: An overcorrection
procedure for eliminating stealing by retarded persons. Journal of Applied
Behavior Analysis, 7, 577-581. #(3), #(14)

Babb, H.W., & Kopp, D.G. (1978). Applications of behavior modification in
organizations: A review and critique. Academy of Management Review, 3,
281-292. #(3), #(32), #(42)

Baca, L.M., & Cervantes, H.T. (1989). The bilingual special education
interface (2nd ed.). Columbus, OH: Charles E. Merrill. #(34), #(49)

Bachelder, B.L., & Denny, M.R. (1977). A theory of intelligence: 1. Span and
the complexity of stimulus control. Intelligence, 1, 127-150. #(25), #(6),
#(35)

Bachman, J.A. (1972). Self-injurious behavior: A behavioral analysis. Journal
of Abnormal Psychology, 80, 211-224. #(3), #(21)

Bachman, J.E., & Fuqua, R.W. (1983). Management of inappropriate behaviors of
trainable mentally impaired students using antecedent exercise. Journal of
Applied Behavior Analysis, 16, 477-484. #(3), #(18), #(33)

Bachman, S. (1972). Clinical applications of observational learning imitation
and modeling. Behavior Therapy, 3, 379-397. #(3), #(41)

Bachrach, A.W., Mosley, A.R., Swindle, F.L., & Wood, M.M. (1978). Developmen-
tal therapy for young children with autistic characteristics. Baltimore:
University Park Press. #(3), #(21), #(2), #(34)

Baddeley, A.D. (1978). The trouble with levels: A reexamination of Craik and
Lockhart's framework for memory research. Psychological Review, 85, 139-152.
#(11)

Baer, D.M. (1970). A case for the selective reinforcement of punishment. In
C. Neuringer & J.L. Michael (Eds.), Behavior modification in clinical
psychology (pp. 243-249). New York: Appleton-Century-Crofts. #(3), #(38),
#(14)

Baer, D.M. (1971, October). Let's take another look at punishment. Psychology
Today, pp. 32ff. #(3), #(14)

Baer, D.M. (1975). In the beginning, there was the response. In E. Ramp & G.
Semb (Eds.), Behavior analysis: Areas of research and application (pp.
16-30). Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall. #(3), #(38)

Baer, D.M. (1977). Reviewer's comment: Just because it's reliable doesn't
mean that you can use it. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 10, 117-119.
#(3), #(29)

Baer, D.M. (1977). Perhaps it would be better not to know everything. Journal
of Applied Behavior Analysis, 10, 167-172. #(3)

Baer, D.M. (1978). On the relation between basic and applied research. In
A.C. Catania & T.A. Brigham (Eds.), Handbook of applied behavior analysis:
Social and instructional processes (pp. 11-16). New York: Irvington Press.
#(3), #(29), #(42), #(38)

Baer, D.M. (1978). The behavioral analysis of trouble. In K.E. Allen, V.A. 
Holm, & R.L. Schiefelbusch (Eds.), Early intervention--a team approach (pp. 
57-93). Baltimore: University Park Press. #(38), #(3)

Baer, D.M. (1981). How to plan for generalization. Lawrence, KS: H & H
Enterprises. #(3), #(7), #(34)

Baer, D.M. (1981). A hung jury and a Scottish verdict: "Not proven". Analysis
and Intervention in Developmental Disabilities, 1, 91-97. #(3)

Baer, D.M. (1981). A flight of behavior analysis. The Behavior Analyst, 4,
85-91. #(3)

Baer, D.M. (1982). The role of current pragmatics in the future of general-
ization technology. In R.B. Stuart (Ed.), Adherence, compliance, and
generalization in behavioral medicine. New York: Brunner/Matzel. #(3), #(7),
#(38)

Baer, D.M. (1982). Applied behavioral analysis. In C.T. Wilson & C.M. Franks
(Eds.), Contemporary behavior therapy (pp. 277-309). New York: Guilford
Press. #(38), #(3), #(29)

Baer, D.M. (1984). Does research on self-control need more control? Analysis
and Intervention in Developmental Disabilities, 4, 211-218. #(18)

Baer, D.M. (1984). Future directions? Or, is it useful to ask, "Where did we
go wrong?" before we go? In R.A. Polster & R.F. Dangel (Eds.), Behavioral
parent training: Where it came from and where it's at. New York: Guilford
Press. #(3), #(35), #(38)

Baer, D.M. (1984). We already have multiple jeopardy; why try for unending
jeopardy? In W.L. Heward, T.E. Heron, D.S. Hill, & J. Trap-Porter (Eds.),
Focus on behavior analysis in education (pp. 296-299). Columbus, OH: Charles
E. Merrill. #(3), #(29), #(48)

Baer, D.M. (1986). Advances and gaps in a behavioral methodology of pediatric
medicine. In N.A. Krasnegor, J.D. Arasteh, & M.F. Cataldo (Eds.), Child health
behavior: A behavioral pediatrics perspectives (pp. 54-69). New York: Wiley.
#(38), #(3) 

Baer, D.M. (1986). In application, frequency is not only estimate of the
probability of behavior units. In M. D. Zeiler & T. Thompson (Eds.), Analysis
and integration of behavioral units (pp. 117-136). Hillsdale, NJ: Lawrence
Erlbaum. #(3), #(29), #(38)

Baer, D.M. (1987). Weak contingencies, strong  contingencies, and many be-
haviors to change. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 20, 335-337. #(3),
#(29)

Baer, D.M. (1988). If you know why you're changing a behavior, you'll know
when you've changed it enough. Behavioral Assessment, 10, 219-223. #(3),
#(25), #(29)

Baer, D.M. (1988). Forward. In F.R. Rusch, T. Rose, & C.R. Greenwood,
Behavior analysis in special education (pp. xiii-xv). Englewood Cliffs, NJ:
Prentice-Hall. #(3), #(34)

Baer, D.M. (1991). Tacting "to fault." Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis,
24, 429-431. #(30)

Baer, D.M. (1992). The reform of education is at least a four-legged program.
Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 25, 77-79. #(5), #(15)

Baer, D.M., & Guess, D. (1973). Teaching productive noun suffixes to severely
retarded children. American Journal of Mental Deficiency, 77, 498-505. #(3),
#(21)

Baer, D.M., Peterson, R.F., & Sherman, J.A. (1967). The development of
imitation by reinforcing behavioral similarity to a model. Journal of the
Experimental Analysis of Behavior, 10, 405-416. #(3), #(14)

Baer, D.M., & Rowbury, T., & Baer, D.M. (1973). The development of instruc-
tional control over classroom activities of deviant preschool children.
Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 6, 289-298. #(3), #(9), #(6)

Baer, D.M., & Sherman, J.A. (1964). Reinforcement control of generalized
imitation in young children. Journal of Experimental Child Psychology, 1,
37-49. #(3), #(7), #(14)

Baer, D.M., & Sherman, J.A. (1970). Behavior modification: Clinical and
educational applications. In H.W. Reese & L.P. Lipsitt (Eds.), Experimental
child psychology (pp. 643-672). New York: Academic Press. #(3), #(38)

Baer, D.M., Williams, J.A., Osnes, P.G., & Stokes, T.F. (1985). Generalized
verbal control and correspondence training. Behavior Modification, 9,
477-489. #(30), #(3), #(7)

Baer, D.M., & Wolf, M.M. (1970). The entry into natural communities of
reinforcement. In R. Ulrich, T. Stachnik, & J. Mabry (Eds.), Control of human
behavior (Vol. 1, pp. 319-324). Glenview, IL: Scott, Foresman. #(3), #(7),
#(38), #(14)

Baer, D.M., Wolf, M.M., & Risley, T.R. (1968). Some current dimensions of
applied behavior analysis. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 1, 91-97.
#(3)

Baer, D.M., Wolf, M.M., & Risley, T.R. (1987). Some still-current dimensions
of applied behavior analysis. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 20,
313-327. #(3)

Bagnato, S.J., & Neisworth, J.T. (1980). The intervention efficiency index:
An approach to preschool program accountability. Exceptional Children, 46,
264-269. #(29)

Bagnato, S.J., & Neisworth, J.T. (1981). Linking developmental assessment and
curricula: Prescriptions for early intervention. Rockville, MD: Aspen
Publications. #(5), #(34)

Bagnato, S.J., & Neisworth, J.T. (1981). Developmental assessment of young
exceptional children: Principles and procedures. In S.J. Bagnato & J.T.
Neisworth, Linking developmental assessment and curricula: Prescriptions for
early intervention (pp. 53-106). Rockville, MD: Aspen Publications. #(29),
#(38), #(5)

Bagnato, S.J., & Neisworth, J.T. (1981). Developmental curricula for young
exceptional children: Design and content. In S.J. Bagnato & J.T. Neisworth,
Linking developmental assessment and curricula: Prescriptions for early
intervention (pp. 109-125). Rockville, MD: Aspen Publications. #(5), #(38)

Bagnato, S.J., Neisworth, J.T., & Capone, A. (1986). Curriculum-based
assessment of the young exceptional child: Rationale and review. Topics in
Early Childhood Special Education, 6, 97-110. #(29), #(32)

Bailey, D.B. (1989). Case management in early intervention. Journal of Early
Intervention, 13, 120-134. #(29)

Bailey, D.M., & Wolery, M. (1984). Teaching infants and preschoolers with
handicaps. Columbus, OH: Charles E. Merrill. #(5), #(9), #(34)

Bailey, D.M., & Wolery, M. (1989). Assessing infants and preschoolers with
handicaps. Columbus, OH: Charles E. Merrill. #(34), #(29)

Bailey, J.S. (1981). Wanted: A rational search for the limiting conditions of
habilitation. Analysis and Intervention in Developmental Disabilities, 1,
45-52. #(27)

Bailey, J.S. (1991). Marketing behavior analysis requires different talk. 
Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 24, 445-448. #(3)

Bailey, J.S., & Meyerson, L. (1969). Vibration as a reinforcer with a
profoundly retarded child. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 2, 135-137.
#(3), #(9), #(21), #(14)

Bailey, J.S., & Meyerson, L. (1970). Effect of vibratory stimulation on a
retardate's self-injurious behavior. Psychological Aspects of Disability, 17,
133-137. #(3), #(9), #(21)

Bailey, S.L. (1981). Stimulus overselectivity in learning disabled children.
Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 14, 239-248. #(28), #(6)

Bailey, S.L., Pikryzywinski, J., & Bryant, L.E. (1983). Using water mist to
reduce self-injurious and stereotypic behavior. Applied Research in Mental
Retardation, 4, 229-241. #(19), #(3)

Baillargeon, R. (1987). Object permanence in 3.5- and 4.5-month-old infants.
Developmental Psychology, 23, 21-41. #(13), #(25)

Bain, H.P., & Groseclose, J.R. (1979). The dissemination dilemma and a plan
for uniting disseminators and practitioners. Phi Delta Kappan, 60, 101-103.
#(8)

Baird, A.S., & Goldie, D. (1979). Activities and experience develop spatial
and sensory understanding. Teaching Exceptional Children, 11, 116-119. #(12)

Baird, G., Baron-Cohen, S., Bohman, M., Coleman, M., Frith, U., Gillberg, C.,
Howlin, P., Mesibov, G., Peeters, T., Ritvo, E., Steffenburg, S., Taylor, R.,
Waterhouse, L., Wing, L., & Zapella, M. (1991). Autism is not necessarily a
pervasive developmental disorder (letter). Developmental Medicine, 33,
363-364. #(2), #(29)

Baker, B.L., Brightman, A.J., Heifetz, L.J. et al. (1976). Early self help
skills. Champaign, IL: Research Press. #(18), #(21), #(34)

Baker, B.L., Brightman, A.J., Heifetz, L.J. et al. (1976). Intermediate self-
help skills. Champaign, IL: Research Press. #(18), #(21), #(34)

Baker, B.L., Brightman, A.J., Heifetz, L.J. et al. (1976). Advanced self-help
skills. Champaign, IL: Research Press. #(18), #(21), #(34)

Baker, B.L., Brightman, A.J., & Hinshaw, S.P. (1980). Toward independent
living. Champaign, IL: Research Press. #(27), #(34)

Baker, D. (1971). Reinforcement therapy for behavior problems in severely
retarded children. American Journal of Orthopsychiatry, 41, 124-135. #(3),
#(21), #(14)

Baker, L., Cantwell, D.P., Rutter, M., & Bartak, L. (1976). Language and
autism. In E.R. Ritvo (Ed.), Autism: Diagnosis, current research and
management (pp. 121-149). New York: Spectrum Publications. #(30), #(21),
#(2), #(38)

Balajthy, E. (1987). Computers and reading/language arts: Will we try to cure
the problem with turpentine? Computers in the Schools, 4(1), 67-70. #(16),
#(30)

Baldridge, J.V. (1975). Rules for a Machiavellian change agent: Transforming
the entrenched professional organization. In J.V. Baldridge & T.E. Deal
(Eds.), Managing in educational organizations: Sociological perspectives,
strategies, and case studies (pp. 378-388). Berkeley, CA: McCutchan. #(42),
#(38)

Baldridge, J.V., & Deal, T. (1975). Overview of change processes in
educational organizations. In J.V. Baldridge & T.E. Deal (Eds.), Managing in
educational organizations: Sociological perspectives, strategies, and case
studies (pp. 1-23). Berkeley, CA: McCutchan. #(42), #(38)

Baldwin, J.D., & Baldwin, J.I. (1981). Behavior principles in everyday life.
Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall. #(3)

Ball, T.S. (1971). Itard, Seguin, and Kephart: Sensory education -- A
learning interpretation. Columbus, OH: Charles E. Merrill. #(12), #(13),
#(34)

Ball, T.S., Seric, K., & Payne, L.E. (1971). Long-term retention of self-help
skill training in the profoundly retarded. American Journal of Mental
Deficiency, 76, 387-382. #(3), #(21), #(18)

Balla, D.A. (1981). Relationship of institution size to quality of care: A
review of the literature. American Journal of Mental Deficiency, 81, 117-124.
#(31), #(32)

Balla, D.A., Butterfield, E.C., & Zigler, E. (1974). Effects of institution-
alization on retarded children: A longitudinal cross-institutional investiga-
tion. American Journal of Mental Deficiency, 78, 530-549. #(31)

Ballard, J. (1976). Active federal education laws for exceptional persons. In
F.J. Ballard & M.L. LaVor (Eds.), Public policy and the education of
exceptional children (pp. 133-146). Reston, VA: Council for Exceptional
Children. #(23), #(10), #(38)

Ballard, J. (1977). Public Law 94-142 and Section 504--Understanding what
they are and are not. Reston, VA: Council for Exceptional Children. #(23),
#(10), #(34)

Ballard, J., & Zettel, J. (1977). Public Law 94-142 and Section 504: What
they say about rights and protections. Exceptional Children, 44, 177-184.
#(10)

Ballard, J., & Zettel, J. (1978). Fiscal arrangements of PL 94-142.
Exceptional Children, 44, 333-337. #(10)

Ballard, J., & Zettel, J. (1978). The managerial aspects of Public Law
94-142. Exceptional Children, 44, 457-462. #(42)

Ballard, K.D., & Jenner, L. (1981). Establishing correspondence between
saying and doing as a procedure for increasing the social behaviors of two
elementary school children. The Exceptional Child, 28, 55-63. #(30), #(37)

Balsam, P.D., & Bondy, A.S. (1983). The negative side effects of reward.
Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 16, 283-296. #(3), #(14)

Balsam, P.D., & Bondy, A.S. (1985). Reward induced response covariation: Side
effects revisited. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 18, 79-80. #(3),
#(14)

Baltaxe, C.A.M. (1977). Pragmatic deficits in the language of autistic
adolescents. Journal of Pediatric Psychology, 42, 376-393. #(2), #(30)

Baltaxe, C.A.M., & Simmons, J.Q. (1975). Language in childhood psychosis: A
review. Journal of Speech and Hearing Disorders, 40, 439-458. #(30), #(2),
#(32)

Baltaxe, C.A.M., & Simmons, J.Q. (1983). Communication deficits in the
adolescent and adult autistic. Seminars in Speech and Language, 4(1), 27-42.
#(2), #(30)

Baltes, M.M., & Barton, E.M. (1977). New approaches toward aging: A case of
the operant model. Educational Gerontology, 2, 383-405. #(3), #(46)

Balthazar, E.E. (1973). Balthazar Scales of Adaptive Behavior: II. Scales of
Social Adaptation. Palo Alto, CA: Consulting Psychologists Press. #(44)

Bandura, A. (1962). Social learning through imitation. In M.R. Jones (Ed.), 
Nebraska Symposium on Motivation-1962 (pp. 211-269). Lincoln: University of
Nebraska Press. #(38), #(41)

Bandura, A. (1965). Behavioral modification through modeling procedures. In
L. Krasner & L.P. Ullmann (Eds.), Research in behavior modification (pp.
310-340). New York: Holt, Rinehart and Winston. #(38), #(3), #(41)

Bandura, A. (1969). Principles of behavior modification. New York: Holt,
Rinehart and Winston. #(3), #(34)

Bandura, A. (1971). Psychotherapy based upon modeling principles. In E.
Bergin & S.L. Garfield (Eds.), Handbook of psychotherapy and behavior change
(pp. 653-708). New York: John Wiley. #(38), #(3), #(41)

Bandura, A. (1971). Vicarious and self-reinforcement processes. In R. Glaser
(Ed.), The nature of reinforcement (pp. 228-278). New York: Academic Press.
#(14), #(41)

Bandura, A. (1973). Aggression: A social learning analysis. Englewood Cliffs,
NJ: Prentice-Hall. #(34), #(4)

Bandura, A. (1974). The case of the mistaken dependent variable. Journal of
Abnormal Psychology, 83, 301-303. #(29)

Bandura, A. (1974). Behavior theory and the models of man. American
Psychologist, 29, 859-869. #(3), #(35)

Bandura, A. (1977). Social learning theory. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice
Hall. #(3), #(34)

Bandura, A. (1977). Self-efficacy: Toward a unifying theory of behavior
change. Psychological Review, 84, 191-215. #(3)

Bandura, A. (1986). Social foundations of thought and action: A social
cognitive theory. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall. #(34), #(25)

Bandura, A., & Barab, P.G. (1971). Conditions governing nonreinforced
imitation. Developmental Psychology, 5, 244-255. #(3), #(41), #(14)

Bandura, A., & Kupers, C.J. (1964). Transmission of patterns of self-
reinforcement through modeling. Journal of Abnormal and Social Psychology,
69, 1-9. #(3), #(14)

Bandura, A., & Mahoney, M.J. (1974). Maintenance and transfer of self-
reinforcement functions. Behaviour Research and Therapy, 12, 89-97. #(3),
#(14)

Bandura, A., & Mischel, W. (1965). Modification of self-imposed delay of
reward through exposure to live and symbolic models. Journal of Personality
and Social Psychology, 3, 698-705. #(3)

Bandura, A., Ross, D., & Ross, S. (1967). Vicarious reinforcement and
imitative learning. Journal of Abnormal and Social Psychology, 67, 601-607.
#(14), #(41)

Bane, M.J. (1971). On tuition vouchers: An essay review. Harvard Educational
Review, 41, 79-87. #(15), #(23), #(32)

Bane, M.J., & Jencks, C. (1972). The schools and equal opportunity. Saturday
Review of Education, 55(3), 37-42. #(15), #(23), #(35), #(24)

Banks, J.A., & Banks, C.A.M. (1989). Multicultural education: Issues and
perspectives. Boston: Allyn & Bacon. #(34), #(49)

Banks, M.S., & Salapatek, P. (1981). Infant pattern vision: A new approach
based on the contrast sensitivity function. Journal of Experimental Child
Psychology, 31, 1-45. #(1), #(25)

Bannerman, D.J., Sheldon, J.B., Sherman, J.A., & Harchick, A.E. (1990).
Balancing the right to habilitation with the right to personal liberties: The
rights of people with developmental disabilities to eat too many doughnuts
and take a nap. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 23, 79-89. #(2), #(10)

Banta, T.J. (1971). Montessori and the moderately retarded. In B. Stephens
(Ed.), Training the developmentally young (pp. 351-391). New York: John Day.
#(38), #(12)

Barbe, W.B., & Renzulli, J.S. (Eds.). (1975). Psychology and education of the
gifted (2nd ed.). New York: Irvington Press. #(34), #(50)

Bargh, J.A., & Shul, Y. (1980). On the cognitive benefits of teaching.
Journal of Educational Psychology, 72, 593-604. #(25), #(17)

Barkley, R.A. (1977). A review of stimulant drug research with hyperactive
children. Journal of Child Psychology and Psychiatry, 18, 137-165. #(32),
#(3)

Barkley, R.A. (1981). Hyperactive children: A handbook for diagnosis and
treatment. New York: Guilford Press. #(34), #(4)

Barkley, R.A. (1981). Hyperactivity. In E.J. Mash & L.G. Tertdal (Eds.), Be-
havioral assessment of childhood disorders (pp. 127-184). New York: Guilford 
Press. #(38), #(29)

Barkley, R.A. (1988). Attention deficit disorder with hyperactivity. In E.J.
Mash & L.G. Terdal (Eds.), Behavioral assessment of childhood disorders (2nd
ed., pp. 69-104). New York: Guilford Press. #(38), #(1), #(4)

Barkley, R.A. (1989). Attention-deficit hyperactivity disorder. In E.J. Mash
& R.A. Barkley (Eds.), Treatment of childhood disorders (pp. 39-72). New
York: Guilford Press. #(38), #(1), #(4)

Barkley, R.A. (1990). Attention deficit hyperactivity disorder: A handbook
for diagnosis and treatment. New York: Guilford Press. #(34), #(4)

Barlow, D.H., & Hayes, S.C. (1979). Alternating treatments design: One
strategy for comparing the effects of two treatments in a single subject.
Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 12, 199-210. #(3), #(43), #(48)

Barlow, D.H., Hayes, S.C., & Nelson, R.O. (1984). The scientist practitioner:
Research and accountability in clinical and educational settings. New York:
Pergamon Press. #(29), #(38), #(42)

Barlow, D.H., Hayes, S.C., & Nelson, R.O. (1984). Clinical replication. In
D.H. Barlow, S.C. Hayes, & R. O. Nelson, The scientist practitioner: Research
and accountability in clinical and educational settings (pp. 290-346). New
York: Pergamon Press. #(29), #(38), #(42)

Barlow, D.H., & Hersen, M. (1984). Single case experimental designs:
Strategies for studying behavior change (2nd ed.). New York: Pergamon Press.
#(34), #(3), #(48), #(43)

Barnes, T.M. (1978). Transfer to compounds and components in the discriminat-
ive learning of retardates. Journal of Experimental Child Psychology, 78,
71-79. #(6)

Barnett, S.W. (1968). Definition and classification of mental retardation: A
reply to Zigler, Balla, and Hodapp. American Journal of Mental Deficiency,
91, 111-116. #(21), #(45)

Barney, L.G., & Landis, C.L. (1987). Development differences in communica-
tion. In J.T. Neisworth & S.J. Bagnato (Eds.), The young exceptional child:
Early development and education (pp. 262-296). New York: Macmillan. #(38),
#(30)

Baroff, G.S., & Tate, B.G. (1968). The use of aversive stimulation in the
treatment of chronic self-injurious behavior. Journal of the American Academy
of Child Psychiatry, 7, 454-470. #(3)

Baron, A., Perone, M., & Gazlizio, M. (1991). The experimental analysis of hu-
man behavior: Indispensable, ancillary, or irrrelevant? The Behavior Analyst,
14, 145-155. #(3)

Baron, J., Treiman, R., Wilf, J., & Kellman, P. (1980). Spelling and reading 
by rules. In U. Frith (Ed.), Cognitive processes in spelling (pp. 159-194). 
London: Academic Press. #(38), #(17)

Baron-Cohen, S. (1987). Autism and symbolic play. British Journal of
Developmental Psychology, 5, 139-148. #(2), #(37)

Baron-Cohen, S. (1988). Social and pragmatic deficits in autism: Cognitive or
affective? Journal of Autism and Developmental Disorders, 18, 379-402. #(2),
#(30) 

Baron-Cohen, S. (1989). Are autistic children 'behaviorists?' An examination
of their mentalphysical and appearance-reality distinction. Journal of Autism
and Developmental Disorders, 19, 579-600. #(2), #(25)

Baron-Cohen, S. (1989). The autistic child's theory of mind: A case of
specific developmental delay. Journal of Child Psychology and Psychiatry, 30,
285-298. #(2), #(11)

Baron-Cohen, S. (1991). Do people with autism understand what causes emotion?
Child Development, 62, 385-396. #(2)

Baron-Cohen, S. (1991). The theory of mind deficit in autism: How specific is
it? British Journal of Developmental Psychology, 9, 301-314. #(2), #(25)

Baron-Cohen, S., Leslie, A.M., & Frith, U. (1985). Does the autistic child
have a theory of mind? Cognition, 21, 37-46. #(2), #(25) 

Baron-Cohen, S., Leslie, A.M., & Firth, U. (1986). Mechanical, behavioural
and intentional understanding of picture stories in autistic children.
British Journal of Developmental Psychology, 4, 113-125. #(2), #(17)

Baroody, A.J. (1988). Number-comparison learning by children classified as
mentally retarded. American Journal on Mental Retardation, 92, 461-471.
#(45), #(9)

Barr, M.W. (1913). Mental defectives: Their history, treatment, and training.
Philadelphia: Blakiston. #(34), #(45)

Barr, R.C., & Dreeben, R. (1977). Instruction in classrooms. In L.S. Shulman
(Ed.), Review of research in education (Vol. 5, pp. 89-162). Itasca, IL:
Peacock. #(26), #(38)

Barrera, R.D., & Sulzer-Azraoff, B. (1983). An alternating treatment
comparison of oral and total communication training programs with echolalic
autistic children. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 16, 379-384. #(30),
#(43), #(2)

Barrett, C.L. (1969). Systematic desensitization versus implosive therapy.
Journal of Abnormal Psychology, 74, 587-592. #(3)

Barrett, J.E. (Ed.). (1974). Where behavioral objectives exist. Norton, MA:
Project SPOKE. #(3), #(34)

Barrett, R.P., & Sisson, L.A. (1987). Use of alternating treatments design as
a strategy for empirically determining language training approaches with
mentally retarded children. Research in Developmental Disabilities, 8,
401-412. #(43), #(30)

Barrier, W.C. (1981). Render unto Caesar: An essay on private morals and
public law. University of Arkansas Law Review, 4, 511-541. #(10), #(40)

Barrish, H.H., Saunders, M., & Wolf, M.M. (1969). Good behavior game: Effects
of individual contingencies for group consequences on disruptive behavior in
a classroom. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 2, 119-124. #(3), #(29)

Barron, J., & Sandman, C.A. (1984). Self-injurious behavior and stereotypy in
an institutionalized mentally retarded population. Applied Research in Mental
Retardation, 5, 499-511. #(19), #(45)

Barron, R.W. (1986). Word recognition in early reading: A review of the
direct and indirect access hypothesis. Cognition, 24, 93-119. #(17), #(32)

Barsch, R. (1966). Teacher needs--motor training. In W. Cruickshank (Ed.),
The teacher of brain injured children. Syracuse, NY: Syracuse University
Press. #(12), #(38)

Barsch, R. (1967). Achieving perceptual-motor efficiency (Vol. 1). Seattle,
WA: Special Child Publications. #(12), #(34)

Barsch, R. (1968). Enriching perception and cognition (Vol. 2). Seattle, WA:
Special Child Publications. #(12), #(34)

Bartak, L. (1978). Educational approaches. In M. Rutter & E. Schopler (Eds.),
Autism: A reappraisal of concepts and treatment (pp. 423-438). New York:
Plenum Press. #(21), #(5), #(2), #(38)

Bartak, L., & Rutter, M. (1973). Special educational treatment of autistic
children: A comparative study-1. Design of study and characteristics of
units. Journal of Child Psychology and Psychiatry, 14, 161-179. #(21), #(5),
#(2)

Bartak, L., & Rutter, M. (1976). Differences between mentally retarded and
normally intelligent autistic children. Journal of Autism and Childhood
Schizophrenia, 6, 109-120. #(21), #(2)

Bartel, N.R., Bryen, D., & Keehn, S. (1973). Language comprehension in the
moderately retarded child. Exceptional Children, 39, 375-382. #(45), #(30)

Bartlett, F.C. (1932). Remembering: A study in experimental and social
psychology. Cambridge, England: Cambridge University Press. #(34), #(11)

Bartlett, R.H. (1977). Politics, litigation, and mainstreaming: Special
education's demise? Mental Retardation, 15(1), 24-26. #(10), #(39), #(45)

Bartolucci, G., & Albers, R.J. (1974). Deictic categories in the language of
autistic children. Journal of Autism and Childhood Schizophrenia, 4, 131-141.
#(2), #(30) 

Barton, E.J., & Ascione, F.R. (1979). Sharing in preschool children:
Facilitation, stimulus generalization, response generalization, and
maintenance. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 12, 417-430. #(3), #(7),
#(37)

Barton, E.S. (1970). Inappropriate speech in a severely retarded child: A
case study in language conditioning and generalization. Journal of Applied
Behavior Analysis, 3, 299-309. #(30), #(3), #(7)

Barton, E.S., Guess, D., Garcia, E., & Baer. M. (1970). Improvement of
retardates' mealtime behaviors by timeout procedures using multiple-baseline
techniques. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 26, 24-26. #(3), #(21)

Barton, J., Chassin, L., Presson, C.C., & Sherman, S.J. (1982). Social-image
factors as motivators of smoking initiation in early and middle adolescence.
Child Development, 53, 1499-1511. #(18)

Barton, L.E., Brulle, A.R., & Repp, A.C. (1983). Aversive techniques and the
doctrine of the least restrictive alternative. Exceptional Education
Quarterly, 4(3), 1-8. #(3), #(14)

Bass, R.F. (1987). Computer-assisted observer training. Journal of Applied
Behavior Analysis, 20, 83-88. #(16)

Bateman, B. (1964). Learning disabilities--Yesterday, today, and tomorrow.
Exceptional Children, 31, 167-177. #(28)

Bateman, B. (1967). Three approaches to diagnosis and educational planning
for children with learning disabilities. Academic Therapy, 92, 215-222. #(28)

Bateman, B., & Herr, C.M. (1981). Law and education. In J.M. Kauffman & D.P.
Hallahan (Eds.), Handbook of special education (pp. 330-360). Englewood
Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall. #(10), #(38)

Bateman, S. (1975). Application of Premack's generalization on reinforcement
to modify occupational behavior in two severely retarded individuals.
American Journal of Mental Deficiency, 79, 604-610. #(3), #(14), #(21), #(33)

Bates, B.G., & Trumbull, V.H. (1987). There is software to motivate and teach
the learning handicapped. The Computing Teacher, 14(8), 27-54. #(16), #(21)

Bates, E. (1976). The emergence of symbols. New York: Academic Press. #(34),
#(30)

Bates, E. (1976). Language in context: The acquisition of language. New York:
Academic Press. #(30), #(34)

Bates, E. (1976). Pragmatics and sociolinguistics in child language. In D.
Morehead & A. Morehead (Eds.), Normal and deficient child language (pp.
411-463). Baltimore: University Park Press. #(30), #(38)

Bates, E. (Ed.). (1979). The emergence of symbols: Cognition and communica-
tion in infancy. New York: Academic Press. #(30), #(25), #(34)

Bates, E., Bretherton, I., Shore, D., & McNew, S. (1981). Names, gestures,
and objects: The role of context in the emergence of symbols. In K.E. Nelson
(Ed.), Children's language (Vol. 3). New York: Gardner Press. #(38), #(30)

Bates, E., Camaioni, L., & Volterra, V. (1975). The acquisition of performat-
ives prior to speech. Merrill-Palmer Quarterly, 21, 205-226. #(30)

Bates, J.A. (1979). Extrinsic reward and intrinsic motivation: A review with
implications for the classroom. Review of Educational Research, 49, 557-576.
#(3), #(5), #(32)

Bates, P. (1984, March). New developments in handicapped access. Creative
Computing, pp. 124-126. #(16)

Bates, P., & Hanson, H.B. (1983). Behavioral assessment. In J.L. Matson & S.E.
Bruening (Eds.), Assessing the mentally retarded (pp. 27-63). New York: Grune
& Stratton. #(38), #(45), #(29)

Bates, P., Renzaglia, A., & Wehman, P. (1981). Characteristics of an
appropriate education for severely and profoundly handicapped students.
Education and Training of the Mentally Retarded, 16, 142-149. #(21), #(5),
#(45)

Bateson, M.C. (1975). Mother-infant exchanges: The epigenesis of conversa-
tional interaction. In D. Aaronson & R.W. Rieber (Eds.), Developmental
psycholinguistics and communication disorders. New York: New York Academy of
Sciences. #(30), #(38), #(25)

Batshaw, M.L., & Perret, Y.M. (1981). Heredity: A toss of the dice. In M. L.
Batshaw & Y.M. Perret (Eds.), Children with handicaps: A medical primer (pp.
13-23). Baltimore: Paul H. Brookes. #(21), #(25), #(38)

Batshaw, M.L., & Perret, Y.M. (1986). Children with handicaps: A medical
primer (2nd ed.). Baltimore: Paul H. Brookes. #(21), #(34)

Bauer, A.M., & Shea, T.M. (1986). Hepatitis B: An occupational hazard for
special educators. Journal of The Association for Persons with Severe
Handicaps, 11, 171-175. #(21)

Bauer, B.A. (1977). Tactile-sensitive behavior in hyperactive and nonhyperac-
tive. American Journal of Occupational Therapy, 31, 448-453. #(4)

Bauer, R.H. (1977). Memory processes in children with learning disabilities:
Evidence for deficient rehearsal. Journal of Experimental Child Psychology,
24, 415-430. #(28), #(11)

Baum, W.M. (1974). On two types of deviation from the matching law: Bias and
undermatching. Journal of the Experimental Analysis of Behavior, 22, 231-242.
#(3), #(6), #(14)

Baumgart, D., & Van Walleghem, J. (1986). Staffing strategies for implement-
ing communitybased instruction. Journal of The Association for Persons with
Severe Handicaps, 11(2), 92-102. #(42), #(27)

Baumeister, A.A. (1978). Origins and control of stereotyped movement. In C.E.
Myers (Ed.), Quality of life in severely and profoundly retarded people (pp.
353-384). Washington, DC: American Association on Mental Deficiency. #(20),
#(21), #(38)

Baumeister, A.A. (1981). Mental retardation policy and research: The
unfulfilled promise. American Journal of Mental Deficiency, 85, 449-456.
#(23), #(45)

Baumeister, A.A. (1981). The right to habilitation: What does it mean?
Analysis and Intervention in Developmental Disabilities, 1, 61-74. #(27)

Baumeister, A.A., & Berry, F.M. (1968). Context stimuli in verbal paired-
associate learning by normal children and retardates. The Psychological
Record, 18, 185-190. #(6)

Baumeister, A.A., & Brooks, P.H. (1981). Cognitive deficits in mental
retardation. In J.M. Kauffman & D.P. Hallahan (Eds.), Handbook of special
education (pp. 87-107). Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall. #(21), #(25),
#(38), #(45)

Baumeister, A.A., & Forehand, R. (1973). Stereotyped acts. In N.R. Ellis
(Ed.), International review of research in mental retardation (Vol. 6, pp.
55-92). New York: Academic Press. #(21), #(38), #(45)

Baumeister, A.A., & Forehand, R. (1970). Social facilitation of body rocking
in severely retarded patients. Journal of Clinical Psychology, 26, 303-305.
#(3), #(21)

Baumeister, A.A., & Kellas, G. (1968). Reaction time and mental retardation.
In N.R. Ellis (Ed.), International review of research in mental retardation
(Vol. 3, pp. 163-193). New York: Academic Press. #(38), #(45)

Baumeister, A.A., & MacLean, W.E. (1979). Brain damage and mental retarda-
tion. In N.R. Ellis (Ed.), Handbook of mental deficiency, psychological
theory and research (2nd ed., pp. 197-230). Hillsdale, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum.
#(21), #(38), #(45)

Baumeister, A.A., & MacLean, W.E. (1984). Decceleration of self-injurious and
stereotypic responding by exercise. Applied Research in Mental Retardation, 5,
385-393. #(19), #(20)

Baumeister, A.A., & Rollings, J.P. (1976). Self-injurious behavior. In N. R.
Ellis (Ed.), International review of research in mental retardation (Vol. 8,
pp. 1-34). New York: Academic Press. #(19), #(38), #(45)


Bauman, L.J., Stein, R.E.K., Ireys, H.T. (1991). Reinventing fidelity: The
transfer of social technology among settings. American Journal of Community
Psychology, 19, 619-639. #(7)

Baumgart, D., Brown, L., Pumpian, I., Nisbet, J., Ford, A., Sweet, M.,
Messina, R., & Schroeder, J. (1982). Principle of partial participation and
individualized adaptations in educational programs for severely handicapped
students. Journal of The Association for Persons with Severe Handicaps, 7,
17-27. #(15), #(38)

Baumgart, D., Johnson, J., & Helmstetter, E. (1990). Augmentative and
alternative communication systems for persons with moderate and severe
disabilities. Baltimore: Paul H. Brookes. #(34), #(30)

Baumrind, D. (1964). Some thoughts on ethics of research: After reading
Milgrim's "Behavioral study of obedience." American Psychologist, 19,
421-423. #(3), #(14), #(29)

Bayley, N. (1955). On the growth of intelligence. American Psychologist, 10,
805-818. #(25)

Bayley, N. (1969). Bayley Scales of Infant Development. New York: Psychologi-
cal Corporation. #(44)

Beal, C.R. (1985). Development of knowledge about the use of cues to aid
prospective retrieval. Child Development, 56, 631-642. #(11), #(9)

Beal, E. (1977). Know and protect your child's rights: A parent's guide.
Amicus, 2, 31-38. #(10)

Bean, C., Folkins, J.W., & Cooper, W.E. (1989). The effects of emphasis on
passage comprehension. Journal of Speech and Hearing Research, 32, 707-712.
#(30)

Beck, L.J. (1965). The metaphysics of Descartes. Oxford: Clarendon Press.
#(34), #(35) 

Beck, R. (1977). Interdisciplinary model: Planning distribution and ancillary
input to classrooms for the severely/profoundly handicapped. In E. Sontag
(Ed.), Educational Programming for the severely/profoundly handicapped (pp.
397-404). Reston, VA: Council for Exceptional Children. #(5), #(21), #(38)


Becker, H.J. (1986). The effects of computer use on children's learning: 
Limitations of past research and a working model for new research. Peabody
Journal of Education, 64(1), 81-110. #(16), #(15), #(5)

Becker, H.J. (1986). Instructional uses of school computers. Baltimore: The
Johns Hopkins University Press. #(16), #(34)

Becker, H.J. (1988). The impact of computer use on children's learning.
Baltimore: The Johns Hopkins University Press. #(16), #(34)

Becker, H.J., & Sterling, C.W. (1986). Equity in school computer use:
National data and neglected considerations. Journal of Educational Computing
Research, 3, 289-311. #(16)

Becker, H.S. (Ed.). (1964). The other side: Perspectives on deviance. New
York: The Free Press. #(15), #(35), #(39)

Becker, H.S. (1970). Problems of inference and proof in participant
observation. In H.S. Becker (Ed.), Sociological work: Method and substance
(pp. 25-38). New Brunswick, NJ: Transaction Books. #(38), #(29)

Becker, H.S. (1990). Generalizing from case studies. In E.W. Eisner & A.
Peshkin (Eds.), Qualitative research in education: The continuing debate (pp.
233-242). New York: Teachers College Press. #(38), #(48), #(7)

Becker, W.C. (1971). Parents are teachers. Champaign, IL: Research Press.
#(3), #(34)

Becker, W.C. (Ed.). (1988). Direct instruction. Education and Treatment of
Children, 11, 297-402. #(3), #(9)

Becker, W.C., & Carnine, D.W. (1981). Direct instruction: A behavior theory
model for comprehensive educational intervention with the disadvantaged. In
S.W. Bijou & R. Ruiz (Eds.), Behavior modification: Contributions to
education (pp. 145-210). Hillsdale, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum. #(9), #(38)

Becker, W.C., & Engelmann, S. (1978). Systems for basic instruction: Theory
and application. In A.C. Catania & T.A. Brigham (Eds.), Handbook of applied
behavior analysis: Social and instructional processes (pp. 325-377). New
York: Irvington Press. #(34), #(5)

Becker, W.C., Engelmann, S., & Thomas, D.R. (1971). Teaching: A course in
applied psychology. Chicago: Science Research Associates. #(9), #(3), #(34)

Becker, W.C., Engelmann, S., & Thomas, D.R. (1971). A general model for
teaching tasks. In W.C. Becker, S. Engelmann, & D.R. Thomas, Teaching: A
course in applied psychology (pp. 359-364). Chicago: Science Research
Associates. #(9), #(7), #(38)

Becker, W.C., Engelmann, S., & Thomas, D.R. (1975). Teaching 2: Cognitive
learning and instruction. Chicago: Science Research Associates. #(9), #(25)

Becker, W.C., Engelmann, S., & Thomas, D.R. (1975). A behavioral model of
teaching. In W.C. Becker, S. Engelmann, & D.R. Thomas, Teaching 2: Cognitive
learning and instruction (pp. 20-31). Chicago: Science Research Associates.
#(9), #(3), #(38)

Becker, W.C., Engelmann, S., & Thomas, D.R. (1975). Basic requirements for
teaching concepts. In W.C. Becker, S. Engelmann, & D.R. Thomas, Teaching 2:
Cognitive learning and instruction (pp. 57-75). Chicago: Science Research
Associates. #(9), #(25)

Becker, W.C., Engelmann, S., & Thomas, D.R. (1975). Basic steps in programim-
g. In W.C. Becker, S. Engelmann, & D.R. Thomas, Teaching 2: Cognitive
learning and instruction (pp. 159-173). Chicago: Science Research Associates.
#(9), #(38)

Becker, W.C., Engelmann, S., & Thomas, D.R. (1975). A comparison of Piaget's
cognitivedevelopment theory with behavior therapy. In W.C. Becker, S.
Engelmann, & D.R. Thomas, Teaching 2: Cognitive learning and instruction (pp.
215-231). Chicago: Science Research Associates. #(3), #(25), #(13), #(38)

Becker, S., & Glidden, L.M. (1979). Imitation in EMR boys: Model competency
and age. American Journal of Mental Deficiency, 83, 360-366. #(3), #(41)

Becker, W.C., Madsen, C.H., Arnold, C.R., & Thomas, D.R. (1967). The
contingent use of teacher attention and praise in reducing classroom behavior
problems. Journal of Special Education, 1, 287-307. #(1), #(3)

Bedrosian, J.L. (1985). An approach to developing conversational competence.
In D.N. Ripich & F.M. Spinelli (Eds.), School discourse problems (pp.
231-255). London: Taylor & Francis.

Beery, K.E. (1974). Mainstreaming: A problem and an opportunity for general
education. Focus on Exceptional Children, 6(5), 1-18. #(27), #(7), #(39)

Begab, M.J. (1981). Issues in the prevention of psychosocial retardation. In
M.J. Begab, H.C. Hayward, & H.L. Garber (Eds.), Psychosocial influences in
retarded performance: Issues and theories in development (Vol. 1, pp. 3-28).
Baltimore: University Park Press. #(38), #(45)

Begab, M.J., Hayward, H.C., & Garber, H.L. (Eds.). (1981). Psychosocial
influences in retarded performance: Issues and theories in development.
Baltimore: University Park Press. #(34), #(45)

Behar, L.B., & Springfield, S.A. (1974). A behavior rating scale for the
preschool child. Developmental Psychology, 10, 601-610. #(3), #(44)

Behrmann, M. (Ed.). (1984). Handbook of microcomputers in special education.
San Diego: College-Hill Press. #(16), #(34)

Beilin, H. (1992). Piaget's enduring contribution to developmental psycholo-
gy. Developmental Psychology, 28, 191-204. #(13)

Beisler, J.M., & Tsai, L. (1983). A pragmatic approach to increase expressive
language skills in young autistic children. Journal of Autism and Developmen-
tal Disorders, 13, 287-303. #(2), #(30)

Beitchman, J.H., Hood, J., Rochon, J., & Peterson, M. (1989). Empirical
classification of speech/language impairment in children II. Behavioral
characteristics. Journal of the American Academy of Child and Adolescent
Psychiatry, 28, 118-123. #(30)

Beitchman, J.H., & Peterson, M. (1986). Disorders of the language, communica-
tion, and behavior in mentally retarded children. The Psychiatric Clinics of
North America, 9, 689-698. #(45), #(30)

Bekerian, D.A., & Baddeley, A.D. (1980). Saturation advertising and the
repetition effect. Journal of Verbal Learning and Verbal Behavior, 19, 17-25.
#(3)

Belanger, M., Ellis, A.B., Suppes, P., Bennis, W., Glaser, R., Becker, J.W.,
Oettinger, A., & Marks, S. (1968). Educational technology: New myths and old
realities--Discussion. Harvard Educational Review, 38, 718-751. #(16), #(15)

Bell, D. (1975). On meritocracy and equality. In F.A.J. Ianni (Ed.), Conflict
and change in education (pp. 39-50). Glenview, IL: Scott, Foresman. #(23),
#(38), #(24)

Bell, J., & Richmond, G. (1984). Improving profoundly mentally retarded
adults' performance on a position discrimination. American Journal of Mental
Deficiency, 89, 180-186. #(6), #(21), #(45)

Bell, M.E. (1985). The role of instructional theories in the evaluation of
microcomputer courseware. Educational Technology, 25(3), 36-40. #(16), #(29)

Bellack, A.S., & Hersen, M. (1970). Behavior Modification: An introductory
textbook. Baltimore: Williams & Wilkens. #(3), #(34)

Bellack, A.S., & Hersen, M. (1979). Research and practice in social skills 
training. New York: Plenum. #(34), #(37)

Bellack, A.S., & Hersen, M. (1988). Behavioral assessment (3rd ed.). New
York: Pergamon Press. #(3), #(34), #(29)

Bellamy, G.T., Bourbeau, P.E., & Sowers, J. (1983). Work and work-related
services: Postschool options. In M.E. Snell (Ed.), Systematic instruction of
the moderately and severely handicapped (2nd ed., pp. 490-502). Columbus, OH:
Charles E. Merrill. #(33), #(38)

Bellamy, G.T., & Buttars, K.L. (1975). Teaching trainable level retarded
students to count money: Toward personalized independence through academic
instruction. Education and Training of the Mentally Retarded, 10, 18-26.
#(33)

Bellamy, G.T., & Horner, R.H. (1987). Beyond high school: Residential and
employment options after graduation. In M.E. Snell (Ed.), Systematic
instruction of persons with severe handicaps (3rd ed., pp. 491-510).
Columbus, OH: Charles E. Merrill. #(38), #(33)

Bellamy, G.T., Horner, R.H., & Inman, D.P. (1979). Vocational habilitation of
severely retarded adults: A direct service technology. Baltimore: University
Park Press. #(33), #(34), #(21)

Bellamy, G.T., Rhodes, L.E., & Albin, J.M. (1986). Supported employment. In
W.E. Kiernan & J.A. Stark (Eds.), Pathways to employment for adults with
developmental disabilities (pp. 129-138). Baltimore: Paul H. Brookes. #(27),
#(33), #(38)

Bellamy, G.T., Rhodes, L.E., Bourbeau, P.E., & Mank, D.M. (1986). Mental
retardation services in sheltered workshops and day activity programs:
Consumer benefits and policy alternatives. In F.R. Rusch (Ed.), Competitive
employment issues and strategies (pp. 257-271). Baltimore: Paul H. Brookes.
#(33), #(38)

Bellamy, G.T., Rhodes, L.E., Mank. D.M., & Albin, J.M. (1988). Supported
employment: A community implementation guide. Baltimore: Paul H. Brookes.
#(33)

Bellamy, G.T., Rose, H., Wilson, D.J., & Clarke, J.Y. (1982). Strategies for
vocational preparation. In B. Wilcox & G.T. Bellamy (Eds.), Design of high
school programs for severely handicapped students (pp. 139-152). Baltimore:
Paul H. Brookes. #(27), #(33), #(38), #(21)

Bellamy, G.T., Sheehan, M., Horner, R., & Boles, S. (1980). Community
programs for severely handicapped adults: An analysis. Journal of The
Association for Persons with Severe Handicaps, 5, 307-324. #(21), #(27)

Belmont, J.M. (1966). Long-term memory in mental retardation. In N.R. Ellis
(Ed.), International review of research in mental retardation (Vol. 1, pp.
219-255). New York: Academic Press. #(38), #(11)

Belmont, J.M., & Butterfield, E.C. (1969). The relationship of short-term
memory to development and intelligence. In L.P. Lipsitt & H.W. Reese (Eds.),
Advances in child development and behavior (Vol. 4, pp. 29-82). New York:
Academic Press. #(45), #(11)

Belmont, J.M., & Butterfield, E.C. (1977). The instructional approach to dev-
elopmental cognitive research. In R.V. Kail, Jr. & J. W. Hagen (Eds.), Per-
spectives on the development of memory and cognition (pp. 437-481). Hills-
dale, NJ: Erlbaum. #(38), #(25), #(11)

Belmore, K., & Brown, L. (1978). A job skill inventory strategy for use in
public school vocational training program for severely handicapped potential
workers. In N. G. Haring & D. Bricker (Eds.), Teaching the severely
handicapped (Vol. 3, pp. 223-262). Seattle, WA: American Association for the
Education of the Severely and Profoundly Handicapped. #(38), #(21), #(33) 

Bem, D.J. (1967). Self-perception: An alternative interpretation of cognitive
dissonance phenomena. Psychological Review, 74, 183-200. #(35), #(25)

Bemporad, J.R., Ratey, J.J., & O'Driscoll, G. (1987). Autism and emotion: An
ethological theory. American Journal of Orthopsychiatry, 57, 477-483. #(2),
#(25), #(35) 

Bemporad, J.R., & Wilson, A. (1978). A developmental approach to depression
in childhood and adolescence. Journal of the American Academy of Psychoanaly-
sis, 6, 325-352. #(2)

Bender, M., & Valletutti, P.J. (1976). Teaching the moderately and severely
handicapped (Vols. 1 & 2). Baltimore: University Park Press. #(5), #(34),
#(21)

Bennett, M. (1981). Reviewing an individual habilitation plan: A lawyer's
guide. University of Arkansas Law Review, 4, 467-541. #(9), #(40)

Bennett, R.E. (1982). Applications of microcomputer technology to special
education. Exceptional Children, 49, 106-113. #(16) 

Bennett, S.N. (1978). Recent research on teaching: A dream, a belief, and a
model. British Journal of Educational Psychology, 48, 127-147. #(26), #(15)

Bennis, W.G. (1963). A new role for the behavioral sciences: Effecting
organizational change. Administrative Science Quarterly, 8, 125-165. #(42)

Bennis, W.G. (1972, November). Who sank the yellow submarine? Eleven ways to
avoid major mistakes in taking over a university campus and making great
changes. Psychology Today, pp. 112-120. #(42), #(8)

Bennis, W.G., Benne, K.D., Chin, R., & Corey, K.E. (Eds.). (1976). The
planning of change (3rd ed.). New York: Holt, Rinehart and Winston. #(23),
#(42), #(34)

Bensberg, G.J. (Ed.). (1965). Teaching the mentally retarded: A handbook for
ward personnel. Atlanta, GA: Southern Regional Education Board. #(3), #(9),
#(21), #(34), #(45), #(42)

Bensberg, G.J., Colwell, C.N., & Cassel, R.H. (1965). Teaching the profoundly
retarded self-help activities by behavior shaping techniques. American
Journal of Mental Deficiency, 69, 674-679. #(3), #(9)

Bereiter, C. (1972). Schools without education. Harvard Educational Review,
42, 390-413. #(5)

Berg, W.K., Wacker, D.P., & Flynn, T.H. (1990). Teaching generalization and
maintenance of work behavior. In F.R. Rusch (Ed.), Supported Employment:
Models, methods, and issues (pp. 145-160). Sycamore, IL: Sycamore Publishing
Co. #(33), #(38)

Berger, K. (1967). The most common words used in conversation. Journal of
Communication Disorders, 1, 201-214. #(30)

Berk, R.A. (1979). Generalizability of behavioral observations: A clarifica-
tion of interobserver agreement and interobserver reliability. Journal of
Mental Deficiency, 83, 460-472. #(3), #(7), #(29)

Berk, R.A. (1980). Criterion-referenced measurement: The state of the art.
Baltimore: The Johns Hopkins University Press. #(34), #(29)

Berk, R.A. (Ed.). (1981). Educational evaluation methodology: The state of
the art. Baltimore: The Johns Hopkins University Press. #(29), #(34)

Berkman, K.A., & Meyer, L.H. (1988). Alternative strategies and multiple
outcomes in the remediation of severe self-injury: Going "all out" nonaversi-
vely. Journal of the Association for Persons with Severe Handicaps, 13,
76-86. #(14), #(19), #(21)

Berkson, G. (1964). Stereotyped movements of mental deficiencies: V. Ward
behavior and its relation to an experimental task. American Journal of Mental
Deficiency, 69, 253-264. #(21)

Berkson, G. (1968). Development of abnormal stereotypes. Developmental
Psychology, 1, 118-132. #(21)

Berkson, G. (1983). Repetitive stereotyped acts. American Journal of Mental
Deficiency, 88, 239-246. #(21)

Berkson, G. (1988). All people have personal assets. Mental Retardation, 26,
71-73. #(21)

Berkson, G., & Davenport, R.K. (1962). Stereotyped movements in mental
defectives: I. Initial survey. American Journal of Mental Deficiency, 66,
849-852. #(21)

Berkson, G., & Landesman-Dwyer, S. (1977). Behavioral research on severe and
profound mental retardation (1955-1974). American Journal of Mental
Deficiency, 81, 428-454. #(3), #(21), #(29), #(42), #(45)

Berkson, G., & Mason, W. (1963). Stereotyped movements in mental defectives:
III. Situation effects. American Journal of Mental Deficiency, 68, 409-412.
#(21)

Berler, E.S., Gross, A.M., & Drabman, R.S. (1982). Social skills training
with children: Proceed with caution. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis,
15, 41-53. #(37)

Berliner, D.C. (1976). Impediments to the study of teacher effectiveness.
Journal of Teacher Education, 27(1), 5-13. #(42)

Berliner, D.C., & Gage, N.L. (1976). The psychology of teaching methods:
Historical introduction. In N.L. Gage (Ed.), The seventy-fifth yearbook of
the national society for the study of education (pp. 1-20). Chicago: The
University of Chicago Press. #(9), #(38)

Berliss, J., Borden, P., & Vanderheiden, G. (1989). Trace resource book:
Assistive technolo-gies for communication, control, and computer access.
Madison, WI: Trace Research and Development Center. #(34), #(30), #(16)

Berlyne, D.E. (1960). Conflict, arousal, and curiosity. New York: McGraw-
Hill. #(34), #(25)

Berlyne, D.E. (1958). The influence of complexity and novelty in visual
figures on orienting responses. Journal of Experimental Psychology, 55,
289-296. #(3), #(12)

Berlyne, D.E. (1970). Attention as a problem in behavior theory. In D.I.
Mostofsky (Ed.), Attention: Contemporary theory and analysis (pp. 25-49). New
York: Appleton-Century-Crofts. #(1), #(38)

Berman, J.S., Miller, R.C., & Massman, R.J. (1985). Cognitive therapy versus
systematic desensitization: Is one treatment superior? Psychological
Bulletin, 97, 451-461. #(3)

Berman, M.L. (1973). Instructions and behavior change: A taxonomy. Exception-
al Children, 39, 644-650. #(5)


Berman, P. (1978). The study of macroand micro-implementation. Public Policy,
26, 157-184. #(8), #(23)

Berman, P., & McLaughlin, M.W. (1976). Implementation of education innova-
tion. The Educational Forum, 40, 345-370. #(8)

Bernard-Opitz, V. (1982). Pragmatic analysis of the communicative behavior of
an autistic child. Journal of Speech and Hearing Disorders, 47, 99-109. #(30,
#(2)

Berne, E. (1961). Transactional analysis in psychotherapy. New York: Grove
Press. #(34), #(18), #(3), #(37)

Berne, E. (1964). Games people play. New York: Grove Press. #(34), #(18),
#(37)

Berne, E. (1972). What do you say after you say hello? New York: Grove Press.
#(34), #(18), #(37)

Berni, R., Dressler, J., & Baxter, J.C. (1971). Reinforcing behavior.
American Journal of Nursing, 1, 2180-2183. #(3), #(14)

Berninger, V.W. (1986). Comparison of two microcomputer-assisted methods of
teaching word decoding and encoding to non-vocal, non-writing and learning
disabled students. Programmed Learning and Educational Technology, 23,
124-129. #(16), #(28)

Bernstein, I.N., & Freeman, H.E. (1975). Academic and entrepreneurial
research. New York: Academic Press. #(43), #(34)

Berovici, S.M. (1983). Barriers to normalization: The restrictive management
of retarded persons. Baltimore: University Park Press. #(34), #(39)

Bettelheim, B. (1959). Joey: A "mechanical boy." Scientific American, 200,
116-127. #(2)

Bettelheim, B. (1967). The empty fortress: Infantile autism and the birth of
self. New York: Free Press. #(21), #(34)

Beukelman, D.R., & Mirenda, P. Augmentative and alternative communication:
Management of severe communication disorders in children and adults.
Baltimore: Paul Brookes. #(34), #(30)

Beukelman, D.R., & Yorkston, K. (1989). Augmentative and alternative
communication application for persons with severe acquired communication
disorders: An introduction. Augmentative and Alternative Communication, 5,
42-48. #(30)

Beyer, B.K. (1984). Improving thinking skills--Practical approaches. Phi
Delta Kappan, 65, 556-560. #(9)

Beyer, W.H. (1966). Handbook of tables for probability and statistics.
Cleveland, OH: The Chemical Rubber Company. #(22)

Bickel, W.E., & Bickel, D.D. (1986). Effective schools, classrooms, and
instruction: Implications for special education. Exceptional Children, 52,
489-500. #(20), #(9)

Bickel, W.K., Stella, M.E., & Etzel, B.C. (1984). A reevaluation of stimulus
overselectivity: Restricted stimulus control or stimulus control hierarchies.
Journal of Autism and Developmental Disorders, 14, 137-157. #(6)

Bidwell, C.E. (1965). The schools as a formal organization. In J.G. March
(Ed.), Handbook of organizations (pp. 972-1022). Chicago: Rand McNally.
#(38), #(42)

Biederman, G.B., & Colotla, V.A. (1971). Stimulus function in errorless
simultaneous discrimination. Perceptual and Motor Skills, 33, 759-764. #(6)

Bigge, J.L. (1991). Teaching individuals with physical and multiple
disabilities (3rd ed.). Columbus, OH: Charles E. Merrill. #(34), #(21)

Bijou, S.W. (1955). A systematic approach to an experimental analysis of
young children. Child Development, 26, 161-168. #(3)

Bijou, S.W. (1957). Methodology for an experimental analysis of child
behavior. Psychological Reports, 3, 243-250. #(3)

Bijou, S.W. (1958). A child study laboratory on wheels. Child Development,
29, 425-428. #(3)

Bijou, S.W. (1963). Theory and research in mental (developmental) retarda-
tion. Psychological Record, 13, 95-110. #(3)

Bijou, S.W. (1966). A functional analysis of retarded development. In N.R.
Ellis (Ed.), International review of research in mental retardation (Vol. 1,
pp. 1-19). New York: Academic Press. #(3), #(28), #(38), #(45)

Bijou, S.W. (1970). What psychology has to offer education--Now. Journal of
Applied Behavior Analysis, 3, 65-71. #(3)

Bijou, S.W. (1972). The technology of teaching young handicapped children. In
S.W. Bijou & E. Ribes-Inesta (Eds.), Behavior modification: Issues and
extensions (pp. 27-42). New York: Academic Press. #(3), #(9), #(38)

Bijou, S.W. (1975). Development in the preschool years: A functional
analysis. American Psychologist, 30, 829-837. #(3), #(25)

Bijou, S.W. (1977). Child development: The basic stage of early childhood.
Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall. #(3), #(25), #(34), #(13)

Bijou, S.W. (1977). Practical implications of an interactional model of child
development. Exceptional Children, 44, 6-18. #(3), #(25)

Bijou, S.W. (1979). Some clarifications on the meaning of a behavior analysis
of child development. Psychological Record, 29, 3-13. #(3), #(25)

Bijou, S.W. (1981). Behavioral teaching of young handicapped children:
Problems of application and implementation. In S.W. Bijou & R. Ruiz (Eds.),
Behavior modification: Contributions to education (pp. 97-110). Hillsdale,
NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum. #(3), #(8), #(38)

Bijou, S.W., & Baer, D.M. (1961). Child development I: A systematic and
empirical theory. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall. #(25), #(34)

Bijou, S.W., & Baer, D.M. (Eds.). (1967). Child development: Readings in
experimental analysis. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall. #(25), #(34)

Bijou, S.W., & Baer, D.M. (1966). Operant methods in child behavior and
development. In W.K. Honig (Ed.), Operant behavior: Areas of research and
application (pp. 718-789). New York: Appleton-Century-Crofts. #(38), #(3)

Bijou, S.W., & Baer, D.M. (1967). Operant methods in child behavior and
development. In S.W. Bijou & D.M. Baer (Eds.), Child development: Readings in
experimental analysis. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall. #(38), #(3)

Bijou, S.W., & Baer, D.M. (1978). Child development: A behavior analysis.
Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall. #(3), #(25), #(34)

Bijou, S.W., Birnbrauer, J.S., Kidder, J.D., & Tague, C. (1966). Programmed
instruction as an approach to teaching reading, writing, and arithmetic to
retarded children. Psychological Record, 16, 505-522. #(3), #(9), #(16)

Bijou, S.W., & Dunitz-Johnson, E. (1981). Interbehavior analysis of
developmental disabilities. Psychological Record, 31, 305-329. #(3), #(48)

Bijou, S.W., & Peterson, R.F., & Ault, M.H. (1968). A method to integrate
descriptive and experimental field studies at the level of data and empirical
concepts. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 1, 175-191. #(3), #(29)

Bijou, S.W., & Ruiz, R. (Eds.). (1981). Behavior modification: Contributions
to education. Hillsdale, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum. #(3), #(8), #(34)

Biklen, D. (1976). Advocacy comes of age. Exceptional Children, 42, 308-313.
#(23)

Biklen, D. (1985). Achieving the complete school: Strategies for effective
mainstreaming. New York: Teachers College Press. #(34), #(39)

Biklen, D. (1988). The myth of clinical judgment. Journal of Social Issues,
44, 127-140. #(29)

Biklen, D. (1990). Communication unbound: Autism and praxis. Harvard
Educational Review, 60, 291-314. #(30), #(2)

Biklen, D. (1992). Autism orthodoxy versus free speech: A reply to Cummins
and Prior. Harvard Educational Review, 62, 242-256. #(30)

Biklen, D. (1992). Typing to talk: Facilitated communication. American
Journal of SpeechLanguage Pathology, 1(2), 15-17, 21-22. #(25), #(2)

Biklen, D. (1992). Facilitated communication: Biklen responds. American
Journal of SpeechLanguage Pathology, 1(2), 21-22. #(30), #(2)

Biklen, D. (1992, Summer). Questions and answers on facilitated communica-
tion. The Advocate, pp. 16-18.

Biklen, D., Corrigan, C., & Quick, D. (1989). Beyond obligation. In D. Lipsky
& A. Gartner (Eds.), Beyond special education. Baltimore: Paul H. Brookes.
#(30), #(38)

Biklen, D., Morton, M.W., Gold, D., Berrigan, C., & Swaminathan, S. (1992).
Facilitated communication: Implications for individuals with autism. Topics
in Language Disorders, 12(4), 1-28. #(30)

Biklen, D., Morton, M.W., Saha, S.N., Duncan, J., Gold, D., Hardardottir, M.,
Karna, E., O'Connor, S., & Rao, S. (1991). "I AMN NOT A UTISTIVIC OH THJE
TYP" ("I'm not autistic on the typewriter"). Disability, Handicap and
Society, 6, 161-180. #(30)

Biklen, D., & Schubert, A. (1991). New words: The communication of students
with autism. Remedial and Special Education, 12(6), 46-57. #(30), #(2)

Billings, A.G., & Moos, R.H. (1982). Psychosocial theory and research on
depression: An integrative framework and review. Clinical Psychology Review,
2, 213-237. #(2), #(48), #(32)

Billings, D.C., & Wasik, B.H. (1985). Self-instructional training with pre-
schoolers: An attempt to replicate. Journal of Applied Behavior, 18, 61-67.
#(3)

Billingsley, F. (1984). What are the generalized outcomes? Journal of The
Association for Persons with Severe Handicaps, 9, 186-192. #(7)

Billingsley, F., White, O.R., & Munson, R. (1980). Procedural reliability: A
rationale and an example. Behavioral Assessment, 2, 229-241. #(29)

Birch, C. (1966). Verbal control of nonverbal behavior. Journal of Experimen-
tal Child Psychology, 4, 266-275. #(3), #(30)

Birch, J., & Reynolds, M. (1982). Special education as a profession.
Exceptional Education Quarterly, 2(4), 1-13. #(26), #(5)

Birnbrauer, J.S. (1968). Generalization of punishment effects--A case study.
Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 1, 201-211. #(3), #(7), #(14)

Birnbrauer, J.S. (1979). Applied behavior analysis, service, and the
acquisition of knowledge. The Behavior Analyst, 2, 15-21. #(3)

Birnbrauer, J.S., Peterson, C.P., & Solnick, J.V. (1974). The design and
interpretation of studies of single subjects. American Journal of Mental
Deficiency, 79, 191-203. #(3), #(29), #(42), #(48)

Bittle, R., & Hake, D.F. (1977). A multielement design model for component
analysis and cross-setting assessment of a treatment package. Behavior
Therapy, 8, 906-914. #(43), #(48)

Bjorklund, D.F. (1987). How age changes in knowledge base contribute to the
development of children's memory: An interpretive review. Developmental
Review, 7, 93-130. #(11), #(25), #(32)

Bjorklund, D.F., & Green, B.L. (1992). The adaptive nature of cognitive
immaturity. American Psychologist, 47, 46-54. #(25)

Blacher, J., & Meyers, C.E. ( 1983). A review of attachment formation and
disorder of handicapped children. American Journal of Mental Deficiency, 87,
359-371. #(21), #(32)

Blachman, B.A. (1984). Language analysis skills and early reading acquisi-
tion. In G.P. Wallach & K.G. Butler (Eds.), Language learning disabilities in
school-age children (pp. 271-287). Baltimore: Williams & Wilkins. #(30),
#(38), #(28)

Blackhurst, A.E. (1974). Some practical considerations in implementing
competency-based special education training programs. In J.J. Creamer & J.T.
Gilmore (Eds.), Design for competence based education in special education
(pp. 34-72). Syracuse, NY: Syracuse University Press. #(8), #(38)

Blackhurst, A.E. (1977). Competency-based special education personnel
preparation. In R.D. Kneedler & S.G. Tarver (Eds.), Changing perspectives in
special education (pp. 156-182). Columbus, OH: Charles E. Merrill. #(38),
#(42)

Blackhurst, A.E., Cross, D.P., Nelson, C.M., & Tawney, J.W. (1973).
Approximating noncategorical teacher education. Exceptional Children, 39,
284-288. #(27)

Blackman, D.E., & Lejeune, H. (Eds.). (1990). Behavior analysis in theory and
practice: Contributions and controversies. Hillsdale, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum.
#(38), #(6), #(21)

Blackstone, S. (1989). Visual scanning: What's it all about? Visual scanning:
Training approaches. Augmentative Communication News, 2(1), 1-6, 8. #(30),
#(6)

Blackstone, S., Cassatt-James, E., & Bruskin, D., (Eds.). (1988). Augmentati-
ve communication: Implementation strategies. Rockville, MD: American Speech-
Language-Hearing Association. #(30), #(16)

Blake, R.R., & Mouton, J.S. (1976). Strategies of consultation. In W.G.
Bennis, K.D. Benne, R. Chin, & K.E. Corey (Eds.), The planning of change (3rd
ed., pp. 48-68). New York: Holt, Rinehart and Winston. #(42), #(38)

Blanchard, R. (1975). The effect of Son observing behavior. Language and
Motivation, 6, 1-10. #(6)

Blank, M., & Franklin, E. (1980). Dialogue with preschoolers: A cognitively-
based system of assessment. Applied Psycholinguistics, 1, 127-150. #(30),
#(29)

Blank, M., & Marquis, M.S. (1987). Directing discourse: 80 situations for
teaching meaningful conservation to children. Tucson, AZ: Communication Skill
Builders. #(34), #(30)

Blaschke, C.L. (1985). Technology trends in special education. T.H.E.
Journal, 12(6), 73-77. #(5), #(16)

Blau, P.M. (1954). Cooperation and competition in a bureaucracy. American
Journal of Sociology, 59, 530-535. #(42)

Blau, P.M. (1956). Bureaucracy in modern society. New York: The Free Press.
#(34), #(42)

Blau, P.M. (1970). A formal theory of differentiation in organizations.
American Sociological Review, 35, 201-218. #(42)

Blatt, B. (1966). Christmas in purgatory. Boston: Allyn & Bacon. #(34), #(21)

Blatt, B. (1972). Public policy and the education of children with special
needs. Exceptional Children, 38, 537-546. #(23)

Blew, P.A., Schwartz, I.S., & Luce, S.C. (1985). Teaching functional
community skills to autistic children using nonhandicapped peer tutors.
Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 18, 337-342. #(2), #(27), #(36)

Blewitt, P. (1989). Categorical hierarchies: Levels of knowledge and skill.
The Genetic Epistemologist, 17, 21-29. #(13), #(25)

Blewitt, P. (1989). Acquiring knowledge of hierarchies. The Genetic
Epistemologist, 17, 1-39. #(13), #(25)

Bligh, S., & Kupperman, P. (1993). Brief report: Facilitated communication
evaluation procedure accepted in a court case. Journal of Autism and
Developmental Disorders, 23, 553-557. #(30)

Bliss, C. (1965). Semantography. Sydney, Australia: Semantography Publica-
tions. #(30), #(34)

Block, J.H. (Ed.). (1971). Mastery learning: Theory and practice. New York:
Holt, Rinehart and Winston. #(26), #(34)

Block, J.H. (1974). Schools, society and mastery learning. New York: Holt,
Rinehart and Winston. #(26), #(34)

Block, J.H. (1974). A description and comparison of Bloom's learning for
mastery strategy and Keller's personalized system of instruction. In J.H.
Block (Ed.), Schools, society and mastery learning. New York: Holt, Rinehart
and Winston. #(26), #(38)

Block, J.H. (1974). Mastery learning in the classroom: An overview of recent
research. In J.H. Block (Ed.), Schools, society and mastery learning. New
York: Holt, Rinehart and Winston. #(26), #(38)

Block, J.H. (1976). Interview on mastery learning. Educational Leadership,
33, 584-589. #(26)

Block, J.H. (1977). Individualized instruction: A mastery learning perspec-
tive. Educational Leadership, 34, 337-341. #(26)

Block, J.H. (1979). Mastery learning--Current state of the craft. Educational
Leadership, 37, 114-117. #(26)

Block, J.H., & Anderson, L.W. (1975). Mastery learning in classroom
instruction. New York: Macmillan. #(34), #(26)

Bloodstein, O. (1960). The development of stuttering. Journal of Speech and
Hearing Disorders, 25, 366-376. #(30)

Bloodstein, O. (1984). Speech pathology: An introduction. Boston: Houghton
Mifflin. #(34), #(30)

Bloodstein, O. (1987). A handbook on stuttering (4th ed.). Chicago: National
Easter Seals Society. #(30), #(34)

Bloom, B.S. (Ed.). (1956). Taxonomy of educational objectives: The classifi-
cation of educational goals. Handbook 1. Cognitive domain. New York: McKay.
#(34), #(15), #(26)

Bloom, B.S. (1971). Mastery learning. In J.H. Block (Ed.), Mastery learning:
Theory and practice (pp. 47-63). New York: Holt, Rinehart and Winston. #(15),
#(26)

Bloom, B.S. (1974). Time and learning. American Psychologist, 29, 682-688.
#(9), #(1), #(26)

Bloom, B.S. (1976). Human characteristics and school learning. New York:
McGraw-Hill. #(38), #(1), #(9), #(26)

Bloom, B.S. (1976). Quality of instruction. In B. Bloom, Human characteris-
tics and school learning (pp. 108-138). New York: McGraw-Hill. #(38), #(1),
#(9), #(26)

Bloom, B.S. (1978). New views of the learner: Implications for instruction
and curriculum. Educational Leadership, 35, 563-576. #(26)

Bloom, B.S. (1980). The new direction in educational research: Alterable
variables. Phi Delta Kappan, 61, 382-385. #(29), #(43)

Bloom, B.S. (1981). All our children learning. New York: McGraw-Hill. #(34),
#(9), #(15)

Bloom, B.S. (1981). Learning for mastery. In B.S. Bloom, All our children
learning (pp. 153-175). New York: McGraw-Hill. #(38), #(26)

Bloom, B.S. (1986). Ralph Tyler's impact on evaluation theory and practice.
Journal of Thought, 21, 36-46. #(5)

Bloom, L.M. (1980). Language development, language disorders, and learning
disabilities: LD-3. Bulletin of the Orton Society, 30, 115-133. #(28), #(30)

Bloom, L.M., Hood, L., & Lightbown, P. (1974). Imitation in language
development: If, when and why. Cognitive Psychology, 6, 380-420. #(30), #(41)

Bloom, L.M., & Lahey, M. (1978). Language development and language disorders.
New York: John Wiley. #(30), #(34)

Bloom, L.M., & Lahey, M. (1978). The language-disordered child viewed from a
specific disabilities orientation. In L. Bloom & M. Lahey, Language
development and language disorders (pp. 528-550). New York: John Wiley. #(30)

Bloomberg, K. (1990). Computer pictographs for communication. Communication
Outlook, 12(1), 17-18. #(16), #(30)

Blount, W.R. (1968). Concept usage research with the mentally retarded.
Psychological Bulletin, 69, 281-294. #(25), #(45)

Blount, W.R. (1968). Language and the more severely retarded: A review.
American Journal of Mental Deficiency, 73, 21-29. #(21), #(30), #(32)

Bluhm, H.P. (1977). The right to work: Employers, employability, and
retardation. In C.J. Drew & M. Hardman (Eds.), Mental retardation: Social and
educational practices (pp. 207-215). St. Louis: Mosby. #(27), #(38), #(45)

Bock, R.D., Mislevy, R., & Woodson, C. (1982). The next stage in educational
assessment. Educational Researcher, 11, 4-16. #(29)

Boder, E. (1973). Developmental dyslexia: A diagnostic approach based on
three atypical reading-spelling patterns. Developmental Medicine and Child
Neurology, 15, 663-687. #(17).

Boe, E.E., & Church, R.M. (Eds.). (1968). Punishment: Issues and experiments.
New York: Appleton-Century-Crofts. #(3), #(34), #(14), #(42)

Bogdan, R., & Biklen, D. (1985). The principal's role in mainstreaming. In D.
Biklen, Achieving the complete school: Strategies for effective mainstreaming
(pp. 30-51). New York: Teachers College Press. #(42), #(39)

Bohannon, J.N., MacWhinney, B., & Snow, C. (1990). No negative evidence
revisited: Beyond learnability or who has to prove what to whom. Developmen-
tal Psychology, 26, 221-226. #(38), #(25)

Bohline, D.S. (1985). Intellectual and affective characteristics of attention
deficit disordered children. Journal of Learning Disabilities, 18, 604-608.
#(1), #(4)

Bol, L., & Steinhauer, G.D. (1990). Decreases in behavior in vicarious
reinforcement procedures. Psychological Reports, 66, 583-594. #(3), #(14)

Bolstad, O.D., & Johnson, S.M. (1972). Self-regulation in the modification of
disruptive behavior. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 5, 443-454. #(18),
#(37)

Bolstad, O.D., & Johnson, S.M. (1977). The relationship between teachers'
assessment of students and the students' actual behavior in the classroom.
Child Development, 48, 570-578. #(15), #(9)

Bolton, B. (Ed.). (1987). Handbook of measurement and evaluation in
rehabilitation. Baltimore: Paul H. Brookes. #(29), #(34)

Bolton, D.L. (1980). Evaluating administrative personnel in school systems.
New York: Teachers College Press. #(29), #(34)

Bond, G.L., & Tinker, M.A. (1973). Reading difficulties: Their diagnosis and
correction (3rd ed.). New York: Appleton-Century-Crofts. #(34), #(17).

Boren J.H. (1972). When in doubt, mumble. New York: Van Nostrand. #(23),
#(34)

Borg, W.R., & Ascione, F.R. (1978). Changing on-task, off-task, and
disruptive pupil behavior in elementary mainstreaming classrooms. Journal of
Educational Research, 72, 243-252. #(4)

Borg, W.R., & Gail, M.D. (1983). Educational research: An introduction (4th
ed.). New York: Longman. #(43), #(34)

Boriako, A.A. (1982, October). The chip. National Geographic, pp. 421-476.
#(16)

Borich, G.D. (1983). Evaluation models: A question of purpose not terminolo-
gy. Educational Evaluation and Policy Analysis, 5(1), 61-63. #(29).

Boring, E.G. (1945). The use of operational definitions in science.
Psychological Review, 52, 243-245. #(29)

Boring, E.G. (1954). The nature and the history of experimental control.
American Journal of Psychology, 67, 573-589. #(3)

Boring, E.G. (1970). A short historical perspective. In D.I. Mostofsky (Ed.),
Attention: Contemporary theory and analysis (pp. 3-24). New York: Appleton-
Century-Crofts. #(1), #(38)

Borkowski, J.G. (1965). Interference effects in short-term memory as a
function of level of intelligence. American Journal of Mental Deficiency, 20,
458-465. #(11)

Borkowski, J.G., & Cavanaugh, J.C. (1979). Maintenance and generalization of
skills and strategies by the retarded. In N.R. Ellis (Ed.), Handbook of
mental deficiency, psychological theory and research (2nd ed., pp. 569-616).
Hillsdale, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum. #(27), #(7), #(38)

Borowski, J.G., & Wanschura, P.B. (1974). Mediational processes in the
retarded. In N.R. Ellis (Ed.), International review of research in mental
retardation (Vol. 7, pp. 1-54). New York: Academic Press. #(45), #(11)

Bornstein, P.H. (1985). Self-instructional training: A commentary and state-
of-the-art. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 18, 69-72. #(18), #(9)

Borreson, P.M., & Anderson, J.L. (1982). The elimination of chronic
rumination through a combination of procedures. Mental Retardation, 20,
34-38. #(3), #(45)

Boruch, R.F., & Gomez, H. (1977). Sensitivity, bias, and theory in impact
evaluations. Professional Psychology, 8, 411-434. #(29)

Boruch, R.F., & Wortman, P.W. (1979). Implications of educational evaluation
for evaluation policy. In D.C. Berliner (Ed.), Review of research in
education: 7 (pp. 309-361). Washington, DC: American Educational Research
Association. #(38), #(29), #(23)

Bostbradow, D.E., & Bailey, J.B. (1969). Modification of severe disruptive
and aggressive behavior using brief time-out and reinforcement procedures.
Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 2, 31-37. #(3), #(14), #(21)

Boucher, J. (1981). Memory for recent events in autistic children. Journal of
Autism and Developmental Disorders, 11, 293-301. #(2), #(11)

Boucher, J., & Lewis, V. (1989). Memory impairments and communication in
relatively able autistic children. Journal of Child Psychology and Psychia-
try, 30, 99-122. #(2), #(11)

Bourgault, R. (1985). Mass media and pragmatics: An approach for developing
listening, speaking, and writing skills in secondary school students. In C.S.
Simon (Ed.), Communication skills and classroom success: Therapy methodolo-
gies for language-learning disabled students (pp. 241-270). San Diego, CA:
College-Hill Press. #(30), #(5)

Bower, A.C., & Richardson, D.H. (1975). A computer-based data bank. Mental
Retardation, 13, 32-33. #(16)

Bower, E.M. (1982). Defining emotional disturbance: Public policy and
research. Psychology in the Schools, 19, 55-60. #(23)

Bower, G.H. (1981). Mood and memory. American Psychologyist, 36, 129-148.
#(11)

Bower, G.H. (Ed.). (1983). Psychology of learning and motivation (Vol. 17).
New York:  Academic Press. #(34), #(11)

Bower, G.H., & Hilgard, E.R. (1981). Theories of learning. Englewood Cliffs,
NJ: Prentice-Hall. #(34), #(25)

Bower, G.H., & Trabasso, T.R. (1963). Concept identification. In R.C.
Atkinson (Ed.), Studies in mathematical psychology (pp. 32-94). Palo Alto:
Stanford University Press. #(38), #(7)

Bower, T.G. (1975). Infant perception of the third dimension and object
concept development. In L.B. Cohen & P. Salapatek (Eds.), Infant perception:
From sensation to cognition (Vol. II). Perception of space, speech, and sound
(pp. 33-50). New York: Academic Press. #(12), #(25), #(38)

Bower, T.G. (1966). The visual world of infants. Scientific American, 215,
90-92. #(25)

Bower, T.G. (1982). Development in infancy (2nd ed.). San Francisco: W.H.
Freeman. #(25)

Bower, T.G., & Wishart, J. G. (1972). The effects of motor skills on object
permanence. Cognition, 1, 165-172. #(13), #(12)

Bowers, C.A. (1982). The reproduction of technological consciousness:
Locating the ideological foundation of a radical pedagogy. Teachers College
Record, 83, 529-557. #(16)

Bowlby, J. (1980). Attachment and loss, Vol. 3: Loss, sadness and depression.
New York: Basic Books. #(34), #(2)

Bowles-Bridwell, L. (1987). Writing with computers: Implications from
research for the language impaired. Topics in Language Disorders, 7(4),
78-85. #(30), #(16)

Bowman, S.M. (1984). Clinical forum: A review of referential communication
skills. Australian Journal of Human Communication Disorders, 12, 93-112.
#(30), #(32)

Boyd, P.A. (1981). The aftermath of the DD Act: Is there life after
Pennhurst? University of Arkansas Law Review, 4, 448-466. #(10), #(40)

Boyd, W.L. (1978). The study of educational policy and politics: Much ado
about nothing? Teachers College Record, 80, 249-271. #(23)

Boyd, W.L. (1979). The politics of curriculum change and stability.
Educational Researcher, 8, 12-18. #(23)

Bozarth, J.D., & Roberts, R.R. (1972). Signifying significant significance.
American Psychologist, 27, 774-775. #(29)

Bracht, G.H., & Glass, G.V. (1968). The external validity of experiments.
American Education Research Journal, 5, 437-474. #(29), #(42)

Braddock, D., & Heller, T. (1985). The closure of mental retardation
institutions II: Implications. Mental Retardation, 22, 222-229. #(45), #(39)

Braddock, D., Hemp, R., & Fujiura, G. (1987). National study of public
spending for mental retardation and developmental disabilities. American
Journal of Mental Deficiency, 92, 121-133. #(47), #(45)

Bradshaw, C.M., Szabadi, E., & Bevan, P. (1976). Behavior of humans in
variable-interval schedules of reinforcement. Journal of the Experimental
Analysis of Behavior, 27, 135-141. #(3), #(14)

Bradshaw, C.M., Szabadi, E., & Bevan, P. (1977). Effect of punishment on
variable-interval schedules of reinforcement. Journal of the Experimental
Analysis of Behavior, 26, 135-141. #(3), #(14)

Bradtke, L. (1972). Intensive play: A technique for building affective
behaviors in profoundly mentally retarded children. Education and Training of
the Mentally Retarded, 7, 8-13. #(3), #(21), #(45)

Brady, D.O., & Smouse, A.D. (1978). A simultaneous comparison of three
methods for language training with an autistic child: An experimental single
case analysis. Journal of Autism and Childhood Schizophrenia, 8, 271-279.
#(43), #(30), #(48)

Brady, M.P., Shores, R.E., McEvoy, M.A., Ellis, D., & Fox, J. (1987).
Increasing social interactions of severely handicapped autistic children.
Journal of Autism and Developmental Disorders, 17, 375-390. #(2), #(37)

Braine, M. (1963). On learning the grammatical order of words. Psychological
Review, 70, 323-348. #(30)

Brandenburg, S., & Vanderheiden, G. (1988). Communication board design and
vocabulary selection. In L. Bernstein (Ed.), The vocally impaired: Clinical
practice and research. Needham, MA: Allyn & Bacon. #(38), #(30), #(16)

Brandt, R. (1979). A conversation with Benjamin Bloom. Educational Leader-
ship, 37, 157-161. #(15), #(26)

Bransford, J.D., Sherwood, R., Vye, N., & Rieser, J. (1986). Teaching
thinking and problem solving. American Psychologist, 41, 1078-1079. #(25)

Bransford, J.D., Stein, B.S., Vye, N.J., Franks, J.J., Auble, P.M., Mezynski,
K.J., & Perfetto, G.A. (1982). Differences in approaches to learning: An
overview. Journal of Experimental Psychology: General, 111, 390-398. #(15),
#(32)

Brantner, J.P., & Doherty, M.A. (1983). A review of timeout: A conceptual and
methodological analysis. In S. Axelrod & J. Apsche (Eds.), The effects of
punishment on human behavior (pp. 87-132). New York: Academic Press. #(38),
#(35), #(3), #(14), #(32)

Brawley, E.R., Harris, F.R., Allen, K.E., Fleming, R.S., & Peterson, R.F.
(1969). Behavior modification of an autistic child. Behavioral Science, 6,
87-97. #(3), #(2)

Braybrooke, D., & Lindblom, C.E. (1963). A strategy of decision. Policy
evaluation as a social process. New York: Free Press. #(23), #(34)

Braybrooke, D., & Lindblom, C.E. (1963). The strategy of disjointed
incrementalism. In D. Braybrook & C.E. Lindblom, A strategy of decision:
Policy evaluation as a social process (pp. 81-110). New York: The Free Press.
#(8), #(23), #(38)

Brebner, A., Hallworth, H.J., & Brown, R.I. (1977). Computer-assisted
instruction programs and terminals for the mentally retarded. Education and
Training, 2, 421-426. #(16), #(45) 

Breiner, J., & Beck, S. (1984). Parents as change agents in the management of
their developmentally delayed children's noncompliant behaviors: A critical
review. Applied Research in Mental Retardation, 5, 259-278. #(4), #(32)

Bremer, D.A., & Stern, J.A. (1976). Attention and distractibility during
reading in hyperactive boys. Journal of Abnormal Child Psychology, 4,
381-387. #(1), #(17), #(4)

Breuning, S.E., Matson, J.L., & Barrett, R.P. (Eds.). (1984). Advances in
mental retardation and developmental disabilities. Greenwich, CT: JAI Press.
#(34), #(45)

Brewer, N., & Smith, G.A. (1982). Cognitive processes for monitoring and
regulating speed and accuracy of responding in mental retardation: A
methodology. American Journal of Mental Deficiency, 87, 211-222. #(29),
#(25), #(42), #(45)

Brickell, H.M. (1978). Seven key notes on minimum competency testing. Phi
Delta Kappan, 59, 589-592. #(26), #(29)

Bricker, D. (1976). Educational synthesizer. In M.A. Thomas (Ed.), Hey don't
forget about me! (pp. 83-97). Reston, VA: Council for Exceptional Children.
#(8), #(9), #(38)

Bricker, D. (1983). Early communication: Development and training. In M.E.
Snell (Ed.), Systematic instruction of the moderately and severely handi-
capped (2nd ed., pp. 269-288). Columbus, OH: Charles E. Merrill. #(30), #(38)

Bricker, D., & Bricker, W.A. (1970). A program of language training for the
severely language handicapped child. Exceptional Children, 37, 101-111.
#(30), #(21)

Bricker, D., & Bricker, W.A. (1977). A developmentally integrated approach to
early intervention. Education and Training of the Mentally Retarded, 12,
100-108. #(25), #(30), #(45)

Bricker, D., Bricker, W.A., & Dennison, L. (1976). Intervention strategies
for the severely and profoundly handicapped child. In N.G. Haring & L. Brown
(Eds.), Teaching the severely handicapped (Vol. 1, pp. 277-299). New York:
Grune & Stratton. #(38), #(21)

Bricker, D., Dennison, L., & Bricker, W.A. (1978). Training prerequisites to
verbal behavior. In M.E. Snell (Ed.), Systematic instruction of the
moderately and severely handicapped (pp. 157-178). Columbus, OH: Charles E.
Merrill. #(25), #(30), #(21), #(34), #(38)

Bricker, D., & Dow, M.G. (1980). Early intervention with the young severely
handicapped child. Journal of The Association for Persons with Severe
Handicaps, 5, 130-142. #(25), #(21)

Bricker, D., & Iacino, R. (1977). Early intervention with severely/profoundly
handicapped children. In E. Sontag (Ed.), Educational programming for the
severely and profoundly handicapped (pp. 166-176). Reston, VA: Council for
Exceptional Children. #(21), #(34), #(38)

Bricker, D., Ruder, K.F., & Vincent, L. (1976). An intervention strategy for
language-deficient children. In N.G. Haring & R.L. Schiefelbusch (Eds.),
Teaching special children (pp. 301-341). New York: McGraw-Hill. #(25), #(30),
#(38)

Bricker, W.A. (1970). Identifying and modifying behavioral deficits. American
Journal of Mental Deficiency, 75, 16-21. #(30)

Bricker, W.A., & Bricker, D. (1970). Development of receptive vocabulary in
severely retarded children. American Journal of Mental Deficiency, 74,
599-607. #(30), #(21)

Bricker, W.A., & Bricker, D. (1970). A program of language training for the
severely language handicapped child. Exceptional Children, 37, 101-111. #(30)

Bricker, W.A., & Bricker, D. (1972). Assessment and modification of verbal
imitation with low-functioning retarded children. Journal of Speech and
Hearing Research, 15, 690-698. #(21), #(30), #(41)

Bricker, W.A., & Bricker, D. (1974). An early language training strategy. In
R.L. Schiefelbusch & J.L. Lloyd (Eds.), Language perspectives: Acquisition,
retardation, and intervention (pp. 431-468). Baltimore: University Park
Press. #(30), #(38)

Brickey, M., & Campbell, K. (1981). Fast food employment for moderately and
mildly mentally retarded adults: The McDonald's Project. Mental Retardation,
3, 113-116. #(27), #(45)

Brickman, P. (1982). Models of helping and coping. American Psychologist, 37,
368-384. #(27)

Bridge, R.G., Judd, C.M., & Moock, P.R. (1979). The determinants of
educational outcomes: The impact of families, peers, teachers, and schools.
Cambridge, MA: Harper and Row. #(29), #(23), #(36), #(34)

Bridge, R.G., Judd, C.M., & Moock, P.R. (1979). The input-output approach. In
R.G. Bridge, C.M. Judd, & P.R. Moock, The determinants of educational
outcomes: The impact of families, peers, teachers, and schools (pp. 9-32).
Cambridge, MA: Harper and Row. #(29), #(23), #(36), #(38)

Brigance, A. (1977). Brigance Diagnostic Inventory of Basic Skills (2nd ed.).
North Billerica, MA: Curriculum Associates. #(44)

Briggs, C. (1986). Learning how to ask: A sociolinguistic appraisal of the
role of the interview in social science research. Cambridge, England:
Cambridge University Press. #(34), #(43)

Brinberg, D., & McGrath, J.E. (1985). Validity and the research process.
Newbury Park, CA: Sage Publications. #(34), #(29)

Brinerd, C.J. (1977). Response criteria in concept development research.
Child Development, 48, 360-366. #(25)

Brinker, R.P. (1982). Making the world work with microcomputers: A learning
prothesis for handicapped infants. Exceptional Children, 49, 163-170. #(16)

Brinkerhoff, R.O. (1980). Evaluation of inservice programs. Teacher Education
and Special Education, 3, 27-38. #(42), #(29)

Bristor, V.J. (1987). "But I'm not a teacher." Academic Therapy, 23, 23-27.
#(15)

Britton, R. (1981). Teaching how to tell time. Academic Therapy, 16, 409-413.
#(27)

Broadbent, D.E. (Ed.). (1983). Functional aspects of memory. London: Royal
Society. #(34), #(11)

Broadbent, D.E. (1983). The functional approach to memroy. In D.E. Broadbent
(Ed.), Functional aspects of memory (pp. 1-11). London: Royal Society. #(38),
#(11)

Broadbent, D.E. (1984). The Maltese cross: A new simplistic model for memory.
Behavioral and Brain Sciences, 7, 55-94. #(11)

Brod, C. (1984). Technostress: The human cost of the computer revolution.
Reading, MA: Addison-Wesley. #(34), #(16)

Broden, M., Copeland, G., Beasley, A., & Hall, R.V. (1977). Altering student
responses through changes in teacher verbal behavior. Journal of Applied
Behavior Analysis, 10, 479-487. #(3), #(14)

Brodsky, G. (1967). The relation between verbal and non-verbal behavior
change. Behaviour Research and Therapy, 5, 183-191. #(3), #(30)

Brody, G.H., Lahey, B.B., & Combs, M.L. (1978). Effects of intermittent
modeling on observational learning. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 11,
87-90. #(3)

Brody, P.J. (1984). In search of instructional utility: A function-based
approach to pictorial research. Instructional Science, 13, 47-61. #(6), #(9)

Brolin, D.E. (1989). Life centered career education: A competency based
approach (3rd ed.). Reston, VA: Council for Exceptional Children. #(34),
#(33)

Bronfenbrenner, U. (1974). Is early intervention effective? Teachers College
Record, 76, 279-303. #(25)

Bronfenbrenner, U. (1975). Is early intervention effective? In M. Gutentag &
E.L. Struening (Eds.), Handbook of evaluation research (Vol. 2, pp. 519-604).
London: Sage. #(38), #(29)

Bronfenbrenner, U. (1979). The ecology of human development. Cambridge, MA:
Harvard University Press. #(34), #(25)

Brooks, M., Fusco, E., & Grennon, J. (1983). Cognitive levels matching.
Educational Leadership, 40, 4-8. #(25)

Brooks, P.H., & Baumeister, A.A. (1977). A plea for consideration of
ecological validity in the experimental psychology of mental retardation: A
guest editorial. American Journal of Mental Deficiency, 81, 407-416. #(27),
#(45)

Brookes, P.H., Sperber, R., & McCawley, C. (Eds.). (1984). Learning and
cognition in the mentally retarded. Hillsdale, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum. #(34),
#(45), #(25)

Brophy, J.E. (1979). Teacher behavior and its effects. Journal of Educational
Psychology, 71, 733-750. #(26)

Brophy, J.E. (1983). Classroom organization and management. The Elementary
School Journal, 83, 265-285. #(42)

Brophy, J.E., & Good, T.L. (1986). Teacher behavior and student achievement.
In M.C. Wittock (Ed.), Handbook of research on teaching (3rd ed., pp.
328-375). New York: Macmillan. #(38), #(26)

Broudy, H.S. (1988). The uses of schooling. New York: Routledge. #(34), #(5)

Broughton, J.M., Leadbeater, B., & Amsel, E. (1981). Reflections on Piaget:
Proceedings of the Jean Piaget Memorial Conference. Teachers College Record,
83, 151-217. #(13)

Browder, D.M., & Shapiro, E.S. (1985). Applications of self-management to
individuals with severe handicaps: A review. Journal of The Association for
Persons with Severe Handicaps, 10, 200-208. #(32), #(18)

Brown vs. Board of Education. (1954). 347 U.S. 483. #(10)

Brown, A.L. (1970). Subject and experimental variables in the oddity learning
of normal and retarded children. American Journal of Mental Deficiency, 75,
142-151. #(6)

Brown, A.L. (1974). The role of strategic behavior in retardate memory. In
N.R. Ellis (Ed.), International review of research in mental retardation
(Vol. 7, pp. 55-111). New York: Academic Press. #(38), #(11)

Brown, A.L. (1975). The development of memory: Knowing, knowing about
knowing, and knowing how to know. In H.W. Reese (Ed.), Advances in child
development and behavior (Vol. 10). New York: Academic Press. #(11), #(38)

Brown, A.L. (1978). Knowing when, where, and how to remember: A problem in
metacognition. In R. Glaser (Ed.), Advances in instructional psychology (pp.
77-125). Hillsdale, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum. #(38), #(25), #(11)

Brown, A.L., & Barclay, C.R. (1976). The effects of training specific
mnemonics on the metamnemonic efficiency of retarded children. Child
Development, 47, 70-80. #(11)

Brown, A.L., Bransford, J.D., Ferrara, R.A., & Campione, J.C. (1983).
Learning, remembering, and understanding. In J.H. Flavell & E. M. Markman
(Eds.), Handbook of child psychology: Vol. 3. Cognitive development. New
York: John Wiley. #(38), #(11), #(25)

Brown, A.L., Campione, J.C., & Murphy, M.D. (1977). Maintenance and
generalization of trained metamnemonic awareness in educable retarded
children. Journal of Experimental Child Psychology, 24, 191-211. #(3), #(11),
#(7)

Brown, B.S., Wienckowski, L.A., & Stolz, S.B. (1976). Behavior modification:
Perspective on a current issue. Washington, DC: Dept of Health, Education,
and Welfare. #(3)

Brown, F., Holovet, J., Guess, D., & Mulligan, M. (1980). The individualized
curriculum sequencing model (III): Small group instruction. Journal of The
Association for Persons with Severe Handicaps, 5, 352-367. #(9), #(5)

Brown, J. (1965). Generalization and discrimination. In D.I. Mostofsky (Ed.),
Stimulus generalization (pp. 7-23). Stanford, CA: Stanford University Press.
#(6), #(7), #(38) 

Brown, J. (1969). Adolescent development of children with infantile
psychosis. Seminars in Psychiatry, 1, 79-89. #(2)

Brown, L. (1969). Developmental differences in the effects of stimulus
novelty on discrimination learning. Child Development, 40, 813-822. #(6)

Brown, L. (1973). Instructional programs for trainable level retarded
students. In L. Mann & D.A. Sabatino (Eds.), The first review of special
education (Vol. 2, pp. 103-136). Philadelphia: Buttonwood Farms. #(9), #(38)

Brown, L., Bellamy, T., Perlmutter, L., Sackowitz, P., & Sontag, E. (1972).
The development of quality, quantity, and durability in the work performance
of retarded students in a public school prevocation workshop. Training School
Bulletin, 68, 58-69. #(33)

Brown, L., Branston, M.B., Baumgart, D., Vincent, L., Falvey, M., &
Schroeder, J. (1974). Utilizing the characteristics of a variety of current
and subsequent least restrictive environments as factors in the development
of curricular content for severely handicapped students. AAESPH Review, 4,
407-424. #(5), #(27), #(21), #(39)

Brown, L., Branston, M.B., Hamre-Nietupski, S., Johnson, F., Wilcox, B., &
Gruenwald, L. (1979). A rationale for comprehensive longitudinal interactions
between severely handicapped students and nonhandicapped students and other
citizens. AAESPH Review, 4, 3-14. #(5), #(27), #(21)

Brown, L., Branston, M.B., Hamre-Nietupski, S. Pumpian, I., Certo, N., &
Gruenwald, L. (1979). A strategy for developing chronological age appropriate
and functional curricular content for severely handicapped adolescents and
young adults. Journal of Special Education, 13, 81-90. #(5), #(39), #(21)

Brown, L., Falvey, M., Vincent, L., Kaye, N., Johnson, F., Ferrara-Parrish,
P., & Gruenwald, L. (1980). Strategies for generating comprehensive,
longitudinal, and chronological-ageappropriate individualized education
programs for adolescent and young-adult severely handicapped students.
Journal of Special Education, 14, 200-215. #(5), #(27), #(21)

Brown, L., Long, E., Udavari-Solner, A., Davis, L., VanDeventer, P., Ahlgren,
C., Johnson, F., Gruenwald, L., & Jorgensen, J. (1989). The home school: Why
students with severe intellectual disabilities must attend the schools of the
brothers, sisters, friends, and neighbors. Journal of The Association of
Persons with Severe Handicaps, 14, 1-7. #(27), #(39)

Brown, L., Nietupski, J., & Hamre-Nietupski, S. (1976). Criterion of ultimate
functioning. In M.A. Thomas (Ed.), Hey, don't forget about me! (pp. 2-15).
Reston, VA: Council for Exceptional Children. #(9), #(27), #(38)

Brown, L., Nisbet, J., Ford, A., Sweet, M., Shiraga, B., York, J., & Loomis,
R. (1983). The critical need for nonschool instruction in educational
programs for severely handicapped students. Journal of The Association for
Persons with Severe Handicaps, 8(3), 71-77. #(27), #(21)

Brown, L., Pumpian, I., Baumgart, D., Vandeventer, P., Ford, A., Nisbet, J.,
Schroder, J., & Gruenwald, L. (1981). Longitudinal transition plans in
programs for severely handicapped students. Exceptional Children, 47,
624-631. #(27), #(21)

Brown, L., Shiraga, B., York, J., Kessler, K., Strohm, B., Rogan, P., Sweet,
M., Zanella, K., VanDeventer, P., & Loomis, R. (1984). Integrated work
opportunities for adults with severe handicaps: The extended training option.
Journal of The Association for Persons with Severe Handicaps, 9(4), 262-269.
#(27), #(21)

Brown, L., & York, R. (1974). Developing programs for severely handicapped
students: Teacher training and classroom instruction. Focus on Exceptional
Children, 6, 1-17. #(9), #(42), #(21)

Brown, R. (1958). How shall a thing be called? Psychological Review, 65,
14-21. #(30)

Brown, R. (1973). A first Language: The early stage. Cambridge: Harvard
University Press. #(34), #(30), #(13)

Brown, S.L., & Donovan, C.M. (1977). Stimulation activities. In D. Schafer &
M.S. Moersch (Eds.), Developmental programming for infants and young children
(Vol. 3). Ann Arbor, MI: University of Michigan Press. #(5), #(34), #(12)

Brownell, C.A., & Kopp, C.B. (1991). Common threads, diverse solutions:
Concluding commentary. Developmental Review, 11, 288-303. #(25)

Brownell, K.D., & Stunkard, A.J. (1982). The double blind in danger: Untoward
consequences of informed consent. American Journal of Psychiatry, 139,
1487-1489. #(43)

Browning, P., Nave, G., Whitburge, W., & Barkin, P. (1985). Interactive video
as an instructional technology for handicapped learners: A development and
research program. Australia and New Zealand Journal of Developmental
Disabilities, 11, 123-128. #(16)

Browning, R.M. (1971). Treatment effects of a total behavior modification
program with five autistic children. Behaviour Research and Therapy, 9,
319-327. #(3), #(2)

Bruer, J.T. (1993). Schools for thought: A science of learning in the
classroom. Boston: MIT Press. #(34), #(43)

Bruner, J.S. (1960). The process of education. New York: Vintage Books.
#(23), #(34)

Bruner, J.S. (1964). The course of cognitive growth. American Psychologist,
19, 1-15. #(25)

Bruner, J.S. (1966). Toward a theory of instruction. New York: Norton. #(9),
#(34)

Bruner, J.S. (1975). From communication to language--A psychological
perspective. Cognition, 3, 255-287. #(30)

Bruner, J.S. (1975). The ontogenesis of speech arts. Journal of Child
Language, 2, 1-19. #(30) 

Bruner, J.S. (1980). Intellectual autobiography. In G. Lindzey (Ed.), History
of psychology in autobiography (pp. 75-150). San Francisco: Freeman. #(38),
#(35)

Bruner, J.S. (1981). The pragmatics of acquisition. In W. Deutsch (Ed.), The
child's construction of language (pp. 39-56). New York: Academic Press.
#(30), #(38)

Bruner, J.S. (1983). Child's talk. New York: Norton. #(34), #(30)

Bruner, J.S. (1986). Actual minds, possible worlds. Cambridge, MA: Harvard
University Press. #(34), #(35)

Bruner, J.S. (1990). Acts of meaning. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University
Press. #(30)

Bruner, J.S., & Allport, G.W. (1940). Fifty years of change in American
psychology. Psychological Bulletin, 37, 757-776. #(25)

Bruno, J. (1989). Customizing a Minspeak system for a preliterate child: A
case example. Augmentative and Alternative Communication, 5, 89-100. #(16),
#(30)

Brush, F.R., Bush, R.R., Jenkins, W.O., John, W.F., & Whiting, J.W.M. (1952).
Stimulus generalization after extinction and punishment: An experimental
study of displacement. Journal of Abnormal and Social Psychology, 47,
633-640. #(3), #(7), #(14)

Bry, P.M., & Nawas, M.W. (1972). Is reinforcement necessary for the
development of a generalized imitation operant in severely and profoundly
retarded children? American Journal of Mental Deficiency, 76, 658-667. #(3),
#(14), #(21)

Bryant, B.K. (1983). Context of success, affective arousal, and generosity:
The neglected role of negative affect. American Educational Research Journal,
20, 553-562. #(3)

Bryant, L.E., & Budd, K.S. (1984). Teaching behaviorally handicapped
preschool children to share. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 17, 45-56.
#(3), #(37)

Bryen, D., & Joyce, D. (1985). Language intervention with the severely
handicapped: A decade of research. Journal of Special Education, 19, 7-39.
#(30), #(21), #(32)

Bryk, A.S., & Light, R.J. (1981). Designing evaluations for different program
environments. In R.A. Berk (Ed.), Educational evaluation methodology: The
state of the art. Baltimore: John Hopkins University Press. #(38), #(29)

Bryson, C.Q. (1970). Systematic identification of perceptual disabilities in
autistic children. Perceptual and Motor Skills, 31, 239-246. #(12), #(2)

Bryson, C.Q. (1972). Short-term memory and cross-modal information processing
in autistic children. Journal of Learning Disabilities, 5, 81-91. #(2), #(11)

Bucher, B. (1969). Some ethical issues in the therapeutic use of punishment.
In R.D. Rubin & C.M. Franks (Eds.), Advances in behavior (pp. 59-72). New
York: Academic Press. #(3), #(14), #(38)

Bucher, B., & King, L. (1971). Generalization of punishment effects in the
deviant behavior of a psychotic child. Behavior Therapy, 2, 68-77. #(3),
#(7), #(14)

Buck-Morse, S. (1975). Socio-economic bias in Piaget's theory and its
implications for crossculture studies. Human Development, 18, 35-49. #(13)

Budde, J.F. (1979). Measuring performance in human service systems. New York:
AMACOM. #(29), #(34)

Budoff, M. (1975). Engendering change in special education practices. Harvard
Educational Review, 45, 507-526. #(23)

Budoff, M., Mitchell, S., & Kotkin, L. (1977). Procedural due process: Its
application to special education and its implications for teacher training.
Cambridge, MA: Research Institute for Educational Problems. #(10)

Buehler, R.E., Patterson, G.R., & Furniss, J.M. (1966). The reinforcement of
behaviour in institutional settings. Behaviour Research and Therapy, 4,
157-167. #(3), #(14)

Buell, J., Stoddard, P., Harris, F.R., & Baer, D.M. (1968). Collateral social
development accompanying reinforcement of outdoor play in a preschool child.
Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 1, 167-173. #(37), #(14)

Bulkeley, W.M. (1988, June 6). Computers failing as teaching aids. The Wall
Street Journal, p. 25. #(16)

Bullis, M., & Foss, G. (1986). Assessing the employment-related interpersonal
competence of mildly mentally retarded workers. American Journal of Mental
Deficiency, 91, 43-50. #(33), #(37), #(45) 

Bumpass, E.R., Fagelman, F.D., & Brix, R.J. (1983). Intervention with
children who set fires. American Journal of Psychotherapy, 37, 328-345. #(3)

Bunch, J.M., & Schneider, H.G. (1991). Smoking-specific locus of control.
Psychological Reports, 69, 1075-1081. #(18)

Bunderson, C.V., & Faust, G.W. (1977). Programmed and computer-assisted
instruction. In N.L. Gage (Ed.), The psychology of teaching methods: The
seventy-fifth yearbook of the National Society for the Study of Education:
Part I (pp. 44-90). Chicago: University of Chicago Press. #(16), #(38)

Bunker, L.K., & Moon, S. (1983). Motor skills. In M.E. Snell (Ed.),
Systematic instruction of the moderately and severely handicapped (2nd ed.,
pp. 203-226). Columbus, OH: Charles E. Merrill. #(38), #(12), #(21)

Burg, M.M., Reid, D.H., & Lattimore, J. (1979). Use of a self-recording and
supervision program to a change institutional staff behavior. Journal of
Applied Behavior Analysis, 12, 363-375. #(3), #(23)

Burgdorf, R.L. (1980). The legal rights of handicapped persons. Baltimore:
Paul H. Brookes. #(10), #(34)

Burgemeister, B., Blum, L., & Lorge, I. (1972). Columbia Mental Maturity
Scale (3rd ed.). Cleveland, OH: The Psychological Corporation. #(44)

Burgess, A.A. (1963). A clockwork orange. New York: Norton. #(3), #(34)

Burgess, R.L., Burgess, J.M., & Esveldt, K.C. (1970). An analysis of
generalized imitation. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 3, 39-46. #(3),
#(7), #(41)

Burgio, L.D., & Burgio, K.L. (1986). Behavioral gerontology: Application of
behavioral methods to the problems of older adults. Journal of Applied
Behavior Analysis, 19, 321-328. #(3), #(46)

Burgio, L.D., Page, T.J., & Capriotti, R.M. (1985). Clinical behavioral
pharmacology: Methods for evaluating medications and contingency management.
Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 18, 45-59. #(3), #(49)

Burgio, L.D., Whitman, T.L., & Johnson, M.R. (1980). A self-instructional
package for increasing attending behavior in educable mentally retarded
children. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 13, 443-459. #(1), #(45)

Burgio, L.D., Whitman, T.L., & Reid, D.H. (1983). A participative management
approach for improving direct-care staff performance in an institutional
setting. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 16, 37-53. #(42)

Burke, P.J. (1976). Personnel preparation: Historical perspective. Exception-
al Children, 43, 144-147. #(42)

Burke, P.J., & Cohen, M. (1977). The quest for competence in serving the
severely/profoundly handicapped: A critical analysis of personnel preparation
programs. In E. Sontag (Ed.), Educational Programming for the Severe-
ly/Profoundly Handicapped (pp. 445-465). Reston, VA: Council for Exceptional
Children. #(42), #(38), #(21)

Burkhart, L.J. (1988). Using computers and speech synthesis to facilitate
communicative interaction with young and/or severely handicapped children.
Wauconda, IL: Don Johnston Developmental Equipment, Inc. #(34), #(16), #(30)

Burkin, D. (1983). Teaching them to read (4th ed.). Boston: Allyn & Bacon.
#(17), #(34)

Burleigh, R.A., & Marholin, D. (1977). Don't shoot until you see the whites
of his eyes--An analysis of the adverse side effects of verbal prompts.
Behavioral Modification, 1, 109-121. #(3), #(9)

Burnam, T. (1975). The dictionary of misinformation. New York: Crowell.
#(30), #(34)

Burnham, D.K., & Vignes, G. (1988). The effect of movement on infants' memory
for visual compounds. British Journal of Developmental Psychology, 6,
351-360. #(11), #(1)

Burns, E. (1985, July). The great arcade con. Popular Computing, p. 140.
#(16)

Burns, R.B. (1979). Mastery learning--Does it work? Educational Leadership,
37, 110-113. #(15), #(26)

Burrello, L.C., Tracy, M.L., & Glassman, E.J. (1983). A national status
report on the use of electronic technology in special education management.
The Journal of Special Education, 17(3), 341-353. #(16)


Burton, T.A., & Hirshoren, A. (1979). The education of severely and
profoundly retarded children: Are we sacrificing the child to the concept?
Exceptional Children, 45, 598-602. #(5), #(21)

Burton, T.A., & Hirshoren, A. (1979). Some further thoughts and clarifica-
tions on the education of severely and profoundly retarded children.
Exceptional Children, 45, 618-625. #(5), #(21)

Bushell, D.J. (1973). Classroom behavior: A little book for teachers.
Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall. #(34), #(3)

Bushell, D.J., & Burgess, R.L. (1969). Characteristics of the experimental
analysis. In D.J. Bushell & R.L. Burgess, Behavioral sociology: The
experimental analysis of social process (pp. 145-174). New York: Columbia
University Press. #(3), #(38), #(43)

Business Week (1984, October 29). Educational software: Why it's hard to
sell?, pp. 121-126. #(16)  

Buss, A.R. (1976). The myth of vanishing individual differences in Bloom's
mastery learning. Instructional Psychology, 3, 4-14. #(26)

Buss, W. (1971). Procedural due process for school discipline: Probing the
constitutional outline. University of Pennsylvania Law Review, 119, 545-577.
#(14), #(10), #(40)

Butler, G.S., & Rabinowitz, F.M. (1981). An investigation of factors
contributing to the apparent overselective responding of mentally retarded
children. Child Development, 52, 430-442. #(6), #(1), #(45)

Butterworth, G., & Bryant, P.E. (Eds.). (1990). Causes of development.
Hillsdale, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum. #(34), #(25)

Butz, R.A., & Hasazi, J.E. (1973). Developing verbal imitative behavior in a
profoundly retarded girl. Journal of Behavior Therapy and Experimental
Psychiatry, 4, 389-393. #(3), #(21), #(41), #(30)

Byrnes, J.P. (1988). Formal operations: A systematic reformulation.
Developmental Review, 8, 1-22. #(13)

Cahen, L., Craun, M., & Johnson, S. (1971). Spelling difficulty: A survey 
of the research. Review of Educational Research, 41, 281-301. #(17), #(32)

Cahen, L.S., & Filby, N.N. (1979). The class size/achievement issue: New
evidence and a research plan. Phi Delta Kappan, 60, 492-495. #(26), #(39),
#(29)

Cain, G.G., & Watts, H.W. (1970). Problems in making policy inferences from
the Coleman Report. American Sociological Review, 35, 228-242. #(23), #(43)

Caissy, G.A. (1984). Evaluating educational software: A practitioner's guide.
Phi Delta Kappan, 65, 249-250. #(16)

Calculator, S.N. (1988). Promoting the acquisition and generalization of
conversational skills by individuals with severe disabilities. Augmentative
and Alternative Communication, 4, 94-103. #(30), #(7), #(21)

Calculator, S.N. (1992). Perhaps the Emperor has clothes after all: A
response to Biklen. American Journal of Speech-Language Pathology, 1(2),
18-20. #(30), #(2)

Calculator, S.N., & Dollaghan, C. (1982). The use of communication boards in
a residential setting: An evaluation. Journal of Speech and Hearing
Disorders, 48, 185-191. #(30)

Calculator, S.N., & Luchko, C. (1983). Evaluating the effectiveness of a
communication board training program. Journal of Speech and Hearing
Disorders, 48, 185-191. #(30), #(29)

Calder, B.J., & Straw, B.M. (1975). Interaction of intrinsic and extrinsic
motivation: Some methodological notes. Journal of Personality and Social
Psychology, 31, 76-83. #(3), #(14)

Calder, B.J., & Straw, B.M. (1975). Self-perception of intrinsic and
extrinsic motivation. Journal of Personality and Social Psychology, 31,
599-605. #(3), #(25), #(14)

Calfee, R., & Drum, P. (1978). Learning to read: Theory, research and
practice. Curriculum Inquiry. Hillsdale, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum. #(17)

Calfee, R., & Drum. P. (1986). Research on teaching reading. In M.C. Wittrock
(Ed.), Handbook of research on teaching (3rd ed., pp. 804-849). New York:
MacMillan. #(38), #(17)

Callias, M. (1978). Educational aids and methods. In M. Rutter & E. Schopler
(Eds.), Autism: A reappraisal of concepts and treatment (pp. 453-461). New
York: Plenum Press. #(9), #(2), #(38)

Callner, D.A. (1975). Behavioral treatment approaches to drug abuse: A
critical review of the research. Psychological Bulletin, 82, 143-164. #(3),
#(32)

Campbell, B.A., & Church, R.M. (1969). Punishment and aversive behavior. New
York: Appleton-Century-Crofts. #(3), #(34), #(14)

Campbell, B.M., & Schwartz, A.S. (1983). Nonspeech communication. In J.L.
Matson & J.A Mulick (Eds.), Handbook of mental retardation (pp. 411-428). New
York: Pergamon Press. #(45), #(30), #(38)

Campbell, C.R., & Stremmel-Campbell, K. (1982). Programming "loose training"
as a strategy to facilitate language generalization. Journal of Applied of
Behavior Analysis, 15, 295-301. #(30), #(7)

Campbell, D.T. (1957). Factors relevant to the validity of experiments in
social settings. Psychological Bulletin, 54, 297-312. #(43)

Campbell, D.T. (1963). From description to experimentation: Interpreting
trends as quasiexperiments. In C.W. Harris (Ed.), Problems in measuring
change (pp. 212-242). Madison, WI: University of Wisconsin Press. #(38),
#(43)

Campbell, D.T. (1969). Reforms as experiments. American Psychologist, 24,
409-429. #(29)

Campbell, D.T. (1970). Considering the case against experimental evaluations
of social innovations. Administrative Science Quarterly, 15, 110-113. #(29),
#(8)

Campbell, D.T. (1975). "Degrees of freedom" and the case study. Comparative
Political Studies, 8, 178-193. #(29)

Campbell, D.T. (1988). Methodology and epistemology for social science:
Selected papers. Chicago: University of Chicago Press. #(4), #(29)

Campbell, D.T., & Stanley, J.C. (1963). Experimental and quasi-experimental
designs for research on teaching. In N.L. Gage (Ed.), Handbook of Research on
Teaching (pp. 171-246). Chicago: Rand McNally. (Also published in 1966 as
Experimental and Quasi-experimental designs for research. Chicago: Rand
McNally.) #(29), #(34), #(38)

Campbell, P., & Fein, G. (Eds.). (1986). Young children and microcomputers.
Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall. #(34), #(16)

Campbell, P.H., Green, K.M., & Carlson, L.M. (1977). Approximating the norm
through environmental and child-centered prosthetics and adaptive equipment.
In E. Sontag (Ed.), Educational programming for the severely and profoundly
handicapped (pp. 300-320). Reston, VA: Council for Exceptional Children.
#(29), #(21), #(38)

Campbell, S.B. (1983). Developmental perspectives in child psychopathology.
In T.H. Ollendick & M. Hersen (Eds.), Handbook of child psychopathology (pp.
13-40). New York: Plenum Press. #(38), #(2), #(25)

Campbell, S.B. (1990). Behavior problems in preschool children: Clinical and
developmental issues. New York: Guilford Press. #(34), #(25), #(4)

Campbell, S.B., Douglas, V.I., & Morgenstern, G. (1971). Cognitive styles in
hyperactive children. Journal of Child Psychology and Psychiatry, 12, 55-67.
#(4)

Campione, J.C., Brown, A. (1978). Towards a theory of intelligence: Contribu-
tions from research with retarded children. Intelligence, 2, 279-304. #(25),
#(45)

Campione, J.C., Brown, A.L., & Ferrara, R.A. (1982). Mental retardation and
intelligence. In R.J. Sternberg (Ed.), Handbook of human intelligence (pp.
392-490). New York: Cambridge University Press. #(38), #(25)

Camus, A. (1955). The Myth of Sisyphus and other essays. New York: Random
House. #(34), #(35)

Camus, A. (1960). The rebel. (Trans by Anthony Bower). New York: Vintage
Books. #(34), #(35)

Candace, S.B., & Tierney, R.J. (1985). Inferential reading abilities of
mildly mentally retarded and nonretarded students. American Journal of Mental
Deficiency, 89, 75-82. #(17), #(45)

Cantwell, D.P., & Baker, L. (1991). Association between attention deficit-
hyperactivity disorder and learning disorders. Journal of Learning Disabili-
ties, 24, 88-95. #(28), #(1)

Carbo, M.L. (1978). A word imprinting technique for children with severe
memory disorders. Teaching Exceptional Children, 11(1), 3-5. #(11), #(21)

Carbone, V.J., Miller, A., & Todd, D.D. (1981). Beat the timer game.
Education and Treatment of Children, 4, 53-59. #(3)

Carden Smith, L.K., & Fowler, S.A. (1984). Positive peer pressure: The
effects of peer monitoring on children's disruptive behavior. Journal of
Applied Behavior Analysis, 17, 213-227. #(3), #(4), #(37)

Carey, R.G., & Bucher, B. (1981). Identifying the educative and suppressive
effects of positive practice and restitutional overcorrection. Journal of
Applied Behavior Analysis, 14, 7180. #(3)

Carey, R.G., & Bucher, B. (1983). Positive practice overcorrection: The
effects of duration of positive practice on acquisition and response
reduction. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 16, 101-109. #(3)

Carlberg, C., & Kavale, K. (1980). The efficacy of special versus regular
class placement for exceptional children: A meta-analysis. Journal of Special
Education, 14, 295-309. #(39)

Carlson, F. (1985). Picsyms categorical dictionary. Lawrence, KS: Baggeboda
Press. #(234), #(16(, #(30)

Carmen, G.O., & Kosberg, B. (1982). Educational technology research: Computer
technology and the education of emotionally handicapped children. Educational
Technology, 22(2), 26-30. #(16), #(2)

Carmichael, D. (1974). Mastery learning: An educational innovation with
administrative implications. In J.H. Block (Ed.), Schools, society, and
mastery learning (pp. 119-144). New York: Holt, Rinehart and Winston. #(15),
#(26)

Carnine, D.W. (1980). Three procedures for presenting minimally different
positive and negative instances. Journal of Educational Psychology, 72,
452-456. #(6) 

Carnine, D.W. (1981). High and low implementation of direct instruction
teaching techniques. Education and Treatment of Children, 4, 43-51. #(8),
#(9)

Carnine, D.W., & Silbert, J. (1979). Direct instruction reading. Columbus,
OH: Charles E. Merrill. #(17), #(34)

Caron, A.J. (1968). Conceptual transfer in preverbal children as a conse-
quence of dimensional training. Journal of Experimental Child Psychology, 6,
522-542. #(6), #(25)

Carr, E.G. (1977). The motivation of self-injurious behavior: A review of
some hypotheses. Psychological Bulletin, 84, 800-816. #(3), #(21), #(32)

Carr, E.G. (1978). Acquisition of sign language by autistic children. I:
Expressive labelling. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 11, 489-501.
#(30), #(2)

Carr, E.G. (1979). Teaching autistic children to use sign language: Some
research issues. Journal of Autism and Developmental Disorders, 9, 345-359.
#(30), #(2) 

Carr, E.G. (1980). Generalization of treatment effects following educational
intervention with autistic children and youth. In B. Wilcox & A. Thompson
(Eds.), Critical issues in educating autistic children and youth (pp.
118-134). Washington, DC: Department of Education, Office of Special
Education. #(3), #(2), #(7), #(38)

Carr, E.G. (1982). Sign language. In R.L. Koegel, A. Rincover, & A.L. Egel
(Eds.), Educating and understanding autistic children (pp. 142-157). San
Diego: College-Hill Press. #(30), #(2), #(38)

Carr, E.G. (1985). Behavioral approaches to language and communication. In E.
Schopler & G. Mesibov (Eds.), Current issues in autism: Volume 3. Communica-
tion problems in autism (pp. 219-254). New York: Academic Press. #(3), #(30),
#(2), #(38)

Carr, E.G., & Binkoff, J.A., Kolingsky, E., & Eddy, M. (1978). Acquisition of
sign language by autistic children. I. Expressive labeling. Journal of
Applied Behavioral Analysis, 11, 489-501. #(3), #(2), #(30).

Carr, E.G., & Dores, P. (1981). Patterns of language acquisition following
simultaneous communication with autistic children. Analysis and Intervention
in Developmental Disabilities, 1, 1-15. #(2), #(30)

Carr, E.G., & Durand, V.M. (1985). Reducing behavior problems through
functional communication training. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 18,
111-126. #(3), #(30)

Carr, E.G., & Durand, V.M. (1985). The social-communicative basis of severe
behavior problems in children. In S. Reiss & R. Bootzin (Eds.), Theoretical
issues in behavior therapy (pp. 219-254). New York: Academic Press. #(38),
#(30), #(4)

Carr, E.G., & Kologinsky, E. (1983). Acquisition of sign language by autistic
children. II: Spontaneity and generalization effects. Journal of Applied
Behavior Analysis, 16, 297-314. #(30), #(2)

Carr, E.G., & Newsom, C.D. (1985). Demand-related tantrums: Conceptualization
and treatment. Behavior Modification, 9, 403-426. #(4)

Carr, E.G., Newsom, C.D., & Binkoff, J.A. (1980). Stimulus control of self-
destructive behavior in a psychotic child. Journal of Abnormal Child
Psychology, 4, 139-153. #(3), #(6), #(19), #(21)

Carr, E.G., Pridal, C., & Dores, P. (1984). Speech versus sign comprehension
in autistic children. Analysis and prediction. Journal of Experimental Child
Psychology, 37, 587-597. #(30), #(2)

Carr, E.G., Robinson, S., & Palumbo, L. (1990). The wrong issue: Aversive vs.
nonaversive treatment. The right issue: Functional vs. nonfunctional
treatment. In A. Repp & N. Singh (Eds.), Perspectives on the use of
nonaversive and aversive interventions for persons with developmental
disabilities (pp. 361-380). Sycamore, IL: Sycamore Publishing. #(38), #(3),
#(5), #(14)

Carr, E.G., Taylor, J.C., & Robinson, S. (1991). The effects of severe
behavior problems in children on the teaching behavior of adults. Journal of
Applied Behavior Analysis, 24, 523-535. #(2), #(3)

Carr, J. (1976). The severely retarded autistic child. In L. Wing (Ed.),
Early childhood autism: Clinical, educational and social aspects (pp.
247-270). New York: Pergamon Press. #(2), #(21), #(38)

Carr, K.S. (1983). The importance of inference skills in the primary grades.
The Reading Teacher, 33, 518-522. #(17)

Carr, T.H. (1984). Attention, skill, and intelligence: Some speculations on
extreme individual differences in human performance. In P.H. Brookes, R.
Sperber, & C. McCawley (Eds.), Learning and cognition in the mentally
retarded (pp. 189-215). Hillsdale, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum. #(38), #(45), #(25)

Carr, T.H., & Brown, T.L. (1984). The Maltese cross: Simplistic yes, new no.
Behavioral and Brain Sciences, 7, 69-71, 91-94. #(11)

Carr, T.H., & Levy, B.A. (Eds.). (1990). Reading and its development:
Component skills approaches. New York: Academic Press. #(34), #(17)

Carrier, J.K. (1974). Non-speech noun usage training with severely and
profoundly retarded children. Journal of Speech and Hearing Research, 17,
510-517. #(30)

Carrier, J.K. (1974). Application of functional analysis and non-speech
response mode to teach language. American Speech and Hearing Association
[Monograph], 18, 47-95. #(30)

Carrier, J.K. (1976). Application of a nonspeech language system with the
severely language handicapped. In L.L. Lloyd (Ed.), Communication assessment
and intervention strategies (pp. 523-547). Baltimore: University Park Press.
#(30), #(21), #(38)

Carrier, J.K., & Peak, T. (1975). Non-SLIP (Non-speech language initiation
program). Lawrence, KS: H & H Enterprises. #(30), #(34)

Carrol, J.B., Davies, P., & Richman, H. (1971). Word Frequency Book. Boston:
Houghton Mifflin. #(34), #(17)

Carroll, J.B. (1963). A model of school learning. Teachers College Record,
64, 723-733. #(26), #(15)

Carroll, J.B. (1968). Basic and applied research in education. Harvard
Educational Review, 38, 263-276. #(43)

Carrow, E. (1973). Test for auditory comprehension of language (5th. ed.).
Austin: Learning Concepts. #(30), #(44)

Carrow, E. (1974). Carrow elicited language inventory. Austin, TX: Author.
#(44)

Carrow-Wolfolk, E. (1985). Test of Auditory Comprehension of Language--
Revised. Allen, TX: DLM Teaching Resources. #(44)

Carstensen, L.L., & Erickson, R.J. (1986). Enhancing the social environments
of elderly nursing home residents: Are high rates of interaction enough?
Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 19, 349-355. #(3), #(46)

Carta, J.J., & Greenwood, C.R. (1989). Establishing the integrity of the
independent variable in early intervention programs. Early Education and
Development, 1, 127-140. #(43)

Carter, C.H. (1970). Handbook of mental retardation syndromes (2nd ed.).
Springfield, IL: Charles C Thomas. #(21), #(34), #(45), #(44)

Cartledge, G., & Milburn, J.F. (1978). The case for teaching social skills in
the classroom: A review. Review of Educational Research, 48, 133-156. #(32),
#(37)

Cartledge, G., & Milburn, J.F. (1986). Teaching social skills to children:
Innovative approaches (2nd ed.). New York: Pergamon Press. #(34), #(37)

Cartwright, G.P., & Cartwright, C.A. (1972). Gilding the Lilly: Comments on
the training based model. Exceptional Children, 39, 231-234. #(35)

Caruso, D.R., & Detterman, D.K. (1983). Stimulus encoding by mentally
retarded and nonretarded adults. American Journal of Mental Deficiency, 87,
649-655. #(11), #(45)

Carver, R.P. (1978). The case against statistical significance testing.
Harvard Educational Review, 48, 378-399. #(29), #(22)

Case, R. (1975). Gearing the demands of instruction to the developmental
capacities of the learner. Review of Educational Research, 45, 59-87. #(9),
#(25) 

Case, R. (1978). A developmentally based theory and technology of instruc-
tion. Review of Educational Research, 48, 439-463. #(25), #(5)

Case, R. (1985). Intellectual development: Birth to adulthood. New York:
Academic Press. #(25)

Case, R. (1987). The structure and process of intellectual development.
International Journal of Psychology, 22, 571-607. #(25)

Case, R., Hayward, S., Lewis, M., & Hurst, P. (1988). Towards a neo-Piagetian
theory of cognitive and emotional development. Developmental Review, 8. 1-51.
#(13), #(25)

Castenell, L.A. (1983). Achievement motivation: An investigation of
adolescents' achievement patterns. American Educational Research Journal, 20,
503-510. #(26)

Cataldo, M.F., & Harris, J. (1982). The biological basis for self-injury in
the mentally retarded. Analysis and Intervention in Developmental Disabili-
ties, 2, 21-39. #(19), #21), #(45)

Catania, A.C. (Ed.). (1968). Contemporary research on operant behavior.
Glenview, IL: Scott, Foresman. #(3), #(34)

Catania, A.C. (1973). The nature of learning. In J.A. Nevin & G.S. Reynolds
(Eds.), The study of behavior: Learning, motivation, emotion, and instinct
(pp. 31-68). Glenview, IL: Scott, Foresman. #(3), #(15), #(25), #(38)

Catania, A.C. (1975). The myth of self-reinforcement. Behaviorism, 3,
192-199. #(3), #(14)

Catania, A.C., Horne, P., & Lowe, C.F. (1989). Transfer of function across
members of an equivalence class. The Analysis of Verbal Behavior, 7, 99-
110. #(6), #(7)

Cattell, P. (1960). The measurement of intelligence of infants and young
children. New York: Psychological Corporation. #(34), #(25)

Cavanaugh, J.C., & Perlmutter, M. (1982). Metamemory: A critical examination.
Child Development, 53, 11-28. #(32), #(11)

Cazden, C.B. (1977). The question of intent. In M. Lewis & L.A. Rosenblum
(Eds.), Interaction, conversation, and the development of language (pp.
309-313). New York: John Wiley. #(38), #(30)

Ceci, S.J. (1984). A developmental study of learning disabilities and memory.
Journal of Experimental Psychology, 38, 352-371. #(28), #(11)

Cegelka, W.J., & Tyler, J.L. (1970). The efficacy of special class placement
for the mentally retarded in proper perspective. Training School Bulletin,
67, 33-65. #(39), #(45)

Center, D.B. (1990). Social maladjustment: An interpretation. Behavioral
Disorders, 15, 141-148. #(4)

Cermak, L.S., & Craik, F.I.M. (Eds.). (1979). Levels of processing in human
memory. Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum. #(34), #(11)

Cernovsky, Z.Z. (1990). Race and brain weight: A note on J.P. Rushton's
conclusions. Psychological Reports, 66, 337-338. #(25)

Certo, N., Haring, N., & York, R. (Eds.). (1984). Public school integration
of severely handicapped students: Rational issues and progressive alterna-
tives. Baltimore: Paul H. Brookes. #(34), #(39)

Certo, N., Mezzullo, K., & Hunter, D. (1985). The effect of total task chain
on the acquisition of busperson job skills at a full service community
restaurant. Education and Training of the Mentally Retarded, 20, 148-156.
#(27) 

Chadsy-Rusch, J. (1990). Teaching social skills on the job. In F.R. Rusch
(Ed.), Supported employment: Models, methods, and issues. Sycamore, IL:
Sycamore Publishing Co. #(27), #(33), #(38)

Chadsy-Rusch, J., Karlan, G.R., Riva, M.T., & Rusch, F.R. (1984). Competitive
employment: Teaching conversational skills to adults who are mentally
retarded. Mental Retardation, 22, 218-225. #(45), #(30), #(33)

Chaffin, J.D. (1974). Will the real "mainstreaming" program please stand up!
(or...should Dunn have done it?). Focus on Exceptional Children, 7, 1-12.
#(27), #(39)

Chall, J.S. (1977). Review of human characteristics and school learning.
Harvard Educational Review, 43, 447-451. #(15), #(26), #(32)

Chall, J.S. (1979). The great debate: Ten years later, with a modest proposal
for reading stages. In L.B. Resnick & P. Weaver (Eds.), Theory and practice
of early reading (Vol. 1, pp. 29-56). Hillsdale, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum. #(38),
#(17), #(13)

Chamberlin, T.C. (1965). The method of multiple working hypotheses. Science,
148, 754-759. #(29)

Chambers, J., & Sprecher, J. (1983). Computer-assisted instruction: Its use in
the classroom. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall. #(34), #(16)

Chance, P. (1974, January). "After you hit a child, you just can't get up and
leave him; you are hooked to that kid": A conversation with Ivar Lovaas about
self-mutilating children and how their parents make it worse. Psychology
Today, pp. 76-85. #(3), #(2), #(21)

Chandler, G.M., Burck, H.D., & Sampson, J.P. (1986). A generic computer
program for systematic desensitization: Description, construction and case
study. Journal of Behavior Therapy and Experimental Psychiatry, 17, 171-174.
#(16)

Chandler, L.K., Lubeck. R.C., & Fowler, S.A. (1992). Generalization and
maintenance of preschool children's social skills: A critical review and
analysis. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 25, 415-428. #(37), #(7),
#(32) 

Chang, T.M. (1986). Semantic memory: Facts and models. Psychological
Bulletin, 99, 199-220. #(11)

Chapey, R. (Ed.). (1986). Language intervention strategies in adult aphasia
(2nd ed.). Baltimore: Williams & Wilkins. #(34), #(30)

Chapman, A.H. (1960). Early infantile autism: A review. American Journal of
Diseases of Children, 99, 783-786. #(32), #(2)

Chapman, B.L.M., & Lees, P. (1986). Computer-assisted communication for
language development. British Journal of Educational Technology, 17, 222-234.
#(16)

Chappell, G.E., & Johnson, G.A. (1976). Evaluation of cognitive behavior in
the young nonverbal child. Language, Speech, and Hearing Services in Schools,
7, 17-26. #(29), #(30)

Charlop, M.H., Kurtz, P.F., & Casey, F.G. (1990). Using aberrant behaviors as
reinforcers for autistic children. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 23,
163-182. #(2), #(3), #(14)

Charlop, M.H., Schreibman, L., & Tryon, A.S. (1983). Learning through
observation: The effects of peer modeling on acquisition and generalization
in autistic children. Journal of Abnormal Child Psychology, 11, 355-366.
#(2), #(41), #(7)

Chase, W. (1978). Elementary information processing. In W. Estes (Ed.),
Handbook of learning and cognition processes: Human information processing
(Vol. 5, pp. 19-90). Hillsdale, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum. #(38), #(11)

Chassin, L., Presson, C.C., Sherman, S.J., Corty, E., & Olshavsky, 
R.W. (1984). Predicting the onset of cigarette smoking in adolescents.
Journal of Applied Social Psychology, 14, 224-243. #(18)

Cherfas, J.J. (1980). Signals for food: Reinforcers or informants? Science,
209, 1552-1553. #(3), #(14)

Chess, S. (1971). Autism in children with congenital rubella. Journal of
Autism and Childhood Schizophrenia, 1, 33-47. #(21), #(2)

Chi, M.T.H., Glasser, R., & Farr, M.J. (Eds.). (1988). The nature of
expertise. Hillsdale, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum. #(34), #(42)

Children's Defense Fund. (1976). Your rights under the education for all
handicapped children act of 1975 (PL 94-142). Washington, DC: Author. #(10),
#(34)

Chin, R. (1976). The utility of system models and developmental models for
practitioners. In W.G. Bennis, K.D. Benne, R. Chin, & K.E. Corey (Eds.), The
planning of change (3rd ed., pp. 90-102). New York: Holt, Rinehart and
Winston. #(42), #(38)

Chin, R. (1976). The utility of models of the environments of systems for
practitioners. In W.G. Bennis, K.D. Benne, R. Chin, & K.E. Corey (Eds.), The
planning of change (3rd ed., pp. 103-117). New York: Holt, Rinehart and
Winston. #(42), #(38)

Chin, R., & Benne, K.D. (1976). General strategies for effecting changes in
human systems. In W.G. Bennis, K.D. Benne, R. Chin, & K.E. Corey (Eds.), The
planning of change (3rd ed., pp. 22-45). New York: Holt, Rinehart and
Winston. #(42), #(38)

Choate, J.S. (Ed.). (1993). Successful mainstreaming: Proven ways to detect
and correct special needs. Boston: Allyn & Bacon. #(34), #(15)

Chomsky, N. (1957). Syntactic structures. The Hague: Mouton. #(30), #(34)

Chomsky, N. (1959). Review of Skinner's Verbal behavior. Language, 35, 26-58.
#(30)

Chomsky, N. (1965). Aspects of the theory of syntax. Cambridge, MA: MIT
Press. #(30), #(34)

Chomsky, N. (1968). Language and mind. New York: Harcourt, Brace and
Jovanovich. #(30), #(34)

Chomsky, N. (1972). Stages in language development and reading exposure.
Harvard Educational Review, 42, 1-33. #(17), #(30), #(13)

Chomsky, N. (1976). Reflections on language. New York: Pantheon Press. #(2),
#(30), #(34)

Chorover, S.L. (1973, October). Big brother and psychotechnology. Psychology
Today, pp. 4354. #(16)

Christensen, C.A., & Cosden, M.A. (1986). The relationship between special
education placement and instruction in computer literacy skills. Journal of
Educational Computing Research, 2, 299-306. #(16) 

Christian, W.P. (1983). A case study in the programming and maintenance of in-
stitutional change. Journal of Organizational Behavior Management, 5, 99-153.
#(8)

Christie, J.F., & Johnsen, E.P. (1983). The role of play in social-intellec-
tual development. Review of Educational Research, 53, 99-115. #(25)

Christoplos, F., & Renz, P. (1969). A critical examination of special
education programs. Journal of Special Education, 3, 371-379. #(15), #(29)

Christy, P.R. (1975). Does use of tangible rewards with individual children
affect peer observers? Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 8, 187-196.
#(14), #(36)

Chumpelik, D. (1984). The prompt system of therapy: Theoretical framework and
application for developmental apraxia of speech. Seminars in Speech and
Language, 5(2), 139-156. #(9), #(5)

Church, R.M. (1963). The varied effects of punishment. Psychological Review,
70, 369-402. #(3), #(14)

Churchill, D.W. (1971). The effects of success and failure in psychotic
children. Archives of General Psychiatry, 25, 208-214. #(2), #(4)

Churchill, D.W. (1978). Language: The problem beyond conditioning. In M.
Rutter & E. Schopler (Eds.), Autism: A reappraisal of concepts and treatment
(pp. 71-85). New York: Plenum Press. #(38), #(2), #(30)

Cirilo, R.K., & Foss, D.J. (1980). Text structure and reading time for
sentences. Journal of Verbal Learning and Verbal Behavior, 19, 96-103. #(17)

Clarizo, H.F. (1990). Assessing severity in behavior disorders: Empirically
based criteria. Psychology in the Schools, 27(1), 5-15. #(4)

Clark, B. (1988). Growing up gifted: Developing the potential of children at
home and at school (3rd ed.). Columbus, OH: Charles E. Merrill. #(50)

Clark, D.C. (1971). Teaching concepts in the classroom: A set of teaching
prescriptions derived from experimental research. Journal of Educational
Psychology, 62, 253-278. #(25)

Clark. D.H., & Griffing, B.L. (Eds.). (1981). Comprehensive programming for
multiply handicapped children and youth. Viewpoints, 57. #(9)

Clark, D.L., Lotto, L.S., & McCarthy, M.M. (1980). Factors associated with
success in urban elementary schools. Phi Delta Kappan, 61, 467-470. #(26)

Clark, E.V. (1974). Some aspects of the conceptual basis for first language
acquisition. In R.L. Schiefelbusch & L.L. Lloyd (Eds.), Language perspec-
tives: Acquisition, retardation and intervention (pp. 105-128). Baltimore:
University Park Press. #(38), #(30)

Clark, F.A., & Shuer, J. (1978). A clarification of sensory integrative
therapy and its application to programming with retarded people. Mental
Retardation, 16, 227-232. #(12), #(45)

Clark, H.B., Rowbury, T., Baer, A.M., & Baer, D.M. (1973). Timeout as a
punishing stimulus in continuous and intermittent schedules. Journal of
Applied Behavior Analysis, 6, 443-455. #(3)

Clark, R. (1974). Performing without competence. Journal of Child Language,
1, 1-10. #(30)

Clark, R. (1977). What is the use of imitation? Journal of Child Language, 4,
341-358. #(30), #(41)

Clark, R. (1985). Confounding in educational computing research. Journal of
Educational Computing Research, 1, 137-147. #(16)

Clarke-Stewart, A., & Friedman, S. (1987). Child development: Infancy through
adolescence. New York: John Wiley. #(34), #(25)

Clark, T.A., & McCarthy, D.P. (1983). School improvement in New York City: An
appraisal of some recent trends. Educational Researcher, 12, 17-24. #(42)

Clayton, V. (1975). Erikson's theory of human development as it applies to
the aged: Wisdom as contradictory cognition. Human Development, 18, 119-128.
#(46), #(25), #(35)

Clayton, V. (1982). Wisdom and intelligence: The nature and function of
knowledge in the later years. International Journal of Aging and Development,
15, 315-321. #(46)

Cleland, C.C., & Clark, C.M. (1966). Sensory deprivation and aberrant
behavior among idiots. American Journal of Mental Deficiency, 71, 213-225.
#(12)

Clements, D.H. (1987). Computers and young children: A review of research.
Young Children, 43(1), 34-44. #(16), #(32) 

Clements, D.H., & Gullo, D.F. (1984). Effects of computer programming on
young children's cognition. Journal of Educational Psychology, 76, 1051-1058.
#(16) 

Cobb, H.B., & Horn, C.J. (1986). Planned change in special education
technology. Journal of Special Education Technology, 8, 18-27. #(16)

Cohen, C., & Palin, M. (1986). Speech syntheses and speech recognition
devices. In M. Grossfeld & C. Grossfeld (Eds.), Microcomputer applications in
rehabilitation of communication disorders (pp. 183-211). Rockville, MD: Aspen
Publications. #(38), #(30), #(16)

Cohen, D.J., Donnellan, A., & Paul, R. (Eds.). (1987). Handbook of autism and
pervasive developmental disorders. New York: John Wiley. #(2), #(34)

Cohen, D.J., Volkmar, F.R., & Paul, R. (1986). Issues in the classification
of pervasive developmental disorders and associated conditions: History and
current status of nosology. Journal of the American Academy of Child
Psychiatry, 25, 158-161. #(25), #(32)

Cohen, D.K. (1970). Politics and research: Evaluation of social action
programs in education. Review of Educational Research, 40, 213-238. #(43),
#(23)

Cohen, I.S. (1962). Programmed learning and the Socratic dialogue. American
Psychologist, 17, 722-775. #(5), #(16)

Cohen, J. (1962). The statistical power of abnormal-social psychological
research: A review. Journal of Abnormal and Social Psychology, 65, 145-153.
#(22), #(43), #(32)

Cohen, J. (1988). Statistical power analysis for the behavioral sciences (2nd
ed.). Hillsdale, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum. #(34), #(22)

Cohen, J., & Cohen, P. (1983). Applied multiple regression/correlation
analysis for the behavioral sciences (2nd ed.). Hillsdale, NJ: Lawrence
Erlbaum. #(34), #(22)

Cohen, J., & DeYoung, H. (1973). The role of litigation in the improvement of
programming for the handicapped. In L. Mann & D.A. Sabatino (Eds.), The first
review of special education (Vol. 2, pp. 261-286). Philadelphia: Buttonwood
Farms. #(10), #(38)

Cohen, L.B., & Gelber, E.R. (1975). Infant visual memory. In L.B. Cohen & P.
Salapatek (Eds.), Infant perception: From sensation to cognition (Vol. 1).
Basic visual processes (pp. 347-403). New York: Academic Press. #(12), #(25),
#(38)

Cohen, L.B., & Strauss, M.S. (1979). Concept acquisition in the human infant.
Child Development, 50, 419-424. #(11), #(6), #(7)

Cohen, M.A., Gross, P.J., & Haring, N.G. (1975). Developmental pinpoints. In
N.G. Haring & L. Brown (Eds.), Teaching the severely handicapped (Vol. 1, pp.
35-110). New York: Grune & Stratton. #(21), #(38), #(44)

Cohen, M.D., March, J.G., & Olsen, J.P. (1972). A garbage can model of
organizational choice. Administrative Science Quarterly, 17, 1-25. #(42)

Cohen, S. (1969). Studies in visual perception and reading in disadvantaged
children. Journal of Learning Disabilities, 2, 498-507. #(28), #(17)

Cohen, S., & Wills, T.A. (1985). Stress, social support, and the buffering
hypothesis. Psychological Bulletin, 98, 310-357. #(42), #(25)

Cohn, E., Milliman, S., & Chew, I. (1975). Input-output analysis in public
education. Cambridge, MA: Ballinger. #(29), #(34)

Cohn, E., Millman, S., & Chew, I. (1975). The assessment of educational
effectiveness. In E. Cohn, S. Milliman, & I. Chew, Input-output analysis in
public education (pp. 1-8). Cambridge, MA: Ballinger. #(29), #(38)

Cohn, E., Millman, S., & Chew, I. (1975). Input-output analysis in the
development of an educational production for elementary and secondary
schools. In E. Cohn, S. Milliman, & I. Chew, Input-output analysis in public
education (pp. 29-49). Cambridge, MA: Ballinger. #(29), #(38)

Colby, K. (1965). Things to come: Designing neurotic computers. In L. Krasner
& L.P Ullmann (Eds.), Research in behavior modification (pp. 305-309). New
York: Holt, Rinehart and Winston. #(38), #(3), #(16)

Colby, K. (1973). The rationale for computer-based treatment of language
difficulties in nonspeaking autistic children. Journal of Autism and
Childhood Schizophrenia, 3, 254-260. #(2), #(16) 

Colby, K., & Smith, D. (1971). Computers in the treatment of non-speaking
utistic children. In J.H. Masserman (Ed.), Current psychiatric therapies
(Vol. II, pp. 1-17). New York: Grune & Stratton. #(2), #(16), #(38) 


Cole, D.A. (1986). Facilitating play in children's peer relationships: Are we 
having fun yet? American Educational Research Journal, 23, 201-215. #(37)

Cole, D.A., Meyer, L.H., Vandercock, T., & McQuarter, R.J. (1986). Interac-
tions between peers with and without severe handicaps: The dynamics of
teacher intervention. American Journal of Mental Deficiency, 91, 160-169.
#(37), #(21)

Cole, D.A., Vandercock, T., & Rynder, J. (1987). Dyadic interactions between
children with and without mental retardation: Effects of age discrepancy.
American Journal of Mental Retardation, 92, 194-202. #(25), #(45)

Cole, J.T., & Cole, M.L. (1983). Language lessons for the special education
classroom. Rockville, MD: Aspen Publications. #(30), #(34)

Cole, M. (1973). A developmental study of factors influencing discrimination
transfer. Journal of Experimental Child Psychology, 16, 126-147. #(6)

Cole, M., & Cole, S. (1989). The development of children. San Francisco: W.H.
Freeman. #(34), #(25)

Cole, N.S., & Nitko, A.J. (1981). Measuring program effects. In R.A. Berk
(Ed.), Educational evaluation methodology: The state of the art (pp. 32-63).
Baltimore: John Hopkins University Press. #(38), #(29)

Coleman, C., Cook, A., & Meyers, L. (1980). Assessing the non-oral client for
assistive communication devices. Journal of Speech and Hearing Disorders, 45,
515-526. #(30)

Coleman, J. (1966). Equal schools or equal students. The Public Interest, 2,
70-78. #(26), #(24)

Coleman, J. (1967). Toward open schools. The Public Interest, 2, 20-27. #(23)

Coleman, J. (1968). The concept of equality of educational opportunity.
Harvard Educational Review, 38, 7-23. #(15), #(35), #(24)

Coleman, J. (1973). Equality of opportunity and equality of results. Harvard
Educational Review, 43, 129-137. #(15), #(24)

Coleman, J. (1976). Response to Pettigrew and Green. Harvard Educational
Review, 46, 217-224. #(15), #(24)

Coleman, J. et al. (1966). Equality of educational opportunity. Washington,
DC: U.S. Government Printing Office. #(34), #(42), #(47)

Coleman, J., Campbell, E.Q., Hobson, C.J. et al. (1977). Relation of school
factors to achievement. In D.A. Erikson (Ed.), Educational organization and
administration (pp. 131-149). Berkeley, CA: McCutchan. #(26), #(38)

Coleman, M., & Gilberg, C. (1985). The biology of the autistic syndromes. New
York: Praeger. #(34), #(2)

Coleman, S.L., & Stedman, J.M. (1974). Use of peer model in language training
in an echolalic child. Journal of Behavior Therapy and Experimental
Psychiatry, 5, 275-279. #(30), #(36)

Coles, G.S. (1978). The learning-disabilities test battery: Empirical and
social issues. Harvard Educational Review, 43, 313-340. #(28)

Colletti, G., & Haqrris, S.L. (1977). Behavior modification in the home: 
Siblings as behavior modifiers, parents as observers. Journal of Abnormal 
Child Psychology, 5, 21-30. #(3)

Collier, G., Hirsch, E., & Kanarek, P.H. (1977). The operant revisited. In
W.K. Honig & J.E.R. Staddon (Eds.), Handbook of operant behavior (pp. 28-52).
Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall. #(3), #(38)

Collier, G., Johnson, D.F., Hill. W.L., & Kaufman, L.W. (1986). The economics
of the law of effect. Journal of the Experimental Analysis of Behavior, 46,
113-136. #(3)

Collins, A.M., & Quillian, M.R. (1972). How to make a language user. In E.
Tulving & W. Donaldson (Eds.), Organization of memory (pp. 309-351). New
York: Academic Press. #(30), #(38)

Collins, M., Carnine, D., & Gersten, R. (1987). Elaborated corrective
feedback and the acquisition of reasoning skills: A study of computer-
assisted instruction. Exceptional Children, 54, 254-262. #(3), #(16) 

Colombo, J. (1982). The critical period concept: Research, methodology, and
theoretical issues. Psychological Bulletin, 91, 260-275. #(11), #(32)

Colozzi, G.A., Helfen, C.S., & Follow, R.S. (1980). Differential reinforce-
ment of incompatible behavior (DRI) in treating classroom management problems
of developmentally disabled children. The Psychological Record, 30, 261-270.
#(4), #(3), #(14)

Compton, A.J., & Streeter, M. (1977). Studies of early child phonology: Data
collection and preliminary analyses. Papers and Reports in Child Language
Development, 13, 99-109. #(30)

Conant, J.B. (1963). The education of American teachers. New York: McGraw-
Hill. #(34), #(35), #(15)

Conant, J.B. (1967). The comprehensive high school. New York: McGraw-Hill.
#(34), #(42)

Cone, J.D. (1973). Assessing the effectiveness of programmed generalization.
Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 6, 713-718. #(3), #(29), #(7)

Cone, J.D. (1978). The behavioral assessment grid (BAG): A conceptual
framework and a taxonomy. Behavior Therapy, 9, 882-888. #(3), #(44)

Conley, R.W. (1973). The economics of mental retardation. Baltimore: John
Hopkins University Press. #(45), #(47)

Connell, P.J., & Thompson, C.K. (1986). Flexibility of single-subject
experimental designs. Part III: Using flexibility to design or modify
experiments. American-Speech-LanguageHearing Association, 51, 214-225. #(42),
#(48)

Conners, F.A., & Detterman, D.K. (1987). Information-processing correlates of
computerassisted work learning by mentally retarded students. American
Journal of Mental Deficiency, 91, 606-612. #(16), #(45)

Connis, R.T. (1979). The effects of sequential pictorial cues, self-recording
and praise on the job task sequencing of retarded adults. Journal of Applied
Behavior Analysis, 12, 355-361. #(6), #(9)

Connors, E.T. (1981). Educational tort liability and malpractice. Bloomingto-
n, IN: Phi Delta Kappa. #(10), #(34)

Connors, E.T. (1981). Corporal punishment and assault and battery. In E.T.
Connors, Educational tort liability and malpractice (pp. 118-128). Bloomingt-
on, IN: Phi Delta Kappa. #(10), #(14), #(38)

Connors, E.T. (1981). Educational malpractice. In E.T. Connors, Educational
tort liability and malpractice (pp. 148-158). Bloomington, IN: Phi Delta
Kappa. #(10), #(38)

Connors, F.A., Caruso, D.R., & Detterman, D.K. (1986). Computer-assisted
instruction for the mentally retarded. In N.R. Ellis & N.W. Bray (Eds.),
International review of research in mental retardation (Vol. 14, pp.
105-134). New York: Academic Press. #(16), #(45), #(38) 

Connors, F.A., & Detterman, D.K. (1987). Information-processing correlates of
computer-assisted word learning by mentally retarded students. American
Journal of Mental Deficiency, 91, 606-612. #(16), #(45)

Conn-Powers, M., Ross-Allen, J., & Holburn, S. (1990). Transition of young
children into the elementary education mainstream. Topics in Early Childhood
Special Education, 9(4), 91-105. #(39)

Conway, J.B., & Bucher, B.D. (1974). Soap in the mouth as an aversive
consequence. Behavior Therapy, 5, 154-156. #(3), #(14)

Cook, A.R., Anderson, N., & Rincover, A. (1982). Stimulus overselectivity and
stimulus control: Problems and strategies. In R.L. Koegel, A. Rincover, &
A.L. Egel (Eds.), Educating and understanding autistic children (pp. 90-105).
San Diego: College-Hill Press. #(6), #(2), #(38)

Cook, E.H. (1990). Autism: A review of neurochemical investigation. Synapse,
6, 292-308. #(2), #(32)

Cook, J.J. (1972). Accountability in special education. Focus on Exceptional
Children, 3, 1-7. #(26)

Cook, T.D., & Campbell, D. (1979). Quasi-experimentation. Boston: Houghton
Mifflin. #(34), #(43)

Cook, T.D., & Reichardt, C.T. (Eds.). (1979). Qualitative and quantitative
methods in evaluation research. Beverly Hills, CA: Sage Publications. #(34),
#(43)

Cooke, T., & Apolloni, T. (1976). Developing positive social-emotional
behaviors: A study of training and generalization effects. Journal of Applied
Behavior Analysis, 9, 65-78. #(3), #(37), #(7)

Cooley, W.W. (1978). Explanatory observational studies. Educational
Researcher, 7(9), 9-15. #(42), #(29)

Cooper, L.J., Wacker, D.P., Thursby, D., Plagmann, L.A., Harding, J., Millard,
T., & Derby, M. (1992). A functional analysis of the role of task preferences,
task demands, and adult attention on child behavior: Application to an outpa-
tient and classroom setting. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 25, 823-
840. #(5)

Cooper, H.M. (1982). Scientific guidelines for conducting integrative
research reviews. Review of Educational Research, 52, 291-302. #(11), #(42)

Cooper, J.O. (1974). Measurement and analysis of behavioral techniques.
Columbus, OH: Charles E. Merrill. #(29), #(34)

Cooper, J.O. (1981). Measuring Behavior (2nd ed.). Columbus, OH: Charles E.
Merrill. #(29), #(34)

Cooper, J.O., Heron, T.E., & Heward, W.L. (1987). Applied behavior analysis.
Columbus, OH: Charles E. Merrill. #(3), #(48)

Cooper, J.O., & Johnson, J. (1979). Guideline for direct and continuous
measurement of academic behavior. The Directive Teacher, 1(3), 10-12. #(29),
#(42)

Cooper, M.L., Thompson, C.L., & Baer, D.M. (1970). The experimental
modification of teacher attending behavior. Journal of Applied Behavior
Analysis, 3, 153-157. #(3), #(26)

Cooper, R.P., & Aslin, R.N. (1989). The language environment of the young
infant: Implications for early perceptual development. Canadian Journal of
Psychology, 43, 247-265. #(30), #(12)

Copeland, K. (Ed.). (1974). Aids for the severely handicapped. New York:
Grune & Stratton. #(21), #(34)

Copeland, M., Ford, L., & Solon, N. (1976). Occupational therapy for mentally
retarded children. Baltimore: University Park Press. #(21), #(34), #(45)

Corbett, J. (1976). Medical management. In L. Wing (Ed.), Early childhood
autism: Clinical education and social aspects (2nd ed., pp. 271-280). Oxford:
Pergamon Press. #(38), #(49)

Cornelius, S.W. (1984). Classic pattern of intellectual aging: Test
familiarity, difficulty, and performance. Journal of Gerontology, 39,
201-206. #(46)

Corno, L. (1979). Classroom instruction and the matter of time. In D.L. Duke
(Ed.), Classroom management: Part II. Chicago: NSSE. #(26), #(38)

Corte, H.E., Wolf, M.M., & Locke, B.J. (1971). A comparison of procedures for
eliminating self-injurious behavior of retarded adolescents. Journal of
Applied Behavior Analysis, 4, 201-213. #(3), #(19)

Corwin, R.G. (1972). Strategies for organizational innovation: An empirical
comparison. American Sociological Review, 37, 441-452. #(42)

Cosden, M.A. (1988). Microcomputer instruction and perceptions of effective-
ness by special and regular education elementary school teachers. Journal of
Special Education, 22, 242-253. #(16)

Cosden, M.A., Gerber, M.M., Semmel D.S., Goldman, S.R., & Semmel, M.I.
(1987). Microcomputer use within micro-educational environments. Exceptional
Children, 53, 399-409. #(16) 

Cosden, M.A., & Lieber, J.A. (1986). Grouping students on the microcomputer.
Academic Therapy, 22, 165-172. #(16)

Cosden, M.A., & Semmel, M.I. (1987). Developmental changes in microeducation-
al environments for learning handicapped and non-learning handicapped
elementary school students. Journal of Special Education Technology, 8(4),
1-13. #(16)

Cossairt, A., Hall, R.V., & Hopkins, B.L. (1973). The effect of experimenter-
's instructions, feedback, and praise on teacher praise and student attending
behavior. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 6, 89-100. #(9), #(26)

Costeff, H., Cohen, B.E., & Weller, L. (1983). Relative importance of genetic
and non-genetic etiologies in idiopathic mental retardation: Estimates based
on analysis of medical histories. Annals of Human Genetics, 47, 83-93. #(45)

Costello, C.G. (1972). Depression: Loss of reinforcers or loss of reinforcer
effectiveness? Behavior Therapy, 3, 240-247. #(3), #(14)

Costello, J.M., & Holland, A.L. (Eds.). (1986). Handbook of speech and
language disorders. San Diego: College-Hill Press. #(34), #(30)

Cotter, V.W. (1971). Effects of music on performance of manual tasks with
retarded adolescent females. American Journal of Mental Deficiency, 71,
242-248. #(14), #(45), #(33)

Couch, R.W., Miller, L.K., Johnson, M., & Welsh, T.M. (1986). Some considera-
tions for behavior analysts developing social change interventions. Behavior
Analysis and Social Action, 5, 9-13. #(3), #(8)


Coughlin, R.C. (1972). The aversive properties of withdrawing positive
reinforcement: A review of the recent literature. Psychological Record, 22,
333-354. #(3), #(14), #(32)

Courchesne, E. (1987). A neurophysiological view of autism. In E. Schopler &
G.B. Mesibov (Eds.), Neurological issues in autism (pp. 285-324). New York:
Plenum Press. #(2), #(38), #(25)

Courtnage, L., Stainback, W., & Stainback, S. (1982). Managing prescription
drugs in school. Teaching Exceptional Children, 15, 5-9. #(3)

Coval, T.E., Gilhool, T.K., & Laski, F.J. (1977). Rules and tactics in
institutionalization proceedings for mentally retarded persons: The role of
the courts in assuring access to services in the community. Education and
Training of the Mentally Retarded, 12, 177-185. #(10), #(45)

Cowen, R.J., Jones, F.H., & Bellack, A.S. (1979). Grandma's rule with group
contingencies: A cost-efficient means of classroom management. Behavior
Modification, 3, 397-418. #(3)

Cowley, B.J., Green, G., & Braunling-McMorrow, D. (1992). Using stimulus
equivalence procedures to teach name-face matching to adults with brain
injuries. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 25, 461-475. #(6)

Cox, A.D., Puckering, C., Pound, A., & Mills, M. (1987). The impact of
maternal depression in young children. Journal of Child Psychology and
Psychiatry, 28, 917-928. #(2)

Craig, C.H. (1988). Effect of three conditions of predictability on word-
recognition performance. Journal of Speech and Hearing research, 31, 588-592.
#(17), #(30)

Craig, E.M., & McCarver, R.B. (1984). Community placement and adjustment of
deinstitutionalized clients. In N.R. Ellis & N.W. Bray (Eds.), International
review of research in mental retardation (Vol. 12, pp. 95-122). New York:
Academic Press. #(38), #(45), #(39)

Craig, H.B., & Holland, A.L. (1970). Reinforcement of visual attending in
classrooms for deaf children. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 3,
97-109. #(1), #(3), #(14)

Craighead, W.E., Kazdin, A.E., & Mahoney, M.J. (1976). Behavior modification:
Principles, issues, and application. Boston: Houghton Mifflin. #(3)

Craighead, W.E., & Mercatoris, M. (1973). Mentally retarded residents as
paraprofessionals: A review. American Journal of Mental Deficiency, 78,
339-347. #(7), #(36), #(37), #(32)

Craighead, W.E., O'Leary, K.D., & Allen, J.S. (1973). Teaching generalization
of instruction following in an "autistic" child. Journal of Behavior Therapy
and Experimental Psychiatry, 4, 171-176. #(9), #(2), #(7)

Craik, F.I.M., & Lockhart, R.S. (1972). Levels of processing: A framework for
memory research. Journal of Verbal Learning and Verbal Behavior, 11, 671-684.
#(11)

Craik, F.I.M., & Tulving, E. (1975). Depth of processing and the retention of
words in episodic memory. Journal of Experimental Psychology: General, 104,
268-294. #(11)

Craik, F.I.M., & Watkins, M.J. (1973). The role of rehearsal in short-term
memory. Journal of Verbal Learning and Verbal Behavior, 12, 599-607.

Cratty, B.J. (1966). Developmental sequences of perceptual motor tasks. New
York: Educational Activities. #(12), #(5)

Cratty, B.J. (1970). Perceptual and motor development in infants and
children. New York: Macmillan. #(12), #(34)

Cratty, B.J. (1970). Visual perceptual development. In B.J. Cratty,
Perceptual and motor development in infants and children (pp. 67-99). New
York: Macmillan. #(12), #(38)

Cratty, B.J. (1971). Active learning: Games to enhance academic abilities.
Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall. #(12), #(34)

Crawford, J.L., Aiello, J.R., & Thompson, D.E. (1979). Deinstitutionalization
and community placement: Clinical and environmental factors. Mental
Retardation, 17, 59-63. #(39)

Crawford, K.A., & Siegel, P.S. (1982). Improving the visual discrimination of
mentally retarded children: A training strategy. American Journal of Mental
Deficiency, 87, 294-301. #(6), #(45)

Creaghead, N.A., & Marguiles, C.P. (1982). Evaluating pragmatic skills of
verbal and nonverbal children. Communication Disorders, 7, 73-86. #(30)

Creak, M., & Ini, S. (1960). Families of psychotic children. Journal of Child
Psychology and Psychiatry, 1, 156-175. #(21)

Creedon, M.P. (1976). Comment on "Reactions to 'Employing electric shock with
autistic children.'" Journal of Autism and Childhood Schizophrenia, 6,
290-291. #(3), #(2)

Cregan, A., & Lloyd, L. (1988). Sigsymbols: American edition. Wauconda, IL:
Don Johnston Developmental Equipment, Inc. #(34), #(30)

Cremin, L. (1960). The republic and the school: Horace Mann on the education
of free men. New York: Teachers College Press. #(15), #(35)

Cremin, L. (1961). The transformation of the school. New York: Alfred A.
Knopf. #(15), #(35)

Cremin, L. (1965). The genius of American education. Pittsburgh, PA:
University of Pittsburgh Press. #(15), #(35)

Cremin, L. (1976). Public education. New York: Basic Books. #(23), #(34)

Cremin, L. (1977). Traditions of American education. New York: Basic Books.
#(23), #(34)

Cremins, J.J. (1983). Legal and political issues in special education.
Springfield, IL: Charles C. Thomas. #(34), #(10)

Crist, K., Walls, R.T., & Haught, P.A. (1984). Degrees of specificity in task
analysis. American Journal of Mental Deficiency, 89, 67-74. #(9)

Crnic, K.A., & Reid, M. (1989). Mental Retardation. In E.J. Mash & R.A. Bark-
ley (Eds.), Treatment of childhood disorders. New York: Guilford Press. #(38),
#(45)

Croll, W.L. (1970). Children's discrimination learning as a function of inter-
trial interval duration. Psychonomic Science, 18, 321-322. #(6)

Cronbach, L.J. (1957). The two disciplines of scientific psychology. American
Psychologist, 12, 671-684. #(35)

Cronbach, L.J. (1975). Five decades of public controversy over mental
testing. American Psychologist, 30, 1-14. #(29)

Cronbach, L.J. (1982). Designing evaluations of educational and social
programs. San Francisco: Jossey-Bass. #(29), #(34)

Cronbach, L.J. (1984). Essentials of psychological testing (4th ed.). New
York: Harper & Row. #(34), #(29)

Cronbach, L.J., & Furby, L. (1970). How we should measure "change"--or should
we? Psychological Bulletin, 74, 68-80. #(29)

Cronbach, L.J., & Meehl, P.E. (1955). Construct validity in psychological
tests. Psychological Bulletin, 52, 281-302. #(29)

Cronbach, L.J., & Shapiro, K. (1982). The limited research of internal
validity. In L.J. Cronbach & K. Shapiro (Eds.), Designing evaluations of
educational and social programs (pp. 112-157). San Francisco: Jossey-Bass.
#(29), #(38)

Cronbach, L.J., & Snow, R.E. (1977). Aptitudes and instructional methods: A
handbook on research for interactions. New York: Irvington Press. #(29),
#(34)

Cronbach, L.J., & Snow, R.E. (1977). Interaction of abilities with variations
in instructional programming. In L.J. Cronbach & R.E. Snow, Aptitudes and
instructional methods: A handbook for research on interactions (pp. 175-215).
New York: Irvington Press. #(25), #(38)

Cronbach, L.J., & Snow, R.E. (1977). Interaction of abilities with variations
in curriculum and instruction. In L.J. Cronbach & R.E. Snow, Aptitudes and
instructional methods: A handbook for research on interactions (pp. 295-340).
New York: Irvington Press. #(25), #(38), #(5)

Cronbach, L.J., & Snow, R.E. (1977). Cognitive skills, structures, and
styles. In L.J. Cronbach & R.E. Snow, Aptitudes and instructional methods: A
handbook for research on interactions (pp. 341-391). New York: Irvington
Press. #(25), #(38)

Cronbach, L.J., & Snow, R.E. (1977). What do we know about ATI? What should
we learn? In L.J. Cronbach & R.E. Snow, Aptitudes and instructional methods:
A handbook for research on interactions (pp. 492-522). New York: Irvington
Press. #(25), #(38)

Crooks, T.J. (1988). The impact of classroom evaluation practices on
students. Review of Educational Research, 58, 438-481. #(32), #(29)

Crosby, K.G. (1972). Attention and distractibility in mentally retarded and
intellectually average children. American Journal of Mental Deficiency, 77,
46-53. #(1), #(45)

Crosby, K.G. (1976). Essentials of active programming. Mental Retardation,
14(2), 3-9. #(9), #(21)

Crossley, R. (1991). Communication training involving facilitated communica-
tion. Communicating Together, 9(2), 19-22. #(30)

Crossley, R. (1992). Lending a hand--A personal account of facilitated
communication training. American Journal of Speech-Language Pathology, 2,
18-21. #(30)

Crossley, R. (1992). Getting the words out: Case studies in facilitated
communication training. Topics in Language Disorders, 12, 46-59. #(30)

Crossley, R., & McDonald, A. (1980). Annie's coming out. New York: Penguin
Books. #(30), #(2)

Crossley, R., & Remington-Gurney, J. (1992). Getting the words out:
Facilitated communication training. Topics in Language Disorders, 12(4),
29-45. #(30)

Crowder, R.G. (1978). Sensory memory systems. In E.C. Carterette & M.P.
Friedman (Eds.), Handbook of perception, Vol. 8: Perceptual coding (pp.
343-373). New York: Academic Press. #(38), #(12), #(11)

Crowder, R.G. (1984). Broadbent's Maltese cross memory model: Wisdom, but not
especially unconventional. Behavioral and Brain Sciences, 7, 72, 91-94. #(11)

Crowell, C.R., Anderson, D.C., Abel, D.M., & Sergio, J.P. (1988). Task clari-
fication, performance feedback and social praise: Procedures for improving 
the customer service of bank tellers. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 
21, 65-71. #(3), #(27)

Cruickshank, W. (1961). A Teaching method for hyperactive children. Syracuse,
NY: Syracuse University Press. #(34), #(4)

Cruickshank, W. (1977). Myths and realities in learning disabilities. Journal
of Learning Disabilities, 10, 57-64. #(28)

Cudney, S.A. et al. (1969). Therapeutic recreation for the profoundly
retarded. Therapeutic Recreation Journal, 3, 1-42. #(21), #(14)

Culp, D. (1987). Outcome measurement: The impact of communication augmenta-
tion. Seminars in Speech and Language, 8, 169-181. #(30)

Cumming, W.W., & Berryman, R. (1965). The complex discriminated operant:
Studies of matching-to-sample and related problems. In D.I. Mostofsky (Ed.),
Stimulus generalization (pp. 284-330). Stanford, CA: Stanford University
Press. #(6), #(7), #(38), #(3)

Cummins, R.A., & Prior, M.P. (1992). Autism and assisted communication: A
response to Biklen. Harvard Educational Review, 62, 228-241. #(2), #(30)

Cunningham, J.G., & Weaver, S.L. (1989). Young children's knowledge of their
memory span: Effects of task and experience. Journal of Experimental Child
Psychology, 48, 3244. #(11)

Curcio, F. (1978). Sensorimotor functioning and communication in mute
autistic children. Journal of Autism and Childhood Schizophrenia, 8, 281-292.
#(12), #(2)

Curran, J.J., & Algozzine, B. (1980). Ecological disturbance: A test of the
matching hypothesis. Behavioral Disorders, 5, 159-172. #(4)

Curtis, J.F. (1987). The place of computers in education. In J.F. Curtis
(Ed.), An introduction to microcomputers in speech, language, and hearing
(pp. 73-81). San Diego, CA: CollegeHill Press. #(16), #(38)

Curtis, J.F. (1987). Computers in the speech clinic. In J.F. Curtis (Ed.), An
introduction to microcomputers in speech, language, and hearing (pp. 83-101).
San Diego, CA: CollegeHill Press. #(16), #(30), #(38)

Cuvo, A.J. (1975). Developmental differences in rehearsal and free recall.
Journal of Experimental Child Psychology, 19, 265-278. #(11)

Cuvo, A.J., & Davis, P.K. (1983). Behavior therapy and community living
skills. In M. Hersen, R.M. Eisler, & P.M. Miller (Eds.), Progress in behavior
modification (Vol. 14, pp. 126-172). New York: Academic Press. #(38), #(27),
#(33), #(3)

Cuvo, A.J., Davis, P.K., O'Reilly, M.F., Mooney, B.M., & Crowley, R. (1992).
Promoting stimulus control with textual prompts and performance feedback for
persons with mild disabilities. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 25,
477-489. #(6), #(9)

Cuvo, A.J., & Klatt, K.P. (1992). Effects of community-based, videotape, and
flash card instruction of community-referenced sight words on students with
mental retardation. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 25, 499-512. #(45),
#(27)

Cuvo, A.J., Klevans, L., Borakove, S., Borakove, L.S., Landuyt, J.V., &
Lutzker, R. (1980). A comparison of three strategies for teaching object
names. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 13, 249-257. #(9)

Cuvo, A.J., Leaf, R.B., & Borakove, L.S. (1978). Teaching janitorial skills
to the mentally retarded: Acquisition, generalization, and maintenance.
Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 11, 345-355. #(45), #(33), #(7)

Cuvo, A.J., & Riva, M.T. (1980). Generalization and transfer between
comprehension and production: A comparison of retarded and nonretarded
persons. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 13, 315-331. #(7), #(45),
#(30)

Cuvo, A.J., Veitch, V.D., Trace, M.W., & Konke, J.L. (1978). Teaching change
computation to the mentally retarded. Behavior Modification, 2, 531-548.
#(33)

Cyert, R., & March, J. (1963). A behavioral theory of the firm. Englewood
Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall. #(34), #(42)

Dahlgren, S.O., & Gillberg, C. (1989). Symptoms in the first two years of
life: A preliminary population study of infantile autism. European Archives
of Psychiatry and Neurological Sciences, 238, 169-174. #(2)

Dalston, R.M. (1983). Computer-generated reports of speech and language
evaluations. Cleft Palate Journal, 20, 227-237. #(16), #(14), #(29)

Dalton, B.M., & Bedrosian, J.L. (1989). Communicative performance of
adolescents with severe speech impairment: Influence of context. Journal of
Speech and Hearing Disorders, 54, 403-421. #(30), #(21)

Damasio, A., & Maurer, R. (1978). A neurological model for childhood autism.
Archives of Neurology, 35, 777-786. #(2)

D'Amelio (1971). Severely retarded children: Wider horizons. Columbus, OH:
Charles E. Merrill. #(21), #(34)

Damico, J.S. (1985). Clinical discourse analysis: A functional approach to
language assessment. In C.S. Simon (Ed.), Communication skills and classroom
success (pp. 165-203). San Diego, CA: College-Hill Press. #(30), #(38), #(29)

Damico, J.S., Oller, J.W., & Storey, M.E. (1983). The diagnosis of language
disorders in bilingual children: Pragmatic and surface-oriented criteria.
Journal of Speech and Hearing Disorders, 48, 385-394. #(30)

Daneman, M., & Carpenter, P.A. (1980). Individual differences in working
memory and reading. Journal of Verbal Leaning and Verbal Behavior, 19,
450-466. #(11)

Daniel, W.J. (1943). An experimental note on the O'Kelly-Steckle reaction.
Journal of Comparative Psychology, 35, 267-268. #(21)

Daniloff, J., & Shafer, A. (1981). A gestural communication program for
severely-profoundly handicapped children. Language, Speech, and Hearing
Services in Schools, 12, 258-268. #(30)

Dannemiller, J.L., & Stephens, B.R. (1988). A critical test of infant pattern
preference models. Child Development, 59, 210-216. #(6), #(11)

Darcy, R.L. (1980). Ambiguity in program evaluation. Educational Researcher,
9(4), 24-25. #(29)

Darwin, C. (1959). The origin of species. London: Murray. #(34), #(25)

Darwin, C. (1871). The descent of man. London: Murray. #(34), #(25)

Das, J.P. (1978). Attention. In J.P. Das & D. Baine (Eds.), Mental retarda-
tion for special educators (pp. 31-47). Springfield, IL: Charles C Thomas.
#(1), #(38)

Das, J.P. (1984). Simultaneous and successive processing in children with
reading disabilities. Topics in Language Disorders, 4, 34-47. #(17), #(11)

Das, J.P., & Melnyk, L. (1989). Attention Checklist: A rating scale for
mildly handicapped adolescents. Psychological Reports, 64, 1267-1274. #(1),
#(44)

Datta, L. (1980). Changing times: The study of federal programs supporting
educational change and the case for local problem solving. Teachers College
Record, 82, 101-116. #(42)

Datta, L. (1976). Does it work when it has been tried? And half full or half
empty? Journal of Career Education, 2(3), 38-55. #(29)

Dattilo, J. (1986). Computerized assessment of preference for severely
handicapped individuals. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 19, 445-448.
#(16), #(21) 

Dattilo, J., & Camarata, S. (1991). Facilitating conversation through self-
initiated augmentative communication treatment. Journal of Applied Behavior
Analysis, 24, 369-378. #(30) 

Davenport, R.K., & Berkson, G. (1963). Stereotyped movements of mental
defectives: II. Effects of novel objects. American Journal of Mental
Deficiency, 67, 879-882. #(21)

Davey, B., & Macready, G.B. (1985). Prerequisite relations among inference
tasks for good and poor readers. Journal of Educational Psychology, 77,
539-552. #(17)

Davids, A. (1975). Therapeutic approaches to children in residential
treatment: Changes from mid-1950's to the mid-1970's. American Psychologist,
30, 809-814. #(39)

Davidson, R.L. (1979). Declining achievement can be reversed. Educational
Leadership, 37, 216-220. #(26)

Davies, D.R. (1983). Attention, arousal, and effort. In A. Gale & J.A.
Edwards (Eds.), Physiological correlates of human behaviour (pp. 9-34).
London: Academic Press. #(38), #(2), #(25)

Davis, G.A. (1986). Pragmatics and treatment. In R. Chapey (Ed.), Language
intervention strategies in adult aphasia (2nd ed., pp. 251-265). Baltimore:
Williams & Wilkins. #(30), #(38)

Davis, H., & Silverman, S.R. (Eds.). (1978). Hearing and deafness (4th ed.).
New York: Holt, Rinehart and Winston. #(34), #(21)

Davis, K.V., Sprague, R.L., & Werry, J.S. (1969). Stereotyped behavior and
activity level in severe retardates: The effect of drugs. American Journal of
Mental Deficiency, 73, 721-727. #(21)

Davis, M. (1983, July). The chip at 35. Personal Computing, pp. 127-131.
#(16)

Davis, W.L., & Davis, D.E. (1972). Internal-external control attribution of
responsibility for success and failure. Journal of Personality, 40, 123-136.
#(18), #(25)

Davison, G.C. (1973). Counter-control in behavior modification. In L.A.
Hamerlynck, L.C. Handy, & E.J. Mash (Eds.), Behavior change: Methodology,
concepts and practice (pp. 153-167). Champaign, IL: Research Press. #(3),
#(38)

Davison, G.C., & Stuart, R.B. (1975). Behavior therapy and civil liberties.
American Psychologist, 30, 755-763. #(3), #(10)

Davison, M., & McCarthy, D. (1988). The matching law: A research review.
Hillsdale, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum. #(3), #(14), #(34), #(32)

Dawson, G. (Ed.). (1989). Autism: Nature, diagnosis and treatment. New York:
Guilford Press. #(2), #(34)

Dawson, G., & Adams, A. (1984). Imitation and social responsiveness in
autistic children. Journal of Abnormal Child Psychology, 12, 209-225. #(2),
#(41), #(37)

Dawson, G., & Galpert, L. (1986). A developmental model for facilitating the
social behavior of autistic children. In E. Schopler & G. Mesibov (Eds.),
Social problems in autism (pp. 237-261). New York: Plenum Press. #(38), #(2),
#(37)

Dawson, G., & Lewy, A. (1989). Arousal, attention, and the socioemotional
impairments of individuals with autism. In G. Dawson (Ed.), Autism: Nature,
diagnosis and treatment (pp. 49-74). New York: Guilford Press. #(1), #(2),
#(38)

Day, M.C. (1975). Developmental trends in visual scanning. In H.W. Reese
(Ed.), Advances in child development and behavior (pp. 153-193). New York:
Academic Press. #(38), #(25), #(12)

Day, M.C. (1980). Selective attention by children and adults to pictures
specified by color. Journal of Experimental Child Psychology, 30, 277-289.
#(1)

Day, P.S. (1976). Language development: Structure and function. New York:
Holt, Rinehart & Winston. #(30), #(34)

Day, R.M., Rea, J.A., Schussler, N.G., Larsen, S.E., & Johnson, W.L. (1988).
A functionally based approach to the treatment of self-injurious behavior.
Behavior Modification, 12, 565-589. #(3), #(19), #(21)

Deacon, J.R., & Konarski, E.A. (1987). Correspondence training: An example of
rule-governed behavior? Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 20, 391-400.
#(3), #(30)

Deci, E.L. (1971). Effects of externally mediated rewards on intrinsic
motivation. Journal of Personality and Social Psychology, 18, 105-115. #(3),
#(14)

Deci, E.L. (1972). Intrinsic motivation, extrinsic, reinforcement and
inequity. Journal of Personality and Social Psychology, 22, 113-120. #(3),
#(14)

Deibert, A.N., & Harmon, A.J. (1973). New tools for changing behavior.
Champaign, IL: Research Press. #(3), #(34)

Deich, R.F., & Hodges, P.M. (1982). Teaching nonvocal communication to
nonverbal retarded children. Behavior Modification, 6, 200-228. #(30)

Deitz, S.M. (1978). Current status of applied behavior analysis: Science
versus technology. American Psychologist, 33, 805-814. #(3)

Deitz, S.M., & Malone, L.W. (1985). Stimulus control terminology. The
Behavior Analyst, 8, 259-264. #(6)

Deitz, S.M., Repp, A.C., & Deitz, D.E.D. (1976). Reducing inappropriate
classroom behavior of retarded students through three procedures of
differential reinforcement. Journal of Mental Deficiency Research, 20,
155-170. #(3), #(9), #(14) 

de Koning, E.B.G., & Dekker, F.W. (1990). Psychological problems with hair
loss in general practice and the treatment policies of general practitioners.
Psychological Reports, 67, 775-558. #(3)

de Jung, J., & Spence, J. (1975). Decision support model for program
evaluation. Education and Training of the Mentally Retarded, 10, 299-301.
#(29)

Delacato, C. (1966). Neurological organization and reading. Springfield, IL:
Charles C Thomas. #(34), #(12)

Delacato, C. (1974). The ultimate stranger: The autistic child. New York:
Doubleday. #(34), #(2)

DeLissovoy, V. (1961). Headbanging in early childhood: A study of incidence.
Journal of Pediatrics, 58, 803-805. #(3), #(21)

DeLissovoy, V. (1962). Headbanging in early childhood. Child Development, 33,
43-56. #(3), #(21), #(39)

DeLissovoy, V. (1964). Headbanging in early childhood: Review of empirical
studies. Pediatric Digest, 6, 49-55. #(3), #(21), #(39), #(32)

DeLoache, J.S., Strauss, M.S., & Maynard, J. (1979). Picture perception in
infancy. Infant Behavior and Development, 2, 77-89. #(11)

Delquadri, J., Greenwood, C.R., Whorton, D., Carta, J.J., & Hall, R.V.
(1986). Classwide peer tutoring. Exceptional Children, 52, 535-542. #(36)

DeMarie-Dreblow, D., & Miller, P.H. (1988). The development of children's
strategies for selective attention: Evidences for a transitional period.
Child Development, 59, 1504-1513. #(1)

Dempster, F.N. (1981). Memory span: Sources of individual and developmental
differences. Psychological Bulletin, 89, 63-100. #(11) 

Dempster, F.N. (1987). Time and the production of classroom learning: Dis- 
cerning implications from basic research. Educational Psychologist, 22,
1-21. #(26)

DeMyer, M.K. (1976). The nature of the neuropsychological disability in
autistic children. In. E. Schopler & R. Richter (Eds.), Psychopathology and
child development (pp. 93-113). #(12), #(21), #(2), #(38)

DeMyer, M.K. (1976). Motor, perceptual-motor and intellectual disabilities of
autistic children. In L. Wing (Ed.), Early childhood autism (pp. 169-193).
New York: Pergamon Press. #(12), #(21), #(2), #(38)

DeMyer, M.K., Barton, S., Alpern, G., Kimberlin, C., Allen, J., Yang, E., &
Steele, R. (1974). The measured intelligence of autistic children. Journal of
Autism and Childhood Schizophrenia, 4, 42-60. #(2)

DeMyer, M.K., Barton, S., DeMyer, W.E., Norton, J.A., Allen, J., & Steele,
R. (1973). Prognosis in autism: A follow-up study. Journal of Autism and
Childhood Schizophrenia, 3, 199-246. #(21), #(2)

DeMyer, M.K., & Ferster, C.B. (1962). Teaching new social behavior to schizo-
phrenic children. Journal of the American Acdemy of Child Psychiatry, 1, 443-
461. #(2), #(37)

DeMyer, M.K., Hingtgen, J.N., & Jackson, R.K. (1981). Infantile autism
reviewed: A decade of research. Schizophrenia Bulletin, 7, 388-451. #(32),
#(2)

Denckla, M.B. (1986). Editorial: New diagnostic criteria for autism and
related behavioral disorders--guidelines for research protocols. Journal of
Academic Child Adolescent Psychiatry, 25, 221-224. #(29), #(2)

Denney, D.R. (1975). Developmental changes in concept utilization among
normal and retarded children. Developmental Psychology, 11, 359-368. #(25)

Deno, E. (1970). Special education as developmental capital. Exceptional
Children, 37, 229-237. #(42)

Deno, S.L. (1985). Curriculum-based measurement: The emerging alternative.
Exceptional Children, 52, 219-231. #(29)

DeStefano, L. (1990). Designing and implementing program evaluation. In F.R.
Rusch (Ed.), Supported Employment: Models, methods, and issues (pp. 229-246).
Sycamore, IL: Sycamore Publishing Co. #(33), #(38)

Detterman, D.K. (1974). MR is MR is MR: Mental retardation and the philosophy
of science. Mental Retardation, 12(5), 26-29. #(45)

Detterman, D.K. (1979). Memory in the mentally retarded. In. N.R. Ellis
(Ed.), Handbook of mental deficiency: Psychological theory and research (2nd
ed., pp. 727-760). Hillsdale, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum. #(25), #(38), #(45)

Detterman, D.K. (1987). Theoretical notions of intelligence and mental
retardation. American Journal of Mental Deficiency, 92, 2-11. #(11), #(21),
#(45)

Detterman, D.K. (Ed.). (1993). Individual differences and cognition. Norwood,
NJ: Ablex. #(34), #(25)

Detterman, D.K., & Sternberg, R.J. (Eds.). (1982). How and how much can
intelligence be increased. Norwood, NJ: Ablex. #(34), #(11)

Detterman, D.K., & Sternberg, R.J. (Eds.). (1993). Transfer on trial:
Intelligence, cognition, and instruction. Norwood, NJ: Ablex. #(34), #(25),
#(7)

Deutsch, D., & Deutsch, J.A. (Eds.). (1975). Short-term memory. New York: 
Academic Press. #(34), #(11)

Deutsch, J.A., & Deutsch, D. (1963). Attention: Some theoretical consider-
ations. Psychological Review, 70, 80-90. #(1)

Devany, J.M., Hayes, S.C., & Nelson, R.O. (1986). Equivalence class formation
in language-able and language-disabled children. Journal of the Experimental
Analysis of Behavior, 46, 243-257. #(30)

Devany, J.M., & Rincover, A. (1982). Self-stimulatory behavior and sensory
reinforcement. In R.L. Koegel, A. Rincover, & A.L. Egel (Eds.), Educating and
understanding autistic children (pp. 127-141). San Diego: College-Hill Press.
#(20), #(2), #(38), #(14)

Devany, J.M., Rincover, A., & Lovaas, O.I. (1981). Teaching speech to
nonverbal children. In J.M. Kauffman & D.P. Hallahan (Eds.), Handbook of
special education (pp. 512-529). Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall. #(30),
#(38)

Dever, R.B. (1989). A taxonomy of community living skills. Exceptional
Children, 55, 395-404. #(33), #(27)

Dever, R.B. (1990). Defining mental retardation from an instructional
perspective. Mental Retardation, 28, 147-153. #(45)

DeVillers, P.A., & DeVillers, J.G. (1978). Language acquisition. Cambridge,
MA: Harvard University Press. #(34), #(30)

DeVilliers, J.G., & DeVilliers, P.A. (1986). The acquisition of English. In
D.I. Slobin (Ed.), Cross-linguistic study of language acquisition (pp.
27-139). Hillsdale, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum. #(38), #(30)

DeVilliers, J.G., & Flusberg, H.B. (1975). Some facts one simply cannot deny.
Journal of Child Language, 2, 279-286. #(25), #(30)

Dewey, J. (1960). The theory of the moral life. New York: Holt, Rinehart and
Winston. (Original work published 1932.) #(23), #(34)

Diana V. Sate Board of Education (1970). C-70-37 (RFP, District Court for
Northern California). #(10)

Dickie, R.F. (1982). Categorical vs. non-categorical conceptions of children:
An issue revisited. Education and treatment of children, 5, 355-404. #(26)

Dicker, S. (1981). Guardianship: Overcoming the last hurdle to civil rights
for the mentally disabled. University of Arkansas Law Review, 4, 485-509.
#(10), #(40), #(45)

Dickerson, D.J., Girardeau, F.L., & Spradlin, J.E. (1964). Verbal pretraining
and discrimination learning by retardates. American Journal of Mental
Deficiency, 68, 474-484. #(6), #(45)

Dickinson, D. (1986). Cooperation, collaboration, and a computer: Integrating
a computer into a first-second grade writing program. Research in the
Teaching of English, 20, 357-378. #(17), #(16)

Dill, W.R., Crowston, W.B., & Elton, E.J. (1965). Strategies for self-
education. Harvard Business Review, 43, 119-130. #(42)

Dilley, G.M. (1969). Retarded women teach self-help skills. Hospital and
Community Psychiatry, 20, 154-155. #(36)

Dimmer, S.A., Carroll, J.L., & Wyatt, G.K. (1990). Uses of humor in
psychotherapy. Psychological Reports, 66, 795-801. #(3), #(18)

Dimond, P.R. (1973). The constitutional right to education: The quiet
revolution. The Hastings Law Journal, 24, 1087-1128. #(10), #(40)

Dineen, J.P., Clark, H.B., & Risley, T.R. (1977). Peer tutoring among
elementary students: Educational benefits to the tutor. Journal of Applied
Behavior Analysis, 10, 231-238. #(3), #(15), #(36)

Dingman, H.F., & Tarjan, G. (1960). Mental retardation and the normal
distribution curve. American Journal of Mental Deficiency, 64, 991-994. #(45)

Dinsmoor, J.A. (1952). A discrimination based on punishment. Quarterly
Journal of Experimental Psychology, 4, 27-45. #(6), #(14)

Dinsmoor, J.A. (1952). Resistance to extinction following periodic reinforce-
ment in the presence of a discriminative stimulus. Journal of Comparative and
Physiological Psychology, 45, 31-35. #(3), #(14)

Dixon, L.S. (1981). A functional analysis of photo-object matching skills of
severely retarded adolescents. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 14,
465-478. #(6), #(21) 

Dixon, M.H., & Spradlin, J.E. (1976). Establishing stimulus equivalences
among retarded adolescents. Journal of Experimental Child Psychology, 21,
144-164. #(45), #(6)

Dixon, M.H., Dixon, L.S., & Spradlin, J.E. (1983). Analysis of individual
differences of stimulus control among developmentally disabled children. In
K.D. Gadow & I. Bialer (Eds.), Advances in learning and behavior disabilities
(Vol. 2, pp. 85-110). New York: JAI Press. #(38), #(29), #(21), #(6)

Dixon, W.J., Brown, M.B., Engelman, L., & Jenrich, R.I. (Eds.). (1990). BMDP
statistical software manual (Vol. 1). Berkeley, CA: University of California
Press. #(16) 

Dodge, K.A., McClaskey, C.L., & Feldman, E. (1985). Situational approach to
the assessment of social competence in children. Journal of Consulting and
Clinical Psychology, 53, 344-355. #(37), #(29)

Dodwell, P.C., Humphrey, G.K., & Muir, D. W. (1987). Shape and pattern
perception. In P. Salapatek & L. Cohen (Eds.), Handbook of infant perception:
II. From perception to cognition (pp. 1-77). New York: Academic Press. #(38),
#(12)

Doherty, J. (1985). The effects of sign characteristics on sign acquisition
and retention: An integrative review of the literature. Augmentative and
Alternative Communication, 1, 108-121. #(30)

Doke, L.A., & Epstein, L.H. (1975). Oral overcorrection: Side effects and
extended applications. Journal of Experimental Child Psychology, 20, 496-511.
#(3), #(14), #(9)

Doleys, D.M., Wells, K.C., Hobbs, S.A., Roberts, M.W., & Cartelli, L.M.
(1976). The effects of a social punishment on noncompliance: A comparison
with timeout and positive practice. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis 9,
471-482. #(3), #(14)

Doll, E.A. (1941). The essentials of an inclusive concept of mental
deficiency. American Journal of Mental Deficiency, 46, 214-219. #(45)

Doll, E.A. (1965). The Vineland Maturity Scale. Circle Pines, MN: American
Guidance Service. #(44)

Doll, E.A. (1975). The measurement of social competence. Circle Pines, MN:
American Guidance Service. #(44)

Domjan, M., & Burkhard, B. (1986). The principles of learning and behavior
(2nd ed.). Monterey, CA: Brooks/Cole. #(34), #(25)

Donnellan, A. (1984). The criterion of the least dangerous assumption.
Behavioral Disorders, 9, 141-150. #(29), #(30)

Donnellan, A. (Ed.). (1985). Classic readings in autism. New York: Teachers
College Press. #(2), #(34)

Donnellan, A., Gossage, L.D., et al. (1977). Teaching makes a difference: A
guide for developing successful classes for autistic and other handicapped
children. Sacramento, CA: California State Department of Education. #(3),
#(21), #(2), #(34)

Donnellan, A., Gossage, L.D., et al. (1977). Components of a discrete trial.
In A. Donnellan, L.D. Gossage et al. (Eds.), Teaching makes a difference: A
guide for developing successful classes for autistic and other handicapped
children (pp. 21-27). Sacramento, CA: California State Department of
Education. #(9), #(2), #(34)

Donnellan, A., & Kilman, E. (1986). Behavioral approaches to social skill
development in autism: Strengths, misapplications and alternatives. In E.
Schopler & G. Mesibov (Eds.), Social behavior in autism (pp. 213-235). New
York: Plenum Press. #(38), #(2), #(3)

Donnellan, A., La Vigna, G.W., Negri-Shoultz, N., & Fassbender, L.L. (1988).
Progress without punishment: Effective approaches for learners with behavior
problems. New York: Teachers College Press. #(3), #(15), #(34)

Donnellan, A., & Mirenda, P.L. (1983). A model for analyzing instructional
components to facilitate generalization for severely handicapped students.
Journal of Special Education, 17, 317-331. #(5), #(7), #(21)

Donnellan, A., Mirenda, P.L., Mesaros, R.A., & Fassbender, L.I. (1984).
Analyzing the communication functions of aberrant behavior. Journal of The
Association for Persons with Severe Handicaps, 9, 201-212. #(30)

Donnellan, A., Sabin, L.A., & Majure, L.A. (1992). Facilitated communication:
Beyond the quandary to the questions. Topics in Language Disorders, 12(4),
69-82. #(30)

Doran, J., & Holland, J.G. (1979). Control by stimulus features during
fading. Journal of the Experimental Analysis of Behavior, 31, 177-187. #(6)

Dore, J. (1974). A pragmatic description of early language development.
Journal of Psycholinguistic Research, 4, 343-350. #(30)

Dore, J. (1975). Holophrases, speech acts, and language universals. Journal
of Child Language, 2, 21-40. #(30)

Dore, J. (1976). Children's illocutionary acts. In R. Freedle (Ed.),
Discourse relations: Comprehension and production. Hillsdale, NJ: Lawrence
Erlbaum. #(30), #(25), #(38)

Dore, J. (1986). The development of conversational competence. In R.L.
Schiefelbusch (Ed.), Language competence: Assessment and intervention (pp.
3-60). London: Taylor and Francis. #(30), #(38), #(29)

Dorry, G.W., & Zeaman, D. (1973). The use of a fading technique in paired-
associate teaching of a reading vocabulary with retardates. Mental Retarda-
tion, 11(6), 3-6. #(3), #(17), #(45)

Dorsey, M.F., Iawata, B.A., Ong, P., & McSween, T.E. (1980). Treatment of
self-injurious behavior using a water mist: Initial response suppression and
generalization. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 13, 343-353. #(3),
#(19), #(7)

Dostoyevsky, F. (1959). The idiot. New York: Dell Publishing. #(34), #(35)

Dostoyevsky, F. (1960). Notes from the underground. New York: Dell Publish-
ing. #(34), #(35)

Dougherty, J.M., & Moran, J.D. (1983). The relationship of Piagetian stages
to mental retardation. Education and Training of the Mentally Retarded, 18,
260-265. #(13), #(45), #(13)

Douglas, V.I. (1972). Stop, look and listen: The problem of sustained
attention and impulse control in hyperactive and normal children. Canadian
Journal of Behavioral Science, 4, 259-282. #(1), #(4)

Douglas, V.I. (1983). Attention and cognitive problems. In M. Rutter (Ed.),
Developmental neuropsychiatry (pp. 280-329). New York: Guilford Press. #(38),
#(1)

Downey, G., & Coyne, J.C. (1990). Children of depressed parents: An
integrative review. Psychological Bulletin, 108, 50-76. #(2), #(48), #(32)

Downing, B., Goetz T., Pursley, N.B., & Swann, J.W. (1974). Accountability in
administration: Responsibilities to clients, staff and the public. Mental
Retardation, 12(3), 10-12. #(26)

Downing, J. (1987). Conversational skills training: Teaching adolescents with
mental retardation to be verbally assertive. Mental Retardation, 25, 147-155.
#(45), #(30), #(37)

Doyle, E.S., & Prutting, C. (1988). Characteristics of symbolic play in
language-disordered children. Human Communication Canada/Communication
Humaine, 12(1), 7-17. #(30)

Doyle, P.M., Wolery, M., Ault, M.J., & Gast, D.L. (1988). System of least
prompts: A literature review of procedural parameters. JASH, 13, 28-40.
#(29), #(9), #(32)

Doyle, R.B., Anderson, R.P., & Halcomb, C.G. (1976). Attention deficits and
the effects of visual distraction. Journal of Learning Disabilities, 9,
48-54. #(1)

Doyle, W. (1983). Academic work. Review of Educational Research, 53, 159-199.
#(5)

Doyle, W. (1986). Classroom organization and management. In M.C. Wittrock
(Ed.), Handbook of research on teaching (3rd ed., pp. 392-431). New York:
Macmillan. #(5), #(38)

Drabman, R.S., & Creedon, D.L. (1979). "Marking Timeout": A procedure for
away from home disruptive behavior. Child Behavior Therapy, 1, 99-101. #(3)

Drabman, R.S., Hammer, D., & Rosenbaum, M.S. (1979). Assessing generalization
in behavior modification with children: The generalization map. Behavior
Assessment, 1, 203-219. #(3), #(7), #(29)

Drabman, R.S., & Spitalnik, R. (1973). Social isolation as a punishment
procedure: A controlled study. Journal of Experimental Child Psychology, 16,
236-249. #(3), #(14)

Drabman, R.S., Spitalnik, R., & O'Leary, K.D. (1973). Teaching self-control
to disruptive children. Journal of Abnormal Psychology, 82, 10-16. #(4)

Drabman, R.S., & Tucker, R. (1974). Why classroom token economies fail.
Journal of School Psychology, 12, 178-188. #(3), #(15)

Dror, Y. (1964). Muddling through--"Science" or inertia? Public Administra-
tion Review, 24, 153-157. #(26)

Drozdal, J.G., & Flavell, J.V. (1975). A developmental study of logical
search behavior. Child Development, 46, 389-393. #(11)

Drucker, J.F., & Hagen, J.W. (1969). Developmental trends in the processing
of task relevant and task irrelevant information. Child Development, 40,
371-382. #(11)

Dubner, H.W. (1969). A speech pathologist talks to the parents of a nonverbal
child. Rehabilitation Literature, 30(12), 360-362. #(30)

Duchan, J.F. (1983). Autistic children are noninteractive: Or so we say.
Seminars in Speech and Language, 4, 53-61. #(30), #(2), #(37)

Duchan, J.F. (1985). Autistic behavior: Deviant or different. Australian
Journal of Human Communication Disorders, 13, 3-8. #(2)

Duchan, J.F. (1993). Issues raised by facilitated communication for
theorizing and research on autism. Journal of Speech and Hearing Research,
36, 108-119. #(30), #(2)

Duckworth, E. (1973). Piaget takes a teacher's look. Learning, 2(2), 22-27.
#(13)

Duckworth, E. (1979). Either we're too early and they can't learn it or we're
too late and they know it already: The dilemma of "applying Piaget." Harvard
Educational Review, 49, 297-312. #(13)

Dudley, J.R. (1988). Discovering the community living arrangements--
Neighborhood equations. Mental Retardation, 26, 25-32. #(27), #(45)

Dugdale, N., & Lowe, C.F. (1990). Naming and stimulus equivalence. In D.E.
Blackman & H. Lejeune (Eds.), Behavior analysis in theory and practice:
Contributions and controversies (pp. 115-138). Hillsdale, NJ: Lawrence
Erlbaum. #(38), #(6), #(21)

Duker, P.C., & Michielsen, H. (1983). Cross-setting generalization of manual
signs to verbal instructions with severely retarded children. Applied
Research in Mental Retardation, 4, 29-40. #(3), #(30), #(7), #(21), #(45)

Duker, P.C., & Moonen, X.M. (1985). A program to increase manual signs with
severely/profoundly mentally retarded students in natural environments.
Applied Research in Mental Retardation, 6, 147-148. #(30), #(45)

Duker, P.C., & Morsink, H. (1984). Acquisition and cross-setting generaliza-
tion of manual signs with severely retarded individuals. Journal of Applied
Behavior Analysis, 17, 93-103. #(30), #(7), #(21)

Dukes, W.F. (1965). N = 1. Psychological Bulletin, 64, 74-79. #(43)

Dunham, B. (1962). Man against myth. New York: McGraw-Hill. #(34), #(35)

Dunham, P.J. (1968). Contrasted conditions of reinforcement: A selective
critique. Psychological Bulletin, 69, 295-315. #(3), #(14)

Dunkin, M. (1978). Student characteristics, classroom processes, and student
achievement. Journal of Educational Psychology, 70, 998-1009. #(42), #(26)

Dunkin, M., & Biddle, B.J. (1974). The study of teaching. New York: Holt,
Rinehart and Winston. #(34), #(15), #(35)

Dunlap, G. (1984). The influence of task variation and maintenance tasks on
the learning and affect of autistic children. Journal of Experimental Child
Psychology, 37, 41-64. #(2), #(5), #(7)

Dunlap, G., Dyer, K., & Koegel, R.L. (1983). Autistic self-stimulation and
inter-trial interval duration. American Journal of Mental Deficiency, 88,
194-202. #(2), #(3)

Dunlap, G., & Egel, A.L. (1982). Motivational techniques. In R.L. Koegel, A.
Rincover, & A.L. Egel (Eds.), Educating and understanding autistic children
(pp. 106-126). San Diego: College-Hill Press. #(3), #(2), #(38)

Dunlap, G., & Koegel, R.L. (1980). Programming the delivery of instructions
or autistic children. In B. Wilcox & A. Thompson (Eds.), Critical issues in
educating autistic children and youth (pp. 89-117). Washington, DC:
Department of Education, Office of Special Education. #(9), #(2), #(38)

Dunlap, G., & Koegel, R.L. (1980). Motivating autistic children through
stimulus variation. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 13, 619-627. #(3),
#(2)

Dunlap, G., Koegel, R.L., & Burke, J.C. (1981). Educational implications of
stimulus overselectivity in autistic children. Exceptional Education
Quarterly, 2(3), 37-49. #(6), #(2)

Dunlap, G., Koegel, R.L., & Egel, A.L. (1979). Autistic children in school.
Exceptional Children, 45, 552-558. #(21), #(2)

Dunlap, G. Koegel, R.L., Johnson, J., & O'Neill, R.E. (1987). Maintaining
performance of autistic clients in community settings with delayed contingen-
cies. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 20, 185-191. #(27), #(2)

Dunlap, G., Koegel, R.L., & O'Neill, R.E. (1985). Pervasive developmental
disorders. In P. H. Bornstein & A. E. Kazdin (Eds.), Handbook of clinical
behavior therapy with children (pp. 499-540). New York: Dorsey Press. #(25),
#(38)

Dunn, L.M. (1968). Special education for the mildly retarded--Is much of it
justifiable? Exceptional Children, 35, 5-22. #(23)

Dunn, L.M. (Ed.). (1973). Exceptional children in the schools: Special
education in transition (2nd ed.). New York: Holt, Rinehart and Winston.
#(23), #(34)

Dunn, L.M., & Dunn, L. (1981). Peabody Picture Vocabulary Test--Revised.
Circle Pines, MN: American Guidance Service. #(44)

Dunn, L.M., Horton, K.B., & Smith, J.O. (1981). Peabody Language Development
Kits-Revised. Circle Pines, MN: American Guidance Service. #(2), #(30), #(44)

Dunn, L.M., & Markwardt, F.C. (1989). Peabody Individual Achievement Test--
Revised. Circle Pines, MN: American Guidance Service. #(44)

Dunn, M. (1982). Pre-sign language motor skills. Tucson, AZ: Communication
Skills builders. #(30)

Dunn, R. (1983). Learning style and its relation to exceptionality at both
ends of the spectrum. Exceptional Children, 49, 496-505. #(23)

Dunn, R., Dunn, K., & Price, G.E. (1977). Diagnosing learning styles: A
prescription for avoiding malpractice suits. Phi Delta Kappan, 58, 418-420.
#(10)

Dunst, C.J. (1979). Program evaluation and the education for all handicapped
children act. Exceptional Children, 9, 24-31. #(29)

Duquette, C. (1985). Formative evaluation of courseware: One instrument.
Educational Technology, 25(2), 20-23. #(29)

Dura, J.R., Mulick, J.A., & Hammer, D. (1988). Rapid clinical evaluation of
sensory integrative therapy for self-injurious behavior. Mental Retardation,
26, 83-87. #(19)

Durand, V.M. (1986). Self-injurious behavior as intentional communication. In
K.D. Gadow (Ed.), Advances in learning and behavioral disabilities (pp.
141-155). Greenwich, CT: JAI Press. #(3), #(28), #(38)

Durand, V.M. (1987). "Look homeward angel:" A call to return to our
(functional) roots. The Behavior Analyst, 10, 299-302. #(3)

Durand, V.M. (1990). Severe behavior problems: A functional communication
training approach. New York: Guildford Press. #(34), #(30), #(4)

Durand, V.M., & Carr, E.G. (1985). Self-injurious behavior: Motivating
conditions and guidelines for treatment. School Psychology Review, 14,
171-176. #(3), #(19)

Durand, V.M., & Carr, E.G. (1987). Social influences on "self-stimulatory"
behavior: Analysis and treatment application. Journal of Applied Behavior
Analysis, 20, 119-132. #(3), #(20)

Durand, V.M., & Carr, E.G. (1988). Autism. In V.V. Hasselt, P. Strain, & M.
Hersen (Eds.), Handbook of developmental and physical disabilities. New York:
Pergamon Press. #(2), #(38), #(21)

Durand, V.M., & Carr, E.G. (1991). Functional communication training to
reduce challenging behavior: Maintenance and application in new settings.
Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 24, 251-264. #(30), #(7), #(4)

Durand, V.M., & Crimmins, D.B. (1988). Identifying the variables maintaining
self-injurious behavior. Journal of Autism and Developmental Disorders, 18,
99-117. #(19)

Durkheim, E. (1951). Suicide. New York: Free Press. #(34), #(25), #(19)

Dussault, W.L.E. (1989). Is a policy of exclusion based upon severity of dis-
ability legally defensible? In F. Brown & D.H. Lehr (Eds.), Persons with pro-
found disabilities: Issues and practices (pp. 43-59). Baltimore: Paul H. 
Brookes. #(38), #(10), #(21)

Dweck, C.S., & Reppucci, N.D. (1973). Learned helplessness and reinforcement
responsibility in children. Journal of Personality and Social Psychology, 25,
109-116. #(25)

Dy, E.B., Strain, P., Fullerton, A., & Stowitschek, J. (1981). Training
institutionalized, elderly mentally retarded persons as intervention agents
for socially isolate peers. Analysis and Intervention in Developmental
Disabilities, 2, 199-215. #(36), #(45)

Dybwad, G., & Herr, S.S. (1979). Unnecessary coercion: An end to involuntary
civil commitment retarded persons. Stanford Law Review, 31, 753-765. #(10),
#(40)

Dye, T.R. (1976). Policy analysis. University, AL: University of Alabama
Press. #(23), #(34)

Dyer, K., Schwartz, I.S., & Luce, S.C. (1984). A supervision for increasing
functional activities for severely handicapped students in a residential
setting. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 17, 249-259. #(27), #(21)

Dykman, R.A., & Ackerman, P.T. (1991). Attention deficit disorder and
specific reading disability: Separate but often overlapping disorders.
Journal of Learning Disabilities, 24, 96-103. #(1), #(28)

Dykman, R.A., Ackermna, P.T., Clements, S.D., & Peters, J.E. III. (1971).
Specific learning disabilities: An attentional deficit syndrome. In H.R.
Mykelbust (Ed.), Progress in learning disabilities (Vol. 2, pp. 56-93). New
York: Grune & Stratton. #(1), #(28) 

Ebel, R.L. (1978). The case for minimum competency testing. Phi Delta Kappan,
59, 546-552. #(26), #(29)

Ebel, R.L. (1982). Three radical proposals for strengthening education. Phi
Delta Kappan, 63, 375-380. #(26)

Eberlin, M., McConncachie, G., Ibel, S., & Volpe, L. (1993). Facilitated
communication: A failure to replicate the phenomenon. Journal of Autism and
Developmental Disorders, 23, 507-530. #(30)

Edelson, S.M. (1984). Implications of sensory stimulation in self-destructive
behavior. American Journal of Mental Deficiency, 89, 140-145. #(3), #(12)

Edelstein, B. (1989). Generalization: Terminological, methodological, and con-
ceptual issues. Behavior Therapy, 20, 311-324. #(7)

Edgar, C.L., Ball, T.S., McIntyre, R.B., & Shotwell, M. (1969). Effects of
sensory motor training on adaptive behavior. American Journal of Mental
Deficiency, 73, 425-431. #(12)

Edgar, E., & Billingsley, F. (1974). Believability when N = 1. The Psycholog-
ical Record, 24, 147-160. #(43)

Edgar, E., Spence, W., & Kenowitz, L. (1977). Extended school year for the
handicapped: Is it working? Journal of Special Education, 11, 441-447. #(23)

Edgerton, R.B. (1967). The cloak of competence: Stigma in the lives of the
mentally retarded. Berkeley, CA: University of California Press. #(39),
#(34), #(45)

Edgerton, R.B., & Bercovici, S.M. (1976). The cloak of competence: Years
later. American Journal of Mental Deficiency, 80, 485-497. #(39)

Edgerton, R.B., Bollinger, M., & Herr, B. (1984). The cloak of competence:
After two decades. American Journal of Mental Deficiency, 88, 345-351. #(39)

Edmonds, M.H. (1976). New directions in theories of language acquisition.
Harvard Education Review, 46, 175-198. #(30), #(35)

Edmonds, R. (1979). Effective schools for the urban poor. Educational
Leadership, 37, 15-27. #(26)

Edmonds, R. (1979). Some schools work and more can. Social Policy, 9, 25-29.
#(26)

Edmonds, R. (1981). Making public schools effective. Social Policy, 12,
56-60. #(26)

Education for all handicapped children act of 1975. Final regulations.
(1977). Federal Register, 42(163), 42474-42518. #(10)

Education Turnkey Systems, Inc. (1978). Final study design (Vol. 2). Case
study of implementation of P.L. 94-142. Falls Church, VA: Author. #(8), #(10)

Education Turnkey Systems, Inc. (1981). PL 94-142: A study of the implementa-
tion and impact at the state level. Falls Church, VA: Author. #(8), #(10)

Edwards, K.A. (1972). Physical restraint as time-out in therapy. The
Psychological Record, 24, 393-397. #(3)

Egan, I., Fredericks, H.D., & Hendrickson, K. (1985). Teaching associated
work skills to adolescents with severe handicaps. Education and Treatment of
Children, 8, 239-250. #(33)

Egel, A.L. (1980). The effects of constant vs. varied reinforcer presentation
on responding by autistic children. Journal of Experimental Child Psychology,
30, 455-463. #(3), #(2), #(14)

Egel, A.L. (1981). Reinforcer variation: Implications for motivating
developmentally disabled children. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 14,
345-350. #(3), #(14), #(45)

Egel, A.L., Koegel, R.L., & Schreibman, L. (1980). A review of educational
treatment procedures for autistic children. In L. Mann & D. Sabatino (Eds.),
Third review of special education (pp. 130-158). New York: Grune & Stratton.
#(38), #(2), #(9), #(32)

Egel, A.L., Richman, G.S., & Koegel, R.L. (1981). Normal peer models and
autistic children's learning. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 14, 3-12.
#(3), #(2), #(36)

Eich, E. (1984). Memory for unattended events: Remembering with and without
awareness. Memory and Cognition, 12, 105-111. #(11)

Eimas, P.D. (1964). Components and compounds in the discrimination learning
of retarded children. Journal of Experimental Child Psychology, 1, 301-310.
#(6)

Eimas, P.D. (1965). Stimulus compounding in the discrimination learning of
retarded children. Journal of Experimental Child Psychology, 2, 178-185. #(6)

Eimas, P.D. (1969). Multiple cue discrimination learning in children.
Psychological Record, 19, 417-424. #(6)

Eisele, J. (1980). A case for computers in instruction. Journal of Research
and Development in Research, 14, 1-8. #(16) 

Eisenberg, L. (1956). The autistic child in adolescence. American Journal of
Psychiatry, 112, 607-612. #(2)

Eisenberg, R.B. (1976). Auditory competence in early life. Baltimore:
University Park Press. #(2), #(30), #(34)

Eisenberger, R. (1970). Is there a deprivation-satiation function for social
approval? Psychological Bulletin, 74, 255-275. #(37), #(14)

Eisenhart, M., & Howe, K. (1992). Validity in educational research. In M.D.
LeCompte, W.L. Millroy, & J. Preissle (Eds.), The handbook of qualitative
research in education (pp. 643-680). New York: Academic Press. #(38), #(29)

Eisner, E.W. (1981). On the differences between scientific and artistic
approaches to qualitative research. Educational Researcher, 10, 5-9. #(29)

Ekstrand, B.R. (1966). Backward associations. Psychological Bulletin, 65,
50-64. #(6), #(7)

Elbert, M., Young, L.L., & Bruce, K. (1981). A computer program for
distinctive feature analysis. Journal of Communication Disorders, 14,
519-523. #(16)

Elder, J. (1984). Job opportunities for developmentally disabled people.
American Rehabilitation, 12(2), 26-30. #(27), #(45) 

Elder, J.L., & Pederson, D.R. (1978). Preschool children's use of objects in
symbolic play. Child Development. 38, 500-504. #(37)

Elkind, D. (1967). Piaget and Montessori. Harvard Educational Review, 37,
535-545. #(13)

Elkind, D. (1969). Piagetian and psychometric conceptions of intelligence.
Harvard Educational Review, 39, 319-337. #(13)

Elkins, R. (1985). Attitudes of special education personnel toward computers.
Educational Technology, 25(7), 31-34. #(16)

Elliot, R., & Vast, R. (1970). The modeling of sharing: Effects associated

with vicarious reinforcement, symbolization, age, and generalization. Journal
of Experimental Child Psychology, 10, 8-15. #(41), #(7), #(37), #(14)

Ellis, A., & Grieger, R. (Eds.). (1977). Handbook of rational-emotive
therapy. New York: Springer. #(3), #(34)

Ellis, D. (Ed.). (1986). Sensory impairments in mentally handicapped people.
San Diego: College-Hill Press. #(34), #(21)

Ellis, E.S., Deshler, D.D., & Schumaker, J.B. (1989). Teaching adolescents
with learning disabilities to generate and use task-specific strategies.
Journal of Learning Disabilities, 22, 108-119. #(28)

Ellis, N.R. (1963). The stimulus trace and behavioral inadequacy. In N.R.
Ellis (Ed.), Handbook of mental deficiency: Psychological theory and research
(pp. 134-158). New York: McGraw-Hill. #(6), #(7)

Ellis, N.R. (1969). A behavioral research strategy in mental retardation:
Defense and critique. American Journal of Mental Deficiency, 73, 557-566.
#(45), #(3)

Ellis, N.R. (1970). Memory processes in retardates and normals. In N.R. Ellis
(Ed.), International review of research in mental retardation (Vol. 4, pp.
1-32). New York: Academic Press. #(38), #(11), #(45)

Ellis, N.R. (1973). International review of research in mental retardation
(Vol. 6). New York: Academic Press. #(34), #(45)

Ellis, N.R. (1978). Do the mentally retarded have poor memory? Intelligence,
2, 41-54. #(45), #(11)

Ellis, N.R. (1979). The Partlow case: A reply to Dr. Roos. Law and Psychology
Review, 5, 1549. #(10), #(40)

Ellis, N.R. (1981). On training the mentally retarded. Analysis and
Intervention in Developmental Disabilities, 1, 99-108. #(9), #(45)

Ellis, N.R., Balla, D., Estes, O., Warren, S.A., Meyers, C.E., Hollis, J.,
Isaacson, L., Palk, B.E., & Siegel, P.S. (1981). Common sense in the
rehabilitation of mentally retarded persons: A reply to Menolascino and
McGee. Mental Retardation, 19, 221-225. #(21), #(45)

Ellis, N.R., Deacon, J.R., Harris, L.A., Poor, A., Angers, D., Diorio, M.S.,
Watkins, S., Boyd, B.D., & Cavalier, A.R. (1982). Learning, memory, and
transfer in profoundly, severely, and moderately mentally retarded persons.
American Journal of Mental Deficiency, 87, 186-196. #(11), #(21), #(45)

Ellis, N.R., Deacon, J.R., & Woolridge, P.W. (1985). Structural memory
deficits of mentally retarded persons. American Journal of Mental Deficiency,
89, 393-402. #(11), #(45)

Ellis, N.R., McCartney, J.R., Ferretti, R.P., & Cavalier, A.R. (1977).
Recognition memory in mentally retarded persons. Intelligence, 1, 310-317.
#(45), #(11) 

Ellis, N.R, Warren, S.A., Sigel, P.S., Polk, B.E., Meyers, C.E., Hollis, J.,
Haywood, C., O., Bergman, J., Benton, J.W., & Balla, D. (1979). A note on
professional testimony and opinions in the Partlow Case. Mental Retardation,
17, 165-166. #(10), #(45)

Ellis, N.R., & Woolridge, P.W. (1985). Short-term memory for picture and
words by mentally retarded and nonretarded persons. American Journal of
Mental Deficiency, 89, 622-626. #(11), #(45)

Elmore, R.F. (1978). Organizational models of social program implementation.
Public Policy, 26, 184-228. #(8)

Elmore, R.F. (1980). Complexity and control: What legislators and administra-
tors can do about implementing public policy. Washington, DC: NIE. #(8),
#(34)

Elson, J.S. (1985). Suing to make schools effective, or how to make a bad
situation worse: A response to Ratner. Texas Law Review, 63, 889-917. #(40),
#(8)

Emerick, L.L., & Hayner, W.O. (1986). Diagnosis and evaluation in speech
pathology (3rd ed.). Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall. #(34), #(30), #(29)

Emerson, E.B. (1985). Evaluating the impact of deinstitutionalization on the
lives of mentally retarded people. American Journal of Mental Deficiency, 90,
277-288. #(45), #(39)

Emery, F.E., & Trist, E.L. (1965). The casual texture of organizational
environments. Human Relations, 18, 21-32. #(42)

Engle, R.W., Clark, D.D., & Cathcart, J.S. (1980). The modality effect: Is it
a result of different strategies? Journal of Verbal Learning and Verbal
Behavior, 19, 226-239. #(12)

Engelmann, S.E. (1977). Sequencing cognitive and academic tasks. In R.D.
Kneedler & S.G. Tarver (Eds.), Changing perspectives in special education
(pp. 46-61). Columbus, OH: Charles E. Merrill. #(5)

Engelmann, S.E., Becker, W.C., Carnine, D., & Gersten, R. (1988). The Direct
Instruction Follow Through Model: Design and outcomes. Education and
Treatment of Children, 11, 303-317. #(8), #(5), #(29)

Engelmann, S.E., & Bruner, E. (1984). Reading mastery program: DISTAR.
Chicago: Science Research Associates. #(34), #(17)

Engelmann, S.E., & Carnine, D. (1982). Theory of instruction: Principles and
applications. New York: Irvington Press. #(5), #(9), #(34)

Englander, M.E. (1978). The court's corporal punishment mandate to parents,
local authorities, and the profession. Phi Delta Kappan, 59, 529-532. #(10),
#(14)

Englert, C. (1984). Effective direct instruction practices in special
education settings. Remedial and Special Education, 5(2), 38-47. #(9)

English, F. (1970). The differentiated staff: Education's technostructure.
Educational Technology, 2, 24-27. #(42)

Ennis, B.J., & Litwack, T.R. (1974). Psychiatry and the presumption of
expertise: Flipping coins in the courtroom. California Law Review, 62,
693-752. #(10), #(40)

Epstein, B.A. (1989). Generalization: Terminological, methodological and
conceptual issues. Behavior Therapy, 20, 311-324. #(7)

Epstein, L.H., Doke, L.A., Sawaj, T.E., Sorrell, S., & Rimmer, B. (1974).
Generality and side effects of overcorrection. American Journal of Mental
Deficiency, 78, 385-390. #(3), #(7)

Epstein, L.J., Taubman, M.T., & Lovaas, O.I. (1985). Changes in self-stimu-
latory behaviors with treatment. Journal of Abnormal Child Psychology, 13,
281-294. #(20)

Epstein, M.A., Shaywitz, S.E., Shaywitz, B.A., & Woolston, J.L. (1991). The
boundaries of attention deficit disorder. Journal of Learning Disabilities,
24, 78-86. #(1).

Epstein, R. (1977). A listing of the published works of B.F. Skinner, with
notes and comments. Behaviorism, 5, 99-100. #(3)

Epstein, R. (1985). The positive side effects of reinforcement: A commentary
on Balsam and Bondy (1983). Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 18, 73-78.
#(3), #(14)

Erickson, D.A. (1977). Salient teacher attributes. In D.A. Erickson,
Educational organization and administration (pp. 325-334). Berkeley, CA:
McCutchan. #(26), #(38)

Erickson, E. (1959). Identity and the life cycle. New York: International
Press. #(34), #(25), #(35)

Ervin-Tripp, S. (1976). Is Sybil there? The structure of American directives.
Language in Society, 5, 25-66. #(30)

Ervin-Tripp, S (1979). Children's verbal turntaking. In E. Ochs (Ed.),
Developmental pragmatics (pp. 391-414). New York: Academic Press. #(30),
#(38)

Eskes, G.A., Bryson, S.E., McCormick, T.A. (1990). Comprehension of concrete
and abstract words in autistic children. Journal of Autism and Developmental
Disorders, 20, 61-73. #(2), #(30)

Essa, E.L. (1978). The preschool: Setting for applied behavior analysis
research. Review of Educational Research, 48, 537-575. #(3)

Estes, W.K. (1970). Contemporary discrimination learning theories. In W.K.
Estes, Learning theory and mental development (pp. 146-182). New York:
Academic Press. #(6), #(3), #(25), #(38)

Estes, W.K. (1970). Learning theory and mental development. New York:
Academic Press. #(34), #(25)

Estes, W.K. (1974). Learning theory and intelligence. American Psychologist,
29, 740-749. #(25), #(35)

Etzel, B.C., & LeBlanc, J.M. (1979). The simplest treatment alternative: The
law of parsimony applied to choosing appropriate instructional control and
errorless learning procedures for the difficult to teach child. Journal of
Autism and Developmental Disorders, 9, 361-382. #(3), #(15), #(2)

Etzel, B.C., LeBlanc, J.M., Schilmoeller, K.J., & Stella, E.M. (1981).
Stimulus control procedures in the education of young children. In S.W. Bijou
& R. Ruiz (Eds.), Behavior modification: Contributions to education (pp.
3-37). Hillsdale, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum. #(6), #(38)

Etzioni, A. (1967). Mixed-scanning: A "third" approach to decision-making.
Public Administration Review, 27, 385-392. #(42)

Evans, I. (1987). Moving to educational validity: A reply to Test, Spooner,
and Cooke. Journal of the Association for Persons with Severe Handicaps, 12,
103-106. #(29)

Evans, I. (1991). Testing and diagnosis: A review and evaluation. In L.
Meyer, C. Peck, & L. Brown (Eds.), Critical issues in the lives of people
with severe disabilities (pp. 25-44). Baltimore: Paul H. Brookes. #(38),
#(29)

Evans, I., & Meyers, L. (1985). An educative approach to behavior problems:
A practical decision model for interventions with severely handicapped
learners. Baltimore: Paul H. Brookes. #(3), #(15), #(34) 

Evans, I., & Scotti, J.R. (1989). Defining meaningful outcomes for persons 
with profound disabilities. In F. Brown & D.H. Lehr (Eds.), Persons with 
profound disabilities: Issues and practices (pp. 83-107). Baltimore: Paul 
H. Brookes. #(38), #(21), #(5)

Evans, J. (1969). Evaluating social action programs. Social Science
Quarterly, 50, 568-581. #(29)

Evans, R.I. (1968). B.F. Skinner: The man and his ideas. New York: Dutton.
#(3), #(34)

Everett, F.L. (1977). Role of errors in children's discrimination learning.
Perceptual and Motor Skills, 45, 1187-1201. #(6)

Everhart, R.B. (1977). From universalism to usurpation: An essay on the
antecedents to compulsory school attendance legislation. Review of Education-
al Research, 47, 499-530. #(15), #(23)

Evertson, C.M., & Emmer, E.T. (1982). Preventive classroom management. In
D.L. Duke (Ed.), Helping teachers manage classrooms (pp. 2-31). Alexandria,
VA: Association for Supervision and Curriculum Development. #(3), #(38), #(5)

Ewing. M.F. (1979). Health planning and deinstitutionalization: Advocacy
within the administrative process. Stanford Law Review, 31, 679-715. #(27),
#(40)

Eysenck, M.W. (1978). Levels of processing: A critique. British Journal of
Psychology, 69, 157-169. #(11)

Fabry, P.L., & Reid, D.H. (1978). Teaching foster grandparents to train
severely handicapped persons. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 11,
111-123. #(9), #(21), #(46)

Fagan, J.F. (1977). An attentional model of infant recognition. Child
Development, 48, 345-359. #(1)

Fagan, J.F. (1979). The origins of facial pattern recognition. In M.H.
Bornstein & W. Kessen (Eds.), Psychological development from infancy: Image
to intention (pp. 88-96). Hillsdale, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum. #(38), #(12)

Fagan, J.F., & Witryol, S.L. (1966). The effects of instructional set and
delay of reward on children's learning in a simultaneous discrimination task.
Child Development, 37, 433-438. #(27), #(1)

Fain, G.S. (1986). Leisure: A moral imperative. Mental Retardation, 24,
261-263. #(37)

Fajnsztejn-Pollack, G. (1973). A developmental study of decay rate in long-
term memory. Journal of Experimental Child Psychology, 16, 225-235. #(11)

Falck, V.T. (1973). Application of management principles to instructional
methods. Exceptional Children, 39, 401-403. #(5)

Falk, C.T. (1968). Object and pattern discrimination learning by young
children as a function of availability of cues. Child development, 39,
831-923. #(6)

Falvey, M.A. (1986). Community-based curriculum. Baltimore: Paul H. Brookes.
#(34), #(33)

Falvey, M.A. (1989). Community-based curriculum: Instructional strategies for
students with severe handicaps (2nd ed.). Baltimore: Paul H. Brookes. #(33),
#(27), #(34), #(21), #(5) 

Falvey, M., Brown, L., Lyon, S., Baumgart, D., & Schroeder, J. (1980).
Strategies for using cues and correction procedures. In W. Sailor, B. Wilcox,
& L. Brown (Eds.), Methods of instruction for severely handicapped students
(pp. 109-133). Baltimore: Paul H. Brookes. #(3), #(15), #(38), #(21)

Fantz, R.L. (1961). The origin of form perception. Scientific American, 204,
66-72. #(12)

Fantz, R.L. (1964). Visual experience in infants: Decreased attention to
familiar patterns relative to novel ones. Science, 146, 668-670. #(1)

Fantz, R.L. (1966). Pattern discrimination and selective attention as
determinants of perceptual development from birth. In A.H. Kidd & J.L.
Rivoire (Eds.), Perceptual development in children (pp. 144-173). New York:
International Universities Press. #(6), #(1), #(38)

Fantz, R.L., Fagan, J.F., & Miranda, S.B. (1975). Early visual selectivity.
In L.B. Cohen & P. Salapatek (Eds.), Infant perception: From sensation to
cognition. Vol. 1. Basic visual processes (pp. 249-345). New York: Academic
Press. #(6), #(38)

Farkas, G.M., & Tharp, R.G. (1980). Observation procedure, observer gender,
and behavior valence as determinants of sampling error in a behavior
assessment analogue. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 13, 529-536. #(3),
#(29)

Farley, F.H. (1982). The future of educational research. Educational
Researcher, 11, 11-19. #(29)

Farrar, E., DeSanctis, J.E., & Cohen, D.K. (1980). Views from below:
Implementation research in education. Teachers College Record, 82, 77-100.
#(8), #(43)

Farrar, E., DeSanctis, J.E., & Cohen, D.K. (1980). The lawn party: The
evolution of federal programs in local settings. Phi Delta Kappan, 61,
167-171. #(8)

Faust, M.S., & Faust, W.L. (1980). Cognitive constructing: Levels of
processing and developmental change. In B.K. Keogh (Ed.), Advances in special
education (pp. 1-54). Greenwich, CT: JAI Press. #(25), #(38)

Favell, J.E. (1983). The management of aggressive behavior. In E. Schopler & 
G. Mesibov (Eds.), Autism in adolescents and adults (pp. 187-222). New York: 
Plenum. #(38), #(2)

Favell, J.E., Azrin, N.H., Baumeister, A.A., Carr, E.G., Dorsey, M.F.,
Forehand, R., Foxx, R.M., Lovaas, O.I., Rincover, A., Risley, T.R.,
Romanczyk, R.G., Russo, D.C., Schroeder, S.R., & Solnick, J.V. (1982). The
treatment of self-injurious behavior. Behavior Therapy, 13, 529-554. #(3)

Favell, J.E., & Cannon, P.R. (1977). A sample device for protection against
injury during convulsions. Mental Retardation, 15(1), 10-11. #(21), #(45)

Favell, J.E., Favell, J.E., & McGimsley, J.F. (1978). Relative effectiveness
and efficiency of group vs. individual training of severely retarded persons.
American Journal of Mental Deficiency, 83, 104-109. #(3), #(21)

Favell, J.E., McGimsey, J.F., & Jones, M.L. (1978). The use of physical
restraint in the treatment of self-injury and as positive reinforcement.
Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 11, 225-241. #(14), #(19)

Favell, J.E., McGimsley, J.F., Jones, M.L., & Cannon, P.R. (1981). Physical
restraint as positive reinforcement. American Journal of Mental Deficiency,
85, 425-432. #(3), #(4), #(14)

Favell, J.E., & Reid, D.H. (1988). Generalizing and maintaining improvement
in problem behavior. In R.H. Horner, G. Dunlap, & R.L. Koegel (Eds.),
Generalization and maintenance: Life-style changes in applied settings (pp.
171-196). Baltimore: Paul H. Brookes. #(3), #(7), #(38)

Favell, J.E., Risley, T.R., Wolfe, A.F., Riddle, J.I., & Rasmussen, P.R.
(1981). The limits of habilitation: How can we identify them and how can we
change them? Analysis and Intervention in Developmental Disabilities, 1,
37-43. #(27)

Fawcett, S.B. (1991). Social validity: A note on methodology. Journal of Ap-
plied Behavior Analysis, 24, 235-239. #(27)


Fawcett, S.B. (1991). Some values guiding community research and action. Journal
of Applied Behavior Analysis, 24, 621-636. #(43), #(27)

Fawcett, S.B., Mathews, R.M., & Fletcher, R.K. (1980). Some promising
dimensions for behavioral community technology. Journal of Applied Behavior
Analysis, 13, 505-518. #(3), #(27)

Fay, W.H. (1969). On the basis of autistic echolalia. Journal of Communica-
tion Disorders, 2, 31-41. #(30), #(2)

Fay, W.H., & Schuler, L.I. (1980). Emerging language in autistic children.
Baltimore: University Park Press. #(34), #(30), #(2)

Fee, V.E., Matson, J.L., Moore, L.A., & Benavidez, D.A. (1993). The
differential validity of hyperactivity/attention deficits and conduct
problems among mentally retarded children. Journal of Abnormal Child
Psychology, 21, 1-11. #(1), #(4)

Fein, D., Pennington, B., Markowitz, P., Braverman, M., & Waterhouse, L.
(1986). Toward a neuropsychological model of infantile autism: Are the social
deficits primary? Journal of the American Academy of Child Psychiatry, 25,
198-212. #(2), #(37)

Feingold, B.D., & Mahoney, M.J. (1975). Reinforcement effects on intrinsic
interest: Undermining the overjustification hypothesis. Behavior Therapy, 6,
367-377. #(3), #(14)

Feingold, B.F. (1975). Why your child is hyperactive. New York: Random House.
#(34), #(4)

Feldhusen, J., & Sokol, L. (1982). Extra school programming to meet the needs
of gifted youth: Super-Saturday. Gifted Child Quarterly, 26, 51-56. #(50)

Feldman, D.H. (1980). Universal to unique: Mapping the developmental terrain.
In D.H. Feldman, Beyond universals in cognitive development (pp. 1-22).
Norwood, NJ: Ablex Publishing. #(25), #(38)

Feldman, D.H. (1981). Beyond universals: Toward a developmental psychology of
education. Educational Researcher, 10, 21-31. #(25)

Feldmesser, R.A. (1980). Minimum competency as an individual right. In R.J.
Jaeger & C.K. Title (Eds.), Minimum competency achievement testing: Motives,
models, measures, and consequences (pp. 425-437). Berkeley, CA: McCutchan.
#(26), #(38), #(29)

Fellows, B.J. (1967). Chance stimulus sequences for discrimination tasks.
Psychological Bulletin, 67, 87-92. #(6)

Fellows, B.J. (1968). The discrimination process and development. New York:
Pergamon Press. #(6), #(34)

Felton, B.J., & Shinn, M. (1981). Ideology and practice of deinstitutionaliz-
ation. Journal of Social Issues, 37, 158-172. #(35), #(39)

Felton, R.H., Wood, F.B., Brown, L.B., Campbell, J., & Harter, M.R. (1987).
Separate verbal memory and naming deficits in attention deficit disorder and
reading disability. Brain and Language, 31, 171-184. #(1), #(11)

Fenichel, C. (1974). Special education as the basic therapeutic tool in
treatment of severely disturbed children. Journal of Autism and Childhood
Schizophrenia, 4, 177-186. #(21), #(2)

Fenrick, N.J., & Petersen, T.K. (1984). Developing positive changes in
attitudes towards moderately/severely handicapped students through a peer
tutoring program. Education and Training of the Mentally Retarded, 19, 83-90.
#(3), #(36), #(21), #(45)

Fenske, C., Zalenski, S., Krantz, P.J., & McClannahan, L.E. (1985). Age at
intervention and treatment outcome for autistic children in a comprehensive
intervention program. Analysis and Intervention in Developmental Disabili-
ties, 5, 49-58. #(2), #(9)

Fenton, K.S., Yoshida, R.K., Maxwell, J.P., & Kaufman, M.J. (1978).
Recognition of team goals: An essential step toward rational decision making.
Exceptional Children, 44, 588-601. #(42)

Ferleger, D., & Boyd, A. (1979). Anti-institutionalization: The promise of
the Pennhurst case. Stanford Law Review, 31, 717-752. #(10), #(40)

Fernald, G.M. (1943). Remedial techniques in basic school subjects. New York:
McGraw-Hill. #(5)

Ferrari, M., & Harris, S.L. (1981). The limits and motivating potential of
sensory stimuli as reinforcers for autistic children. Journal of Applied
Behavior Analysis, 14, 339-343. #(3), #(2), #(14)

Ferster, C.B. (1953). The use of the free operant in the analysis of
behavior. Psychological Bulletin, 50, 263-274. #(3)

Ferster, C.B. (1961). Positive reinforcement and behavioral deficits of
autistic children. Child Development, 32, 437-456. #(3), #(2), #(14)

Ferster, C.B. (1967). Arbitrary and natural reinforcement. The Psychological
Record, 17, 341-347. #(3), #(14)

Ferster, C.B., & DeMyer, M.K. (1962). A method for the experimental analysis
of the behavior of autistic children. American Journal of Orthopsychiatry,
32, 89-98. #(3), #(2)

Ferster, C.B., & Skinner, B.F. (1957). Schedules of reinforcement. New York:
Appleton-Century-Crofts. #(3), #(14)

Fetterman, D.M. (1982). Ibsen's baths: Reactivity and insensitivity (A
misapplication of the treatment-control design in a national evaluation).
Educational Evaluation and Policy Analysis, 4, 261-279. #(29), #(48)

Feurstein, R., Rand, Y., Hoffman, M.B., & Miller, R. (1980). Instrumental
enrichment. Baltimore: University Park Press. #(25)

Fey, M. (1986). Language intervention with young children. San Diego, CA:
College-Hill Press. #(34), #(30)

Field, D. (1987). A review of preschool conservation training: An analysis of
analyses. Developmental Review, 7, 210-241. #(13), #(32)

Fields, L., Bruno, V., & Keller, K. (1976). The stages of acquisition in
stimulus-fading. Journal of the Experimental Analysis of Behavior, 26,
295-300. #(3), #(6)

Fields, L. Verhave, T., & Fath, S. (1984). Stimulus equivalence and
transitive association: A methodological analysis. Journal of the Experimen-
tal Analysis of Behavior, 42, 143-157. #(6), #(29)

Filler, J.W., Robinson, C.C., Smith, R.A., Vincent-Smith, L.J., Bricker, D.,
& Bricker, W.A. (1975). Mental retardation. In N. Hobbs (Ed.), Issues in the
classification of children (Vol. I, pp. 194-238). San Francisco: Jossey-Bass.
#(21), #(38), #(45) 

Fine, M.J., Nesbitt, J.A., & Tyler, M.M. (1974). Analysis of a failing
attempt at behavior modification. Journal of Learning Disabilities, 7, 12-17.
#(3), #(25), #(28)

Fineman, K.R. (1968). Shaping and increasing verbalizations in an autistic
child in response to visual color stimulation. Perceptual and Motor Skills,
27, 1071-1074. #(2), #(3), #(6)

Finnie, N.R. (1974). Handling the young cerebral palsied child at home (2nd
ed.). New York: E.P. Dutton. #(21), #(34)

Finney, J.W. (1991). Selection of target behaviors and interventions: A case
of necessary but insufficient choices. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis,
24, 213-215. #(5)

Finney, J.W. (1991). On further development of the concept of social validity.
Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 24, 245-249. #(27) 

Firth, G.R. (1977). Ten issues on staff development. Educational Leadership,
35, 215-221. #(42)

Fischer, I., & Glanville, B. (1970). Programmed teaching of autistic
children. Archives of General Psychiatry, 23, 90-94. #(9), #(2)

Fischer, K.W. (1987). Relations between brain and cognitive development.
Child Development, 58, 623-632. #(25)

Fischer, K.W., & Farrar, M.J. (1987). Generalization: How a theory of skill
development explains both generality and specificity. International Journal
of Psychology, 22, 643-677. #(25), #(6), #(7)

Fisher, E.B. (1979). Overjustification effects in token economies. Journal of
Applied Behavior Analysis, 12, 407-415. #(3) 

Fisher, M.A., & Zeaman, D. (1973). An attention-retention theory of retardate
discrimination learning. In N.R. Ellis (Ed.), International review of
research in mental retardation (Vol. 6, pp. 169-256). New York: Academic
Press. #(1), #(38), #(45)

Fisher, W., Piazza, C.C., Bowman, L.G., Hagopian, L.P., Owens, J.C., &
Slevin, I. (1992). A comparison of two approaches for identifying reinforcers
for persons with severe and profound disabilities. Journal of Applied
Behavior Analysis, 25, 491-498. #(45), #(21), #(14) 

Fishler, E. (1979). Meaning in context: Is there any other kind? Harvard
Educational Review, 19, 1-19. #(30), #(25), #(35)

Fitch, K.L., Davis, L.A., Evans, W.B., & Sellers, D.E. (1984). Computer-
managed screening for communication disorders. Language, Speech, and Hearing
Services in Schools, 15, 66-69. #(16)

Fivush, R., & Hamond, N.R. (1989). Time and again: Effects of repetition and
retention interval on 2 year-old's event recall. Journal of Experimental
Child Psychology, 47, 259-273. #(11)

Fixsen, D.L., & Blase, K.A. (1993). Creating new realities: Program develop-
ment and dissemination. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 26, 597-615.
#(42), #(8)

Fixsen, D.L., Phillips, E.L., & Wolf, M.M. (1973). Achievement Place: Experi-
ments in self-government with pre-delinquents. Journal of Applied Behavior
Analysis, 6, 31-47. #(37), #(18)

Flavell, J.H. (1977). Cognitive development. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-
Hall. #(25), #(34)

Flavell, J.H. (1979). Metacognition and cognitive monitoring: A new area of
cognitive-developmental inquiry. American Psychologist, 34, 906-911. #(11),
#(25)

Flavell, J.H. (1982). On cognitive development. Child Development, 53, 1-10.
#(25)

Flavell, J.H., Friedrichs, A.G., & Hoyt, J. D. (1970). Developmental changes
in memorization processes. Cognitive Development, 5, 1-27. #(11), #(25)

Flavell, J.H., Green, F.L., & Flavell, E.R. (1990). Developmental changes in
young children's knowledge about the mind. Cognitive Development, 5, 1-27.
#(25), #(11)

Flavell, J.H., Miller, P.H., & Miller, S.A. (1993). Cognitive Development
(3rd ed.). Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall. #(34), #(11), #(25)

Flavell, J.H., & Wellman, H.M. (1977). Metamemory. In R.V. Kail, Jr., & J.W.
Hagen (Eds.), Persepctives on the development of memory and cognition (pp.
3-33). Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum. #(38), #(11)

Flavell, J.H., Shipstead, S.G., & Croft, K. (1978). Young children's
knowledge about visual perception: Hiding objects from others. Child
Development, 49, 1208-1211. #(13), #(25)

Fleischner, J.E., & Danzig, M. (1980). Conceptual development in learning-
disabled and normal boys. Journal of Abnormal Child Psychology, 8, 83-92.
#(25)

Fleisher, L.S., Soodak, L.C., & Jelin, M.A. (1984). Selective attention
deficits in learning disabled children: Analysis of the data base. Exception-
al Children, 51, 136-141. #(1), #(6), #(28)

Fleiss, J.L. (1986). The design and analysis of clinical experiments. New
York: John Wiley. #(34), #(43)

Fleming, J.G., & Maximov, B. (1974). The patient or his victim: The
therapist's dilemma. California Law Review, 62, 1025-1068. #(10), #(40)

Flygare, T.J. (1983). The future of law in educational reform. Phi Delta
Kappan, 64, 416-419. #(10)

Fogarty, J., & Wang, M.C. (1982). An investigation of the cross-age peer
tutoring process: Some implications for instructional design and motivation.
Elementary School Journal, 82, 451-469. #(26)

Foldi, N.S., Cicone, M., & Gardner, H. (1983). Pragmatic aspects of com- 
munication in braindamaged patients. In S.J. Segalowitz (Ed.), Language
functions and brain organization (pp. 51-86). New York: Academic Press.
#(38), #(30), #(21)

Folkins, C., & Sime, W. (1981). Physical fitness training and mental health.
American Psychologist, 38, 373-389. #(3), #(33), #(18)

Folstein, S.E. (1985). Genetic aspects of infantile autism. Annual of Review
of Medicine, 36, 415-419. #(2), #(25)

Folstein, S.E., & Rutter, M. (1977). Infantile autism: A genetic study of 21
twin pairs. Child Psychology and Psychiatry, 18, 297-321. #(2)

Folstein, S.E., & Rutter, M. (1988). Autism: Familial aggregation and genetic
implication. Journal of Autism and Developmental Disorders, 18, 3-21. #(2)

Foos, R. (1976). A survey of competencies of teachers of trainable mentally
retarded. Education and Training of the Mentally Retarded, 11, 269-272.
#(26), #(45)

Ford, A., & Mirenda, P. (1984). Community instruction: A natural cues and
corrections decision model. Journal of The Association for Persons with
Severe Handicaps, 9, 79-87. #(27), #(33), #(3)

Ford, A., Schnorr, R., Meyer, L., Davern, L., Black, J., & Dempsey, P.
(Eds.). (1989). The Syracuse community-referenced curriculum guide for
students with moderate and severe disabilities. Baltimore: Paul H. Brookes.
#(34), #(27), #(39)

Ford, L.J. (1975). Teaching dressing skills to a severely retarded child.
American Journal of Occupational Therapy, 29, 87-92. #(21)

Forehand, G.A. (1971). An evaluation system for curriculum innovation.
Teachers College Record, 72, 520-591. #(29), #(5), #(8)

Forehand, R., & Baumeister, A.A. (1970). Body rocking and activity level as
a function of prior movement restraint. American Journal of Mental Deficien-
cy, 74, 608-610. #(21)

Forehand, R., & Baumeister, A.A. (1970). The effect of auditory and visual
stimulation of stereotyped rocking behavior and general activity of severe
retardates. Journal of Clinical Psychology, 26, 426-429. #(3), #(20), #(7),
#(21)

Forehand, R., & Baumeister, A.A. (1971). Rate of stereotyped body rocking of
severe retardates as a function of frustration of goal-directed behavior.
Journal of Abnormal Psychology, 78, 35-42. #(3), #(20), #(21)

Forehand, R., & Baumeister, A.A. (1971). Stereotyped body rocking as a
function of situation, IQ, and time. Journal of Clinical Psychology, 27,
324-326. #(3), #(20)

Foreyt, J.P., & Parks, J.T. (1975). Behavioral controls for achieving weight
loss in the severely retarded. Journal of Behavior Therapy and Experimental
Psychiatry, 6, 27-29. #(3), #(21)

Forness, S.R. (1974). Educational approaches to autism. Training School
Bulletin, 71, 167-173. #(9), #(2)

Forness, S.R., & MacMillan, D.L. (1970). The origins of behavior modification
with exceptional children. Exceptional Children, 37, 93-100. #(3)

Forsythe, P.G. (1976). Progress for the severely handicapped. In F.J.
Weintraub, A. Abeson, J. Ballard, & M.L. LaVor (Eds.), Public policy and the
education of exceptional children (pp. 147-149). Reston, VA: Council for
Exceptional Children. #(21), #(38)

Foss, G., & Peterson, S.L. (1981). Social-interpersonal skills relevant to
job tenure for mentally retarded adults. Mental Retardation, 19, 103-106.
#(33), #(37) 

Foster, R.W. (1974). Camelot Behavioral Checklist. Parsons, KS: Camelot
Behavioral Systems. #(44)

Foster, S.L., & Ritchey, W.L. (1979). Issues in the assessment of social com-
petence in children. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 12, 625-638. #(29)


Fowler, S.A. (1986). Peer-monitoring and self-monitoring: Alternatives to
traditional teacher management. Exceptional Children, 52, 573-581. #(36)

Fowler, S.A., & Baer, D.M. (1981). "Do I have to be good all day?" The timing
of delayed reinforcement as a factor in generalization. Journal of Applied
Behavior Analysis, 14, 13-24. #(14), #(3), #(7)

Fox, L., Long, S.H., & Langlois, A. (1988). Patterns of language comprehen-
sion deficit in abused and neglected children. Journal of Speech and Hearing
Disorders, 53, 239-244. #(30)

Foxx, R.M. (1976). The use of overcorrection to eliminate the public
disrobing (stripping) of retarded women. Behavior Research and Therapy, 14,
53-61. #(3), #(37), #(14)

Foxx, R.M. (1977). Attention training: The use of overcorrection avoidance to
increase the eye contact of autistic and retarded children. Journal of
Applied Behavior Analysis, 10, 489-499. #(1), #(3), #(2)

Foxx, R.M. (1982). Increasing behaviors of severely retarded and autistic
persons. Champaign, IL: Research Press. #(34). #(45), #(2), #(14)

Foxx, R.M. (1990). "Harry": A ten year follow-up of the successful treatment
of a self-injurious man. Research in Developmental Disabilities, 11, 67-76.
#(19)

Foxx, R.M., & Azrin, R.H. (1972). Restitution: A method of eliminating
aggressive-disruptive behavior of mentally retarded and brain-damaged
patients. Behavior Research and Therapy, 10, 15-27. #(3), #(21), #(37), #(45)

Foxx, R.M., & Azrin, N.H. (1973). Toilet training the retarded. Champaign,
IL: Research Press. #(18), #(34)

Foxx, R.M., & Azrin, N.H. (1973). The elimination of autistic self-stimulato-
ry behavior by overcorrection. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 6, 1-14.
#(3)

Foxx, R.M., & Bechtel, D.R. (1983). Overcorrection: A review and analysis. In
S. Axelrod & J. Appsche (Eds.), The effects of punishment on human behavior
(pp. 133-220). New York: Academic Press. #(3), #(14), #(32)

Foxx, R.M., & Brown, R.A. (1979). Nicotine fading and self-monitoring for
cigarette abstinence or controlled smoking. Journal of Applied Behavior
Analysis, 12, 111-125. #(3), #(18)

Foxx, R.M., & Dufrense, D. (1984). "Harry": The use of physical restraint as
a reinforcer, time out from restraint, and fading restraint in treating a
self-injurious man. Analysis and Intervention in Developmental Disabilities,
4, 1-13. #(19), #(9)

Foxx, R.M., & Livesay, J. (1984). Maintenance of response suppression
following overcorrection: A ten year retrospective examination of eight
cases. Analysis and Intervention in Developmental Disabilities, 4, 65-79.
#(9)

Foxx, R.M., & Martin, E.D. (1975). Treatment of scavenging behavior
(coprophagy and pica) by overcorrection. Behaviour Research and Therapy, 13,
153-162. #(3)

Foxx, R.M., & Rubinoff, A. (1979). Behavioral treatment of caffeinism:
Reducing excessive coffee drinking. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 12,
335-344. #(3), #(18)

Francis, R.J., & Rarick, G.O. (1959). Motor characteristics of the mentally
retarded. American Journal of Mental Deficiency, 63, 792-811. #(21), #(45)

Frank, A.R. (1988). Operating microcomputers from picture prompts. Teaching
Exceptional Children, 20(3), 66-67. #(3), #(16), #(9) 

Frank, A.R., Wacker, D.P., Berg, W.K., & McMahon, C.M. (1985). Teaching
selected microcomputer skills to retarded students via picture prompts.
Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 18, 179-185. #(3), #(16), #(9) 

Frankel, F. (1976). Experimental studies of autistic children in the
classroom. In E.R. Ritvo (Ed.), Autism: Diagnosis, current research and
management (pp. 185-194). New York: Spectrum Publications. #(2), #(38)

Frankel, F., Freeman, B.J., Ritvo, E., Chikami, B., & Carr, E. (1976).
Effects of frequency of photic stimulation upon autistic and retarded
children. American Journal of Mental Deficiency, 81, 32-40. #(3), #(2)

Frankel, F., & Graham, V. (1976). Systematic observation of classroom
behavior of retarded and autistic preschool children. American Journal of
Mental Deficiency, 81, 73-84. #(3), #(2)

Frankel, F., & Simmons, J.Q. (1976). Self-injurious behavior in schizophrenic
and retarded children. American Journal of Mental Deficiency, 80, 512-522.
#(3)

Frankel, F., Tymchuk, A., & Simmons, J.Q. (1976). Operant analysis and
intervention with autistic children: Implications of current research. In
E.R. Ritvo, B.J. Freeman, E.M. Ornitz, & P.E. Tanguay (Eds.), Autism:
Diagnosis, current research and management (pp. 151-168). New York: Halsted
Press. #(3), #(2), #(38)

Frankenburg, W.K., Dodds, J., & Fandal, A. (1975). Denver Developmental
Screening Test. Denver: LADOCA Project and Publishing Foundation. #(44)

Frankenburg, W.K., Dodds, J., Archer, P., Shapiro, H., & Bresnick, B. (1990).
The Denver II--revision and restandardization of the DDST. Denver: University
of Colorado School of Medicine. #(44)

Fredericks, H.D., Anderson, R., & Baldwin, V. (1979). Identifying competency
indicators of teachers of the severely handicapped. Journal of The Associa-
tion for Persons with Severe Handicaps, 4, 81-95. #(26), #(21)

Fredericks, H.D. et al. (1975). A data-based classroom for the moderately and
everely handicapped. Monmouth, OR: Instructional Development Corporation.
#(3), #(21), #(34)

Fredericks, H.D. et al. (1976). The teaching research curriculum for
moderately and severely handicapped. Springfield, IL: Charles C Thomas. #(5),
#(34), #(21)

Frederiksen, L.W., & Frederiksen, C.B. (1977). Experimental evaluation of
classroom environments: Scheduling planned activities. American Journal of
Mental Deficiency, 81, 421-427. #(42)

Fredrick, W.C., & Walberg, H.J. (1980). Learning as a function of time.
Journal of Educational Research, 73, 183-194. #(26)

Freedman, A.E. (1972). The planned society: An analysis of Skinner's
proposals. Kalamazoo, MI: Behaviordelia. #(3)

Freeman, B.J. (1971). Behavioral contrast: Reinforcement frequency or
response suppression? Psychological Bulletin, 75, 347-356. #(3), #(14)

Freeman, B.J. (1976). Evaluating autistic children. Journal of Pediatric
Psychology, 1, 18-21. #(2), #(29)

Freeman, B.J., & Ritvo, E.R. (1984). The syndrome of autism: Establishing the
diagnosis and principles of management. Pediatric Annals, 13, 284-296. #(2),
#(3), #(29)

Freeman, B.J., Ritvo, E.R., & Miller, R. (1975). An operant procedure to
teach an echolalic, autistic child to answer questions appropriately. Journal
of Autism and Childhood Schizophrenia, 5, 169-176. #(3), #(2)

Freeman, B.J., Ritvo, E.R., Needleman, R., & Yokota, A. (1985). The stability
of cognitive and linguistic parameters in autism: A 5-year study. Journal of
the American Academy of Child Psychiatry, 24, 290-311. #(2), #(30)

Freeman, B.J., Ritvo, E.R., Yokota, A., & Ritvo, A. (1986). A scale for
rating symptoms of patients with the syndrome of autism in real life
settings. Journal of the American Academy of Child Psychiatry, 25, 130-136.
#(2), #(44)

Freeman, B.J., Schroth, P., Ritvo, E.R., Guthrie, D., & Wake, L. (1980). The
Behavior Observation Scale for Autism (BOS): Initial results of factor
analyses. Journal of Autism and Developmental Disorders, 10, 343-346. #(2),
#(44)

Freeman, T.J., & Lattal, K.A. (1992). Stimulus control of behavioral history.
Journal of the Experimental Analysis of Behavior, 57, 5-15. #(6) 

Freiberg, H., & Driscoll, A. (1992). Universal teaching strategies. Boston: 
Allyn & Bacon. #(34), #(5)

Freidenberg, W.P., & Martin, A. (1977). Prevocational training of the
severely retarded using task analysis. Mental Retardation, 15(2), 16-20.
#(33), #(9), #(21), #(45)

Freize, I.H. (1980). Beliefs about success and failure in the classroom. In
J. H. McMillan (Ed.), The social psychology of school learning (pp. 39-78).
New York: Academic Press. #(26), #(38)

French, J. (1964). Pictorial test of intelligence. Chicago: Riverside
Publishing. #(34), #(44)

Freschi, D.F. (1973). Where we are. Where we are going. How we're getting
there. Teaching Exceptional Children, 6(2), 89-98. #(15)

Frey, W. (1979). How to keep those new programs alive and well. Educational
Leadership, 37, 208-210. #(8)

Frey, W. (1984). Functional assessment in the 80s. In A. Halpern & M. Fuhrer
(Eds.), Functional assessment in rehabilitation (pp. 11-44). Baltimore: Paul
H. Brookes. #(38), #(29)

Frick, T., & Semmel, M.I. (1978). Observer agreement and reliabilities of
classroom observational measures. Review of Educational Research, 48,
157-184. #(29)

Friedin, B. (1977). Clinical issues on the physical restraint experience with
self-injurious children. Research and the Retarded, 4, 1-6. #(14)

Friedman, A., Poison, M.C., Dafoe, C.G., & Gaskill, S.J. (1982). Dividing
attention within and between hemispheres: Testing a multiple resources
approach to limited-capacity information processing. Journal of Experimental
Psychology: Human Perception and Performance, 8, 625-650. #(11), #(1)

Friedman, P.R. (1975). Legal regulation of applied behavior analysis in
mental institutions and prisons. Arizona Law Review, 17, 39-104. #(3), #(10),
#(40)

Friedman, P.R. (1976). The rights of mentally retarded persons. New York:
Avon. #(34), #(45), #(10)

Friedman, P.R. (1977). Human and legal rights of mentally retarded persons.
International Journal of Mental Health, 6, 50-72. #(45), #(10)

Friedman, S.G., & Hofmeister, A.M. (1984). Matching technology to content and
learners: A case study. Exceptional Children, 51, 130-134. #(3), #(16) 

Fristoe, M., & Lloyd, L.L. (1979). A survey of the use of nonspeech systems
with the severely communication impaired. Mental Retardation, 16, 99-103.
#(45), #(30)

Fristoe, M., & Lloyd, L.L. (1979). Nonspeech communication. In N.R. Ellis
(Ed.), Handbook of mental deficiency, psychological theory, and research (2nd
ed., pp. 401-430). Hillsdale, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum. #(30), #(38)

Frith, U. (1969). Emphasis and meaning in recall in normal and autistic
children. Language and Speech, 12, 29-38. #(2), #(30), #(11)

Frith, U. (1970). Studies in pattern detection in normal and autistic
children: I. Immediate recall of auditory sequences. Journal of Abnormal
Psychology, 76, 413-420. #(2), #(11)

Frith, U. (1970). Studies in pattern detection in normal and autistic
children: II. Reproduction and production of color sequences. Journal of
Experimental Child Psychology, 10, 120-135. #(2), #(11)

Frith, U. (1972). Cognitive mechanisms in autism: Experiments with color and
tone sequence production. Journal of Autism and Childhood Schizophrenia, 2,
160-173. #(25), #(2)

Frith, U. (Ed.). (1980). Cognitive processes in spelling. London: Academic 
Press. #(34), #(17)

Frith, U. (1989). Autism: Explaining the enigma. Oxford: Blackwell. #(34),
#(2)

Frith, U., & Hermelin, B. (1969). The role of visual and motor cues for
normal, subnormal, and autistic children. Journal of Child Psychology and
Psychiatry, 10, 153-163. #(3), #(2)

Frostig, M. (1967). Testing as a basis for educational therapy. Journal of
Special Education, 2, 15-34. #(29) 

Frostig, M. (1970). Movement in education: Theory and practice. Chicago:
Follett. #(12), #(34)

Frostig, M., & Horne, D. (1973). The Frostig program for the development of
visual perception (rev. ed.). Chicago: Follett. #(34), #(12)

Frostig, M., Lefever, D.W., & Whittlesey, J.R.B. (1964). The Marianne Frostig
Development Test of Visual Perception. Palo Alto, CA: Consulting Psycholo-
gists Press. #(44)

Frostig, M., & Maslow, P. (1973). Learning problems in the classroom:
Prevention and remediation. New York: Grune & Stratton. #(12), #(34)

Frostig, M., & Maslow, P. (1973). Visual-perception abilities. In M. Frostig
& P. Maslow, Learning problems in the classroom (pp. 176-200). New York:
Grune and Stratton. #(12), #(38)

Frydenberg, H., & Wheeler, D.G. (1986). Microcomputer-assisted intervention
with the speech and language impaired adult. In M.L. Grossfeld & C.A.
Grossfeld (Eds.), Microcomputer applications in rehabilitation of communica-
tion disorders (pp. 97-120). Rockville, MD: Aspen Publications. #(16), #(30),
#(38)

Frye, D., Braisby, N., Lowe, J., Maroudas, C., & Nicholls, J. (1989). Young
children's understanding of counting and cardinality. Child Development, 60,
1158-1178. #(25)

Fryers, T., & MacKay, R.I. (1979). The epidemiology of severe mental
handicap. Early Human Development, 3, 277-294. #(45)

Fuchigami, R.Y. (1980). Teacher education for culturally diverse children.
Exceptional Children, 46, 634-641. #(49)

Fuchs, D., & Fuchs, L.S. (1986). Test procedure bias: A meta-analysis of
examiner familiarity effects. Review of Educational Research, 56, 243-262.
#(29)

Fuchs, D., Fuchs, L.S., Benowitz, S., & Barringer, K. (1987). Norm referenced
tests: Are they valid for use with handicapped students? Exceptional
Children, 54, 263-271. #(29) 

Fuchs, L.S., Fuchs, D., Hamlett, C.L., Walz, L., & Germann, G. (1993). Forma-
tive evaluation of academic progress: How much growth can we expect. School
Psychology Review, 22, 27-48. #(29)

Fuchs, D., Fuchs, L.S., Power, M.H., & Dailey, A.M. (1985). Bias in the
assessment of handicapped children. American Educational Research Journal,
22, 185-197. #(29)

Fuerst, R.E. (1979, March). Inference peddling. Psychology Today, pp. 92-96.
#(29), #(43)

Fugua, R.W. (1984). Comments on the applied relevance of the matching law.
Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 17, 381-386. #(6)

Fulkerson, S.C., & Freeman, W.M. (1980). Perceptual-motor deficiency in
autistic children. Perceptual and Motor Skills, 50, 331-336. #(2), #(12)

Fullan, M. (1972). Overview of the innovative process and the user.
Interchange, 3(2-3), 1-46. #(8)

Fullan, M., Miles, M., & Taylor, G. (1980). Organization development in
schools: The state of art. Review of Educational Research, 50, 121-183. #(42)

Fullan, M., & Pomfret, A. (1977). Research on curriculum and instruction
implementation. Review of Educational Research, 47, 335-397. #(8), #(5),
#(43)

Fuller, B., Wood, K., Rapoport, T., & Dornbusch, S.M. (1982). The organiza-
tional context of individual efficacy. Review of Educational Research, 52,
7-30. #(42)

Fuller, G.B. (1982). The Minnesota Percepto-Diagnostic Test--Revised.
Brandon, VT: Clinical Psychology Publications. #(44)

Fuller, P. (1949). Operant conditioning of a vegetative human organism.
American Journal of Psychology, 62, 587-590. #(3), #(21)

Fuller, R.B. (1973). Professors Kantor and Skinner--The "Grand Alliance" of
the 40's. Psychological Record, 23, 318-324. #(3)

Fuller, R.B. (1975). Synergetics. New York: Macmillan. #(30), #(34)

Fullwood, D. (1990). Chances and choices: Making integration work. Baltimore:
Paul H. Brookes. #(34), #(39)

Fulton, R.T. (1982). Applying microcomputer technology to investigation of
communication skills in severely hearing impaired children. Journal of
Special Education Technology, 5, 45-46. #(16)

Fulton, R.T., Larson, A.D., & Worthy, R.C. (1983). The use of microcomputer
technology in assessing and training communication skills of young hearing
impaired children. American Annals of the Deaf. #(16)

Fuqua, R.W. (1984). Comments on the applied relevance of the matching law.
Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 17, 381-386. #(3)

Furneaux, B., & Roberts, B. (Eds.). (1977). Autistic children: Teaching,
community and research approaches. Boston: Routledge & Kegan Paul. #(27),
#(2), #(38)

Furnell, J.R.G., & Thomas, G.V. (1976). Stimulus control of generalized 
imitation in subnormal children. Journal of Experimental Child Psychology, 
22, 282-291. #(6), #(41)

Furry, C.A., & Baltes, P.B. (1973). The effect of age differences in ability-
-extraneous variables on the assessment of intelligence in children, adults,
and the elderly. Journal of Gerontology, 28, 73-80. #(25), #(46)

Furth, H.G. (1970). Piaget for teachers. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall.
#(13), #(34)

Furth, H.G. (1981). Piaget and knowledge: Theoretical foundations (2nd ed.).
Chicago: University of Chicago Press. #(13), #(34)

Furth, H.G., & Wachs, H. (1975). Thinking goes to school: Piaget's theory in
practice. New York: Oxford University Press, #(13), #(34)

Futrell, M., & Geisert, P. (1985). A call for action to improve the design of
microcomputer instructional courseware. Educational Technology, 25(5), 13-15.
#(16)

Furtwengler, W.J. (1985). Implementing strategies for a school effectiveness
program. Phi Delta Kappan, 66, 262-265. #(8), #(26)

Furukawa, J.M. (1970). Chunking method of determining size of step in pro-
grammed instruction. Journal of Educational Psychology, 64, 171-182. #(11)

Fyffe, C., & Prior, M. (1978). Evidence for language recording in autistic,
retarded and normal children: A re-examination. British Journal of Psycholo-
gy, 69, 393-402. #(2), #(11)

Gadow, K.D. (1986). Children on medication: Volume I. Hyperactivity, learning
disabilities, and mental retardation. San Diego, CA: College-Hill Press.
#(34), #(4), #(45), #(3), #(28)

Gage, N.L. (1976). A factorially designed experiment on teacher tutoring,
structuring, soliciting, and reacting. Journal of Teacher Education, 27(1),
35-38. #(43)

Gage, N.L. (1978). The scientific basis of the art of teaching. New York:
Teachers College Press. #(26), #(34)

Gage, N.L. (1978). The yield of research on teaching. Phi Delta Kappan, 59,
229-235. #(26)

Gage, N.L. (1982). The future of educational research. Educational Research-
er, 11, 11-19. #(29)

Gage, N.L. (1984). What do we know about teaching effectiveness? Phi Delta
Kappan, 65, 87-93. #(26)

Gage, N.L., & Berliner, D.C. (1984). Educational psychology. Boston: Houghton
Mifflin. #(34), #(25)

Gagne, R.M. (1968). Contributions of learning to human development.
Psychological Review, 75, 177-191. #(25)

Gagne, R.M. (1977). The conditions of learning (3rd ed.). New York: Holt,
Rinehart and Winston. #(25), #(34)

Gagne, R.M. (1977). Basic forms of learning. In R.M. Gagne, The conditions of
learning (3rd ed., pp. 73-102). New York: Holt, Rinehart and Winston. #(3),
#(15), #(38)

Gagne, R.M., & Briggs, L.J. (1979). Principles of instructional design (2nd
ed.). New York: Holt, Rinehart and Winston. #(9), #(34)

Gagne, R.M., & Briggs, L.J. (1979). Designing instructional systems. In R.M.
Gagne & L.J. Briggs, Principles of instructional design (2nd ed., pp. 18-41).
New York: Holt, Rinehart and Winston. #(9)

Gagne, R.M., & Briggs, L.J. (1979). The outcomes of instruction. In R.M.
Gagne & L.J. Briggs, Principles of instructional design (2nd ed., pp. 45-59).
New York: Holt, Rinehart and Winston. #(9), #(38)

Gagne, R.M., & Briggs, L.J. (1979). The events of instruction. In R.M. Gagne
& L.J. Briggs, Principles of instructional design (2nd ed., pp. 152-171). New
York: Holt, Rinehart and Winston. #(9), #(38)

Gagne, R.M., & White, R.T. (1978). Memory structures and learning outcomes,
Review of Educational Research, 48, 187-222. #(11)

Gale, A., & Lynn, R. (1972). A developmental study of attention. British
Journal of Educational Psychology, 42, 260-266. #(1)

Gallagher, J.J. (1975). Teaching the gifted child (2nd ed.). Boston: Allyn &
Bacon. #(34), #(50)

Gallagher, J.J., & Wiegerink, R. (1976). Educational strategies for the
autistic child. Journal of Autism and Childhood Schizophrenia, 6, 15-26.
#(9), #(2)

Gallagher, T.M., & Prutting, C.A. (Eds.). (1983). Pragmatic assessment and
intervention issues in language. San Diego, CA: College-Hill Press. #(30),
#(34), #(29)

Gallini, J.K. (1985). Instructional conditions for computer-based problem-
solving environments. Educational Technology, 25, 7-11). #(16) 

Galton, F. (1869). Hereditary genius. London: Macmillan. #(34), #(25)

Garber, N.B. (1975). Operant procedures to eliminate drooling behavior in a
cerebral palsied adolescent. Developmental Medicine and Child Neurology, 13,
641-644. #(3), #(21)

Garcia, E. (1974). The training and generalization of a conversational speech
form in nonverbal retardates. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 7,
137-149. #(3), #(30), #(7)

Garcia, E., Baer, D.M., & Firestone, I. (1971). The development of general-
ized imitation within topographically determined boundaries. Journal of
Applied Behavior Analysis, 4, 101-112. #(3), #(7), #(41)

Garcia, E., & DeHaven, E.D. (1974). Use of operant techniques in the
establishment and generalization of language: A review analysis. American
Journal of Mental Deficiency, 79(2), 169-178. #(3), #(7), #(32) 

Gardner, B.T. (1981). Project Nim: Who taught whom? Contemporary Psychology,
26, 425-426. #(30)

Gardner, B.T., & Gardner, R.A. (1969). Teaching sign language to the
chimpanzee. Science, 162, 664-672. #(30)

Gardner, B.T., & Gardner, R.A. (1975). Early signs of language in child and
chimpanzee. Science, 187, 752-753. #(30)

Gardner, B.T., & Gardner, R.A. (1975). Evidence for sentence constituents in
the early utterances of child chimpanzees. Journal of Experimental Psycholo-
gy, 104, 244-267. #(30)

Gardner, M.F. (1990). Expressive one-word picture vocabulary test-Revised.
Novato, CA: Academic Therapy Publications. #(30), #(44)

Gardner, J.M. (1972). Teaching behavior modification to nonprofessionals.
Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 5, 517-521. #(3), #(42)

Gardner, R., III. (1990). Life-space interviewing: It can be effective, but
don't. . . Behavioral Disorders, 15, 111-118. #(29), #(4)

Gardner, W.I. (1969). Use of punishment with the severely retarded: A review.
American Journal of Mental Deficiency, 74, 86-103. #(3), #(14), #(21), #(32)

Gardner, W.I. (1971). Behavior modification in mental retardation. New York:
Aldine. #(3), #(34), #(45)

Gardner, W.I. (1971). A functional analysis approach to evaluation. In W.I.
Gardner, Behavior modification in mental retardation (pp. 163-187). Chicago:
Aldine-Atherton. #(29), #(38), #(45)

Gardner, W.I., & Cole, C.L. (1984). Aggression and related conduct problems
in the mentally retarded: A multicomponent behavioral model. In S.E.
Breuning, J.L. Matson, & R.P. Barrett (Eds.), Advances in mental retardation
and developmental disabilities (Vol. 2, pp. 41-84). Greenwich, CT: JAI press.
#(45), #(38), #(4)

Garfield, E. (1972). Citation analysis as a tool in journal evaluation. Science,
178, 471-479. #(29)

Garfin, D., & Lord, C. (1986). Communication as a social problem in autism.
In E. Schopler & G. Mesibov (Eds.), Social behavior in autism (pp. 133-152).
New York: Plenum Press. #(38), #(30), #(2), #(37)

Garfunkel, F., & Bloom, M. (1980). Litigation as a means of enforcing
educational reform: The case of Allen v. McDonough. Education Unlimited,
2(5), 34-42. #(10)

Garmezy, N., & Rutter, M. (Eds.). (1983). Stress, coping, and development in
children. New York: McGraw-Hill. #(34), #(4), #(25)

Garmstrong, R.J. (1987). How administrators support peer coaching. Education-
al Leadership, 44, 18-28. #(36), #(5)

Garner, D. (1982). Educational microcomputer software: Nine questions to ask.
Science and Children, 19(6), 24-25. #(16)

Garner, J.M., & Brever, A. (1985). Using microcomputers in the evaluation,
training, and management of persons with developmental disabilities.
Australia and New Zealand Journal of Developmental Disabilities, 11, 129-135.
#(16)

Garner, W.R. (1974). The processing of information and structure. New York:
John Wiley. #(34), #(25)

Garretson, J.B., Fein, D., & Waterhouse, L. (1990). Sustained attention in
children with autism. Journal of Autism and Developmental Disorders, 20,
101-114. #(1), #(2)

Garrison, M., & Hammill, D. (1971). Who are the retarded? Exceptional
Children, 38, 13-18. #(45), #(23)

Garrod, S., & Anderson, A. (1987). Saying what you mean in dialogue: A study
in conceptual and semantic co-ordination. Cognition, 27, 181-218. #(30).

Gartner, A., & Lipsky, D.K. (1987). Beyond special education: Toward a
quality system for all students. Harvard Educational Review, 57, 367-395.
#(15), #(35)

Gartner, A., & Lipsky, D.K. (1990). Students as instructional agents. In W.
Stainback & S. Stainback (Eds.), Support networks for inclusive schooling:
Interdependent and integrated education (pp. 81-93). Baltimore: Paul H.
Brookes. #(38), #(36)

Garvey, C. (1974). Some properties of social play. Merrill-Palmer Quarterly,
20, 163-180. #(37)

Garvey, C. (1990). Play (rev. ed.). Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press.
#(37), #(34)

Garwood, S.G. (1982). Intelligence and cognition. In S.G. Garwood, Educating
young handicapped children: A developmental approach (2nd ed., pp. 149-201).
Rockville, MD: Aspen Publications. #(25), #(38)

Garwood, S.G. (1983). The role of theory in studying infant behavior. In S.G.
Garwood & R.R. Fewell (Eds.), Educating handicapped infants: Issues in
development and intervention (pp. 3-23). Rockville, MD: Aspen Publications.
#(25) 

Gast, D., VanBiervliet, A., & Spradlin, J.E. (1979). Teaching number-word
equivalences: A study of transfer. American Journal of Mental Deficiency, 83,
524-527. #(9), #(7)

Gast, D., & Wolery, M. (1987). Severe maladaptive behavior. In M.E. Snell
(Ed.), Systematic instruction of persons with severe handicaps (3rd ed., pp.
300-332). Columbus, OH: Charles E. Merrill. #(38), #(4)

Gatch, M.B., & Osborne, J.G. (1989). Transfer of contextual stimulus function
via  equivalence class class development. Journal of the Experimental Analysis
of Behavior, 51, 369-378. #(6), #(7)

Gates, A.T., & McKillop, A.S. (1962). Gates-McKillop Reading Diagnostic Test.
New York: Teachers College Bureau of Publications. #(44)

Gathercole, V. C. (1987). The contrastive hypothesis for the acquisition of
word meaning: A reconsideration of the theory. Journal of Child Language, 14,
493-531. #(30)

Gathercole, V.C. (1989). Contrast: A semantic constraint? Journal of Child
Language, 164, 685-702. #(30)

Gaule, K., Nietupski, J., & Certo, N. (1985). Teaching supermarket shopping
skills using an adaptive shopping list. Education and Training of the
Mentally Retarded, 20, 53-59. #(9), #(27), #(18)

Gaylord-Ross, C., Forte, J., & Gaylord-Ross, R. (1986). The community
classroom: Technological vocational training for students with serious
handicaps. Career Development for Exceptional Individuals, 9(1), 24-33.
#(33), #(27)

Gaylord-Ross, R. (1979). Mental retardation research, ecological validity,
and the delivery of longitudinal educational programs. Journal of Special
Education, 13, 69-80. #(42), #(45)

Gaylord-Ross, R. (1980). A decision model of aberrant behavior in applied
settings. In W. Sailor, B. Wilcox, & L. Brown (Eds.), Methods of instruction
for severely handicapped students (pp. 135-158). Baltimore: Paul Brooks.
#(3), #(27), #(38), #(21)

Gaylord-Ross, R., Forte, J., Storey, K., Gaylord-Ross, C., & Jameson, D.
(1987). Community referenced instruction in technological work settings.
Exceptional Children, 54, 112-120. #(27)

Gaylord-Ross, R., Haring, T., Breen, C., Lee, M., & Pitts-Conway, V. (1984).
The training and generalization of social interaction skills with autistic
youth. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 17, 229-247. #(7), #(2), #(37)

Gaylord-Ross, R., & Holvet, J. (1985). Strategies for educating students with
severe handicaps. Boston: Little, Brown and Co. #(34), #(21)

Geis, G.L. (1970). Three innovative teaching systems: Common sources of
effectiveness. Teachers College Record, 71, 379-389. #(5), #(26)

Gelfand, D.M., & Hartmann, D.P. (1968). Behavior therapy with children: A
review and evaluation of research methodology. Psychological Bulletin, 69,
204-215. #(3), #(43), #(32)

Geller, E.S. (1991). Is applied behavior analysis technological to a fault?
Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 24, 401-406. #(3)

Geller, E.S. (1991). Where's the validity in social validity? Journal of
Applied Behavior Analysis, 24, 179-184. #(3)

Gellerman, L.W. (1933). Chance orders of alternating stimuli in visual
discrimination experiments. Journal of Genetic Psychology, 42, 206-208. #(6)

Gelman, R. (1969). Conservation acquisition: A problem of learning to attend
to relevant attributes. Journal of Experimental Child Psychology, 7, 167-187.
#(1)

Gelman, R., Meck, E., & Merkin, S. (1986). Young children's numerical
competence. Cognitive Development, 1, 1-29. #(25)

Gentile, J.R., Roden, A.H., & Klein, R.D. (1972). An analysis-of-variance
model for the intrasubject replication design. Journal of Applied Behavior
Analysis, 5, 193-198. #(43), #(22), #(48)

Gentry, D., & Haring, N. (1976). Essentials of performance measurement. In N.
Haring & L. Brown (Eds.), Teaching the severely handicapped (Vol. 1, pp.
209-236). New York: Grune & Stratton. #(29), #(38)

Geoffrion, L.D., & Goldenberg, E.P. (1981). Computer-based exploratory
learning systems for communication-handicapped children. The Journal of
Special Education, 15, 325-332. #(16), #(30) 

Gephart, W.J. (Ed.). (1975). Accountability: A state, a process or a product?
Bloomington, IN: Phi Delta Kappa. #(27)

Gephart, W.J., & Bartos, B.B. (1969). Profiling instructional packages:
Occasional Paper #7. Bloomington, IN: Phi Delta Kappa. #(34), #(29), #(9)

Gerber, M.M. (1988). Tolerance and technology of instruction: Implications
for special education reform. Exceptional Children, 54, 309-314. #(9)

Gerber, M.M., & Kauffman, J.M. (1981). Peer tutoring in academic settings. In
P. Strain (Ed.), The utilization of classroom peers as behavior change agents
(pp. 155-188). New York: Plenum Press. #(3), #(26), #(36), #(38)

Gerber, M.M., & Semmel, M.I. (1984). Teacher as imperfect test: Reconceptual-
izing the referral process. Educational Psychologist, 19, 137-148. #(9),
#(29) 

Gersten, R.M. (1980). In search of the cognitive deficit in autism: Beyond
the stimulus overselectivity model. Journal of Special Education, 14, 49-65.
#(6), #(25), #(2)

Gersten, R.M., & Carnine, D. (1986). Direct instruction in reading comprehen-
sion. Educational Leadership, 43, 70-78. #(9), #(17)

Gersten, R.M., Carnine, D., & White, W.A.T. (1984). The pursuit of clarity:
Direct instruction and applied behavior analysis. In W.L. Heward, T.E. Heron,
D.S. Hill, & J. Trapp-Porter (Eds.), Focus on behavior analysis in education
(pp. 38-57). Columbus, OH: Charles E. Merrill. #(38), #(5)

Gersten, R.M., Carnine, D., & Williams, P.B. (1982). Measuring implementation
of a structured educational model in an urban school district: An observa-
tional approach. Educational Evaluation and Policy Analysis, 4, 67-79. #(8),
#(29) 

Gersten, R.M., Carnine, D., Zoref, L., & Cronin, D. (1986). Measuring
implementation innovations in a broad context. Elementary School Journal, 86,
257-276. #(8), #(29)

Gersten, R.M., White, W.A., Falco, R., & Carnine, D. (1982). Teaching basic
discriminations to handicapped and non-handicapped individuals through a
dynamic presentation of instructional stimuli. Analysis and Intervention in
Developmental Disabilities, 2, 305-317. #(6), #(9)

Gersten, R.M., Woodward, J., & Darch, C. (1986). Direct instruction: A
research-based approach to curriculum design and teaching. Exceptional
Children, 53, 17-31. #(5), #(9)

Gerweck, S.E. (Ed.). (1978). Compet II: Commonwealth plan for the education
and training of mentally retarded children. Harrisburg, PA: Pennsylvania
Department of Education. #(5), #(34), #(34), #(45)

Gesell, A. (1940). Gesell Developmental Schedules. New York: Psychological
Corp. #(44)

Getman, G.N., Kane, E., & McKee, G. (1968). Developing learning readiness: A
visual-motor tactile skills program. Manchester, MO: Webster. #(12), #(34)

Getman, G.N. (1965). The visuomotor complex of the acquisition of motor
skills. In J. Hellmuth (Ed.), Learning disorders (Vol. 1, pp. 49-76).
Seattle, WA: Special Child Publications. #(12), #(38)

Getsie, R.L., Langer, P., & Glass, G.V. (1985). Meta-analysis of the effects
of type and combination of feedback on children's discrimination learning.
Review of Educational Research, 55, 9-22. #(6)

Gettings, R.M. (1976). A summary of selected legislation relating to the
handicapped: 1975. Programs for the handicapped. DHEW: Office for Handicapped
Individuals, Washington, D.C., August 20, 2-15. #(10)

Getzels, J.W., & Guba, E.G. (1954). Role, role conflict, and effectiveness:
An empirical study. American Sociological Review, 19, 164-175. #(26)

Gholson, B., Levine, M., & Phillips, S. (1972). Hypotheses, strategies, and
stereotypies in discrimination learning. Journal of Experimental Child
Psychology, 13, 423-446. #(6)

Giangreco, M.F. (1982). Teaching imitation to a profoundly delayed learner
through functional tasks. Education and Training of the Mentally Retarded,
17, 163-167. #(3), #(41), #(45)

Gibson, E.J. (1969). Principles of perceptual learning and development. New
York: Appleton-Century-Crofts. #(12), #(34)

Gibson, E.J. (1969). Contemporary theories of perceptual learning: Response-
oriented theories. In E.J. Gibson, Principles of perceptual learning and
development (pp. 53-74). New York: Appleton-Century-Crofts. #(12), #(38)

Gibson, E.J. (1969). A differentiation theory of perceptual development. In
E.J. Gibson, Principles of perceptual learning and development (pp. 75-94).
New York: Appleton-Century-Crofts. #(12), #(38)

Gibson, E.J. (1969). Selective factors in perceptual learning. In E.J.
Gibson, Principles of perceptual learning and development (pp. 121-144). New
York: Appleton-Century-Crofts. #(1), #(12), #(38), #(41)

Gibson, E.J. (1969). Perceptual learning and the total cognitive process. In
E.J. Gibson, Principles of perceptual learning and development (pp. 145-161).
New York: Appleton-Century-Crofts. #(12), #(38)

Gibson, E.J. (1969). The improvement of perceptual skills with practice. In
E.J. Gibson (Ed.), Principles of perceptual learning and development (pp.
163-191). New York: Appleton-Century-Crofts. #(12), #(38)

Gibson, E.J. (1969). The development of perception in the individual:
Perceiving objects. In E.J. Gibson, Principles of perceptual learning and
development (pp. 341-368). New York: Appleton-Century-Crofts. #(12), #(38)

Gibson, E.J., Gibson, J.J., Pick, A.D., & Osser, H. (1962). A developmental
study of the perception of letter-like forms. Journal of Comparative and
Physiological Psychology, 55, 897-906. #(12), #(6)

Gibson, E.J., Owsley, C.J., Walker, A., & Megaw-Nyce, J. (1979). Development
of the perception of invariants: Substance and shape. Perception, 8, 609-619.
#(12)

Gibson, J.J. (1960). The concept of the stimulus in psychology. American
Psychologist, 15, 694-703. #(6), #(3)

Gibson, J.J. (1966). The senses considered as perceptual systems. Boston:
Houghton Mifflin. #(34), #(12)

Gibson, J.J. (1979). The ecological approach to visual perception. Boston:
Houghton Mifflin. #(34), #(12)

Gickling, E., & Theobald, J. (1975). Mainstreaming: Affect or effect. Journal
of Special Education, 9, 317-328. #(39)

Gifford, J.L., Rusch, F.R., Martin, J.E., & White, D.M. (1984). Autonomy and
adaptability: A proposed technology for the study of work behavior. In N.
Ellis & N.R. Bray (Eds.), International review of research in mental
retardation (Vol. 12, pp. 285-318). Orlando, FL: Academic Press. #(27),
#(38), #(45)

Gilbert, G.O. (1976). Extinction procedures: Proceed with caution. Mental
Retardation, 13(6), 28-29. #(3), #(14), #(45)

Giles, D.K., & Wolf, M.M. (1971). Toilet training institutionalized, severe
retardates: An application of operant behavior modification techniques.
American Journal of Mental Deficiency, 70, 617-622. #(3), #(21)

Gilhool, T.K. (1973). Education: An inalienable right. Exceptional Children,
39, 597-609. #(10)

Gilhool, T.K. (1976). Changing public policies in the individualization of
instruction: Roots and forces. Education and Training of the Mentally
Retarded, 11, 180-188. #(10), #(45)

Gillberg, C. (1989). Early symptoms in autism. In C. Gillberg (Ed.),
Diagnosis and treatment of autism (pp. 23-31). New York: Plenum Press. #(2),
#(38)

Gillberg, C. (1990). Autism and pervasive developmental disorders. Journal of
Child Psychology and Psychiatry, 31, 99-119. #(2)

Gillberg, C. (1991). Autistic syndrome with onset at age 31 years: Herpes
encephalitis as a possible model for childhood autism. Developmental Medicine
and Child Neurology, 33, 912-929. #(2)

Gillberg, C., & Coleman, M. (1992). The biology of the autistic syndromes
(2nd ed.). New York: Cambridge University Press. #(34), #(2)

Gilliam, R.B., & Johnston, J.R. (1985). Development of print awareness in
language-disordered preschoolers. Journal of Speech and Hearing Research, 28,
521-526. #(30), #(17)

Ginsburg, A.L., & Turnbull, B.J. (1981). Local program coordination: An
alternative structure for federal aid to schools. Educational Evaluation and
Policy Analysis, 3, 33-41. #(23)

Ginsburg, H., & Opper, S. (1979). Piaget's theory of intellectual development
(2nd ed.). Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall. #(13), #(34)

Girardeau, F.L., & Ellis, N.R. (1964). Rote verbal learning by normal and
mentally retarded children. American Journal of Mental Deficiency, 68,
525-532. #(30), #(11)

Girolametto, L.E. (1988). Improving the social-conversational skills of
developmentally delayed children: An intervention study. Journal of Speech
and Hearing Disorders, 53, 153-167. #(30), #(45)

Glahn, T.J., Chock, P.N., & Mills, D.L. (1984). Transitional teaching homes
for individuals with developmental disabilities. Mental Retardation, 22,
137-141. #(27), #(45)

Gladstone, B.W., & Spencer, C.J. (1977). The effects of modelling on the
contingent praise of mental retardation counsellors. Journal of Applied
Behavior Analysis, 10, 75-84. #(3), #(45)

Glaser, R. (1963). Instructional technology and the measurement of learning
outcomes: Some questions. American Psychologist, 18, 519-521. #(3)

Glaser, R. (Ed.). (1971). The nature of reinforcement. New York: Academic
Press. #(3), #(34), #(14)

Glaser, R. (1976). Components of a psychology of instruction: Toward a
science of design. Review of Educational Research, 46, 1-24. #(3)

Glaser, R. (1977). Adaptive education: Individual diversity and learning. New
York: Holt, Rinehart and Winston. #(34), #(26)

Glaser, R. (Ed.). (1982). Advances in instructional psychology (Vol. 2).
Hillsdale, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum. #(34), #(5)

Glasgow, D.R., Sadowski, C.J., & Davis, S.F. (1977). The project must count:
Fostering positive attitudes toward the conduct of research. Bulletin of the
Psychonomic Society, 10, 471-474. #(43)

Glasman, N.S., & Biniaminov, I. (1981). Input-output analyses of schools.
Review of Educational Research, 51, 509-539. #(3)

Glass, A.L., & Holyoak, K.J. (1986). Cognition (2nd ed.). New York: Random
House. #(34), #(25)

Glass, G.V. (1965). Evaluating testing, maturation, and treatment effects in
a pretest posttest quasi-experimental design. American Educational Research
Journal, 2, 83-87. #(29), #(43)

Glass, G.V. (1976). Primary, secondary, and meta-analysis of research.
Educational Researcher, 5(10), 3-8. #(43), #(29)

Glass, G.V., & Hopkins, D.D. (1984). Statistical methods in education and
psychology (2nd ed.). Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall. #(34), #(22)

Glassman, R.B. (1973). Persistence and loose coupling in living systems.
Behavioral Science, 18, 83-98. #(42)

Gleason, J.B. (Ed.). (1989). The development of language (2nd ed.). Columbus,
OH: Charles E. Merrill. #(34), #(30)

Gleitman, H., & Gleitman, L. (1979). Language use and language judgment. In
C.J. Fillmore, D. Kempler, & W. Wang (Eds.), Individual differences in
language ability and language behavior (pp. 103-125). New York: Academic
Press. #(38), #(30)

Glendenning, N.J., Adams, G.L., & Sternberg, L. (1983). Comparison of prompt
sequences. American Journal of Mental Deficiency, 88, 321-325. #(6), #(9)

Glenn, A.D., & Carrier, C.A. (1986). Teacher education and computer train-
ing: An assessment. Peabody Journal of Education, 64(1), 67-80. #(16), #(5)

Glidden, L.M. (1979). Training of learning and memory in retarded persons:
Strategies, techniques, and teaching tools. In N.R. Ellis (Ed.), Handbook of
mental deficiency: Psychological theory and research (2nd ed., pp. 619-657).
Hillsdale: NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum. #(11), #(38)

Glover, J., & Gary, A.L. (1976). Procedures to increase some aspects of
creativity. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 9, 79-84. #(50)

Glynn, E.L. (1970). Classroom applications of self-determined reinforcement.
Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 3, 123-132. #(3), #(15), #(14)

Goda, S. (1969). Language therapy for the non-speaking retarded child. Mental
Retardation, 7(4), 22-25. #(30), #(45)

Goddard, H.H. (1912). The Kallikak family: A study in the heredity of
feeblemindedness. New York: MacMillan. #(34), #(45), #(25)

Goddard, H.H. (1928). School training of gifted children. New York: World
Book. #(50)

Goetz, E.M. (1982). A review of functional analysis of preschool children's
creative behaviors. Education and Treatment of Children, 5, 157-177. #(50),
#(32)

Goetz, L., Gee, K., & Sailor, W. (1985). Using a behavior chain interruption
strategy to teach communication skills to learners with severe disabilities.
Journal of The Association for Persons with Severe Handicaps, 10, 21-30.
#(3), #(21)

Goetz, L., Guess, D., & Stremel-Campbell, K. (Eds.). (1987). Innovative
program design for individuals with dual sensory impairments. Baltimore: Paul
H. Brookes. #(34), #(21)

Goetz, L., Schuler, A., & Sailor, W. (1979). Teaching functional speech to
the severely handicapped: Current issues. Journal of Autism and Developmental
Disorders, 9, 325-343. #(30), #(2), #(21)

Goetz, L. Schuler, A., & Sailor, W. (1981). Functional competence as a factor
in communication instruction. Exceptional Education Quarterly, 2, 51-61.
#(30)

Goetz, L., Schuler, A., & Sailor, W. (1983). Motivational considerations in
teaching language to severely handicapped students. In M. Hersen, V. Van
Hasselt, & J. Matson (Eds.), Behavior therapy for the developmentally and
physically disabled. New York: Academic Press. #(38), #(21), #(3)

Goffman, E. (1961). Asylums. New York: Anchor. #(34), #(39)

Goffman, E. (1963). Stigma, Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall. #(15),
#(35), #(39)

Gold, M.S., & Gold, J.R. (1975). Autism and attention: Theoretical consider-
ations and a pilot study using set reaction time. Child Psychiatry and Human
Development, 6, 68-80. #(1), #(2)

Gold, M.W. (1972). Research on the vocational-habilitation of the retarded:
The present, the future. In N. Ellis (Ed.), International review of research
in mental retardation (Vol. 6, pp. 97-148). New York: Academic Press. #(27),
#(38), #(45)

Gold, M.W. (1972). Stimulus factors in skill training of the retarded on a
complex assembly task. American Journal of Mental Deficiency, 76, 517-526.
#(33), #(6)

Gold, M.W. (1976). Task analysis of a complex assembly task by the retarded
blind. Exceptional Children, 43, 78-84. #(45), #(33)

Gold, M.W. (1980). Did I say that? Champaign, IL: Research Press. #(34),
#(33)

Gold, M.W. (1981). Try 100 ways. Austin, TX: Marc Gold & Associates. #(27),
#(34)

Gold, M.W., & Barclay, C.R. (1973). The learning of difficult visual
discriminations by the moderately and severely retarded. Mental Retardation,
11(2), 9-11. #(6), #(21), #(45)

Gold, M.W., & Scott, K.G. (1971). Discrimination learning. In B. Stephens
(Ed.), Training the developmentally young (pp. 420-444). New York: John Day.
#(6), #(38)

Goldberg, I.I., & Lippman, L. (1974). Plato had a word for it. Exceptional
Children, 40, 325-334. #(10)

Goldenberg, E.P. (1979). Special technology for special children. Baltimore:
University Park Press. #(3), #(15), #(34)

Goldfarb, W. (1956). Receptor preferences in schizophrenic children. Archives
of Neurological Psychiatry, 76, 643-652. #(12)

Goldiamond, I. (1974). Toward a constructional approach to social problems:
Ethical and constitutional issues raised by applied behavior analysis.
Behaviorism, 2, 1-84. #(3)

Goldiamond, I. (1975). Singling out behavior modification for legal
regulation: Some effects on patient care, psychotherapy and research in
general. Arizona Law Review, 17, 105-126. #(3), #(40)

Goldman, R., Fristoe, M., & Woodcock, R.W. (1970). The Goldman-Fristoe-
Woodcock Test of Auditory Discrimination. Circle Pines, MN: American Guidance
Service. #(2), #(30), #(44)

Goldman, S.R., & Pelligrino, J.W. (1986). Microcomputers: Effective drill and
practice. Academic Therapy, 22, 133-140. #(16), #(9) 

Goldstein, G.S. (1974). Behavior modification: Some cultural factors. The
Psychological Record, 24, 89-91. #(3)

Goldstein, H. (1986). Enhancing language generalization using matrix and
stimulus equivalence training. In S.F. Warren & A.K. Rogers-Warren (Eds.),
Teaching functional language: Generalization and maintenance of language
skills (pp. 225-249). Baltimore: University Park Press. #(34), #(30), #(7)

Goldstein, H., & Wickstrom, S. (1986). Peer intervention effects on
communicative interaction among handicapped and nonhandicapped preschoolers.
Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 19, 209-214. #(3), #(36), #(30)

Goldstein, M.T. (1986). Curriculum: The keystone for special education.
Teaching Exceptional Children, 18(3), 220-223. #(5)

Goleman, D. (1993, July 13). New treatments for autism arouse hope and
skepticism. The New York Times, pp. C1, C11. #(2), #(30)

Golinkoff, R.M. (1983). The transition from prelinguistic to linguistic
communication. Hillsdale, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum. #(34), #(30)

Golinkoff, R.M., & Hirsh-Pasek, K. (1990). Let the mute speak: What infants
can tell us about language acquisition. Merrill-Palmer Quarterly, 36, 67-91.
#(30)

Gollin, E.S., & Savoy, P. (1968). Fading procedures and conditional
discrimination in children. Journal of the Experimental Analysis of Behavior,
11, 443-451. #(6)

Goncu, A. (Ed.). (1989). Understanding play [Special issue]. Developmental
Review, 9(4). #(37)

Good, T.L., Biddle, B.J., & Brophy, J.E. (1975). Teachers make a difference.
New York: Holt, Rinehart & Winston., #(34), #(35), #(15)

Good, T.L., & Brophy, J.E. (1974). Changing teacher and student behavior: An
empirical investigation. Journal of Educational Psychology, 66, 390-405.
#(5), #(42)

Goodall, K. (1972, November). Shapers at work. Psychology Today, pp. 53-62.
#(3) 

Goodall, P.A., Wehman, P., & Cleveland, P. (1983). Job placement for mentally
retarded individuals. Education and Training of the Mentally Retarded, 18,
271-278. #(27), #(45)

Goodenough, R.L., & Harris, D.B. (1963). The Goodenough-Harris Drawing Test.
New York: Harcourt Brace Jovanovich. #(44)

Goodlad, J.I. (1975). The dynamics of educational change. New York: McGraw-
Hill. #(34), #(15), #(8)

Goodlad, J.I. (1977). What goes on in our schools? Educational Researcher,
6(3), 3-6. #(42)

Goodlad, J.I. (1979). Curriculum inquiry: The story of curriculum practice.
New York: McGraw-Hill. #(34), #(5), #(15)

Goodlad, J.I. (1979). What schools are for. Bloomington, IN: Phi Delta Kappa
Educational Foundation. #(15), #(34)

Goodlad, J.I. (1980). What we don't know about schooling. Phi Delta Kappan,
61, 591-592. #(15)

Goodlad, J.I. (1983). A place called school. New York: McGraw-Hill. #(15),
#(34)

Goodlad, J.I. (1983). A study of schooling: Some findings and hypotheses. Phi
Delta Kappan, 64, 465-470. #(15)

Goodlad, J.I. (1983). A study of schooling: Some implications for school
improvement. Phi Delta Kappan, 64, 552-558. #(15)

Goodlad, J.I. (1983). What some schools and classrooms teach. Educational
Leadership, 40, 8-19. #(15)

Goodlad, J.I. (1985). The great American schooling experiment. Phi Delta
Kappan, 67, 266-271. #(15)

Goodlad, J.I., Sirotnik, K.A., & Overman, B.C. (1979). An overview of 'A
study of schooling'. Phi Delta Kappan, 61, 174-178. #(15)

Goodman, J.F. (1976). Aging and IQ change in institutionalized mentally
retarded. Psychological Reports, 39, 999-1006. #(45)

Goodman, J.F. (1989). Does retardation mean dumb? Children's perceptions of
the nature, cause, and course of mental retardation. The Journal of Special
Education, 23, 313-329. #(45)

Goodman, K.S. (1989). Whole language research: Foundations and development.
Elementary School Journal, 90, 207-220. #(30)

Goodman, K.S., & Goodman, Y. (1979). Learning to read is natural. In L.B.
Resnick & P.B. Weaver (Eds.), Theory and practice of early reading (Vol. 1,
pp. 137-154). Hillsdale, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum. #(38), #(17)

Goodman, L.V. (1976). A bill of rights for the handicapped. American
Education, 12(6), 6-8. #(10)

Goodman, P. (1962). Compulsory miseducation. New York: Random House. #(34),
#(15)

Goodin, R., & Waldner, I. (1979). Thinking big, thinking small, not thinking
at all. Public Policy, 27, 1-24. #(23)

Gookin, D. (1991). DOS for dummies. San Mateo, CA: IGD Books. #(16), #(34)

Gopnik, A. (1984). The acquisition of gone and the development of the object
concept. Journal of Child Language, 11, 273-292. #(13)

Gordon, N., & McKinlay, I. (1980). Helping clumsy children. Edinburgh,
Scotland: Churchill Livingstone. #(21), #(34)

Gordon, N., McKinlay, I., & Graziano, A.M. (1970). A group treatment approach
to multiple problem behaviors of autistic children. Exceptional Children, 36,
765-770. #(3), #(2)

Gordon, P. (1990). Learnability and feedback. Developmental Psychology, 26,
217-220. #(25), #(14)

Gotkin, J. (1975). New words for an old power trip: A critique of behavior
modification in institutional settings. Arizona Law Review, 17, 29-38. #(40),
#(3)

Gottlieb, J. (1981). Mainstreaming: Fulfilling the promise? American Journal
of Mental Deficiency, 86, 115-126. #(27), #(39)

Gottlieb, J. (1982). Mainstreaming. Education and Training of the Mentally
Retarded, 17, 79-82. #(27), #(39)

Gottlieb, J., & Leyser, Y. (1981). Facilitating the social mainstreaming of
retarded children. Exceptional Education Quarterly, 1(4), 57-69. #(27), #(39)

Gottman, J.M. (1973). N-of-one and N-of-two research in psychotherapy.
Psychological Bulletin, 80, 93-105. #(3), #(29), #(48)

Gottman, J.M., Gonso, J., & Schuler, P. (1976). Teaching social skills to
isolated children. Journal of Abnormal Child Psychology, 4, 179-197. #(37)

Gottman, J.M. (1977). Toward a definition of social isolation in children.
Child Development, 48, 513-517.

Gould, J.L. (1985). How bees remember flower shapes. Science, 227, 1492-1494.
#(11)

Gould, S.J. (1981). The mismeasure of man. New York: W.W. Norton. #(34),
#(35)

Gozali, H., Cleary, T.A., Walster, G.W., & Gozzali, J. (1973). Relationship
between the internal-external control construct and achievement. Journal of
Educational Psychology, 64, 9-14. #(25), #(18)

Grabe, M., & Latta, R.M. (1981). Cumulative achievement in a mastery
instructional system: The impact of differences in resultant achievement
motivation and persistance. American Educational Research Journal, 18, 7-13.
#(5), #(26)

Graesse, A.C., Hoffman, N.L., & Clark, L.F. (1980). Structural components of
reading time. Journal of Verbal Learning and Verbal Behavior, 19, 135-151.
#(17)

Graf, P., & Mandler, G. (1984). Activation makes words more accessible, but
not necessarily more retrievable. Journal of Verbal Learning and Verbal
Behavior, 23, 553-568. #(11), #(17)

Graf, P., & Schacter, D.L. (1987). Selective effects of interference on
implicit and explicit memory for new associaitons. Journal of Experimental
Psychology: Learning, Memory, and Cognition, 13, 45-53. #(11)

Graham, L.P. (1984). The use of microcomputers for the remediation of
learning problems in children with communication disorders. Journal of
Childhood Communication Disorders, 8, 79-88. #(30), #(16) 

Gray, B., & Ryan, B. (1973). A language therapy for the non-language child.
Champaign, IL: Research Press. #(30), #(34)

Gray, J., & Satterly, D. (1976). A chapter of errors: Teaching styles and
pupil progress in retrospect. Educational Research, 19(1), 45-56. #(5)

Gray, W.S. (1963). Gray Oral Reading Tests. Indianapolis, IN: Bobbs-Merrill.
#(44)

Granzin, A.C., & Carnine, D.W. (1977). Child performance on discrimination
tasks: Effects of amount of stimulus variation. Journal of Experimental Child
Psychology, 24, 332-342. #(3), #(6)

Graziano, A.M. (1970). A group treatment approach to multiple problem
behaviors of autistic children. Exceptional Children, 36, 765-770. #(2)

Graziano, A.M., DeGiovanni, I.S., & Garcia, K.A. (1979). Behavioral treatment
of children's fears: A review. Psychological Bulletin, 86, 804-830. #(3),
#(32)

Green, A.H. (1967). Self-mutilation in schizophrenic children. Archives of
Orthopsychiatry, 17, 234-244. #(19)

Green, C.W., Canipe, V.S., Way, P.J., & Reid, D.H. (1986). Improving the
functional utility and effectiveness of classroom services for students with
profound multiple handicaps. Journal of The Association for Persons with
Severe Handicaps, 11, 162-170. #(21)

Green, C.W., Reid, D.H., McCarnm J.E., Schepis, M., Phillips, J.F., Parsons, 
M.B., (986). Naturalistic observations of classrooms serving severely handi-
capped persons: Establishing evaluative norms. Applied Research in Mental 
Retardation, 7, 37-50. #(29)


Green, C.W., Reid, D.H., White, L.K., Halford, R.C., Brittain, D.P., &
Gardner, M. (1988). Identifying reinforcers for persons with profound
handicaps: Staff opinion versus systematic assessment of preferences. 
Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 21, 31-43. #(3), #(21), #(14), #(29) 

Green, G. (1991). Everyday stimulus equivalences for the brain injured. In W.
Isha (Ed.), Human behavior in today's world (pp. 123-132). New York: Praeger.
#(38), #(6), #(21)

Greendough, W.T., Black, J.E., & Wallace, C.S. (1987). Experience and brain
development. Child Development, 58, 539-559. #(25)

Greene, B.F., Bailey, J.S., & Barber, F. (1981). An analysis and reduction of
disruptive behavior on school buses. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis,
14, 177-192. #(3) 

Greene, D., Sternberg, B., & Lepper, M.R. (1976). Overjustification in a
token economy. Journal of Personality and Social Psychology, 34, 1219-1234.
#(3)

Greene, F., Willis, B.S., Levy, R., & Bailey, J.S. (1978). Measuring client
gains from staffimplemented programs. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis,
11, 395-412. #(29), #(42)

Greene, R.J., & Hoats, D. L. (1971). Aversive tickling: A simple conditioning
technique. Behavior Therapy, 2, 389-393. #(3), #(14)

Greene, R.J., & Hoats, D. L., & Hornick, A.J. (1970). Music distortion: A new 
technique for behavior modification.  Psychological Record, 20, 107-109.
#(3)

Greenfield, D.B. (1976). Novelty and familiarity as redundant cues in
retardate discrimination learning. Journal of Experimental Child Psychology,
21, 289-302. #(6)

Greeno, J.G. (1964). Paired-associate learning with massed and distributed
repetition of items. Journal of Experimental Psychology, 67, 286-295. #(3),
#(9)

Greeno, J.G. (1980). Psychology of learning, 1960-1980: One participant's
observations. American Psychologist, 35, 713-728. #(15)

Greenspan, S. (1981). Social competence and handicapped individuals:
Practical implications of a proposed model. Advances in Special Education, 3,
41-82. #(37)

Greenspan, S., & Shoultz, B. (1981). Why mentally retarded adults lose their
jobs: Social competence as a factor in work adjustment. Applied Research in
Mental Retardation, 2, 23-38. #(27), #(33), #(45) 

Greenspan, S., Shoultz, B., & Weir, M.M. (1981). Social judgment and
vocational adjustment of mentally retarded adults. Applied Research in Mental
Retardation, 2, 335-346. #(45), #(33), #(37)

Greenwald, C.A., & Leonard, L.B. (1979). Communicative and sensorimotor
development of Down's syndrome children. American Journal of Mental
Deficiency, 84, 296-303. #(12), #(30)

Greenwood, C.R., Carta, J.J., & Hall, R.V. (1988). The use of classwide peer
tutoring strategies in classroom management and instruction. School
Psychology Review, 17, 258-275. #(36) 

Greenwood, C.R., Carta, J.J., Hart, B., Thurston, L.P., & Hall, R.V. (1989).
A behavioral approach to research on psychosocial retardation. Education and
treatment of Children, 12, 330-346. #(45), #(43)

Greenwood, C.R., Delquadri, J., & Hall, R.V. (1989). Longitudinal effects of
classwide peer tutoring. Journal of Educational Psychology, 81, 371-383.
#(36)

Greenwood, C.R., Dinwiddie, V.B., Carta, J.J., Dorsey, D., Kohler, F.,
Nelson, C., Othlz, D., & Schulte, D. (1987). Field replication of classwide
peer tutoring. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 20, 151-160. #(3), #(36)

Greenwood, C.R., & Hops, H. (1981). Group-oriented contingencies and peer
behavior change. In P.S. Strain (Ed.), The utilization of classroom peers as
behavior change agents (pp. 189-259). New York: Plenum Press. #(38), #(36),
#(3)

Greenwood, C.R., Hops, H., & Walker, H.M. (1977). The durability of student
behavior change: A comparative analysis at follow-up. Behavior Therapy, 8,
631-638. #(3)

Greenwood, C.R., Terry, B., Arreaga-Mayer, C., & Finney, R. (1992). The
classwide peer tutoring program: Implementation factors moderating students'
achievement. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 25, 101-116. #(36), #(8)

Greer, J.G., Anderson, R.M., & Davis, T.B. (1976). Developing functional
language in the severely retarded using standardized vocabulary. In R.M.
Anderson & J.G. Greer (Eds.), Educating the severely and profoundly retarded
(pp. 207-215). Baltimore: University Park Press. #(30), #(38), #(21)

Greer, J.G., Anderson, R.M., & Odle, S.J. (Eds.). (1982). Strategies for
helping severely and multiply handicapped citizens. Baltimore: University
Park Press. #(34), #(21)

Greer, J.G., & Wethered, C.E. (1984). Learned helplessness: A piece of the
burnout puzzle. Exceptional Children, 50, 524-530. #(3), #(42)

Greer, R.D. (1983). Contingencies of the science and technology of teaching
and pre-behavioristic research practices in education. Educational Research-
er, 12, 3-14. #(3), #(15)

Greif, E. (Ed.). (1988). Computer-supported cooperative work. San Mateo, CA:
Kaufmann. #(16), #(34)

Gresham, F.M. (1979). Comparison of response cost and timeout in a special
education setting. Journal of Abnormal Child Psychology, 13, 199-208. #(14),
#(3)

Gresham, F.M. (1981). Social skills training with handicapped children: A
review. Review of Educational Research, 51, 139-176. #(27), #(32)

Gresham, F.M. (1982). Misguided mainstreaming: The case for social skills
training with handicapped children. Exceptional Children, 48, 422-433. #(37)

Gresham, F.M. (1986). On the malleability of intelligence: Unnecessary
assumptions, reifications, and occlusion. School Psychology Review, 15,
261-263. #(25)

Gresham, F.M., & Elliott, S.N. (1989). Social skills deficits as a primary
learning disability. Journal of Learning Disabilities, 22, 120-124. #(37)

Gresham, F.M., & Elliott, S.N. (1990). Social Skills Rating System Manual.
Circle Pines, MN: American Guidance Service. #(44)

Gresham, F.M., & Reschly, D.J. (1986). Social skill deficits and low peer
acceptance of mainstreamed learning disabled children. Learning Disability
Quarterly, 9, 23-32. #(37), #(28)

Grice, H.P. (1975). Logic and conversation. In P. Cole & J. Morgan (Eds.),
Studies in syntax, semantics, and speech arts (Vol. 3, pp. 41-58). New York:
Academic Press. #(30), #(38)

Griffin, G.A. (1978). Guidelines for the evaluation of staff-development
programs. Teachers College Record, 80, 124-139. #(29)

Griffin, J.C., Locke, B.J., & Landers, W.F. (1975). Manipulation of potential
punishment parameters in the treatment of self-injury. Journal of Applied
Behavior Analysis, 8, 458. #(3), #(14)

Griffin, W.H. (1983). Can educational technology have any significant impact
on education? Technological Horizons in Education Journal, 11(3), 96-99.
#(16)

Griffith, R.G., & Henning, D.B. (1981). What is the human rights committee?
Mental Retardation, 19(2), 61-63. #(10), #(45)

Griffith, W.S. (1978). Educational needs: Definition, assessment, and
utilization. School Review, 86, 382-394. #(10), #(26), #(29)

Grimes, L. (1981). Error analysis and error correction procedures. Teaching
Exceptional Children, 14(1), 17-20. #(3)

Grimes, L. (1981). Computers are for kids: Designing software programs to
avoid problems of learning. Teaching Exceptional Children, 14(2), 48-57.
#(16)

Grocke, M.A. (1983). Computers in the classroom: How can they teach reading?
Australian Journal of Reading, 6, 175-185. #(16), #(17) 

Groden, G., & Baron, M.G. (Eds.). (1988). Autism: Strategies for change. New
York: Gardner Press. #(2)

Grosman, K.E. (1984). Severely and profoundly emotionally disturbed and
autistic students. In P.J. Valletutti & B.M. Sims-Tucker (Eds.), Severely and
profoundly handicapped students: Their nature and needs (pp. 153-216).
Baltimore: Paul H. Brookes. #(21), #(2)

Gross, A.M., & Drabman, R.S. (1981). Behavioral contrast and behavior
therapy. Behavior Therapy, 12, 231-246. #(3), #(6)

Grossberg, J.M. (1964). Behavior therapy: A review. Psychological Bulletin,
62, 73-88. #(3), #(32)

Grossfeld, M.C., & Grossfeld, C.A. (1986). Microcomputer applications in
rehabilitation of communication disorders. Rockville, MD: Aspen Publications.
#(16), #(34)

Grossman, H. (1984). Educating Hispanic students: Cultural implications for
instruction, classroom management, counseling and assessment. Springfield,
IL: Charles C Thomas. #(34), #(49)

Grossman, H.J. (1973, 1977). Manual on terminology and classification in
mental retardation. Washington, DC: American Association on Mental Deficien-
cy. #(44)

Grossman, H.J. (1983). Classification in mental retardation. Washington, DC:
American Association on Mental Deficiency. #(45), #(34)

Grove, N., & Walker, M. (1990). The Makaton Vocabulary: Using manual signs
and graphic symbols to develop interpersonal communication. Augmentative and
Alternative Communication, 6, 15-28. #(30)

Grubbs, W.N., & Lazerson, M. (1975). Rally 'round the workplace: Continuities
and fallacies in career education. Harvard Educational Review, 45, 451-474.
#(27), #(33)

Gruenhagen, K.A. (1982). Attitudes of fast food restaurant managers toward
hiring the mentally retarded. Career Development for Exceptional Individuals,
5, 98-105. #(37), #(18), #(33) 

Guba, E.G. (1968). Diffusion of innovations. Educational Leadership, 25,
292-295. #(8)

Guess, D. (1966). The influence of visual and ambulation restriction on
stereotyped behavior. American Journal of Mental Deficiency, 70, 542-547.
#(20)

Guess, D. (1969). A functional analysis of receptive language and productive
speech: Acquisition of the plural morpheme. Journal of Applied Behavior
Analysis, 2, 55-64. #(30)

Guess, D. (1980). Methods in communication instruction for severely
handicapped persons. In W. Sailor, B. Wilcox & L. Brown (Eds.), Methods of
instruction for severely handicapped students (pp. 195-225). Baltimore: Paul
H. Brookes. #(30), #(38), #(21)

Guess, D., & Baer, D.M. (1973). An analysis of individual differences in
generalization between receptive and productive language in retarded
children. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 6, 311-329. #(30), #(7)

Guess, D., & Helmstetter, E. (1986). Skill cluster instruction and the
individualized curriculum sequencing model. In R.H. Horner, L.H. Meyer, &
H.D. Fredericks (Eds.), Education of learners with severe handicaps:
Exemplary service strategies (pp. 221-250). Baltimore: Paul H. Brookes. #(5),
#(38), #(21)

Guess, D., Horner, D.R., Utley, B., Holvoet, J., Maxon, D., Tucker, D., &
Warren, S. (1978). A functional curriculum sequencing model for teaching the
severely handicapped. AAESPH Review, 3, 202-215. #(5), #(21)

Guess, D., & Rutherford, G. (1967). Experimental attempts to reduce
stereotyping among blind retardates. American Journal of Mental Deficiency,
71, 984-986. #(20)

Guess, D., Sailor, W., & Baer, D.M. (1974). To teach language to retarded
children. In R.L. Schiefelbusch & J.L. Lloyd (Eds.), Language perspectives:
Acquisition, retardation, and intervention (pp. 529-563). Baltimore:
University Park Press. #(30), #(38)

Guess, D., Sailor, W., & Baer, D.M. (1976). Functional speech and language
training for the severely handicapped. Lawrence, KS: H & H Enterprises.
#(30), #(21), #(34)

Guess, D., Sailor, W., & Baer, D.M. (1976). Functional speech and language
training for the severely handicapped. Part I: Persons and things. Lawrence,
KS: H & H Enterprises. #(30), #(21), #(34)

Guess, D., Sailor, W., & Baer, D.M. (1976). Functional speech and language
training for the severely handicapped. Part II: Actions with persons and
things. Lawrence, KS: H & H Enterprises. #(30), #(21), #(34)

Guess, D., Sailor, W., & Baer, D.M. (1976). Intervention program for children
with limited language. In R.L. Schiefelbusch (Ed.), Bases of language
intervention. Baltimore: University Park Press. #(30), #(38)

Guess, D., Sailor, W., & Baer, D.M. (1977). A behavioral-remedial approach to
language training for the severely handicapped. In E. Sontag (Ed.),
Educational programming for the severely and profoundly handicapped (pp.
360-376). Reston, VA: Council for Exceptional Children. #(3), #(30), #(21),
#(38)

Guess, D., Sailor, W., & Baer, D.M. (1978). Children with limited language.
In R.L. Schiefelbusch (Ed.), Language intervention strategies (pp. 101-143).
Baltimore: University Park Press. #(38), #(30)

Guess, D., Sailor, W., Keogh, W., & Baer, D.M. (1976). Language development
programs for severely handicapped children. In N. Haring & L. Brown (Eds.),
Teaching the severely handicapped (pp. 301-324). New York: Grune & Stratton.
#(30), #(38), #(21)

Guess, D., & Siegel-Causey, E. (1985). Behavioral control and education of
severely handicapped students: Who's doing what to whom? And why? In D.
Bricker & J. Filler (Eds.), Severe mental retardation: From theory to
practice (pp. 230-244). Reston, VA: Council for Exceptional Children. #(3),
#(21), #(38), #(45)

Guevremont, D.C., Osnes, P.G., & Stokes, T.F. (1986). Programming maintenance
after correspondence training interventions with children. Journal of Applied
Behavior Analysis, 19, 215-219. #(3), #(7), #(18)

Guilford, J.P. (1950). Creativity. American Psychologist, 5, 444-454. #(50)

Guilford, J.P. (1956). The structure of intellect. Psychological Bulletin,
53, 276-293. #(25)

Guilford, J.P. (1959). Traits of creativity. In H.H. Anderson (Ed.),
Creativity and its cultivation (pp. 142-161). New York: Harper & Brothers.
#(38), #(50)

Guilford, J.P. (1967). The nature of human intelligence. New York: McGraw-
Hill. #(34), #(25), #(50)

Guilford, J.P. (1982). Cognitive psychology's ambiguities: Some suggested
remedies. Psychological Review, 89, 48-59. #(25)

Gulley, N. (1962). Plato's theory of knowledge. London: Methuen. #(34), #(35)

Gullickson, G.R. (1966). A note on children's selection of novel auditory
stimuli. Journal of Experimental Child Psychology, 4, 158-162. #(3), #(6)

Gunter, P., Fox, J.J., Brady, M.P., Shores, R.E., & Cavanaugh, K. (1988).
Nonhandicapped peers as multiple exemplars: A generalization tactic for
promoting autistic students' social skills. Behavioral Disorders, 13,
116-126. #(2), #(37), #(7)

Guralnick, M.J. (1972). A language development program for severely
handicapped children. Exceptional Children, 39, 45-49. #(30), #(21)

Guralnick, M.J. (1975). Early classroom based-intervention and the role of
organizational structure. Exceptional Children, 41, 25-31. #(23), #(9)

Guralnick, M.J. (1976). The value of integrating handicapped and nonhandicap-
ped preschool children. American Journal of Orthopsychiatry, 46, 236-245.
#(27), #(39)

Guralnick, M.J. (1986). The peer relations of young handicapped and
nonhandicapped children. In P.S. Strain, M.J. Guralnick, & H.H. Walker
(Eds.), Children's social behavior: Development, assessment, and modification
(pp. 93-140). New York: Academic Press. #(38), #(37)

Guralnick, M.J. (1990). Social competence and early intervention. Journal of
Early Intervention, 14, 3-14. #(24), #(37)

Guralnick, M.J., & Groom, J.M. (1987). Dyadic peer interactions of mildly
delayed and nonhandicapped preschool children. American Journal of Mental
Deficiency, 92, 178-193. #(37), #(45)

Guralnick, M.J., & Paul-Brown, D. (1989). Peer-related communicative
competence preschool children: Developmental and adaptive characteristics.
Journal of Speech and Hearing Research, 32, 930-943. #(36), #(30)

Gushkin, S. (1981). Directions for research on attitudes related to mental
retardation. In P. Mittler (Ed.), Frontiers of knowledge in mental retarda-
tion (Vol. 1. pp. 397-405). Baltimore: University Park Press. #(44), #(38)

Guthrie, E.R. (1935). The psychology of learning. New York: Harper. #(34),
#(25)

Guthrie, J.W. (1981). Emerging politics of educational policy. Educational
Evaluation and Policy Analysis, 3, 75-82. #(23)

Gutierrez-Griep, R. (1984). Student preference of sensory reinforcers.
Education and Training of the Mentally Retarded, 19, 108-113. #(3), #(12),
#(14), #(45) 

Gutowkski, W.E., & Chechile, R.A. (1987). Encoding, storage, and retrieval
components of associative memory deficits of mildly mentally retarded adults.
American Journal of Mental Deficiency, 92, 85-93. #(45), #(11)

Guttentag, R.E. (1985). A developmental study of attention to auditory and
visual signals. Journal of Experimental Child Psychology, 39, 546-561. #(1)

Haefele, D.L. (1980). How to evaluate thee, teacher--Let 'em count the ways.
Phi Delta Kappan, 61, 349-352. #(29), #(21)

Haertel, G. (1985). Construct validity and criterion-referenced testing.
Review of Educational Research, 55, 23-46. #(29)

Haertel, G., Walberg, H.J., & Weinstein, T. (1983). Psychological models of
educational performance: A theoretical synthesis of constructs. Review of
Educational Research, 53, 7591. #(26)

Hagan, J.W. (1967). The effect of distraction on selective attention. Child
Development, 38, 685-694. #(1)

Hagen, D. (1984). Microcomputer resource book for special education. Reston,
VA: Reston Publishing. #(16), #(34)

Hagen, E. (1980). Identification of the gifted. New York: Teachers College
Press. #(34), #(50)

Hagen, J.W., & Huntsman, N. (1971). Selective attention in mental retardates.
Developmental Psychology, 5, 151-160. #(1), #(45)

Hagen, J.W., & Sabo, R.A. (1967). A developmental study of selective
attention. Merrill-Palmer Quarterly, 13, 159-171. #(1)

Haith, M.M., & Campos, J.J. (Eds.). (1983). Handbook of child psychology:
Vol. 2. Infancy and developmental psychobiology. New York: John Wiley. #(38),
#(12)

Haith, M.M. (1990). Progress in the understanding of sensory and perceptual
processes in early infancy. Merrill-Palmer Quarterly, 36, 1-26. #(12)

Halderman v Pennhurst State School and Hospital. (1977). 445 F. Supp. 1294
(E.D., P.A.). #(10)

Hale, G.A., & Alderman, L.B. (1978). Children's selective attention with
variation in amount of stimulus exposure. Journal of Experimental Child
Psychology, 26, 320-327. #(1)

Hale, G.A., & Lewis, M. (Eds.). (1979). Attention and cognitive development.
Princeton, NJ: Educational Testing Center. #(1), #(25), #(34)

Hale, G.A., & Morgan, J.S. (1973). Developmental trends in children's
component selection. Journal of Experimental Child Psychology, 15, 302-314.
#(1)

Hale, G.A., & Piper, R.A. (1973). Developmental trends in children's
incidental learning: Some critical stimulus differences. Developmental
Psychology, 8, 327-335. #(1), #(6)

Halford, G.S. (1970). A theory of the acquisition of conservation. Psycholog-
ical Review, 77, 302-316. #(35), #(6)

Hall, A.D., & Fagen, R.E. (1968). Definition of a system. In W.F. Buckley
(Ed.), Modern systems research for the behavioral scientist (pp. 81-92).
Chicago: Aldine. #(38), #(42)

Hall, G.E., & Loucks, S.F. (1977). A developmental model for determining
whether the treatment is actually implemented. American Educational Research
Journal, 14, 263-276. #(3), #(8), #(29)

Hall, R.V. (1971). Behavior Modification: Basic principles. Lawrence, KS: H
& H Enterprises. #(3), #(34)

Hall, R.V. (1971). Managing behavior 1: The measurement of behavior.
Lawrence, KS: H & H Enterprises. #(3), #(29), #(34)

Hall, R.V. (1991). Behavior analysis and education: An unfulfilled dream.
Journal of Behavioral Education, 1, 305-316. #(3)

Hall, R.V., Axelrod, S., Foundopoulos, M., Shellman, J., Campbell, R.A., &
Cranson, S.S. (1971). The effective use of punishment to modify behavior in
the classroom. Educational Technology, 11, 24-46. #(3), #(14)

Hall, R.V., Cristler, C., Cranston, S.S., & Tucker, B. (1970). Teachers and
parents as researchers using multiple baseline designs. Journal of Applied
Behavior Analysis, 3, 247-255. #(43), #(48)

Hall, R.V., Lund, D., & Jackson, D. (1968). Effects of teacher attention on
study behavior. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 1, 1-12. #(3), #(1),
#(9)

Hall, R.V., Panyan, M., Rabon, D., & Broden, M. (1968). Instructing beginning
teachers in reinforcement procedures which improve classroom control. Journal
of Applied Behavior Analysis, 1, 315-322. #(3), #(14)

Halladay, M., & Hassan, R. (1976). Cohesion in English. London: Longman.
#(30), #(34)

Hallahan D.P. (Ed.). (1981). Handbook of special education. Englewood Cliffs,
NJ: Prentice-Hall. #(5), #(21), #(34)

Hallahan, D.P., & Cruickshank, W.M. (1973). Psychoeducational foundations of
learning disabilities. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall. #(28), #(34)

Hallahan, D.P., & Kauffman, J.M. (1976). Introduction to learning disabili-
ties: A psychobehavioral approach. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall.
#(34), #(28)

Hallahan, D.P., & Reeve, R.E. (1980). Selective attention and distractibili-
ty. In B.K. Keogh (Ed.), Advances in special education (Vol. 1, pp. 141-181).
Greenwich, CT: JAI Press. #(1), #(38)

Hallahan, D.P., Tarver, S.G., Kauffman, J.M., & Graybeal, I.L. (1978).
Selective attention abilities of learning disabled children under reinforce-
ment and response cost. Journal of Learning Disabilities, 11, 39-47. #(1),
#(14), #(28)

Halle, J.W. (1982). Teaching functional language to the handicapped: An
integrative model of natural environment teaching techniques. Journal of The
Association for Persons with Severe Handicaps, 7, 29-37. #(30), #(21), #(27) 

Halle, J.W. (1988). Adopting the natural environment as the context of
training. In S.N. Calculator & J.L. Bedrosian (Eds.), Communication assessment
and intervention for adults with mental retardation (pp. 155-185). Boston:
Little, Brown. #(38), #(27)

Halle, J.W., Baer, D.M., & Spradlin, J.E. (1981). Teachers' generalized use
of delay as a stimulus control procedure to increase language use by
handicapped children. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 14, 389-409.
#(7), #(6)

Halle, J.W., Marshall, A.M., & Spradlin, J.E. (1979). Time delay: A technique
to increase language use and facilitate generalization in retarded children.
Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 12, 431-439. #(3), #(30), #(7)

Hallett, P., Sype, M.S., & Gates, J.K. (1971). A language-based curriculum
for the mentally retarded. Mental Retardation, 9(6), 9-12. #(5), #(30), #(45)

Halliday, M.A.K. (1975). Learning how to mean: Explorations in the develop-
ment of language. Amsterdam: Elsevier-North Holland. #(30), #(34)

Halperin, S., & Kaplan, G.R. (Eds.). (1976). Federalism at the crossroads:
Improving educational policymaking. Washington, DC: Institute for Educational
Leadership. #(23), #(34)

Halpern, A.S., Irvin, L.K., & Landman, J.T. (1979). Alternative approaches to
the measurement of adaptive behavior. American Journal of Mental Deficiency,
84, 304-310. #(29)

Halpern, W.I. (1970). The schooling of autistic children: Preliminary
findings. American Journal of Orthopsychiatry, 40, 665-671. #(21), #(2)

Ham, R. (1986). Techniques of stuttering therapy. Englewood Cliffs, NJ:
Prentice-Hall. #(34), #(30)

Hamachek, D.E. (1976). Removing the stigma from obedience behavior. Phi Delta
Kappan, 57, 443-446. #(3), #(14), #(29)

Hambleton, R.K. (1974). Testing and decision-making procedures for selected
individualized instructional programs. Review of Educational Research, 44,
371-400. #(9)

Hambleton, R.K., Swaminathan, H., Algina, J., & Coulson, D.B. (1978).
Criterion-referenced testing and measurement: A review of technical issues
and developments. Review of Educational Research, 48, 1-47. #(32), #(5),
#(29)

Hamilton, J., & Allen, P. (1967). Ward programming for severely retarded
institutionalized residents. Mental Retardation, 5(6), 22-25. #(21), #(31),
#(3), #(45)

Hamilton, J., Stephens, L., & Allen, P. (1967). Controlling aggressive and
destructive behavior in severely retarded institutionalized residents.
American Journal of Mental Deficiency, 71, 852-856. #(31), #(21)

Hamlet, C.C., Axelrod, S., & Kuerschner, S. (1984). Eye contact as an
antecedent to compliant behavior. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 17,
553-557. #(1), #(4), #(3)

Hammill, D.D. (1971). Evaluating children for instructional purposes.
Academic Therapy, 6, 341-353. #(29), #(9)

Hammill, D.D. (1990). On defining learning disabilities: An emerging
consensus. Journal of Learning Disabilities, 23, 74-84. #(28)

Hammill, D.D., & Wiederholt, J.L. (1973). Review of the Frostig visual
perception test and the related training program. In L. Mann & D. A. Sabatino
(Eds.), First review of special education (Vol. 1, pp. 33-48). Philadelphia:
JSE Press. #(38), #(12), #(32)

Hamre-Nietupski, S., & Nietupski, J. (1981). Integral involvement of severely
handicapped students within regular public schools. Journal of The Associa-
tion for Persons with Severe Handicaps, 6, 30-39. #(27), #(21)

Hamre-Nietupski, S., Nietupski, J., Bates, P., & Maurer, S. (1982).
Implementing a community based educational model for moderately/severely
handicapped students: Common problems and suggested solutions. Journal of The
Association for Persons with Severe Handicaps, 7, 38-43. #(8), #(27), #(21)

Handen, B.L., & Zane, T. (1987). Delayed prompting: A review of procedural
variations and results. Research in Developmental Disabilities, 8, 307-330.
#(9), #(32)

Handleman, J.S. (1979). Generalization by autistic-type children of verbal
responses across settings. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 12, 273-282.
#(3), #(2), #(7)

Handleman, J.S. (1981). A model for self-contained classes for autistic-type
youngsters. Education and Treatment of Children, 4, 61-70. #(21), #(2)

Handleman, J.S., & Harris, S.L. (1980). Generalization from school to home
with autistic children. Journal of Autism and Developmental Disorders, 10,
323-333. #(2), #(7)

Handleman, J.S., Powers, M.D., & Harris, S.L. (1984). Teaching of labels: An
analysis of concrete and pictorial representations. American Journal of
Mental Deficiency, 88, 625-629. #(6)

Hanley, T.V., Appell, L.S., & Harris, C.D. (1988). Technological innovation
in the context of special education systems: A qualitative and structured
approach. Journal of Special Education Technology, 9, 98-108. #(16), #(8)

Hanley-Maxwell, C., Rusch, F.R., Chadsey-Rusch, J., & Renzaglia, A. (1986).
Reported factors contributing to job terminations of individuals with severe
disabilities. Journal of the Association for Persons with Severe Handicaps,
11, 45-52. #(27), #(33), #(21) 

Hanline, M.F., & Murray, C. (1984). Integrating severely handicapped children
into regular public schools. Phi Delta Kappan, 65, 273-276. #(27), #(21)

Hannaway, J. (1978). Administrative structures: Why do they grow? Teachers
College Record, 79, 413-436. #(42)

Hanson, H. (1959). The effects of discrimination training on stimulus
generalization. Journal of Experimental Psychology, 58, 320-334. #(6), #(7)

Hanson, M.J., & Bellamy, G.T. (1977). Continuous measurement of progress in
infant intervention programs. Education and Training of the Mentally
Retarded, 12, 52-58. #(3), #(29), #(45)

Hanushek, E. (1977). The production of education, teacher quality, and
efficiency. In D.A. Erickson (Ed.), Educational organization and administra-
tion (pp. 150-169). Berkeley, CA: McCutchan. #(42), #(38)

Harchik, A.E., Harchik, A.J., Luce, S.C., & Sherman, J.A. (1990). Teaching
autistic and severely handicapped children to recruit praise: Acquisition and
generalization. Research in Developmental Disabilities, 11, 77-95. #(2),
#(21)

Hardiman, S.A., Goetz, E.M., Reuter, K.E., & Le Blanc, J.M. (1975). Primes,
contingent attention, and training: Effects on a child's motor behavior.
Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 8, 399-409. #(1), #(5)

Hardin, G. (1968). The tragedy of the commons. Science, 162, 1243-1248. #(35)

Hardman, M.L., & Drew, C.J. (1977). The physically handicapped retarded
individual: A review. Mental Retardation, 15(5), 43-48. #(45), #(21), #(32)

Hardy, J.C. (1986). Cerebral palsy: Remediation of communication disorders.
Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall. #(21), #(34)

Haring, N.G. (1975). Special education for the severely handicapped: The
state of the art in 1975. Reston, VA: Council for Exceptional Children.
#(21), #(34)

Haring, N.G. (1975). Educational services for the severely/profoundly
handicapped. Journal of Special Education, 9, 425-433. #(21), #(27)

Haring, N.G. (1977). Measurement and evaluation procedures for programming
with the severely and profoundly handicapped. In E. Sontag (Ed.), Educational
programming for the severely and profoundly handicapped (pp. 189-202).
Reston, VA: Council for Exceptional Children. #(38), #(21), #(29)

Haring, N.G., & Billingsley, F.F. (1984). Systems-change strategies to ensure
the future of integration. In N. Certo, N. Haring, & R. York (Eds.), Public
school integration of severely handicapped students (pp. 83-105). Baltimore:
Paul H. Brookes. #(38), #(8), #(39)

Haring, N.G., & Bricker, D. (1976). Overview of comprehensive services for
the severely/profoundly handicapped. In N.G. Haring & L. Brown (Eds.),
Teaching the severely handicapped (Vol. 1, pp. 17-32). New York: Grune &
Stratton. #(21), #(38)

Haring, N.G., & Brown, L. (Eds.). (1976). Teaching the severely handicapped
(Vol. 1). New York: Grune & Stratton. #(34), #(9), #(21)

Haring, N.G., & Eaton, M. (1978). Systematic instructional procedures: An
instructional hierarchy. In N. Haring, T. Lovitt, M. Eaton, & C. Hansen, The
fourth R: Research in the classroom (pp. 23-40). Columbus, OH: Charles E.
Merrill. #(9), #(15), #(38), #(43)

Haring, N.G., & Gentry, N.D. (1976). Direct and individualized instructional
procedures. In N.G. Haring & R.L. Schiefelbusch (Eds.), Teaching special
children (pp. 72-111). New York: McGraw-Hill. #(9), #(38)

Haring, N.G., Lovitt, T.C., Eaton, M.D., & Hansen, C.L. (1978). The fourth R:
Research in the classroom. Columbus, OH: Charles E. Merrill. #(34), #(43)

Haring, N.G., & McCormick, L. (Eds.). (1986). Exceptional children and youth
(4th ed.). Columbus, OH: Charles E. Merrill. #(34), #(21)

Haring, N.G., Roger, B., Lee, M., Breen, C., & Gaylord-Ross, R. (1986).
Teaching social language to moderately handicapped students. Journal of
Applied Behavior Analysis, 19, 159-171 #(30) 

Haring, N.G., & Schiefelbusch, R.L. (Eds.). (1976). Teaching special
children. New York: McGraw-Hill. #(15), #(34)

Haring, T.G., & Kennedy, C.H. (1990). Contextual control of problem behavior
in students with severe disabilities. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis,
23, 235-243. #(3)

Harlow, H.F. (1949). The formation of learning sets. Psychological Review,
56, 51-65. #(#6)

Harlow, H.F. (1959). Learning set and error factor theory. In S. Koch (Ed.),
Psychology: A study of a science (Vol. 2, pp. 492-537). New York: McGraw-
Hill. #(38), #(6)

Harlow, H.F., Harlow, M.K., & Meyer, D.R. (1950). Learning motivated by a
manipulation drive. Journal of Experimental Child Psychology, 40, 228-234.
#(15)

Harnischfeger, A., & Wiley, D.E. (1976). The teaching learning process in
elementary schools: A synoptic view. Curriculum Inquiry, 6, 5-43. #(26)

Harris, A. (1970). How to increase reading abilities: A guide to developmen-
tal and remedial methods (5th ed.). New York: David McKay. #(34), #(17)

Harris, D. (1982). Communication interaction processes involving nonvocal
physically handicapped children. Topics in Language Disorders, 2(2), 21-37.
#(30)

Harris, D., & Vanderheiden, G.C. (1980). Augmentative communication
techniques. In R.L. Schiefelbusch (Ed.), Nonspeech language and communica-
tion: Analysis and intervention (pp. 259-301). Baltimore: University Park
Press. #(35), #(38)

Harris, F.C., & Ciminero, A.R. (1978). The effect of witnessing consequences
on the behavioral recordings of experimental observers. Journal of Applied
Behavior Analysis, 11, 513-521. #(3)

Harris, F.C., & Lahey, B.B. (1978). A method of combining occurrence and
nonoccurrence interobserver agreement scores. Journal of Applied Behavior
Analysis, 11, 523-527. #(29)

Harris, F.R., Wolf, M.M., & Baer, D.M. (1964). Effects of social reinforce-
ment of child behavior. Young Children, 20, 8-17. #(3), #(14)

Harris, G.J., & Fleer, R.E. (1974). High speed scanning in mental retardates:
Evidence for a central processing deficit. Journal of Experimental Child
Psychology, 17, 452-459. #(11)

Harris, K.R. (1985). Definitional, parametric, and procedural considerations
in timeout interventions and research. Exceptional Children, 51, 279-288.
#(3)

Harris, K.R., Graham S., & Freeman, S. (1988). Effects of strategy training
on metamemory among learning disabled students. Exceptional Children, 54,
332-338. #(11), #(28)

Harris, L.P. (1976). Attention and learning disordered children: A review of
theory and remediation. Journal of Learning Disabilities, 9, 100-110. #(1),
#(28), #(32)

Harris, P.L. (1983). Infant cognition. In M.M. Haith, J.J. Campos, & P.
Mussen (Eds.), Handbook of child psychology (pp. 689-782). New York: Wiley.
#(38), #(25)

Harris, S.L. (1975). Teaching language to nonverbal children--with emphasis
on problems of generalization. Psychological Bulletin, 82, 565-580. #(30),
#(7)

Harris, S.L., & Ersner-Hershfield, R. (1978). Behavioral suppression of
seriously disruptive behavior in psychotic and retarded patients: A review of
punishment and its alternatives. Psychological Bulletin, 85, 1352-1375. #(4),
#(14), #(32)

Harris, S.L., & Handleman, J.S. (Eds.). (1990). Aversive and nonaversive
interventions. New York: Springer. #(2), #(14), #(21), #(19), #(34)

Harris, S.L., Handleman, J.S., Gordon, R., Kristoff, B., & Fuentes, F.
(1991). Changes in cognitive and language functioning of preschool children
with autism. Journal of Autism and Developmental Disorders, 21, 281-290.
#(2), #(30), #(25)

Harris, S.L., Handleman, J.S., Kristoff, B., Bass, L., & Gordon, R. (1990).
Changes in language development among autistic and peer children in
segregated and integrated preschool settings. Journal of Autism and
Developmental Disorders, 20, 23-31. #(2), #(30), #(39)

Harris, S.L., & Wolchik, S.A. (1979). Suppression of self-stimulation: Three
alternative strategies. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 12, 185-189.
#(3), #(20), #(9)

Harris, T. (1969). I'm ok--you're ok: A practical guide to transactional
analysis. New York: Harper & Row. #(34), #(37)

Harris-Vanderheiden, D.H., & Vanderheiden, G.C. (1977). Basic considerations
in the development of communicative and interactive skills for non-vocal
severely handicapped children. In E. Sontag (Ed.), Educational programming
for the severely and profoundly handicapped (pp. 323-334). Reston, VA:
Council for Exceptional Children. #(30), #(21), #(38)

Harrison, R.J., & Green, G. (1990). Development of conditional and equiva-
lence relations without differential consequences. Journal of the Experimen-
tal Analysis of Behavior, 54, 225-237. #(6)

Hart, B.M. (1980). Pragmatics and language development. In B.B. Lahey & A.E.
Kazdin (Eds.), Advances in clinical child psychology (Vol. 3, pp. 383-427).
New York: Plenum Press. #(38), #(30)

Hart, B.M., Allen, K.E., Buell, J.S., Harris, F.R., & Wolf, M.M. (1964).
Effects of social reinforcement on operant crying. Journal of Experimental
Child Psychology, 1, 145-153. #(3), #(14)

Hart, B.M., & Risley, T.R. (1974). Using pre-school materials to modify the
language of disadvantaged children. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 7,
243-256. #(3), #(30), #(9)

Hart, B.M., & Risley, T.R. (1975). Incidental teaching of language in
preschool. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 8, 411-420. #(30)

Hart, B.M., & Risley, T.R. (1978). Promoting productive language through
incidental teaching. Education and Urban Society, 10, 407-429. #(30)

Hart, B.M., & Rogers-Warren, A. (1978). Milieu teaching approaches. In R.
Schiefelbusch (Ed.), Language intervention strategies. Baltimore: University
Park Press. #(38), #(30, #(27)

Hart, V. (1974). Beginning with the handicapped. Springfield, IL: Charles C
Thomas. #(21), #(34)

Hart, V. (1977). The use of many disciplines with the severely and profoundly
handicapped. In E. Sontag (Ed.), Educational programming for the severely and
profoundly handicapped (pp. 391-396). Reston, VA: Council for Exceptional
Children. #(21), #(38)

Harter, S. (1982). The Perceived Competence Scale for Children. Child
Development, 53, 8797. #(44)

Hartlage, L.C. (1974). Factors affecting employer receptivity toward the
mentally retarded. In L.K. Daniels (Ed.), Vocational rehabilitation of the
mentally retarded (pp. 439-444). Springfield, IL: Charles C Thomas. #(38),
#(33)

Hartman, W.T. (1981). Estimating the costs of educating handicapped children:
A resource cost model approach--summary report. Educational Evaluation and
Policy Analysis, 3, 33-47. #(29)

Hartmann, D.P. (1977). Considerations in the choice of interobserver
reliability estimates. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 10, 103-116.
#(3), #(43), #(29) 

Hartmann. D.P., & Atkinson, C. (1973). Having your cake and eating it too: A
note on some apparent contradictions between therapeutic achievements and
design requirements in N=1 studies. Behavior Therapy, 4, 589-591. #(3),
#(48), #(29)

Hartmann, D.P., & Hall, R.V. (1976). The changing criterion design. Journal
of Applied Behavior Analysis, 9, 527-532. #(3), #(43), #(48)

Hartmann, D.P., & Wood, D.D. (1982). Observational methods. In A.S. Bellack,
M. Hersen, & A.E. Kazdin (Eds.), International handbook of behavior
modification and therapy (pp. 109-138). New York: Plenum Press. #(38), #(43)

Hartup, W.W. (1970). Peer interaction and social organization. In P.H. Mussen
(Ed.), Carmichael's manual of child psychology (Vol. 2, pp. 361-456). New
York: John Wiley. #(38), #(25), #(37)

Hartup, W.W. (1976). Peer interaction and the behavioral development of the
individual child. In E. Schopler & R.J. Reichler (Eds.), Psychopathology and
child development (pp. 203-217). New York: Plenum Press. #(38), #(37)

Hartup, W.W. (1983). Peer relations. In E.M. Hetherington (Ed.), Handbook of
child psychology: Vol. 4. Socialization, personality, and social development
(pp. 103-196). New York: John Wiley. #(38), #(37)

Hartup, W.W., & Lougee, M.D. (1975). Peers as models. School Psychologist
Digest, 4, 11-21. #(3), #(36)

Hartwig, F., & Dearing, B.E. (1979). Exploratory data analysis. Beverly
Hills, CA: Sage Publications. #(29), #(22)

Harvard Educational Review. (1974). The rights of children. Cambridge, MA:
Harvard College. #(34), #(10)

Harvard Law Review. (1977). Implementation problems in institutional reform
litigation. Author, 91, 428-463. #(8), #(40)

Harvard Law Review. (1977). Implementation problems in institutional reform
litigation. Author, 91, 428-463. #(40), #(8)

Harvard Law Review. (1979). Enforcing the right to an "appropriate educa-
tion": The Education for All Handicapped Children Act of 1975. Author, 93,
1103-1127. #(10), #(40)

Harvey, E.R., & Schepers, J. (1977). Physical control techniques and
defensive holds for use with aggressive retarded adults. Mental Retardation,
15(5), 29-39. #(3), #(45)

Harvey, J. (1978). Legislative intent and progress. Exceptional Children, 46,
597-609. #(10)

Hasazi, S.B., & Clark, G.M. (1988). Vocational preparation for high school
students labeled mentally retarded: Employment as a graduation goal. Mental
Retardation, 26, 343-349. #(33)

Haught, P., Walls, R.T., & Crist, K. (1984). Placement of prompts, length of
task, and level of retardation in learning complex assembly tasks. American
Journal of Mental Deficiency, 89, 60-66. #(3), #(9)

Hauser, R. (1974). Rapid smoking as a technique of behavior modification:
Caution in the selection of subjects. Journal of Consulting and Clinical
Psychology, 42, 625. #(3), #(18) 

Hauserman, N., Waylen, S.R., & Behling, M. (1973). Reinforced racial
integration in the first grade: A study in generalization. Journal of Applied
Behavior Analysis, 6, 145-153. #(27), #(7), #(14)

Havelock, R.G. (1973). The change agent's guide to innovation in education.
Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Educational Technology Publications. #(42), #(34), #(8)

Havighurst, R.J. (1976). Human characteristics and school learning: Essay
review. Elementary School Journal, 77, 101-109. #(26), #(32)

Hawkins, J., Sheingold, K., Gearhart, M., & Berger, C. (1982). Microcomputers
in schools: Impact on the social life of elementary classrooms. Journal of
Applied Developmental Psychology, 3, 361-373. #(16)

Hawkins, R.P. (1979). The functions of assessment: Implications for selection
and development of devices for assessing repertoires in clinical, educational,
and other settings. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 12, 501-516. #(29)

Hawkins, R.P., & Dotson, V.A. (1975). Reliability scores that delude: An
Alice in Wonderland trip through the misleading characteristics of interobse-
rver agreement scores in interval recording. In E. Ramp & G. Semb (Eds.),
Behavior analysis: Areas of research and application (pp. 359-376). Englewood
Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall. #(38), #(29)

Hawley, W.D., Lipsky, M., Greenberg, S.B. et al. (1976). Theoretical
perspectives on urban politics. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall. #(23),
#(34)

Hayden, A.H., & McGinnes, G.D. (1977). Bases for early intervention. In E.
Sontag (Ed.), Educational programming for the severely and profoundly
handicapped (pp. 153-165). Reston, VA: Council for Exceptional Children.
#(8), #(21), #(38) 

Hayes, J., & Higgins, S. (1978). Issues regarding the IEP: Teachers on the
front line. Exceptional Children, 44, 333-337. #(10)

Hayes, K.J. (1953). The backward curve: A method for the study of learning.
Psychological Review, 60, 269-271. #(29)

Hayes, N.A., & Broadbent, D.E. (1988). Two modes of learning for interactive
tasks. Cognition, 28, 249-276. #(11)

Hayes, S.C. (1978). Theory and technology in behavior analysis. The Behavior
Analyst, 1, 3541. #(3), #(35)

Hayes, S.C. (1981). Single case experimental design and empirical clinical
practice. Journal of Consulting and Clinical Psychology, 49, 193-213. #(29),
#(48)

Hayes, S.C. (1989). Nonhumans have not yet shown stimulus equivalence.
Journal of the Experimental Analysis of Behavior, 51, 385-392. #(6)

Hayes, S.C., & Hayes, L.J. (1993). Applied implications of current JEAB re-
search on derived relations and delayed reinforcement. Journal of Applied
Behavior Analysis, 26, 507-511. #(3), #(14)

Hayes, S.C., Kohlenberg, B.S., & Hayes, L.J. (1991). Transfer of consequential
functions through simple and conditional equivalence classes. Journal of the
Experimental Analysis of Behavior, 59, 119-137. #(6), #(7)

Hayes, S.C., Rincover, A., & Solnick, J.V. (1980). The technical drift of
applied behavior analysis. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 13, 275-285.
#(3)

Haygood, R.C., & Bourne, L.E. (1965). Attributeand rule-learning aspects of
conceptual behavior. Psychological Review, 72, 175-195. #(3)

Haynes, S.N. (1978). Principles of behavioral assessment. New York: Gardner
Press. #(34), #(3), #(29)

Haywood, C.H., & Filler, J.W., Shifman, M.A. et al. (1975). Behavioral
assessment in mental retardation. In P. McReynolds (Ed.), Advances in
psychological assessment (Vol. 3, pp. 96-135). San Francisco: Jossey-Bass.
#(3), #(29), #(34), #(45), #(38), #(29)

Heal, L.W. (1987). Institutions cost more than community services. American
Journal of Mental Deficiency, 92, 136-138. #(27), #(33)

Heal, L.W., & Bransky, M.L. (1966). The comparison of matching-to-sample with
discrimination learning in retardates. American Journal of Mental Deficiency,
71, 481-485. #(1)

Heal, L.W., Sigelman, C., & Switzky, H. (1978). Research on community
residential alternatives for the mentally retarded. In N.R. Ellis (Ed.),
International review of research on mental retardation (Vol. 9, pp. 209-249).
#(38), #(27)

Heath, R.W., & Nielson, M.A. (1974). The research basis for performance-based
teacher education. Review of Educational Research, 44, 463-484. #(26)

Hebb, D.O. (1949). The organization of behavior. New York: John Wiley. #(12),
#(34)

Hebb, D.O. (1974). What psychology is about. American Psychologist, 29,
71-79. #(25)

Heckman, P.F., Oakes, J., & Sirotnik, K.A. (1983). Expanding the concepts of
school renewal and change. Educational Leadership, 40, 26-32. #(42)

Hedbring, C. (1977). Getting it together with PL 94-142: A practical guide to
IEP development and implementation. New York: Program STEPPE, Inc. #(9),
#(10), #(34)

Hedbring, C. (1981). A comparison of two instructional interventions for
remediating attentional deficits of autistic school-age children overselec-
tive in the visual modality. Final report, Grant G008001901. Washington, DC:
US Office of Education/DHEW. #(6), #(21), #(2)

Hedbring, C. (1985). Computers and autistic learners: An evolving technology.
Australian Journal of Human Communication Disorders, 13, 169-194. #(16), #(2)

Hedbring, C. (1987). Empirical software evaluation: A practical alternative.
Australian Journal of Human Communication Disorders, 15, 75-88. #(16)

Hedbring, C. (1994). FACTS+ Software Curriculum: Owner's Handbook (2nd ed.).
New York: Program STEPPE, Inc. #(16)

Hedbring, C. (1995). Biblio-REFs: The Irreducible Computer-based Bibliogra-
phy. New York: Program STEPPE, Inc. #(16)

Hedbring, C., & Holmes, C. (1977). Getting it together with PL 94-142: The
IEP in the classroom. Education and Training of the Mentally Retarded, 12,
212-224. #(10), #(9), #(16), #(45)

Hedbring, C., & Newsom, C. (1985). Visual overselectivity: A comparison of
two instructional remediation procedures with autistic children. Journal of
Autism and Developmental Disorders, 15, 9-22. #(6), #(21), #(2)

Hedbring, C., & Rubenzer, R. (1979). Integrating the IEP and SOI with
educational programming for the gifted. Gifted Child Quarterly, 23, 338-345.
#(9), #(10)

Hedge, M.N. (1985). Treatment procedures in communicative disorders. London:
Taylor and Francis. #(34), #(21), #(29), #(30)

Hedge, M.N. (1985). A treatment paradigm for communicative disorders. In M.N.
Hedge, Treatment procedures in communicative disorders (pp. 1-17). London:
Taylor and Francis. #(30), #(21), #(29), #(38)

Hedge, M.N. (1985). Selection and definition of target behaviors. In M.N.
Hedge, Treatment procedures in communicative disorders (pp. 47-76). London:
Taylor and Francis. #(3), #(21), #(9), #(38)

Hedges, L.V., & Olkin, I. (1985). Statistical methods for meta-analysis.
Orlando: Academic Press. #(34), #(22)

Hediger, H.K.P. (1981). The Clever Hans phenomenon from an animal psychologi-
st's point of view. Annals of the New York Academy of Sciences, 364, 1-17.
#(30)

Hedrick, D.L., Christman, M.A., & Augustine, L. (1973). Programming for the
antecedent event in therapy. Journal of Speech and Hearing Disorders, 38,
339-344. #(5)

Hedrick, D.L., Prather, E., & Tobin, A. (1984). Sequenced Inventory of
Communication Development (rev. ed.). Seattle, WA: University of Washington
Press. #(34), #(44)

Hehner, B. (1980). Blissymbols for use. Toronto: Blissymbolics Communication
International. #(34), #(30)

Heidorn, S.D., & Jensen, C.C. (1984). Generalization and maintenance of the
reduction of self-injurious behavior maintained by two types of reinforce-
ment. Behaviour Research and Therapy, 22, 581-586. #(3), #(7), #(19), #(14)

Heilbeck, T.H., & Markman, E.M. (1987). Word learning in children: An
examination of fast mapping. Child Development, 58, 1021-1034. #(11), #(30)

Heinen, J.R.K., Sherman, R.M., & Stafford, K.R. (1990). Role of learning
theory in educational psychology. Psychology Reports, 67, 763-774. #(35)

Hekkema, N., & Freedman, P.E. (1978). Effects of imitation training on
immediate and delayed imitation by severely retarded children. American
Journal of Mental Deficiency, 83, 129-134. #(3), #(21), #(41)

Hellman, H. (1976). Technophobia: Getting out of the technology trap. New
York: Evans. #(34), #(16)

Hendrickson, J.M., Strain, P.S., Tremblay, A., & Shores, R.E. (1982).
Interactions of behaviorally handicapped children: Functional effects of peer
social initiations. Behavior Modification, 6, 323-353. #(3), #(37), #(36)

Henkel, R.E. (1976). Tests of significance. Beverly Hills, CA: Sage
Publications. #(34), #(22)

Henker, B., & Whalen, C.K. (1989). Hyperactivity and attention deficits.
American Psychologist, 44, 216-223. #(1), #(4)

Henrickson, K., & Doughty, R. (1967). Decelerating undesired mealtime
behavior in a group of profoundly retarded boys. American Journal of Mental
Deficiency, 72, 40-44. #(3), #(21)

Henry, L.A., & Millar, S. (1991). Memory span increase with age: A test of
two hypotheses. Journal of Experimental Child Psychology, 51, 459-484. #(11)

Herman, C.P., & Mack, D. (1975). Restrained and unrestrained eating. Journal
of Personality, 43, 646-660. #(3), #(18)

Hermelin, B. (1976). Coding and the sense modalities. In L. Wing (Ed.), Early
childhood autism: Clinical, educational and social aspects (2nd ed., pp.
135-168). New York: Pergamon Press. #(12), #(2), #(38)

Hermelin, B. (1982). Thoughts and feelings. Australian Autism Review, 4,
140-150. #(25)

Hermelin, B., & Frith, U. (1971). Psychological studies of childhood autism:
Can autistic children make sense of what they see and hear? Journal of
Special Education, 5, 107-117. #(12), #(2)

Hermelin, B., & O'Connor, N. (1967). Perceptual and motor discrimination in
psychotic and normal children. Journal of Genetic Psychology, 110, 117-125.
#(12)

Hermelin, B., & O'Connor, N. (1970). Psychological experiments with autistic
children. New York: Pergamon Press. #(12), #(2), #(34)

Hernstein, R.J. (1969). Method and theory in the study of avoidance.
Psychological Review, 76, 46-69. #(3), #(14), #(35)

Heron, T.E., & Heward, W.L. (1988). Ecological assessment: Implications for
teachers of learning disabled students. Learning Disability Quarterly, 11,
117-125. #(28), #(29)

Heron, T.E., Heward, W.L., Cooke, N.L., & Hill, D.S. (1983). Evaluation of a
classwide peer tutoring system. First graders teach others sight words.
Education and Treatment of Children, 6, 137-152. #(29), #(36), #(17)

Herr, S. (1974). Civil rights, uncivil asylums and the retarded. University
of Cincinnati Law Review, 43, 679-780. #(40), #(45)

Herr, S. (1977). Rights into action: Protecting human rights of the mentally
handicapped. Catholic University Law Review, 26, 203-318. #(40), #(45)

Herr, S. (1979). The new clients: Legal services for mentally retarded
persons. Stanford Law Review, 31, 553-611. #(10), #(40), #(45)

Herr, S. (1982). Retarded children and the law: Enforcing the constitutional
rights of the mentally retarded. Syracuse Law Review, 23, 995-1035. #(10),
#(40), #(45)

Herrmann, D.J. (1988). Memory improvement techniques. New York: Ballantine.
#(11), #(34)

Herrnstein, R.J. (1961). Relative and absolute strength of response as a
function of frequency of reinforcement. Journal of the Experimental Analysis
of Behavior, 4, 267-272. #(3), #(6), #(14)

Herrnstein, R.J. (1970). On the law of effect. Journal of the Experimental
Analysis of Behavior, 13, 243-266. #(3), #(14)

Herrnstein, R.J. (1971). I.Q. Atlantic Monthly, 228(3), 43-64. #(25)

Herrnstein, R.J. (1977). The evolution of behaviorism. American Psychologist,
32, 593-603. #(3)

Herrnstein, R.J. (1979). Derivatives of matching. Psychological Review, 86,
486-495. #(3), #(6), #(14)

Herrnstein, R.J. (1990). Behavior reinforcement and utility. Psychological
Science, 1, 217-224. #(3), #(14)

Hersen, M., & Barlow, D.H. (1976). Single case experimental designs:
Strategies for studying behavior change. New York: Pergamon Press. #(29),
#(34), #(48)

Hersen, M., Van Hasselt, V., & Matson, J. (Eds.). (1983). Behavior therapy
for the developmentally and physically disabled. New York: Academic Press.
#(34), #(21), #(3)

Hershey, M. (1983). Warm fingers, cool behavior. Academic Therapy, 18,
593-597. #(18), #(4)

Hertzberg, H.W. (1976). Competency based teacher education: Does it have a
past or a future? Teachers College Record, 78, 1-21. #(26)

Hess, E.H. (1972). "Imprinting" in a natural laboratory. Scientific American,
227, 24-31. #(14)

Heward, W.L., & Orlansky, M.D. (1992). Exceptional children: An introductory
survey of special education (4th ed.). New York: Macmillan. #(34), #(15)

Hewett, F.M. (1964). Teaching reading to an autistic boy through operant
conditioning. American Journal of Orthopsychiatry, 17, 613-618. #(17), #(2),
#(3)

Hewett, F.M. (1965). Teaching speech to autistic children through operant
conditioning. American Journal of Orthopsychiatry, 35, 927-936. #(30), #(2),
#(3)

Hieronymus, A.N., & Lindquist, E.F. (1978). Iowa Tests of Basic Skills.
Boston: Houghton Mifflin. #(34), #(44)


Higbee, K.L. (1979). Recent research on visual mnemonics: Historical roots
and educational roots. Review of Educational Research, 49, 611-629. #(6)

Higginbotham, D., Mathy-Laikko, P., & Yoder, D. (1988). Studying conversa-
tions of augmentative communication system users. In L.E. Bernstein (Ed.),
The vocally impaired: Clinical practice and research (pp. 265-294). New York:
Grune & Stratton. #(34), #(30)

Higgins, S., Ross, J.W., & Hockenberry, C. (1979). Options and alternatives:
Policy decisions yet to be made. Exceptional Children, 9, 34-39. #(23)

Highet, G. (1950). The art of teaching. New York: Vintage Books. #(35), #(34)

Hile, M.G., & Desrochers, M.N. (1993). The relationship between functional
assessment and treatment selection for aggressive behaviors. Research in
Developmental Disabilities, 14, 265-274. #(3), #(4)

Hilgard, E.R., & Bower, G.H. (1975). Theories of learning (4th ed.).
Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall. #(3), #(34)

Hilgard, E.R., & Bower, G.H. (1975). Theory of instruction. In E.R. Hilgard
& G.H. Bower, Theories of learning (4th ed., pp. 606-638). Englewood Cliffs,
NJ: Prentice-Hall. #(9), #(38)

Hill, F.A., & Wickens, D.D. (1962). The effect of stimulus compounding in
paired-associate learning. Journal of Verbal Learning and Verbal Behavior, 1,
144-151. #(6)

Hill, M., Banks, P.D., Handrich, R., Wehman, P., Hill, J., & Shafer, M.
(1987). Benefit-cost analysis of supported competitive employment for persons
with mental retardation. Research in Developmental Disabilities, 8, 71-89.
#(33)

Hill, M., & Wehman, P. (1983). Cost benefit analysis of placing moderately
and severely handicapped individuals into competitive employment. Journal of
The Association for Persons with Severe Handicaps, 8, 30-38. #(27), #(21),
#(33)

Hill, S.D. (1965). Transfer in discrimination learning. Child Development,
36, 749-760. #(6)

Hineline, P.N. (1977). Negative reinforcement and avoidance. In W.K. Honig &
J.E.R. Staddon (Eds.), Handbook of operant behavior (pp. 364-414). Englewood
Cliffs, NJ: Prentice Hall. #(3), #(14), #(38)

Hineline, P.N. (1980). The language of behavior analysis: Its community, its
functions, and its limitations. Behaviorism, 8, 67-86. #(3) 

Hineline, P.N. (1984). Aversive control: A separate domain? Journal of the
Experimental Analysis of Behavior, 42, 495-509. #(3), #(14) 

Hingtgen, J.N., Coulter, S.K., & Churchill, D.W. (1967). Intensive reinforce-
ment of imitative behavior in mute autistic children. Archives of General
Psychiatry, 17, 36-43. #(3), #(2), #(14), #(41)

Hinkle, D.E., Wiersma, W., & Jurs, S.G. (1979). Applied statistics for the
behavioral sciences. Chicago: Rand McNally. #(34), #(22)

Hinshaw, S.P. (1987). On the distinction between attentional defi-
cits/hyperactivity and conduct problems/aggression in child psychopathology.
Psychological Bulletin, 101, 443-463. #(1), #(4)

Hintzman, D.L. (1984). Episodic versus semantic memory: A distinction whose
time has come--and gone? Behavioral and Brain Sciences, 7, 240-421. #(11)

Hirschi, T., & Selvin, H.C. (1967). Principles of survey analysis. New York:
Free Press. #(29), #(34)

Hirshoren, A., & Burton, T.A. (1979). Teaching academic skills to trainable
mentally retarded children: A study in tautology. Mental Retardation, 17,
177-179. #(21), #(9), #(23), #(35)

Hively, W. (1962). Programming stimuli in matching to sample. Journal of the
Experimental Analysis of Behavior, 5, 279-298. #(6), #(9)

Hobbs, N. (1975). The futures of children: Categories, labels, and their
consequences. San Francisco: Jossey-Bass. #(35), #(34)

Hobbs, N. (1975). After labeling: Problems in institutional care. In N.
Hobbs, The futures of children: Categories, labels, and their consequences
(pp. 17-21). San Francisco: Jossey-Bass. #(21), #(31), #(38)

Hobbs, N. (1976). Issues in the classification of children (Vols. 1 & 2). San
Francisco: JosseyBass. #(29), #(15), #(34)

Hobbs, N. (1982). The troubled and troubling child. San Francisco: Jossey-
Bass. #(34), #(4)

Hobbs, N., Bartel, N. et al. (1979). Exceptional teaching for exceptional
learning: A report to the Ford Foundation. New York: Ford Foundation. #(15),
#(34)

Hobson, R.P. (1985). Piaget: On the ways of knowing in childhood. In M.
Rutter & L. Hersov (Eds.), Child and adolescent psychiatry: Modern approaches
(pp. 191-203). Oxford: Blackwell. #(38), #(13), #(25)

Hobson, R.P. (1991). Against the theory of "theory of mind." British Journal
of Developmental Psychology, 9, 33-51. #(25)

Hodges, P., & Schwethelm, B. (1984). A comparison of the effectiveness of
graphic symbol and manual sign training with profoundly retarded children.
Applied Psycholinguistics, 5, 223-253. #(30)

Hoffman, H.S. (1966). The analysis of discriminated avoidance. In W.K. Honig
(Ed.), Operant behavior: Areas of research and application (pp. 499-530). New
York: John Wiley. #(3), #(14), #(6), #(38)

Hofmeister, A.M. (1984). Microcomputer applications in the classroom. New
York: Holt, Rinehart and Winston. #(16), #(34) 

Hofmeister, A.M., & Ferrara, J.M. (1986). Expert systems and special
education. Exceptional Children, 53, 235-239. #(16)

Hogan, R. (1975). Theoretical egocentrism and the problems of compliance.
American Psychologist, 30, 533-540. #(37)

Hoge, R.D. (1985). The validity of direct observation measure of pupil
classroom behavior. Review of Educational Research, 55, 469-483. #(29)

Holland, J.G. (1960). Teaching machines: An application of principles
from the laboratory. Journal of the Experimental Analysis of Behavior,
3, 275-287. #(16), #(5)

Holland, J.G. (1961). Evaluating teaching machines and programs. Teachers
College Record, 63, 56-65. #(16), #(29)

Holland, J.G. (1967). A quantitative measure for programmed instruction. 
American Educational Research Journal, 4, 87-101. #(16), #(29)

Holland, J.G. (1978). Behaviorism: Part of the problem or part of the
solution? Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 11, 163-174. #(3)

Holland, J.G., & Doran, J. (1973). Instrumentation of research in teaching.
In R.M.W. Travers (Ed.), Second handbook of research on teaching (pp. 286-
317). Chicago: Rand McNally. #(38), #(29), #(5)

Holland, J.G., & Skinner, B.F. (1961). The analysis of behavior. New York:
McGraw-Hill. #(34), #(3)

Hollis, J.H. (1967). Development of perceptual motor skills in a profoundly
retarded child: Part I, Prosthesis. American Journal of Mental Deficiency,
71, 941-952. #(21), #(12), #(45)

Hollis, J.H. (1967). Development of perceptual motor skills in a profoundly
retarded child: Part II, Consequence and transfer. American Journal of Mental
Deficiency, 71, 953-963. #(21), #(12), #(45)

Hollis, J.H. (1971). Body-rocking: Effects of sound and reinforcement.
American Journal of Mental Deficiency, 75, 642-644. #(3), #(20), #(14)

Hollis, J.H. (1982). A learning model for computer reading programs. Journal
of Special Education Technology, 5, 42-44. #(17), #(16)

Hollis, J.H., & Carrier, J.K. (1975). Research implications for communication
deficiencies. Exceptional Children, 41, 405-412. #(30)

Hollis, J.H., Carrier, J.K., & Spradlin, J.E. (1976). Intervention strategies
for nonspeech children. In R.L. Schiefelbusch (Ed.), Bases of language
intervention. Baltimore: University Park Press. #(30), #(38)

Hollis, J.H., Carrier, J.K., & Spradlin, J.E. (1976). An approach to
remediation of communication and learning deficiencies. In L.L. Lloyd (Ed.),
Communication assessment and intervention strategies (pp. 265-294).
Baltimore: University Park Press. #(30), #(38)

Hollis, J.H., & Gorton, C.E. (1967). Training severely and profoundly
developmentally retarded children. Mental Retardation, 5(4), 20-24. #(9),
#(21), #(45)

Hollis, J.H., & Meyers, C.E. (Eds.). (1982). Life-threatening behavior:
Analysis and intervention. Washington, DC: American Association on Mental
Deficiency. #(34), #(19)

Holmes, B. (1985). The effects of a strategy and sequenced materials in the
inferential comprehension of disabled readers. Journal of Learning Disabili-
ties, 18, 542-546. #(9), #(28), #(17)

Holmes, M.R., Hansen, D.J., & St. Lawrence, J.S. (1984). Conversational
skills training with aftercare patients in the community: Social validation
and generalization. Behavior Therapy, 15, 84-100. #(30), #(27), #(7) 

Holt, G.L., & Shafer, J.N. (1973). Function of intertrial interval in
matching-to-sample. Journal of the Experimental Analysis of Behavior, 19,
181-186, #(3), #(29)

Holt, J. (1964). How children fail. New York: Dell. #(34), #(35), #(15)

Holt, J. (1967). How children learn. New York: Pitman. #(34), #(15), #(35)

Holvoet, J., Guess, D., Mulligan, M. et al. (1980). The individualized
curriculum sequencing model (II): A teaching strategy for the severely
handicapped students. Journal of the Association for Persons with Severe
Handicaps, 5, 337-351. #(5), #(21)

Holvoet, J.F., Keilitz, I., & Tucker, D.J. (1975). Mand interactions in
retarded and nonretarded adolescents: An observational study in vocational
settings. Education and Training of the Mentally Retarded, 10, 237-244.
#(27), #(45)

Holvoet, J., O'Neil, C., Chazdon, L., Carr, D., & Warner, J. (1983). Hey, do
we really have to take data? Journal of The Association for Persons with
Severe Handicaps, 8, 56-70. #(29)

Holz, W.C., & Azrin, N.H. (1961). Discriminative properties of punishment.
Journal of the Experimental Analysis of Behavior, 4, 225-252. #(6), #(14)

Homme, L.E., deBaca, P.C., & Cottingham, L. (1968). What behavioral
engineering is. The Psychological Record, 18, 425-434. #(3)

Homme, L.E., deBaca, P.C., Devine, J.V., Steinhorst, R., & Rickert, E.J.
(1963). Use of the Premack Principle in controlling the behavior of nursery
school children. Journal of the Experimental Analysis of Behavior, 6,
544-545. #(3)

Honig, W.K., & Beale, I.L. (1976). Stimulus duration as a measure of stimulus
generalization. Journal of the Experimental Analysis of Behavior, 25,
209-217. #(6), #(7)

Honig, W.K., & Staddon, J.E.R. (Eds.). (1977). Handbook of operant behavior.
Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall. #(3), #(34)

Hooper, J., Connell, T., & Flett, P. (1987). Blissymbols and manual signs: A
multimodal approach to intervention in a case of multiple disability.
Augmentative and Alternative Communication, 3, 68-76. #(30), #(16)

Hoover, J., Reichle, J., Van Tassell, D., & Cole, D. (1987). The intelligi-
bility of synthesized speech: Echo II versus Votrax. Journal of Speech and
Hearing Research, 30, 425-431. #(16), #(30)

Hopkins, B.L. (1968). Effects of candy and social reinforcement, instruc-
tions, and reinforcement schedule leaning on the modification and maintenance
of smiling. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 1, 121-129. #(3), #(14)

Hopkins, B.L. (1987). Comments on the future of applied behavior analysis. 
Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 20, 339-346. #(3)

Hopkins, B.L., & Hermann, J.A. (1977). Evaluating interobserver reliability
of interval data. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 10, 121-126. #(3),
#(29), #(43)

Hopkins, K.D. (1982). The unit of analysis: Group means versus individual
observations. American Educational Research Journal, 19(1), 5-18. #(29)

Hops, H. (1983). Children's social competence and skill: Current research
practices and future directions. Behavior Therapy, 14, 3-18. #(37)

Horan, D.J. (1975). Euthanasia, medical treatment and the Mongoloid child:
Death as a treatment of choice? Baylor Law Review, 27, 76-108. #(40), #(45),
#(10), #(35)

Horn, W.F., & O'Donnell, J.P. (1984). Early identification of learning
disabilities: A comparison of two methods. Journal of Educational Psychology,
76, 1106-1118. #(28), #(29)

Horner, D.A., & Barton, E.S. (1980). Operant techniques in the analysis and
modification of self-injurious behavior: A review. Behavior Research of
Severe Developmental Disabilities, 1, 61-91. #(19), #(32)

Horner, R. (1971). Establishing the use of crutches by a mentally retarded
spina bifida child. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 4, 183-189. #(21),
#(3), #(45)

Horner, R. (1977). A competency based approach to preparing teachers of the
severely and profoundly handicapped. In E. Sontag (Ed.), Educational
programming for the severely and profoundly handicapped (pp. 430-444).
Reston, VA: Council for Exceptional Children. #(26), #(21), #(38)

Horner, R. (1980). The effects of an environmental "enrichment" program on
the behavior of institutionalized profoundly retarded children. Journal of
Applied Behavior Analysis, 13, 473-491. #(31)

Horner, R., & Baer, D.M. (1978). Multiple-probe technique: A variation of
the multiple baseline. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 11, 189-196.
#(48)

Horner, R., Bellamy, G.T., & Colvin, G.T. (1984). Responding in the
presence of nontrained stimuli: An applied analysis of generalization.
Journal of The Association for Persons with Severe Handicaps, 9, 287-296.
#(6), #(7)

Horner, R., & Billingsley, F.F. (1988). The effect of competing behavior on
the generalization and maintenance of adaptive behavior in applied settings.
In R.H. Horner, G. Dunlap, & R.L. Koegel (Eds.), Generalization and
maintenance: Life-style changes in applied settings (pp. 197-220). Baltimore:
Paul H. Brookes. #(3), #(14), #(7), #(38)

Horner, R., & Budd, C. (1985). Acquisition of manual sign use: Collateral
reduction of maladaptive behavior and factors limiting generalization.
Education and Training of the Mentally Retarded, 20, 39-47. #(30), #(7)

Horner, R., Dunlap, G., & Koegel, R.L. (Eds.). (1988). Generalization and
maintenance: Lifestyle changes in applied settings. Baltimore: Paul H.
Brookes. #(3), #(34), #(7)

Horner, R., Jones, D.R., & Williams, J.A. (1985). A functional approach to
teaching generalized street crossing. Journal of The Association for Persons
with Severe Handicaps, 10, 7-20. #(7), #(33)

Horner, R., & Keilitz, I. (1975). Training mentally retarded adolescents to
brush their teeth. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 8, 301-309. #(3),
#(9), #(18), #(45)

Horner, R., & McDonald, R.S. (1982). Comparison of single instance and
general case instruction in teaching a generalized vocational skill. The
Journal of The Association for the Severely Handicapped, 7(3), 7-20. #(7),
#(21)

Horner, R., McDonnell, J.J., & Bellamy, G.T. (1986). Teaching generalized
skills: General case instruction in simulation and community settings. In
R. Horner, L.H. Meyer, & H.D. Fredericks (Eds.), Education of learners with
severe handicaps: Exemplary service strategies (pp. 289-314). Baltimore: Paul
H. Brookes. #(38), #(7), #(33), #(27)

Horner, R., Meyer, L., & Fredericks, H.D. (Eds.). (1986). Education of
learners with severe handicaps: Exemplary service strategies. Baltimore: Paul
H. Brookes. #(34), #(21), #(9)

Horner, R., Sprague, J., & Wilcox, B. (1982). General case programming for
community activities. In B. Wilcox & G.T. Bellamy (Eds.), Design of high
school programs for severely handicapped students (pp. 61-98). Baltimore:
Paul H. Brookes. #(38), #(9), #(27)

Horowitz, F. (Ed.). (1975). Review of child development research (Vol. 4).
Chicago: University of Chicago. #(34), #(30)

Horowitz, L.M., Lippman, L.G., Norman, S.A., & McConkie, G.W. (1964).
Compound stimuli in paired-associate learning. Journal of Experimental
Psychology, 67, 132-141. #(6), 

Horton, D.L., & Mills, C.B. (1984). Human learning and memory. Annual Review
of Psychology, 35, 361-394. #(11)

Hoskins, T.A., & Squires, J.E. (1973). Developmental assessment: A test for
gross motor and reflex development. Physical Therapy, 53, 117-125. #(44),
#(12)

House, A., House, B., & Campbell, M. (1981). Measures of interobserver
agreement: Calculation formulas and distribution effects. Journal of
Behavioral Assessment, 3, 3758. #(29), #(43)

House, B.J. (1979). Attention to components or compounds as a factor in
discrimination transfer performance. Journal of Experimental Child Psycholo-
gy, 27, 321-331. #(1), #(6)

House, B.J., Hanley, M.J., & Magid, D.F. (1979). A limitation on the law of
effect. American Journal of Mental Deficiency, 84, 132-136. #(3)

House, B.J., Orlando, R., & Zeaman, D. (1957). Role of positive and negative
cues in the discrimination learning of mental defectives. Perceptual and
Motor Skills, 7, 73-79. #(45), #(6)

House, B.J., & Zeaman, D. (1960). Visual discrimination learning and
intelligence in defectives of low mental age. American Journal of Mental
Deficiency, 65, 51-58. #(6)

House, B.J., & Zeaman, D. (1960). Transfer of a discrimination from objects
to patterns. Journal of Experimental Psychology, 59, 298-302. #(6) 

House, E.R. (1972). The conscience of educational evaluation. Teachers
College Record, 73, 405-414. #(29)

House, E.R. (1974). Government policy toward innovation: The doctrine of
transferability. In E.R. House, The politics of educational innovation (pp.
204-248). Berkeley, CA: McCutchan. #(8), #(23), #(38)

House, E.R. (1991). Realism in research. Educational Researcher, 20(6), 2-9.
#(43)

House, E.R., Glass, G.V., McLean, L.D., & Walker, D.F. (1978). No simple
answer: Critique of the Follow Through evaluation. Harvard Evaluation Review,
48, 128-160. #(24). #(29)

Houston, A. (1986). The matching law applies to wagtails' foraging in the
wild. Journal of the Experimental Analysis of Behavior, 45, 15-18. #(3),
#(14)

Houston, J.P. (1967). Stimulus selection as influenced by degrees of
learning, attention, prior associations, and experience with the stimulus
components. Journal of Experimental Psychology, 73, 509-516. #(6)

Hovland, C.I. (1952). A "communication analysis" of concept learning.
Psychological Review, 59, 461-472. #(30)

Howard, D.V. (1988). Implicit and explicit assessment of cognitive aging. In
M.L. Howe & C.J. Brainerd (Eds.), Cognitive development in adulthood:
Progress in cognitive development research (pp. 3-37). New York: Springer-
Verlag. #(44), #(46), #(38)

Howard, J.R., Busch, J.C., & Watson, J.A. (1991). The change-over to
computer-based technology in early childhood special education. Journal of
Research on Computing in Education, 23, 530-544. #(16).

Howe, S.G. (1848). Report made to the legislature of Massachusetts on idiocy.
Boston: Collidge & Wiley. #(10), #(35), #(34)

Howell, K.W., Kaplan, J.S., & O'Connell, C.Y. (1979). Evaluating exceptional
children: A task analysis approach. Columbus, OH: Charles E. Merrill. #(34),
#(3), #(29)

Howes, D. (1966). A word count of spoken English. Journal of Verbal Learning
and Verbal Behavior, 5, 572-604. #(30)

Howlin, P. (1981). The effectiveness of operant language training with
autistic children. Journal of Autism and Developmental Disorders, 11, 89-105.
#(3), #(2), #(30)

Howlin, P. (1986). An overview of social behavior in autism. In E. Schopler
& G. Mesobov (Eds.), Social behavior in autism (pp. 103-132). New York:
Plenum Press. #(2), #(38), #(37)

Hrydowy, E.R., Stokes, T.F., & Martin, G.L. (1984). Training elementary
students to prompt teacher praise. Education and Treatment of Children, 7,
99-108. #(9)

Huberty, C.J., & Swan, W.W. (1977). Evaluation of programs. In J.B. Jordan,
A.H. Hayden, M.B. Karnes, & M.M. Wood (Eds.), Early childhood education for
exceptional children (pp. 255-281). Reston, VA: Council for Exceptional
Children. #(29), #(38)

Huck, S.W., Cormier, W.H., & Bounds, W.G. (1974). Reading statistics and
research. New York: Harper & Row. #(29), #(34), #(22), #(43)

Huck, S.W., Cormier, W.H., & Bounds, W.G. (1974). Pseudo-experimental
designs. In S.W. Huck, W.H. Cormier, & W.G. Bounds, Reading statistics and
research (pp. 226-240). New York: Harper & Row. #(22), #(38), #(43)

Huck, S.W., Cormier, W.H., & Bounds, W.G. (1974). True experimental designs.
In S.W. Huck, W.H. Cormier, & W.G. Bounds, Reading statistics and research
(pp. 243-269). New York: Harper & Row. #(29), #(38), #(22), #(43)

Hudiburg, R. (1989). Psychology of computer use. VII. Measuring technostress:
Computerrelated stress. Psychological Reports, 64, 767-772. #(16), #(18) 

Hudiburg, R. (1989). Psychology of computer use. XVII. The Computer
Technology Hassle Scale: Revision, reliability, and correlates. Psychological
Reports, 65, 1387-1394. #(16), #(18)

Hudiburg, R. (1991). Relationship of computer hassles, somatic complaints,
and daily hassles. Psychological Reports, 69, 1119-1122. #(16), #(18)

Hudiburg, R., & Jones, T.M. (1991). Psychology of computer use: XXIII.
Validating a measure of computer-related stress. Psychological Reports, 69,
179-182. #(16), #(18)

Hudson, A. (1992). Assessing the validity of facilitated communication.
Australian Educational and Developmental Psychologist, 9, 24-29. #(30)

Hudson, A., Melita, B., & Arnold, N. (1993). Brief report: A case study
assessment of the validity of facilitated communication. Journal of Autism
and Developmental Disorders, 23, 165-173. #(30) 

Hudson, E., & DeMyer, M.K. (1968). Food as a reinforcer in educational
therapy of autistic children. Behaviour Research and Therapy, 6, 37-43. #(3),
#(2), #(14)

Huguenin, N.H. (1985). Attention to multiple cues by severely mentally re-
tarded adults: Effects of single-component pretraining. Applied Research in
Mental Retardation, 6, 319-335. #(1), #(45), #(6)


Huguenin, N.H., & Touchette, P.E. (1980). Visual attention in retarded
adults: Combining stimuli which control incompatible behavior. Journal of the
Experimental Analysis of Behavior, 33, 77-86. #(1), #(45), #(6)

Hull, C.L. (1943). Principles of behavior. New York: Appleton-Century-Crofts.
#(34), #(3)

Hull, C.L. (1950). Simple qualitative discrimination learning, Psychological
Review, 57, 303-313. #(6)

Hull, C.L. (1952). A behavior system. New Haven, CT: Yale University Press.
#(34), #(3)

Hulme, C. (1981). Reading retardation and multisensory teaching. London:
Routledge and Kegan. #(34), #(17)

Hume, D. (1886). A treatise on human nature. London: Longmans. (Original work
published 1739-1740.) #(34), #(35)

Hung, D.W. (1978). Using self-stimulation as reinforcement for autistic
children. Journal of Autism and Childhood Schizophrenia, 8, 355-366. #(2),
#(14)

Hung, J.M. (1965). Using self-stimulation as reinforcement for autistic
children. Journal of Autism and Childhood Schizophrenia, 8, 355-366. #(2),
#(14), #(20)

Hunt, K. (1975). Do we really need more replications? Psychological Reports,
36, 587-593. #(29), #(43)

Hunt, P. Goetz, L., Alwell, M., & Sailor, W. (1986). Using an interrupted
behavior chain strategy to teach generalized communication responses. Journal
of The Association for Persons with Severe Handicaps, 11(3), 196-204. #(30),
#(7)

Hupp, S.C. (1986). Use of multiple exemplars in object concept training: How
many are sufficient. Analysis and Intervention in Developmental Disabilities,
6, 305-317. #(7)

Hupp, S.C. (1986). Effects of stimulus mode on the acquisition, transfer, and
generalization of categories by severely mentally retarded children and
adolescents. American Journal of Mental Deficiency, 90, 579-587. #(12), #(7),
#(21), #(45)

Hupp, S.C., & Donofrio, M.N. (1983). Assessment of multiply and severely
handicapped learners for the development of cross-referenced objectives.
Journal of the Association for Persons with Severe Handicaps, 8, 17-28.
#(29), #(21)

Hupp, S.C., Mervis, C.B., Able, H., & Conroy-Gunter, M. (1986). Effects of
receptive and expressive training of category labels on generalized learning
by severely mentally retarded children. American Journal of Mental Deficien-
cy, 90, 558-565. #(30), #(45)

Hurd, H.M. (1888). Imbecility and insanity. American Journal of Insanity, 45,
261-269. #(45)

Hurlbut, B., Iwata, B., & Green, J. (1982). Nonvocal language acquisition in
adolescents with severe physical disabilities: Blissymbol versus iconic
stimulus formats. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 15, 241-258. #(30)

Hurley, O., & Kokaska, C.J. (1976). A survey of competencies of teachers of
trainable mentally retarded. Teacher Education, 11, 269-272. #(9), #(42),
#(21), #(45)

Hussian, R.A. (1982). Stimulus control in the modification of problematic
behavior in elderly institutionalized patients. International Journal of
Behavioral Geriatrics, 1, 33-46. #(6), #(46)

Hussian, R.A. (1984). Behavioral geriatrics. In M. Hersen, R.M. Eisler, &
P.M. Miller (Eds.), Progress in behavior modification (Vol. 6, pp. 159-183).
New York: Academic Press. #(38), #(3), #(46)

Hutt, C. (1975). Degrees of novelty and their effects on children's attention
and preference. British Journal of Psychology, 66, 487-492. #(1)

Hyman, J.S., & Cohen, A. (1979). Learning for mastery: Ten conclusions after
15 years and 3,000 schools. Educational Leadership, 37, 104-109. #(26)

Hyman, H.H., & Wright, C.R. (1967). Evaluating social action programs. In
P.F. Lazarsfeld, W.H. Sewell, & H.L. Wilensky (Eds.), The uses of sociology
(pp. 741-782). New York: Basic Books. #(29), #(38)

Igbaria, M., & Parasuraman, S. (1989). A path analytic study of individual
characteristics, computer anxiety, and attitudes toward microcomputers.
Journal of Management, 15, 373-388. #(16), #(18)

Ichinose, C.K., & Clark, H.B. (1990). A review of ecological factors that
influence the play and activity engagement of handicapped children. Child and
Family Behavior Therapy, 12(3), 49-76. #(37), #(32)

Illich, I. (1971). Deschooling society. New York: Harper & Row. #(34), #(15),
#(42)

Ilmer, S., & Drews, J. (1980). Differential analysis of selected prompts and
neurological variables in motor assessment of moderately mentally retarded
children. American Journal of Mental Deficiency, 84, 508-517. #(9)

Ilmer, S., Rynders, J., Sinclair, S., & Helfrich, D. (1981). Assessment of
object permanence in severely handicapped students as a function of motor and
prompting variables. Journal of The Association for Persons with Severe
Handicaps, 6, 30-40. #(13), #(14), #(29), #(45), #(9)

Ingram, D. (1989). First language acquisition. Cambridge, England: Cambridge
University Press. #(34), #(30)

Inhelder, B., de Caprona, D., & Cornu-Wells, A. (Eds.). (1987). Piaget today.
Hillsdale, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum. #(34), #(13)

Inhelder, B., & Piaget, J. (1958). The growth of logical thinking from
childhood to adolescence. New York: Basic Books. #(34), #(13)

Intagliata, J.C. (1979). Cost comparison of institutional and community based
alternatives for mentally retarded persons. Mental Retardation, 17, 154-156.
#(39), #(47)

Intagliata, J.C., & Willer, B. (1982). Reinstitutionalization of mentally
retarded persons successfully placed into family-care and group homes.
American Journal of Mental Deficiency, 87, 34-39. #(31), #(45)

Ireland, W.W. (1900). The mental affections of children: Idiocy, imbecility,
and insanity. Philadelphia: Blakiston. #(45), #(34)

Irvin, L.K. (1976). General utility of easy-to-hard discrimination training
procedures with the severely retarded. Education and Training of the Mentally
Retarded, 11, 247-250. #(6), #(21), #(45)

Irvin, L.K., Crowell, F.A., & Bellamy, G.T. (1979). Multiple assessment
evaluation of programs for severely retarded adults. Mental Retardation, 17,
123-128. #(21), #(29), #(45)

Isaacs, C.D., Embry, L.H., & Baer, D.M. (1982). Training family therapists:
An experimental analysis. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 15, 505-520.
#(9), #(29)

Iscoe, I., & Semler, I. (1964). Paired-associate learning in normal and
mentally retarded children as a function of four conditions. Journal of
Comparative Physiological Psychiatry, 57, 387-392. #(6), #(45)

Israel, A.C. (1973). Developing correspondence between verbal and non-verbal
behavior: Switching sequences. Psychological Reports, 32, 1111-1117. #(3),
#(37), #(33)

Israel, A.C. (1978). Some thoughts on correspondence between saying and
doing. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 11, 271-276. #(30)

Israel, A.C., & Brown, M.S. (1977). Correspondence training, prior verbal
training, and control of nonverbal behavior via control of verbal behavior.
Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 10, 333-358. #(3), #(30)

Israel, A.C., & O'Leary, K.D. (1973). Developing correspondence between
children's words and deeds. Child Development, 44, 575-581. #(37), #(3),
#(30)

Israel, L. (1984). Word knowledge and word retrieval: phonological and
semantic strategies. In G.P. Wallach & K.G. Butler (Eds.), Language learning
disabilities in school-age children (pp. 230-250). Baltimore: Williams &
Wilkins. #(30), #(38), #(28)

Issacs, C.D. (1982). Treatment of child abuse: A review of the behavioral
interventions. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 15, 273-294. #(32), #(3)

Issacs, C.D., Embry, L.H., & Baer, D.M. (1982). Training family therapists:
An experimental analysis. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 15, 505-520.
#(3), #(32)

Itard, J.M.G. (1962). The wild boy of Aveyron (G. Humphrey & M. Humphrey,
Eds. and Trans.). New York: Appleton-Century-Crofts. (Original work published
1894.) #(45), #(34), #(9)

Ivancic, M.T., Reid, D.H., Iwata, B.A., Faw, G.D., & Page, T.J. (1981).
Evaluating a supervision program for developing and maintaining therapeutic
staff-resident interactions during institutional care routines. Journal of
Applied Behavior Analysis, 14, 95-107. #(31)

Iwata, B.A. (1987). Negative reinforcement in applied behavior analysis: An
emerging technology. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 20, 361-378. #(14)

Iwata, B.A. (1988). Negative reinforcement in applied behavior analysis: An
emerging technology. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 20, 361-378. #(3),
#(14)

Iwata, B.A., Dorsey, M.F., Slifer, K.J., Bauman, K.E., & Richman, G.S. (1982). Toward a functional
analysis of self-injury. Analysis and Intervention in Developmental Disabili-
ties, 2, 3-20. #(19)

Iwata, B.A., Pace, G.M., Kalsher, M.J., Cowdery, G.E., & Cataldo, M.F.
(1990). Experimental analysis and extinction of self-injurious escape
behavior. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 23, 11-27. #(3), #(19) 

Jackson, G. (1975). Reanalysis of Coleman's "Recent trends in school
integration." Educational Researcher, 9(10), 21-25. #(24)

Jackson, G.M., Johnson, C.R., Ackron, G.S., & Crowley, R. (1975). Food
satiation as a procedure to decelerate vomiting. American Journal of Mental
Deficiency, 80, 223-227. #(3), #(14), #(37)

Jacob, E. (1987). Qualitative research traditions: A review. Review of
Educational Research, 57, 1-50. #(32), #(43)

Jacobson, J.W. (1982). Problem behavior and psychiatric impairment within a
developmentally disabled population: II. Behavior severity. Applied Research
in Mental Retardation, 3, 369-381. #(45), #(21), #(4)

Jacobson, J.W., & Mulik, J.A. (1992). Speak for your self, or. . .I can't
quite put my finger on it! Psychology in Mental Retardation and Developmental
Disabilities, 17, 3-7. #(30)

Jacobson, J.W., & Schwartz, A.A. (1983). The evaluation of community living
alternatives for developmentally disabled persons. In J.L. Matson & J.A.
Mulick (Eds.), Handbook of mental retardation (pp. 39-66). New York: Pergamon
Press. #(38), #(45), #(39)

Jacobson, R., Fant, C., & Halle, M. (1963). Preliminaries to speech analysis.
Cambridge, MA: MIT Press. #(30), #(34)

Jacobson, R.R. (1985). Child firesetters: A clinical investigation. Journal
of Child Psychology and Psychiatry, 26, 759-768. #(3), #(4)

Jacoby, L.L. (1983). Perceptual enhancement: Persistent effects of an
experience. Journal of Experimental Psychology: Learning, Memory, and
Cognition, 9, 21-38. #(11).

Jacoby, L.L., & Witherspoon, D. (1982). Remembering without awareness.
Canadian Journal of Psychology, 36, 300-324. #(11)

James, S.D., & Egel, A.L. (1986). A direct prompting strategy for increasing
reciprocal interactions between handicapped and nonhandicapped siblings.
Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 19, 173-186. #(3), #(9), #(37)

James, W. (1892). Psychology. London: MacMillan. #(34), #(25)

James, W. (1899). Talks to teachers. New York: Holt, Rinehart and Winston.
#(34), #(15)

Jansma, P. (1980). Psychomotor domain tests for the severely and profoundly
handicapped. Journal of The Association for Persons with Severe Handicaps, 5,
368-381. #(12), #(29), #(21)

Janssen, C., & Guess, D. (1978). Use of function as a consequence in training
receptive labeling to severely and profoundly retarded individuals. AAESPH
Review, 3, 244-258. #(30), #(21)

Jastak, J., & Jastak, S. (1969). The Wide Range Achievement Test--Revised.
Wilmington, DE: Guidance Assn. #(44)

Jastak, S., & Wilkinson, G.S. (1984). Wide Range Achievement Test (rev. ed.).
Wilmington, DE: Jasak Assoc. #(44) 

Jay, T. (1985). Defining and measuring computerphobia. In R.E. Elberts & C.G.
Eberts (Eds.), Trends in ergonomics and human factors. II (pp. 321-326). New
York: Elsevier Science. #(38), #(16)

Jeffrey, W.E. (1968). The orienting reflex and attention in cognitive
development. Psychological Review, 75, 323-334. #(1)

Jencks. C. et al. (1972). Inequality: A reassessment of the effects of family
and schooling in American. New York: Basic Books. #(34), #(42)

Jenkins, H.M., & Sainsbury, R.S. (1970). Discrimination learning with the
distinctive feature on positive or negative trials. In D.I. Mostofsky (Ed.),
Attention: Contemporary theory and analysis (pp. 239-273). New York:
Appleton-Century-Crofts. #(6), #(38)

Jenkins, J.J. (1963). Stimulus "fractionation" in paired-associate learning.
Psychological Reports, 13, 409-410. #(6), #(1)

Jenkins, J.R., & Pany, D.P. (1978). Standardized achievement tests: How
useful for special education? Exceptional Children, 44, 448-453. #(29)

Jenkins, S., Stephens, B., & Sternberg, L. (1980). The use of parents as
parent trainers of handicapped children. Education and Training of the
Mentally Retarded, 15, 256-263. #(3), #(45)

Jenkins, W.O., & Stanley, J.C. (1950). Partial reinforcement: A review and
critique. Psychological Bulletin, 47, 193-234. #(14), #(32)

Jensen, A.R. (1969). How much can we boost IQ and scholastic achievement?
Harvard Educational Review, 39, 1-123. #(29)

Jensen, A.R. (1970). A theory of primacy and secondary familial mental
retardation. In N.R. Ellis (Ed.), International review of research in mental
retardation (Vol. 4, pp. 33-105). New York: Academic Press. #(38), #(25),
#(45)

Jensen, A.R. (1980). Bias in mental testing. New York: The Free Press. #(29),
#(34)

Jensen, A.R. (1985). The nature of the black-white difference on various
psychometric tests: Spearman's hypothesis. Behavioral and Brain Sciences, 8,
193-263. #(25)

Jensen, A.R. (1987). Further evidence for Spearman's hypothesis concerning
black-white differences on psychometric tests. Behavioral and Brain Sciences,
10, 512-519. #(25)

Johnson, B., & Cuvo, A. (1981). Teaching mentally retarded adults to cook.
Behavior Modification, 5, 187-202. #(45), #(33)

Johnson, C., & Sidman, M. (1993). Conditional discrimination and equivalence
relations: Control by negative stimuli. Journal of the Experimental Analysis
of Behavior, 59, 333-347. #(6), #(7)

Johnson, D., & Johnson, V.H. (1986). Highlighting vocabulary in inferential
comprehension instruction. Journal of Reading, 29, 622-625. #(17)

Johnson, D., & Myklebust, H. (1967). Learning disabilities: Educational
principles and practices. New York: Grune & Stratton. #(34), #(28)

Johnson, D.W. (1981). Student-student interaction: The neglected variable in
education. Educational Researcher, 10(1), 5-10. #(36)

Johnson, D.W., & Johnson, R.T. (1974). Instructional goal structure:
Cooperative, competitive, or individualistic. Review of Educational Research,
44, 213-240. #(5), #(9)

Johnson, G.O. (1962). Special education for the mentally handicapped--a
paradox. Exceptional Children, 29, 62-69. #(15), #(35), #(45)

Johnson, M.K., & Hasher, L. (1987). Human learning and memory. Annual Review
of Psychology, 38, 631-668. #(11)

Johnson, R. (1985). The Picture Communication Symbols, book II. Solana Beach,
CA: MayerJohnson Co. #(44), #(30)

Johnson, V.M., & Werner, R.A. (1975). A step-by-step learning guide for
retarded infants. Syracuse, NY: Syracuse University Press. #(21), #(34)

Johnson, S.M., & Bolstad, O.D. (1973). Methodological issues in naturalistic
observation: Some problems and solutions for field research. In L.A.
Hamerlynck, L.C. Handy, & E.J. Mash (Eds.), Behavior change: Methodology,
concepts, and practice (pp. 7-67). Champaign, IL: Research Press. #(38),
#(29), #(43)

Johnson, W.L., & Baumeister, A.A. (1978). Self-injurious behavior: A review
and analysis of methodological details of published studies. Behavior
Modification, 2, 465-487. #(19), #(32)

Johnston, A.P. (1979). Requisites for planning utilization. Planning and
Changing, 10, 87-98. #(42), #(23)

Johnston, E.B., & Johnston, A.V. (1984). Normal language development. In E.B
Johnston & A.V. Johnston, The Piagetian language nursery: An intensive group
language intervention program for preshoolers (pp. 33-72). Rockville, MD:
Aspen Publications. #(13), #(30), #(38)

Johnston, E.B., & Johnston, A.V. (1984). The curriculum. In E.B. Johnston &
A.V. Johnston, The Piagetian language nursery: An intensive group language
intervention program for preshoolers (pp. 115-135). Rockville, MD: Aspen
Publications. #(5), #(30), #(38), #(13)

Johnston, E.B., & Johnston, A.V. (1984). Children's play. In E.B. Johnston &
A.V. Johnston, The Piagetian language nursery: An intensive group language
intervention program for preshoolers (pp. 196-216). Rockville, MD: Aspen
Publications. #(13), #(30), #(38)

Johnston, E.B., & Johnston, A.V. (1984). Activities and principles for mother
in preventing communication handicaps. In E.B. Johnston & A.V. Johnston, The
Piagetian language nursery: An intensive group language intervention program
for preshoolers (pp. 307-312). Rockville, MD: Aspen Publications. #(13),
#(30), #(38)

Johnston, J.M. (1972). Punishment of human behavior. American Psychologist,
27, 1033-1054. #(3), #(14)

Johnston, J.M. (1991). We need a new model of technology. Journal of Applied
Behavior Analysis, 24, 425-427. #(3)

Johnston, J.M. (1992). Managing our own behavior: Some hidden issues. Journal
of Applied Behavior Analysis, 25, 93-96. #(3), #(18)

Johnston, J.R. (1988). Specific language disorders in the child. In N.J.
Lass, L.V. McReynolds, J.L. Northern, & D.E. Yoder (Eds.), Handbook of
speech-language pathology and audiology (pp. 685-715). Toronto: Decker.
#(38), #(30)

Johnston, M.K., Kelley, C.S., Harris, F.R., & Wolf, M.M. (1966). An
application of reinforcement principles to development of motor skills of a
young child. Child Development, 37, 379-387. #(3), #(14)

Johnston, P.H., & Winograd, P.N. (1985). Passive failure in reading. Journal
of Reading Behavior, 17, 279-301. #(17)

Joiner, L.M., & Sabatino, D.A. (1981). A policy study of P.L. 94-142.
Exceptional Children, 48, 24-33. #(10), #(23)

Jolicoeur, P., Gluck, M.A., & Kosslyn, S.M. (1984). Pictures and names:
Making the connection. Cognitive Psychology, 16, 243-275. #(6)

Jonas, G. (1976). Stuttering: The disorder of many theories. New York:
Farrar, Strauss & Giroux. #(34), #(30)

Jonassen, D., & Hannum, W. (1987). Research-based principles for designing
computer software. Educational Technology, 27(12), 7-14. #(16)

Jones, F.H., Fremouw, W., & Carples, S. (1977). Pyramid training of
elementary school teachers to use a classroom management skills package.
Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 10, 239-253. #(3), #(9)

Jones, F.H., Simmons, J.Q., & Frankel, F. (1974). An extinction procedure for
eliminating self-destructive behavior in a 9-year-old autistic girl. Journal
of Autism and Childhood Schizophrenia, 4, 241-250. #(3), #(19), #(2)

Jones, R.L. (1973). Accountability in special education: Some problems.
Exceptional Children, 40, 631-642. #(26)

Jones, R.L. (1976). Mainstreaming and the minority child. Reston, VA: Council
for Exceptional Children. #(34), #(49)

Jones, R.L., Gottlieb, J., Gushkin, S., & Yoshida, R.K. (1978). Evaluating
mainstreaming programs: models, caveats, considerations, and guidelines.
Exceptional Children, 44, 588-601. #(29), #(39)

Jones, R.R. (1973). Behavioral observation and frequency data: Problems in
scoring, analysis, and interpretation. In L.A. Hamerlynck, L.C. Handy, & E.J.
Mash (Eds.), Behavior change: Methodology, concepts, and practice (pp.
119-145). Champaign, IL: Research Press. #(38), #(29), #(43), #(48)

Jones, R.R., Vaught, R.S., & Weinrott, M. (1977). Time-series analysis in
operant research. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 10, 151-166. #(3),
#(29), #(43), #(48)

Jones, R.R., Weinrott, M., & Vaught, R.S. (1978). Effects of serial
dependency on the agreement between visual and statistical inference. Journal
of Applied Behavior Analysis, 11, 277-283. #(29), #(43)

Jones, R.T., & Kazdin, A.E. (1980). Teaching children how and when to make
emergency phone calls. Behavior Therapy, 11, 509-521. #(18)

Jones, R.T., Kazdin, A.E., & Haney, J.I. (1981). Social validation and train-
ing of emergency fire safety skills for potential injury prevention and life 
saving. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 14, 249-260. #(18), #(27)

Jones, T. (1991). An empirical study of children's use of computer pointing
devices. Journal of Educational Conmputing Research, 7(1), 61-76. #(16, #(15)

Jones, V., & Prior, M. (1985). Motor imitation abilities and neurological
signs in autistic children. Journal of Autism and Developmental Disorders,
15, 37-46. #(12), #(41), #(2)

Jordan, N. (1972). Is there an Achilles heel in Piaget's theorizing? Human
Development, 15, 379-382. #(13)

Jordan, T.E. (1967). Language and mental retardation: A review of the
literature. In R.L. Schiefelbusch, R. Copeland, & J. Smith (Eds.), Language
and mental retardation (pp. 20-38). New York: Holt, Rinehart and Winston.
#(30), #(38), #(45), #(32)

Josephson, W.L. (1987). Television violence and children's aggression:
Testing the priming, social script, and disinhibition predictions. Journal of
Personality and Social Psychology, 53, 882-890. #(41)

Just, M.A., & Carpenter, P.A. (1980). A theory of reading: From eye fixations
to comprehension. Psychological Review, 87, 329-354. #(17)

Kagan, J. (1978). The growth of the child. New York: W.W. Norton. #(25),
#(34), #(14)

Kagan, J. (1980). Jean Piaget's contributions. Phi Delta Kappan, 61, 245-246.
#(13)

Kah, R. (1989). The development of memory in children (3rd ed.). San
Francisco: W.H. Freeman. #(34), #(11)

Kahn, J.V. (1975). Relationship of Piaget's sensorimotor period to language
acquisition of profoundly retarded children. American Journal of Mental
Deficiency, 79, 640-643. #(13), #(30)

Kahn, J.V. (1979). Applications of the Piagetian literature to severely and
profoundly mentally retarded persons. Mental Retardation, 17, 273-280. #(13),
#(21), #(45)

Kahn, J.V. (1983). Sensorimotor period and adaptive behavior development of
severely and profoundly mentally retarded children. American Journal of
Mental Deficiency, 88, 69-75. #(12), #(21), #(45)

Kahneman, D. (1973). Attention and effort. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-
Hall. #(34), #(1)

Kahneman, D., & Treisman, A. (1984). Changing views of attention and
automaticity. In R. Parasuraman & R. Davies (Eds.), Varieties of attention
(pp. 29-61). New York: Academic Press. #(38), #(11)

Kail, R.V., & Hagen, J.W. (Eds.). (1977). Perspectives on the development of
memory and cognition. Hillsdale, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum. #(34), #(11), #(25)

Kaiser, A.P., Alpert, C.L., & Warren, S.F. (1987). Teaching functional
language: Strategies for language intervention. In M.E. Snell (Ed.),
Systematic instruction of persons with severe handicaps (3rd ed., pp.
247-272). Columbus, OH: Charles E. Merrill. #(38), #(30)

Kale, R.J., Kaye, J.H., Whelan, P.A., & Hopkins, B.L. (1968). The effects of
reinforcement on the modification, maintenance, and generalization of social
responses of mental patients. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 1,
307-314. #(3), #(14), #(7)

Kalfus, G.R. (1984). Peer mediated intervention: A critical review. Child and
Family Behavior Therapy, 6, 17-43. #(36), #(32)

Kaluger, G., & Kolson, C.J. (199). Learning disabilities: Educational
principles and practices. New York: Grune and Stratton. #(34), #(28)

Kamhi, A., & Catts, H. (1989). Reading disabilities: A developmental language
perspective. Boston: Little, Brown. #(34), #(17)

Kamii, C. (1981). Application of Piaget's theory to education: The pre-
operational level. In I.E. Sigel, D.M. Brodinsky, & R.M. Golinkoff (Eds.),
New directions in Piagetian theory and practice (231-265). Hillsdale, NJ:
Lawrence Erlbaum. #(13), #(38)

Kane, J.E., & Lawler, E.E. (1978). Methods of peer assessment. Psychological
Bulletin, 85, 555-586. #(25), #(29)

Kanfer, F.H., & Karoly, P. (1972). Self-control: A behavioristic excursion
into the lion's den. Behavior Therapy, 3, 398-416. #(3), #(18)

Kangas, K.A., & Lloyd, L.L. (1988). Early cognitive skills as pre-requisites
to augmentative and alternative communication use. What are we waiting for?
Augmentative and Alternative Communication, 4, 211-221. #(30) 

Kanner, L. (1943). Autistic disturbances of affective contact. Nervous Child,
2, 217-240. #(21), #(2)

Kanner, L. (1944). Early infantile autism. Journal of Pediatrics, 25, 211-217.
#(21), #(2)

Kanner, L. (1965). Infantile autism and the schizophrenias. Behavioral
Science, 10, 412-420. #(21), #(2)

Kant, I. (1965). Critique of pure reason (N.K. Smith, Trans.). New York: St.
Martin's Press. (Original work published 1781.) #(34), #(35)

Kantor, J.R. (1920). Suggestions toward a scientific interpretation of
perception. Psychological Review, 27, 191-216. #(3)

Kantor, J.R. (1959). Interbehavioral psychology (2nd rev. ed.). Bloomington,
IN: Principia Press. #(3), #(34)

Kantor, J.R. (1968). Behaviorism in the history of psychology. The Psycholog-
ical Record, 18, 151-166. #(3)

Kantor, J.R. (1970). Analysis of the experimental analysis of behavior
(TEAB). Journal of the Experimental Analysis of Behavior, 13, 101-108. #(3)

Kaplan, A. (1964). The conduct of inquiry. San Francisco: Chandler. #(34),
#(43)

Kappauf, W.E. (1973). Studying the relationship of task performance to the
variables of chronological age, mental age, and IQ. In N.R. Ellis (Ed.),
International review of research in mental retardation (Vol. 6, pp. 257-317).
New York: Academic Press. #(15), #(38), #(45)

Karan, O.C. (1976). Contemporary views on vocational evaluation practices
with the mentally retarded. Vocational Evaluation and Work Adjustment
Bulletin, 9, 7-13. #(27), #(45)

Karan, O.C., Bernstein, G.S., Harvey J., Bates, P., Renzagalia, A., &
Rosenthal, D. (1979). An extended evaluation model for severely handicapped
persons. AAESPH Review, 4, 374-398. #(29), #(21)

Karen, R.L., Astin-Smith, S., & Creasy, D. (1985). Teaching telephone-
answering skills to mentally retarded adults. American Journal of Mental
Deficiency, 89, 595-609. #(3), #(27), #(45)

Karen, R.L., Eisner, M., & Endres, R.W. (1965). Behavior modification in a
sheltered workshop for severely retarded students. American Journal of Mental
Deficiency, 79, 338-347. #(3), #(21), #(33)

Karlan, G.R. (1980). Issues in communication research related to integration
of the developmentally disabled adult. In A. Novak & L. Heal (Eds.),
Community integration of developmentally disabled individuals (pp. 121-137).
Baltimore: Paul H. Brookes. #(38), #(30), #(27)

Karlan, G.R., & Rusch, F.R. (1982). Correspondence between saying and doing:
Some thoughts on defining correspondence and future directions for applica-
tion. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 15, 151-162. #(30)

Karnes, M.E., & Zehrback, R.R. (1973). Curriculum and methods in early
childhood special education: One approach. Focus on Exceptional Children, 5,
1-12. #(5), #(9), #(25)

Karoly, P., & Dirks, M.J. (1977). Developing self-control in pre-school
children through correspondence training. Behavior Therapy, 8, 398-405.
#(18), #(30), #(3)

Karsh, K., Repp, A., & Lenz, M. (1990). A comparison of the Task Demonstra-
tion Model and the standard prompting hierarchy in teaching word identifica-
tion to persons with moderate retardation. Research in Developmental
Disabilities, 11, 395-410. #(9) 

Karweit, N., & Slavin, R.E. (1981). Measurement and modeling choices in
studies of time and learning. American Educational Research Journal, 18,
157-171. #(26) 

Katz, J.J., & Langendoen, D.T. (1976). Pragmatics and presupposition.
Language, 52, 1-17. #(30)

Katz, R.C. (1986). Aphasia treatment and microcomputers. London: Taylor &
Francis. #(16), #(34)

Katzman, M.T. (1970). The science and politics of national assessment.
Teachers College Record, 4, 571-586. #(29), #(23)

Kaufman, M., Gottlieb, J., Agard, J.A., & Kukic, M.B. (1975). Mainstreaming:
Toward an explication of the construct. In E.L. Meyer, G.A. Vergason, & R.J.
Whelan (Eds.), Alternatives for teaching exceptional children (pp. 35-55).
Denver: Love Publishing. #(38), #(39)

Kauffman, J.M. (Ed.). (1981). Bureaucracy, law, and litigation. Exceptional
Education Quarterly, 2(2). #(10), #(42)

Kauffman, J.M. (1981). Introduction: Historical trends and contemporary
issues in special education in the United States. In J.M. Kauffman & D.P.
Hallahan (Eds.), Handbook of special education (pp. 3-23). Englewood Cliffs,
NJ: Prentice-Hall. #(10), #(38)

Kauffman, J.M. (Ed.). (1989). Characteristics of behavior disorders of
children and youth (4th ed.). Columbus, OH: Charles E. Merrill. #(34), #(28)

Kauffman, J.M., & Hallahan, D.P. (Eds.). (1981). Handbook of special
education. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall. #(34), #(25)

Kauffman, J.M., & Krouse, J. (1981). The cult of educability: Searching for
the substance of things hoped for; the evidence of things not seen. Analysis
and Intervention in Developmental Disabilities, 1, 53-60. #(21)

Kauffman, J.M., Nussen, J.L., & McGee, C.S. (1977). Follow-up in classroom
behavior modification: Survey and discussion. Journal of School Psychology,
15, 343-348. #(3)

Kauffman, J.M., & Snell, M.E. (1977). Managing the behavior of severely
handicapped persons. In E. Sontag (Ed.), Educational programming for the
severely and profoundly handicapped (pp. 203-218). Reston, VA: Council for
Exceptional Children. #(3), #(15), #(21), #(38)

Kauffman, J.M., Strang, H.R., & Loper, A.B. (1985). Using microcomputers to
train teachers of the handicapped. Remedial and Special Education, 6(5),
13-17. #(16)

Kaufman, A., & Kaufman, N. (1983). Kaufman Assessment Battery for Children--
Interpretive Manual. Circle Pines, MN: American Guidance Service. #(44)

Kaufman, E. (1979). The right to treatment suit as an agent of change.
American Journal of Psychiatry, 136, 1428-1432. #(10)

Kaufman, M.E. (1977). The effects of institutionalization on development of
stereotyped and social behaviors in mental defectives. American Journal of
Mental Deficiency, 81, 486-491. #(3) 

Kaufman, M.E., & Levitt, H. (1965). A study of three stereotyped behaviors in
institutionalized mental defectives. American Journal of Mental Deficiency,
69, 467-473. #(45)

Kaufman, M.J., Gottlieb, J., Agard, J.A., & Kukic, M.B. (1975). Mainstreamin-
g: Toward an explication of the construct. Focus on Exceptional Children,
7(3), 1-12. #(27), #(39)

Kavale, K.A., & Forness, S.K. (1987). Substance over style: Assessing the
efficacy of modality testing and teaching. Exceptional Children, 54, 228-239.
#(29)

Kavale, K.A., Forness, S.K., & Bender, M. (1987). Handbook of learning
disabilities (Vol. 1). Boston: Little, Brown. #(34), #(28)

Kavale, K.A., & Mattson, P.D. (1983). One jumped off the balance beam: Meta-
analysis of perceptual-motor training. Journal of learning Disabilities, 16,
165-173. #(12)

Kay, H.H., Farnham, L.J., Karren, B.D., Knakal, J., & Diamond, P.M. (1972).
Legal planning for the mentally retarded: The California experience.
California Law Review, 60, 438-529. #(40), #(45)

Kayser, J.E., Billingsley, F.F., & Neel, R.S. (1986). A comparison of in-
context and traditional instructional approaches: Total task, single trial
versus backward chaining, multiple trials. Journal of The Association for
Persons with Severe Handicaps, 11, 28-38. #(9)

Kazdin, A.E. (1973). Methodological and assessment considerations in
evaluating reinforcement programs in applied settings. Journal of Applied
Behavior Analysis, 6, 517-531. #(3), #(29), #(14)

Kazdin, A.E. (1973). Time out for some considerations on punishment. American
Psychologist, 28, 939-941. #(3), #(21), #(14)

Kazdin, A.E. (1973). The effect of vicarious reinforcement on attentive
behavior in the classroom. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 6, 71-78.
#(1), #(3), #(14)

Kazdin, A.E. (1973). Issues in behavior modification with mentally retarded
persons. American Journal of Mental Deficiency, 78, 134-140. #(3), #(45)

Kazdin, A.E. (1974). Effects of covert modeling and model reinforcement on
assertive behavior. Journal of Abnormal Psychology, 83, 240-252. #(3), #(14)

Kazdin, A.E. (1974). Self-monitoring and behavior change. In M.J. Mahoney &
C.E. Thoresen (Eds.), Self-control: Power to the person (pp. 218-246).
Monterey, CA: Brooks/Cole. #(3), #(38), #(18)

Kazdin, A.E. (1975). Behavior modification in applied settings. Homewood, IL:
Dorsey Press. #(3), #(34)

Kazdin, A.E. (1975). Characteristics and trends in applied behavior analysis.
Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 8, 332. #(3)

Kazdin, A.E. (1976). Statistical analyses for single-case experimental
designs. In M. Hersen & D.H. Barlow (Eds.), Single case experimental designs:
Strategies for studying human behavior (pp. 265-316). New York: Pergamon
Press. #(38), #(43), #(48), #(22)

Kazdin, A.E. (1977). The token economy: A review and evaluation. New York:
Plenum Press. #(34), #(3), #(14)

Kazdin, A.E. (1977). The influence of behavior preceding a reinforced
response on behavior change in the classroom. Journal of Applied Behavior
Analysis, 10, 299-310. #(14)

Kazdin, A.E. (1977). Vicarious reinforcement and direction of behavior change
in the classroom. Behavior Therapy, 8, 57-63. #(3), #(14)

Kazdin, A.E. (1977). Assessing the clinical or applied importance of behavior
change through social validation. Behavior Modification, 1, 427-452. #(3),
#(29), #(39)

Kazdin, A.E. (1977). Artifact, bias, and complexity of assessment: The ABCs
of reliability. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 10, 141-150. #(3),
#(29)

Kazdin, A.E. (1978). History of behavior modification: Experimental
foundations of contemporary research. Baltimore: University Park Press. #(3),
#(34)

Kazdin, A.E. (1979). Unobtrusive measures in behavioral assessment. Journal
of Applied Behavior Analysis, 12, 713-724. #(29)

Kazdin, A.E. (1980). Acceptability of alternative treatments for deviant
child behavior. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 13, 259-273. #(3),
#(14), #(9)

Kazdin, A.E. (1980). Acceptability of timeout from reinforcement procedures
for disruptive child behavior. Behavior Therapy, 11, 329-344. #(3), #(14),
#(9)

Kazdin, A.E. (1980). Behavior modification in applied settings (2nd ed.).
Homewood, IL: Dorsey Press. #(34), #(3)

Kazdin, A.E. (1980). Research design in clinical psychology. New York: Harper
& Row. #(34), #(28), #(43)

Kazdin, A.E. (1981). Drawing valid inferences from case studies. Journal of
consulting and clinical psychology, 49, 183-192. #(3), #(29)

Kazdin, A.E. (1981). Assessment techniques for childhood depression. Journal
of the American Academy of Child Psychiatry, 20, 358-375. #(3), #(29)

Kazdin, A.E. (1982). Single case research design: Methods for clinical and
applied settings. New York: Oxford University Press. #(34), #(43), #(48)

Kazdin, A.E. (1982). The token economy: A decade later. Journal of Applied
Behavior Analysis, 15, 431-445. #(3)

Kazdin, A.E. (1982). Applying behavioral principles in the schools. In C.R.
Reynolds & T.B. Gutkin (Eds.), The handbook of school psychology (pp.
501-529). New York: John Wiley. #(3), #(38)

Kazdin, A.E. (1982). Symptom substitution, generalization, and response
covariation: Implications for psychotherapy outcome. Psychological Bulletin,
91, 349-365. #(3), #(7), #(29).

Kazdin, A.E. (1984). Acceptability of aversive procedures and medication as
treatment alternatives for deviant child behavior. Journal of Abnormal Child
Psychology, 12, 289-302. #(3), #(9), #(14)

Kazdin, A.E. (1992). Research design in clinical psychology (2nd ed.). Need-
ham Heigts, MA: Allyn & Bacon. #(43), #(34)

Kazdin, A.E. (1993). Replication and extension of behavioral treatment of au-
tistic disorder. American Journal on Mental Retardation, 97, 377-379. #(43)

Kazdin, A.E., Bass, D., Ayers, W.A., & Rodgers, A. (1990). Empirical and clin-
ical focus of child and adolescent psychotherapy research. Journal of Consult-
ing and Clinical Psychology, 58, 729-740. #(29), #(43)

Kazdin, A.E., & Bootzin, R.R. (1972). The token economy: An evaluative
review. Journal of Applied Behavior, 5, 343-372. #(3), #(32)

Kazdin, A.E., & Bootzin, R.R. (1973). The token economy: An examination of
issues. In R.D. Rubin, J.P. Brady, & J.D. Henderson (Eds.), Advances in
behavior therapy (Vol. 4, pp. 159-176). New York: Academic Press. #(3), #(38)

Kazdin, A.E., & Craighead, W.E. (1973). Behavior modification in special
education. In L. Mann & D.A. Sabatino (Eds.), The first review of special
education (Vol. 2, pp. 51-102). Philadelphia: Buttonwood Farms. #(3), #(38)

Kazdin, A.E., French, N.H., & Sherick, R.B. (1981). Acceptability of
alternative treatments for children: Evaluations by inpatient children,
parents, and staff. Journal of Consulting and Clinical Psychology, 49,
900-907. #(3), #(9), #(29)

Kazdin, A.E., & Klock, J. (1973). The effect of nonverbal teacher approval on
student attentive behavior. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 6, 643-654.
#(3)

Kazdin, A.E., & Kopel, S.A. (1975). On resolving ambiguities of the multiple-
baseline design: Problems and recommendations. Behavior Therapy, 6, 601-608.
#(43), #(48), #(3)

Kazdin, A.E., & Lahey, B.B. (Eds.). (1981). Advances in child clinical
psychology. New York: Plenum Press. #(3), #(34)

Kazdin, A.E., & Mascitelli, S. (1980). The opportunity to earn oneself off a
token system as a reinforcer for attentive behavior. Behavior Therapy, 11,
68-78. #(3), #(14)

Kazdin, A.E., & Matson, J.L. (1981). Social validation in mental retardation.
Applied Research in Mental Retardation, 2, 39-53. #(3), #(39), #(27), #(45)

Kazdin, A.E., & Moyer, W. (1976). Training teachers to use behavior
modification. In S. Yen & R. McIntire (Eds.), Teaching behavior modification
in applied settings. Homewood, IL: Dorsey Press. #(3), #(38), #(42)

Kazdin, A.E., & Polster, R. (1973). Intermittent token reinforcement and
response maintenance in extinction. Behavior Therapy, 4, 386-391. #(3), #(14)

Kazdin, A.E., Silverman, N.A., & Sittler, J.L. (1975). The use of prompts to
enhance vicarious effects of nonverbal approval. Journal of Applied Behavior
Analysis, 8, 279-286. #(3), #(9)

Kazdin, A.E., & Straw, M.L. (1976). Assessment of behavior of the mentally re-
tarded. In M. Hersen & A.S. Bellack (Eds.), Behavioral assessment: A practical
handbook (pp. 337-368). New York: Peragon Press. #(45), #(29), #(38)

Kazdin, A.E., & Wilcoxon, L.A. (1976). Systematic desensitization and non-
specific treatment effects: A methodological evaluation. Psychological
Bulletin, 83, 729-758. #(3), #(29)

Kearns, K.P. (1986). Flexibility of single-subject experimental designs. Part
II: Design selection and arrangement of experimental phases. Journal of
Speech and Hearing Disorders, 51, 204-214. #(42), #(29), #(48)

Keating, D.P. (1980). Four faces of creativity: The continuing plight of the
intellectually underserved. Gifted Child Quarterly, 24, 56-61. #(50)

Keeley, J.A. (1968). Criteria for innovations. Educational Leadership, 25,
304-307. #(8)

Keenan, E.O. (1974). Conversational competence in children. Journal of Child
Language, 1, 163-183. #(30)

Keith, K.D., & Lange, B.M. (1974). Maintenance of behavior change in an
institution wide training program. Mental Retardation, 12(2), 33-38. #(3),
#(31), #(45)

Kelleher, R.T. (1966). Chaining and conditioned reinforcement. In W.K. Honig
(Ed.), Operant behavior: Areas of research and application (pp. 161-212). New
York: Appleton-Century-Crofts. #(38), #(3)

Kelleher, P. (1985). Inducing incompetent teachers to resign. Phi Delta
Kappan, 66, 362-364. #(42)

Keller, F.S. (1968)." Goodbye teacher...". Journal of Applied Behavior
Analysis, 1, 79-89. #(3)

Keller, F.S., & Schoenfeld, W.N. (1950). Principles of psychology. New York:
Appleton-Century-Crofts. #(3), #(34)

Kelman, H.C. (1967). Human use of human subjects: The problem of deception in
social psychological experiments. Psychological Bulletin, 67, 1-11. #(29)

Kempthorne, O. (1955). The randomization theory of statistical inference.
Journal of American Statistical Association, 50, 946-967. #(22)

Kendall, W. (1978). Public Law 94-142: Implications for the classroom
teacher. Peabody Journal of Education, 55, 226-230. #(10)

Kendler, T. (1979). Development of discrimination learning: A levels-of-
functioning explanation. In H. Reese (Ed.), Advances in child development and
behavior. (Vol. 13, pp. 83-117). New York: Academic Press. #(6)

Keniston, A.H., & Flavell, J.H. (1979). A developmental study of intelligent
retrieval. Child Development, 58, 1144-1152. #(25), #(11)

Kennedy, C.H. (1992). Trends in the measurement of social validity. The Be-
havior Analyst, 15, 147-156. #(27)

Kennedy, M.M. (1979). Generalizing from single case studies. Evaluation
Quarterly, 4, 661-678. #(3), #(7), #(48)

Kenny, D.A. (1979). Correlation and causality. New York: John Wiley. #(34),
#(29)

Kent, L.R. (1974). Language acquisition program for the severely retarded or
multiply impaired. Champaign, IL: Research Press. #(30), #(21), #(34), #(44)

Kent, L.R., Klein, D., Falk, A., & Guenther, H. (1972). A language acquisi-
tion program for the retarded. In J.E. McLean, D.E. Yoder, & R.L. Schiefelb-
usch (Eds.), Language intervention with the retarded (pp. 151-190).
Baltimore: University Park Press. #(38), #(30)

Kent, R.N., Kanowitz, J., O'Leary, K.D., & Cheiken, M. (1977). Observer
reliability as a function of circumstances of assessment. Journal of Applied
Behavior Analysis, 10, 317-324. #(29)

Kent-Udolf, L., & Sherman, E.R. (1983). Shop talk. Champaign, IL: Research
Press. #(30), #(34), #(27), #(33)

Kephart, N.C. (1967). Perceptual-motor aspects of learning disabilities. In
E. Frierson & W. Barbe (Eds.), Educating children with learning disabilities
(pp. 405-413). New York: Appleton-Century-Crofts. #(12), #(28), #(38)

Kephart, N.C. (1971). The slow learner in the classroom (2nd ed.). Columbus,
OH: Charles E. Merrill. #(12), #(34)

Kephart, N.C. (1971). The perceptual process. In N.C. Kephart, The slow
learner in the classroom (2nd ed.). Columbus, OH: Charles E. Merrill. #(12),
#(38)

Kerlinger, F.N. (1979). Behavioral research: A conceptual approach. New York:
Holt, Rinehart and Winston. #(29), #(34)

Kerlinger, F.N. (1982). The future of educational research: Part II.
Educational Researcher, 11(9), 12-13. #(29) 

Kerlinger, F.N. (1986). Foundations of behavioral research (3rd ed.). New
York: Holt, Rinehart and Winston. #(29), #(34)

Kidd, J.W. (1967). A job readiness evaluation test. Exceptional Children, 33,
581-585. #(29), #(33)

Kidd, R.V., & Natalicio, L. (1982). An interbehavioral approach to operant
analysis. The Psychological Record, 32, 41-59. #(3)

Kiernan, C. (1983). The use of nonvocal communication techniques with
autistic individuals. Journal of Child Psychology and Psychiatry, 24,
339-375. #(30), #(2)

Kiernan, C., Jordan, R., & Saunders, C. (1984). Stimulating the exceptional
child. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall. #(12), #(34)

Kiernan, W.E., & Stark, J.A. (Eds.). (1986). Pathways to employment for
adults with developmental disabilities. Baltimore: Paul H. Brookes. #(27),
#(34)

Kierniesky, N.C., & Sobus, M. (1989). The Naturalistic Fallacy: Moral
inferences drawn from research with children versus adults. Psychological
Reports, 65, 475-479. #(43), #(29)

Kihlstrom, J.F. (1984). A fact is a fact is a fact. Behavioral and Brain
Sciences, 7, 243-244. #(29)

Killeen, P. (1972). The matching law. Journal of the Experimental Analysis of
Behavior, 17, 489-495. #(3), #(14), #(6)

Killeen, P., Wald, B., & Cheney, C.D. (1980). Observing behavior and
information. The Psychological Record, 30, 131-190. #(3)

Kim, J.O., & Mueller, C.W. (1986). Factor analysis: Statistical methods and
practical issues. London: Sage. #(34), #(22)

Kinder, D., & Carmine, D. (1991). Direct instruction: What it is and what it
is becoming. Journal of Behavioral Education, 1, 193-214. #(3), #(9)

King, J., & Alloway, N. (1993). Young children's use of microcomputer input 
devices. Computers in the schools, 9(4), 39-53. #(16), #(5), #(15)


Kinkade, K. (1973). A Walden two experiment, New York: Dutton. #(3), #(34)

Kinsbourne, M., & Hicks, R.E. (1978). Functional cerebral space: A model for
overflow, transfer and interference effects in human performance. In J.
Requin (Ed.), Attention and performance (Vol. VII, pp. 345-362). New York:
Academic Press. #(38), #(11), #(7)

Kinsbourne, M., & Caplan, P.J. (1979). Children's learning and attention
problems. Boston: Little, Brown, & Co. #(1), #(34)

Kintsch, W. (1980). Semantic memory: A tutorial. In R.S. Nickerson (Ed.),
Attention and performance VIII (pp. 595-620). Hillsdale, NJ: lawrence
Erlbaum. #(38), #(11)

Kintsch, W., & van Dijk, T.A. (1978). Toward a model of text comprehension
and production. Psychological Review, 85, 363-394. #(17), #(30)

Kirby, F.D., & Toler, H.C. (1970). Modification of preschool isolate
behavior: A case study. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 3, 309-314.
#(3)

Kirk, J., & Miller, M. (1986). Reliability and validity in qualitative
research. Newbury Park, CA: Sage Publications. #(34), #(43), #(29)

Kirk, S.A. (1966). The diagnosis and remediation of psycholinguistic
disabilities. Urbana, IL: University of Illinois Press. #(34), #(12), #(30)

Kirk, S.A. (1972). Educating exceptional children (2nd ed.). Boston: Houghton
Mifflin. #(34), #(21)

Kirchner, D.M., & Klatzsky, R.L. (1985). Verbal rehearsal and memory in
language-disordered children. Journal of Speech and Hearing Research, 28,
556-565. #(30), #(17), #(11)

Kirchner, D.M., Pear, J.J., & Martin, G.L. (1971). Shock as a punishment in
a picturenaming task with retarded children. Journal of Applied Behavior
Analysis, 4, 227-233. #(45), #(14)

Kirk, S.A., & Gallagher, J.J. (1986). Educating exceptional children (5th
ed.). Boston: Houghton Mifflin. #(15), #(34)

Kirk, S.A., & Kirk, W.D. (1971). Psycholinguistic learning disabilities:
Diagnosis and remediation. Urbana, IL: University of Illinois Press. #(2),
#(30), #(29), #(28), #(44)

Kirk, S.A., McCarthy, J.J., & Kirk, W. (1968). Illinois Test of Psycholingui-
stic Abilities (Rev. ed.). Urbana, IL: University of Illinois Press. #(2),
#(30), #(29), #(44)

Kirp, D.L. (1968). The poor, the schools, and equal protection. Harvard
Educational Review, 38, 635-668. #(15), #(23), #(10), #(24)

Kirp, D.L. (1973). Schools as sorters: The constitutional and policy
implications of student classification. University of Pennsylvania Law
Review, 121, 705-797. #(10), #(39), #(23), #(40)

Kirp, D.L. (1974). Student classification, public policy, and the courts.
Harvard Educational Review, 44, 7-52. #(10)

Kirp, D.L. (1977). Law, politics, and equal educational opportunity: The
limits of judicial involvement. Harvard Educational Review, 47, 117-137.
#(10), #(24), #(23) 

Kirp, D.L., Buss, W., & Kuriloff, P. (1974). Legal reform of special
education: Empirical studies and procedural proposals. California Law Review,
62, 40-155. #(10), #(40)

Kirton, M.J. (1980). Adaptors and innovators in organizations. Human
Relations, 3, 213-234. #(42), #(8)

Kirsten, I. (1981). The Oakland picture dictionary. Wauconda, IL: Don
Johnston. #(44)

Kish, G.B. (1966). Studies of sensory reinforcement. In W.K. Honig (Ed.),
Operant behavior: Areas of research and application (pp. 109-159). New York:
Appleton-Century-Crofts. #(3), #(14), #(38)

Kissel, R.C., Whitman, T.L., & Reid, D.H. (1983). An institutional staff
training and selfmanagement program for developing multiple self-care skills
in severely/profoundly retarded individuals. Journal of Applied Behavior
Analysis, 16, 395-415. #(31), #(21)

Kissinger, E.M. (1981). A sequential curriculum for the severely and
profoundly mentally retarded/multihandicapped. Springfield, IL: Charles C
Thomas. #(5), #(34), #(45), #(21)

Klaber, M.M., & Butterfield, E.C. (1968). Stereotyped rocking--a measure of
institution and ward effectiveness. American Journal of Mental Deficiency,
73, 13-20. #(20)

Klatzky, R.L. (1980). Human memory: Structures and processes (2nd ed.). San
Francisco: W.H. Freeman. #(11), #(34)

Klatzky, R.L. (1980). The human information-processing system. In R.L.
Klatzky, Human memory: Structures and processes (2nd ed., pp. 6-26). San
Francisco: W.H. Freeman. #(11), #(38)

Klatzky, R.L. (1980). Pattern recognition and attention. In R.L. Klatzky,
Human memory: Structures and processes (2nd ed., pp. 45-86). San Francisco:
W.H. Freeman. #(1), #(6), #(38)

Klatzky, R.L. (1984). Armchair theorists have more fun. Behavioral and Brain
Sciences, 7, 244. #(11), #(35)

Klein, D. (1976). Some notes on the dynamics of resistance to change: The
defender role. In W.G. Bennis, K.D. Benne, R. Chin, & K.E. Corey (Eds.), The
planning of change (3rd ed., pp. 117-124). New York: Holt, Rinehart and
Winston. #(38), #(42) 

Klein, H.A. (1974). Behavior modification as therapeutic paradox. American
Journal of Orthopsychiatry, 44, 353-361. #(3)

Klein, N.K. (1978). Least restrictive alternative: An educational analysis.
Education and Training of the Mentally Retarded, 13, 102-114. #(27), #(39),
#(45)

Klein, N.K., & Safford, P.L. (1977). Application of Piaget's theory to the
study of thinking of the mentally retarded: A review of research. Journal of
Special Education, 11, 202-217. #(13), #(45), #(32)

Klein, R.D., Hapkiewicz, W.G., & Roden, A.H. (Eds.). (1973). Behavior
modification in educational settings. Springfield, IL: Charles C Thomas.
#(3), #(34)

Kleinberg, J., & Galligan, B. (1983). Effects of deinstitutionalization on
adaptive behavior of mentally retarded adults. American Journal of Mental
Deficiency, 88, 21-27. #(45)

Kleinert, H.L., Guitinan, S., & Sims, L. (1988). Selecting lower priced
items. Teaching Exceptional Children, 20(3), 18-21. #(27), #(33)

Kleinfield, S. (1977, December). The handicapped: Hidden no longer. The
Atlantic Monthly, pp. 86-96. #(10), #(21)

Klein-Konigsberg, E. (1984). Semantic integration and language learning
disabilities: From research to assessment and intervention. In G.P. Wallach
& K. G. Butler (Eds.), Language learning disabilities in school-age children
(pp. 251-270). Baltimore: Williams & Wilkins. #(30), #(38), #(29), #(28)

Klewe, L. (1993). Brief report: An empirical evaluation of spelling boards as
a means of communication for the multihandicapped. Journal of Autism and
Developmental Disorders, 23, 559-556. #(30)

Klier, J., & Harris, S.L. (1977). Self-stimulation and learning in autistic
children: Physical or functional incompatibility? Journal of Applied Behavior
Analysis, 10, 311. #(20), #(2)

Klima, E., & Bellugi, U. (1979). The signs of language. Cambridge, MA:
Harvard University Press. #(34), #(30)

Knapczyk, D.R., & Yoppi, J.O. (1975). Development of cooperative and
competitive play responses in developmentally disabled children. American
Journal of Mental Deficiency, 80, 245-255. #(21), #(27), #(45)

Knapp, M. (1980). Essentials of nonverbal communication. New York: Holt,
Rinehart & Winston. #(34), #(30)

Kobasigawa, A. (1977). Retrieval strategies in the development of memory. In
R.V. Kail & J.W. Hagen (Eds.), Perspectives on the development of memory and
cognition. Hillsdale, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum. #(38), #(11)

Kodera, T.L., & Rilling, M. (1976). Procedural antecedents of behavioral
contrast: A reexamination of errorless learning. Journal of the Experimental
Analysis of Behavior, 25, 26-42. #(3)

Koegel, R.L. (1981). How to integrate autistic and other severely handicapped
children into a classroom. Lawrence, KS: H & H Enterprises. #(21), #(27),
#(2), #(34)

Koegel, R.L., & Covert, A. (1972). The relationship of self-stimulation to
learning in autistic children. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 5,
381-387. #(20), #(2)

Koegel, R.L., Dunlap, G., & Dyer, K. (1980). Intertrial interval duration and
learning in autistic children. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 13,
91-99. #(3), #(15), #(2)

Koegel, R.L., Dyer, K., & Bell, L.K. (1986). The influence of child-preferred
activities on autistic children's social behavior. Journal of Applied
Behavior Analysis, 20, 243-252. #(3), #(2), #(37)

Koegel, R.L., & Egel, A.L. (1979). Motivating autistic children. Journal of
Abnormal Psychology, 88, 418-426. #(3), #(2)

Koegel, R.L., Egel, A.L., & Dunlap, G. (1980). Learning characteristics of
autistic children. In W. Sailor, B. Wilcox, & L. Brown (Eds.), Methods of
instruction for severely handicapped students (pp. 259-301). Baltimore: Paul
H. Brookes. #(21), #(2), #(34)

Koegel, R.L., Egel, A.L., & Williams, J.A. (1980). Behavioral contrast and
generalization across settings in the treatment of autistic children. Journal
of Experimental Child Psychology, 30, 422-437. #(3), #(2), #(7)

Koegel, R.L., Firestone, P.B., Kramme, K.W., & Dunlap, G. (1974). Increasing
spontaneous play by suppressing self-stimulation in autistic children.
Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 7, 521-528. #(20), #(2)

Koegel, R.L., Glahn, T.J., & Nieminen, G.S. (1978). Generalization of parent-
training results. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 11, 95-109. #(3),
#(7)

Koegel, R.L., & Johnson, J. (1987). Maintaining performance of autistic
clients in community settings with delayed contingencies. Journal of Applied
Behavior Analysis, 20, 185-191. #(3), #(2)

Koegel, R.L., & Johnson, J. (1989). Motivating language use in autistic
children. In G. Dawson (Ed.), Autism: Nature, diagnosis, and treatment (pp.
310-325). New York: Guilford Press. #(38), #(2), #(30)

Koegel, R.L., Koegel, L.K., & Surratt, A. (1992). Language intervention and
disruptive behavior in preschool children with autism. Journal of Autism and
Developmental Disorders, 22, 141-153. #(2), #(30), #(4)

Koegel, R.L., & Lovaas, O.I. (1978). Comments on autism and stimulus
overselectivity. Journal of Abnormal Psychology, 87, 563-565. #(6), #(2)

Koegel, R.L., & Mentis, M. (1985). Motivation in childhood autism: Can they
or won't they? The Journal of Child Psychology and Psychiatry and Allied
Disciplines, 26, 185-191. #(2), #(3)

Koegel, R.L., O'Dell, M.C., & Koegel, L.K. (1987). A natural language
teaching paradigm for nonverbal autistic children. Journal of Autism and
Developmental Disorders, 17, 187-200. #(2), #(30)

Koegel, R.L., & Rincover, A. (1974). Treatment of psychotic children in a
classroom environment: I. Learning in a large group. Journal of Applied
Behavior Analysis, 7, 45-59. #(3), #(15), #(21)

Koegel, R.L., & Rincover, A. (1976). Some detrimental effects of using extra
stimuli to guide responding in autistic and normal children. Journal of
Abnormal Child Psychology, 4, 59-71. #(6), #(2)

Koegel, R.L., & Rincover, A. (1977). Research on the difference between
generalization and maintenance in extra-therapy responding. Journal of
Applied Behavior Analysis, 10, 1-12. #(3), #(7)

Koegel, R.L., Rincover, A., & Egel, A.L. (Eds.). (1982). Educating and
understanding autistic children. San Diego, CA: College-Hill Press. #(21),
#(2), #(34)

Koegel, R.L., Russo, D., & Rincover, A. (1977). Assessing and training
teachers in the generalized use of behavior modification with autistic
children. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 10, 197-205. #(21), #(2),
#(7)

Koegel, R.L., & Russo, D.C., Rincover, A., & Schreibman, L. (1982). Assessing
and training teachers. In R.L. Koegel, A. Rincover, & A.L. Egel (Eds.),
Educating and understanding autistic children (pp. 178-202). San Diego:
College-Hill Press. #(21), #(38), #(2)

Koegel, R.L., & Schreibman, L. (1974). The role of stimulus variables in
teaching autistic children. In O.I. Lovaas & B.D. Bucher (Eds.), Perspectives
in behavior modification with deviant children (pp. 537-546). Englewood
Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall. #(6), #(2), #(38)

Koegel, R.L., & Schreibman, L. (1976). Identification of consistent
responding to auditory stimuli by a functionally "deaf" autistic child.
Journal of Autism and Childhood Schizophrenia, 6, 147-156. #(3), #(21), #(2)

Koegel, R.L., & Schreibman, L. (1977). Teaching autistic children to respond
to simultaneous multiple cues. Journal of Experimental Child Psychology, 24,
299-311. #(6), #(2)

Koegel, R.L., & Schreibman, L. (1981). How to teach autistic and other
severely handicapped children. Lawrence, KS: H & H Enterprises. #(21), #(2),
#(34)

Koegel, R.L., Schreibman, L., Britten, K., & Laitinen, R. (1979). The effects
of schedule of reinforcement on stimulus overselectivity in autistic
children. Journal of Autism and Developmental Disorders, 9, 383-397. #(6),
#(2), #(14)

Koegel, R.L., & Wilhelm, H. (1973). Selective responding to the components of
multiple visual cues by autistic children. Journal of Experimental Child
Psychology, 15, 442-453. #(6), #(2), #(1)

Koerner, J.D. (1963). The miseducation of American teachers. Boston: Houghton
Mifflin. #(34), #(15), #(42)

Koerner, J.D. (Ed.). (1981). The new liberal arts. New York: Alfred P. Sloan
Foundation. #(15), #(34)

Kohl, F.L. (1981). Effects of motoric requirements on the acquisition of
manual sign responses by severely handicapped students. American Journal of
Mental Deficiency, 85, 396-403. #(30), #(21)

Kohl, H. (1970). The open classroom. New York: Vintage Books. #(34), #(15)

Kohl, H. (1982). Basic skills. Boston: Little, Brown & Co. #(34), #(33)

Kohlberg, L., & Mayer, R. (1972). Development as the aim of education.
Harvard Educational Review, 42, 449-496. #(25), #(35), #(13)

Kohlenberg, R.J. (1970). The punishment of persistent vomiting: A case study.
Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 3, 241-245. #(3), #(21), #(14)

Kohler, F.W., & Fowler, S.A. (1985). Training prosocial behaviors to young
children: An analysis of reciprocity with untrained peers. Journal of Applied
Behavior Analysis, 18, 187-200. #(3), #(37)

Kohler, F.W., & Greenwood, C.R. (1990). Effects of collateral peer supportive
behaviors within the classwide peer tutoring program. Journal of Applied
Behavior Analysis, 23, 307-322. #(36)

Kohn, A. (1992). No contest: The case against competition (rev. ed.). Boston: 
Houghton Mifflin. #(35), #(47)

Kolers, P.A. (1976). Reading a year later. Journal of Experimental Psycholo-
gy: Human Learning and Memory, 2, 554-565. #(17)

Kolko, D.J. (1985). Juvenile firesetting: A review and critique. Clinical
Psychology Review, 5, 345-376. #(48), #(4), #(32)

Kolko, D.J. (1989). Fire setting and pyromania. In C.G. Last & M. Hersen
(Eds.), Handbook of child psychiatric diagnosis (pp. 443-459). New York: John
Wiley. #(38), #(4)

Kolko, D.J., Anderson, L., & Campbell, M. (1980). Sensory preference and
overselective responding in autistic children. Journal of Autism and
Developmental Disabilities, 10, 259-271. #(6), #(2)

Kolko, D.J., & Kazdin, A.E. (1986). A conceptualization of firesetting in
children and adolescents. Journal of Abnormal Child Psychology, 14, 49-62.
#(4)

Kolko, D.J., & Kazdin, A.E. (1989). Assessment of dimensions of childhood
firesetting among patients and nonpatients: The Firesetting Risk Interview.
Journal of Abnormal Child Psychology, 17, 157-176. #(4)

Kolko, D.J., & Kazdin, A.E. (1991). Motives of childhood firesetters:
Firesetting characteristics and psychological correlates. Journal of
Consulting and Clinical Psychology, 32, 535-550. #(4)

Konarski, E.A., & Diorio, M.S. (1985). A quantative review of self-help
research with the severely and profoundly mentally retarded. Applied Research
in Mental Retardation, 6, 229-245. #(45), #(18), #(32)

Konstantareas, M.M. (1987). Sign language as a communication prosthesis with
language-impaired children. Journal of Autism and Developmental Disorders,
14,
9-23. #(30)

Konstantareas, M.M., Oxman, J., & Webster, C.D. (1977). Simultaneous
communication with autistic and other severely dysfunctional children.
Journal of Communicative Disorders, 10, 267-282. #(23), #(30), #(21)

Konstantareas, M.M., Oxman, J., & Webster, C.D. (1978). Iconicity: Effects on
the acquisition of sign language by autistic and other severely dysfunctional
children. In P. Siple (Ed.), Understanding language through sign language
research (pp. 213-237). New York: Academic Press. #(38), #(30)

Koop, C.B. (1982). Antecedents of self-regulation: A developmental perspec-
tive. Developmental Psychology, 18, 199-214. #(25), #(18)

Koop, S., Martin, G., Yu, D., & Suthons, E. (1980). Comparison of two
reinforcement strategies in vocational-skill training of mentally retarded
persons. American Journal of Mental Deficiency, 84, 616-626. #(45), #(33),
#(14)

Kopchick, G.A., & Lloyd, L.L. (1976). Total communication programming for the
severely language impaired: A 24-hour approach. In L.L. Lloyd (Ed.),
Communication assessment and intervention strategies (pp. 501-521).
Baltimore: University Park Press. #(30), #(21), #(38), #(29)

Kopp, C.B., O'Connor, M.J., & Finger, I. (1975). Task characteristics and a
stage 6 sensorimotor problem. Child Development, 46, 569-573. #(13)

Kopp, C.B., Sigman, M., & Parmalee, A.H. (1974). Longitudinal study of
sensorimotor development. Developmental Psychology, 10, 687-695. #(12), #(13)

Kopp, J. (1988). Self-monitoring: A literature review of research and
practice. Social Work Research and Abstracts, 24, 8-20. #(18), #(32)

Kosecoff, J., & Fink, A. (1982). Evaluation basics: A practitioner's manual.
Beverly Hills, CA: Sage Publications. #(29), #(34)

Kounin, J.S., & Gump, P.V. (1958). The ripple effect in discipline.
Elementary School Journal, 59, 158-162. #(3), #(14)

Kovattana, P.M., & Kraemer, H.C. (1974). Response to multiple visual cues of
color, size, and form by autistic children. Journal of Autism and Childhood
Schizophrenia, 4, 251-261. #(6), #(2)

Kozloff, M.A. (1973). Reaching the autistic child: A parent training program.
Champaign, IL: Research Press. #(21), #(2), #(34)

Kozloff, M.A. (1973). Autism: Theories, therapies, and new directions. In
M.A. Kozloff (Ed.), Reaching the autistic child: A parent training program
(pp. 1-26). Champaign, IL: Research Press. #(21), #(2), #(38)

Kozloff, M.A. (1974). Educating children with learning and behavior problems.
New York: Wiley. #(21), #(34)

Kozloff, M.A. (1979). Unit one: The behavioral-educational approach. In M.A.
Kozloff, A program for families of children with learning and behavior
problems (pp. 141-165). New York: John Wiley. #(3), #(38)

Kozloff, M.A. (1984). A training program for families of children with
autism: Responding to family needs. In E. Schopler & G. Mesibov (Eds.), The
effects of autism on the family (pp. 163-186). New York: Plenum Press. #(38),
#(2)

Krasner, L. (1962). The therapist as a social reinforcement machine. In H.H.
Strupp & L. Luborsky (Eds.), Research in Psychotherapy (Vol. II). New York:
Holt, Rinehart and Winston. #(38), #(3)

Krasner, L. (1964). Behavior control and social responsibility. American
Psychologist, 17, 199-204. #(3)

Krasner, L. (1970). Behavior modification, token economies, and training. In
C. Neuringer & J.L. Michael (Eds.), Behavior modification in clinical
psychology (pp. 86-104). New York: Appleton-Century-Crofts. #(38), #(3)

Krathwohl, D.R. (1965). Stating objectives appropriately for program, for
Curriculum, and for instructional materials development. Journal of Teacher
Education, 16(1), 83-92. #(5), #(9)

Kratochwill, T.R., & Wetzel, R.J. (1977). Observer agreement, credibility,
and judgment: Some considerations in presenting observer agreement data.
Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 10, 133-139. #(29)

Kratochwill, T.R., Alden, K., Demuth, D., Dawson, D., Panicucci, C., Arntson,
P., McMurray, N., Hempstead, J., & Levin, J. (1974). A further consideration
in the application of an analysis-of-variance model for the intrasubject
replication design. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 7, 629-633. #(29),
#(43), #(22), #(48)

Krauss, R.M., & Glucksberg, S. (1969). The development of communication:
Competence as a function of age. Child Development, 40, 255-266. #(30), #(25)

Kregel, J., Wehman, P., & Banks, P.D. (1989). The effects of consumer
characteristics and type of employment model on individual outcomes in
supported employment. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 22, 407-415.
#(33)

Kroll, N.E. (1975). Visual short-term memory. In D. Deutsch & J.A. Deutsch 
(Eds.), Short-term memory (pp. 153-179). New York: Academic Press. #(38), 
#(11)

Krug, D.A., Arick, J.R., & Almond, P.J. (1979). Autism screening instrument
for educational planning: Background and development. Portland, OR: ASIEP
Educational Company. #(29), #(2), #(34), #(44)

Krug, D.A., Arick, J.R., & Almond, P.J. (1980). Behavior checklist for
identifying severely handicapped individuals with high levels of autistic
behavior. Journal of Child Psychology and Psychiatry, 21, 221-229. #(29),
#(2), #(21)

Krug, D.A., Arick, J.R., Scanlon, C., Almond, P., Rosenbloom, J., & Border,
M. (1979). Evaluation of a program of systematic instructional procedures for
preverbal autistic children. Improving Human Performance Quarterly, 8(1),
29-41. #(29), #(2)

Kruglanski, A. W., Riter, A., Amitai, A., Margolin, B., Shabtai, L., & Zaksh,
D. (1975). Can money enhance intrinsic motivation? A test of the content-
consequence hypothesis. Journal of Personality and Social Psychology, 31,
744-750. #(14)

Krugman, H.E. (1975). What makes advertising effective? Harvard Business
Review, 53, 96103. #(15)

Krumboltz, J.D., & Krumboltz, H.B. (1972). Changing children's behavior.
Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall. #(3), #(34)

Krupski, A. (1979). Are retarded children more distractible? Observational
analysis of retarded and nonretarded children's classroom behavior. American
Journal of Mental Deficiency, 84, 1-10. #(3)

Krupski, A. (1980). Attention processes: Research, theory, and implications
for special education. In B.K. Keogh (Ed.), Advances in special education
(Vol. 1, pp. 101-140). Greenwich, CT: JAI Press. #(1), #(38)

Krupski, A., & Boyle, P.R. (1978). An observational analysis of children's
behavior during a simple reaction-time task: The role of attention. Child
Development, 49, 340-347. #(1)

Krustchinsky, R., & Larner, N. (1988). It's about time. Teaching Exceptional
Children, 20(3), 40-41. #(18), #(33)

Kubler-Ross, E. (1969). On death and dying. New York: Macmillan. #(34), #(25)

Kugelmass, I.N. (1970). The autistic child. Springfield, IL: Charles C
Thomas. #(21), #(2), #(34)

Kuhn, D. (1979). The application of Piaget's theory of cognitive development
to education. Harvard Educational Review, 49, 340-360. #(13)

Kuhn, D. (1992). Thinking as argument. Harvard Educational Review, 62,
155-178. #(35)

Kuhn, T.S. (1970). The structure of scientific revolutions (2nd ed.).
Chicago: University of Chicago Press. #(34), #(43)

Kuhn, T.S. (1963). The function of dogma in scientific research. In A.C.
Crombie (Ed.), Scientific change (pp. 347-369). New York: Basic Books. #(43)

Kulik. J.A., Bangert, R.L., & Williams, G.W. (1983). Effects of computer-
based teaching on secondary school students. Journal of Educational
Psychology, 75, 19-26. #(16) 

Kulik, J.A., Kulik, C.C., & Bangert-Drowns, R.L. (1985). Effectiveness of
computer-based education in elementary schools. Computers in Human Behavior,
1, 59-74. #(16)

Kulik, J.A. (1983). Synthesis of research on computer-based instruction.
Educational Leadership, 41(1), 19-21. #(16)

Kuriloff, P., True, R., Kirp, D., & Buss, W. (1974). Legal reform and
educational change: The Pennsylvania case. Exceptional Children, 41, 35-42.
#(10)

Kurtz, P.D., Neisworth, J.T., Goecke, K., & Hanson, M. (1976). Training
verbal-nonverbal correspondence. Journal of Applied Social Psychology, 6,
314-321. #(3), #(37), #(33)

Kuypers, D.S., Becker, W.C., & O'Leary, K.D. (1968). How to make a token
system fail. Exceptional Children, 35, 101-109. #(3), #(14)

LaGrow, S.J., & Repp, A.C. (1984). Stereotypic responding: A review of
intervention research. American Journal of Mental Deficiency, 88, 595-609.
#(20), #(45), #(21), #(32), #(14)

Lahey, B.B., & Kazdin, A.E. (Eds.). (1987). Advances in clinical child
psychology (Vol. 10). New York: Plenum Press. #(34), #(25)

Lahey, M. (1990). Who shall be called language disordered? Some reflections
and one perspective. Journal of Speech and Hearing Research, 55, 612-620.
#(30)

Lake, A., Rainey, J., & Papsdorf, J.D. (1979). Biofeedback and rational-
emotive therapy in the management of migraine headache. Journal of Applied
Behavior Analysis, 12, 127-140. #(3), #(18)

Lakin, K.C., & Bruininks, R.H. (Eds.). (1985). Strategies for achieving
community integration of developmentally disabled citizens. Baltimore: Paul
H. Brookes. #(34), #(16), #(45), #(27)

Lakoff, R. (1972). Language in context. Language, 48, 907-927. #(30)

Lally, M. (1981). Computer-assisted teaching of sight-word recognition for
mentally retarded school children. American Journal of Mental Deficiency, 85,
383-388. #(16), #(45) 

Lally, M. (1983). Computer-assisted handwriting instruction and visual/
kinaesthetic feedback processes. Applied Research in Mental Retardation,
3, 397-405. #(16) 

Lamb, J., & Burrello, L.C. (1979). The role of council of administrators of
special education. Exceptional Children, 46, 42-48. #(42)

Lamb, M. (1982). The bonding phenomenon: Misinterpretations and their
implications. Journal of Pediatrics, 101, 555-557. #(25), #(14)

Lambert, J.C. (1975). Extinction by retarded children following discrimina-
tion learning with and without errors. American Journal of Mental Deficiency,
80, 286-291. #(1)

Lambert, M.E., Intrieri, R.C., & Hollandsworth. (1986). Development of a
computerized reference retrieval system: A behavior therapy training tool.
Journal of Behavior Therapy and Experimental Psychiatry, 17, 167-169. #(16)

Lambert, N.M. (1981). Psychological evidence in Larry P. v. Wilson Riles: An
education by a witness for the defense. American Psychologist, 36, 937-952.
#(10)

Lambert, N.M. (1988). Perspectives on eligibility for and placement in
special education programs. Exceptional Children, 54, 297-301. #(21), #(27)

Lampner, C. (1979). Special education teacher training: A cumulative
development model. Education and Training of the Mentally Retarded, 14,
204-210. #(42)

Lance, W.D. (1976). Who are all the children? Exceptional Children, 43,
66-76. #(21)

Lancioni, G.E. (1982). Normal children as tutors to teach social responses to
withdrawn mentally retarded schoolmates: Training, maintenance, and
generalization. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 15, 17-40. #(37),
#(36), #(7)

Lancioni, G.E., & Smeets, P.M. (1986). Procedures and parameters of errorless
discrimination training with developmentally impaired individuals. In N.R.
Ellis & N.W. Bray (Eds.), International review of research in mental
retardation (Vol. 14, pp. 135-164). New York: Academic Press. #(3), #(38),
#(6)

Landau, S., & Moore, L.A. (1991). Social skill deficits in children with
attention-deficit hyperactivity disorder. School Psychology Review, 20,
235-251. #(1), #(37)

Landesman-Dwyer, S. (1981). Living in the community. American Journal of
Mental Deficiency, 86, 223-234. #(27)

Lane, D.M. (1979). Developmental changes in attention-deployment skills.
Journal of Experimental Child Psychology, 28, 16-29. #(1)

Larry P. v. Riles (1972). C-71-2270 (RFP, District Court for Northern
California). #(10)

Larson, L., Goodman, L., & Glean, R. (1981). Issues in the implementation of
extended school year programs for handicapped students. Exceptional Children,
47, 256-263. #(8), #(15)

Larson, T. (1971). Communication for the nonverbal child. Academic Therapy,
6, 305-312. #(30)

Larson, V., & Steiner, S. (1985). Language intervention using microcomputers.
Topics in Language Disorders, 6(1), 41-55. #(30), #(16)

Lashley, K.S. (1938). Conditional reactions in the rat. Journal of Psycholo-
gy, 6, 311-324. #(6)

Laski, F.J. (1985). Judicial address of education for students with severe
mental retardation: From access to schools to state-of-the-art. In D. Bricker
& J. Filler (Eds.), Severe mental retardation: From theory to practice (pp.
36-48). Lancaster, PA: Lancaster Press. #(10), #(38), #(21), #(45)

Laski, F.J. (1985). Right to habilitation and right to education: The legal
foundation. In R. H. Bruininks & K.C. Lakin (Eds.), Living and learning in
the least restrictive environment (pp. 67-79). Baltimore: Paul H. Brookes.
#(38), #(10)

Laties, V.G., & Mace, F.C. (1993). Taking stock: The first 25 years of the
Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis,
26, 513-525. #(3)

Lavatelli, C.S. (1973). Piaget's theory applied to an early childhood
curriculum. Boston: Center for Media Development. #(13), #(34), #(5) 

LaVigna, G.W., & Donnellan, A.M. (1986). Alternatives to punishment: Solving
behavior problems with non-aversive strategies. New York: Irvington Press.
#(3), #(21), #(14), #(34)

LaVor, M.L. (1976). Federal legislation for exceptional persons: A history.
In F.J. Weintraub, A. Abeson, J. Ballard, & M.L. LaVor (Eds.), Public policy
and the education of exceptional children (pp. 96-111). Reston, VA: Council
for Exceptional Children. #(10), #(38)

LaVor, M.L. (1976). You want to change the system--but where do you begin? In
F.J. Weintraub, A. Abeson, J. Ballard, & M.L. LaVor (Eds.), Public policy and
the education of exceptional children (pp. 261-277). Reston, VA: Council for
Exceptional Children. #(42), #(38)

LaVor, M.L. (1977). Federal legislation for exceptional persons: Implications
and a view of the future. In R.D. Kneedles & S.R. Tarver (Eds.), Changing
perspectives in special education (pp. 245-270). Columbus, Ohio: Charles E.
Merrill. #(10), #(38)

Lawler, E.E. (1977). Adaptive experiments: An approach to organizational
behavior research. Academy of Management Review, 2, 576-585. #(43), #(42)

Lawman, E., & Klinger, J. (1969). Eating devices. In E. Lawman & J. Klinger,
Aids to independent living: Self-Help for the handicapped. New York: McGraw-
Hill. #(18), #(21), #(38)

Lawrence, D.H. (1949). Acquired distinctiveness of cues: I. Transfer between
discriminations on the basis of familiarity with the stimulus. Journal of
Experimental Psychology, 39, 770-784. #(1), #(6)

Lawrence, D.H. (1950). Acquired distinctiveness of cues: II. Selective
association in a constant stimulus situation. Journal of Experimental
Psychology, 40, 175-188. #(1), #(6)

Lawrence, D.H. (1952). The transfer of a discrimination along a continuum.
Journal of Comparative and Physiological Psychology, 45, 511-516. #(6)

Lawrence, D.H. (1955). The applicability of generalization gradients to the
transfer of a discrimination. Journal of General Psychology, 52, 37-48. #(6),
#(7)

Lawrence, D.H. (1963). The nature of a stimulus: Some relationships between
learning and perception. In S. Koch (Ed.), Psychology: A study of a science
(Vol. 4, pp. 179-212). New York: McGraw-Hill. #(38), #(6), #(12)

Lawrence, E.A. (1975). Locus of control: Implications for special education.
Exceptional Children, 41, 483-490. #(3), #(18)

Lax, B., & Foley, K.E. (1977). A lawsuit re: legal rights. Mental Retarda-
tion, 15(3), 3-9. #(10)

Lazar, R.M. (1977). Extending sequence-class membership with matching-to-
sample. Journal of the Experimental Analysis of Behavior, 27, 381-392. #(6),
#(7) 

Lazar, R.M., Davis-Lang, D., & Sanchez, L. (1984). The formation of visual
stimulus equivalences in children. Journal of the Experimental Analysis of
Behavior, 41, 251-266. #(6), #(12)

Lazarus, A.A. (1971). Behavior therapy and beyond. New York: McGraw-Hill.
#(3), #(34)

Lazarus, P.J., & Strichart, S.S. (Eds.). (1986). Psychoeducational evaluation
of children and adolescents with low-incidence handicaps. New York: Grune &
Stratton. #(34), #(21), #(29)

Leahey, T.H. (1987). A history of psychology: Main currents in psychological
thought. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall. #(34), #(25)

Leasak, J., Hunt, D., & Randhawa, B.S. (1982). Cognitive processing,
intervention, and achievement. The Alberta Journal of Educational Research,
28, 257-266. #(11)

LeBlanc, J.M., Hoko, J.A., Aangeenbrug, M.H., & Etzel, B.C. (1985).
Microcomputers and stimulus control: From the laboratory to the classroom.
Journal of Special Education technology, 7(1), 23-30. #(16), #(6) 

Lecarme, O., & Lewis, R. (Eds.). (1975). Computers in education. New York:
New Holland. #(16), #(34)

LeCompte, M.D., & Goetz, J.P. (1982). Ethnographic data collection in
evaluation research. Educational Evaluation and Policy Analysis, 4, 387-400.
#(29)

Lee, L.L. (1969). Northwestern Syntax Screening Test. Evanston, IL:
Northwestern University Press. #(2), #(30), #(29)

Lee, S.W. (1991). Biofeedback as a treatment for childhood hyperactivity: A
critical review of the literature. Psychological Reports, 68, 163-192. #(3),
#(4), #(32)

Lefcourt, H.M. (1966). Internal versus external control of reinforcement: A
review. Psychological Bulletin, 65, 206-220. #(3), #(18), #(32)

Lefcourt, H.M. (1973). The function of the illusions of control and freedom.
American Psychologist, 28, 417-425. #(18)

Lefcourt, H.M. (1976). Locus of control. New York: John Wiley. #(34), #(25)

Lefcourt, H.M. (Ed.). (1983). Research with the locus of control construct:
Vol. 2. Development and social problems. New York: Academic Press. #(34),
#(25)

Leff, R. (1968). Behavior modification and the psychoses of childhood: A
review. Psychological Bulletin, 69, 396-409. #(3), #(32)

Lehr, E. (1990). Psychological management of traumatic brain injuries in
children and adolescents. Rockville, MD: Aspen Publications. #(34), #(21)

Lehrer, R., Harckman, L.D., Archer, P., & Pruzak, R.M. (1986). Microcomputer-
based instruction in special education. Journal of Educational Computing
Research, 2, 337-355. #(16), #(15) 

Leinhardt, G. (1976). Observation as a tool for the evaluation of implementa-
tion. Instructional Science, 5, 343-364. #(29), #(8)

Leinhardt, G. (1977). Program evaluation: An empirical study of individual-
ized instruction. American Educational Research Journal, 14, 277-293. #(29),
#(9)

Leinhardt, G. (1980). Modeling and measuring educational treatment in
evaluation. Review of Educational Research, 50, 393-420. #(26), #(5)

Leinhardt, G., & Pallay, A. (1982). Restrictive educational settings: Exile
or haven? Review of Educational Research, 52, 557-578. #(27)

Leitenberg, H. (1965). Is time-out from positive reinforcement an aversive
event? A review of the experimental evidence. Psychological Bulletin, 64,
428-441. #(3), #(32), #(14)

Leitenberg, H. (1973). The use of single-case methodology in psychotherapy
research. Journal of Abnormal Psychology, 82, 87-101. #(43), #(3), #(48)

Leithwood, K.A., & Montgomery, D.J. (1982). A framework for planned
educational change: Application to the assessment of program implementation.
Educational Evaluation and Policy Analysis, 4, 157-167. #(29), #(8)

LeMay, D., Griffin, P., & Sanford, A. (1977). Learning Accomplishment Profile
(LAP)--diagnostic edition. Chapel Hill, NC: Chapel Hill Training-Outreach
Project. #(44)

Lenneberg, E.H. (1967). Biological foundations of language. New York: John
Wiley. #(34), #(30)

Lenneberg, E. (1969). On explaining language. Science, 164, 635-643. #(30),
#(2), #(30)

Lent, J. (1974). How to do more with less: Teaching daily-living skills with
systematic instructional packages. Lawrence, KS: Project MORE. #(5), #(18),
#(9)

Lent, J. (1975). The severely retarded: Are we really programming for their
future? Focus on Exceptional Children, 7, 1-11. #(9), #(45)

Lent, J., & McLean, B.M. (1976). The trainable retarded: The technology of
teaching. In N.G. Haring & R.L. Schiefelbusch (Eds.), Teaching special
children (pp. 197-231). New York: McGraw-Hill. #(38), #(45), #(3)

Leon, G.R. (1976). Current directions in the treatment of obesity. Psycholog-
ical Bulletin, 83, 557-578. #(18), #(3)

Leonard-Batton, D., & Kraus, W.A. (1985). Implementing new technology. Harvard
Business Review, 6, 102-110. #(8)

Leonard, L. (1982). The nature of specific language impairment in children.
In S. Rosenberg (Ed.), Handbook of applied psycholinguistics: Major thrusts
of research and theory (pp. 295-328). Hillsdale, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum. #(38),
#(30)

Lepper, M.R. (1985). Microcomputers in education. American Psychologist, 40,
1-18. #(16) 

Lepper, M.R., Greene, D., & Nisbett, R.E. (1973). Undermining children's
intrinsic interest with extrinsic rewards: A test of the "overjustification"
hypothesis. Journal of Personality and Social Psychology, 28, 129-137. #(14)

Lerner, J., Mardell-Czudnowski, C., & Goldenberg, D. (1981). Special
education for the early childhood years. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall.
#(21), #(34)

Lerner, J., & Schuyler, J. (1974). Computer simulation: A method for training
education diagnosticians. Journal of Learning Disabilities, 7, 471-478. #(16)

Lerner, J.W. (1971). Sensory-motor and perceptual-motor development. In J.W.
Lerner, Children with learning disabilities: Theories, diagnosis, and
teaching strategies (pp. 90-116). Boston: Houghton Mifflin. #(12), #(38),
#(28)

Lerner, J.W. (1971). Perception and memory. In J.W. Lerner, Children with
learning disabilities: Theories, diagnosis, and teaching strategies (pp.
117-140). New York: Houghton Mifflin. #(11), #(12), #(38), #(28)

Lerner, J.W. (1973). Systems analysis and special education. Journal of
Special Education, 7, 15-26. #(29)

Lerner, J.W. (1985). Children with learning disabilities: Theories,
diagnosis, and teaching strategies (4th ed.). Boston: Houghton Mifflin.
#(28), #(34), #(12)

Lerner, J.W. (1985). Motor and perceptual development. In J.W. Lerner,
Children with learning disabilities: Theories, diagnosis, and teaching
strategies (4th ed., pp. 263-307). Boston: Houghton Mifflin. #(28), #(38),
#(12)

Leslie, A.M., & Frith, U. (1988). Autistic children's understanding of
seeing, knowing and believing. British Journal of Developmental Psychology,
6, 315-324. #(2), #(25)

Leslie, A.M., & Frith, U. (1990). Prospects for a cognitive neuropsychology
of autism: Hobson's choice. Psychological Review, 97, 122-131. #(2)

Lessinger, L. (1970). Every kid a winner: Accountability in education. New
York: Simon & Schuster. #(26), #(34)

Lester, D. (1972). Self-mutilating behavior. Psychological Bulletin, 78,
119-128. #(19)

Levenson, D., & Spillane, R.R. (1977). Malpractice insurance: Who needs it?
Teacher, 95(1), 95-98. #(10)

Levin, B. (1979). Teacher evaluation--A review of research. Educational
Leadership, 3, 240-245. #(29), #(32)

Levin, H.M. (1974). Measuring efficiency in educational production. Public
Finance Quarterly, 2, 3-24. #(42), #(47)

Levin, H.M. (1983). Cost-effectiveness: A primer. Newbury Park, CA: Sage
Publications. #(34), #(47)

Levine, F.M., & Fasnacht, G. (1974). Token rewards may lead to token
learning. American Psychologist, 29, 816-820. #(3), #(35)

Levine, M. (1967). The size of the hypothesis set during discrimination
learning. Psychological Review, 74, 428-430. #(29), #(43)

Levine, M. (1970). Human discrimination learning: The subset sampling
assumption. Psychological Bulletin, 74, 397-404. #(6)

Levine, M., & Elliot, C. (1970). Toilet training for profoundly retarded with
a limited staff. Mental Retardation, 8(3), 48-50. #(3), #(21), #(45)

Levine, M.N. (1982). Leiter International Performance Scale: A handbook. Los
Angeles: Western Psychological Services. #(44)

Levy, J. (1973). An intrinsic-extrinsic motivational framework for therapeu-
tic recreation. Therapeutic Recreation Journal, 5, 32-38. #(14)

Levy, S. (1992). Artificial life. New York: Pantheon. #(34), #(16)

Lewis, B., & Tagg, D. (1981). Computers in education. New York: Elsevier
North-Holland. #(16), #(34)

Lewis, M., & Rosenblum, L.A. (Eds.). (1975). Friendship and peer relations.
New York: John Wiley & Sons. #(34), #(37)

Lewis, M., & Wehren, A. (1982). The central tendency in study of the
handicapped child. In D. Bricker (Ed.), Intervention with at-risk and
handicapped infants: From research to application (pp. 77-89). Baltimore:
University Park Press. #(38), #(21)

Lewis, M.H., Baumeister, A.A., & Mailman, R.B. (1987). A neurobiological
alternative to the perceptual reinforcement hypothesis of stereotyped
behavior: A commentary on "Selfstimulatory behavior and perceptual reinforce-
ment". Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 20, 253-258. #(3), #(12), #(20)

Lewis, P.H. (1985, September 24). Fishing for gems of educational software in
a sea of junk. The New York Times, pp. C1, C7. #(16)

Lewis, R.B., & Doorlag, D.H. (1991). Teaching special students in the
mainstream (3rd ed.). Columbus, OH: Charles E. Merrill. #(34), #(39)

Lewis, V., & Boucher, J. (1988). Spontaneous, instructed and elicited play in
relatively able autistic children. British Journal of Developmental
Psychology, 6, 325-339. #(2), #(37)

Liberman, I.Y. (1982). A language-oriented view of reading and its disabili-
ties. In H.R. Myklebust (Ed.), Progress in learning disabilities (Vol. 5, pp.
81-101). New York: Grune & Stratton. #(38), #(28)

Liberty, K.A. (1985). Enhancing instruction for maintenance, generalization,
and adaptation. In K.C. Lakin & R.H. Bruininks (Eds.), Strategies for
achieving community integration of developmentally disabled citizens (pp.
29-71). Baltimore: Paul H. Brookes. #(38), #(7), #(27)

Lichstein, K.L., & Schreibman, L. (1976). Employing electric shock with
autistic children. Journal of Autism and Childhood Schizophrenia, 6, 163-174.
#(3), #(2), #(32)

Lichtenstein, E., & Danaher, B.G. (1976). Modification of smoking behavior:
A critical analysis of theory, research and practice. In M. Hersen, R.M.
Eisler, & P.M. Miller (Eds.), Progress in behavior modification (Vol. 3, pp.
141-192). New York: Academic Press. #(38), #(18), #(32)

Lichtenstein, P.E. (1971). A behavioral approach to "phenomenological data".
Psychological Record, 21, 1-16. #(3)

Lieber, J., & Semmel, M.I. (1985). Effectiveness of computer application to
instruction with mildly handicapped learners: A review. Remedial and Special
Education, 6(5), 5-12. #(16), #(32) 

Lieberman, A., & Miller, L. (Eds.). (1979). Staff development: New demands,
new realities, new perspectives. New York: Teachers College Press. #(42),
#(34)

Lieberman, M. (1956). Education as a profession. Englewood Cliffs, NJ:
Prentice-Hall. #(34), #(42)

Lieberman, P. (1975). The evolution of speech and language. In J.F. Kavanagh
& J.E. Cutting (Eds.), The role of speech in language (pp. 83-106).
Cambridge, MA: MIT Press. #(38), #(30)

Lieven, E.V.M. (1976). Turn-taking and pragmatics: Two issues in early child
language. In R.N. Campbell & P.T. Smith (Eds.), Recent advances in the
psychology of language (pp. 215-236). New York: Plenum Press. #(38), #(30),
#(37)

Light, J. (1988). Interaction involving individuals using augmentative and
alternative communication systems: State of the art and future directions.
Augmentative and Alternative Communication, 4, 66-82. #(30)

Light, J. (1989). Toward a definition of communicative competence for
individuals using augmentative and alternative communication systems.
Augmentative and Alternative Communication, 5, 137-144. #(30)

Light, J., Dattilo, J., English, J., Gutierrez, L., & Hartz, J. (1992).
Instructing facilitators to support the communication of people who use
augmentative communication systems. Journal of Speech and Hearing Research,
35, 865-875. #(30)

Light, R.J., & Smith, P.V. (1971). Accumulating evidence: Procedures for
resolving contradictions among different research studies. Harvard Education-
al Review, 41, 430-471. #(43)

Lilly, M.S. (1970). Special education: A teapot in a tempest. Exceptional
Children, 37, 43-49. #(15), #(35)

Lilly, M.S. (1971). A training based model for special education. Exceptional
Children, 37, 745-749. #(42)

Lilly, M.S. (1973). The impact (or lack of it) of educational research on
changes in educational practice. In L. Mann & D.A. Sabatino (Eds.), The first
review of special education (Vol. 2, pp. 203-227). #(42), #(38)

Lillywhite, H.S., & Bradley, D.P. (1969). Communication problems in mental
retardation: Diagnosis and management. New York: Harper & Row. #(30), #(21),
#(45), #(34)

Lin, N., Dean, A., & Ensel, W. (1986). Social support, life events, and
depression. New York: Academic Press. #(34), #(25), #(42), #(2)

Lindblom, C.E. (1959). The science of "muddling through". Public Administra-
tion Review, 19, 79-88. #(42)

Lindblom, C.E. (1964). Contexts for change and strategy: A reply. Public
Administration Review, 24, 157-160. #(42)

Lindblom, C.E. (1965). The intelligence of democracy. New York: Free Press.
#(35), #(34)

Lindfors, J.W. (1987). Children's language and learning (2nd ed.). Englewood
Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall. #(34), #(30)

Lindman, F.T., & McIntyre, J.M. (1961). The mentally disabled and the law.
Chicago: University of Chicago Press. #(34), #(10)

Lindsay, W.R., & Stoffelmayr, B.E. (1976). A comparison of the differential
effects of three different baseline conditions within an ABA 1 B 1 experimen-
tal design. Behaviour Research and Therapy, 14, 169-173. #(43), #(48)

Lindsay, P.H., Taylor, M.M., & Forbes, S.M. (1968). Attention and multi-
dimensional discrimination. Perception and Psychophysics, 4, 113-117. #(1),
#(6)

Lindsey (Ed.). (1987). Computers and exceptional individuals. Columbus, OH:
Charles E. Merrill. #(16), #(34)

Lindsey, J.D., & Beck, F.W. (1979). An integrative model for designing
instructional programming for trainable mentally retarded children. Education
and Training of the Mentally Retarded, 14, 211-216. #(9), #(45)

Lindsley, O.R. (1956). Operant conditioning methods applied to research in
chronic schizophrenics. Psychiatric Research Reports, 5, 118-139. #(3), #(43)

Lindsley, O.R. (1963). Experimental analysis of social reinforcement: Terms
and methods. American Journal of Orthopsychiatry, 33, 624-633. #(3), #(14)

Lindsley, O.R. (1964). Direct measurement and prosthesis of retarded
behavior. Journal of Education, 147, 62-81. #(3), #(29)

Lindsley, O.R. (1991). From technical jargon to plain English for applica-
tion. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 24, 449-458. #(3)

Lindsley, O.R. (1991). Precision teaching's unique legacy from B. F. Skinner.
Journal of Behavioral Education, 1, 253-266. #(3)

Lindsley, O.R. (1992). Why aren't effective teaching tools widely adopted?
Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 25, 21-26. #(9), #(16)

Lindsley, O.R. (1992). Precision teaching: Discoveries and effects. Journal
of Applied Behavior Analysis, 25, 51-57. #(3), #(9)

Linn, R.L. (1981). Measuring pretest-posttest performance changes. In R.A.
Berk (Ed.), Educational evaluation methodology: The state of the art (pp.
4-109). Baltimore: The Johns Hopkins University Press. #(29), #(38), #(32)

Linn, R.L. (1983). Testing and instruction: Links and distinctions. Journal
of Educational Measurement, 20, 179-189. #(29)

Linn, R.L. (1986). Educational testing and assessment: Research needs and
policy issues. American Psychologist, 41, 1153-1160. #(29, #(43), #(23)

Linscheid, T.R., & Landau, R.J. (1993). Going "all out" pharmacologically? A
re-examination of Berkman and Meyer's "Alternative strategies and multiple
outcomes in remediation of severe self-injury: Going 'all out' nonaversivel-
y". Mental Retardation, 31(1), 1-6. #(19), #(29), #(45)

Lipman, R. (1963). Learning: Verbal, perceptual-motor, and classical
conditioning. In N.R. Ellis (Ed.), Handbook of Mental Deficiency (pp.
391-423). New York: McGraw-Hill. #(3), #(38)

Lippincott, M.K. (1979). "A sanctuary for people": Strategies for overcoming
zoning restrictions on community homes for retarded persons. Stanford Law
Review, 31, 767-783. #(40), #(45), #(27)

Lippman, L., & Goldberg, I. (1973). The right to education: An anatomy of the
Pennsylvania case. New York: Teachers College Press. #(10), #(34)

Lipsett, L.P. (1961). Simultaneous and successive discrimination learning in
children. Child Development, 32, 337-347. #(3), #(6)

Lipsitt, L.P. (1981). Sensorimotor development: What infants do and how we
think about what they do. In I.E. Sigel, D.M. Drodzinsky, & R.M. Golinkoff
(Eds.), New directions in Piagetian theory and practice (pp. 29-37).
Hillsdale, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum. #(12), #(13), #(38)

Lipsitt, L.P., & Spiker, C.C. (Eds.). (1963). Advances in child development
and behavior (Vol. I). New York: Academic Press. #(34), #(25)

Lipsky, D.K., & Gartner, A. (1987). Capable of achievement and worthy of
respect: Education for handicapped students as if they were full-fledged
human beings. Exceptional Children, 54, 69-74. #(21)

Lipsky, D.K., & Gartner, A. (1989). Beyond separate education: Quality
education for all. Baltimore: Paul H. Brookes. #(34), #(39)

Lipsky, M. (1976). Toward a theory of street-level bureaucracy. In W.D.
Hawley & M. Lipsky (Eds.), Theoretical perspectives on urban politics (pp.
196-213). Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall. #(38), #(35), #(42)

Lipstreu, B.L., & Johnson, M.K. (1988). Whole clock method. Teaching
Exceptional Children, 20(3), 10-12. #(33), #(18)

Litrownik, A.J., McInnis, E.T., Wetzel-Pritchard, A.M., & Filipelli, D.L.
(1978). Restricted stimulus control and inferred attentional deficits in
autistic and retarded children. Journal of Abnormal Psychology, 87, 554-562.
#(1), #(2)

Lloyd, J.W. (1988). Direct academic intervention in learning disabilities. In
M.C. Wang, M.C. Reynolds, & H.J. Walberg (Eds.), Handbook of special
education: Research and practice (Vol. 2, pp. 345-366). New York: Pergamon
Press. #(34), #(43), #(28)

Lloyd, J.W., Singh, N.N., & Repp, A.C. (Eds.). (1991). The regular education
initiative: Alternative perspectives on concepts, issues, and models.
Sycamore, IL: Sycamore. #(34), #(15)

Lloyd, L., & Fuller, D. (1986). Toward an augmentative and alternative
communication symbol taxonomy: A proposed superordinate classification.
Augmentative and Alternative Communication, 2, 165-171. #(30)

Lloyd, L., & Karlan, G. (1984). Nonspeech communication symbols and systems:
Where have we been and where are we going? Journal of Mental Deficiency
Research, 38, 3-20. #(30)

Lobato, D., Barrera, R.C., & Feldman, R.S. (1981). Sensorimotor functioning
and prelinguistic communication of severely and profoundly retarded
individuals. American Journal of Mental Deficiency, 85, 489-496. #(12),
#(30), #(21)

Locke, P., & Mirenda, P. (1988). A computer-supported communication approach
for a nonspeaking child with severe visual and cognitive impairments: A case
study. Augmentative and Alternative Communication, 4, 15-22. #(30)

Lockyer, L., & Rutter, M. (1970). A five to fifteen year followup of
infantile psychosis. IV: Patterns of cognitive ability. British Journal of
Social and Clinical Psychology, 9, 152-163. #(21), #(25)

Loeber, R. (1971). Engineering the behavioral engineer. Journal of Applied
Behavior Analysis, 4, 321-326. #(3)

Loeber, R., & Dishion, T. (1983). Early predictors of male delinquency: A
review. Psychological Bulletin, 94, 68-98. #(4), #(48), #(32)

Loeber, R., & Schmaling, K.B. (1985). Empirical evidence for overt and covert
patterns of antisocial conduct problems. Journal of Abnormal Child Psycholo-
gy, 13, 337-352. #(4)

Loeding, B., Zangari, C., & Lloyd, L. (1990). A "working party" approach to
planning inservice training in manual signs for an entire public school
staff. Augmentative and Alternative Communication, 6, 38-49. #(30), #(42)

Loess, H.B., & Duncan, C.P. (1952). Human discrimination learning with
simultaneous and successive presentation of stimuli. Journal of Experimental
Psychology, 44, 215-221. #(6), #(3)

Loftus. E.F., & Loftus, G.R. (1980). On the permanence of stored information
in the brain. American Psychologist, 35, 409-420. #(11)

Loftus, E.F., Loftus, G.R., & Hunt, E.B. (1984). Broadbent's Maltese cross
memory model: Something old, something new, something borrowed, something
missing. Behavioral and Brain Sciences, 7 73-74, 91-94. #(11)

Logue, A.W., King, G.R., Chavarro, A., & Volpe, J.S. (1991). Matching and
maximizing in a self-control paradigm using human subjects. Learning and
Motivation, 21, 340-368. #(6)

London, P. (1972). The end of ideology in behavior modification. American
Psychologist, 27, 913-920. #(3)

Loney, J., & Milich, R. (1982). Hyperactivity, inattention, and aggression in
clinical practice. In M. Wolraich & D. Routh (Eds.), Advances in developmen-
tal and behavioral pediatrics (Vol. 3, pp. 113-147). Greenwich, CT: JAI
Press. #(38), #(4)

Lord, C. (1984). The development of peer relations in children with autism.
In F.J. Morrison, C. Lord, & D.P. Keating (Eds.), Advances in applied
developmental psychology (pp. 165-229). New York: Plenum Press. #(38), #(2),
#(37)

Lord, C. (1985). Autism and the comprehension of language. In E. Schopler &
G. Mesibov (Eds.), Communication problems in autism (pp. 257-281). New York:
Plenum Press. #(38), #(30), #(2)

Lord, C., & O'Neill, P.J. (1980). A developmental-behavioral model for the
prescriptive evaluation of autistic and severely socially impaired children.
In B. Wilcox & A. Thompson (Eds.), Critical issues in educating autistic
children and youth (pp. 24-52). Washington, DC: Department of Education,
Office of Special Education. #(3), #(38), #(21), #(2)

Lord, C., & Schopler, E. (1988). Intellectual and developmental assessment of
autistic children from preschool to school age: Clinical implications of two
follow-up studies. In E. Schopler & G. Mesibov (Eds.), Diagnosis and
assessment in autism (pp. 167-181). New York: Plenum Press. #(38), #(2)

Lorimer, R. (1977). Sensory thinking: A ground for learning. Phi Delta
Kappan, 58, 564-567. #(12)

Loro, A.D., Fisher, E.B., & Levenkron, J.C. (1979). Comparison of established
and innovative weight-reduction treatment procedures. Journal of Applied
Behavior Analysis, 12, 141-155. #(3), #(18)

Lorsbach, T.C., & Worman, L.J. (1989). The development of explicit and
implicit forms of memory in learning disabled and nondisabled children.
Contemporary Educational Psychology, 14, 67-76. #(28), #(11)

Lorsbach, T.C., & Worman, L.J. (1990). Episodic priming in children with
learning disabilities. Contemporary Educational Psychology, 15, 93-102.
#(28), #(11)

Lortie, D.C. (1975). Schoolteacher. Chicago: University of Chicago Press.
#(34), #(15)

Losche, G. (1990). Sensorimotor and action development in autistic children
from infancy to early childhood. Journal of Child Psychology and Psychiatry,
31, 749-761. #(12)

Lotter, V. (1966). Epidemiology of autistic conditions in young children: I.
Prevalence. Social Psychiatry, 1, 124-137. #(2)

Lotter, V. (1967). Epidemiology of autistic conditions in young children: II.
Some characteristics of the parents and children. Social Psychiatry, 1,
163-173. #(2)

Lotter, V. (1974). Factors related to outcome in autistic children. Journal
of Autism and Childhood Schizophrenia, 4, 263-277. #(2)

Loucks, S., & Pratt, H. (1979). A concern-based approach to curriculum
change. Educational Leadership, 37, 212-215. #(5)

Lovaas, O.I. (1961). Interaction between verbal and non-verbal behavior.
Child Development, 32, 325-336. #(30)

Lovaas, O.I. (1964). Cue properties of words: The control of operant
responding by rate and content of verbal operants. Child Development, 35,
245-256. #(3), #(30)

Lovaas, O.I. (1969). Behavior modification: Teaching language to psychotic
children. Instructional Film (45 min., 16 mm-sound). New York: Appleton-
Century-Crofts. #(3), #(9)

Lovaas, O.I. (1977). The autistic child: Language development through
behavior modification. New York: Halsted Press. #(21), #(30), #(2), #(34)

Lovaas, O.I. (1978). Parents as therapists. In M. Rutter & E. Schopler
(Eds.), Autism: A reappraisal of concepts and treatment (pp. 369-378). New
York: Plenum Press. #(38), #(2)

Lovaas, O.I. (1980). Behavioral teaching with young autistic children. In B.
Wilcox & A. Thompson (Eds.), Critical issues in educating autistic children
and youth (pp. 220-233). Washington, DC: Department of Education, Office of
Special Education. #(3), #(21), #(2), #(38)

Lovaas, O.I. (Ed.). (1981). Teaching developmentally disabled children: The
me book. Baltimore: University Park Press. #(3), #(21), #(34), #(45)

Lovaas, O.I. (1981). How to do it. In O.I. Lovaas (Ed.), Teaching developmen-
tally disabled children: The me book (pp. 11-22). Baltimore: University Park
Press. #(3), #(21), #(38)

Lovaas, O.I. (1987). Behavioral treatment and normal educational and
intellectual functioning in young autistic children. Journal of Consulting
and Clinical Psychology, 55, 39. #(3), #(2), #(25)

Lovaas, O.I. (1993). The development of a treatment-research project for de-
velopmentally disabled and autistic children. Journal of Applied Behavior 
Analysis, 26, 617-630. #(2), #(3), #(5)

Lovaas, O.I., Berberich, J.P., Perloff, B.F., & Schaeffer, B. (1966).
Acquisition of imitative speech in schizophrenic children. Science, 151,
505-507. #(3), #(30), #(41)

Lovaas, O.I., & Bucher, B.D. (1974). Perspectives in behavior modification
with deviant children. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall. #(3), #(34)

Lovaas. O.I., & Favell, J.E. (1987). Protection of clients undergoing
aversive/restrictive interventions. Education and Treatment of Children, 10,
311-325. #(10), #(14)

Lovaas, O.I., Freitag, L., & Gold, V.J. (1965). Recording apparatus and
procedure for observation of behaviors of children in free play settings.
Journal of Experimental Child Psychology, 2, 108-120. #(3)

Lovaas, O.I., Freitag, L., Gold, V.J., & Kassorla, I.C. (1965). Experimental
studies in childhood schizophrenia: Analysis of self-destructive behavior.
Journal of Autism and Childhood Schizophrenia, 2, 67-84. #(19), #(2)

Lovaas, O.I., Freitag, L., Guilani, B.M., Nelson, K., & Whelan, C. (1967).
Building social and preschool behaviors in schizophrenic and autistic
children through non-verbal imitation training. Behaviour Research and
Therapy, 5, 171-181. #(3), #(2), #(41)

Lovaas, O.I., Freitag, L., Kinder, M.I., Rubenstein, D.D., Schaeffer, B., &
Simmons, Q. (1966). The establishment of social reinforcers in two schizo-
phrenic children on the basis of food. Journal of Experimental Child
Psychology, 4, 109-125. #(2), #(3), #(14)

Lovaas, O.I., Freitag, L., Nelson, K., & Whalen, C. (1967). The establishment
of imitation and its use for the development of complex behavior in
schizophrenic children. Behaviour Research and Therapy, 5, 171-181. #(3),
#(41)

Lovaas, O.I., & Koegel, R.L. (1973). Behavior therapy with autistic children.
In C.E. Thoresen (Ed.), Seventy-second yearbook of the National Society for
the Study of Education. Part I: Behavior modification in education (pp.
230-258). Chicago: University of Chicago Press. #(3), #(2), #(38)

Lovaas, O.I., Koegel, R.L., & Schreibman, L. (1979). Stimulus overselectivity
in autism: A review of research. Psychological Bulletin, 86, 1236-1254. #(6),
#(2), #(32) 

Lovaas, O.I., Koegel, R.L., Simmons, J.Q., & Long, J.S. (1973). Some
generalization and follow-up measures on autistic children in behavior
therapy. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 6, 131-166. #(3), #(2)

Lovaas, O.I., Litrownik, A., & Mann, R. (1971). Response latencies to
auditory stimuli in autistic children. Behaviour Research and Therapy, 9,
39-49. #(3), #(2) 

Lovaas, O.I., & Newsom, C.D. (1976). Behavior modification with psychotic
children. In H. Leitenberg (Ed.), Handbook of behavior modification and
behavior therapy (pp. 303-359). Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall. #(3),
#(38)

Lovaas, O.I., Newsom, C.D., & Hickman, C. (1987). Self-stimulatory behavior
and perceptual reinforcement. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 20,
45-68. #(20), #(14), #(12)

Lovaas, O.I., Schaeffer, B., & Simmons, J.Q. (1965). Building social behavior
in autistic children by use of electric shock. Journal of Experimental
Research in Personality, 1, 99-109. #(3), #(14), #(37)

Lovaas, O.I., & Schreibman, L. (1971). Stimulus overselectivity of autistic
children in a two stimulus situation. Behaviour Research and Therapy, 9,
305-310. #(6)

Lovaas, O.I., Schreibman, L., & Koegel, R.L. (1974). A behavior modification
approach to treatment of autistic children. Journal of Autism and Childhood
Schizophrenia, 4, 111-129. #(3), #(2)

Lovaas, O.I., Schreibman, L., Koegel, R.L., & Rehm, R. (1971). Selective
responding by autistic children to multiple sensory input. Journal of
Abnormal Psychology, 77, 211-222. #(6), #(2)

Lovaas, O.I., & Simmons, J.Q. (1969). Manipulation of self-destruction in
three retarded children. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 2, 143-157.
#(19)

Lovaas, O.I., Smith, T., & McEachin, J.J. (1989). Clarifying comments on the
young autism study: Reply to Schopler, Short, and Mesibov. Journal of
Consulting and Clinical Psychology, 57, 165-167. #(2), #(29), #(43)

Lovaas, O.I., Young, D.B., & Newsom, C.D. (1978). Childhood psychosis:
Behavioral treatment. In B.B. Wolman, J. Egan, & A.O. Ross (Eds.), Handbook
of treatment of mental disorders of childhood and adolescence (pp. 385-420).
Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall. #(19), #(38)

Love, A.J., & Thompson, M.G. (1988). Language disorders and attention deficit
disorders in young children referred for psychiatric services. American
Journal of Orthopsychiatry, 58, 52-64. #(1), #(30), #(2)

Love, R.J., Clark, B.S., & McConnell, F.E. (1984). Language remediation in
children. In S. Dickson (Ed.), Communication disorders: Remedial principles
and practices (pp. 50-115). Glenview, IL: Scott, Foresman. #(30), #(38)

Lovejoy, E. (1968). Attention in discrimination learning. San Francisco:
Holden-Day. #(1), #(6), #(34)

Loveland, K.A., & Landry, S.H. (1988). Speech acts and the pragmatic deficits
of autism. Journal of Speech and Hearing Research, 31, 593-604. #(30), #(2)

Lovibond, S.H. (1970). Aversive control of behavior. Behavior Therapy, 1,
80-91. #(3)

Lovitt, T.C. (1970). Behavior modification: The current scene. Exceptional
Children. 37, 157-167. #(3)

Lovitt, T.C. (1975). Part 1: Characteristics of ABA, general recommendations
and methodological limitations. Journal of Learning Disabilities, 8, 432-443.
#(3), #(29)

Lovitt, T.C. (1984). Tactics for teaching. Columbus, OH: Charles E. Merrill.
#(34), #(3), #(9), #(43)

Lovitt, T.C. (1989). Introduction to learning disabilities. Boston: Allyn &
Bacon. #(34), #(28)

Lowe, M.L., & Cuvo, A. (1976). Teaching coin summation to the mentally
retarded. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 9, 483-489. #(33), #(45)

Lowenthal, F., & Vandamme, F. (Eds.). (1986). Pragmatics and education. New
York: Plenum Press. #(30), #(34)

Lowman, E., & Klinger, J. (1969). Aids to independent living: Self-help for
the handicapped. New York: McGraw-Hill. #(18), #(34)

Lubin, A. (1961). The interpretation of significant interaction. Education
and Psychological Measurement, 21, 807-817. #(43), #(22)

Lubker, B.J. (1967). Irrelevant stimulus dimensions and children's perfor-
mance on simultaneous discrimination problems. Child Development, 38,
119-125. #(6)

Lubker, B.J. (1969). The role of between- and within-setting irrelevant
dimensions in children's simultaneous discrimination learning. Child
Development, 40, 957-964. #(6)

Lubker, B.J. (1969). Setting similarity and successive discrimination
learning by children. Journal of Experimental Child Psychology, 7, 188-194.
#(6)

Luce, S.C. Anderson, S.R., Thibadeau, S.T., & Lipsker, L. (1984). Preparing
the client for transition to the community. In W.P. Christian, G.T. Hannah,
& T.J. Gahn (Eds.), Strategies for institutional change and client transition
(pp. 157-176). New York: Plenum Press. #(27), #(38)

Luce, S.C., Delquadri, J., & Hall, R.V. (1980). Contingent exercise: A mild
but powerful procedure for suppressing inappropriate verbal and aggressive
behavior. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 13, 583-594. #(3), #(14)

Lucero, W.J., Frieman, J., Spoering, K., & Fehrenbacher, J. (1976).
Comparison of three procedures in reducing self-injurious behavior. American
Journal of Mental Deficiency, 80, 548-554. #(19)

Luckey, R.E., & Addison, M.R. (1974). The profoundly retarded: A new
challenge for public education. Education and Training of the Mentally
Retarded, 9, 123-130. #(21), #(45)

Luckey, R.E., Watson, C.M., & Mussick, J.K. (1968). Aversive conditioning as
a means of inhibiting vomiting and rumination. American Journal of Mental
Deficiency, 73, 139-142. #(3), #(19), #(21)

Luehrmann, A., & Peckham, H. (1983). Computer literacy: A hands-on approach.
New York: McGraw-Hill. #(16)

Lufler, H.S. (1980). Compliance and the courts. In D.C. Berliner (Ed.),
Review of research in education (Vol. 8, pp. 336-358). Washington, DC:
American Educational Research Association. #(10), #(38)

Luiselli, J.K., & Colozzi, G.A. (1980). Differential reinforcement of
incompatible behavior (DRI) in treating classroom management problems of
developmentally disabled children. The Psychological Record, 30, 261-270.
#(3), #(14), #(45)

Lusiselli, J.K., Helfin, C.S., Pemberton, B.W., & Reisman, J. (1977). The elim-
ination of a child's in-class masturbation by overcorrection and reinforcement. 
Journal of Behavior Therapy and Experimental Psychiatry, 8, 201-204. #(3)

Luria, A.R. (1966). Human brain and psychological processes. New York: Harper
and Row. #(21), #(34)

Lustman, N., & Zigler, E. (1982). Imitation by institutionalized and non-
institutionalized mentally retarded and nonretarded children. American
Journal of Mental Deficiency, 87, 252-258. #(3), #(31), #(41), #(45)

Lutz, J.E. (1976). Inservice personnel development: A systematic approach to
program planning. Educational Technology, 16, 45-47. #(5), #(42)

Lutzker, J.R. (1978). Reducing self-injurious behavior by facial screening. 
American Journal of Mental Deficiency, 82, 510-513. #(19), #(3)

Lutzker, J.R., & Wesch, D. (1983). Facial screening: History and critical
review. Australian and New Zealand Journal of Developmental Disabilities, 9,
209-223. #(32), #(3)

Luyben, P.D., Funk, D.M., Morgan, J.K., Clark, K.A., & Delulio, D.W. (1986).
Team sports for the severely retarded: Training a side-of-the-foot soccer
pass using a maximum-tominimum prompt reduction strategy. Journal of Applied
Behavior Analysis, 19, 431-436. #(3), #(21), #(9)

Lynch, K.L., Kiernan, W.E., & Stark, J.A. (Eds.). (1982). Prevocational and
vocational education for special needs youth: A blueprint for the 1980s.
Baltimore: Paul H. Brookes. #(34), #(27), #(33)

Lykken, D.T. (1968). Statistical significance in psychological research.
Psychological Bulletin, 70, 151-159. #(22) 

Lynch, V., McGuigan, C., & Shoemaker, S. (1983). An introduction to
systematic instruction. British Columbia Journal of Special Education, 7,
1-13. #(9)

Lyon, J., & Helm-Estabrooks, N. (1987). Drawing: Its communicative signifi-
cance for expressively restricted aphasic adults. Topics in Language
Disorders, 8, 61-71. #(30)

Lysakowski, R.S., & Walberg, H.J. (1982). Instructional effects of cues,
participation and corrective feedback: A quantitative synthesis. American
Educational Research Journal, 19, 559-578. #(3), #(15)

MacArthur, C.A. (1988). The impact of computers on the writing process.
Exceptional Children, 54, 536-542. #(16) 

MacArthur, C.A., Haynes, J.A., & Malouf, D. (1986). Learning disabled
students' engaged time and classroom interaction: The impact of computer
assisted instruction. Journal of Educational Computing Research, 2, 189-198.
#(16), #(28) 

MacArthur, C.A., & Malouf, D.B. (1991). Teachers' beliefs, plans, and
decisions about computer-based instruction. The Journal of Special Education,
25, 44-72. #(16) 

MacCorquodale, K., & Meehl, P.W. (1948). Hypothetical constructs and
intervening variables. Psychological Review, 55, 596-611. #(3)

MacDonald, J. (1985). Language through conversation: A model for intervention
with language delayed persons. In S. Warren & A. Rogers-Warren (Eds.),
Teaching functional language (pp. 89-122). Baltimore: University Park Press.
#(30), #(38)

MacDonald, J., & Gillette, Y. (1984). Conversation engineering: A pragmatic
approach to early social competence. Seminars in Speech and Language, 5,
171-184. #(30)

MacDonald, J.E., & Sheperd, G. (1976). The autistic child: A challenge for
educators. Psychology in the Schools, 13, 248-256. #(21), #(2)

MacDonald, J.M. (1977). Bombers and firesetters. Springfield, IL: Charles C
Thomas. #(34), #(4)

MacDonald, R.P., Dixon, L.S., & LeBlanc, J.M. (1986). Stimulus class
formation following observational learning. Analysis and Intervention in
Developmental Disabilities, 6, 73-87. #(3), #(6), #(41)

Mace, F.C., Hock, M.L., Lalli, J.S., West, B.J., Belfiore, P., Pinter, E., &
Brown, K. (1988). Behavioral momentum in the treatment of noncompliance.
Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 21, 123-141. #(3), #(37)

Mace, F.C., & Knight, D. (1986). Functional analysis and treatment of severe
pica. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 19, 411-416. #(3), #(21)

Mace, F.C., McCurdy, B., & Quigley, E.A. (1990). A collateral effect of
reward predicted by matching theory. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis,
23, 197-205. #(14), #(6)

Mace, F.C., Page, T.J., Ivancic, M.T., & O'Brien, S. (1986). Analysis of
environmental determinants of aggression and disruption in mentally retarded
children. Applied Research in Mental Retardation, 7, 203-221. #(3), #(21),
#(45)

MacEachron, A.E. (1979). Mentally retarded offenders: Prevalence and
characteristics. American Journal of Mental Deficiency, 84, 165-176. #(21),
#(45)

MacGinitie, W. (1978). Gates-MacGinitie Reading Tests. Chicago: Riverside.
#(1), #(17)

Machiavelli, N. (1903/1952). The prince. New York: Oxford University Press.
#(42), #(35), #(34)

MacIntyre, A. (1967). The idea of a social science. Aristotelian Society
Supplement, 41, 93-114. #(43), #(29)

Mackie, R., & MacKay, C.K. (1982). Attention vs. retention in discrimination
learning of low-MA retarded adults and MA-matched nonretarded children.
American Journal of Mental Deficiency, 86, 543-547. #(6), #(11) 

MacKay, H.A. (1985). Stimulus equivalence in rudimentary reading and
spelling. Analysis and Intervention in Developmental Disabilities, 5,
373-387. #(6), #(30)

MacKay, H.A., & Sidman, M. (1984). Teaching new behavior via equivalence
relations. In P. H. Brooks, R. Sperber, & C. McCauley (Eds.), Learning and
cognition in the mentally retarded (pp. 493-513). Hillsdale, NJ: Lawrence
Erlbaum. #(38), #(6), #(9)

MacKintosh, N.J. (1977). Stimulus control: Attentional factors. In W.K. Honig
& J.E.R. Staddon (Eds.), Handbook of operant behavior (pp. 481-513).
Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall. #(1), #(38), #(3)

Mackworth, N.H., & Bruner, J.S. (1970). How adults and children search and
recognize pictures. Human Development, 13, 149-177. #(12)

MacMillan, D.L. (1971). The problem of motivation in the education of the
mentally retarded. Exceptional Children, 37, 579-586. #(14), #(3), #(25),
#(45)

MacMillan, D.L. (1973). Behavior modification in education. New York:
MacMillan. #(3), #(34)

MacMillan, D.L. (1982). Mental retardation in school and society (2nd ed.).
Boston: Little, Brown. #(34), #(45)

MacMillan, D.L., Forness, S.R., & Trumbull, B.M. (1973). The role of
punishment in the classroom. Exceptional Children, 40, 85-96. #(3)

MacMillan, D.L., Hendrick, I.G., & Watkins, A.V. (1988). Impact of Diana,
Larry P., and P.L. 94-142 on minority students. Exceptional Children, 54,
426-432. #(10)

MacMillan, D.L., Jones, R.L., & Aloia, G.F. (1974). The mentally retarded
label: A theoretical analysis and review of research. American Journal of
Mental Deficiency, 79, 241-261. #(21), #(45), #(32)

MacMillan, D.L., Jones, R.L., & Meyers, C.E. (1976). Mainstreaming the mildly
retarded: Some questions, cautions, and guidelines. Mental Retardation,
14(1), 3-10. #(27), #(39), #(45)

MacMillan, D.L., & Meyers, C.E. (1979). Educational labeling of handicapped
learners. In D.C. Berliner (Ed.), Review of research in education: 7 (pp.
151-194). Washington, DC: American Educational Research Association. #(38),
#(39)

MacNamara, R. (1977). The compleat behavior modifier: Confessions of an
overzealous operant conditioner. Mental Retardation, 15(1), 34-37. #(3)

MacPherson, E.L. (1967). Control of involuntary movement. Behaviour Research
and Therapy, 5, 143-145. #(3), #(21)

MacWhinney, B. (Ed.). (1987). Mechanisms of language acquisition. Hillsdale,
NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum. #(30), #(34), #(38)

Madaus, G.F., Airasian, P.W., & Kellaghan, T. (1980). School effectiveness:
A reassessment of the evidence. New York: McGraw-Hill. #(26), #(34)

Madaus, G.F., Airasian, P.W., Hambleton, R.K., Orlandi, L.R., & Consalvo,
R.W. (1982). Development and application of criteria for screening commer-
cial, standardized tests. Educational Evaluation and Policy Analysis, 4,
401-415. #(29)

Madden, N.A., & Slavin, R.E. (1983). Mainstreaming students with mild
handicaps: Academic and social outcomes. Review of Educational Research, 53,
519-569. #(27), #(39)

Madsen, C.H., Becker, W.C., & Thomas, D.R. (1968). Rules, praise and
ignoring: Elements of elementary classroom control. Journal of Applied
Behavior Analysis, 1, 139-150. #(3), #(15)

Madsen, C.H., Becker, W.C., Thomas, D.R., Koser, L., & Plager, E. (1970). An
analysis of the reinforcing function of "sit down" commands. In R.K. Parker
(Ed.), Readings in educational psychology (pp. 265-278). Boston: Allyn &
Bacon. #(3), #(38), #(14)

Madsen, C.H., & Madsen, C.K. (1970). Teaching, discipline: Behavioral
principles toward a positive approach. Boston: Allyn & Bacon. #(3), #(34)

Madsen, C.H., & Madsen, C.K. (1971). Children/discipline: A positive approach
for parents. Boston: Allyn & Bacon. #(3), #(34)

Madsen, C.K. (1975). No one knows research but me. In C.K. Madsen, R.D.
Greer, & C.H. Madsen (Eds.), Research in music behavior: Modifying music
behavior in the classroom (pp. 12-20). New York: Teachers College Press.
#(38), #(43), #(3)

Madsen, C.K., & Madsen, C.H. (1972). Parents, children, discipline. Boston:
Allyn & Bacon. #(3), #(34)

Madsen, C.K., & Yarbrough, C. (1975). The effect of experimental design on
the isolation of dependent and independent variables. In C.K. Madsen, R.D.
Greer, & C.H. Madsen (Eds.), Research in music behavior: Modifying music
behavior in the classroom (pp. 226-243). New York: Teachers College Press.
#(38), #(43)

Maehr, M.L. (1976). Continuing motivation: An analysis of a seldom considered
educational outcome. Review of Educational Research, 46, 443-462. #(29)

Mager, R.F. (1975). Preparing instructional objectives (2nd ed.). Belmont,
CA: Fearon. #(5), #(9), #(34)

Mager, R.F. (1988). Making instruction work. Belmont, CA: David S. Lake.
#(3), #(9)

Mager, R.F., & Pipe, P. (1970). Analyzing performance problems. Palo Alto,
CA: Fearon. #(34), #(42)

Magliocca, L.A., Rinaldi, R.T., Crew, J.L., & Kunzelmann, H.P. (1977). Early
identification of handicapped children through a frequency sampling
technique. Exceptional Children, 43, 414-420. #(3)

Mahaffey, R.B. (1984). Research applications in communications disorders. In
A. Schwartz (Ed.), Handbook of microcomputer applications in communication
disorders (pp. 174-191). San Diego: College-Hill Press. #(30), #(38), #(16)

Mahan, T.W., & Mahan, A.M. (1971). The impact of school of learning: American
city children in suburban schools. Journal of School Psychology, 9, 1-11.
#(9), #(29), #(27)

Maher, C.A. (1979). Implementation and evaluation of a behavioral, school-
based special service delivery system. Child Behavior Therapy, 1, 337-346.
#(29), #(8), #(3)

Mahoney, K., VanWagenen, R.K., & Meyerson, L. (1971). Toilet training of
normal and retarded children. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 4,
173-181. #(3)

Mahoney, M.J. (1975). The obese eating style: Bites, beliefs, and behavior
modification. Addictive Behaviors, 1, 47-53. #(3), #(18)

Mahoney, M.J. (1975). Fat fiction. Behavior Therapy, 6, 416-418. #(18)

Maiston, C.R., Baumeister, A.A., & Maisto, A.A. (1978). An analysis of
variables related to self-injurious behavior among institutionalized retarded
persons. Journal of Mental Deficiency Research, 22, 27-36. #(43), #(19),
#(45)

Maker, C.J., & Schiever, S.W. (Eds.). (1989). Critical issues in gifted
education: Defensible programs for cultural and ethnic minorities. Austin,
TX: Pro-Ed. #(34), #(49), #(50)

Malone, J.C., & Staddon, J.E.R. (1973). Contrast effects in maintained
generalization gradients. Journal of the Experimental Analysis of Behavior,
19, 167-179. #(3), #(7)

Maloney, M.P., Ball, T.S., & Edgar, C.L. (1974). Analysis of the generalizab-
ility of sensory-motor training. American Journal of Mental Deficiency, 74,
458-470. #(12), #(7)

Malott, R.W. (1971). Contingency management. Kalamazoo, MI: Behaviordelia.
#(3), #(34)

Malott, R.W. (1992). Should we train applied behavior analysts to be
researchers? Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 25, 83-88. #(3)

Malott, R., Tillema, M., & Glenn, S. (1978). Behavior analysis and behavior
modification: An introduction. Kalamazoo, MI: Behaviordelia. #(3), #(34)

Malott, R., Tillema, M., & Glenn, S. (1978). Basic behavioral procedures:
Reinforcement, punishment, and avoidance. In R. Malott, M. Tillema, & S.
Glenn, Behavior analysis and behavior modification: An introduction (pp.
25-54). Kalamazoo, MI: Behaviordelia. #(3), #(14), #(38)

Malott, R., Tillema, M., & Glenn, S. (1978). Ethical issues in behavior
modification: Flattery vs. reinforcement based on praise. In R. Malott, M.
Tillema, & S. Glenn, Behavior analysis and behavior modification: An
introduction (pp. 328-389). Kalamazoo, MI: Behaviordelia. #(3), #(14), #(38)

Malouf, D.B., Wizer, D.R., Pilato, V.H., & Grogan, M.M. (1990). Computer-
assisted instruction with small groups of mildly handicapped students.
Journal of Special Education, 24, 52-67. #(16) 

Malpass, L.F. (1963). Motor skills in mental deficiency. In N.R. Ellis (Ed.),
Handbook of mental deficiency (pp. 602-631). New York: McGraw-Hill. #(38),
#(12)

Mandler, G. (1980). Recognizing: The judgment of previous occurrence.
Psychological Review, 87, 252-271. #(11)

Mandler, J.M., & Bauer, P.J. (1988). The cradle of categorization: Is the
basic-level basic? Cognitive Development, 3, 247-264. #(25)

Mandler, J.M., & Johnson, N.S. (1977). Remembrance of things parsed: Story
structure and recall. Cognitive Psychology, 9, 111-151. #(17), #(11)

Mann, D. (1974). Public understanding and education decision-making.
Educational Administration Quarterly, 10, 1-18. #(23)

Mann, D. (1975). Policy decision-making in education: An introduction to
calculation and control. New York: Teachers College Press. #(23), #(34)

Mann, D. (1976). The politics of training teachers in schools. Teachers
College Record, 77, 323-338. #(23), #(42)

Mann, D. (1976). Making change happen? Teachers College Record, 77, 314-338.
#(42), #(23) 

Mann, D. (1977). Participation, representation, and control. In J. Scribner
(Ed.), The 77th yearbook of NSSE (pp. 67-93). Chicago: University of Chicago
Press. #(23), #(38)

Mann, D. (1977). The politics of changing schools. NASSP Bulletin, 61, 57-66.
#(23)

Mann, D. (1978). The user-driven system and a modest proposal. Teachers
College Record, 79, 389-412. #(23)

Mann, D. (1979). The politics of inservice. Theory Into Practice, 17,
212-217. #(23)

Mann, L. (1971). Perceptual training revisited: The training of nothing at
all. Rehabilitation Literature, 32, 322-335. #(12)

Mann, L. (1979). On the trail of process. New York: Grune & Stratton. #(5),
#(34)

Mann, P.H., Suiter, P.A., & McClung, R. (1979). Handbook in diagnostic-
prescriptive teaching (2nd ed.). Boston: Allyn & Bacon. #(34), #(5)

Mansfield, R.S., Busse, T.V., & Krepelka, E.J. (1978). The effectiveness of
creativity training. Review of Educational Research, 48, 517-536. #(50)

Marascuilo, L.A., & McSweeney, M. (1978). Nonparametric and distribution-free
methods for the social sciences. Monterey, CA: Brooks/Cole. #(22), #(29),
#(34)

March, J.G. (Ed.). (1965). Handbook of organizations. Chicago: Rand McNally.
#(34), #(42)

March, J.G., & Simon, H. (1958). Organizations. New York: John Wiley. #(34),
#(43)

Marchetti, A.G., Cecil, C.E., Graves, J., & Marchetti, D. (1984). Public
transportation instruction: Community instruction, and facility-grounds
instruction. American Association on Mental Retardation, 3, 128-136. #(27)

Marcus, L.M. (1978). Developmental assessment as a basis for planning
educational programs for autistic children. Behavioral Disorders, 3, 219-226.
#(29), #(2)

Margalit, M., & Shulman, S. (1986). Microcomputers in special education:
Renewed expectations for solutions in chronic difficulties. Exceptional
Child, 33, 199-205. #(16)

Margolies, P.J. (1977). Behavioral approaches to the treatment of early
infantile autism: A review. Psychological Bulletin, 84, 249-264. #(3), #(2),
#(32)

Marholin, D. II, Steinman, W.M., McInnis, E.T., & Heads, T.B. (1975). The
effect of a teacher's presence on the classroom behavior of conduct-problem
children. Journal of Abnormal Child Psychology, 3, 11-25. #(4), #(1)

Marholin, D. II, Luiselli, J.K., Robinson, M., & Lott, I.T. (1980). Response
contingent taste-aversion in treating ruminative vomiting of institutionalized
profoundly retarded children. Journal of Mental Deficiency Research, 24, 47-56.
#(3), #(45)

Marinelli, J.J. (1976). Financing the education of exceptional children. In
F.J. Weintraub, A. Abeson, J. Ballard, & M.L. LaVor (Eds.), Public policy and
the education of exceptional children (pp. 151-194). Reston, VA: Council for
Exceptional Children. #(23), #(38)

Markle, S.M., & Tieman, P.W. (1970). Really understanding concepts.
Champaign, IL: Stipes Publishing Company. #(34), #(25)

Marks, P., & Ball, T.S. (1974). Hazardous voluntary failing: A treatment
approach. Mental Retardation, 12(6), 36-38. #(3)

Markwardt, F.C. (1989). Peabody Individual Achievement Test--Revised. Circle
Pines, MN: American Guidance Service. #(34), #(44)

Marozas, D.S., & May, D.C. (1980). Factors which motivate job acceptance
among teachers of severely and profoundly mentally retarded children.
Education and Training of the Mentally Retarded, 15, 293-297. #(27), #(21),
#(45)

Marozas, D.S., May, D.C., & Lehman, L.C. (1980). Incidence and prevalence:
Confusion in need of clarification. Mental Retardation, 18, 229-230. #(29),
#(45)

Marsh, G., & Johnson, R. (1968). Discrimination reversal following learning
without "errors." Psychonomic Science, 10, 261-262. #(6)

Marshall, A.M., & Marks, H.E. (1981). Implementation of "Zero Reject"
training in an institutional setting. Analysis and Intervention in Develop-
mental Disabilities, 1, 23-35. #(8), #(31)

Marshall, G.R. (1966). Toilet training of an autistic eight-year-old through
operant conditioning therapy: A case report. Behaviour Research and Therapy,
4, 242-245. #(3), #(2)

Marshall, N.R., & Hegrenes, J.R. (1970). Programmed communication therapy for
autistic mentally retarded children. Journal of Speech and Hearing Disorders,
35, 70-83. #(30), #(2), #(45)

Marshall, N.R., & Hegrenes, J.R. (1972). A communication therapy model for
cognitively disorganized children. In J.E. McLean, D.E. Yoder, & R.L.
Schiefelbusch (Eds.), Language intervention with the retarded (pp. 130-150).
Baltimore: University Park Press. #(30), #(38)

Martens, B.K., Halperin, S., Rummel, J.E., & Kilpatrick, D. (1990). Matching
theory applied to contingent teacher attention. Behavioral Assessment, 12,
139-155. #(6), #(1)

Martens, B.K., & Houk, J.L. (1989). The application of Herrnstein's Law of
Effect to disruptive and on-task behavior of a retarded adolescent girl.
Journal of the Experimental Analysis of Behavior, 51, 17-27. #(3), #(6),
#(14).

Martens, B.K., Lochner, D.G., & Kelly, S.Q. (1992). The effects of variable-
interval reinforcement on academic engagement: A demonstration of matching
theory. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 25, 143-151. #(6), #(14)

Martens, B.K., & Witt, J.C. (1988). Ecological behavior analysis. In M.
Hersen, R.M. Eisler, & P.M. Miller (Eds.), Progress in behavior modification
(Vol. 12, pp. 115-140). Newbury Park, CA: Sage Publications. #(3), #(27),
#(38)

Martin, E.W. (1972). Individualism and behaviorism as future trends in
educating handicapped children. Exceptional Children, 38, 517-525. #(3),
#(15), #(35)

Martin, E.W. (1976). Mental retardation: A changing perspective. Education
and Training of the Mentally Retarded, 11, 287-292. #(21), #(45)

Martin, E.W. (1976). A national commitment to the rights of the individual-
-1776 to 1976. Exceptional Children, 43, 132-139. #(10)

Martin, G., & Pear, J. (1983). Behavior modification: What it is and how to
do it. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall. #(3), #(34)

Martin, G.L., England, G., Kaprowy, E., Kilgour, K., & Pilek, V. (1968).
Operant conditioning of kindergarten class behavior in autistic children.
Behavior Research and Therapy, 6, 281-294. #(3), #(2)

Martin, G.L., Kehoe, B., Bird, E., Jensen, V., & Darbyshire, M. (1971).
Operant conditioning in the dressing behavior of severely retarded girl.
Mental Retardation, 9(3), 27-31. #(3), #(45)

Martin, J. (1986). Identifying potential jobs. In F.R. Rusch (Ed.),
Competitive employment issues and strategies (pp. 165-185). Baltimore: Paul
H. Brookes. #(38), #(33)

Martin, J.A. (1971). The control of imitative and non-imitative behaviors in
severely retarded children through "generalized instruction following."
Journal of Experimental Child Psychology, 11, 390-400. #(3), #(41), #(21)

Martin, J.E., & Husch, J.V. (1987). School-based vocational programs and
labor laws. Journal of the Association for Persons with Severe Handicaps, 12,
140-144. #(27)

Martin, J.E., Rusch, F.R., James, V.L., Decker, P.J., & Trtol, K.A. (1982).
The use of picture cues to establish self-control in the preparation of
complex meals by mentally retarded adults. Applied Research in Mental
Retardation, 3, 105-119. #(9), #(18)

Martin, J.E., Rusch, F.R., Tines, J.J., Brulle, A.R., White, D.M. (1985).
Work attendance in competitive employment: Comparison between employees who
are nonhandicapped and those who are mentally retarded. Mental Retardation,
23, 142-147. #(27), #(45)

Martin, M., Burke, M.E., & Findlay, S. (1985). Curriculum issues: A
systematic strategy for devising functional curricula for severely handi-
capped adolescents. Australia and New Zealand Journal of Developmental
Disabilities, 11, 169-178. #(5), #(21)

Martin, R. (1975). Legal challenges to behavior modification. Champaign, IL:
Research Press. #(10), #(34)

Martin, R. (1981). All handicapped children are educable. Analysis and
Intervention in Developmental Disabilities, 1, 5-11. #(10)

Martin, R., & Lindamood, L. (1986). Stuttering and spontaneous recovery:
Implications for the speech-language pathologist. Language, Speech, and
Hearing Services in Schools, 17, 207-218. #(30)

Marx, M.H., & Cronan-Hillix, W.A. (1987). Systems and theories in psychology.
New York: McGraw-Hill. #(34), #(35)

Mash, E.J. (1974). Has behavior modification lost its identity? The Canadian
Psychologist, 15, 271-279. #(3)

Mash, E.J., & Terdal, L.G. (Eds.). (1988). Behavioral assessment of childhood
disorders. New York: Guilford Press. #(34), #(25), #(29)

Maslow, A. (1959). Cognition of being in the peak experiences. Journal of
Genetic Psychology, 39, 293-318. #(25)

Maslow, A. (1968). Some educational implications of the humanistic psycholo-
gies. Harvard Educational Review, 38, 685-696. #(35)

Maslow, A. (1970). Motivation and personality (2nd ed.). New York: Harper &
Row. #(42), #(34)

Mason, S.A., & Newsom, C.D. (1990). The application of sensory change to
reduce stereotyped behavior. Research in Developmental Disabilities, 11,
257-271. #(12), #(20)

Massaro, D.W. (1970). Perceptual processes and forgetting in memory tasks.
Psychological Review, 77, 557-567. #(11)

Mastropieri, M.A., Scruggs, T.E., & Levin, J.R. (1983). Pictorial mnemonic
strategies for special education. Journal of Special Education Technology,
6(3), 24-33. #(6)

Matson, J.L. (1986). Self-injury and its relationship to diagnostic schemes
in psychopathology. Applied Research in Mental Retardation, 7, 223-227.
#(45), #(19)

Matson, J.L., & DiLorenzo, T.M. (1984). Punishment and its alternatives: New
perspectives for behavior modification. New York: Springer. #(3), #(14),
#(34)

Matson, J.L., & Gorman-Smith, D. (1986). A review of treatment research for
aggressive and disruptive behavior in the mentally retarded. Applied Research
in Mental Retardation, 7, 95-103. #(45), #(19), #(4), #(32)

Matson, J.L., & Long, S. (1986). Teaching computation/shopping skills to
mentally retarded adults. American Journal of Mental Deficiency, 91, 98-101.
#(27), #(45)

Matson, J.L., Marchetti, A.E., and Adkins, J.A. (1980). Comparison of operant
and independence-training procedures for mentally retarded adults. American
Journal of Mental Deficiency, 84, 487-494. #(3), #(45)

Matson, J.L., & McCartney, J.R. (Eds.). (1983). Handbook of behavior
modification with the mentally retarded. New York: Plenum Press. #(34), #(3)

Matson, J.L., Ollendick, T.H., & DiLorenzo, T.M. (1980). Time-out and the
characteristics of mentally retarded institutionalized adults who do or do
not receive it. Mental Retardation, 18, 181-188. #(3), #(45)

Matthews, B.A., Shimoff, E., & Catania, A.C. (1987). Saying and doing: A
contingency-space analysis. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 20, 69-74.
#(30), #(3)

Matthews, R.M., & Fawcett, S.B. (1984). Building the capacities of job
candidates through behavioral instruction. Journal of Community Psychology,
12, 123-129. #(27), #(33), #(3), #(9) 

Maxwell, J.A. (1992). Understanding and validity in qualitative research.
Harvard Educational Review, 62, 279-300. #(43)

Mayer, G.R., Sulzer, B., & Cody, J. (1968). The use of punishment in
modifying student behavior. Journal of Special Education, 2, 323-328. #(3),
#(14)

Mayer-Johnson, R. (1986). The Picture Communications Symbols (Book 1). Solana
Beach, CA: Author. #(44), #(30)

Mayer-Johnson, R. (1989). Boardmaker. Solana Beach, CA: Author. #(30), #(16)

Mayer-Johnson, R. (1990). Talking symbols. Solana Beach, CA: Author. #(30),
#(16)

Mayhew, G.L., Enyart, P., & Anderson, J. (1978). Social reinforcement and the
naturally occurring social responses of severely and profoundly retarded
adolescents. American Journal of Mental Deficiency, 83, 164-170. #(3), #(14),
#(21)

Mayhew, G.L., & Harris, F.C. (1978). Some negative side-effects of a
punishment procedure for stereotyped behavior. Journal of Behavior Therapy
and Experimental Psychiatry, 9, 245-251. #(3), #(14), #(20)

Mazlish, B. (1975). James and John Stuart Mill. New York: Basic Books. #(34),
#(35)

McCabe, A.E. (1989). Differential language learning styles in young children:
The importance of context. Developmental Review, 9, 1-20. #(30)

McCaleb, P., & Prizant, B.M. (1985). The encoding of new versus old
information in autistic children. Journal of Speech and Hearing Disorders,
50, 230-247. #(11), #(2)

McCall, W.A. (1923). How to experiment in education. New York: Macmillan.
#(43), #(34)

McCarthy, M.M. (1983). The Pennhurst and Rowley decisions: Issues and
implications. Exceptional Children, 49, 517-522. #(10)

McCartney, J.R. (1987). Mentally retarded and nonretarded subjects' long term
recognition memory. American Journal of Mental Retardation, 92, 312-317.
#(11), #(45)

McCarver, R.N., & Craig, E.M. (1974). Placement of the mentally retarded in
the community. In N.R. Ellis (Ed.), International review of research in
mental retardation (Vol. 7, pp. 145-207). New York: Academic Press. #(38),
#(45), #(39), #(27)

McCaughrin, W.B., Ellis, W.K., Rusch, F.R., & Laird, W.H. (1993). Cost-
effectiveness of supported employment. Mental Retardation, 31, 41-48. #(47),
#(33)

McClannahan, L.E., & Krantz, P.J. (1985). Some next steps in rights protection
for the developmentally disabled. School Psychology Review, 14, 143-149. #(10),
#(21)

McClannahan, L.E., & Krantz, P.J. (1993). On systems analysis in autism in-
tervention programs. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 26, 589-596. #(3),
#(2)

McClannahan, L.E., & Risley, T.R. (1975). Design of living environments for
nursing home residents: Increasing participation in recreation activities.
Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 8, 261-268. #(27)

McCleery, M. (1964). On remarks taken out of context. Public Administration
Review, 24, 160-165. #(23)

McClelland, D. (1961). The achieving society. Princeton, NJ: Van Nostrand.
#(34), #(42)

McClelland, D. (1973). Testing for competence rather than for "intelligence."
American Psychologist, 28, 1-14. #(29), #(33)

McCloskey, M.E., & Glucksberg, S. (1978). Natural categories: Well defined or
fuzzy sets? Memory & Cognition, 6, 462-472. #(11)

McClung, M.S. (1979). Competency testing programs: Legal and educational
issues. Fordham Law Review, 47, 651-712. #(26), #(40), #(29)

McConaghy, J., & Kirby, N.H. (1987). Using the componential method to train
mentally retarded individuals to solve analogies. American Journal of Mental
Deficiency, 92, 1223. #(6), #(45)

McCord, W.T. (1982). From theory to reality: Obstacles to the implementation
of the normalization principle in human services. Mental Retardation, 20,
247-253. #(8), #(45), #(39)

McCormack, J.E. et al. (1976). Systematic instruction of the severely
handicapped: Teaching sequences. Medford, MA: Massachusetts Center for
Program Development and Evaluation. #(21), #(9), #(34)

McCormick, L., Cooper, M., & Goldman, R. (1979). Training teachers to
maximize instructional time provided to severely and profoundly handicapped
children. AAESPH Review, 4, 301-310. #(21), #(5)

McCormick, L., & Schiefelbusch, R.L. (1990). Early language intervention: An
introduction (2nd ed.). Columbus, OH: Charles E. Merrill. #(34), #(30)

McCuller, G.L., Salzberg, C.L., & Lignugaris-Kraft, B. (1987). Producing
generalized job initiative in severely mentally retarded sheltered workers.
Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 20, 413-420. #(33), #(45), #(21) 

McDaniel, T.R. (1984). A primer on motivation: Principles old and new. Phi
Delta Kappan, 65, 46-49. #(3), #(21)

McDermott, P.A. (1981). Sources of error in the psychoeducational diagnosis
of children. The Journal of School Psychology, 19, 31-44. #(29), #(22)

McDonagh, E.C., McIlvane, W.J., & Stoddard, L.T. (1984). Teaching coin
equivalences via matching-to-sample. Applied Research in Mental Retardation,
5, 177-197. #(33), #(6) 

McDonald, E.T., & Schultz, A.R. (1973). Communication boards for cerebral
palsied children. Journal of Speech and Hearing Disorders, 38, 73-88. #(30),
#(21)

McDonald, F.J., & Allen, D.A. (1962). An investigation of presentation,
response and correction factors in program instruction. Journal of Education-
al Research, 55, 502-504. #(3), #(9)

McDonald, J., & Gillette, Y. (1984). Conversation engineering: A pragmatic
approach to early social competence. Seminars in Speech and Hearing Research,
31, 593-604. #(30)

McDonald, J.E., & Sheperd, G. (1976). The autistic child: A challenge for
educators. Psychology in the Schools, 13, 248-256. #(21), #(2)

McDonnell, J.J., Hardman, M.L., & Hightower, J. (1989). Employment prepara-
tion for high school students with severe handicaps. Mental Retardation, 27,
396-405. #(33)

McDonnell, J.J., Horner, R., & Williams, J. (1984). Comparison of three
strategies for teaching generalized grocery shopping to high school students
with severe handicaps. Journal of the Association for Persons with Severe
Handicaps, 9, 123-132. #(27), #(7), #(21)

McDougall, A. (1985). Input-output devices: Some ways forward: Journal of
Computer-Assisted Learning, 1, 33-39. #(16)

McDowell, J.J. (1982). The importance of Herrnstein's mathematical statement
of the law of effect for behavior therapy. American Psychologist, 37,
771-779. #(3), #(6), #(29)

McDowell, J.J. (1986). On the falsifiability of matching theory. Journal of
the Experimental Analysis of Behavior, 45, 63-74. #(3), #(6), #(14)

McEachin, J.J., Smith, T., & Lovaas, O.I. (1993). Long-term out come for chil-
dren with autism who received early intensive behavioral treatment. American
Journal on Mental Retardation, 97, 359-372. #(21), #(43)

McFall, R.M., & Lissesand, D. (1971). Behavior rehearsal with modeling and
coaching in assertion training. Journal of Abnormal Psychology, 77, 313-323.
#(18), #(41)

McFaul, S.A. (1983). An examination of direct instruction. Educational
Leadership, 40, 67-69. #(15)

McGee, C.S., Kauffman, J.M., & Nussen, J.L. (1977). Children as therapeutic
change agents: Reinforcement intervention paradigms. Review of Educational
Research, 47, 451-477. #(3), #(14)

McGee, G.G., Almeida, M.C., Sulzer-Azaroff, B., & Feldman, R.S. (1992).
Promoting reciprocal interactions via peer incidental teaching. Journal of
Applied Behavior Analysis, 25, 117-126. #(36), #(37)

McGee, G.G., Krantz, P., Mason, D., & McClannahan, L. (1983). A modified
incidental-teaching procedure for autistic youth: Acquisition and generaliza-
tion of receptive object labels. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 16,
329-338. #(2), #(30), #(7)

McGee, R., & Share, D.L. (1988). Attention deficit disorder -hyperactivity
and academic failure: Which comes first and which should be treated? Journal
of the American Academy of Child and Adolescent Psychiatry, 27, 318-325.
#(1), #(4)

McGeoch, J.A. (1932). Forgetting and the law of disuse. Psychological Reivew,
39, 352-370. #(11)

McGonigle, J.J., Duncan, D., Cordisco, L., & Barrett, R.P. (1982). Visual
screening: An alternative method for reducing stereotypic behaviors. Journal
of Applied Behavior Analysis, 15, 461-467. #(20), #(3)

McGonigle, J.J., Rojahn, J., Dixon, J., & Strain, P.S. (1987). Multiple
treatment interference in the alternating treatments design as a function of
the inter-component interval length. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis,
20, 171-178. #(48)

McGregor, D. (1967). The professional manager. New York: McGraw-Hill. #(34),
#(42)

McGurk, H. (1974). Visual perception in young infants. In B. Foss (Ed.), New
perspectives in child development (pp. 11-52). New York: Penguin Books.
#(12), #(48), #(38)

McIlvane, W.J., & Stoddard, L.T. (1981). Acquisition of matching-to-sample
performance in severe retardation: Learning by exclusion. Journal of Mental
Deficiency Research, 25, 33-48. #(45), #(6) 

McIntire, R.B. (1970). Evaluation of instructional materials and programs:
Applications of a systems approach. Exceptional Children, 37, 213-220. #(29),
#(5)

McKeachie, W.J. (1974). Decline and fall of the laws of learning. Educational
Researcher, 3, 7-11. #(15)

McKeon, R. (Ed.). (1941). The basic works of Aristotle. New York: Random
House. #(34), #(35)

McKenzie, B.E., & Day, R.H. (Eds.). (1987). Perceptual development in early
infancy: Problems and issues. Hillsdale, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum. #(34), #(12)

McKoon, G., Ratcliff, R., & Dell, G.S. (1986). A critical evaluation of the
semantic-episodic distinction. Journal of Experimental Psychology: Learning,
Memory, and Cognition, 12, 295-306. #(11)

McLaren, J., & Bryson, S.E. (1987). Review of recent epidemiological studies
of mental retardation: Prevalence, associated disorders, and etiology.
American Association on Mental Retardation, 92, 243-254. #(21), #(45), #(32)

McLaughlin, M.W. (1976). Implementation as mutual adaptation: Change in
classroom organization. Teachers College Record, 77, 339-351. #(8), #(42)

McLaughlin, M.W. (1976). Implementation of ESEA Title I: A problem of
compliance. Teachers College Record, 77, 397-415. #(8), #(42)

McLaughlin, M.W., & Berman, P. (1977). Retooling staff development in a
period of retrenchment. Educational Leadership, 35, 191-194. #(23), #(42)

McLaughlin, M.W., & Marsh, D.D. (1978). Staff development and school change.
Teachers College Record, 80, 69-94. #(23), #(42)

McLean, J. (1978). Attention to compounds by retarded adults. American
Journal of Mental Deficiency, 83, 80-82. #(3)

McLean, J.E. (1970). Extending stimulus control of phoneme articulation by
operant techniques. ASHA Monographs, 14, 24-44. #(3)

McLean, J.E. (1992). Facilitated communication: Some thoughts on Biklen's and
Calculator's Interaction. American Journal of Speech-Language Pathology,
1(2), 25-27. #(30), #(2)

McLean, J.E., & Snyder-McLean, L.K. (1978). A transactional approach to early
language training. Columbus, OH: Charles E. Merrill. #(34), #(30)

McLean, J.E., Yoder, D.E., & Schiefelbusch, R.L. (Eds.). (1972). Language
intervention with the retarded: Developing strategies. Baltimore: University
Park Press. #(30), #(34)

McLean, L.P., & McLean, J.E. (1974). A language training program for
nonverbal autistic children. Journal of Speech and Hearing Disorders, 39,
186-193. #(30), #(2)

McLellan, H. (1993). Virtual reality goes to school. Computers in the 
Schools, 9(4), 5-12. #(16)

McLeskey, J. (1982). Procedures for ameliorating attentional deficits of
retarded children through instructional media design. Education and Training
of the Mentally Retarded, 17, 227-233. #(1), #(45)

McLoughlin, C.S., Garner, J.B., & Callahan, M. (1987). Getting employed,
staying employed. Baltimore: Paul H. Brookes. #(34), #(33)

McLoughlin, C.S., Sametz, L., & Streib, V.L. (1983). Prospective educator's
knowledge of children's legal rights. American Educational Research Journal,
20, 591-600. #(10)

McLoughlin, J.A., & Lewis, R.B. (1990). Assessing special students (3rd ed.).
Columbus, OH: Charles E. Merrill. #(34), #(29)

McLung, M.S. (1978). Are competency testing programs fair? Legal? Phi Delta
Kappan, 59, 397-402. #(26), #(29)

McNaughton, D., & Light, J. (1989). Teaching facilitators to support the
communication skills of an adult with severe cognitive disabilities: A case
study. Augmentative and Alternative Communication, 5, 35-41. #(30)

McNeill, D., & Freiberger, P. (1993). Fuzzy logic. New York: Simon &
Schuster. #(34), #(16)

McNeil, J.D. (1969). Forces influencing curriculum. Review of Educational
Research, 39, 293-318. #(26)

McNeill, D. (1970). The development of language. In P.H. Mussen (Ed.),
Carmichael's manual of child psychology (pp. 1061-1162). New York: John
Wiley. #(38), #(30)

McNemar, Q. (1962). Psychological statistics (3rd ed.). New York: John Wiley.
#(34), #(22) 

McReynolds, L.V., & Kearns, K.P. (1983). Beyond the basic designs. In L.V.
McReynolds & K.P. Kearns (Eds.), Single-subject experimental designs in
communicative disorders (pp. 171-228). Baltimore: University Park Press.
#(9), #(38), #(48) 

McReynolds, L.V., & Thompson, C.K. (1986). Flexibility of single-subject
experimental designs: Review of the basics of single subject designs. Journal
of Speech-Hearing Disorders, 51, 194-203. #(43), #(32), #(48)

McWilliams, P.A. (1984). Personal computers and the disabled. New York:
Quantum Press/Doubleday. #(16), #(34)

Meador, D.M. (1984). Effects of color on visual discrimination of geometric
symbols by severely and profoundly mentally retarded individuals. American
Journal of Mental Deficiency, 89, 275-286. #(6), #(21), #(45)

Meador, D.M., & Ellis, N.R. (1987). Automatic and effortful processing by
mentally retarded and nonretarded persons. American Journal of Mental
Deficiency, 91, 613-619. #(11), #(21), #(25), #(45)

Meador, D.M., Rumbaugh, D.M., Tribble, M., & Thompson, S. (1984). Facilitat-
ing visual discrimination learning of moderately and severely mentally
retarded children through illumination of stimuli. American Journal of Mental
Deficiency, 89, 313-316. #(6), #(21), #(45)

Measel, C.J., & Alfieri, P.A. (1976). Treatment of self-injurious behavior by
a combination of reinforcement for incompatible behavior and overcorrection.
American Journal of Mental Deficiency, 81, 147-153. #(3), #(19), #(14)

Medin, D.L., & Schaffer, M.M. (1978). Context theory of classification
learning. Psychological Review, 85, 207-238. #(11), #(6)

Meecham, M. (1971). The Verbal Language Development Scale. Circle Pines, MN:
American Guidance Services. #(30), #(44)

Meeker, M.N. (1969). The structure of intellect: Its interpretation and uses.
Columbus, OH: Charles E. Merrill. #(34), #(50)

Meents, C.K. (1989). Attention deficit disorder: A review of the literature.
Psychology in the Schools, 26, 168-178. #(1), #(32)

Meier, S.T. (1985). Computer aversion. Computers in Human Behavior, 1,
171-179. #(16)

Meisel, C.J. (1981). Stimulus overselectivity by mentally retarded adoles-
cents: Effects of pretraining on cue identification. American Journal of
Mental Deficiency, 86, 317-322. #(6), #(45)

Meisels, S. (1985). The efficacy of early intervention: Why are we still
asking these questions? Topics in Early Childhood Special Education, 5, 1-12.
#(25)

Melcher, J.W. (1976). Law, litigation, and handicapped children. Exceptional
Children, 43, 126-130. #(10)

Meldman, M.J. (1970). Diseases of attention and perception. New York:
Pergamon Press. #(34), #(1), #(12)

Mendelsohn, S.R., & Jennings, K.D. (1986). Characteristics of emotionally
disturbed children referred for special education assessment. Child
Psychiatry and Human Development, 16, 154-170. #(2) 

Menninger, K. (1938). Man against himself. New York: Harcourt, Brace & World.
#(34), #(3), #(25)

Menolascino, F.J. (1971). The description and classification of infantile
autism. In D.W. Churchill, G.D. Alpern, & M.K. DeMyer (Eds.), Infantile
autism: Proceedings of the Indiana University Colloquium. Springfield, IL:
Charles C Thomas. #(21), #(2), #(38)

Menolascino, F.J., & Eyde, D.R. (1979). Biophysical bases of autism.
Behavioral Disorders, 5, 41-47. #(21), #(2)

Menolascino, F.J., & McGee, J.J. (1981). The new institutions: Last ditch
arguments. Mental Retardation, 19, 215-220. #(31), #(45)

Menolascino, F.J., & McGee, J.J. (1981). Rejoinder to the Partlow Committee.
Mental Retardation, 19, 227-229. #(31), #(45), #(10)

Menolascino, F.J., McGee, J.J., & Casey, K. (1982). Affirmation of the rights
of institutionalized retarded citizens. Journal of The Association for
Persons with Severe Handicaps, 8, 63-72. #(31)

Mental Health Law Project. (1973). Basic rights of the mentally handicapped.
Washington, DC: Author. #(10), #(45)

Menyuk, P. (1978). Language: What's wrong and why. In M. Rutter & E. Schopler
(Eds.), Autism: A reappraisal of concepts and treatment (pp. 105-116). New
York: Plenum Press. #(38), #(2), #(30)

Menyuk, P. (1983). Language development and reading. In T.M. Gallagher & C.A.
Prutting (Eds.), Pragmatic assessment and intervention issues in language
(pp. 151-170). San Diego: College-Hill Press. #(30), #(17)

Menyuk, P., & Quill, K. (1985). Semantic problems in autistic children. In E.
Schopler & G. Mesibov (Eds.), Communication problems in autism (pp. 127-145).
New York: Plenum Press. #(38), #(2), #(30)

Menzel, H. (1978). Meaning: Who needs it? In M. Brenner, P. Marsh, & M.
Brenner (Eds.), The social contexts of method (pp. 140-171). New York: St.
Martin's Press. #(38), #(29)

Merbaum, M. (1973). The modification of self-destructive behavior by a
mother-therapist using aversive stimulation. Behavior Therapy, 4, 442-447.
#(3), #(19)

Mercatoris, M., & Craighead, W.E. (1974). Effects of nonparticipant
observation on teacher and pupil classroom behavior. Journal of Educational
Psychology, 66, 512-519. #(29)

Mercer, C.D., & Mercer, A.R. (1989). Teaching students with learning problems
(3rd ed.). Columbus, OH: Charles E. Merrill. #(34), #(28)

Mercer, C.D, & Snell, M.E. (1977). Learning theory research in mental
retardation. Columbus, OH: Charles E. Merrill. #(45), #(25), #(34)

Mercer, J.R. (1973). Labeling the mentally retarded. Berkeley, CA: University
of California Press. #(34), #(45), #(39)

Mercer, J.R. (1975). Psychological assessment and the rights of children. In
N. Hobbs (Ed.), Issues in classification of children (Vol. 1, pp. 109-147).
San Francisco: Jossey-Bass. #(29), #(38)

Mergler, N., & Goldstein, M. (1983). Why are there old people? Human
Development, 26, 130-143. #(43)

Merriam, S. (1988). Case study research in education: A qualitative approach.
San Francisco: Jossey-Bass. #(34), #(29)

Merrill, E.C. (1985). Differences in semantic processing speed of mentally
retarded and nonretarded persons. American Journal of Mental Deficiency, 90,
71-80. #(11)

Merritt, D.D., & Liles, B.Z. (1989). Narrative analysis: Clinical applica-
tions of story generation and story retelling. Journal of Speech and Hearing
Disorders, 54, 429-438. #(17), #(30)

Merrow, J. (1974). The politics of federal educational policy: The case of
educational review. Teachers College Record, 76, 19-38. #(23)

Mervis, C.B., & Crisafi, M.A. (1982). Order of acquisition of subordinate,
basic, and superordinate level categories. Child Development, 53, 258-266.
#(11)

Mesaros, R.A., & Donnellan, A.M. (1987). Issues in individualized placement
for students with autism. In D.J. Cohen & A.M. Donnellan (Eds.), Handbook of
autism and pervasive developmental disorders. New York: John Wiley & Sons.
#(38), #(2)

Merton, R.K. (1957). Social theory and social structure. Glencoe: Free Press.
#(35), #(34)

Mesibov, G.B. (1976). Implications of the normalization principle for
psychotic children. Journal of Autism and Childhood Schizophrenia, 6,
360-377. #(2)

Messick, S. (1989). Validity. In R. Linn (Ed.), Educational measurement (3rd
ed., pp. 13-104). New York: MacMillan. #(38), #(29)

Metcalfe, J., & Fisher, R.P. (1986). The relation between recognition memory
and classification learning. Memory and Cognition, 14, 164-173. #(11), #(6)

Metfessel, N.S., & Michael, W.B. (1967). A paradigm involving multiple
criterion measures for the evaluation of the effectiveness of school
programs. Educational and Psychological Measurement, 27, 931-944. #(29), #(9)

Metz, J.R. (1965). Conditioning generalized imitation in autistic children.
Journal of Experimental Child Psychology, 2, 389-399. #(3), #(2), #(7), #(41)

Meyen, E.L. (1978). IBAS Objective cluster bank (Vol. 2): Severely and
profoundly retarded. Bellevue, WA: Edmark. #(5), #(34), #(21)

Meyen, E.L. (1979). Exceptional children and youth: An introduction. Denver:
Love Publishing. #(21), #(34)

Meyen, E.L. (1990). The legal foundations of special education. In E.L.
Meyen, Exceptional children in today's schools (2nd ed., pp. 47-73). Denver:
Love Publishing. #(10), #(38)

Meyen, E.L., & Altman, R. (1973). Individualizing instruction for pre-service
teachers: An applicable competency-based training model. Focus on Exceptional
Children, 5(1), 1-11. #(5)

Meyen, E.L., & Altman, R. (1976). Public schools programming for the
severely/profoundly handicapped: Some researchable problems. Education and
Training of the Mentally Retarded, 11, 39-45. #(5), #(9), #(21), #(45)

Meyer, E.L., & Evans, I. (1986). Modification of excess behavior: An adaptive
and functional approach for educational and community contexts. In R.H.
Horner, L.H. Meyer, & H.D. Fredericks (Eds.), Education of learners with
severe handicaps: Exemplary service strategies (pp. 315-350). Baltimore: Paul
H. Brookes. #(38), #(3)

Meyen, E.L., & Skrtic, T.M. (Eds.). (1988). Exceptional children and youth:
An introduction (3rd ed.). Denver: Love Publishing. #(34)

Meyer, B., & McConkie, G.W. (1973). What is recalled after hearing a passage?
Journal of Educational Psychology, 65, 109-117. #(17), #(11)

Meyer, L.H., Peck, C.A., & Brown, L. (Eds.). (1991). Critical issues in the
lives of people with severe disabilities. Baltimore: Paul H. Brookes. #(34),
#(21)

Meyers, A.W., & Craighead, W.E. (1979). Classroom treatment of psychotic
children: Specificity of responses to operative contingencies. Behavior
Modification, 3, 73-96. #(3)

Meyers, L.F. (1984). Use of microprocessors to remediate speech through
literacy. In W.H. Perkins (Ed.), Current therapy of communication disorders:
Language handicaps in children (pp. 43-55). New York: Thieme-Stratton. #(16),
#(38)

Meyerson, L., Kerr, N., & Michael, J.L. (1967). Behavior modification in
rehabilitation. In S.W. Bijou & D.M. Baer (Eds.), Child development: Readings
in experimental analysis (pp. 214-239). New York: Appleton-Century-Crofts.
#(38), #(25), #(3)

Michael, J. (1974). Statistical inference for individual organism research:
Some reactions to a suggestion by Gentile, Roden, and Klein. Journal of
Applied Behavior Analysis, 7, 627-628. #(3), #(43)

Michael, J. (1974). Statistical inference for individual organism research:
Mixed blessing or curse? Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 7, 647-653.
#(22)

Michael, J. (1975). Positive and negative reinforcement: A distinction that
is no longer necessary: Or a better way to talk about bad things. Behavior-
ism, 3, 33-44. #(3), #(14), #(35)

Michael, J. (1980). Flight from behavior analysis. The Behavior Analyst, 3,
1-22. #(3), #(35)

Michael, J. (1982). Distinguishing between discriminative and motivational
functions of stimuli. Journal of the Experimental Analysis of Behavior, 57,
149-155. #(3). #(6) 

Michael, J. (1988). Establishing operations and the mand. Analysis of Verbal
Behavior, 6, 39. #(30)

Michelson, L., Sugai, D., Wood, R., & Kazdin, A.E. (1983). Social skills
assessment and training with children: An empirically-based handbook. New
York: Plenum Press. #(34), #(37), #(29)

Michelson, L., & Wood, R. (1980). Behavioral assessment and training of
children's social skills. Progress in Behavior Modification, 9, 241-292.

Mickenberg, N.H. (1979). The silent clients: Legal and ethical considerations
in representing severely and profoundly retarded individuals. Stanford Law
Review, 31, 625-635. #(10), #(21), #(40)

Milby, J.B. (1970). Modification of extreme social isolation by contingent
social reinforcement. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 3, 149-152. #(3),
#(14)

Miles, H.L. (1983). Apes and language: The search for communicative
competence. In J. deluce & H.T. Wilder (Eds.), Language in primates:
Perspectives and implications (pp. 43-61). New York: Springer. #(38), #(30)

Miles, S., & August, A. (1990). Courts, gender, and "the right to die." Law,
Medicine and Health Care, 18, 85-95. #(10)

Milgram, N.A. (1969). The rationale and irrationale in Zigler's motivational
approach to mental retardation. American Journal of Mental Deficiency, 73,
527-532. #(45)

Milgrim, S. (1963). Behavioral study of obedience. Journal of Abnormal Social
Psychology, 67, 371-378. #(3), #(14), #(29)

Milgrim, S. (1964). Issues in the study of obedience: A reply to Baumrind.
American Psychologist, 19, 848-852. #(3), #(14), #(29)

Milgrim, S. (1965). Some conditions of obedience and disobedience to
authority. Human Relations, 18, 57-76. #(3), #(29), #(14)

Milgrim, S. (1974). Obedience to authority. New York: Harper & Row. #(3),
#(29), #(14), #(34)

Milgrim, S. (1974). The dilemma of obedience. Phi Delta Kappan, 55, 603-606.
#(3), #(14), #(29)

Mill, J.S. (1884). A system of logic. London: Longmans, Green. (Original work
published 1843.) #(34), #(35)

Miller, D.J., & Hersen, M. (Eds.). 1992. Research fraud in the behavioral and
biomedical sciences. New York: Wiley. #(34), #(43), #(3)

Miller, D.T., & Ross, M. (1975). Self-serving biases in the attribution of
causality: Fact or fiction? Psychological Bulletin, 82, 213-225. #(25), #(18)

Miller, G.A. (1956). The magical number seven, plus or minus two: Some limits
on our capacity for processing information. Psychological Review, 63, 81-97.
#(11)

Miller, J., & Allaire, J. (1987). Augmentative communication. In M.E. Snell
(Ed.), Systematic instruction of persons with severe handicaps (3rd ed., pp.
273-297). Columbus, OH: Charles E. Merrill. #(9), #(21), #(34)

Miller, J.G., & Schoenfelder, D.S. (1969). A rational look at special class
placement. Journal of Special Education, 3, 397-403. #(39)

Miller, L. (1976). Behavioral principles and experimental communities. In 
W.E. Craighead, A.E. Kazdin, & M.J. Mahoney (Eds.), Behavior modification: 
Principles, issues, and applications (pp. 289-309). Boston: Houghton Mifflin.
#(38), #(3), #(27)

Miller, L. (1989). Classroom-based language intervention. Language, Speech,
and Hearing Services in Schools, 20, 153-169. #(30)

Miller, N.E., & Dollard, J. (1941). Social learning and imitation. Westport,
CT: Greenwood Press. #(34), #(41)

Miller, P.H., & Bigi, L. (1977). Children's understanding of how stimulus
dimensions affect performance. Child Development, 48, 1712-1715. #(12), #(25)

Miller, R.I. (1967). An overview of educational change. In R.I. Miller (Ed.),
Perspectives on educational change (pp. 1-20). New York: Appleton-Century-
Crofts. #(38), #(42)

Miller, S.D., & Smith, D.E.P. (1985). Differences in literal and inferential
comprehension after reading orally and silently. Journal of Educational
Psychology, 77, 341-348. #(17)

Miller, S.J., & Sloane, H.N. (1976). The generalization effects of parent
training across stimulus settings. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 9,
355-370. #(3), #(7)

Miller, W.C. (1977). What's wrong with in-service education? It's topless!
Educational Leadership, 35, 31-34. #(8)

Miller, W.H. (1988). Reading diagnosis kit (2nd ed.). Boston: Center for
Applied Research in Education. #(17). #(29)

Miller, W.R., & Seligman, M.E. (1975). Depression and learned helplessness in
man. Journal of Abnormal Psychology, 84, 228-238. #(37)

Mills v. Board of Education. (1972). 348 F. Supp. 866 (D.D.C.). #(10)

Milner, S.D. (1980). Teaching teachers about computers: A necessity for
education. Phi Delta Kappan, 61, 544-546. #(16) 

Milner, S.D., & Wildberger, A.M. (1977). Determining appropriate uses of
computers in education. Computers and Education, 1, 117-123. #(16) 

Milofsky, C.D. (1974). Why special education isn't special. Harvard
Educational Review, 44, 437-458. #(21)

Minkin, N., Braukmann, C.J., Minkin, B.L., Timbers, G.D., Timbers, B.J.,
Fixsen, L., Phillips, E.L., & Wolf, M.M. (1976). The social validation and
training of conversational skills. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 9,
127-139. #(30), #(27)

Minnesota Education. (1976). Mainstreaming: Origins and implications [Entire
issue]. 2. #(27), #(39)

Mire, S.P., & Chisholm, R.W. (1990). Functional communication goals for
adolescents and adults who are severely and moderately mentally handicapped.
Language, Speech, and Hearing Services in Schools, 21, 57-78. #(30), #(45)

Mirenda, P., & Dattilo, J. (1987). Instructional techniques in alternative
communication for learners with severe intellectual disabilities. Augmentat-
ive and Alternative Communication, 3, 143-152. #(30)

Mirenda, P., Donnellan, A.M., & Yoder, D.E. (1983). Gaze behavior: A new 
look to an old problem. Journal of Autism and Developmental Disabilities, 13,
397-409. #(1)

Mirenda, P., & Iacono, T. (1988). Strategies for promoting augmentative and
alternative communication in natural contexts with students with autism.
Focus on Autistic Behavior, 3(4), 1-16. #(2), #(30)

Mirenda, P., Iacono, T., & Williams, R. (1990). Communication options for
persons with severe and profound disabilities: State of the art and future
directions. Journal of the Association for Persons with Severe Handicaps,
15(1), 3-21. #(30), #(21)

Mirenda, P., & Santogrossi, J. (1985). A prompt-free strategy to teach
pictorial communication system use. Augmentative and Alternative Communica-
tion, 1, 143-150. #(30)

Mirenda, P., & Schuler, A. (1988). Teaching individuals with autism and
related disorders to use visual-spatial symbols to communicate. In S.
Blackstone, E. Cassatt-James, & D. Bruskin (Eds.), Augmentative communica-
tion: Intervention strategies (pp. 5.1-17-5.1-25). Rockville, MD: American
Speech-Language-Hearing Association. #(2), #(38), #(30)

Mirenda, P., & Schuler, A. (1989). Augmenting communication for persons with
autism: Issues and strategies. Topics in Language Disorders, 9, 24-43. #(30,
#(2)

Mishler, E. (1979). Meaning in context: Is there any other kind? Harvard
Educational Review, 19, 1-19. #(25), #(30)

Mishler, E. (1986). Research interviewing: Context and narrative. Cambridge,
MA: Harvard University Press. #(34), #(29), #(43)

Mitchell, D.B. (1989). How many memory systems? Evidence from aging. Journal
of Experimental Psychology: Learning, Memory, and Cognition, 15, 3-49. #(11),
#(46)

Mitchell, J.V. (Ed.). (1985). The ninth mental measurements yearbook.
Lincoln, NE: University of Nebraska Press. #(4), #(29)

Mitchell-Kernan, C., & Kernan, K. (1977). Pragmatics of directive choice
among children. In S. Ervin-Tripp & C. Mitchell-Kernan (Eds.), Child
Discourse (pp. 189-208). New York: Academic Press. #(30), #(38)

Mitford, J. (1973). Kind and usual punishment. New York: Random House. #(3),
#(34), #(14)

Mithaug, D.E. (1981). Prevocational training for retarded students.
Springfield, IL: Charles C Thomas. #(34), #(9), #(21), #(33)

Mithaug, D.E., & Hagmeier, L.D. (1978). The development of procedures to
assess prevocational competencies of severely handicapped young adults.
AAESPH Review, 3, 94-115. #(33), #(21) 

Mithaug, D.E., Hagmeier, L.D., & Haring, N.G. (1977). The relationship
between training activities and job placement in vocational education of the
severely and profoundly handicapped. AAESPH Review, 2, 89-109. #(33), #(21) 

Mithaug, D.E., & Hanawalt, D.A. (1978). The validation of procedures to
assess prevocational task preferences in retarded adults. Journal of Applied
Behavior Analysis, 11, 153-162. #(27), #(29)

Mithaug, D.E., Mar, D., Stewart, J., & McCalmon, D. (1980). Assessing
prevocational competencies of profoundly, severely, and moderately retarded
persons. Journal of the Association for Persons with Severe Handicaps, 5,
270-284. #(27), #(29), #(21)

Mithaug, D.E., Martin, J.E., & Agran, M. (1987). Adaptability training: The
goal of transitional programming. Exceptional Children, 52, 1-8. #(27)

Mittler, P. (Ed.). (1977). Research to practice in mental retardation: Vol.
II. Education and training. Baltimore: University Park Press. #(21), #(45)

Mittler, P., & Berry, P. (1977). Demanding language. In P. Mittler (Ed.),
Research to practice in mental retardation: Vol. II. Education and training
(pp. 245-251). Baltimore: University Park Press. #(21), #(30), #(38), #(45)

Mitzel, H.E., Best, J.H., & Rabinowitz, W. (1982). Transfer of learning.
Encyclopedia of Educational Research, 4, 1948-1955. #(3)

Moerk, E.L. (1975). Piaget's research as applied to the exploration of
language development. Merrill-Palmer Quarterly, 21, 151-170. #(13)

Molley, J.S. (1973). Trainable children: Curriculum and procedures. New York:
John Day. #(5), #(21), #(45)

Molnar, G.E. (1978). Analysis of motor disorders in retarded infants and
young children. American Journal of Mental Deficiency, 83, 213-222. #(12)

Monette, M.L. (1979). Needs assessment: A critique of philosophical
assumptions. Adult Education, 29, 83-95. #(29), #(35)

Montessori, M. (1964). The Montessori method. (A.E. George, Trans.) New York:
Schocken Books. (Original work published 1912.) #(12), #(34)

Montgomery, J. (1987). Augmentative communication: Selecting successful
interventions. Seminars in Speech and Hearing, 8, 187-197. #(30, #(5)

Moon, M.S., & Griffin S.L. (1988). Supported employment service delivery
models. In P. Wehman & M.S. Moon (Eds.), Vocational Rehabilitation and
Supported Employment (pp. 17-30). Baltimore: Paul H. Brookes. #(27), #(33),
#(38)

Moon, M.S., Inge, K.J., Wehman, P., Brooke, V., & Barcus, J.M. (1990).
Helping persons with severe mental retardation get and keep employment:
Supported employment issues and strategies. Baltimore: Paul H. Brookes.
#(33), #(34), #(27), #(21), #(45)

Moon, M.S., Kiernan, W., & Halloran, W. (1990). School-based vocational
programs and labor laws: A 1990 update. Journal of The Association for
Persons with Severe Handicaps, 15, 177-185. #(27), #(33)

Moore, B.J., & Shiek, D.A. (1971). Toward a theory of early infantile autism.
Psychological Review, 78, 451-456. #(21), #(2)

Moore, E. (1977). The education of the paraprofessional. Education and
Training of the Mentally Retarded, 12, 296-303. #(21)

Moore, J. (1980). On behaviorism and private events. The Psychological
Record, 30, 459-475. #(3)

Moore, R., & Goldiamond, I. (1964). Errorless establishment of visual
discrimination using fading procedures. Journal of the Experimental Analysis
of Behavior, 7, 269-272. #(6)

Moore, S., Donovan, B., & Hudson, A. (1993). Brief report: Facilitator-
suggested conversational evaluation of facilitated communication. Journal of
Autism and Developmental Disorders, 23, 541-552. #(30)

Moore, S., Donovan, B., Hudson, A., Dykstra, J., & Lawrence, J. (1993). Brief
report: Evaluation of eight case studies of facilitated communication.
Journal of Autism and Developmental Disorders, 23, 531-540. #(30)

Moores, D.F. (1974). Alternative communication modes: Visual motor systems.
In R.L. Schiefelbusch (Ed.), Nonspeech language and communication: Analysis
and intervention (pp. 27-48). Baltimore: University Park Press. #(30), #(38)

Moores, D.F. (1987). Education the deaf: Psychology, principles, and
practices (3rd ed.). Boston: Houghton Mifflin. #(34), #(21)

Moran, M. (1988). Reading and writing disorders in the learning disabled
student. In N. Lass, L. McReynolds, J. Northern, & D. Yoder (Eds.), Handbook
of speech-language pathology and audiology (pp. 835-857). Toronto: B.C.
Decker. #(38), #(17), #(28)

More, T. (1516/1965). Utopia. New York: Penguin. #(35), #(34)

Morgan, S.R. (1987). Abuse and neglect of handicapped children. San Diego:
College-Hill Press. #(34), #(25)

Mori, A.A., & Masters, L.F. (1980). Defining and assessing adaptive behavior.
In A.A. Mori & L.F. Masters (Eds.), Teaching the severely mentally retarded:
Adaptive skills training (pp. 23-43). Rockville, MD: Aspen Publications.
#(27), #(21), #(34), #(45), #(38)

Morgan, J., & O'Brien, J.S. (1972). The counterconditioning of a vomiting
habit by sips of ginger ale. Journal of Behavior Therapy and Experimental
Psychiatry, 3, 135-137. #(3)

Morganstern, K.P. (1973). Implosive therapy and flooding procedures: A
critical review. Psychological Bulletin, 79, 318-334. #(3), #(32)

Morris, E.K. (1982). Some relationships between interbehavioral psychology
and radical behaviorism. Behaviorism, 10, 187-216. #(3)

Morris, R.G., Gick, M.L., & Craik, R.I.M. (1988). Processing resources and
age differences in working memory. Memory & Cognition, 16, 362-366. #(11)

Morris, R.J., & Blatt, B. (Eds.). (1986). Special education: Research and
trends. New York: Pergamon Press. #(34), #(15)

Morris, R.J., & Collier, S.J. (1987). Assessment of attention deficit
disorder and hyperactivity. In C.L. Farme & J.L. Matson (Eds.), Handbook of
assessment in child psychopathology (pp. 271-321). New York: Plenum Press.
#(38), #(1), #(4)

Morrison, D., & Pothier, P. (1972). Two different motor training programs and
the development of mentally retarded preschoolers. American Journal of Mental
Deficiency, 77, 258-268. #(12), #(45)

Morse, W.C. (1976). The helping teacher/crisis teacher concept. Focus on
Exceptional Children, 8(4), 1-12. #(21)

Morse, W.H., & Kelleher, R.T. (1977). Determinants of reinforcement and
punishment. In W.K. Honig & J.E.R. Staddon (Eds.), Handbook of operant
behavior: Areas of research and application (pp. 174-200). Englewood Cliffs,
NJ: Prentice-Hall. #(38), #(14)

Moses, J.M. (1992, September 25). Courts weigh tool enabling autistic youths
to 'talk'. The Wall Street Journal, p. B3. #(2), #(30)

Mosk, M.D., & Bucher, B. (1984). Prompting and stimulus shaping procedures
for teaching visual-motor skills to retarded children. Journal of Applied
Behavior Analysis, 17, 23-34. #(3), #(12), #(9)

Mosley, A., Faust, M., & Reardon, D.M. (1970). Effects of social and
nonsocial stimuli on the stereotyped behaviors of retarded children. American
Journal of Mental Deficiency, 74, 809-811. #(3), #(20)

Mosley, J.L. (1980). Selective attention of mildly mentally retarded and non-
retarded individuals. American Journal of Mental Deficiency, 84, 568-576.
#(1), #(45)

Mosley, J.L. (1985). High-speed memory-scanning task performance of mildly
mentally retarded and nonretarded individuals. American Journal of Mental
Deficiency, 90, 81-89. #(11)

Mosteller, F., & Moynihan, D. (1972). On equality of educational opportunity.
New York: Random House. #(34), #(24)

Mostofsky, D.I. (Ed.). (1970). Attention: Contemporary theory and analysis.
New York: Appleton-Century-Crofts. #(1), #(34)

Mowrer, D.E. (1971). General principles of positive transfer of training.
Journal of Speech and Hearing, 4, 443-445. #(3), #(7)

Mowrer, O.H. (1968). The law of effect, conditioning, and the problem of
punishment. In E.E. Boe & R.M. Church (Eds.), Punishment: Issues and
experiments (pp. 181-187). New York: Appleton-Century-Crofts. #(3), #(14),
#(38)

Mowrer, O.M. (1954). The psychologist looks at language. American Psycholo-
gist, 9, 660-694. #(30)

Moynihan, D. (1972, Fall). Equalizing education: In whose benefit? The Public
Interest, pp. 69-89. #(35), #(24)

Mueller, D.J. (1976). Mastery Learning: Partly boon, partly boondoggle.
Teachers College Record, 78, 41-52. #(26)

Muenzinger, K.F. (1934). Motivation in learning: I. Electric shock for correct
response in the visual discrimination habit. Journal of Comparative Psychol-
ogy, 17, 267-277. #(14), #(6) 

Muenzinger, K.F. (1934). Motivation in learning: II. The function of electric 
shock for right and wrong responses in human subjects. Journal of Experimental
Psychology, 17, 439-448. #(14), #(6)

Mulhern, T., & Baumeister, A.A. (1969). An experimental attempt to reduce
stereotypy by reinforcement procedures. American Journal of Mental Deficien-
cy, 74, 69-74. #(3), #(20), #(14)

Mulligan, M., Guess, D., Holovet, J., & Brown, F. (1980). The individualized
curriculum: Sequencing model (I): Implications from research on massed,
distributed, or spaced trial training. Journal of The Association for Persons
with Severe Handicaps, 5, 325-336. #(5),  #(9), #(15)

Mulligan, M., Lacy, L., & Guess, D. (1982). Effects of massed, distributed
and spaced trial sequencing on severely handicapped students' performance.
Journal of the Association for Persons with Severe Handicaps, 7, 48-61.
#(15), #(21)

Mullins, M., & Rincover, A. (1985). Comparing autistic and normal children
along the dimensions of reinforcement maximization, stimulus sampling, and
responsiveness to extinction. Journal of Experimental Child Psychology, 40,
350-375. #(3), #(2)

Muma, J.R. (1978). Language handbook. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall.
#(30), #(34)

Muma, J.R., & Baumeister, A.A. (1975). Programmatic evaluation in mental
retardation: Alternatives to taxonomic approaches. Journal of Special
Education, 9, 337-344. #(45), #(29)

Mundy, P., Sigman, M., Ungerer, J., & Sherman, T. (1986). Defining the social
deficits of autism: The contribution of nonverbal communication measures.
Journal of Child Psychology and Psychiatry, 27, 657-669. #(2), #(30), #(37)

Murdock, C.W. (1974). Sterilization of the retarded: A problem or a solution?
California Law Review, 62, 917-934. #(21), #(40)

Murnane, R.J. (1981). Interpreting the evidence on school effectiveness.
Teachers College Record, 83, 19-35. #(26)

Murphy, G. (1982). Sensory reinforcement in the mentally handicapped and
autistic child: A review. Journal of Autism and Developmental Disorders, 12,
265-278. #(3), #(12), #(2), #(14), #(45), #(32)

Murphy, G.H., Steele, K., Gilligan, T., Yeow, J., & Spare, D. (1977).
Teaching a picture language to a non-speaking retarded boy. Behaviour
Research and Therapy, 15, 198-201. #(6)

Murphy, J.T. (1971). Title I of ESEA: The politics of implementing federal
education reform. Harvard Educational Review, 41, 35-63. #(8), #(23), #(42)

Murphy, J.V., & Miller, R.E. (1959). Spatial contiguity of cue, reward, and
response in discrimination learning by children. Journal of Experimental
Psychology, 58, 485-489. #(6)

Murphy, R., Doughty, N., & Nunes, D. (1979). Multielement designs. Mental
Retardation, 17, 23-27. #(48)

Murrone, J., & Gynther, M.D. (1989). Implicit theories or halo effect?
Conceptions about children's intelligence. Psychological Reports, 65,
1187-1193. #(29), #(25), #(35)

Musen, G., & Treisman, A. (1990). Implicit and explicit memory for visual
patterns. Journal of Experimental Psychology: Learning, Memory, and
Cognition, 16, 127-137. #(11)

Musselwhite, C.R. (1987). Adaptive play for special needs children:
Strategies to enhance communication and learning. San Diego, CA: College-Hill
Press. #(21), #(30), #(34)

Musselwhite, C.R., & St. Louis, K. (1988). Communication programming for
persons with severe handicaps (2nd ed.). Austin, TX: Pro-Ed. #(34), #(30),
#(16)

Mussen, P.H. (Ed.). (1983). Handbook of child psychology: Vol. IV. Socializa-
tion, personality, and social development. New York: John Wiley. #(25),
#(37), #(34)

Mussen, P.H., Conger, J.J., & Kagan, J. (1974). Child development and
personality (4th ed.). New York: Harper & Row. #(25), #(34)

Myers, A.E. (1970). The impact of evaluative research on educational programs
for the poor. Teachers College Record, 71, 371-378. #(29)

Myers, D.G., Simco, M.E., & Stalma, E.S. (1973). The right to education
child: A curriculum for the severely and profoundly handicapped. Springfield,
IL: Charles C Thomas. #(21), #(34), #(5)

Myers, J.J., & Deibert, A. (1971). Reduction of self-abusive behavior in a
blind boy by using a feeding response. Journal of Behavior Therapy and
Experimental Psychiatry, 2, 141-144. #(19)

Myerson, J., & Hale. S. (1984). Practical implications of the matching law.
Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 17, 367-380. #(6), #(3), #(14)

Myerson, J., & Hale. S. (1984). Concurrent schedules and matching in applied
settings: A reply to Fuqua. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 17,
387-389. #(6), #(3), #(14)

Nadler, B., & Shore, K. (1980). Individualized education programs: A look at
realities. Education Unlimited, 2, 30-34. #(9), #(14)

Nagy, P., & Griffiths, A.K. (1982). Limitations of recent research relating
Piaget's theory to adolescent thought. Review of Educational Research, 52,
513-556. #(13) 

Naisbitt, J., & Aburdene, P. (1990). Megatrends 2000: Ten new directions for
the 1990's. New York: William Morrow. #(34), #(16), #(35)

Naruse, H., & Ornitz, E.M. (Eds.). (1992). Neurobiology of infantile autism.
New York: Elsevier Science Publishing. #(2), #(34)

Nathanson, D.E. (1977). Designing instructional media for severely retarded
adolescents: A theoretical approach to trait-treatment interaction research.
American Journal of Mental Deficiency, 82, 26-32. #(9), #(21)

Nation, J.R., & Woods, D.J. (1980). Persistence: The role of partial rein-
forcement in psychotherapy. Journal of Experimental Psychology: General, 
109, 175-207. #(14)

Nawas, M.M., & Braun, S.H. (1970). The use of operant techniques for
modifying the behavior of the severely and profoundly. Part II: The
techniques. Mental Retardation, 8(3), 18-24. #(3), #(21), #(45)

Neel, R.S., Billingsley, F.F., McCarty, F., Symonds, D., Lambert, C., Lewis-
Smith, N., & Hasashiro, R. (1983). Teaching autistic children: A functional
curriculum approach. Seattle, WA: University of Washington. #(2), #(5), #(34)

Neff, N.A., Shafer, M.S., Egel, A.L., Cataldo, M.F., & Parrish, J.M. (1983).
The class specific effects of compliance training with "do" and "don't"
requests: Analogue analysis and classroom application. Journal of Applied
Behavior Analysis, 16, 81-99. #(3), #(4), #(37)

Neigher, W.D., & Schulberg, H.S. (1982). Evaluating the outcomes of human
service programs: A reassessment. Evaluation Review, 6, 731-752. #(29), #(39)

Neisser, U. (1964). Visual search. Scientific American, 210, 94-102. #(11),
#(1)

Neisser, U. (1979). The concept of intelligence. Intelligence, 3, 217-227.
#(25), #(35)

Neisworth, J.T., & Smith, R.M. (1973). Modifying retarded behavior. Boston:
Houghton Mifflin. #(3), #(34)

Neisworth, J.T., & Smith, R.M. (Eds.). (1978). Retardation: Issues,
assessment, and intervention. New York: McGraw-Hill. #(34), #(45), #(29)

Nelson, C.C., & Schmidt, L.J. (1971). The question of the efficacy of special
classes. Exceptional Children, 37, 381-384. #(39)

Nelson, C.M. (1981). Classroom management. In J.M. Kauffman & D.P. Hallahan
(Eds.), Handbook of special education (pp. 663-687). Englewood Cliffs, NJ:
Prentice-Hall. #(3), #(38)

Nelson, C.M., Rutherford, R.B., & Wolford, B.I. (1987). Special education in
the criminal justice system. Columbus, OH: Charles E. Merrill. #(34), #(10)

Nelson, D.O., & Hurst, R.L. (1963). Significant or not significant. The
Research Quarterly, 34, 239-242. #(22)

Nelson, G.L., Cone, J.D., & Hanson, C.R. (1975). Training correct utensil use
in retarded children: Modeling vs. physical guidance. American Journal of
Mental Deficiency, 80, 114-122. #(3)

Nelson, H.F. (1982). A simultaneous equation model of the provision of
services to handicapped children at the school district level. American
Educational Research Journal, 19, 579-597. #(27)

Nelson, K.E. (1974). Concept, word and sentence: Interrelations in acquisi-
tion and development. Psychological Review, 81, 267-284. #(30), #(17)

Nelson, K.E. (1977). The syntagmatic-paradigmatic shift revisited: A review
of research and theory. Psychological Bulletin, 84, 93-116. #(32), #(11)

Nelson, K.E. (1981). Individual differences in language development:
Implications for development and language. Developmental Psychology, 17,
170-187. #(30)

Nelson, R.O., & Evans, I.M. (1968). The combination of learning principles
and speech techniques in the treatment of noncommunicative children. Journal
of Child Psychology and Psychiatry, 9, 111-124. #(15), #(3), #(30)

Nelson, R.O., & Hayes, S.C. (1979). The nature of behavior assessment: A
commentary. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 12, 491-500. #(3), #(29)

Nettlebeck, T., & McLean, J. (1984). Mental retardation and inspection time:
A two-stage for sensory registration and central processing. American Journal
of Mental Deficiency, 89, 83-90. #(11), #(45)

Nevin, J. A. (1988). Behavioral momentum and the partial reinforcement effect.
Psychological Bulletin, 103, 44-56. #(14)

Nevin, J.A., Cumming, W.W., & Berryman, R. (1963). Ratio reinforcement of
matching behavior. Journal of the Experimental Analysis of Behavior, 6,
149-154. #(14), #(6)

Newell, A., & Simon, H.A. (1972). Human problem solving. Englewood Cliffs,
NJ: Prentice-Hall. #(34), #(42)

Newsom, C.D. (1981). School. In O.I. Lovaas (Ed.), Teaching developmentally
disabled children: The me book (pp. 223-233). Baltimore: University Park
Press. #(21), #(38)

Newsom, C.D., Carr, E.G., & Lovaas, O.I. (1979). The experimental analysis
and modification of autistic behavior. In R.S. Davidson (Ed.), Modification
of pathological behavior (pp. 109-187). New York: Gardner Press. #(3), #(21),
#(2), #(38)

Newson, C.D., Hovanitz, C.A., & Rincover, A. (1988). Autism. In E.J. Mash &
L.G. Terdal (Eds.), Behavioral assessment of childhood disorders (2nd ed., 
pp. 355-401). New York: Guilford Press. #(2), #(38), #(29)

Newsom, C.D., & Lovaas, O.I. (1987). A neurobiological nonalternative:
Rejoinder to Lewis, Baumeister, and Mailman. Journal of Applied Behavior
Analysis, 20, 259-262. #(12), #(20)

Newsom, C.D., & Rincover, A. (1981). Behavioral assessment of autistic
children. In E.J. Mash & L.G. Terdal (Eds.), Behavioral assessment of
childhood disorders (pp. 397-439). New York: Guilford Press. #(3), #(2),
#(4), #(38), #(29)

Newsom, C.D., & Rincover, A. (1981). Autism. In E.J. Mash & L.G. Terdal
(Eds.), Behavioral assessment of childhood disorders (pp. 397-439). New York:
Guildford Press. #(21), #(2), #(38)

Newsom, C.D., & Rincover, A. (1989). Autism. In E.J. Mash & R.A Barkley (Eds.),
Treatment of childhood disorders (pp. 286-346). New York: Guilford. #(2), #(3),
#(38)

Newsom, C.D., & Simon, K.M. (1977). A simultaneous discrimination procedure
for the measurement of vision in nonverbal children. Journal of Applied
Behavior Analysis, 10, 633-644. #(6)

Neuringer, A. (1991). Humble behaviorism. The Behavior Analyst, 19, 137-145.
#(3)

Neuringer, C., & Michael, J.L. (Eds.). (1970). Behavior modification in
clinical psychology. New York: Appleton-Century-Crofts. #(3), #(34)

Nicholls, J.G. (1984). Achievement motivation: Conceptions of ability,
subjective experience, task choice, and performance. Psychological Review,
91, 328-346. #(29)

Nickell, G., & Pinto, J. (1986). The Computer Attitude Scale. Computers in
Human Behavior, 2, 301-306. #(16), #(18)

Nickerson, R.S., Perkins, D.N., & Smith, E.E. (1985). The teaching of
thinking. Hillsdale, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum. #(34), #(25)

Nidiffer, D.F., & Fowler, S.C. (1981). Nonretarded and mentally retarded
children's performance on a manual-control task with and without visual
feedback. American Journal of Mental Deficiency, 85, 521-529. #(23), #(45)

Nie, N., Hull, C., Jenkins, J., Steinbrenner, K., & Bent, D. (1975). SPSS:
Statistical package for social services (2nd ed.). New York: McGraw-Hill.
#(16), #(22) 

Nietupski, J., Scheutz, G., & Ockwood, L. (1980). The delivery of communica-
tion therapy services to severely handicapped students: A plan for change.
Journal of the Association for Persons with Severe Handicaps, 5(1), 13-23.
#(27), #(30), #(21)

Nihira, K., Foster, R., Shellhaas, M., & Leland, H. (1975). AAMD Adaptive
Behavior Scale Manual (rev.). Washington, D.C.: American Association on
Mental Deficiency. #(44), #(45)

Nisbet, J., & Callahan M. (1987). Achieving success in integrated workplaces
with severe disabilities. In S.I. Taylor, D. Biklen, & J. Knoll (Eds.),
Community integration for people with severe disabilities (pp. 184-201). New
York: Teachers College Press. #(27), #(33), #(21)

Nisbet, R.E., Caputo, C., Legant, P., & Marcek, J. (1973). Behavior as seen
by the actor and as seen by the observer. Journal of Personality and Social
Psychology, 27, 154-165. #(12), #(3)

Nisbet, J., & Hagner, D. (1988). Natural supports in the work place: A re-
examination of supported employment. Journal of The Association for Persons
with Severe Handicaps, 13, 260-267. #(33)

Nisbet, J., & Vincent, L. (1986). The differences in inappropriate behavior
and instructional interactions in sheltered and nonsheltered work environ-
ments. Journal of the Association for Persons with Severe Handicaps, 11,
19-27. #(27), #(21)

Nissen, M.J., & Bullemer, P. (1987). Attentional requirements of learning:
Evidence from performance measures. Cognitive Psychology, 19, 1-32. #(1)

Nitko, A.J. (1980). Distinguishing the many varieties of criterion-referenced
tests. Review of Educational Research, 50, 461-485. #(29)

Noah, H.J. (1970). Education needs rational decision-making. Teachers College
Record, 72, 187-200. #(23)

Nobel, J.H., Conley, R.W., Banjerjee, S., & Goodman, S. (1991). Supported
employment in New York state: A comparison of benefits and costs. Journal of
Disability Policy Studies, 2, 39-74. #(33)  

Noble, J.G. (1985). Teacher termination and competency testing. Texas Law
Review, 63, 933-957. #(10), #(23), #(40)

Noel, M.M., Burke, P.J., & Valdivieso, C.H. (1985). Educational policy and
severe mental retardation. In D. Bricker & J. Filler (Eds.), Severe mental
retardation: From theory to practice (pp. 12-35). Lancaster, PA: Lancaster
Press. #(23), #(38), #(21), #(45)

Noonan, M.J., & Bickel, W.K. (1981). The ethics of experimental design.
Mental Retardation, 6, 271-274. #(27)

Noonan, M.J., Brown, F., Mulligan, M., & Rettig, M. (1982). Educability of
severely handicapped persons: Both sides of the issue. Journal of The
Association for Persons with Severe Handicaps, 7(7), 3-12. #(21)

Nordquist, V.M., & Whaler, R.G. (1973). Naturalistic treatment of an autistic
child. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 6, 79-87. #(3), #(2), #(27),
#(7)

Norman, D.A. (1969). Memory and attention: An introduction to human
information processing. New York: John Wiley & Sons. #(11), #(34), #(1)

Norman, D.A., & Rumelhart, D.E. (1970). A system for perception and memory.
In D.A. Norman (Ed.), Models of human memory (pp. 21-64). New York: Academic
Press. #(11), #(38), #(12)

Norris, W.C. (1977). Via technology to a new era in education. Phi Delta
Kappan, 58, 451-453. #(15)

Norton, G.R., Austen, S., Allen, G.E., & Hilton, J. (1983). Acceptability of
time out from reinforcement procedures for disruptive child behavior: A
further analysis. Child and Family Behavior Therapy, 5, 31-41. #(3), #(9),
#(14)

Norton, Y. (1975). Neurodevelopment and sensory integration. American Journal
of Occupational Therapy, 29, 93-100. #(12)

Novak, A.R., & Heal, L.W. (Eds.). (1980). Community integration of develop-
mentally disabled individuals. Baltimore: Paul H. Brookes. #(34), #(39)

Novick, M.R. (1982). Educational testing: Inferences in relevant subpopulati-
ons. Educational Researcher, 11, 4-10. #(29)

Nowakowski, J.R. (1983). On educational evaluation: A conservation with Ralph
Tyler. Educational Leadership, 40, 24-29. #(29)

Nowicki, S., & Strickland, B.R. (1973). A locus of control scale for
children. Journal of Consulting and Clinical Psychology, 40, 148-154. #(37),
#(25)

Nowicki, S., & Walker, C. (1973). Achievement in relation to locus of control
scale for children. Journal of Consulting and Clinical Psychology, 40,
148-154. #(25), #(18) 

Nugent, P.M., & Mosley, J.L. (1987). Mentally retarded and nonretarded
individuals' attention allocation and capacity. American Journal of Mental
Deficiency, 91, 598-605. #(1), #(11), #(21), #(45)

Nunnally, J. (1960). The place of statistics in psychology. Education and
Psychological Measurement, 20, 641-650. #(22)

Nunnally, J. (1978). Psychometric theory (2nd ed.). New York: McGraw-Hill.
#(29), #(34)

Oakes, W.F. (1975). On the alleged falsity of the null hypothesis. The
Psychological Record, 25, 265-272. #(29)

O'Banion, D., Armstrong, B., Cummings, R.A., & Stange, J. (1978). Disruptive
behavior: A dietary approach. Journal of Autism and Childhood Schizophrenia,
8, 325-337. #(18)

O'Brien (1985). First steps in reading for the language-different child. In
C.S. Simon (Ed.), Communication skills and classroom success: Therapy
methodologies for language-learning disabled students (pp. 275-288). San
Diego, CA: College-Hill Press. #(38), #(30), #(17)

O'Brien, F., & Azrin, N.H. (1972). Developing proper mealtime behaviors of
the institutionalized retarded. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 5,
389-399. #(3), #(18), #(21)

O'Brien, F., Azrin, N.H., & Bugle, C. (1972). Training profoundly retarded
children to stop crawling. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 5, 131-137.
#(9), #(21) 

O'Brien, F., Bugle, C., & Azrin, N.H. (1972). Training and maintaining a
retarded child's proper eating. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 5,
67-72. #(9), #(18), #(21)

O'Connor, G. (1983). Social support of mentally retarded persons. Mental
Retardation, 21, 187-196. #(45), #(27)

O'Connor, L., & Schery, S. (1986). A comparison of microcomputer-aided and
traditional language therapy for developing communication skills in nonoral
toddlers. Journal of Speech and Hearing Disorders, 51, 356-361. #(16), #(30)

O'Connor, N., & Hermelin, B. (1967). The selective visual attention of
psychotic children. Journal of Child Psychology and Psychiatry, 8, 167-179.
#(1), #(2) 

O'Connor, R.D. (1972). Relative efficacy of modeling, shaping, and the
combined procedures for modification. Journal of Abnormal Psychology, 79,
327-334. #(3) 

O'Dell, S. (1974). Training parents in behavior modification: A review.
Psychological Bulletin, 8, 418-433. #(3), #(42), #(32)

Oden, S., & Asher, S.R. (1977). Coaching children in social skills for
friendship making. Child Development, 48, 495-506. #(37)

Odom, R.D., & Guzman, R.D. (1972). Development of hierarchies of dimensional
salience. Developmental Psychology, 6, 271-287. #(11)

Odom, S.L., & Asher, S.R. (1977). Coaching children in social skills for
friendship making. Child Development, 48, 495-506. #(37)

Odom, S.L., Chandler, L.K., Ostrosky, M., McConnell, S.R., & Reaney, S.
(1992). Fading teacher prompts from peer-initiation intervention for young
children with disabilities. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 25,
307-317. #(3), #(37), #(9)

Odom, S.L., Hoyson, M., Jamieson, B., & Strain, P.S. (1985). Increasing
handicapped preschoolers peer social interactions: Cross-setting and
component analysis. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 18, 3-16. #(36),
#(29)

Odom, S.L., & Karnes, M.B. (Eds.). (1988). Early intervention for infants and
children with handicaps: An empirical base. Baltimore: Paul H. Brookes.
#(34), #(25)

Odom, S.L., & McConnell, S.R. (1985). A performance-based conceptualization
of social competence of handicapped preschool children: Implications for
assessment. Topics in Early Childhood Special Education, 4, 1-19. #(29),
#(37)

Odom, S.L., McConnell, S.R., & McEvoy, M.A. (Eds.). (1992). Social competence
of young children with disabilities: Issues and strategies for intervention.
Baltimore: Paul H. Brookes. #(34), #(15), #(37)

Odom, S.L., & Strain, P.S. (1984). Classroom-based social skills instruction
for severely handicapped preschool children. Topics in Early Childhood
Special Education, 4, 97-116. #(37), #(21)

Odom, S.L., & Strain, P.S. (1984). Peer-mediated approaches for promoting 
children's social interaction: A review. American Journal of Orthopsychiatry, 
54, 544-557. #(32), #(37)

Odom, S.L., & Strain, P.S. (1986). A comparison of peer-initiation and
teacher-antecedent interventions for promoting reciprocal social interaction
of autistic preschoolers. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 19, 59-71.
#(3), #(37), #(36)

Odom, S.L., & Watts, E. (1991). Reducing teacher prompts in peer-initiation
interventions through visual feedback and correspondence training. Journal of
Special Education, 25, 26-43. #(37), #(4)

Oettinger, A., & Marks, S. (1969). Educational technology: New myths and old
realities. Harvard Educational Review, 38, 697-717. #(16), #(15)

Oettinger, A.G., & Zapol, N. (1972). Will information technologies help
learning? Teachers College Record, 74, 5-54. #(16)

Office of Special Education, U.S. Department of Education. (1980). Summary of
existing legislation relating to the handicapped. Washington, DC: Author.
#(10), #(34) 

O'Hanlon, J. (1983). Theory Z in school administration? Educational
Leadership, 40, 16-18. #(23)

O'Kelly, L.E., & Steckle, L.C. (1939). A note on long-enduring emotional
responses in the rat. Journal of Psychology, 8, 125-131. #(3)

O'Leary, K.D. (1980). Pills or skills for hyperactive children. Journal of
Applied Behavior Analysis, 13, 191-204. #(4)

O'Leary, K.D., & Becker, W.G. (1967). Behavior modification of an adjustment
class: A token reinforcement program. Exceptional Children, 33, 637-642. #(3)

O'Leary,, K.D., Becker, W.C., Evans, M.B., & Saudargas, R.A. (1969). A token
reinforcement program in a public school: A replication and systematic an-
alysis. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 2, 3-13. #(3), #(14)

O'Leary, K.D., & Drabman, R.S. (1971). Token reinforcement programs in the
classroom: A review. Psychological Bulletin, 75, 379-398. #(3), #(14), #(32)

O'Leary, K.D., Kaufman, K.F., Kass, R.E., & Drabman, R.S. (1970). The effects
of loud and soft reprimands on the behavior of disruptive students.
Exceptional Children, 37, 145-155. #(3)

O'Leary, K.D., & Kent, R. (1973). Reversibility: The strength or weakness of
behavior modification? In L.A. Hamerlynck, L.C. Handy, & E.J. Mash (Eds.),
Behavior Change: Methodology, concepts, and practice (pp. 69-96). Champaign,
IL: Research Press. #(38), #(43)

O'Leary, K.D., & O'Leary, S.G. (Eds.). (1977). Classroom management: The
successful use of behavior modification (3rd ed.). New York: Pergamon Press.
#(3), #(34)

O'Leary, K.D., & O'Leary, S.G. (1977). Behavior modification with children.
In K.D. O'Leary & S.G. O'Leary (Eds.), Classroom management: The successful
use of behavior modification (3rd ed., pp. 1-53). New York: Pergamon Press.
#(38), #(3)

O'Leary, K.D., Poulos, R.W., & Devine, V.T. (1972). Tangible reinforcers:
Bonuses or bribes? Journal of Consulting and Clinical Psychology, 38, 1-8.
#(3), #(14) 

O'Leary, K.D., Rosenbaum, A., & Hughes, P.C. (1978). Direct and systematic
replication: A rejoinder. Journal of Abnormal Child Psychology, 6, 295-297.
#(43)

O'Leary, S.G., & Dubey, D.R. (1979). Applications of self-control procedures
by children: A review. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 12, 449-465.
#(18), #(32) 

Ollendick, T.H., Dailey, D., & Shapiro, E.S. (1983). Vicarious reinforcement:
Expected and unexpected effects. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 16,
485-491. #(3), #(14) 

Ollendick, T.H., & Matson, J. (1978). Overcorrection: An overview. Behavior
Therapy, 9, 830-842. #(3), #(14)

Ollendick, T.H., & Shapiro, E.S. (1984). An examination of vicarious rein-
forcement processes in children. Journal of Experimental Child Psycholo-
gy, 37, 78-91. #(3), #(14) 

Olley, J.G. (1985). Social aspects of communication in children with autism.
In E. Schopler & G.B. Mesibov (Eds.), Communication problems in autism (pp.
311-328). New York: Plenum Press. #(38), #(2), #(30)

Olson, D.R. (1971). Information-processing limitations of mentally retarded
children. American Journal of Mental Deficiency, 75, 478-486. #(11), #(45) 

Olson, G.M., & Sherman, T. (1983). Attention, learning, and memory. In M.M.
Haith & J.J. Campos (Eds.), Handbook of child psychology: Vol. 2. Infancy and
developmental psychobiology. New York: John Wiley. #(38), #(1), #(11)

Olver, R.R., & Hornsby, J.R. (1966). On equivalence. In J.S. Bruner, R.R.
Olver, & P.M. Greenfield (Eds.), Studies in cognitive growth (pp. 68-86). New
York: John Wiley. #(6), #(38), #(7)

O'Neill, R. (1990). Establishing verbal repertoires: Toward the application
of general use analysis and programming. Analysis of Verbal Behavior, 8,
113-126. #(30), #(7)

O'Neill, R., Horner, R., Albin, R., Storey, K., & Sprague, J. (1990).
Functional analysis of behavior: A practical assessment guide. Sycamore, IL:
Sycamore Publishing Co. #(34), #(3)

Oppenheim, R.C. (1974). Effective teaching methods for autistic children.
Springfield, IL: Charles C Thomas. #(5), #(2), #(34)

Oppenheim, R.C. (1976). Comment on "Reactions to 'Employing electric shock
with autistic children: A review of the side effects.'" Journal of Autism and
Childhood Schizophrenia, 6, 291-292. #(3), #(21), #(2), #(32)

Opton, E.M. (1975). Institutional behavior modification as a fraud and sham.
Arizona Law Review, 17, 20-28. #(40), #(3)

Orelove, F.P. (1978). Administering education for the severely handicapped
after PL 94-142. Phi Delta Kappan, 59, 699-702. #(10), #(21)

Orlando, R. (1961). The functional role of discriminative stimuli in free
operant performance of developmentally retarded individuals. The Psychologi-
cal Review, 11, 153-161. #(6), #(3), #(45)

Orlando, R., Bijou, S.W., Tyler, R.M., & Marshall, D.A. (1960). A laboratory
for the experimental analysis of developmentally retarded children.
Psychological Reports, 7, 261-267. #(3), #(29), #(45)

Ornitz, E.M. (1969). Disorders of perception common to early infantile autism
and schizophrenia. Comparative Psychiatry, 10, 259-274. #(2)

Ornitz, E.M. (1973). Childhood autism: A review of the clinical and
experimental literature. California Medicine, 118, 21-47. #(32), #(2)

Ornitz, E.M. (1988). Autism: A disorder of directed attention. Brain
Dysfunction, 1, 309-322. #(2), #(1)

Ornitz, E.M., Atwell, C.W., Kaplan, A.R., & Westlake, J.R. (1985). Brainstem
dysfunction in autism. Archives of General Psychiatry, 42, 1018-1025. #(2)

Ornitz, E.M., Guthrie, D., & Farley, A.J. (1977). The early development of
autistic children. Journal of Autism and Childhood Schizophrenia, 7, 207-229.
#(2), #(25) 

Ornitz, E.M., Guthrie, D., & Farley, A.J. (1978). The early symptoms of
childhood autism. In G. Serban (Ed.), Cognitive defects in the development of
mental illness (pp. 24-42). New York: Brunner/Mazel. #(38), #(2)

Ornitz, E.M., & Ritvo, E.R. (1968). Perceptual inconsistency in infantile
autism. Archives of General Psychiatry, 18, 76-98. #(2), #(12)

Ornitz, E.M., & Ritvo, E.R. (1976). The syndrome of autism: A critical
review. American Journal of Psychiatry, 133, 609-621. #(21), #(2), #(32)

Ornstein, A.C., & Levine, D.U. (1981). Teacher behavior research: Overview
and outlook. Phi Delta Kappan, 62, 592-596. #(42)

Ortega, D.F. (1978). Relaxation exercise with cerebral palsied adults showing
spasticity. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 11, 447-451. #(3), #(21)

Osborne, J.G. (1969). Free time as a reinforcer in the management of
classroom behavior. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 2, 113-118. #(3),
#(14)

Osborne, J.G., & Gatch, M.B. (1989). Stimulus equivalence and receptive
reading by hearingimpaired preschool children. Language, Speech, and Hearing
Services in Schools, 20, 6375. #(6)

O'Shea, L.J., & O'Shea, D.J. (1988). Using repeated reading. Teaching
Exceptional Children, 20(2), 26-29. #(17)

Osnes, P.G., Guevremont, D.C., & Stokes, T.F. (1986). If I say I'll talk
more, then I will: Correspondence training to increase peer directed talk by
socially withdrawn children. Behavior Modification, 16, 81-99. #(3), #(30),
#(37)

Osofosky, J.D. (Ed.). (1987). Handbook of infant development (2nd ed.). New
York: John Wiley. #(38), #(25)

Otto, L. (1984). Computer promises, computer realities. Classroom Computer
Learning, 4, 65-66. #(16)

Overall, J.E., & Campbell, M. (1988). Behavioral assessment of psychopatholo-
gy in children: Infantile autism. Journal of Clinical Psychology, 44,
706-716. #(2), #(29) 

Owens, R.E. (1988). Language development (2nd ed.). Columbus, OH: Charles E.
Merrill. #(30), #(34)

Pace, G.M., Ivancic, M.T., Edwards, G.L., Glynnis, L., Iwata, B.A., & Page,
T.J. (1985). Assessment of stimulus preference and reinforcer value with
profoundly retarded individuals. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 18,
249-255. #(3), #(14), #(45)

Pace, G.M., Ivancic, M.T., Edwards, G.L., Iwata, B.A., & Page, T.J. (1985).
Assessment and training teachers. In R.L. Koegel, A. Rincover, & A.L. Egel
(Eds.), Educating and understanding autistic children (pp. 178-202). San
Diego, CA: College-Hill Press #(2), #(29), #(38), #(42)

Pace, G.M., Iwata, B.A., Edwards, G.L., & McCosh, K.C. (1986). Stimulus
fading and transfer in the treatment of self-restraint and self-injurious
behavior. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 19, 381-389. #(3), #(19),
#(7)

Packard, R.G. (1970). The control of "classroom attention": A group
contingency for complex behavior. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 3,
13-28. #(1), #(14), #(29), #(21) 

Paddock, S.C., & Packard, J.S. (1981). On the conduct of site relations in
educational research. Educational Researcher, 10, 14-17. #(29)

Page, T.J., Iawata, B.A., & Neef, N.A. (1976). Teaching pedestrian skills to
retarded persons: Generalization from the classroom to the natural environ-
ment. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 9, 433-444. #(27), #(7)

Page, T.J., Iawata, B.A., & Reid, D.H. (1982). Pyramidal training: A large-
scale application with institutional staff. Journal of Applied Behavior
Analysis, 15, 335-351. #(31)

Paivio, A. (1971). Imagery and verbal processes, New York: Holt, Rinehart,
and Winston. #(34), #(11)

Palincsar, A.S., & Brown, A.L. (1984). Reciprocal teaching of comprehension-
fostering and comprehension-monitoring activities. Cognition and Instruction,
1, 117-235. #(17)

Paloutzian, R.F., Hasazi, J., Streifel, J., & Edgar, C.L. (1971). Promotion
of positive social interaction in severely retarded young children. American
Journal of Mental Deficiency, 75, 519-524. #(3), #(21)

Paluszny, M.J. (1979). Autism: A practical guide for parents and profession-
als. Syracuse, NY: Syracuse University Press. #(21), #(2), #(34)

Pancsofar, E.L., & Bates, P. (1985). The impact of acquisition of successive
training exemplars on generalization. Journal of The Association for Persons
with Severe Handicaps, 10, 95-104. #(21), #(7)

Paniagua, F.A., & Baer, D.M. (1982). The analysis of correspondence training
as a chain reinforceable at any point. Child Development, 53, 786-798. #(30),
#(3) 

Paniagua, F.A., Braverman, C., & Capriotti, R.M. (1986). Use of a treatment
package in the management of a profoundly mentally retarded girl's pica and
self-stimulation. American Journal of Mental Deficiency, 90, 550-557. #(20),
#(45)

Panyan, M.C. (1971). Behavior modification: New ways to teach old skills.
Lawrence, KS: H & H Enterprises. #(3)

Panyan, M.C., & Hall, V.R. (1978). Effects of serial versus concurrent task
sequencing on acquisition, maintenance, and generalization. Journal of
Applied Behavior Analysis, 11, 67-74. #(3), #(7)

Panyan, M.V. (1984). Computer technology for autistic students. Journal of
Autism and Developmental Disorders, 14, 375-382. #(16), #(2) 

Panyan, M.V., Hummel, J., & Jackson, L.D. (1988). The integration of
technology in the curriculum. Journal of Special Education Technology, 9,
109-119. #(16), #(5) 

Papagiannis, G.J., Kless, S.J., & Bickel, R.N. (1982). Toward a political
economy of educational innovation. Review of Educational Research, 52,
245-290. #(42), #(23), #(8) 

Papandropoulou, I., & Sinclair, H. (1974). What is a word? Human Development,
17, 241-258. #(30), #(17)

Papert, S. (1980). Mindstorms. New York: Basic Books. #(16)

Parette, H.P., Strother, P.O., & Hourcade, J.J. (1986). Microswitches and
adaptive equipment for severely impaired students. Teaching Exceptional
Children, 19(1), 15-18. #(16), #(21)

Paris, S.G., & Cairns, R.B. (1972). An experiment and ethological analysis of
social reinforcement with retarded children. Child Development, 43, 717-729.
#(3), #(14), #(27)

Paris, S.G., & Lindauer, B.K. (1976). The role of inference in children's
comprehension and memory for sentences. Cognitive Psychology, 8, 217-227.
#(11), #(17) 

Paris, S.G., & Lindauer, B.K. (1977). Constructive aspects of children's
comprehension and memory. In R.V. Kail, Jr. & J.W. Hagen (Eds.), Perspectives
on the development of memory and cognition (pp. 35-60). New York: John Wiley.
#(11), #(38)

Parisi, D. (1974). What is behind child utterances? Journal of Child
Language, 1, 97-105. #(30)

Parke, R.D. (1969). Effectiveness of punishment as an interaction of
intensity, timing, agent nurturance and cognitive structuring. Child
Development, 40, 213-235. #(3), #(14) 

Parker, L. (1980). Teacher competencies or certification competencies.
Behavioral Disorders, 5, 163-168. #(26)

Parkin, A.J., & Streete, S. (1988). Implicit and explicit memory in young
children and adults. British Journal of Psychology, 79, 361-369. #(11)

Parks, S. (1983). The assessment of autistic children: A selective review of
available instruments. Journal of Autism and Developmental Disorders, 13,
255-268. #(32), #(2), #(29)

Parsonson, B.S., Baer, A.M., & Baer, D.M. (1974). The application of
generalized correct social contingencies by institutional staff: An
evaluation of the effectiveness and durability of a training program. Journal
of Applied Behavior Analysis, 7, 427-437. #(27), #(7), #(42), #(29)

Patterson, A.H. (1980). Professional malpractice: Small cloud, but growing
bigger. Phi Delta Kappan, 61, 193-196. #(10)

Patterson, F. (1978). Conversations with a Gorilla. National Geographic,
154(4), 438-465. #(30), #(3)

Patterson, G.R. (1974). A basis for identifying stimuli which control
behaviors in natural settings. Child Development, 45, 900-911. #(3)

Patterson, G.R. (1976). The aggressive child: Victim and architect of a 
coercive system. In E.J. Mash. L.A. Hamerlynck, & L.C. Handy (Eds.), Be-
havior modification and families (pp. 267-316). New York: Bruner/Mazel.
#(38), #(3), #(4)


Patterson, G.R., & Anderson, D. (1964). Peers as social reinforcers. Child
Development, 35, 951-960. #(36), #(14)

Patterson, G.R., & Bank, L. (1986). Bootstrapping your way in the nomological
thicket. Behavioral Assessment, 8, 49-73. #(29)

Patterson, G.R., Cobb, J.A., & Ray, R.S. (1972). Direct intervention in the
classroom: A set of procedures for the aggressive child. In F.W. Clark, D.R.
Evans, & L.A. Hammerlynch (Eds.), Implementing behavior programs in schools
and clinics (pp. 151-186). Champaign, IL: Research Press. #(38), #(4)

Patterson, G.R., McNeal, S., Hawkins, N., & Phelps, R. (1967). Reprogramming
the social environment. Child Psychology and Psychiatry, 8, 181-195. #(27),
#(3) 

Patterson, J.L., & Czajkowski, T.J. (1979). Implementation: Neglected phase
in curriculum change. Educational Leadership, 37, 204-206. #(8)

Pattison, E.M. (1978). The living-dying process. In C.A. Garfield (Ed.),
Psychosocial care of the dying patient (pp. 133-168). New York: McGraw-Hill.
#(38). #(3), #(25) 

Patton, C.V. (1976). Selecting special students: Who decides? Teachers
College Record, 78, 101-124. #(10)

Patton, J.R., Beirne-Smith, M., & Payne, J.S. (1990). Mental retardation (3rd
ed.). Columbus, OH: Charles E. Merrill. #(34), #(45)

Patton, M.Q. (1990). Qualitative research and evaluation methods (2nd ed.).
Newbury Park, CA: Sage Publications. #(34), #(29), #(43)

Paul, J.L. (1981). Special delivery models for special education. In J.M.
Kauffman & D.P. Hallahan (Eds.), Handbook of Special Education (pp. 291-310).
Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall. #(8), #(21), #(38)

Paul, R. (1987). Communication. In D.J. Cohen, A. Donnellan, & R. Paul
(Eds.), Handbook of autism and pervasive developmental disorders (pp. 61-84).
New York: John Wiley. #(30), #(2), #(38)

Payne, J.S., Patton, J.R., Kauffman, J.M., Brown, G.B., & Payne, R.A. (1987).
Exceptional children in focus (4th ed.). Columbus, OH: Charles E. Merrill.
#(34), #(15)

Pearson, P.D. (Ed.). (1984). Handbook of reading research. New York: Longman.
#(38), #(17)

Pearson, P.D., & Johnson, D.D. (1978). Teaching reading comprehension. New
York: Holt, Rinehart and Winston. #(34), #(17)

Pearson, P.H. (Ed.). (1972). Physical therapy services in the developmental
disabilities. Springfield, IL: Charles C Thomas. #(21), #(34)

Peck, C.A., & Cooke, T.P. (1983). Benefits of mainstreaming at the early
childhood level: How much can we expect? Analysis and Intervention in
Developmental Disabilities, 3, 1-22. #(39)

Peck, C.A., & Schuler, A.L. (1983). Classroom-based intervention for children
with autism: Theoretical and practical considerations for the speech and
language specialist. Seminars in Speech and Language, 4, 93-103. #(30),
#(39), #(38), #(2)

Peckham, H.D. (1976). Computers, confusion and complacency. Computers and
Education, 1, 39-45. #(16)

Peine, H.A., Liu, L., Blakelock, H., Jenson, W.R., & Osborne, J.G. (1991).
The use of contingent water misting in the treatment of self-choking. Journal
of Behavioral Therapy and Experimental Psychiatry, 22, 225-231. #(21), #(18)

Pelham, W.E., & Murphy, H.A. (1986). Attention deficit and conduct disorders.
In M. Hersen (Ed.), Pharmacological and behavioral treatment: An integrative
approach (pp. 108-148). New York: John Wiley. #(38), #(1), #(4)

Pendergrass, V.E. (1972). Timeout from positive reinforcement following
persistent high-rate behavior in retardates. Journal of Applied Behavior
Analysis, 5, 85-91. #(3), #(14) 

Penney, R.K. (1967). Effect of reward and punishment in children's orienta-
tion and discrimination learning. Journal of Experimental Psychology, 75,
140-142. #(3), #(14), #(6)

Pennington, F.M., & Luszcz, M.A. (1975). Some functional properties of iconic
storage in retarded and nonretarded subjects. Memory and Cognition, 3,
295-301. #(11) 

Pennsylvania Association of Retarded Children v. Commonwealth of Pennsylvania
(1972). 343 F. Supp. 279 (E.D. Pa). Consent Agreement. #(10)

Pennypacker, H.S. (1986). The challenge of technology transfer: Buying in
without selling out. The Behavior Analyst, 9, 147-156. #(3), #(35)

Perfetti, C. (1977). Language comprehension and fast decoding: Some
psycholinguistic prerequisites for skilled reading comprehension. In J.T.
Guthrie (Ed.), Cognition, curriculum, and comprehension (pp. 20-41). Newark,
DE: International Reading Association. #(30), #(38), #(17), #(5)

Perkins, C.C., Jr. (1968). An analysis of the concept of reinforcement.
Psychological Review, 75, 155-172. #(14)

Perkins, W.H. (1977). Speech pathology. St. Louis, MO: Mosby. #(34), #(30)

Perpich, J.G. (1975). Behavior modification in institutional settings: A
critique. Arizona Law Review, 17, 33-38. #(3), #(40)

Peters, A. (1977). Language learning strategies: Does the whole equal the sum
of the parts? Language, 53, 560-573. #(30)

Peters, T.J., & Waterman, R.H. (1982). The rational model. In T.J. Peters &
R.H. Waterman, In search of excellence: Lessons from America's best-run
companies (pp. 29-52). New York: Harper & Row. #(42), #(38)

Peters, T.J., & Waterman, R.H. (1982). Managing ambiguity and paradox. In
T.J. Peters & R.H. Waterman, In search of excellence: Lessons from America's
best-run companies (pp. 89-118). New York: Harper & Row. #(38), #(42)

Peterson, C.A., & Gunn, S.L. (1984). Therapeutic recreation (2nd ed.).
Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall. #(34), #(12)

Peterson, L. (1984). The "Safe at Home" game: Training comprehensive prevent-
ion skills in latchkey children. Behavior Modification, 8, 474-494. #(18)

Peterson, L. (1984). Training home safety and survival skills in latchkey 
children: A comparison of two manuals and methods. Journal of Applied Behav-
ior Analysis, 17, 279-294. #(5), #(18)

Peterson, L., & Mori, L. (1985). Prevention of child injury: An overview of
targets, mehtods, and tactics for psychologists. Journal of Counseling and
Clinical Psychology, 53, 586-595. #(18)

Peterson, L., & Schick, B. (1993). Empirically derived injury prevention rules.
Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 26, 451-460. #(18)

Peterson, L.R., Homer, A.L., & Wonderlich, S.A. (1982). The integrity of
independent variables in behavior analysis. Journal of Applied Behavior
Analysis, 15, 477-492. #(3), #(43)

Peterson, L.R. (1966). Short-term verbal memory and learning. Psychological
Review, 73, 193-207. #(30), #(11)

Peterson, P.E., & Greenstone, J.D. (1976). Two competing models of the
policy-making process: The community action controversy as an empirical test.
In W.D. Hawley, M. Lipsky, S.B. Greenberg et al. (Eds.), Theoretical
perspectives on urban politics (pp. 67-99). Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-
Hall. #(23), #(35), #(29), #(38)

Peterson, R.F. (1968). Imitation: A basic behavioral mechanism. In H.N.
Sloane & B.D. MacAulay (Eds.), Operant procedures in remedial speech and
language training (pp. 61-74). Boston: Houghton Mifflin. #(3), #(38), #(41)

Peterson, R.F. (1968). Some experiments on the organization of a class of
imitative behaviors. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 1, 225-235. #(3),
#(41) 

Peterson, R.F., & Peterson, L.R. (1968). The use of positive reinforcement in
control of selfdestructive behavior in a retarded boy. Journal of Experimen-
tal Child Psychology, 6, 351-360. #(3), #(14), #(19)

Pettigrew, T.F., & Green, R.L. (1976). A reply to Professor Coleman. Harvard
Educational Review, 46, 225-233. #(24)

Petty, L. Ornitz, E.M., Michelman, J.D., & Zimmerman, E.G. (1984). Autistic 
children who later become schizophrenic. Archives of General Psychiatry, 41,
129-135. #(2)

Pfeiffer, D., & Giampietro, M. (1977). Government policy toward handicapped
individuals. Policy Studies Journal, 1, 93-101. #(23), #(21)

Pfiffner, L.J., Rosen, L.A., & O'Leary, S.G. (1985). The efficacy of an all-
positive approach to classroom management. Journal of Applied Behavior
Analysis, 18, 257-261. #(3) 

Phillips, B.N. (1985). New directions in aptitude-treatment interaction
research: Concepts and methods. In C.R. Reynolds & V.L. Wilson (Eds.),
Methodological and statistical advances in the study of individual differenc-
es (pp. 241-273). New York: Plenum Press. #(25), #(38), #(22) 

Phillips, D.C. (1981). Toward an evaluation of the experiment in educational
contexts. Educational Researcher, 10, 13-20. #(29)

Phillips, E.L. (1968). Achievement Place: Token reinforcement procedures in a 
home-style rehabilitation setting for "pre-delinquent" boys. Journal of Ap-
plied Behavior Analysis, 1, 213-223. #(3)

Phillips, J.E., Reid, D.H., Korabek, C.A., & Hursh, D.E. (1988). Community-
based instruction with profoundly mentally retarded persons: Client and
public responsiveness. Research in Developmental Disabilities, 9, 3-21.
#(30), #(27), #(9) 

Phillips, W.A. (1983). Short-term visual memory. In D.E. Broadbent (Ed.),
Functional aspects of memory (pp. 57-71). London: Royal Society. #(11)

Piaget, J. (1926). The language and thought of the child. New York: Routledge
& Kegan Paul. #(34), #(30)

Piaget, J. (1929). The child's conception of the world. New York: Harcourt
Brace. #(34), #(13), #(25)

Piaget, J. (1932). The moral judgment of the child. New York: Harcourt Brace.
#(34), #(13), #(25)

Piaget, J. (1952). The origins of intelligence in children. New York:
International University Press. #(34), #(13), #(25)

Piaget, J. (1954). The construction of reality in the child. New York: Basic
Books. #(13), #(34), #(25)

Piaget, J. (1962). Play, dreams, and imitation in childhood. New York:
Norton. #(34), #(37)

Piaget, J. (1964). Development and learning. Journal of Research in Science
and Teaching, 2, 176-186. #(13)

Piaget, J. (1970). Piaget's theory. In P.H. Mussen (Ed.), Carmichael's Manual
of Child Psychology (3rd ed.). New York: John Wiley. #(13), #(38), #(25)

Piaget, J. (1970). The science of education of the psychology of the child.
New York: Grossman. #(13), #(34)

Piaget, J. (1985). The equilibrium of cognitive structures. Chicago:
University of Chicago Press. #(34), #(25), #(13)

Piaget, J., & Inhelder, B. (1969). The psychology of the child. New York:
Basic Books. #(13), #(34)

Pick, A.D., Christy, M.D., & Frankel, G.W. (1972). A developmental study of
visual selective attention. Journal of Experimental Child Psychology, 14,
165-175. #(1) 

Pick, A.D., Frankel, D.G., & Hess, V.L. (1975). Children's attention: The
development of selectivity. In F.M. Hetherington (Ed.), Review of child
development research (Vol. 5, pp. 325-383). Chicago: University of Chicago
Press. #(38), #(1)

Picker, M., Poling, A., & Parker, A. (1979). A review of children's self-
injurious behavior. The Psychological Record, 29, 435-452. #(3), #(19), #(32)

Pierce, K.L., & Schreibman, L. (1994). Teaching daily living skills to chil-
dren with autism in unsupervised settings through pictorial self-management. 
Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 27, 471-481. #(9), #(33)

Pierce, W.D., & Epling, W.F. (1980). What happened to analysis in applied
behavior analysis? The Behavior Analyst, 3, 1-9. #(3), #(29)

Pierce, W.D., & Epling, W.F. (1983). Choice, matching, and human behavior: A
review of the literature. The Behavior Analyst, 6, 57-76. #(6), #(32)

Pigot, H.E., Fantuzzo, J.W., & Gorsuch, R.L. (1987). Further generalization
technology: Accounting for natural covariation in generalization assessment.
Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 20, 273-278. #(3), #(7), #(29)

Pillow, B.H. (1988). Young children's understanding of attentional limits.
Child Development, 59, 38-46. #(1)

Pillow, B.H. (1989). The development of beliefs about selective attention.
Merrill-Palmer Quarterly, 35, 421-443. #(1)

Pincus, J. (1974). Incentives for innovation in the public schools. Review of
Educational Research, 44, 113-144. #(23), #(8)

Pincus, J. (1977). The Serrano Case: Policy for education or for public
finance? Phi Delta Kappan, 58, 173-179. #(23), #(8)

Pinker, S. (1991). Rules of language. Science, 253, 530-535. #(30)

Pinkston, E.M., & Linsk, N.L. (1984). Care of the elderly: A family approach.
New York: Pergamon Press. #(34), #(46)

Piper, T.J., & MacKinnon, R.C. (1969). Operant conditioning of a profoundly
retarded individual reinforced via a stomach fistula. American Journal of
Mental Deficiency, 627-630. #(21), #(3), #(9), #(45)

Pipho, C. (Ed.). (1978). Minimum competency testing in 1978: A look at state
standards. Phi Delta Kappan, 59, 585-588. #(26), #(29)

Pirsig, R.M. (1974). Zen and the art of motorcycle maintenance. New York: Wil-
liam Morrow. #(13), #(34) 

Pitts, C.E. (Ed.). (1971). Operant conditioning in the classroom: Introducto-
ry readings in educational psychology. New York: Thomas Y. Crowell. #(3),
#(34) 

P.L. 94-142. (1975, (November 29). Education for all handicapped children act
of 1975. Federal Register, pp. 773-776. #(10)

P.L. 94-142. (1976, December 30). Education for all handicapped children act
of 1975. Federal Register, pp. 56965-56968. #(10)

Platt, J.R. (1964). Strong inference. Science, 146, 1-7. #(35)

Platt, J.R. (1973). Social traps. American Psychologist, 23, 641-651. #(35)

Plienis, A.O., & Romanczyk, R.G. (1985). Analysis of performance, behavior,
and predictors for severely disturbed children: A comparison of adult versus
computer instruction. Analysis and Intervention in Developmental Disabili-
ties, 5, 345-356. #(3), #(16, #(29)

Plotkin, R., & Gill, K.R. (1979). Invisible manacles: Drugging mentally
retarded people. Stanford Law Review, 31, 637-678. #(10), #(40), #(45)

Plummer, S., Baer, D.M., & Le Blanc, J.M. (1977). Functional considerations
in the use of procedural time out and an effective alternative. Journal of
Applied Behavioral Analysis, 10, 689-705. #(3), #(14)

Poche, C., Brouwer, R., & Swearingen, M. (1981). Teaching self-protection to
young children. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 14, 169-176. #(27)

Podvin, M. (1967). The influence of music on the performance of a work task.
Journal of Music Therapy, 4(2), 52-55. #(33), #(14)

Poffenberger, A.T. (Ed.). (1954). Modern learning theory: A critical analysis
of five examples. New York: Appleton-Century-Crofts. #(34), #(3)


Pogrow, S. (1983). Shifting policy analysis and formation from an effective-
ness emphasis to a cost perspective. Educational Evaluation and Policy
Analysis, 5, 75-82. #(23)

Polloway, E.A., & Patton, J.A. (1993). Strategies for teaching learners with
special needs (5th ed.). New York: Macmillan. #(34), #(25)

Polster, R.A., & Dangel, R.F. (Eds.). (1984). Behavioral parent training:
Where it came from and where it's at. New York: Guilford Press. #(34), #(3)

Pomerantz, D.J., & Marholin, D. (1977). Vocational-rehabilitation: A time for
change. In E. Sontag (Ed.), Educational programming for the severely and
profoundly handicapped (pp. 129-141). Reston, VA: Council for Exceptional
Children. #(27), #(38), #(21), #(38)

Poole, A.D., & Yates, A.J. (1975). The modification of excessive frequency of
urination: A case study. Behavior Therapy, 6, 78-86. #(3)

Popham, W.J. (1978). Criterion-referenced measurement. Englewood Cliffs, NJ:
Prentice-Hall. #(34), #(29)

Popovich, D. (1977). A prescriptive behavioral checklist for the severely and
profoundly retarded. Baltimore: University Park Press. #(5), #(34), #(21)

Popovich, D. (1981). Effective educational and behavioral programming for
severely and profoundly handicapped students. Baltimore: Paul H. Brookes.
#(5), #(34), #(21) 

Popovich, D., & Laham, S.L. (1981). The adaptive behavior curriculum:
Prescriptive behavior analyses for moderately, severely, and profoundly
handicapped students. Baltimore: Paul H. Brookes. #(5), #(34), #(21), #(44)

Popper, K.R. (1959). The logic of scientific discovery. New York: Basic
Books. #(34), #(43)

Porges, S.W. (1980). Individual differences in attention: A possible
physiological substrate. Advances in Special Education, 2, 111-134. #(1)

Portage guide to early education. (1972). Portage, WS: Cooperative Education-
al Service. #(5), #(44)

Posner, G.J. (1974). The extensiveness of curriculum structure: A conceptual
scheme. Review of Educational Research, 44, 401-407. #(5), #(9)

Posner, G.J., & Strike, K.A. (1976). A categorization scheme for principles
of sequencing content. Review of Educational Research, 46, 665-690. #(9)

Posner, M. (1975). Psychobiology of attention. In M.S. Gazzaniga & C.
Blakemore (Eds.), Handbook of psychobiology (pp. 441-480). New York: Academic
Press. #(1), #(38) 

Posner, M. (1980). Orienting of attention. Quarterly Journal of Experimental
Psychology, 32, 3-25. #(1)

Postman, L., & Underwood, B.J. (1973). Critical issues in interference
theory. Memory & Cognition 1, 19-40. #(11)

Poulton, K.T., & Algozzine, B. (1980). Manual communication and mental
retardation: A review of research and implications. American Journal of
Mental Deficiency, 85, 145-152. #(30), #(45), #(32)

Powell, F., Finitzo-Hieber, T., Friel-Patti, S., & Henderson, D. (Eds.).
(1985). Education of the hearing impaired child. San Diego, CA: College-Hill
Press. #(34), #(21)

Powell, J., Martindale, B., Kulp, S., Martindale, A., & Bauman, R. (1977).
Taking a closer look: Time sampling and measurement error. Journal of Applied
Behavior Analysis, 10, 325-332. #(3), #(29), #(43)

Powell, J.V. (1982). A field-based approach to the validation of behavioral
competencies for young children. In N. Nir-Janiv, B. Spodek, & D. Steg
(Eds.), Early childhood education: An international perspective (pp.
505-512). New York: Plenum Press. #(38), #(3), #(29)

Powers, R.B., Cheney, C.D., & Agnostino, N.R. (1970). Errorless training of
a visual discrimination in preschool children. The Psychological Record, 20,
45-50. #(6) 

Prasse, D.P. (Ed.). (1986). Litigation and special education [Special issue].
Exceptional Children, 52(4). #(10)

Prasse, D.P. (1988). Legal influence and educational policy in special
education. Exceptional Children, 54, 302-308. #(10)

Prechtl, H.F. (1980). The optimality concept. Early Human Development, 4,
201-205. #(35)

Prehm, H.J. (1975). A competency based approach to the preparation of teacher
educators. Education and Training of the Mentally Retarded, 10, 295-298.
#(26), #(45) 

Prehm, H.J. (1976). Special education research: Retrospect and prospect.
Exceptional Children, 43, 9-19. #(29)

Premack, D. (1959). Toward empirical behavior laws: I. Positive reinforce-
ment. Psychological Review, 66, 219-233. #(3), #(14)

Premack, D. (1965). Reinforcement theory. In D. Levine (Ed.), Nebraska
Symposium on Motivation (Vol. 13). Lincoln, NB: University of Nebraska Press.
#(3), #(14), #(35), #(38)

Premack. D. (1970). A functional analysis of language. Journal of the
Experimental Analysis of Behavior, 14, 107-125. #(30), #(3)

Premack, D. (1971). Language in a chimpanzee? Science, 172, 808-822. #(30)

Premack, D. (1976). Intelligence in ape and man. Hillsdale, NJ: Lawrence
Erlbaum. #(34), #(25)

Premack, D. (1979). Species of intelligence: Debate between Premack and
Chomsky. The Sciences, 19, 6-23. #(25)

Premack, D. (1983). The codes of man and beast. The Behavioral and Brain
Sciences, 6, 125-167. #(30)

Premack, D., & Premack, A. (1974). Teaching visual language to apes and
language-deficient persons. In R.L. Schiefelbusch & L. Lloyd (Eds.), Language
perspectives--acquisition, retardation, and intervention (pp. 347-376).
Baltimore: University Park Press. #(38), #(30)

President's Committee on Mental Retardation (1970). The six-hour retarded
child. Washington, DC: U.S. Government Printing Office. #(45)

Pressley, M. (1982). Elaboration and memory development. Child Development,
53, 296-309. #(11)

Pressley, M., Levin, J.R., & Delaney, H.D. (1982). The mnemonic keyword
method. Review of Educational Research, 52, 61-92. #(11)

Pressman, J.L., & Wildavsky, A.B. (1973). Implementation. Berkeley, CA:
University of California. #(34), #(8)

Price, M., & Goodman, L. (1980). Individualized education programs: A cost
study. Exceptional Children, 46, 446-454. #(10)

Prinz, P., & Weiner, F. (1987). Pragmatics Screening Test. San Antonio, TX:
Psychological Corporation. #(30), #(29)

Prior, M. (1979). Cognitive abilities and disabilities in infantile autism:
A review. Journal of Abnormal Child Psychology, 7, 357-380. #(25), #(32),
#(2)

Prior, M., & Cummins, R. (1992). Questions about facilitated communication
and autism. Journal of Autism and Developmental Disorders, 22, 331-337. #(2),
#(30) 

Prior, M., & MacMillan, M. (1973). Maintenance of sameness in children with
Kanner's syndrome. Journal of Autism and Childhood Schizophrenia, 3, 154-167.
#(21), #(2) 

Prior, M., & Werry, J. (1986). Autism, schizophrenia and allied disorders. In
H. Quary & J. Werry (Eds.), Psychopathological disorders of childhood (3rd
ed., pp. 156-210). New York: John Wiley. #(38), #(2)

Prizant, B.M. (1983). Echolalia in autism: Assessment and intervention.
Seminars in Speech Language, 4, 63-78. #(30), #(2), #(29)

Prizant, B.M. (1983). Language acquisition and communicative behavior in
autism: Toward an understanding of the "whole" of it. Journal of Speech and
Hearing Disorders, 48, 296-307. #(2), #(30)

Prizant, B.M. (1984). Assessment and intervention of communicative problems
in children with autism. Communicative Disorders, 9, 127-142. #(30), #(2),
#(29) 

Prizant, B.M. (1988). Communication problems in the autistic client. In N.
Lass, L. McReynolds, J. Northern, & D. Yoder (Eds.), Handbook of speech-
language pathology and audiology. Toronto: Decker. #(30), #(2), #(38)

Prizant, B.M., & Rydell, P. (1984). An analysis of the functions of delayed
echolalia in autistic children. Journal of Speech Hearing and Research, 27,
183-192. #(30), #(2) 

Prizant, B.M., & Schuler, A.L. (1987). Facilitating communication: Theore-
tical foundations. In D. Cohen & A. Donnellan (Eds.), Handbook on autism 
and pervasive developmental disorders (pp. 289-300). New York: John Wiley.
#(30), #(2), #(34)

Prizant, B.M., & Wetherby, A.M. (1987). Communicative intent: A framework for
understanding social-communicative behavior in autism. Journal of the
American Academy Child Adolescent Psychiatry, 26, 472-479. #(30), #(2)

Prizant, B.M., & Wetherby, A.M. (1985). Intentional communicative behavior of
children with autism: Theoretical and practical issues. Australian Journal of
Human Communication Disorders, 13, 21-59. #(30), #(2)

Proger, B.B. (1971). Program evaluation: The model building game. Journal of
Learning Disabilities, 4, 292-306. #(29)

Project MORE (1974). How to do MORE: A manual of basic teaching strategy.
Bellevue, WA: Edmark Associates. #(5), #(44)

Project MORE (1975-1977). Daily living skills. (10 Additional titles
published: Care of eyeglasses. Complexion care. Eating. Feminine hygiene.
Hair rolling. Hair washing. Hand washing. Nose blowing. Toothbrushing. Use of
deodorant.) Bellevue, WA: Edmark Associates. #(18), #(44)

Prokasy, W.F., & Hall, J.F. (1963). Primary stimulus generalization.
Psychological Bulletin, 70, 310-322. #(6), #(7)

Prutting, C.A. (1982). Pragmatics as social competence. Journal of Speech and
Hearing Disorders, 47, 123-133. #(30)

Prutting, C.A., & Kirchner, D.M. (1983). Applied pragmatics. In T.M.
Gallagher & C.A. Prutting (Eds.), Pragmatic assessment and intervention
issues in language (pp. 29-64). San Diego, CA: College-Hill Press. #(30),
#(38), #(29)

Pumroy, D.K., & McIntire, R. (1991). Behavior analysis/modification for
everyone. Journal of Behavioral Education, 1, 283-294. #(3)

Puttalaz, M., & Dunn, S.E. (1990). The importance of peer relations. In
M.L. Lewis & S.M. Miller (Eds.), Handbook of developmental psychopatho-
logy (pp. 227-236). New York: Plenum. #(38), #(37)

Pylyshyn, Z.W. (1973). What the mind's eye tells the mind's brain: A critique
of mental imagery. Psychological Bulletin, 80, 1-24. #(11)

Quay, H.C. (1977). Measuring dimensions of deviant behavior: The behavior
problem checklist. Journal of Abnormal Child Psychology, 5, 277-287. #(44),
#(3) 

Quay, L.C., & Weld, G.L. (1980). Visual and auditory selective attention and
reflection-impulsivity in normal and learning disabled boys at two age
levels. Journal of Abnormal Child Psychology, 8, 117-125. #(1), #(6), #(28)

Quick, A.D., & Campbell, A.A. (1977). A model for preschool curriculum:
Project MEMPHIS. Mental Retardation, 15(2), 42-46. #(5)

Quick, A.D., Little, T.L., & Campbell, A.A. (1974). Project MEMPHIS:
Enhancing developmental progress in preschool exceptional children. Belmont,
CA: Ledear Siegler, Inc./ Fearon. #(5), #(34)

Quilitch, H.R. (1975). A comparison of three staff-management procedures.
Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 7, 623-626. #(3), #(42)

Quinn, J.M., Sherman, J.A., Sheldon, J.B., Quinn, L.M., & Harchik, A.E.
(1992). Social validation of component behaviors of following instructions,
accepting criticism, and negotiating. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis,
25, 401-413. #(3), #(27), #(9) 

Rabinowitz, F.M., Howe, M.L., & Lawrence, J.A. (1989). Class inclusion and
working memory. Journal of Experimental Child Psychology, 48, 379-409. #(11) 

Rabinowitz, M., & Mandler, J.M. (1983). Organization and information
retrieval. Journal of Experimental Psychology: Learning, Memory, and
Cognition, 9, 430-439. #(11) 

Rachlin, H. (1974). Self-control. Behaviorism, 2, 94-107. #(18)

Radin, B.A. (1977). Implementation, change, and the federal bureaucracy. New
York: Teachers College Press. #(8), #(34), #(14), #(42)

Raglund, E.U., Kerr, M.M., & Strain, P.S. (1978). Behavior of withdrawn
autistic children: Effects of peer social initiations. Behavior Modification,
2, 565-578. #(3), #(2)

Ragosta, M. (1983). Computer-assisted instruction and compensatory education:
A longitudinal analysis. Machine Mediated Learning, 1, 97-126. #(16)

Raizen, S.A., & Rossi, P.H. (Eds.). (1981). Program evaluation in education:
When? How? To what ends? Washington, DC: National Academy Press. #(29),
#(34), #(34) 

Ralph, A., & Birnbrauer, J.S. (1986). The potential of correspondence
training for facilitating generalization of social skills. Applied Research
in Mental Retardation, 7, 415-429. #(7), #(30), #(3), #(37)

Ramsay, I. (1988). Educational negligence and the legislation of education.
University of New South Wales Law Journal, 11(2), 184-219. #(40), #(10)

Rapin, I. (1991). Autistic children: Diagnosis and clinical features.
Pediatrics, 87, 751-760. #(30)

Rarick, G.L., Dobbins, A., & Broadhead, G.D. (1976). The motor domain and its
correlates in educationally handicapped children. Englewood Cliffs, NJ:
Prentice-Hall. #(12), #(34)

Raschke, D. (1981). Designing reinforcement surveys: Let the student choose
the reward. Exceptional Children, 14, 92-96. #(3), #(14)

Raschke, D., & Young, A. (1976). A comparative analysis of the diagnostic-
prescriptive and behavioral-analysis models in preparation for the develop-
ment of a dialectic pedagogical system. Education and Training of the
Mentally Retarded, 11, 135-145. #(3)

Rast, J., Johnston, J.M., Drum, C., & Conrin, J. (1984). The relation of food
quantity to rumination behavior. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 14,
121-130. #(3)

Raths, L., Harmin, M., & Simon, S. (1966). Values and teaching. Columbus, OH:
Charles E. Merrill. #(35), #(34)

Ratner, G.M. (1985). A new legal duty for urban public schools: Effective
education in basic skills. Texas Law Review, 63, 777-864. #(10), #(40)

Ravitch, D. (1985). The schools we deserve. New York: Basic Books. #(34),
#(23), #(35), #(15)

Ray, B.A. (1969). Selective attention: The effects of combining stimuli which
control incompatible behavior. Journal of the Experimental Analysis of
Behavior, 12, 539-550. #(1), #(6)

Ray, B.A. (1972). Strategy in studies of attention: A commentary on D.L.
Mostofsky's Attention: Contemporary theory and analysis. Journal of the
Experimental Analysis of Behavior, 17, 293-297. #(1)

Ray, B.A., & Sidman, M. (1970). Reinforcement schedules and stimulus control.
In W.N. Schoenfeld (Ed.), The theory of reinforcement schedules (pp.
187-214). New York: Appleton-Century-Crofts. #(1), #(14), #(38)

Ray, R.D., & Brown, D.A. (1975). A systems approach to behavior. The
Psychological Record, 25, 459-478. #(3)

Ray, R.D., & Ray, M.R. (1976). A systems approach to behavior II: The
ecological description and analysis of human behavior dynamics. The
Psychological Record, 26, 147-180. #(3) 

Rayner, K. (1978). Eye movements in reading and information processing.
Psychological Bulletin, 85, 618-660. #(17), #(11)

Raynes, N.V. (1980). The less you've got the less you get: Functional
grouping, a cause for concern. Mental Retardation, 18, 217-220. #(10)

Realon, R.E., Favell, J.W., Stirewalt, S.C., & Phillips, J.F. (1986).
Teaching severely handicapped persons to provide leisure activities to peers.
Analysis and Intervention in Developmental Disabilities, 6, 203-219. #(7),
#(21)

Reardon, D.M., & Bell, G. (1970). Effects of sedative and stimulative music
on activity levels of severely retarded boys. American Journal of Mental
Deficiency, 75, 156-159. #(3), #(21), #(14)

Redd, W.H. (1970). Generalization of adult's stimulus control of children's
behavior. Journal of Experimental Child Psychology, 9, 286-296. #(7)

Redd, W.H., & Birnbrauer, J.S. (1969). Adults as discriminative stimuli for
different reinforcement contingencies with retarded children. Journal of
Experimental Child Psychology, 7, 440-447. #(6), #(14)

Redi, F. (1959). The concept of a "Therapeutic Milieu." American Journal of
Orthopsychiatry, 29, 721-736. #(3)

Reed, D. (1991). Technological behavior analysis and social impact: A human 
services perspective. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 24, 437-439. #(3)

Rees, N. (1978). Pragmatics of language. In R.L. Schiefelbusch (Ed.), Bases
of language intervention (pp. 191-268). Baltimore: University Park Press.
#(30), #(38) 

Reese, E.P. (1966). The analysis of human operant behavior. Dubuque, IA:
William C. Brown #(3), #(34)

Reese, E.P. (1978). Human behavior: Analysis and application. Dubuque, IA:
William C. Brown. #(3), #(34)

Reese, H.W. (1963). Discrimination learning set in children. In L.P. Lipsitt
& C.C. Spiker (Eds.), Advances in child development and behavior (Vol. 1, pp.
115-145). New York: Academic Press. #(6), #(38)

Reese, H.W. (1986). On the theory and practice of behavior analysis. In H.W.
Reese & L.J. Parrott (Eds.), Behavior science: Philosophical, methodological,
and empirical advances (pp. 1-33). Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum. #(3)

Reese, H.W. (Ed.). (1987). Advances in child development and behavior (Vol.
20). New York: Academic Press. #(34), #(25)

Reese, H.W., & Lipsett, L.P. (Eds.). (1978). Advances in child development
and behavior (Vol. 12). New York: Academic Press. #(34), #(25)

Regal, R.A., Rooney, J.R., Wandas, T. (1994). Facilitated communication: An
experimental evaluation. Journal of Autism and Developmental Disorders, 24,
345-355. #(30)


Reichle, J., & Brown, L. (1986). Teaching the use of a multipage direct
selection communication board to an adult with autism Journal of The
Association for Persons with Severe Handicaps, 10, 146-156. #(16), #(30),
#(2)

Reichle, J., & Karlan, G. (1985). The selection of an augmentative system in
communication intervention: A critique of decision rules. Journal of The
Association for Persons with Severe Handicaps, 10, 146-156. #(30)

Reichle, J., & Keogh, W. (1986). Communication intervention: A selective
review of what, when, and how to teach. In S.F. Warren & A.K. Rogers-Warren
(Eds.), Teaching functional language: Generalization and maintenance of
language skills (pp. 25-59). Baltimore: University Park Press. #(30), #(7),
#(38), #(32)

Reichle, J., Rogers, N., & Barrett, C. (1984). Establishing pragmatic
discrimination among the communicative functions of requesting, rejecting,
and commenting in an adolescent. Journal of The Association for Persons with
Severe Handicaps, 9, 31-36. #(30), #(6)

Reichle, J., & Yoder, D. (1985). Communication board use in severely
handicapped learners. Language, Speech, and Hearing Services in Schools, 16,
146-157. #(16), #(30), #(21)

Reichle, J., York, J., & Sigafoos, J. (1991). Implementing augmentative and
alternative communication: Strategies for learners with severe disabilities.
Baltimore: Paul H. Brookes. #(34), #(30), #(21)

Reid, D.H. (1983). Trends and issues in behavioral research on training
feeding and dressing skills. In J.L. Matson & F. Andrasik (Eds.), Treatment
issues and innovations in mental retardation (pp. 213-240). New York: Plenum
Press. #(18), #(38), #(45)

Reid, D.H., Parsons, M.B., McCarn, J.E., Green, C.W., Phillips, J.F., &
Schepis, M. (1985). Providing a more appropriate education for severely
handicapped persons: Increasing and validating functional classroom tasks.
Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 18, 289-301. #(27), #(21)

Reid, D.H., Phillips, J.F., & Green, C.W. (1991). Teaching persons with pro-
found multiple handicaps: A review of the effects of behavioral research.
Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 24, 319-336. #(32), #(21), #(3)

Reid, D.K. (1988). Teaching the learning disabled. Boston: Allyn & Bacon.
#(34), #(17)

Reid, J.B., Palmer, R.S., Whitlock, J., & Jones, J. (1973). Computer-assisted
instruction performance of student pairs as related to individual differenc-
es. Journal of Educational Psychology, 65, 65-73. #(16)

Reinking, D. (Ed.). (1987). Computers and reading: Issues for theory and
practice. New York: Teachers College Press. #(34), #(17), #(16)

Reiser, R.A., & Gagne, R.M. (1982). Characteristics of media selection
models. Review of Educational Research, 52, 499-512. #(15)

Reiss, A.L., Feinstein, C., & Rosenbaum, K.N. (1986). Autism and genetic
disorders. Schizophrenia Bulletin, 12, 724-738. #(2)

Reith, H.J., Bahr, C., Polsgrove, L., Okolo, C., & Eckert, R. (1987). The
effects of microcomputers on the secondary special education classroom
ecology. The Journal of Special Education Technology, 8, 36-45. #(16)

Reith, H.J., Polsgrove, L., & Semmel, M.I. (1979). Relationship between
instructional time and academic achievement: Implications for research and
practice. Education Unlimited, 1, 53-56. #(26)

Reith, H.J., Polsgrove, L., & Semmel, M.I. (1981). Instructional variables
that make a difference: Attention to task and beyond. Exceptional Education
Quarterly, 2, 61-71. #(1), #(16)

Remington, B., & Clarke, S. (1983). Acquisition of expressive signing by
autistic children: An evaluation of the relative effects of simultaneous
communication and sign alone training. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis,
16, 315-328. #(30)

Remington, R.A. (1977). Auditory reinforcement in profoundly retarded
multiply handicapped children. American Journal of Mental Deficiency, 82,
299-304. #(3), #(14)

Renner, K.E. (1964). Delay of reinforcement: A historical review. Psychologi-
cal Bulletin, 61, 341-361. #(3), #(14), #(32)

Renzaglia, A., & Hutchins, M. (1988). A community-referenced approach to
preparing persons with disabilities for employment. In P. Wehman & M.S. Moon
(Eds.), Vocational rehabilitation and supported employment (pp. 91-110).
Baltimore: Paul H. Brookes. #(38), #(33)

Repp, A.C., & Barton, L.E. (1980). Naturalistic observations of institution-
alized retarded persons: A comparison of licensure decisions and behavioral
observations. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 13, 333-341. #(31)

Repp, A.C., Barton, L.E., & Brulle, A.R. (1983). A comparison of two
procedures for programming the differential reinforcement of other behaviors.
Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 16, 435-445. #(3), #(29), #(43), #(48)

Repp, A.C., & Dietz, D.E. (1979). Improving administrative-related staff
behaviors at a state institution. Mental Retardation, 17, 185-192. #(31),
#(45)

Repp, A.C., & Dietz, D.E. (1979). Reinforcement-based reductive procedures:
Training and monitoring performance of institutional staff. Mental Retarda-
tion, 17, 221-226. #(31), #(14), #(45)

Repp, A.C., & Deitz, S.M. (1974). Reducing aggressive and self-injurious
behavior of institutionalized retarded children through reinforcement of
other behaviors. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 7, 313-315. #(31),
#(14)

Repp, A.C., Deitz, S.M., & Dietz, D.E. (1976). Reducing inappropriate
behaviors in classrooms and in individuals sessions through DRO schedules of
reinforcement. Mental Retardation, 14(1), 11-15. #(3), #(14)

Repp, A.C., & Deitz, S.M., & Speir, N.C. (1974). Reducing stereotypic
responding of retarded persons by the differential reinforcement of other
behavior. American Journal of Mental Deficiency, 78, 279-284. #(20), #(14),
#(3)

Repp. A.C., Felce, D., & Barton, L.E. (1988). Basing the treatment of
stereotypic and self-injurious behaviors on hypotheses of their causes.
Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 21, 281-289. #(3), #(20)

Repp, A.C., & Karsh, K.G. (1991). The task demonstration model: A program for
teaching persons with severe disabilities. In R. Remington (Ed.), The
challenge of severe mental handicaps (pp. 263-283). New York: John Wiley.
#(38), #(9), #(21) 

Repp, A.C., Karsh, K.G., & Lenz, M.W. (1990). Discrimination training for
persons with developmental disabilities: A comparison of the Task Demonstra-
tion Model and the Standard Prompting Hierarchy. Journal of Applied Behavior
Analysis, 23, 43-52. #(33), #(9) 

Repp, A.C., & Singh, N.N. (Eds.). (1990). Perspectives on the use of
nonaversive and aversive interventions for persons with developmental
disabilities. Sycamore, IL: Sycamore Publishing Co. #(2), #(14), #(19), #(34)

Reppucci, N.D., & Saunders, J.T. (1974). Social psychology of behavior
modification: Problems of implementation in natural settings. American
Psychologist, 29, 649-660. #(3), #(8), #(27)

Reschly, D.J. (1988). Minority MMR overrepresentation: Legal issues, research
findings, and reform trends. In M.C. Wang, M.C. Reynolds, & H.J. Walberg
(Eds.), Handbook of special education: Research and practice (Vol. 2, pp.
23-41). New York: Pergamon Press. #(38), #(43), #(49)

Resnick, D.P. (1980). Minimum competency testing historically considered. In
D.C. Berliner (Ed.), Review of research in education (Vol. 8, pp. 3-29).
Washington, DC: American Educational Research Association. #(26), #(38),
#(29)

Resnick, L.B. (Ed.). (1989). Knowing, learning, and instructions: Essays in
honor of Robert Glaser. Hillsdale, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum. #(34), #(5)

Resnick, L.B., Wang, M.C., & Kaplan, J. (1973). Task analysis in curriculum
design: A hierarchically sequenced introductory mathematics curriculum.
Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 6, 679-709. #(15), #(5)

Restle, F. (1955). A theory of discrimination learning. Psychological Review,
62, 11-19. #(6), #(35)

Restle, F. (1958). Toward a quantitative description of learning set data.
Psychological Review, 65, 77-91. #(35), #(6)

Reynes, R.L., & Allen, A. (1987). Humor in psychotherapy: A view. American
Journal of Psychotherapy, 28, 584-591. #(3), #(18)

Reynolds, B.S., Newsom, C.D., & Lovaas, O.I. (1974). Auditory overselectivity
in autistic children. Journal of Abnormal Child Psychology, 2, 253-263. #(6),
#(2) 

Reynolds, C.R. (1988). Putting the individual into aptitude-treatment
interaction. Exceptional Children, 54, 324-331. #(9)

Reynolds, G.S. (1961). Behavioral contrast. Journal of the Experimental
Analysis of Behavior, 4, 57-71. #(3)

Reynolds, G.S. (1961). Contrast, generalization, and the process of
discrimination. Journal of the Experimental Analysis Behavior, 4, 289-294.
#(3), #(6), #(7) 

Reynolds, G.S. (1968). A primer of operant conditioning. Glenview, IL: Scott,
Foresman. #(3), #(34)

Reynolds, G.S., & Limpo, A.J. (1968). On some causes of behavioral contrast.
Journal of the Experimental Analysis of Behavior, 11, 543-548. #(3)

Reynolds, M., & Lakin, K.C. (1987). Noncategorical special education: Models
for research and practice. In M. Wang, M. Reynolds, & H. Walberg (Eds.),
Handbook of special education: Research and practice (Vol. 1, pp. 331-356).
Oxford, England: Pergamon Press. #(38), #(39)

Reynolds, M.C. (1962). A framework for considering some issues in special
education. Exceptional Children, 28, 367-370. #(21)

Reynolds, M.C. (1980). Education of handicapped students: Some areas of
confusion. Phi Delta Kappan, 61, 603-604. #(21)

Reynolds, M.C., & Balow, B. (1972). Categories and variables in special
education. Exceptional Children, 38, 357-366. #(21)

Reynolds, M.C., & Birch, J.W. (1977). Origins of change. In M.C. Reynolds &
J.W. Birch (Eds.), Teaching exceptional children in all America's schools: A
first course for teachers and principals (pp. 50-103). Reston, VA: Council
for Exceptional Children. #(21), #(38)

Reynolds, M.C., & Birch, J.W. (1982). Teaching exceptional children in all
America's schools (rev. ed.). Reston, VA: Council for Exceptional Children.
#(21), #(34)

Rhode, G., Morgan, D.P., & Young, K.R. (1983). Generalization and maintenance
of treatment gains of behaviorally handicapped students from resource rooms
to regular classrooms using self-evaluation procedures. Journal of Applied
Behavior Analysis, 16, 171-188. #(27), #(7)

Rich, C. (1976, April 18). Phila. seeks malpractice insurance for teachers.
The Sunday Bulletin, p. 9, p. 11. #(10)

Rich, S. (1990). Is teaching reading comprehension strategies acceptable to
teachers? Teacher Education and Special Education, 13, 126-132. #(17)

Richardson, J.B. (1975). A survey of the present status of vocational
training in state institutions for the mentally retarded. Mental Retardation,
13(1), 16-20. #(27), #(45)

Richardson-Klavehn, A., & Bjork, R.A. (1988). Measures of memory. Annual
Review of Psychology, 39, 475-543. #(11)

Richmond, G. (1983). Comparison of automated and human instruction for
developmentally retarded preschool children. Journal of The Association for
Persons with Severe Handicaps, 8, 78-84. #(16)

Richmond, G., & Bell, J. (1986). Comparison of trial-and-error and graduated
stimulus change procedures across tasks. Analysis and Intervention in
Developmental Disabilities, 6, 127-136. #(6)

Ricks, D.M., & Wing, L. (1975). Language, communication and the use of
symbols in normal and autistic children. Journal of Autism and Childhood
Schizophrenia, 5, 191-221. #(2), #(30)

Ricks, D.M., & Wing, L. (1976). Language, communication and the use of
symbols. In L. Wing (Ed.), Early childhood autism (pp. 93-134). New York:
Pergamon Press. #(30), #(2), #(38)

Rilling, M. (1977). Stimulus control and inhibitory processes. In W.K. Honig
& J.E.R. Staddon (Eds.), Handbook of operant behavior (pp. 432-480).
Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall. #(6), #(38), #(3)

Rilling, M., Caplan, H.J., Howard, R.C., & Brown, C.H. (1975). Inhibitory
stimulus control following errorless discrimination learning. Journal of the
Experimental Analysis of Behavior, 24, 121-133. #(6)

Rilling, M., Kramer, T.J., & Richards, R.W. (1973). Aversive properties of
the negative stimulus during learning with and without errors. Learning and
Motivation, 4, 1-10. #(6), #(14)

Rimland, B. (1964). Infantile autism: The syndrome and its implications for
a neural theory of behavior. New York: Appleton-Century-Crofts. #(21), #(2),
#(34)

Rimland, B. (1978, August). Inside the mind of the autistic savant.
Psychology Today, pp. 68-80. #(21), #(2)

Rimland, B. (1990). Surprising success reported with facilitated communica-
tion. Autism Research Review International, 4(4), 1-2. #(2), #(25)

Rimland, B. (1991). Facilitated communication: Problems, puzzles, and
paradoxes--six challenges for researchers. Autism Research Review Interna-
tional, 5(4), 3. #(2), #(30)

Rimland, B. (1992). Facilitated communication: Now the bad news. Autism
Research Review International, 6(1), 3. #(30)

Rincover, A. (1978). Sensory extinction: A procedure for eliminating self-
stimulatory behavior in developmentally disabled children. Journal of
Abnormal Child Psychology, 6, 299-310. #(20), #(14), #(45)

Rincover, A. (1978). Variables affecting stimulus-fading and discriminative
responding in psychotic children. Journal of Abnormal Child Psychology, 87,
541-553. #(6), #(3) 

Rincover, A. (1981). How to use sensory extinction. Lawrence, KS: H & H
Enterprises. #(3), #(12), #(34)

Rincover, A., Cook, R., Peoples, A., & Packard, D. (1979). Sensory extinction
and sensory reinforcement principles for programming multiple adaptive
behavior change. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 12, 221-233. #(3),
#(12), #(14)

Rincover, A., & Devany, J. (1982). The application of sensory extinction
procedures to self-injury. Analysis and Intervention in Developmental
Disabilities, 2, 67-81. #(3), #(9), #(14), #(19)

Rincover, A., & Ducharme, J.M. (1987). Variables influencing stimulus
overselectivity and "Tunnel vision" in developmentally delayed children.
American Journal of Mental Deficiency, 91, 422-430. #(6), #(45)

Rincover, A., Feldman, M., & Eason, L. (1986). "Tunnel vision": A possible
keystone stimulus control deficit in autistic children. Analysis and
Intervention in Developmental Disabilities, 6, 283-304. #(3), #(6)

Rincover, A., & Koegel, R.L. (1975). Setting generality and stimulus control
in autistic children. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 8, 235-246. #(6),
#(2), #(7) 

Rincover, A., & Koegel, R.L. (1977). Classroom treatment of autistic
children: II. Individualized instruction in a group. Journal of Abnormal
Child Psychology, 5, 113-125. #(21), #(27), #(2)

Rincover, A., & Koegel, R.L. (1977). Research on the education of autistic
children: Recent advances and future directions. In B.B. Lahey & A.E. Kazdin
(Eds.), Advances in clinical child psychology (Vol. 1, pp. 329-359). New
York: Plenum Press. #(21), #(2), #(38) 

Rincover, A., Koegel, R.L., & Russo, D. (1978). Some recent behavioral
research on the education of autistic children. Education and Treatment of
Children, 1, 31-45. #(21), #(2)

Rincover, A., & Newsom, C.D. (1985). The relative motivational properties of
sensory reinforcement in teaching autistic children. Journal of Applied
Behavior Analysis, 18, 237-248. #(3), #(6)

Rincover, A., Newsom, C.D., & Carr, E.G. (1979). Using sensory extinction
procedures in the treatment of compulsive-like behavior of developmentally
disabled children. Journal of Consulting and Clinical Psychology, 47, 
695-701. #(2), #(3), #(14)

Risley, T. (1964). Generalization gradients follwoing twopresponse discrim-
ination training. Journal of the Experimental Analysis of Behavior, 17, 199-204. #(6), #(7)

Risley, T. (1968). The effects and side effects of punishing the autistic
behaviors of a deviant child. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 1, 21-34.
#(2)

Risley, T., & Cuvo, A. (1980). Training mentally retarded adults to make emer-
gency telephone calls. Behavior Modification, 4, 513-526. #(45), #(33)

Risley, T., & Hart, B. (1968). Developing correspondence between the non-
verbal and verbal behavior of preschool children. Journal of Applied Be-
havior Analysis, 1, 267-281. #(3), #(30)

Risley, T., Hart, B., & Doke, L. (1972). Operant language development: The
outline of a therapeutic technology. In R.L. Schiefelbusch (Ed.), Language of
the mentally retarded (pp. 107-118). Baltimore: University Park Press. #(30),
#(38)

Risley, T., & Reynolds, N.J. (1970). Emphasis as a prompt for verbal
imitation. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 3, 185-190. #(9)

Risley, T., & Wolf, M. (1967). Establishing functional speech in echolalic
children. Research and Therapy, 5, 73-88. #(3), #(30)

Ristau, C.A., & Robbins, D. (1982). Language in the great apes: A critical
review. Advances in the Study of Behavior, 12, 141-255. #(30)

Ritchie, B.F. (1973). Theories of learning: A consumer report. The facts you
need before you explain the facts. In B.B. Wolman (Ed.), Handbook of general
psychology (pp. 451-460). Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall. #(15), #(29),
#(38)

Ritvo, E.R. (1976). Autism: From adjective to noun. In E.R. Ritvo, B.J.
Freeman, E.M. Ornitz, & P.E. Tanguay (Eds.), Autism: Diagnosis, current
research and management (pp. 3-6). New York: Halsted Press. #(21), #(2),
#(38)

Ritvo, E.R., & Freeman, B.J. (1978). National Society for Autistic Children
definition of the syndrome of autism. Journal of Autism and Childhood
Schizophrenia, 8, 162-167. #(2) 

Ritvo, E.R., & Freeman, B.J. (1978). Current research in the syndrome of
autism: Symposium. Journal of American Academics Child Psychology, 17,
565-678. #(2), #(43) 

Ritvo, E.R., & Provence, S. (1953). Form perception and imitation in some
autistic children: Diagnostic findings and their contextual interpretation.
Psychoanalytic Child Study, 8, 155-161. #(12), #(2), #(41)

Rivera, G. (1972). Willowbrook: A report on how it is and why it doesn't have
to be that way. New York: Vintage Books. #(10), #(34)

Rivlin, A.M., & Timpane, P.M. (Eds.). (1975). Planned variation in education:
Should we give up or try harder? Washington, DC: The Brookings Institution.
#(42), #(34)

Roach, C., & Kephart, N. (1966). The Purdue Perceptual-Motor Survey Test.
Columbus, OH: Charles E. Merrill. #(12), #(29), #(44)

Roberts, P. Iawata, B.A., McSween, T.E., & Desmond, E.F. (1979). An analysis
of overcorrection movements. American Journal of Mental Deficiency, 83,
588-594. #(3) 

Robertson, I., Richardson, A.M., & Youngson, S.C. (1984). Social skills
training with mentally retarded people: A review. British Journal of Clinical
Psychology, 23, 241-264. #(33), #(37), #(32)

Robinault, I.P. (Ed.). (1973). Functional aids for the multiply handicapped.
New York: Harper & Row. #(21), #(34), #(9)

Robinson, C.C. (1976). Application of Piagetian sensorimotor concepts to
assessment and curriculum for severely handicapped children. AAESPH Review,
1, 5-10. #(21), #(5), #(13)

Robinson, C.C., & Robinson, J.H. (1983). Sensorimotor functions and cognitive
development. In M.E. Snell (Ed.), Systematic instruction of the moderately
and severely handicapped (2nd ed., pp. 227-266). Columbus, OH: Charles E.
Merrill. #(45), #(38), #(12)

Robinson, N.M, & Robinson, H.B. (1976). The mentally retarded child (2nd
ed.). New York: McGraw-Hill. #(21), #(34), #(45)

Robinson, N.M., & Robinson, H.B. (1976). Theories of intelligence. In N.W.
Robinson & H.B. Robinson, The mentally retarded child (2nd ed., pp. 3-23).
New York: McGraw-Hill. #(21), #(38), #(25), #(45)

Robinson, N.M., & Robinson, H.B. (1976). Genetic factors in the development
of mental retardation. In N.M. Robinson & H.B. Robinson, The mentally
retarded child (2nd ed., pp. 51-75). New York: McGraw-Hill. #(21), #(38),
#(45)

Robinson, N.M., & Robinson, H.B. (1976). Piaget's theory of cognitive
development. In N.M. Robinson & H.B. Robinson, The mentally retarded child
(2nd ed., pp. 241-264). New York: McGraw-Hill. #(13), #(38), #(45)

Robinson, N.M., & Robinson, H.B. (1976). Mental age, intelligence quotient,
and assessment of adaptive behavior. In N.M. Robinson & H.B. Robinson, The
mentally retarded child (2nd ed., pp. 339-363). New York: McGraw-Hill. #(21),
#(38), #(25), #(45), #(29)

Robinson, P.W., & Storm, R.H. (1978). Effects of error and errorless
discrimination acquisition on reversal learning. Journal of the Experimental
Analysis of Behavior, 29, 517-525. #(6)

Rodham, H. (1973). Children under the law. Harvard Education Review, 43,
487-514. #(10)

Roe, W.H., & Drake, T.L. (1974). The principalship (2nd ed.). New York:
MacMillan. #(23), #(34), #(42)

Rogers, C.R., & Skinner, B.F. (1956). Some issues concerning the control of
human behavior: A symposium. Science, 124, 1057-1066. #(3)

Rogers, S.J. (1977). Characteristics of the cognitive development of
profoundly retarded children. Child Development, 48, 837-843. #(25)

Rogers-Warren, A.R., & Baer, D.M. (1976). Correspondence between saying and
doing: Teaching children to share and praise. Journal of Applied Behavior
Analysis, 9, 335-354. #(37), #(3), #(30)

Rogers-Warren, A.R., Warren, S.F., & Baer, D.M. (1977). A component analysis:
Modeling, self-reporting, and reinforcement of self-reporting in the
development of sharing. Behavior Modification, 1, 427-438. #(29), #(14),
#(3), #(37), #(41)

Rojahn, J. (1986). Self-injurious and stereotypic behavior of noninstitution-
alized mentally retarded people: Prevalence and classification. American
Journal of Mental Deficiency, 91, 268-276. #(45), #(19)

Rojahn, J., Polster, L.M., Mulick, J.A., & Wisiniewski, J.J. (1989).
Reliability of the Behavior Problems Inventory. Journal of the Multihandi-
capped Person, 2, 283-293. #(44), #(4) 

Rollings, J.P., Baumeister, A., & Baumeister, A.A. (1977). The use of
overcorrection procedures to eliminate stereotyped behaviors in retarded
individuals. Behavior Modification, 1, 29-46. #(3), #(14), #(21)

Romanczyk, R.G. (1984). Microcomputers and behavior therapy: A powerful
alliance. The Behavior Therapist, 7, 59-64. #(16) 

Romanczyk, R.G., Coletti, G., Lockshin, S., & Kashinsky, W. (1980).
Programmatic behavioral intervention for severely disturbed children: The
clinical use of computer technology. In J. Crawford, S. Vitale, & J. Robinson
(Eds.), Clinical applications of computers in mental health and mental
retardation. Cambridge, MA: Balinger Press. #(16), #(21), #(38), #(3), #(45)

Romanczyk, R.G., Kistner, J.A., & Plienis, A. (1982). Self-stimulatory and
self-injurious behavior: Etiology and treatment. In J.J. Steffan & P. Karoly
(Eds.), Advances in child behavior analysis and therapy: Autism and severe
psychopathology (pp. 189-254). Lexington, MA: Lexington Books. #(38), #(19),
#(20)

Romanczyk, R.G., & Lockshin, S. (1981). How to create a curriculum for
autistic and other handicapped children. Lawrence, KS: H & H Enterprises.
#(5), #(21), #(2), #(34) 

Romanczyk, R.G., Tracey, D.A., Wilson, G.T., & Thorpe, G.L. (1973).
Behavioral techniques in the treatment of obesity: A comparative analysis.
Behaviour Research and Therapy, 14, 357-364. #(3), #(18)

Romski, M., & Sevcik, R. (1988). Augmentative and alternative communication
systems: Considerations for individuals with severe intellectual disabili-
ties. Augmentative and Alternative Communication, 4, 83-93. #(30)

Romski, M., & Sevcik, R. (1988). Patterns of language learning by instruc-
tion: Evidence from nonspeaking persons with mental retardation. In N.
Krasnegor, D. Rumbaugh, R., Schiefelbusch, & M. Studdert-Kennedy (Eds.),
Biological and behavioral determinants of language development (pp. 429-445).
Hillsdale, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum. #(38), #(30)

Romski, M., Sevcik, R., & Pate, J, (1988). Establishment of symbolic
communication in persons with severe retardation. Journal of Speech and
Hearing Disorders, 53, 94-107. #(30)

Roos, P. (1972). Mentally retarded citizens: Challenge for the 1970's.
Syracuse Law Review, 23, 1059-1074. #(10), #(40), #(45)

Roos, P. (1974). Human rights and behavior modification. Mental Retardation,
12(3), 3-6. #(3), #(45)

Roos, P. (1979). Custodial care for the "subtrainable"--revisiting an old
myth. Law and Psychology Review, 5, 1-14. #(10), #(40)

Roos, P. (1979). The law and mentally retarded people: An uncertain future.
Stanford Law Review, 31, 613-624. #(45), #(40), #(10)

Rose, S., Waldron, M., & Kolomyjec, W. (1983). Measuring creativity through
computer graphics of hearing impaired children. Perceptual and Motor Skills,
57, 943-950. #(16), #(21)

Rose, T. (1981). The corporal punishment cycle: A behavioral analysis of the
maintenance of corporal punishment in schools. Education and Treatment of
Children, 4, 157-170. #(3), #(14)

Rosegrant, T. (1985). Using the microcomputer as a tool for learning to read
and write. Journal of Learning Disabilities, 18, 113-115. #(16), #(17)

Rosenbaum, J.E. (1980). Social implications of educational grouping. In D.C.
Berliner (Ed.), Review of research in education: 8 (pp. 361-401). Washington,
DC: American Educational Research. #(10), #(38)

Rosenbaum, M.S., & Breiling, J. (1976). The development and functional
control of reading comprehension behavior. Journal of Applied Behavior
Analysis, 9, 323-334. #(17) 

Rosenberg, B. (1980). A review of Wise's legislated learning. American
Journal of Education, 89, 111-116. #(10), #(32)

Rosenberg, M.S., & Sindelar, P.T. (1981). Computer-assisted data management
of instructional programming. Education Unlimited, 3(3), 37-40. #(16)

Rosenberg, N., & Friedman, P. (1979). Developmental disability law: A look
into the future. Stanford Law Review, 31, 817-829. #(40), #(10)

Rosenshine, B. (1970). Evaluation of instruction. Review of Educational
Research, 40, 279-330. #(5), #(29)

Rosenshine, B. (1976). Classroom instruction. In N.L. Gage (Ed.), The
psychology of teaching methods. 75th Yearbook of the National Society for the
Study of Education (Part I, pp. 335-371). Chicago: University of Chicago
Press. #(9), #(38), #(26), #(5)

Rosenshine, B. (1979). Content, time, and direct instruction. In P.L.
Peterson & H.J. Walberg (Eds.), Research on teaching: Concepts, findings, and
implications (pp. 28-56). Berkeley, CA: McCutchan. #(26), #(38)

Rosenshine, B. (1983). Teaching functions in instructional programs. The
Elementary School Journal, 83, 335-351. #(9)

Rosenshine, B., & Furst, N.F. (1973). The use of direct observation to study
teaching. In R.M. Travers (Ed), Second handbook of research on teaching
Chicago: Rand McNally. #(38), #(29)

Rosenshine, B., & Martin, M. (1974). Teacher education and teaching behavior:
Comments on the state-of-the-research. Educational Researcher, 3(7), 11-12.
#(9) 

Rosenshine, B., & Stevens, R. (1984). Classroom instruction in reading. In
P.H. Pearson (Ed.), Handbook of reading research (pp. 745-798). New York:
Longman. #(38), #(17)

Rosenshine, B., & Stevens, R. (1986). Teaching functions. In M.C. Wittrock
(Ed.), Handbook of research on teaching (3rd ed., pp. 376-391). New York:
Macmillan. #(38), #(5) 

Rosenthal, R., & Jacobson, L. (1966). Teachers' expectancies: Determinants of
pupils' IQ gains. Psychological Reports, 19, 115-118. #(25), #(15)

Rosenzweig, L.E., & Long, J. (1971). Understanding and teaching the dependent
retarded child. Riverside, NJ: Teachers Publishing Corporation. #(9), #(21),
#(34)

Ross, A.O. (1976). Psychological aspects of learning disabilities and reading
disorders. New York: McGraw-Hill. #(28), #(34)

Ross, A.O. (1977). Learning disability: The unrealized potential. New York:
McGraw-Hill. #(28), #(34)

Ross, A.O. (1979). Psychological disorders of children: A behavior approach
to therapy, research, and treatment (2nd ed.). New York: McGraw-Hill. #(34),
#(3)

Ross, B.H. (1984). Remindings and their effects in learning a cognitive
skill. Cognitive Psychology, 16, 371-416. #(9)

Ross, D. (1951). Plato's theory of ideas. Oxford: Oxford University Press.
#(34), #(35)

Ross, D. (1966). Aristotle. London: Methuen. #(34), #(35)

Ross, D.M., & Ross, S.A. (1976). Hyperactivity: Research, theory, and action.
New York: Wiley. #(34), #(4)

Ross, D.M., & Ross, S.A. (1982). Hyperactivity: Current issues, research, and
theory (2nd ed.). New York: John Wiley. #(34), #(4)

Ross, S.L., DeYoung, H.G., & Cohen, J.S. (1971). Confrontation: Special
education placement and the law. Exceptional Children, 38, 5-12. #(10)

Roth, F.P., & Cassatt-James, E. (1989). The language assessment process:
Clinical implications for individuals with severe speech impairments.
Augmentative and Alternative Communication, 5, 165-172. #(30), #(29)

Roth, F.P., & Spekman, N.J. (1984). Assessing the pragmatic abilities of
children: Part 1. Organizational framework and assessment parameters. Journal
of Speech and Hearing Disorders, 49, 2-11. #(30), #(29), #(42)

Roth, F.P., & Spekman, N.J. (1984). Assessing the pragmatic abilities of
children: Part 2. Guidelines, considerations, and specific evaluation
procedures. Journal of Speech and Hearing Disorders, 49, 12-17. #(30)

Rotheray, D.R., Sewell, D.F., & Morton, J.R. (1986). The design of education-
al software for children with severe learning difficulties. Programmed
Learning and Educational Technology, 23, 119-123. #(16), #(21)

Rothman, D. (1971). The discovery of the asylum. Boston: Little & Brown.
#(34), #(10)

Rotholz, D.A., & Luce, S.C. (1983). Alternative reinforcement strategies for
the reduction of self-stimulatory behavior in autistic youth. Education and
Treatment of Children, 6, 363-377. #(2), #(14), #(20)

Rotter, J.B. (1954). Social learning and clinical psychology. Englewood
Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall. #(41), #(34)

Rovee-Collier, C.K. (1987). Learning and memory in infancy. In J.D. Ososfsky
(Ed.), Handbook of infant development (2nd ed.). New York: John Wiley. #(38),
#(11)

Rovee-Collier, C.K., & Fagen, J. (1981). The retrieval of memory in infancy.
In L. Lipsitt (Ed.), Advances in infancy research (Vol. 1, pp. 225-254).
Norwood, NJ: Ablex. #(38), #(11)

Rowell, J.C. (1981). The five rights of parents. Phi Delta Kappan, 62,
441-443. #(10)

Rowley, G.L. (1976). The reliability of observational measures. American
Educational Research Journal, 13, 51-59. #(29)

Rozeboom, W. (1960). The fallacy of the null hypothesis significance test.
Psychological Bulletin, 57, 416-428. #(22)

Rubin, A. (1983). The computer confronts language arts: Can and shoulds for education. In A.C.
Wilkinson (Ed.), Classroom computers and cognitive science (pp. 201-217). New York: Academic
Press. #(38), #(16)

Rubin, K.H., & Borwick, D. (1984). Communicative skills and sociability. In
H.E. Sypher & J.L. Applegate (Eds.), Communication by children and adults:
Social, cognitive, and strategic processes (pp. 152-170). Beverly Hills, CA:
Sage Publications. #(38), #(30)

Rubin, R., & Stuck, G. (1982). A model for assessing the degree of implemen-
tation in field-based educational programs. Educational Evaluation and Policy
Analysis, 4, 189-196. #(42), #(29)

Ruco, M.A., Charlop, M.H., & Schreibman, L. (1986). The occurrence of
autistic children's self-stimulation as a function of familiar versus
unfamiliar stimulus conditions. Journal of Autism and Developmental
Disabilities, 16, 31-44. #(2), #(20) 

Ruconich, S.K., Ashcroft, S.C., & Young, M.F. (1986). Making microcomputers
accessible to blind persons. Journal of Special Education Technology, 8,
37-46. #(16) 

Rude, C.R. (1978). Trends and priorities in inservice training. Exceptional
Children, 45, 172-176. #(42)

Rudel, R.G., & Teuber, H.L. (1963). Discrimination of direction of line in
children. Journal of Comparative and Physiological Psychology, 56, 892-898.
#(6)

Rudrud, E.H., & Vaudt, T.M. (1986). Prerequisite skills for semi-independent
living services (SILS) placement. Journal of The Association for Persons with
Severe Handicaps, 11, 182-187. #(27)

Rudy, L., & Goodman, G.S. (1991). Effects of participation on children's
reports: Implications for eyewitness testimony. Development Psychology, 27,
527-538. #(12), #(41)

Rule, S., Fiechtl, B., & Innocenti, M. (1990). Preschool environments:
Development of a survival skills curriculum. Topics in Early Childhood
Special Education, 9(4), 78-90. #(33) 

Rulon, P.J. (1941). Problems of regression. Harvard Educational Review, 11,
213-223. #(22)

Rumelhart, D.E. (1977). Toward an interactive model of reading. In S. Dornic
(Ed.), Attention and performance VI. Hillsdale, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum. #(17),
#(38)

Rumelhart, D.E. (1980). Schemata: The building blocks of cognition. In R.J.
Spiro, B.C. Bruce, & W.F. Brewer (Eds.), Theoretical issues in reading
comprehension (pp. 33-58). Hillsdale, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum. #(38), #(17)

Rusch, F.R. (1979). A functional analysis of the relationship between
attending to task and production in an applied restaurant setting. The
Journal of Special Education, 13, 399-411. #(1), #(33)

Rusch, F.R. (1979). Toward the validation of social-vocational survival
skills. Mental Retardation, 17, 143-145. #(27)

Rusch, F.R. (1983). Competitive vocational training. In M.E. Snell (Ed.),
Systematic instruction of the moderately and severely handicapped (2nd ed.,
p. 503-523). Columbus, OH: Charles E. Merrill. #(33), #(38)

Rusch, F.R. (Ed.). (1986). Competitive employment issues and strategies.
Baltimore: Paul H. Brookes. #(33), #(34)

Rusch, F.R. (Ed.). (1990). Supported Employment: Models, methods, and issues.
Sycamore, IL: Sycamore Publishing Co. #(33), #(38)

Rusch, F.R., & Chadsey-Rusch, J. (1985). Employment for persons with severe
handicaps: Curriculum development and coordination of services. Focus on
Exceptional Children, 17, 1-8. #(27), #(21), #(5)

Rusch, F.R., Chadsey-Rusch, J., & Lagomarcino, T. (1987). Preparing students
for employment. In M.E. Snell (Ed.), Systematic instruction of persons with
severe handicaps (3rd ed., pp. 471-490). Columbus, OH: Charles E. Merrill.
#(27), #(38), #(21), #(33), #(39)

Rusch, F.R., Chadsey-Rusch, J., White, D.M., & Gifford, J.L. (1985). Programs
for severely mentally retarded adults: Perspectives and methodologies. In D.
Bricker & J. Filler (Eds.), Severe mental retardation: From theory to
practice (pp. 119-140). Reston, VA: Council for Exceptional Children. #(38),
#(33), #(21)

Rusch, F., Close, D., Hops, H., & Agosta, J. (1976). Overcorrection:
Generalization and maintenance. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 9, 498.
#(3), #(7) 

Rusch, F.R., & Hughes, C. (1990). Historical overview of supported employ-
ment. In F.R. Rusch (Ed.), Supported Employment: Models, methods, and issues
(pp. 5-14). Sycamore, IL: Sycamore Publishing Co. #(33), #(38)

Rusch, F.R., & Kazdin, A.E. (1981). Toward a methodology of withdrawal
designs for the assessment of response maintenance. Journal of Applied
Behavior Analysis, 14, 131-140. #(43), #(29), #(48)

Rusch, F.R., Menchetti, B.M., Crouch, K., Riva, M., Morgan, T., & Agran, M.
(1984). Competitive employment: Assessing employee reactivity to naturalistic
observation. Applied Research in Mental Retardation, 5, 339-351. #(33)

Rusch, F.R., & Minch, K.E. (1988). Identification of co-worker involvement in
supported employment: A review and analysis. Research in Developmental
Disabilities, 9, 247-254. #(33), #(32)

Rusch, F.R., & Mithaug, D.E. (1980). Vocational training for mentally
retarded adults: A behavior analytic approach. Champaign, IL: Research Press.
#(33), #(34) 

Rusch, F.R., & Mithaug, D.E. (1985). Competitive employment education: A
systems-analytic approach to transitional programming for the student with
severe handicaps. In K.C. Lakin & R.M. Bruininks (Eds.), Strategies for
achieving community integration of developmentally disabled citizens (pp.
177-192). Baltimore: Paul H. Brookes. #(38), #(33)

Rusch, F.R., Morgan, T.K., Martin, J.E., Riva, M., & Agran, M. (1985).
Competitive employment: Teaching mentally retarded employees self-instruc-
tional strategies. Applied Research in Mental Retardation, 6, 389-407. #(45),
#(18), #(33) 

Rusch, F.R., Rose, T., & Greenwood, C.R. (1988). Behavior analysis in special
education. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall. #(34), #(3)

Rusch, F.R., & Schultz, R.P. (1981). Vocational and social behavior research:
An evaluative review. In J.L. Matson & J.R. McCartney (Eds.), Handbook of
behavior modification with the mentally retarded (pp. 247-280). New York:
Plenum Press. #(38), #(33), #(37), #(32)

Rusch, F.R., Schultz, R.P., & Agran, M. (1982). Validating entry-level
survival skills for service occupations: Implications for curriculum
development. TASH Journal, 8, 32-40. #(27), #(5), #(37)

Rushakoff, G. (1986). Microcomputer based client record management. In J.
Northern (Ed.), Microcomputer applications in communication disorders (pp.
39-51). Boston: LittleBrown. #(16), #(38), #(30)

Rushakoff, G., & Lombardino, L. (1984). Microcomputer applications. ASHA,
26(6), 27-30. #(16)

Rushakoff, G.E., & Lombardino, L.J. (1983). Comprehensive microcomputer
applications for severely physically handicapped children. Teaching
Exceptional Children, 16(1), 18-22. #(16), #(21) 

Rushton, J.P. (1990). Race, brain size, and intelligence: A reply to
Cernovsky. Psychological Reports, 66, 659-666. #(24), #(25)

Russell, A.T., & Tanguay, P.T. (1981). Mental illness and mental retardation:
Cause or coincidence. American Journal of Mental Deficiency, 85, 570-574.
#(21), #(45) 

Russell, B. (1959). Wisdom of the west. London: Rathbone Books. #(31), #(34)

Russo, D.C., Cataldo, M.F., & Cushing, P.J. (1981). Compliance training and
behavioral covariation in the treatment of multiple behavior problems.
Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 14, 209-222. #(27)

Russo, D.C., & Kedesdy, J.H. (Eds.). (1988). Behavioral medicine with the de-
velopmentally disabled. New York: Plenum Press. #(38), #(25)

Russo, D.C., & Koegel, R.L. (1977). A method for integrating an autistic
child into a normal public school classroom. Journal of Applied Behavior
Analysis, 10, 579-590. #(21), #(2), #(39), #(36)

Russo, D.C., & Newsom, C.D. (1982). Psychotic disorders of childhood. In J.R.
Lachenmeyer & M.S. Gibbs (Eds.), Psychopathology in childhood (pp. 120-154).
New York: Gardner Press. #(21), #(38)

Rutter, M. (1966). Prognosis: Psychotic children in adolescents and early
adult life. In J.K. Wing (Ed.), Early childhood autism (pp. 83-99). London:
Pergamon Press. #(21), #(2), #(38)

Rutter, M. (1968). Concepts of autism: A review of research. Journal of Child
Psychology and Psychiatry, 9, 1-25. #(21), #(2), #(32)

Rutter, M. (1970). Autistic children: Infancy to adulthood. Seminars in
Psychiatry, 2, 435-450. #(21), #(2)

Rutter, M. (1970). Autism: Educational issues. Special Education, 59, 6-10.
#(2), #(21)

Rutter, M. (1974). The development of infantile autism. Psychological
Medicine, 4, 147-163. #(21)

Rutter, M. (1978). Diagnosis and definition of childhood autism. Journal of
Autism and Childhood Schizophrenia, 8, 139-161. #(21), #(2)

Rutter, M. (1978). Diagnosis and definition. In M. Rutter & E. Schopler
(Eds.), Autism: A reappraisal of concepts and treatment (pp. 1-25). New York:
Plenum Press. #(21), #(2), #(38)

Rutter, M. (1978). Etiology and treatment: Cause and cure. In M. Rutter & E.
Schopler (Eds.), Autism: A reappraisal of concepts and treatment (pp.
327-335). New York: Plenum Press. #(21), #(2), #(38)

Rutter, M. (1978). Language disorder and infantile autism. In M. Rutter & E.
Schopler (Eds.), Autism: A reappraisal of concepts and treatment (pp.
85-104). New York: Plenum Press. #(30), #(2), #(38)

Rutter, M. (1983). Cognitive deficits in the pathogenesis of autism. Journal
of Child Psychology and Psychiatry and Allied Disciplines, 24, 513-531. #(2),
#(25) 

Rutter, M. (1985). The treatment of autistic children. Journal of Child
Psychology and Psychiatry, 26, 193-214. #(2), #(5)

Rutter, M. (1985). Family and school influence on behavioral development.
Journal of Child Psychology and Psychiatry, 26, 349-368. #(25)

Rutter, M. (1985). Infantile autism and other pervasive developmental
disorders. In M. Rutter & L. Hersov (Eds.), Child and adolescent psychiatry:
Modern approaches (pp. 545-566). Oxford: Blackwell. #(2), #(25), #(38)

Rutter, M. (1988). Biological basis of autism: Implications for intervention.
In F. J. Menolascino & J.A. Stark (Eds.), Preventive and curative intervention 
in mental retardation (pp. 265-294). Baltimore: Paul H. Brookes. #(2), #(3)

Rutter, M., & Bartak, L. (1973). Special educational treatment of autistic
children: A comparative study--II. Follow-up findings and implications for
services. Journal of Child Psychology and Psychiatry, 14, 241-270. #(27),
#(2)

Rutter, M., Chadwick, O., Shaffer, D., & Brown, G. (1980). A prospective
study of children with head injuries: I. Design and methods. Psychological
Medicine, 10, 633-645. #(21) 

Rutter, M., & Hersov, L. (Eds.). (1985). Child and adolescent psychiatry:
Modern approaches. Oxford: Blackwell. #(2), #(25), #(34)

Rutter, M., Maughan, B., Mortimore, P. et al. (1979). Conclusions: Specula-
tions and implications. In M. Rutter, M. Maughan, B. Mortimore et al.,
Fifteen thousand hours: Secondary schools and their effects on children (pp.
177-205). Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press. #(27), #(38)

Rutter, M., & Schopler, E. (1987). Autism and pervasive developmental
disorders: Concepts and diagnostic issues. Journal of Autism and Developmen-
tal Disorders, 17, 159-186. #(2)

Rutter, M., & Schopler, E. (1988). Autism and pervasive developmental
disorders. In M. Rutter, A.H. Tuma, & I.S. Lann (Eds.), Assessment and
diagnosis in child psychopathology (pp. 408-434). New York: Guilford Press.
#(2), #(29), #(38)

Rutter, M., & Schopler, E. (Eds.). (1978). Autism: A reappraisal of concepts
and treatment. New York: Plenum Press. #(34), #(2)

Rutter, M., & Schopler, E. (1987). Autism and pervasive developmental
disorders. Journal of Autism and Developmental Disorders, 17, 159-186. #(2)

Rutter, M., & Sussenwein, C. (1971). A developmental and behavioral approach
to the treatment of preschool autistic children. Journal of Autism and
Childhood Schizophrenia, 1, 376-397. #(3), #(2)

Ryan, L.B., & Rucker, C.N. (1986). Computerized vs. noncomputerized
individualized education programs: Teachers' attitudes, time, and cost.
Journal of Special Education Technology, 8, 5-12. #(16)

Ryba, K.A., & Chapman, J.W. (1983). Toward improving learning strategies and
personal adjustment with computers. The Computing Teacher, 11, 48-53. #(16)

Ryba, K.A., Chapman, J.W., & Vernon, P.E. (1985). Computer-aided training of
cognitive processing strategies with developmentally handicapped adults.
Australia and New Zealand Journal of Developmental Disabilities, 11, 17-25.
#(16), #(45) 

Saccuzzo, D.P., Kerr, M., Marcus, A., & Brown, R. (1979). Input capability
and speed of processing in mental retardation. Journal of Abnormal Psycholo-
gy, 88, 341-345. #(45), #(11)

Sackett, D.L. (1979). Bias in analytic research. Journal of Chronic Disease,
32, 51-63. #(43). #(29)

Sackett, D.L., & Snow, J.C. (1979). The magnitude of compliance and non-
compliance. In R.B. Haynes, D.W. Taylor, & D.L. Sackett (Eds.), Compliance
in health care (pp. 11-22). Baltimore: John Hopkins University Press. #(38),
#(37) 

Sacks, H., Schegloff, E.A., & Jefferson, G. (1974). A simplest systematics
or the organization of turn taking for conversation. Language, 50, 696-735.
#(30), #(14)  

Safer, N.D., Morissey, P.A., Kaufman, M.J., & Lewis, L. (1978). Implementa-
tion of IEPs: New teacher roles and requisite support systems. Focus on
Exceptional Children, 10(1), 1-10. #(8)

Safford, P.L., Gregg, L.A., Schneider, G., & Sewell, J.M. (1976). A
stimulation for young sensory-impaired, multi-handicapped children. Education
and Training of the Mentally Retarded, 11, 12-17. #(21)

Sailor, W., Gee, K., Goetz, L., & Graham, N. (1988). Progress in educating
students with the most severe disabilities: Is there any? Journal of The
Association for Persons with Severe Handicaps, 13(2), 87-89. #(21)

Sailor, W., & Guess, D. (1983). Severely handicapped students: An instruc-
tional design. Boston: Houghton Mifflin. #(34), #(21), #(9)

Sailor, W., Guess, D., & Baer, D.M. (1973). Functional language for verbally
deficient children. Mental Retardation, 11(3), 27-35. #(30)

Sailor, W., Guess, D.M., Goetz, L., Schuler, A., Utley, B., & Baldwin, M.
(1980). Language and severely handicapped persons: Deciding what to teach to
whom. In W. Sailor, B. Wilcox, & L. Brown (Eds.), Methods of instruction for
severely handicapped students (pp. 71-105). Baltimore: Paul H. Brookes.
#(30), #(38), #(21)

Sailor, W., Halvorsen, A., Anderson, J., Goetz, L., Gee, K., Doering, K., &
Hunt, P. (1986). Community intensive instruction. In R.H. Horner, L.H. Meyer,
& H. Fredericks (Eds.), Education of learners with severe handicaps:
Exemplary service strategies (pp. 251-288). Baltimore: Paul H. Brookes.
#(38), #(27)

Sailor, W., & Haring, N.G. (1977). Some current directions in education of
the severely/ multiply handicapped. AAESPH Review, 2, 3-87. #(21)

Sailor, W., & Horner, R.D. (1976). Educational and assessment strategies for
the severely handicapped. In N. G. Haring & L. Brown (Eds.), Teaching the
severely handicapped (Vol. 1, pp. 179-207). New York: Grune & Stratton.
#(21), #(29), #(9), #(38)

Sailor, W., & Mix, B.J. (1975). The TARC assessment system. Lawrence, KS: H
& H Enterprises. #(29), #(44)

Sailor, W., Wilcox, B., & Brown, L. (Eds.). (1980). Methods of instruction
for severely handicapped students. Baltimore: Paul H. Brookes. #(21), #(34)

Sainato, D.M., Goldstein, H., & Strain, P.S. (1992). Effects of self-
evaluation of preschool children's use of social interaction strategies with
the classmates with autism. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 25,
127-141. #(2), #(37), #(29)

Sainsbury, R. (1971). The "feature positive effect" and simultaneous
discrimination learning. Journal of Experimental Child Psychology, 11,
347-356. #(6)

Sajwaj, T., Libet, J., & Agras, S. (1974). Lemon juice therapy: The control
of life-threatening rumination in a six-month-old infant. Journal of Applied
Behavior Analysis, 7, 557-563. #(3)  

Salapatek, P., & Cohen, L. (Eds.). (1987). Handbook of infant perception:
Vol. 1. From perception to cognition. New York: Academic Press. #(38), #(12)

Salciccia, C.E. (1986). The microcomputer as an argumentative communication
system. In M.L. Grossfeld & C.A. Grossfeld (Eds.), Microcomputer applications
in rehabilitation of communication disorders (pp. 131-149). Rockville, MD:
Aspen Publications. #(16), #(30), #(38) 

Salend, S.J. (1984). Integrity of treatment in special education research.
Mental Retardation, 22, 309-315. #(29)

Salend, S.J., & Zirkel, P.A. (1984). Special education hearings: Prevailing
problems and practical proposals. Education and Training of the Mentally
Retarded, 19, 29-34. #(10)

Salisbury, C., & Vincent, L. (1990). Criterion of the next environment and
best practices: Mainstreaming and integration 10 years later. Topics in Early
Childhood Special Education, 10(2), 78-89. #(39)

Salmon, D.J., Pear, J.J., & Kuhn, B.A. (1986). Generalization of object
naming after training with picture cards and with objects. Journal of Applied
Behavior Analysis, 19, 53-58. #(7)

Salthouse, T.A., & Somberg, B.L. (1982). Skilled performance: Effects of
adult age and experience on elementary processes. Journal of Experimental
Psychology: General, 3, 176-207. #(46)

Salvia, J., & Ysseldyke, J.E. (1978). Assessment in special and remedial
education. Boston: Houghton Mifflin. #(29), #(34)

Salvia, J., & Ysseldyke, J.E. (1978). Assessment of academic achievement:
Screening devices. In J. Salvia & J.E. Ysseldyke, Assessment in special and
remedial education (pp. 125-163). Boston: Houghton Mifflin. #(12), #(29),
#(38)

Salvia, J., & Ysseldyke, J.E. (1978). Assessment of perceptual-motor skills.
In J. Salvia & J.E. Ysseldyke, Assessment in special and remedial education
(pp. 300-324). Boston: Houghton Mifflin. #(12), #(29), #(38)

Salzberg, C.L., Agran, M., & Lignugaris/Kraft, B. (1986). Behaviors that
contribute to entrylevel employment. A profile of five jobs. Applied Research
in Mental Retardation, 7, 299-314. #(33) 

Salzberg, C.L., Lignugaris/Kraft, B., & McCuller, G.L. (1988). Reasons for
job loss: A review of employment termination studies of mentally retarded
workers. Research in Developmental Disabilities, 9, 153-170. #(33), #(32) 

Salzinger, K. (1959). Experimental manipulation of verbal behavior: A review.
Journal of General Psychology, 61, 65-94. #(32), #(30)

Samuels, S.J., & Edwall, G. (1981). The role of attention in reading with
implications for the learning disabled student. Journal of Learning
Disabilities, 14, 353-368. #(1), #(28), #(17)

Sanders, J. (1986). Microcomputer applications for speech-language services
in the schools. London: Taylor & Francis. #(16), #(34)

Sanders, M.R., & Glynn, T. (1981). Training parents in behavioral self-
management: An analysis of generalization and maintenance. Journal of Applied
Behavior Analysis, 14, 223-237. #(3), #(7)

Sandler, A.G., & McLain, S.C. (1987). Sensory reinforcement: Effects of
response-contingent vestibular stimulation on multiply handicapped children.
American Journal of Mental Deficiency, 91, 373-378. #(3), #(12), #(14)

Sanford, J.P., Emmer, E.T., & Clements, B.S. (1983). Improving classroom
management. Educational Leadership, 7, 56-60. #(3)

Sanson-Fisher, R.W., Poole, A.D., & Dunne, J. (1980). An empirical method for
determining an appropriate interval length for recording behavior. Journal of
Applied Behavior Analysis, 13, 493-500. #(29)

Santostefano, S. (1964). Cognitive controls and exceptional states in
children. Journal of Clinical Psychology, 20, 213-218. #(21)

Saper, B. (1987). Humor in psychotherapy: Is it good or bad for the client?
Professional Psychology: Research and Practice, 18, 360-367. #(3), #(18)

Sapon-Shevin, M. (1990). Student support through cooperative learning. In W.
Stainback & S. Stainback (Eds.), Support networks for inclusive schooling:
Interdependent integrated education (pp. 65-79). Baltimore: Paul H. Brookes.
#(38), #(42)

Saposnek, D.T., & Watson, L.S. (1974). The elimination of the self-destruc-
tive behavior of a psychotic child: A case study. Behavior Therapy, 5, 79-89.
#(19)

Sarason, S., & Doris, J. (1979). Educational handicap, public policy, and
political change. New York: Free Press. #(23), #(34), #(8)

Saravo, A. (1967). Effect of number of variable dimensions on reversal and
nonreversal shifts. Journal of Experimental Child Psychology, 64, 93-97. #(6)

Saravo, A., & Gollin, E.S. (1969). Oddity learning and learning sets in
children. Journal of Experimental Child Psychology, 7, 541-552. #(6)

Sartre, J.P. (1948). No exit and three other plays. New York: Alfred A.
Knopf. #(34), #(35)

Sartre, J.P. (1957). Existentialism and human emotions. New York: Wisdom
Library. #(34), #(35)

Sartre, J.P. (1965). Nausea (Trans by Robert Baldick). New York: Penguin
Books. #(34), #(35)

Sattler, J.M. (1974). Assessment of children's intelligence and special
abilities (2nd ed.). Boston: Allyn & Bacon. #(25), #(34), #(45)

Saufley, W., Jr., Otaka, S.R., & Bavaresco, J.L. (1985). Context effects:
Classroom tests and context independence. Memory & Cognition, 13, 522-528.
#(11)

Saunders, K.J. (1989). Naming in conditional discrimination and stimulus
equivalence. Journal of the Experimental Analysis of Behavior, 51, 379-384.
#(6) 

Saunders, R.R., Saunders, K.J., Kirby, K.C., & Spradlin, J.E. (1988). The
merger and development of equivalence classes by unreinforced conditional
selection of comparison stimuli. Journal of the Experimental Analysis of
Behavior, 50, 145-162. #(6)

Saunders, R.R., & Sherman, J.A. (1986). Analysis of the "Discrimination-
Failure Hypothesis" in generalized matching and mismatching behavior.
Analysis and Intervention in Developmental Disabilities, 6, 89-107. #(6),
#(7)

Savage-Rumbaugh, E.S., Runbaugh, D.M., & Boysen, S. (1980). Do apes use
language? American Scientist, 68, 49-61. #(30)

Savell, J.M., Wohig, P.T., & Rachford, D.L. (1986). Empirical status of
Feuerstein's "Instrumental Enrichment" (FIE) technique as a method of
teaching thinking skills. Review of Educational Research, 56, 381-409. #(5)

Scandary, J. (1981). What every teacher should know about due process
hearings. Teaching Exceptional Children, 13(3), 92-96. #(10) 

Scarr, S. (Ed.). (1979). Psychology and children: Current research and
practice [Special issue]. American Psychologist, 34. #(25), #(43)

Scarr, S. (1985). Constructing psychology: Making faces and fables for our
times. American Psychologist, 40, 499-512. #(29), #(35)

Schacter, D.L. (1987). Implicit memory: History and current status. Journal
of Experimental Psychology: Learning, Memory, and Cognition, 13, 501-518.
#(11), #(32)

Schaefer, B. (1980). Spontaneous language through signed speech. In R.
Schiefelbusch (Ed.), Nonspeech language and communication (pp. 421-446).
Baltimore: University Park Press. #(38), #(30)

Schaefer, H.H., Kollinzas, G., Musil, A., & McDowell, P. (1977). Spontaneous
verbal language for autistic children through signed speech. Sign Language
Studies, 17, 287-328. #(3), #(2) 

Schafer, D.S., & Moersch, M.S. (Eds.). (1977). Developmental programming for
infants and young children (Vols. 1 & 2). Ann Arbor, MI: University of
Michigan Press. #(5), #(34)

Schalock, R.L., Harper, R.S., & Genung, T. (1981). Community integration of
mentally retarded adults: Community placement and program success. American
Journal of Mental Deficiency, 85, 478-488. #(45), #(31)

Schalock, R.L., & Lilley, M.A. (1986). Placement from community-based mental
retardation programs: How well do clients do after 8 to 10 years? American
Journal of Mental Deficiency, 90, 669-676. #(27), #(45)

Schattschneider, E.E. (1960). The semi-sovereign people: A realist's view of
American democracy. New York: Holt, Rinehart and Winston. #(35), #(34)

Schawlow, A.L. (1994, March-April). Is facilitated communication real? The
Advocate, pp. 27-28. #(2), #(30)

Scheerenberger, R.C. (1983). A history of mental retardation. Baltimore: Paul
H. Brookes. #(34), #(45)

Scheffe, H. (1959). The analysis of variance. New York: John Wiley. #(29),
#(22), #(34)

Schein, J.D. (1979). How well can you see me? Teaching Exceptional Children,
12(2), 55-58. #(6), #(12)

Scheingold, S. (1974). The politics of rights: Lawyers, public policy, and
political change. New Haven: Yale University Press. #(10), #(34), #(23)

Schell, R.E., Stark, J., & Giddon, J.J. (1967). Development of language
behavior in an autistic child. Journal of Speech and Hearing Disorders, 32,
51-64. #(2), #(30) 

Schelling, T. (1960). The strategy of conflict. New York: Oxford University
Press. #(35), #(34)

Scherer, N.J., & Olswang, L.B. (1989). Using structured discourse as a
language intervention technique with autistic children. Journal of Speech and
Hearing Disorders, 54, 383-394. #(2), #(30)

Schiefelbusch, R.L. (Ed.). (1972). Language of the mentally retarded.
Baltimore: University Park Press. #(30), #(34), #(45)

Schiefelbusch, R.L. (Ed.). (1974). Nonspeech language and communication:
Analysis and intervention. Baltimore: University Park Press. #(30), #(34)

Schiefelbusch, R.L. (Ed.). (1978). Bases of language intervention. Baltimore:
University Park Press. #(30), #(34)

Schiefelbusch, R.L. (Ed.). (1986). Language competence: Assessment and
intervention. San Diego: College-Hill Press. #(34), #(30), #(29)

Schiefelbusch, R.L., & Bricker, D. (Eds.). (1981). Early language: Assessment
and intervention. Baltimore: University Park Press. #(30), #(34), #(29)

Schiefelbusch, R.L., & Lloyd, L.L. (Eds.). (1974). Language perspectives--
acquisition, retardation, and intervention. Baltimore: University Park Press.
#(30), #(34) 

Schiefelbusch, R.L., & Pickar, J. (1984). The acquisition of communicative
competence. Baltimore: University Park Press. #(30), #(34)

Schiefelbusch, R.L., Ruder, K.F., & Bricker, W.A. (1976). Training strategies
for languagedeficient children: An overview. In N.G. Haring & R.L. Schiefelb-
usch (Eds.), Teaching special children (pp. 268-300). New York: McGraw-Hill.
#(30), #(38)

Scheingold, K., Kane, J.H., & Endreweit, M.E. (1983). Microcomputer use in
schools: Developing a research agenda. Harvard Educational Review, 53,
412-432. #(16), #(43) 

Schepis, M.M., Reid, D.H., Fitzgerald, J.R., Faw, G.D., van den Pol, R.A., &
Welty, P.A. (1982). A program for increasing manual signing by autistic and
profoundly retarded youth within the daily environment. Journal of Applied
Behavior Analysis, 15, 363-379. #(45), #(2), #(3), #(30)

Schloss, P.J., & Sedlak, R.A. (1986). Instructional methods for students with
learning and behavior problems. Boston: Allyn & Bacon. #(9), #(34)

Schloss, P.J., Wolf, C.W., & Schloss, C.N. (1987). Financial implications of
halfand full-time employment for persons with disabilities. Exceptional
Children, 54, 272-276. #(27) 

Schiefelbusch, R.L., & Picakar, J. (Eds.). (1984). The acquisition of
communicative competence. Baltimore: University Park Press. #(34), #(30)

Schiffer, J. (1980). Summary and model. In J. Schiffer (Ed.), School renewal
through staff development (pp. 158-171). New York: Teachers College Press.
#(42), #(38) 

Schilomoeller, K.J., & Etzel, B.C. (1977). An experimental analysis of
criterion-related and noncriterion-related cues in "errorless" stimulus
control procedures. In B.C. Etzel, J.M. LeBlanc, & D.M. Baer (Eds.), New
developments in behavioral research: Theory, method, and application (pp.
317-347). Hillsdale, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum. #(38), #(6), #(9)

Schilomoeller, G.L., Schilomoeller, K.J., Etzel, B.C., & Le Blanc, J.M.
(1979). Conditional discrimination after errorless and trial-and error
training. Journal of the Experimental Analysis of Behavior, 31, 405-420. #(6)

Schipper, W.V., Wilson, W.C., & Wolf, J.M. (1977). Public education of the
handicapped. In E. Sontag (Ed.), Educational programming for the severely and
profoundly handicapped (pp. 6-13). Reston, VA: Council for Exceptional
Children. #(31), #(21), #(38)

Schmid-Kitsikis, E. (1973). Piagetian theory and its approach to psychopa-
thology. American Journal of Mental Deficiency, 77, 694-705. #(13)

Schmidt, J.A. (1974). Research techniques for counselors: The multiple
baseline. Personnel and Guidance Journal, 53, 200-206. #(3), #(29), #(43)

Schmidt, P. (1976). Feeding assessment and therapy for the neurologically
impaired. AAESPH Review, 1, 19-28. #(3), #(29)

Schmidt, M., Weinstein, T., Numic, R., & Walberg, H.J. (1985-1986). Computer-
assisted education with exceptional children. Journal of Special Education,
19, 125-130. #(16), #15)

Schmuck, R.A. (1979). Facilitating school renewal: The role of process
consultation. Theory Into Practice, 18, 59-64. #(42)

Schnaitter, R. (1978). Private causes. Behaviorism, 6, 1-12. #(3), #(14)

Schnake, M.E. (1987). Vicarious punishment in a work setting: A failure to
replicate. Psychological Reports, 61, 379-386. #(14), #(34)

Schneider, H.C., & Salzberg, C.L. (1981). A positive approach to removal of
restraints for self-injurious behavior. Teaching Exceptional Children, 13,
143-144. #(19)

Schneider, H.C., & Salzberg, C.L. (1982). Stimulus overselectivity in a
match-to-sample paradigm by severely retarded youth. Analysis and Interven-
tion in Developmental Disorders, 2, 273-304. #(1), #(6)

Schneider, W., & Pressley, M. (1989). Memory development between 2 and 20.
New York: Springer-Verlag. #(11), #(34)

Schneier, C.E. (1974). Behavior modification in management: A review and
critique. Academy of Management Journal, 17, 528-548. #(3), #(42), #(32)

Schnelle, J.P., Kirchner, R.E., McNees, M.P., & Lawler, J.M. (1975). Social
evaluation research: The evaluation of two police patrolling strategies.
Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 8, 353-365. #(3), #(27), #(29)

Schoenfeld, W.N. (1969). "Avoidance" in behavioral theory. Journal of the
Experimental Analysis of Behavior, 12, 669-674. #(3), #(14), #(35)

Schoggen, P. (1983). Behavior settings and the quality of life. Journal of
Community Psychology, 11, 144-157. #(27)

Scholl, G.T. (Ed.). (1986). Foundations of education for blind and visually
handicapped children and youth: Theory and practice. New York: American
Foundation for the Blind. #(34), #(21)

Schopler, E. (1966). Visual versus tactual receptor preference in normal and
schizophrenic children. Journal of Abnormal Psychology, 71, 108-114. #(12)

Schopler, E. (1978). On confusion in the diagnosis of autism. Journal of
Autism and Childhood Schizophrenia, 8, 137-138. #(21), #(29), #(2)

Schopler, E. (1978). National Society for Autistic Children definition of the
syndrome of autism. Journal of Autism and Childhood Schizophrenia, 8,
162-169. #(21), #(29), #(2)

Schoper, E. (1992). Editorial commentary [on the subject of facilitated
communication]. Journal of Autism and developmental Disabilities, 22,
337-338. #(30), #(2) 

Schopler, E., Brehm, S., Kinsbourne, M., & Reichler, R.J. (1971). Effect of
treatment structure on development in autistic children. Archives of General
Psychiatry, 24, 415-421. #(21), #(2), #(7)

Schopler, E., & Olley, J.G. (1980). Public school programming for autistic
children. Exceptional Children, 46, 461-463. #(27), #(2)

Schopler, E., & Mesibov, G. (Eds.). (1983). Autism in adolescents and adults.
New York: Plenum Press. #(34), #(2)

Schopler, E., & Mesibov, G. (Eds.). (1984). The effects of autism on the
family. New York: Plenum Press. #(34), #(2)

Schopler, E., & Mesibov, G. (Eds.). (1985). Communication problems in autism.
New York: Plenum Press. #(2), #(34), #(30)

Schopler, E., & Mesibov, G. (Eds.). (1986). Social problems in autism. New
York: Plenum Press. #(34), #(2), #(37)

Schopler, E., & Mesibov, G. (Eds.). (1987). Neurological issues in autism.
New York: Plenum Press. #(2), #(34), #(25)

Schopler, E., & Reichler, R.J. (1972). How well do parents understand their
own psychotic children? Journal of Autism and Childhood Schizophrenia, 2,
387-400. #(21), #(2) 

Schopler, E., Reichler, R.J., & Lansing, M. (1980). Individualized assessment
and treatment for autistic and developmentally disabled children. Baltimore:
University Park Press. #(34), #(2), #(29), #(45)

Schopler, E., Reichler, R.J., De Vellis, R.F., & Daly, K. (1980). Toward
objective classification of childhood autism: Childhood Autism Rating Scale
(CARS). Journal of Autism and Developmental Disorders, 10, 91-103. #(44),
#(2)

Schopler, E., Reichler, R.J., & Renner, B.C. (1988). The Childhood Autism
rating Scale (CARS). Los Angeles: Western Psychological Services. #(44)

Schopler, E., Short, A., & Mesibov, G. (1989). Relation of behavioral
treatment to "normal functioning": Comment on Lovaas. Journal of Counseling
and Clinical Psychology, 57, 162-164. #(2), #(29)

Schover, L.R., & Newsom, C.D. (1976). Overselectivity, developmental level,
and overtraining in autistic and normal children. Journal of Abnormal Child
Psychology, 4, 289-298. #(6), #(2) 

Schreibman, L. (1975). Effects of within-stimulus and extra-stimulus
prompting on discrimination learning in autistic children. Journal of Applied
Behavior Analysis, 8, 91-112. #(6), #(2), #(9) 

Schreibman, L. (1977). A reply to the comments on "Employing electric shock
with autistic children: A review of the side effects." Journal of Autism and
Childhood Schizophrenia, 7, 203-204. #(3), #(2), #(32)

Schreibman, L. (1988). Autism. Newbury Park, CA: Sage Publications. #(2)

Schreibman, L., & Carr, E.G. (1978). Elimination of echolalic responding to
questions through the training of a generalized verbal response. Journal of
Applied Behavior Analysis, 11, 453-463. #(3), #(7)

Schreibman, L., & Charlop, M.H. (1981). S+ versus S- fading in prompting
procedures with autistic children. Journal of Experimental Child Psychology,
31, 508-520. #(3), #(6), #(2)

Schreibman, L., Charlop, M.H., & Koegel, R.L. (1982). Teaching autistic
children to use extra-stimulus prompts. Journal of Experimental Child
Psychology, 33, 475-491. #(6), #(2), #(9)

Schreibman, L., & Koegel, R.L. (1975, March). Autism: A defeatable horror.
Psychology Today, 8, pp. 61-67. #(21), #(2)

Schreibman, L., & Koegel, R.L. (1981). A guideline for planning behavior
modification programs for autistic children. In S.M. Turner, K.S. Calhoun, &
H.E. Adams (Eds.), Handbook of Clinical Behavior Therapy. New York: John
Wiley. #(3), #(2), #(38)

Schreibman, L., & Koegel, R.L. (1982). Multiple-cue responding in autistic
children. In J. Steffen & P. Karoly (Eds.), Advances in child behavioral
analysis and therapy, Vol.II: Autism and severe psychopathology (pp. 81-99).
Lexington, MA: D.C. Heath and Co. #(6), #(2), #(38), #(21)

Schreibman, L., Koegel, R.L., Charlop, M.H., & Egel, A.L. (1982). Autism. In
A.S. Bellack, M. Hersen, & A.E. Kazdin (Eds.), International handbook of
behavior modification and therapy (pp. 891-916). New York: Plenum Press.
#(38), #(2), #(3)

Schreibman, L., Koegel, R.L., & Craig, M.S. (1977). Reducing stimulus
overselectivity in autistic children. Journal of Abnormal Child Psychology,
5, 425-436. #(6), #(2)

Schreibman, L., Koegel, R.L., Mills, D.L., & Burke, J.C. (1984). Training
parent-child interactions. In E. Schopler & G. Mesibov (Eds.), The effects of
autism on the family (pp. 187-205). New York: Plenum Press. #(38), #(2),
#(37)

Schreibman, L., & Lovaas, O.I. (1973). Overselective response to social
stimuli by autistic children. Journal of Abnormal Child Psychology, 1,
152-168. #(6), #(2) 

Schreibman, L., & Mills, J.I. (1983). Infantile autism. In T.H. Ollendick &
M. Hersen (Eds.), Handbook of child psychopathology (pp. 123-149). New York:
Plenum Press. #(2), #(38) 

Schreibman, L., O'Neill, R.E., & Koegel, R.L. (1983). Behavioral training for
siblings of autistic children. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 16,
129-138. #(3), #(2) 

Schroeder, S.R. (1970). Usage of stereotypy as a descriptive term. Psycholog-
ical Record, 20, 337-342. #(20)

Schroeder, S.R. (1970). Selective eye movements to simultaneously presented
stimuli during discrimination. Perception and Psychophysics, 7, 121-124. #(6)

Schroeder, S.R. (1972). Parametric effects of reinforcement frequency, amount
of reinforcement, required response force on sheltered workshop behavior.
Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 5, 431-441. #(14), #(3)

Schuler, A.L. (1979). Echolalia: Issues and clinical applications. Journal of
Speech and Hearing Disorders, 44, 411-434. #(30)

Schuler, A.L. (1985). Selecting augmentative communication systems on the
basis current means and functions. Australian Journal of Human Communication
Disorders, 13, 102-120. #(30), #(29)

Schuler, A.L., & Baldwin, M. (1981). Nonspeech communication and childhood
autism. Language, Speech, and Hearing Services in Schools, 12, 246-257.
#(25), #(2)

Schuler, A.L., & Prizant, B.M. (1985). Echolalia in autism. In E. Schopler &
G. Mesibov (Eds.), Communication problems in autism. New York: Plenum Press.
#(30), #(2), #(38)

Schuler, A.L., & Prizant, B.M. (1987). Facilitating communication: Pre-
language approaches. In D. Cohen, A. Donnellan, & R. Paul (Eds.), Handbook of
autism and pervasive developmental disorders (pp. 301-315). New York: John
Wiley. #(30), #(2), #(38)

Schuler, A.L., & Prizant, B.M. (1987). Facilitating communication: Language
approaches. In D. Cohen, A. Donnellan, & R. Paul (Eds.), Handbook of autism
and pervasive developmental disorders (pp. 316-332). New York: John Wiley.
#(30), #(2), #(38) 

Schutz, R.P., & Rusch, F.R. (1982). Competitive employment: Toward employment
integration for mentally retarded persons. In K.L. Lynch, W.E. Kiernan, &
J.A. Stark (Eds.), Prevocational and vocational education for special needs
youth (pp. 133-159). Baltimore: Paul H. Brookes. #(38), #(45), #(33) 

Schwartz, A.H. (Ed.). (1984). Handbook of microcomputer applications in
communication disorders. San Diego: College-Hill Press. #(16), #(34)

Schwartz, A.H. (1984). Evaluating microcomputer software. In A. Schwartz
(Ed.), Handbook of microcomputer applications in communication disorders (pp.
125-146). San Diego: College-Hill Press. #(16), #(38)

Schwartz, I.S., & Baer, D.M. (1991). Social validity assessments: Is current
practice state of the art? Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 24, 189-204.
#(3), #(27) 

Schwartz, S. (1981). Language disabilities in infantile autism: A brief
review and comment. Applied Psycholinguistics, 2, 25-31. #(32), #(2), #(30)

Schwitzgebel, R.K. (1974). The right to effective mental treatment.
California Law Review, 62, 936-956. #(10), #(40)

Scott, K.G. (1966). Engineering attention: Some rules for the classroom.
Education and Training of the Mentally Retarded, 1, 125-129. #(1), #(45)

Scott, W.E. (1975). The effects of extrinsic rewards on "Intrinsic Motiva-
tion": A critique. Organizational Behavior and Human Performance, 15,
117-129. #(14), #(3). 

Scoville, R. (1979). Development of the intention to communicate: The eye of
the beholder. In L. Feagans, C. Garvey, R. Golinkoff, M.T. Greenberg, C.
Harding, & J.N. Bohannon (Eds.), The origins and growth of communication (pp.
109-135). Norwood, NJ: Ablex. #(38), #(30)

Scriven, M. (1974). Standards for the evaluation of educational programs and
products. In G.D. Borich (Ed.), Evaluating educational programs and products
(pp. 5-24). Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Educational Technology Publications. #(29),
#(38)

Scriven, M. (1974). Maximizing the power of causal investigations: The modus
operandi method. In W.J. Popham (Ed.), Evaluation in education--current
applications (pp. 68-84). Berkeley, CA: McCutchan. #(38), #(29)

Scriven, M., & Roth, J. (1978). Needs assessment: Concept and practice. New
Directions for Program Evaluation, 1, 1-10. #(29)

Scruggs, T.E., Mastropieri, M.A., & Casto, G. (1987). The quantitative syn-
thesis of single-subject research: Methodology and validation. Remedial and 
Special Education, 8, 24-33. #(48)

Scruggs, T.E., & Wong, B.Y.L. (Eds.). (1990). Intervention research in
learning disabilities. New York: Springer-Verlag. #(28), #(34), #(43)

Searle, J.R. (1969). Speech acts: An essay in the philosophy of language.
Cambridge, England: Cambridge University Press. #(30), #(34), #(35)

Sebeok, T.A. (1981). The Clever Hans phenomenon: Communication with horses,
whales, apes, and people. New York: New York Academy of Sciences. #(34),
#(30)

Sebeok, T.A., & Umiker-Sebeok, D.J. (1980). Speaking of apes. New York:
Plenum Press. #(30), #(3)

Seeley, D.S. (1979). Reducing the confrontation over teacher accountability.
Phi Delta Kappan, 60, 248-251. #(26)

Seeman, J. (1973). On supervising student research. American Psychologist,
28, 900-906. #(43)

Seidel, R.J. (1980). It's 1980: Do you know where your computer is? Phi Delta
Kappan, 61, 481-484. #(16)

Seitz, S., & Hoekenga, R. (1974). Modeling as a training tool for retarded
children and their parents. Mental Retardation, 12(2), 28-31. #(41), #(3),
#(45)

Seitz, S., & Terdal, L. (1972). A modeling approach to changing parent-child
interactions. Mental Retardation, 10(3), 39-43. #(3), #(41)

Selden, D., & Bhaerman, R. (1970). Instructional technology and the teaching
profession. Teachers College Record, 71, 391-406. #(15)

Selfridge, O. (1959). Pandemonium: A paradigm for learning. In D.V. Blake &
A.M. Uttley (Eds.), Mechanization of thought processes. London: H.M.
Stationary Office. #(38), #(11)

Seligman, M.E.P. (1970). On the generality of the laws of learning.
Psychological Review, 77, 406-418. #(15)

Seligman, M.E.P. (1972). Learned helplessness. Annual Review of Medicine, 23,
407-412. #(37)

Seligman, M.E.P. (1975). Helplessness: On depression, development, and death.
San Francisco: Freeman. #(34), #(37)

Seltzer, M.M. (1984). Correlates of community opposition to community
residences for mentally retarded persons. American Journal of Mental
Deficiency, 89, 1-8. #(27), #(45) 

Seltzer, M.M. (1985). Informal supports for aging mentally retarded persons.
American Journal of Mental Deficiency, 90, 259-265. #(45), #(46)

Semel, E., & Wiig, E. (1980). Clinical evaluation of language functions.
Columbus, OH: Charles E. Merrill. #(30), #(34), #(29)

Semel, E., & Wiig, E. (1987). Clinical evaluation of language fundamentals--
Revised. New York: Psychological Corporation. #(34), #(44), #(30)

Semmel, M.I., Cosden, M.A., Semmel, D.S., & Kelemen, E. (1984). Training
special education personnel for effective use of microcomputer technology:
Critical needs and directions. Special Services in the Schools, 1, 63-82.
#(16)

Semmel, M.I., Gottlieb, J., & Robinson, N.M. (1979). Mainstreaming:
Perspectives on educating handicapped children in the public school. In D.C.
Berliner (Ed.), Review of research in education: 7 (pp. 223-279). Washington,
DC: American Educational Research Association. #(27), #(39), #(38)

Semmel, M.I., & Heinmiller, J.L. (Eds.). (1977). The education for all
handicapped children act (PL 94-142): Issues and implications. Viewpoints,
53(2), 1-16. #(10) 

Semmel, M.I., & Lieber, J.A. (1986). Computer applications in instruction.
Focus on Exceptional Children, 18(9), 1-12. #(16) 

Semmel, M.I., & Snell, M. (1980). Does toilet training belong in public
schools? A review of toilet training. Education Unlimited, 2, 53-58. #(18),
#(32)

Semmel, M.I., & Wiig, E. (1980). Clinical Evaluation of Language Functions.
Columbus, OH: Charles E. Merrill. #(2), #(30), #(29), #(34)

Senatore, V., Matson, J.L., & Kazdin, A.E. (1982). A comparison of behavioral
methods to train social skills to mentally retarded adults. Behavior Therapy,
13, 313-324. #(3), #(37), #(45)

Sequin, E. (1907). Idiocy and its treatment by the physiological method. New
York: Columbia University Press. (Original work published 1864.) #(21), #(34)

Serow, R.C., & Davies, J.J. (1982). Resources and outcomes of minimum
competency testing as measures of equality of educational opportunity.
American Educational Research Journal, 19, 529-539. #(26), #(29), #(24)

Sevin, J.A., Matson, J.L., Coe, D.A., Fee, V.E., & Sevin, B.M. (1991). A
comparison and evaluation of three commonly used autism scales. Journal of
Autism and Developmental Disorders, 21, 417-432. #(2), #(29)

Shadish, W.R., Jr. (1984). Lessons from the implementation of deinstitution-
alization. American Psychologist, 39, 725-738. #(8), #(31)

Shafer, M.S. (1987). Competitive employment for persons with mental
retardation. In M. Hersen, R.M. Eisler, & P. Miller (Eds.), Progress in
behavior modification (pp. 86-107). New York: Academic Press. #(38), #(24),
#(45)

Shafer, M.S., Egel, A.L., & Neef, N.A. (1984). Training mildly handicapped
peers to facilitate changes in the social interaction skills of autistic
children. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 17, 461-476. #(3), #(27),
#(2), #(36)

Shafer, M.S., Hill, J., Seyfarth, J., & Wehman, P. (1987). Competitive
employment and workers with mental retardation: Analysis of employers'
perceptions and experiences. American Journal of Mental Retardation, 92,
304-311. #(27), #(33), #(45)

Shames, G.H., & Wiig, E.H. (Eds.). (1990). Human communication disorders: An
introduction. Columbus, OH: Charles E. Merrill. #(34), #(30)

Shanahan, D., & Ryan, A.W. (1984). A tool for evaluating educational
software. Teaching Exceptional Children, 16(4), 242-247. #(29) 

Shane, H.C. (1980). Approaches to assessing the communication of non-oral 
persons. In R.L. Schiefelbusch (Ed.), Nonspeech language and communication
(pp. 197-224). Baltimore: University Park Press. #(30), #(29)

Shane, H.C. (1981). Decision-making in early augmentative communication use.
In R.L. Schiefelbusch & D.D. Bricker (Eds.), Early language: Acquisition and
intervention (pp. 389-425). Baltimore: University Park Press. #(30), #(38)

Shane, H.G. (1981). Significant writings that have influenced the curriculum:
1906-1981. Phi Delta Kappan, 62, 311-319. #(5)

Shane, H.G. (1982). The silicon age and education. Phi Delta Kappan, 63,
303-308. #(16)

Shannon, C.E., & Weaver, W. (1949). The mathematical theory of communication.
Urbana, IL: University of Illinois Press. #(30), #(34)

Shapiro, A.K. (1976). The behavior therapies: Therapeutic breakthrough or
latest fad? American Journal of Psychiatry, 133, 153-159. #(3)

Shapiro, E., & Biber, B. (1972). The education of young children: A
developmental-interaction approach. Teachers College Record, 74, 55-79. #(25)

Share, D.L., Jorm, A.F., Maclean, R., & Mathews, R. (1984). Sources of
individual difference in reading acquisition. Journal of Educational
Psychology, 6, 1309-1324. #(17) 

Shavelson, R., & Dempsey-Atwood, N. (1976). Generalizability of measures of
teaching behavior. Review of Educational Research, 46, 553-611. #(3), #(7) 

Shaw, S.F., & Bensky, J.M. (1980). Making inservice training work: A model
personnel development program. Education Unlimited, 2, 5-9. #(42)

Shearer, W.M. (1984). Academic and instructional applications for microcom-
puters. In A. Schwartz (Ed.), Handbook of microcomputer applications in
communication disorders (pp. 193-218). San Diego, CA: College-Hill Press.
#(16), #(38) 

Sheehan, R., & Gradel, K. (1982). Intervention models in early childhood
special education. In S.G. Garwood (Ed.), Educating young handicapped
children: A developmental approach (2nd ed., pp. 475-514). Rockville, MD:
Aspen Publications. #(3), #(38)

Sheingold, K., Kane, J.H., & Endreweit, M.E. (1983). Microcomputer use in
schools: Developing a research agenda. Harvard Educational Review, 53,
412-432. #(16)

Sheperd, G. (1975). Models for preparation programs. Education and Training
of the Mentally Retarded, 10, 193-195. #(42), #(45)

Shepp, B.E., Barrett, S.E., & Kolbet, L.L. (1987). The development of
selective attention: Holistic perception versus resource allocation. Journal
of Experimental Child Psychology, 42, 159-180. #(1)

Shepp, B.E., Kemler, D.G., & Anderson, D.R. (1972). Selective attention and
the breadth of learning: An extension of the one-look model. Psychological
Review, 79, 317-328. #(1), #(35)

Shepp, B.E., & Zeaman, D. (1966). Discrimination learning of size and
brightness by retardates. Journal of Comparative and Physiological Psycholo-
gy, 62, 55-59. #(6) 

Sherman, J. (1964). Modification of nonverbal behavior through reinforcement
of related behavior. Child Development, 35, 717-723. #(3), #(14), #(30)

Sherman, J.A., Clark, H.B., & Kelly, K.K. (1977). Imitative behavior of
preschool children: The effects of reinforcement, instructions, and response
similarity. In B.C. Etzel, J.M. LeBlanc, & D.M. Baer (Eds.), New developments
in behavior research: Theory, method, and application (pp. 503-529).
Hillsdale, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum. #(38), #(41), #(14), #(9)

Sherman, J.A., Saunders, R.R., & Brigham, T.A. (1970). Transfer of matching
and mismatching behavior in preschool children. Journal of Experimental Child
Psychology, 9, 489-498. #(6), #(7)

Sherrod, L. (1979). Social cognition in infancy: Attention to the human face.
Infant Behavior and Development, 2, 279-294. #(1)

Shettleworth, S.J. (1974). Function, causation, evolution, and development of
behavior: A review of the Animal in its World, by N. Tinbergen. Journal of
Experimental Analysis of Behavior, 22, 581-590. #(3), #(32)

Shinin, M.R. (1989). Curriculum-based measurement: Assessing special children.
New York: Guilford. #(34), #(29)

Shipley, E.F. (1989). Two types of hierarchies: Class inclusion and kind
hierarchies. Genetic Epistemologist, 17, 31-39. #(11)

Shores, R.E., Cegelka, P.T., & Nelson, C.M. (1973). Competency-based special
education teacher training. Exceptional Children, 40, 182-192. #(26)

Short, A., & Marcus, L. (1986). Psychoeducational evaluation of autistic
children and adolescents. In S.S. Strichart & P. Lazarus (Eds.), Psychoedu-
cational evaluation of school-aged children with low-incidence disorders (pp.
155-180). Orlando, FL: Grune & Stratton. #(38), #(29)

Shriberg, L.D., Kwiatkowski, J., & Snyder, T. (1986). Articulation testing by
microcomputer. Journal of Speech and Hearing Disorders, 51, 309-324. #(16),
#(20), #(29) 

Shrodes, C. (1955). Bibliotherapy. The reading teacher, 9, 24. #(17)

Shultz, J.R., & Horibe, F. (1974). Development of the appreciation of verbal
jokes. Developmental Psychology, 10, 13-20. #(30)

Sidman, M. (1960). Tactics of scientific research: Evaluating experimental
data in psychology. New York: Basic Books. #(29), #(34)

Sidman, M. (1966). Avoidance behavior. In W.K. Honig (Ed.), Operant behavior:
Areas of research and application (pp. 448-498). New York: Appleton-Century-
Crofts. #(3), #(38), #(14)

Sidman, M. (1971). Reading and auditory-visual equivalences. Journal of
Speech and Hearing Research, 14, 5-13. #(17), #(12)

Sidman, M. (1977). Teaching some basic prerequisites for reading. In P.
Mittler (Ed.), Research to practice in mental retardation (Vol. II, pp.
350-360). Baltimore: University Park Press. #(38), #(17), #(45)

Sidman, M. (1990). Equivalence relations: Where do they come from? In D.E.
Blackman & H. Lejeune (Eds.), Behavior analysis in theory and practice:
Contributions and controversies (pp. 93-114). Hillsdale, NJ: Lawrence
Erlbaum. #(6)

Sidman, M. (1992). Equivalence relations: Some basic considerations. In S.C.
Hayes & L.J. Hayes (Eds.), Understanding verbal relations (pp. 15-27). Reno,
NV: Context Press. #(38), #(30)

Sidman, M., & Cresson, O. (1973). Reading and crossmodal transfer of stimulus
equivalences in severe retardation. American Journal of Mental Deficiency,
77, 515-523. #(17), #(21) 

Sidman, M., & Kirk, B. (1974). Letter reversals in naming, writing, and
matching to sample. Child Development, 45, 616-625. #(6), #(17) 

Sidman, M., Kirk, B., & William-Morris, M. (1985). Six-member stimulus
classes generated by conditional-discrimination procedures. Journal of the
Experimental Analysis of Behavior, 37, 23-44. #(6)

Sidman, M., & Stoddard, L.T. (1966). Programming perception and learning for
retarded children. In N.R. Ellis (Ed.), International review of research in
mental retardation (Vol. 2, pp. 151-208). New York: Academic Press. #(12),
#(38), #(45)

Sidman, M., & Stoddard, L.T. (1967). The effectiveness of fading in
programming a simultaneous form discrimination for retarded children. Journal
of the Experimental Analysis of Behavior, 10, 3-15. #(6)

Sidman, M., & Tailby, W. (1982). Conditional discriminations vs. matching-to-
sample: An expansion of the testing paradigm. Journal of the Experimental
Analysis of Behavior, 37, 5-22. #(6), #(29)

Sidman, M., Willson-Morris, M., & Kirk, B. (1986). Matching-to-sample
procedures and the development of equivalence relations: The role of naming.
Analysis and Intervention in Developmental Disabilities, 6, 1-19. #(6)

Siegel-Causey, E., & Downing, J. (1987). Nonsymbolic communication develop-
ment: Theoretical concepts and educational stragegies. In L. Goetz, D. Guess,
& K. Stremel-Campbell (Eds.), Innovative program design for individuals with
dual sensory impairments (pp. 15-48). Baltimore: Paul H. Brookes. #(38),
#(30)

Siegel-Causey, E., & Guess, D. (1989). Enhancing nonsymbolic communication
interactions among learners with severe disabilities. Baltimore: Paul H.
Brookes. #(30), #(34)

Siegel, E. (1972). Task analysis and effective teaching. Journal of Learning
Disabilities, 5, 5-19. #(9)

Siegel, G.M., & Ingham, R.J. (1987). Theory and science in communication
disorders. Journal of Speech and Hearing Disorders, 52, 99-104. #(30), #(35)

Siegel, M.A., & Crawford, K.A. (1983). Two-year follow-up study of discrimi-
nation learning by mentally retarded children. American Journal of Mental
Deficiency, 88, 76-78. #(6), #(45)

Siegel, M.A., & Misselt, A.L. (1984). Adaptive feedback and review paradigm
for computerbased drills. Journal of Educational Psychology, 76, 310-317.
#(16), #(32)

Siegel, P.S., & Crawford, K.A., & Evelsizer, Z. (1983). Attention discrimina-
tion learning in relation to certain teacher-rated behavior anomalies.
American Journal of Mental Deficiency, 89, 389-392. #(1), #(6)

Siegel, P.S., Crawford, K.A., & Evelsizer, Z. (1985). Attention in discrimi-
nating learning in relation to certain teacher-rated behavior anomalies.
American Journal of Mental Deficiency, 89, 389-392. #(1)

Siegel, P.S., & Ellis, N.R. (1985). Note on the recruitment of subjects for
mental retardation research. American Journal of Mental Deficiency, 89,
431-433. #(29), #(45) 

Siegel, S. (1956). Nonparametric statistics for the behavioral sciences. New
York: McGraw-Hill. #(29), #(34), #(22)

Siegler, R.S. (1976). Three aspects of cognitive development. Cognitive
Psychology, 8, 481-520. #(25)

Siegler, R.S. (1983). Five generalizations about cognitive development.
American Psychologist, 38, 263-277. #(25)

Siegler, R.S. (1991). Children's thinking (2nd ed.). Englewood Cliffs, NJ:
Prentice-Hall. #(34), #(25)

Siegler, R.S., & Richards, D.D. (1982). The development of intelligence. In
R.J. Sternberg (Ed.), Handbook of human intelligence (pp. 897-971). New York:
Cambridge University Press. #(38), #(25), #(35)

Sigelman, C.K. (1976). A Machiavelli for planners: Community attitudes and
selection of a group home site. Mental Retardation, 14(1), 26-29. #(27),
#(23)

Sigman, M., & Ungerer, J.A. (1981). Sensorimotor skills and language compre-
hension in autistic children. Journal of  Abnormal Child Psychology, 9, 149-
165. #(30), #(12)

Sigman, M., & Ungerer, J.A. (1984). Cognitive and language skills in autis-
tic, mentally retarded, and normal children. Developmental Psychology, 20,
293-302. #(2), #(45), #(30), #(25)

Sigman, M., Ungerer, J., Mundy, P., & Sherman, T. (1987). Cognition in au-
tistic children. In D. Cohen, A. Donnellan, & R. Paul (Eds.), Handbook of
autism and a typical developmental disorders (pp. 103-120). New York: John
Wiley. #(2), #(38), #(25)

Silberberg, N.E., & Silberberg, M.C. (1969). The bookless curriculum: An
educational alternative. Journal of Learning Disabilities, 2, 307-307. #(5)

Silliman, E.R. (1984). Interactional competencies in the instructional
context: The role of teaching discourse in learning. In G.P. Wallach & K.G.
Butler (Eds.), Language learning disabilities in school-age children (pp.
288-317). Baltimore: Williams & Wilkins. #(26), #(38), #(30)

Sillman, E.R. (1992). Three perspectives of facilitated communication:
Unexpected literarcy, Clever Hans, or enigma? Topics in Language Disorders,
12, 60-68. #(30)

Silverman, F. (1989). Communication for the speechless (2nd ed.). Englewood
Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall. #(34), #(30)

Silverstein, A.B., Brownlee, L., Hubbell, M., & McLain, R.E. (1975).
Comparison of two sets of Piagetian scales with severely and profoundly
retarded children. American Journal of Mental Deficiency, 80, 292-297. #(13),
#(21)

Silverman, W., & Harris, G. (1982). Reaction time and mild mental retarda-
tion: High speed scanning re-examined. American Journal of Mental Deficiency,
87, 96-102. #(45), #(11) 

Silverstein, A.B., Legutki, G., Friedman, S.L., & Takayama, D.L. (1982).
Performance of Down Syndrome individuals on the Stanford-Binet intelligence
scale. American Journal of Mental Deficiency, 86, 548-551. #(21), #(29)

Simches, R.F. (1970). The inside outsiders. Exceptional Children, 37, 5-15.
#(39)

Simeonsson, R.J., Huntington, G.S., & Parse, A. (1980). Assessment of
children with severe handicaps: Multiple problems-multivariate goals. Journal
of The Association for Persons with Severe Handicaps, 5, 55-72. #(29), #(21)

Simeonsson, R.J., & Wiegerink, R. (1974). Early language intervention. Mental
Retardation, 12(2), 7-11. #(45), #(30)

Simmons, J.Q., & Baltaxe, C.A.M. (1975). Language patterns of adolescent
autistics. Journal of Autism and Childhood Schizophrenia, 5, 333-351. #(2),
#(30)

Simon, C.S. (1985). Functional flexibility: Developing communicative
competence in speaker and listener roles. In C.S. Simon (Ed.), Communication
skills and classroom success (pp. 135-179). San Diego, CA: College-Hill
Press. #(30), #(38)

Simon, C.S. (Ed.). (1985). Communication skills and classroom success:
Assessment of language-learning disabled students. San Diego, CA: College-
Hill Press. #(30), #(34), #(28)

Simeonsson, R.J., Olley, J.G., & Rosenthal, S.L. (1987). Early intervention
for children with autism. In M.J. Guralnick & F.C. Bennett (Eds.), The
effectiveness of early intervention for at-risk and handicapped children (pp.
275-296). New York: Academic Press. #(38), #(2)

Simonson, M., Maurer, M., Montag-Torardi, M., & Whitaker, M. (1987).
Development of a standardized test of computer literacy and a computer
anxiety index. Journal of Educational Computing Research, 3, 231-247. #(16),
#(18)

Simpson, R.L., Sasso, G.M. (1978). The modification of rumination in a
severely emotionally disturbed child through an overcorrection procedure.
AAESPH Review, 3, 145-150. #(3), #(21)

Sindelair, P.T., Meisel C.J., Buy M.J., & Klein, E.S. (1981). Differences in
cognitive functioning of retarded children and retarded autistic children: A
response to Ahmad Baker. Exceptional Children, 47, 406-411. #(21), #(25),
#(2)

Singer, R.N. (1977). To err or not to err: A question for the instruction of
psychomotor skills. Review of Educational Research, 47, 479-498. #(12)

Singh, N.N., & Millichamp, C.J. (1987). Independent and social play among
profoundly mentally retarded adults: Training, maintenance, generalization,
and long-term followup. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 20, 23-34.
#(45), #(21), #(7)

Singh, N.N., & Singh, J. (1986). Reading acquisition and remediation in the
mentally retarded. In N.R. Ellis & N.W. Bray (Eds.), International review of
research in mental retardation (Vol. 14, pp. 165-199). New York: Academic
Press. #(38), #(45), #(17)

Singh, N.N., Watson, J.E., & Winton, A.S.W. (1986). Treating self-injury:
Water mist spray versus facial screening or forced arm exercise. Journal of
Applied Behavior Analysis, 19, 403-410. #(19), #(14)

Sininger, Y.S., Klatzky, R.L., & Kirchner, D.M. (1989). Memory scanning speed
in language-disordered children. Journal of Speech and Hearing Research, 32,
289-297. #(30), #(11) 

Sisson, L.A., & Barrett, R.P. (1984). An alternating treatments comparison or
oral and total communication training with minimally verbal retarded
children. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 17, 559-566. #(30), #(45),
#(43)

Skeels, H., & Dye, H. (1939). A study of the effects of differential
stimulation on mentally retarded children. Proceedings of the American
Association of Mental Deficiency, 44, 114-136. #(3), #(14)

Skinner, B.F. (1938). The behavior of organisms. New York: Appleton-Century-
Crofts. #(3), #(34)

Skinner, B.F. (1945). The operational analysis of psychological terms.
Psychological Review, 52, 270-277. #(3)

Skinner, B.F. (1950). Are theories of learning necessary? Psychological
Review, 57, 193-216. #(5), #(15), #(3)

Skinner, B.F. (1953). Science and human behavior. New York: The Free Press.
#(3), #(34) 

Skinner, B.F. (1954). The science of learning and the art of teaching.
Harvard Educational Review, 24, 86-97. #(3)

Skinner, B.F. (1955). Freedom and control of men. The American Scholar, 25,
47-65. #(3)

Skinner, B.F. (1956). A case history in scientific method. American
Psychologist, 11, 221-233. #(3)

Skinner, B.F. (1957). Verbal behavior. New York: Appleton-Century-Crofts.
#(30), #(34)

Skinner, B.F. (1958). Reinforcement today. American Psychologist, 13, 94-99.
#(3), #(14)

Skinner, B.F. (1961). Why we need teaching machines. Harvard Educational
Review, 31, 377-398. #(15), #(16)

Skinner, B.F. (1963). Behaviorism at fifty. Science, 140, 951-958. #(3)

Skinner, B.F. (1963). Operant behavior. American Psychologist, 18, 503-515.
#(3)

Skinner, B.F. (1963). Reflections on a decade of teaching machines. Teachers
College Record, 65, 168-177. #(16)

Skinner, B.F. (1967). Why we need teaching machines. In S.W. Bijou & D.M.
Baer (Eds.), Child development: Readings in experimental analysis (pp.
274-294). New York: Appleton-Century-Crofts. #(38), #(15), #(16)

Skinner, B.F. (1967). Reflections on a decade of teaching machines. In S.W.
Bijou & D.M. Baer (Eds.), Child development: Readings in experimental
analysis (pp. 295-308). New York: Appleton-Century-Crofts. #(38), #(15),
#(16)

Skinner, B.F. (1968). The technology of teaching. New York: Appleton-Century-
Crofts. #(3), #(34)

Skinner, B.F. (1969). Contingency management in the classroom. Education, 90,
93-100. #(3)

Skinner, B.F. (1969). Contingencies of reinforcement: A theoretical analysis.
Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall. #(3), #(14), #(34)

Skinner, B.F. (1971, August). Beyond freedom and dignity (condensed version).
Psychology Today, pp. 37-80. #(3)

Skinner, B.F. (1972). Cumulative record. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall.
#(93), #(29), #(34)

Skinner, B.F. (1972). Some relations between behavior modification and basic
research. In S.W. Bijou & Ribes-Inesta (Eds.), Behavior modification: Issues
and extensions (pp. 1-6). New York: Academic Press. #(3), #(38)

Skinner, B.F. (1974). About behaviorism. New York: Vintage Books. #(3), #(34)

Skinner, B.F. (1975). The steep and thorny way to a science of behavior.
American Psychologist, 30, 42-49. #(3)

Skinner, B.F. (1977). Herrnstein and the evolution of behaviorism. American
Psychologist, 32, 1006-1012. #(3)

Skinner, B.F. (1979). The shaping of a behaviorist. New York: Knopf. #(3),
#(34)

Skinner, B.F. (1981). How to discover what you have to say. The Behavior
Analyst, 1, 1-7. #(3), #(18)

Skinner, B.F. (1981). Selection by consequences. Science, 213, 501-504. #(3)

Skinner, B.F. (1982). Contrived reinforcement. The Behavior Analyst, 5, 3-8.
#(3), #(14)

Skinner, B.F. (1983). Can the experimental analysis of behavior rescue
psychology? The Behavior Analyst, 6, 9-17. #(3)

Skinner, B.F. (1984). The shame of American education. American Psychologist,
39, 947-954. #(3)

Skinner, B.F. (1987). A thinking aid. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis,
20, 379-380. #(3), #(18)

Skinner, B.F. (1987). Whatever happened to psychology as the science of
behavior? American Psychologist, 42, 780-786. #(3)

Skinner, B.F. (1989). Recent issues in the analysis of behavior. Columbus,
OH: Charles E. Merrill. #(34), #(3)

Skinner, B.F., & Ferster, C.B. (1967). Schedules of reinforcement. New York:
Appleton-Century-Crofts. #(3), #(34), #(14)

Skinner, E.A., & Connell, J.P. (1986). Control understanding: Suggestions for
a developmental framework. In M.M. Baltes & P.B. Baltes (Eds.), The
psychology of aging and control (pp. 35-69). Hillsdale, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum.
#(38), #(46)

Skinner, P., & Shelton, R. (Eds.). (1985). Speech, language, and hearing:
Normal processes and disorders (2nd ed.). New York: John Wiley. #(34), #(30)

Slamecka, N.J. (1968). A methodological analysis of shift paradigms in human
discrimination learning. Psychological Bulletin, 69, 423-438. #(6)

Slawson, P.F., & Davidson, P.W. (1974). Hysterical self-mutilation of the
tongue. Archives of General Psychiatry, 11, 581-588. #(19)

Smalley, S.L., Asarnow, R.F., & Spence, M.A. (1988). Autism and genetics: A
decade of research. Archives of General Psychiatry, 45, 953-961. #(2)

Smeets, P.M., & Lancioni, G.E. (1981). The efficacy of three procedures for
teaching easy and difficult discriminations in severely retarded adolescents.
Behavior Research of Severe Developmental Disabilities, 2, 191-201. #(45),
#(6)

Smeets, P.M., Lancioni, G.E., & Hoogeveen, F.R. (1984). Using stimulus
shaping and fading to establish stimulus control in normal and retarded
children. Journal of Mental Deficiency Research, 28, 207-218. #(45), #(6)

Smeets, P.M., Lancioni, G.E., & Striefel, S. (1987). Discrimination training
through time delay of multistimulus prompts: The shapes and locations of the
prompts. The Psychological Record, 37, 507-521. #(6)

Smeets, P.M., Lancioni, G.E., Striefel, S., & Curfs, P.G.M. (1988).
Establishing a difficult discrimination through time delay: Some critical
dimensions of prompts. Journal of Experimental Child Psychology, 45, 280-302.
#(6) 

Smeets, P.M., Striefel, S., & Gast, D.L. (1974). Conditioning history and the
imitation of reinforced and nonreinforced behaviors. Journal of General
Psychology, 90, 257-270. #(3), #(41), #(14)

Smelser, N.J. (1987). Contemporary classics in the social and behavioral sci-
ences. Philadelphia: ISI Press. #(34), #(3)

Smillie, D. (1982). Rethinking Piaget's theory of infancy. Human Development,
25, 282-294. #(13), #(25)

Smith, C.H. (1975). Total communication using the simultaneous method. In
M.P. Creedon (Ed.), Appropriate behavior through communication (pp. 45-74).
Chicago: Michael Reese Medical Center. #(30)

Smith, C.R. (1983). Learning disabilities: The interaction of learner, task,
and setting. Boston: Little, Brown, & Co. #(28)

Smith, D.K. (Ed.). (1974). Motor-academic-perceptual curriculum guide for the
early childhood education of the multiply handicapped. Indiana, PA: M-A-P
Project. #(9), #(34), #(21), #(5), #(44)

Smith, E.E. (1978). Theories of semantic memory. In W.K. Estes (Ed.),
Handbook of learning and cognitive processes (Vol. 6, pp. 1-56). Hillsdale,
NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum. #(38), #(11)

Smith, J.E., Polloway, E.A., & Smith, J.D. (1978). The continuing dilemma of
the mildly handicapped. Special Children, 4(2), 52-63. #(45), #(39)

Smith, J.O., & Arkans, J.R. (1974). Now more than ever: A case for the
special class. Exceptional Children, 41, 497-502. #(39), #(35)

Smith, L.B., & Kemler, D.G. (1977). Developmental trends in free classifica-
tion: Evidence for a new conceptualization of perceptual development. Journal
of Experimental Child Psychology, 24, 279-298. #(12)

Smith, L.K., & Fowler, S.A. (1984). Positive peer pressure: The effects of
peer monitoring on children's disruptive behavior. Journal of Applied
Behavior Analysis, 17, 213-227. #(27), #(36)

Smith, M.D. (1985). Managing the aggressive and self-injurious behavior of
adults disabled by autism. Journal of The Association for Persons with Severe
Handicaps, 10, 228-232. #(19), #(2)

Smith, M.D., & Belcher, R.G. (1993). Brief report: Facilitated communication
with adults with autism. Journal of Autism and Developmental Disorders, 23,
175-183. #(30)

Smith, M.D., Haas, P.J., Belcher, R.G. (1994). Facilitated communication: The
effects of facilitator kinowledge and level of assistance on output. Journal
of Autism and Developmental Disorders, 24, 357-367. #(30)

Smith, M.L., Glass, G.V., & Miller, T.I. (1980). The benefits of psychothera-
py. Baltimore: Johns Hopkins University Press. #(34), #(3)

Smith, N.K. (1949). The philosophy of David Hume. London: Macmillan. #(34),
#(35) 

Smith, N.W. (1973). Interbehavioral psychology: Roots and branches. The
Psychological Record, 23, 153-167. #(3)

Smith, R.G., Iwata, B.A., Vollmer, T.R., & Pace, G.M. (1992). On the
relationship between self-injurious behavior and self-restraint. Journal of
Applied Behavior Analysis, 25, 433-445. #(19)

Smith, S. (1979). Remembering in and out of context. Journal of Experimental
Psychology: Human Learning and Memory, 5, 460-471. #(11)

Smith, S. (1982). Enhancement of recall using multiple environmental contexts
during learning. Memory & Cognition, 10, 405-412. #(11)

Smith, S. (1984). A comparison of two techniques for reducing context-
dependent forgetting. Memory & Cognition, 12, 477-482. #(11)

Smith, S. (1985). Background music and context-dependent memory. American
Journal of Psychology, 98, 591-603. #(11)

Smith, S., Slattery, W., & Knopp, T. (1993). Beyond the mandate: Developing
individualized education programs that work for students with autism. Focus
on Autistic Behavior, 8(30, 1-14. #(2), #(5)

Smith, T.B. (1973). The policy implementation process. Policy Sciences, 4,
197-209. #(8) 

Smock, C.D. (1981). Constructivism and educational practices. In I.E. Siegel
& D.M. Golinkoff (Eds.), New directions in Piagetian theory and practice.
Hillsdale, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum. #(13), #(38)

Smoley, S.R. (1971). Use of operant techniques for the modification of self-
injurious behavior. American Journal of Mental Deficiency, 76, 295-305. #(3),
#(19)

Snell, M.E. (1981). Daily living skills. In J.M. Kauffman & D.P. Hallahan
(Eds.), Handbook of Special Education (pp. 530-551). Englewood Cliffs, NJ:
Prentice-Hall. #(27), #(38) 

Snell, M.E. (1983). Functional reading. In M.E. Snell (Ed.), Systematic
instruction of the moderately and severely handicapped (2nd ed., pp.
445-487). Columbus, OH: Charles E. Merrill. #(33), #(38), #(17)

Snell, M.E. (Ed.). (1987). Systematic instruction of persons with severe
handicaps (3rd ed.). Columbus, OH: Charles E. Merrill. #(9), #(21), #(34)

Snell, M.E., & Browder, D.M. (1986). Community-referenced instruction:
Research and issues. Journal of The Association for Persons with Severe
Handicaps, 11(1), 1-11. #(27) 

Snell, M.E., Thompson, M.S., & Taylor, K.G. (1979). Providing inservice to
educators of the severely handicapped: The active response inservice training
model. Education and Training of the Mentally Retarded, 14, 25-33. #(21),
#(42), #(45)

Snow, R.E. (1974). Representative and quasi-representative designs for
research on teaching. Review of Educational Research, 44, 265-291. #(29) 

Snow, R.E. (1977). Individual differences and instructional theory.
Educational Researcher, 6(10), 11-15. #(26)

Snyder, L. (1978). Communicative and cognitive abilities and disabilities in
the sensorimotor period. Merrill-Palmer Quarterly, 24, 161-180. #(30), #(25)

Synder, L. (1984). Developmental language disorders: Elementary school age.
In A. Holland (Ed.), Language disorders in children (pp. 129-158). San Diego:
College-Hill Press. #(38), #(30)

Snyder, L. (1984). Communicative competence in children with delayed language
development. In R. Schiefelbusch & J. Pickar (Eds.), The acquisition of
communicative competence (pp. 423-478). Baltimore: University Park Press.
#(38), #(30)

Snyder, L., & Lindstedt, D. (1985). Models of child language development. In
E. Schopler & G. Mesibov (Eds.), Communication problems in autism (pp.
17-35). New York: Plenum Press. #(38), #(30)

Snyder, L.S. (1978). Communicative and cognitive abilities and disabilities
in the sensorimotor period. Merrill-Palmer Quarterly, 24, 161-180. #(30)

Snyder, L.K., Apolloni, T., & Cooke, T.P. (1977). Integrated settings at the
early childhood level: The role of non-retarded peers. Exceptional Children,
43, 262-266. #(39), #(36) 

Snyder, L.K., Lovitt, T.C., & Smith, J.O. (1975). Language training for the
severely retarded: Five years of behavior analysis research. Exceptional
Children, 42, 7-15. #(3), #(30), #(21)

Sobell, L.C., Schaefer, H.H., Sobell, M.B., & Kremer, M.E. (1970). Food
priming: A therapeutic tool to increase the percentage of meals bought by
chronic mental patients. Behaviour Research and Therapy, 8, 339-345. #(9),
#(21), #(3)

Soeffing, M.Y. (1975). Perspectives on due process--parent, administrator and
policy specialist exchange views. Education and Training of the Mentally
Retarded, 10, 204-214. #(23) 

Sokolov, E.N. (1963). Perception and the conditioned reflex. New York:
Macmillan. #(34), #(12)

Solomon, R.L. (1948). Effort and extinction rate: A confirmation. Journal of
Comparative and Physiological Psychology, 41, 93-101. #(14)

Solomon, R.L. (1949). An extension of control group design. Psychological
Bulletin, 46, 137-150. #(43)

Solomon, R.L. (1964). Punishment. American Psychologist, 19, 239-253. #(3),
#(14)

Solomon, R.W., & Wahler, R.G. (1973). Peer reinforcement control of classroom
problem behavior. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 10, 49-56. #(3),
#(14), #(36). 

Solnick, J.V., & Baer, D.M. (1984). Using multiple exemplars for teaching
number numerical correspondence: Some structural aspects. Analysis and
Intervention in Developmental Disabilities, 4, 47-63. #(7)

Solnick, J.V., Rincover, A., & Peterson, C.R. (1977). Some determinants of
the reinforcing and punishing effects of timeout. Journal of Applied Behavior
Analysis, 10, 415-424. #(3), #(14), #(9)

Somerton, E., & Meyers, D.G. (1976). Educational programming for the
severely/profoundly mentally retarded. In N.G. Haring & L. Brown (Eds.),
Teaching the severely handicapped (Vol. 1, pp. 111-154). New York: Grune &
Stratton. #(38), #(45), #(21), #(5)

Somerton, E., & Turner, K. (1975). Pennsylvania training model: Individual
assessment guide. Reston, VA: Council for Exceptional Children. #(29), #(21),
#(44) 

Song, A.Y., & Gandhi, R. (1974). An analysis of behavior during the
acquisition and maintenance phases of self-spoon feeding skills of profound
retardates. Exceptional Children, 12, 25-28. #(3), #(21), #(18)

Sontag, E. (Ed.). (1977). Educational programming for the severely and
profoundly handicapped. Reston, VA: Council for Exceptional Children. #(5),
#(21), #(34) 

Sontag, E., Burke, P.J., & York, R. (1973). Considerations for serving the
severely handicapped in the public schools. Education and Training of the
Mentally Retarded, 8, 20-26. #(21), #(15), #(45)

Sontag, E., Certo, N., & Button, J.E. (1979). On a distinction between the
education of the severely and profoundly handicapped and a doctrine of
limitations. Exceptional Children, 45, 604-616. #(21), #(15)

Sontag, E., Smith, J., & Sailor, W. (1977). The severely/profoundly
handicapped: Who are they? Where are we? Journal of Special Education, 11,
5-11. #(21), #(35), #(25) 

Sorgen, M.S. (1973). Testing and tracking in public schools. Hastings Law
Journal, 24, 1129-1190. #(10), #(29), #(40)

Sowers, J., Rusch, F.R., Connis, R.T., & Cummings, L.E. (1980). Teaching
mentally retarded adults to time-manage in a vocational setting. Journal of
Applied Behavior Analysis, 13, 119-128. #(27), #(45)

Sowers, J., Verdi, M., Bourbeau, P., & Sheehan, M. (1985). Teaching job
independence and flexibility to mentally retarded students through the use of
a self-control package. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 18, 81-85.
#(27), #(45) 

Spache, G. (1963). Toward better reading. Champaign, IL: Garrard Publishing.
#(17)

Sparrow, S.S., Balla, D.A., & Cicchetti, D.U. (1984). Vineland Adaptive
Behavior Scales. Circle Pines, MN: American Guidance Service. #(44), #(30)

Spear, N.E. (1978). The processing of memories: Forgetting and retention.
Hillsdale, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum. #(34), #(11)

Speidel, G.E., & Tharp, R.G. (1978). Teacher-training workshop strategy:
Instructions, discrimination training, modeling, guided practice, and video
feedback. Behavior Therapy, 9, 735-739. #(3), #(42)

Speleke, E.S. (1990). Principles of object perception. Cognitive Science, 14,
29-56. #(12)

Spellman, C., DeBriere, T., Jarboe, D., Campbellmu, S., & Harris, C. (1978).
Pictorial instruction: Training daily living skills. In M.E. Snell (Ed.),
Systematic instruction of the moderately and severely handicapped (pp.
391-411). Columbus, OH: Charles E. Merrill. #(6), #(27), #(21), #(38)

Spence, W.W. (1936). The nature of discrimination learning with and without
errors. Psychological Review, 43, 427-449. #(6)

Sperling, G. (1963). A model for visual memory tasks. Human Factors, 5,
19-31. #(11)

Spiegel-McGill, P., Zippiroli, S.M., & Mistrett, S.G. (1989). Microcomputers
as social facilitators in integrated preschools. Journal of Early Interven-
tion, 13, 249-260. #(16) 

Spiker, C.C., & Lubker, B.J. (1965). The relative difficulty for children of
the successive and simultaneous discrimination problems. Child Development,
36, 1091-1101. #(6), #(25)

Spiro, R.J., Bruce, B.C., & Brewer, W.F. (Eds.). (1977). Theoretical issues
in reading comprehension. Hillsdale, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum. #(17), #(34)

Spitz, H.H. (1963). Field theory in mental deficiency. In N.R. Ellis (Ed.),
Handbook of mental deficiency (pp. 11-40). New York: McGraw-Hill. #(38),
#(35)

Spitz, H.H. (1966). The role of input organization in the learning and memory
of mental retardates. In N.R. Ellis (Ed.), International review of research
in mental retardation (Vol. 2, pp. 29-56). New York: Academic Press. #(38),
#(45), #(11)

Spitz, H.H., Minsky, S.K., & Bessellieu, C.L. (1985). Influence of planning
time and firstmove strategy on Tower of Hanoi problem-solving performance of
mentally retarded young adults and nonretarded children. American Journal of
Mental Deficiency, 90, 4656. #(9), #(45)

Spitzer, D.R. (1975). What is a concept? Educational Technology, 15, 36-39.
#(25)

Spitzer, R.L. (1983). Psychiatric diagnosis: Are clinicians still necessary?
Comprehensive Psychiatry, 24, 399-411. #(29), #(2)

Spivack, G., & Spotts, J. (1966). Devereux Child Behavior Rating manual.
Devon, PA: The Devereux Foundation Press. #(44), #(34)

Spivack, G., Haimes, P.E., & Spotts, J. (1967). Devereux Adolescent Behavior
Rating Scale manual. Devon, PA: The Devereux Foundation. #(44), #(34)

Spodek, B. (Ed.). (1982). Handbook of research on early childhood education.
New York: Free Press/MacMillan. #(34), #(25), #(43)

Spooner, F. (1984). Comparisons of backward chaining and total task
presentation in training severely handicapped persons. Education and Training
of the Mentally Retarded, 19, 15-22. #(9), #(21), #(45) 

Spooner, F., & Spooner, D. (1984). A review of chaining techniques:
Implications for future research and practice. Education and Training of the
Mentally Retarded, 19, 114-124. #(9), #(21), #(32) 

Sposato, B. (Ed.). (1993, Spring). Facilitated communication generates
questions. The Advocate, pp. 19-23. #(2), #(30)

Spradlin, J.E. (1977). Language and emergent behavior. In P. Mittler (Ed.),
Research to practice in mental retardation (Vol. II, pp. 253-260). Baltimore:
University Park Press. #(38), #(30)

Spradlin, J.E., Cotter, V.W., & Baxley, N. (1973). Establishing a conditional
discrimination without direct training: A study of transfer with retarded
adolescents. American Journal of Mental Deficiency, 77, 556-566. #(45), #(6),
#(7)

Spradlin, J.E., & Dixon, M.H. (1976). Establishing conditional discrimina-
tions without training: Stimulus classes and labels. American Journal of
Mental Deficiency, 80, 555-561. #(6)

Spradlin, J.E., & Girardeau, F.L. (1966). The behavior of moderately and
severely retarded persons. In N.R. Ellis (Ed.), International review of
research in mental retardation (Vol. 1, pp. 256-298). New York: Academic
Press. #(3), #(21), #(38), #(45)

Spradlin, J.E., & Saunders, R.R. (1986). The development of stimulus classes
using match-tosample procedures: Sample classification versus comparison
classification. Analysis and Intervention in Developmental Disabilities, 6,
41-58. #(6)

Spradlin, J.E., & Spradlin, R.R. (1976). Developing necessary skills for
entry into classroom teaching arrangements. In N.G. Haring & R.L. Schiefelb-
usch (Eds.), Teaching special children (pp. 232-267). New York: McGraw-Hill.
#(27), #(38)

Spreen, O. (1965). Language functions in mental retardation: A review. I:
Language development, types of retardation and intelligence level. American
Journal of Mental Deficiency, 69, 482-494. #(30), #(32)

Staddon, J.E.R. (1973). On the notion of cause, with applications to
behaviorism. Behaviorism, 1, 25-63. #(3)

Staddon, J.E.R., & Simmelhag, V. (1971). The "superstition" experiment: A re-
examination of its implications for the principles of adaptive behavior.
Psychological Review, 78, 3-43. #(6), #(4)

Stahl, S.A., & Miller, P.D. (1989). Whole language and language experience
approach for beginning reading: A quantitative research synthesis. Review of
Educational Research, 59, 87-116. #(17), #(30)

Stainback, S., Healy, H., Stainback, W., & Healy J. (1976). Teaching basic
eating skills. AAESPH Review, 1, 26-35. #(27)

Stainback, S., Stainback. W., & Maurer, S. (1976). Training teachers of the
severely and profoundly handicapped: A new frontier. Exceptional Children,
42, 203-210. #(21), #(42) 

Stainback, S., Stainback, W., Schmid, R. et al. (1977). Training teachers for
the severely and profoundly retarded: An accountability model. Education and
Training of the Mentally Retarded, 12, 170-174. #(21), #(42), #(45)

Stainback, W., & Stainback, S. (1982). Nonhandicapped students' perceptions
of severely handicapped students. Education and Training of the Mentally
Retarded, 17, 177-182. #(27), #(21), #(45)

Stainback, W., & Stainback, S. (1982). Social interactions between autistic
students and their peers. Behavioral Disorders, 7, 75-81. #(27), #(2), #(36)

Stainback, W., & Stainback, S. (1983). A review of research on the educabili-
ty of profoundly retarded persons. Education and Training of the Mentally
Retarded, 18, 90-100. #(21), #(45), #(32)

Stainback, W., & Stainback, S. (1984). A rationale for the merger of special
and regular education. Exceptional Children, 51(2), 102-111. #(39)

Stainback, W., & Stainback, S. (Eds.). (1990). Support networks for inclusive
schooling: Interdependent integrated education. Baltimore: Paul H. Brookes.
#(34), #(39)

Stainback, W., Stainback, S., & Hatcher, C.W. (1983). Developing policies for
extended year programs. Journal of The Association for Persons with Severe
Handicaps, 8, 5-9. #(21), #(23)

Stalwar, T.L. (1978). The modification of coprophagic behavior in a 16-month
old boy using errorless discrimination learning. Behavior Therapy & Exper-
imental Psychology, 9, 373-376. #(3), #(6), #(4)

Stampel, T.G., & Levine, D.J. (1967). The essentials of implosive therapy: A
learning-theory based psychodynamic behavioral therapy. Journal of Abnormal
Psychology, 72, 496-503. #(3)

Stampel, T.G., & Levis, D.J. (1968). Implosive therapy--a behavioral therapy?
Behaviour Research and Therapy, 7, 31-36. #(3)

Stanford Law Review. (1979). The right to treatment and educational rights of
handicapped persons: Lora v. Board of Education. Author, 31, 807-815. #(40),
#(45) 

Stanley, J.C. (1957). Controlled experimentation in the classroom. Journal of
Experimental Education, 25, 195-201. #(43)

Stanley, J.C. (1957). Research methods: Experimental design. Review of
Educational Research, 27, 449-459. #(43)

Stanley, J.C. (1965). Quasi-experimentation. School Review, 73, 197-205.
#(43)

Stanley, J.C. (1966). A common class of pseudo-experiments. American
Educational Research Journal, 3, 79-87. #(43)

Stanley, J.C., George, W.C., & Solano, C.H. (Eds.). (1977). The gifted and
creative: A fiftyyear perspective. Baltimore: The Johns Hopkins University
Press. #(34), #(50) 

Starin, S.P., & Fuqua, R.W. (1987). Rumination and vomiting in the develop-
mentally disabled: A critical review of the behavioral, medical and
psychiatric treatment research. Research in Developmental Disabilities, 8,
575-605. #(19), #(32)

Stark, J., Rosenbau, R.L., Schwartz, D., & Wisar, A. (1973). The non-verbal
child: Some clinical guidelines. Journal of Speech and Hearing Disorders, 38,
59-71. #(30) 

Starr, M.K. (1975). Policy formulation and management by exception. In M.K.
Starr (Ed.), Management: A modern approach (pp. 425-462). New York: Life
Office Management. #(42), #(23), #(38)

Stawar, T.L. (1978). The modification of coprophagic behavior in a 16-month
old boy using errorless discrimination learning. Journal of Behavior Therapy
and Experimental Psychiatry, 9, 373-376. #(3)

Steege, M.W., Wacker, D.P., & McMahon, C.M. (1987). Evaluation of the
effectiveness and efficiency of two stimulus prompt strategies with severely
handicapped students. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 20, 293-299.
#(9), #(21)

Stein, A. (1971). Strategies for failure. Harvard Educational Review, 71,
158-204. #(39), #(15)

Stein, J.U. (1977). Physical education, recreation and sports for special
populations. Education and Training of the Mentally Retarded, 12, 4-13. #(21)

Stein, T.J. (1975). Some ethical considerations of short-term workshops in
the principles and methods of behavior modification. Journal of Applied
Behavior Analysis, 8, 113-115. #(3) 

Steinbruner, J.D. (1974). The cybernetic paradigm. In J.D. Steinbruner (Ed.),
The cybernetic theory of decision (pp. 47-87). Princeton, NJ: Princeton
University Press. #(42), #(38) 

Steinbruner, J.D. (1974). Cognitive processes. In J.D. Steinbruner (Ed.), The
cybernetic theory of decision (pp. 88-139). Princeton, NJ: Princeton
University Press. #(25), #(38)

Steiner, G. (1969). The language animal. Encounter, 33, 7-24. #(30)

Steiner, G. (1974). On the psychological reality of cognitive structures: A
tentative synthesis of Piaget's and Bruner's theories. Child Development, 45,
891-899. #(13)

Steiner, S., & Larson, V. (1991). Integrating microcomputers into language
intervention with children. Topics in Language Disorders, 11(2), 18-30.
#(30), #(16) 

Steinman, W.M. (1970). The social control of generalized imitation. Journal
of Applied Behavior Analysis, 3, 159-167. #(3), #(7), #(41)

Steinman, W.M. (1970). Generalized imitation and the discrimination
hypothesis. Journal of Experimental Child Psychology, 10, 79-99. #(3), #(6),
#(7)

Steinman, W.M., & Boyce, K.D. (1971). Generalized imitation as a function of
discrimination difficulty and choice. Journal of Experimental Child
Psychology, 11, 251-265. #(41), #(6) 

Stephens, B. (1977). A Piagetian approach to curriculum development for the
severely, profoundly and multiply handicapped. In E. Sontag (Ed.), Education-
al programming for the severely and profoundly handicapped (pp. 237-249).
Reston, VA: Council for Exceptional Children. #(13), #(21), #(38)

Stephenson, W. (1953). Postulates of behaviorism. Philosophy of Science, 20,
110-120. #(3)

Stern, L. (1985). The structures and strategies of human memory. Homewood,
IL: Dorsey Press. #(34), #(11)

Sternat, J., Messina, R., Nietupski, J., Lyon, S., Brown, L. (1977).
Occupational and physical therapy for severely handicapped students: Toward
a naturalized public school service delivery model. Part 1: Integrated versus
isolated therapy models. In E. Sontag (Ed.), Educational programming for the
severely and profoundly handicapped (pp. 263-278). Reston, VA: Council for
Exceptional Children. #(21), #(27), #(38) 

Sternberg, D.E., & Jarvik, M.E. (1976). Memory functions in depression.
Archives of General Psychiatry, 33, 219-224. #(11)

Sternberg, R.J. (1981). The evolution of theories of intelligence. Intelli-
gence, 5, 209-229. #(25)

Sternberg, R.J. (Ed.). (1982). Handbook of human intelligence. New York:
Cambridge University Press. #(34), #(25)

Sternberg, R.J. (Ed.). (1984). Mechanisms of cognitive development. New York:
Freeman. #(34), #(25)

Sternberg, R.J. (1985). Implicit theories of intelligence, creativity, and
wisdom. Journal of Personality and Social Psychology, 49, 607-627. #(25),
#(35)

Sternberg, R.J. (Ed.). (1984). Domain-generality versus domain-specificity:
The life and impending death of a false dichotomy. Merrill-Palmer Quarterly,
35, 115-130. #(25) 

Sternberg, R.J. (1989). Intellectual development: Psychometric and informa-
tion-processing approaches. In M.H. Bornstein & M.E. Lamb (Eds.), Develop-
mental psychology: An advanced text (2nd ed.). Hillsdale, NJ: Lawrence
Erlbaum. #(38), #(25)

Sternberg, R.J., Conway, B.E., Ketron, J.L., & Bernstein, M. (1981). People's
conceptions of intelligence. Journal of Personality and Social Psychology,
41, 37-55. #(25) 

Sternberg, R.J., & Detterman, D.K. (Eds.). (1979). Human intelligence:
Perspectives on its theory and measurement. Norwood, NJ: Ablex. #(34), #(25)

Sternberg, S. (1966). High-speed memory scanning in human memory. Science,
153, 652-654. #(11)

Sternberg, S. (1970). Memory scanning: Mental processes revealed by reaction
time experiments. In J.S. Antrobous (Ed.), Cognition and affect (pp. 13-58).
Boston: Little, Brown. #(38), #(11)

Sternberg, S. (1975). Memory-scanning. New findings and current controver-
sies. Quarterly Journal of Experimental Psychology, 27, 1-32. #(11)

Sternberg, S. (1982). Communication instruction. In L. Sternberg & G. Adams
(Eds.), Education severely and profoundly handicapped students (pp. 209-241).
Rockville, MD: Aspec Publications. #(38), #(30)

Stevens, E.A. (1971). Some effects of tempo changes on stereotyped rocking
movements of low-level mentally retarded subjects. American Journal of Mental
Deficiency, 76, 76-81. #(20), #(45)

Stevens, R., & Rosenshine, B. (1981). Advances in research on teaching.
Exceptional Education Quarterly, 2, 1-9. #(26)

Stevenson, H.C., & Fantuzzo, J.W. (1984). Application of the "generalization
map" to a selfcontrol intervention with school-aged children. Journal of
Applied Behavior Analysis, 17, 203-212. #(3), #(7)

Stevenson, H.W. (1972). Children's learning. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-
Hall. #(34), #(12), #(25)

Stevenson, H.W. (1972). Attention and transfer. In H.W. Stevenson, Children's
learning (pp. 242-259). Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall. #(1), #(38)

Stevenson, H.W. (1972). Attention and discrimination learning. In H.W.
Stevenson, Children's learning (pp. 223-241). Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-
Hall. #(1), #(6), #(34), #(38)

Stevenson, H.W. (1972). Perceptual learning. In H.W. Stevenson, Children's
learning (pp. 260-273). Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall. #(12), #(38)

Stevenson, H.W., & Odom, R.O. (1964). Visual reinforcement with children.
Journal of Experimental Child Psychology, 1, 248-255. #(14)

Stillman, R.D., & Battle, C. (1985). The Callier-Azusa Scales for the
Assessment of Communicative Abilities. Dallas: University of Texas, Callier
Center. #(1), #(30) 

Stinnett, R.D., & Prehm, H.J. (1970). Retention in retarded and nonretarded
children as a function of learning method. American Journal of Mental
Deficiency, 75, 39-46. #(45), #(11)

Stoddard, L.T. (1982). An investigation of automated methods for teaching
severely retarded individuals. In N.R. Ellis (Ed.), International review of
research in mental retardation (Vol. 11, pp. 163-207). New York: Academic
Press. #(16), #(45) 

Stoddard, L.T., & McIlvane, W.J. (1986). Stimulus control research and
developmentally disabled individuals. Analysis and Intervention in Develop-
mental Disabilities, 6, 155-178. #(6), #(45)

Stokes, T.F. (1992). Discrimination and generalization. Journal of Applied
Behavior Analysis, 25, 429-432. #(7), #(6)

Stokes, T.F., & Baer, D.M. (1976). Preschool peers as mutual generalization-
facilitating agents. Behavior Therapy, 7, 549-556. #(3), #(36), #(7)

Stokes, T.F., & Baer, D.M. (1977). An implicit technology of generalization.
Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 10, 349-367. #(3), #(7)

Stokes, T.F., Baer, D.M., & Jackson, R.L. (1974). Programming the generaliza-
tion of a greeting response in four retarded children. Journal of Applied
Behavior Analysis, 7, 599-610. #(3), #(27), #(7) 

Stokes, T.F., Dowd, C.C., Rowbury, T.G., & Baer, D.M. (1978). Peer facilita-
tion of generalization in a preschool setting. Journal of Abnormal Child
Psychology, 6, 203-209. #(7), #(36)

Stokes, T.F., Fowler, S.A., & Baer, D.N. (1978). Training preschool children
to recruit natural communities of reinforcement. Journal of Applied Behavior
Analysis, 11, 285-303. #(27), #(14)

Stokes, T.R., & Osnes, P.G. (1986). Programming the generalization of
children's social behavior. In P.S. Strain, M.J. Guralnick, & H. Walker
(Eds.), Children's social behavior: Development, assessment, and modification
(pp. 407-443). New York: Academic Press. #(38), #(30), #(7), #(37)

Stokes, T.F., & Osnes, P.G. (1988). The developing applied technology of
generalization and maintenance. In R.D. Horner, G. Dunlap, & R.L. Koegel
(Eds.), Generalization and maintenance: Life-style changes in applied
settings (pp. 5-20). Baltimore: Paul H. Brookes. #(38), #(7), #(3)

Stokes, T.F., & Osnes, P.G. (1989). An operant pursuit of generalization.
Behavior Therapy, 20, 337-355. #(7).

Stolz, S.B. (1981). Adoption of innovations from applied behavioral research:
"Does anybody care?" Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 14, 491-505. #(8)

Storm, R.H., & Robinson, P.W. (1973). Application of a graded choice
procedure to obtain errorless learning in children. Journal of the Experimen-
tal Analysis of Behavior, 20, 205-210. #(6)

Storm, R.H., & Willis, J.H. (1978). Small-group training as an alternative to
individual programs for profoundly retarded persons. American Journal of
Mental Deficiency, 83, 283-288. #(21)

Stowitschek, J.J., Gable, R.A., & Hendrickson, J.M. (1980). Retrieving
instructional materials. In J.J. Stowitschek, R.A. Gable, & J.M. Hendrickson
(Eds.), Instructional materials for exceptional children: Selection,
management, and adaption (pp. 49-92). Rockville, MD: Aspen Publications.
#(5), #(34)

Stowitschek, J.J., & Powell, T.H. (1981). Materials for teaching social
skills to handicapped children: An analytic review. Journal of Special
Education Technology, 4, 40-49. #(32), #(5)

Stowitschek, J.J., & Stowitschek, C.E. (1984). Once more with feeling: The
absence of research on teacher use of microcomputers. Exceptional Education
Quarterly, 4, 23-39. #(16)

Strain, P.S. (Ed.). (1981). The utilization of classroom peers as behavior
change agents. New York: Plenum Press. #(36), #(34)

Strain, P.S. (1983). Generalization of autistic children's social behavior
change: Effects of developmentally integrated and segregated settings.
Analysis and Intervention in Developmental Disabilities, 3, 23-34. #(2),
#(7), #(37), #(39)

Strain, P.S. (1986). Programmatic research on peers as intervention agents
for socially isolate classmates. In B.H. Schneider, K.H. Rubin, & J.E.
Ledingham (Eds.), Children's peer relations: Issues in assessment and
intervention (pp. 193-205). New York: SpringerVerlag. #(38), #(36), #(37)

Strain, P.S., & Fox, J.J. (1981). Peer social initiations and the modifica-
tion of social withdrawal: A review and future perspective. Journal of
Pediatric Psychology, 6, 417-433. #(37), #(32)

Strain, P.S., & Foxx, J.J. (1981). Peers as behavior change agents for
withdrawn classmates. In A.E. Kazdin & B. Lahey (Eds.), Advances in child
clinical psychology (pp. 167-198). New York: Plenum Press. #(38), #(37)

Strain, P.S., Guralnick, M.J., & Walker, H.M. (Eds.). (1986). Children's
social behavior: Development, assessment, and modification. New York:
Academic Press. #(34), #(37), #(36), #(29), #(3)

Strain, P.S., Kerr, M.M., & Raglund, E.U. (1979). Effects of peer-mediated
social interaction and prompting/reinforcement on the social behavior of
autistic children. Journal of Autism and Developmental Disorders, 9, 4154.
#(3), #(2), #(36), #(14), #(9)

Strain, P.S., & Odom, S.L. (1986). Effective intervention for social skill
development of exceptional children. Exceptional Children, 52, 543-551. #(37)

Strain, P.S., & Shores, R.E. (1977). Social reciprocity: A review of research
and educational implications. Exceptional Children, 43, 526-530. #(3), #(32)

Strain, P.S., Shores, R.E., & Kerr, M.M. (1976). An experimental analysis of
spillover effects on the social interaction of behaviorally handicapped
preschool children. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 9, 31-40. #(3),
#(7), #(37)

Strand, S.C., & Morris, R.C. (1986). Programmed training of visual discrimi-
nations: A comparison of techniques. Applied Research in Mental Retardation,
7, 165-181. #(6) 

Strang, H.R., & Meyers, S.C. (1987). A microcomputer simulation to evaluate
and train effective intervention techniques in listening partners of
preschool stutterers. Journal of Fluency Disorders, 12, 205-215. #(16)

Strauss, A. (1987). Qualitative analysis for social scientists. Cambridge,
England: Cambridge University Press. #(34), #(43), #(29)

Strauss, A., & Lehtinen, L. (1947). Psychopathology and education of the
brain-injured child. New York: Grune and Stratton. #(34), #(28)

Strichart, S.S., & Gottlieb, J. (1975). Imitation of retarded children by
their non-retarded peers. American Journal of Mental Deficiency, 79, 506-512.
#(3), #(36), #(41)

Striefel, S. (1974). Managing behavior, Part 7: Teaching a child to imitate.
Lawrence, KS: H & H Enterprises. #(3), #(41)

Striefel, S., Bryan, K.S., & Aikins, D.A. (1974). Transfer of stimulus
control from motor to verbal stimuli. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis,
7, 123-135. #(11), #(6) 

Striefel, S., & Owens, C.R. (1980). Transfer of stimulus control procedures:
Applications to language acquisition training with the developmentally
handicapped. Behavior Research of Severe Developmental Disabilities, 1,
307-331. #(6), #(30), #(7)

Stroh, C.M. (1971). Vigilance: The problem of sustained attention. New York:
Pergamon Press. #(34), #(1)

Stromer, R. (1986). Control by exclusion in arbitrary matching-to-sample.
Analysis and Intervention in Developmental Disabilities, 6, 59-72. #(6)

Stromer, R., & Osborne, J.G. (1982). Control of adolescents' arbitrary
matching-to-sample by positive and negative stimulus relations. Journal of
the Experimental Analysis of Behavior, 37, 329-348. #(6)

Stroop, J.R. (1932). Is the judgment of the group better than that of the
average member of the group? Journal of Experimental Psychology, 15, 550-562.
#(42) 

Strother, D.B. (1984). Another look at time-on-task. Phi Delta Kappan, 55,
714-717. #(15), #(26)

Stuart, M., & Coltheart, M. (1988). Does reading develop in a sequence of
stages? Cognition, 30, 139-181. #(17), #(13)

Stunkard, A.J., & Mahoney, M.J. (1976). Behavioral treatment of the eating
disorders. In H. Leitenberg (Ed.), Handbook of behavior modification and
behavior therapy (pp. 45-73). Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall. #(3),
#(18), #(38)

Suchman, R., & Trabasso, T. (1966). Color and form preference in young
children. Journal of Experimental Child Psychology, 3, 177-187. #(6)

Sugarman, S. (1984). The development of preverbal communication. In R.L.
Schiefelbusch & J. Picakar (Eds.), The acquisition of communicative
competence (pp. 23-67). Baltimore: University Park Press. #(38), #(30)

Sullivan, R.C. (1976). Autism: Current trends in services. In E.R. Ritvo
(Ed.), Autism: Diagnosis, current research and management (pp. 291-298). New
York: Spectrum Publications. #(21), #(2), #(38)

Sullivan, R.C. (1978). The Hostage Parent. Journal of Autism and Childhood
Schizophrenia, 8, 233-244. #(21), #(2)

Sulzer-Azaroff, B., & Mayer, G.R. (1977). Applying behavior-analysis
procedures with children and youth. New York: Holt, Rinehart and Winston.
#(3), #(34)

Sulzer-Azaroff, B. (1981). Issues and trends in behavior modification in the
classroom. In S.W. Bijou & R. Ruiz (Eds.), Behavior modification: Contribu-
tions in education (pp. 63-93). Hillsdale, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum. #(3), #(38)

Summerfield, H.L. (1974). The limits of federal educational policy. Teachers
College Record, 76, 7-45. #(23)

Sundland, D.M., & Wickens, D.D. (1962). Context factors in paired-associate
learning and recall. Journal of Experimental Psychology, 63, 302-306. #(11) 

Suppes, P. (1966). The uses of computers in education. Scientific American,
215, 286-291. #(16)

Suppes, P. (1974). The place of theory in educational research. Educational
Researcher, 3(6), 3-10. #(35), #(42)

Sutter, E. G., & Reid, J.B. (1969). Learner variables and interpersonal
conditions in computer-assisted instruction. Journal of Educational
Psychology, 60(3), 153-157. #(6), #(11)

Suran, B.G., & Rizzo, J.V. (1979). Children with mental retardation. In B.G.
Suran & J.V. Rizzo (Eds.), Special education: An integrative approach (pp.
205-243). New York: Scott Foresman. #(21), #(38), #(45)

Surratt, P.R., Ulrich, R.E., & Hawkins, R.P. (1969). An elementary student as
a behavioral engineer. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 2, 85-92. #(3),
#(36) 

Swinyard, C.A. (1971). The child with spina bifida. New York: Association for
the Aid of Crippled Children. #(21), #(34)

Swisher, L. (1985). Language disorders in children. In J. Darby (Ed.), Speech
and language evaluation in neurology: Childhood disorders (pp. 33-96). New
York: Grune & Stratton. #(38), #(30)

Swisher, L., & Demetras, M.J. (1985). The expressive language characteristics
of autistic children compared with mentally retarded or specific language-
impaired children. In E. Schopler & G. Mesibov (Eds.), Communication problems
in autism (pp. 147-162). New York: Plenum Press. #(2), #(38), #(30), #(45)

Switzky, H.N. (1979). Assessment of the severely and profoundly handicapped.
In D.A. Sabatino & T.L. Miller (Eds.), Describing learner characteristics of
handicapped children and youth (pp. 415-477). New York: Grune & Stratton.
#(21), #(29), #(38) 

Switzky, H.N., Haywood, H.C., & Rotatori, A.F. (1982). Who are the severely
and profoundly mentally retarded? Education and Training of the Mentally
Retarded, 17, 268-272. #(21), #(45)

Sykes, D.H., Douglas, V.I., & Morgenstern, G. (1973). Sustained attention in
hyperactive children. Journal of Child Psychology and Psychiatry, 14,
213-220. #(1) 

Sypher, H.E., & Applegate, J.L. (Eds.). (1984). Communication by children and
adults: Social, cognitive, and strategic processes. Beverly Hills, CA: Sage
Publications. #(34), #(30) 

Szasz, T.S. (1958). Psychiatry, ethics, and the criminal law. Columbia Law
Review, 58, 183-198. #(40), #(2)

Szasz, T.S. (1960). The myth of mental illness. American Psychologist, 15,
113-118. #(2), #(35), #(2)

Szasz, T.S. (1961). The myth of mental illness. New York: Dell Publishing.
#(35), #(34) 

Szasz, T.S. (1965). The ethics of psychoanalysis. New York: Dell Publishing.
#(34), #(35)

Szasz, T.S. (1970). The manufacture of madness. New York: Dell Publishing.
#(34), #(35)

Szempruch. J., & Jacobson, J.W. (1993). Evaluating facilitated communications
of people with developmental disabilities. Research in Developmental
Disabilities, 14, 253-264. #(30)

Taba, H. (1962). Curriculum development: Theory and practice. New York:
Harcourt & Brace. #(5), #(34), #(14), #(9)

Taba, H. (1962). A conceptual framework for curriculum design. In H. Taba,
Curriculum development: Theory and practice (pp. 413-444). New York: Harcourt
& Brace. #(5), #(38)

Taba, H. (1962). Ten types of behavioral objectives. In H. Taba, Curriculum
development: Theory and practice (pp. 211-230). New York: Harcourt & Brace.
#(5), #(38) 

Tabachnick, B.G., & Fidell, L.S. (1989). Using multivariate statistics (2nd
ed.). New York: Harper & Row. #(22)

Taber, F.M. (1983). Microcomputers in special education. Reston, VA: Council
for Exceptional Children. #(16), #(34)

Taber, J.I., & Glaser, R. (1962). An exploratory evaluation of a discriminat-
ive transfer program using literal prompts. Journal of Educational Research,
55, 508-512. #(6), #(7), #(9)

Tager-Flusberg, H. (1981). On the nature of linguistic functioning in early
infantile autism. Journal of Autism and Developmental Disorders, 11, 45-56.
#(2), #(30)

Tager-Flusberg, H. (1985). The conceptual basis for referential word meaning
in children with autism. Child Development, 56, 1167-1178. #(2), #(17), #(30)

Tager-Flusberg, H. (1986). Constraints on the representation of word meaning:
Evidence from autistic and mentally retarded children. In M. Barrett & S.A.
Kuczaj (Eds.), The development of word meaning (pp. 69-81). New York:
Springer-Verlag. #(30), #(2), #(45), #(38)

Tager-Flusberg, H. (1991). Semantic processing in the free recall of autistic
children: Further evidence for a cognitive deficit. British Journal of
Developmental Psychology, 9, 417-430. #(30), #(25)

Takahashi, M., & Iwamoto, T. (1986). Human concurrent performances: The
effects of experience, instructions, and schedule correlated stimuli. Journal
of the Experimental Analysis of Behavior, 45, 257-267. #(3), #(14)

Talkington, L.W., Hall, S.M., & Altman, R. (1973). Use of a peer modeling
procedure with severely retarded subjects on a basic communication response
skill. Training School Bulletin, 69, 145-149. #(21), #(36)

Tanguay, P. (1984). Toward a new classification of serious psychopathology
in children. Journal of the American Academy of Child Psychiatry, 23, 373-384.
#(3), #(29)

Tanguay, P. (1990). Editor's note: Infantile autism and social communication
spectrum disorder. Journal of the American Academy of Child and Adolescent
Psychiatry, 29, 54. #(2)

Tanner, B.A. (1973). Aversive shock issues: Physical danger, emotional harm,
effectiveness, and "dehumanization." Journal of Behavior Therapy and
Experimental Psychiatry, 4, 113-115. #(3), #(14)

Tanner, B.A., & Zeiler, M. (1975). Punishment of self-injurious behavior
using aromatic ammonia as the aversive stimulus. Journal of Applied Behavior
Analysis, 8, 53-57. #(14), #(3)

Tannock, R., Purvis, K.L., & Schachar, R.J. (1993). Narrative abilities in
children with attention deficit hyperactivity disorder and normal peers.
Journal of Abnormal Child Psychology, 21, 103-117. #(2), #(1), #(30)

Tarver, S.G., & Hallahan, D.P. (1974). Attention deficits in children with
learning disabilities: A review. Journal of Learning Disabilities, 7,
560-569. #(1), #(32)

Tate, B.G. (1972). Case study: Control of chronic self-injurious behavior by
conditioning procedures. Behavior Therapy, 3, 72-83. #(19)

Tate, B.G., & Baroff, G.S. (1966). Aversive control of self-injurious
behavior in a psychotic boy. Behaviour Research and Therapy, 4, 281-287.
#(14), #(2)

Tavris, C. (1974, June). The frozen world of the familiar stranger.
Psychology Today, pp. 7180. #(3), #(14), #(29)

Tavris, C. (1976). Compensatory education: The glass is half full. Psychology
Today, 10(4), 63-74. #(10), #(23) 

Tawney, J.W. (1972). Training letter discrimination in four-year-old
children. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 5, 455-465. #(6)

Tawney, J.W. (1979). The programmed environments curriculum. Columbus, OH:
Charles E. Merrill. #(5), #(34), #(21)

Tawney, J.W., & Cartwright, G.P. (1981). Teaching in a technology oriented
society. Teacher Education and Special Education, 4, 3-14. #(16)

Tawney, J.W., & Gast, D.L. (1984). Single subject research in special
education. Columbus, OH: Charles E. Merrill. #(34), #(48)

Taylor, H.G. (1988). Learning disabilities. In E.J. Mash & L.G. Terdal
(Eds.), Behavioral assessment of childhood disorders (2nd ed., pp. 402-450).
New York: Guilford Press. #(38), #(28)

Taylor, J.C., & Carr, E.G. (1992). Severe problem behaviors related to social
interaction: I. Attention seeking and social avoidance. Behavior Modifica-
tion, 16, 305-335. #(4), #(1), #(37)

Taylor, J.C., & Carr, E.G. (1992). Severe problem behaviors related to social
interation: II. A systems analysis. Behavior Modification, 16, 336-371. #(3),
#(4), #(37)

Taylor, J.C., & Carr, E.G. (1993). Reciprocal social influences in the
analysis and intervention treatment of severe challenging behavior. In J.
Reichle & D.P. Wacker (Eds.), Communicative alternatives to challenging
behavior (pp. 63-81). Baltimore: Paul H. Brookes. #(38), #(37)

Taylor, J.C., Ekdahl, M.M., Romanczyk, R.G., & Miller, M.L. (1994). Escape
behavior in task situations: Task versus social antecedents. Journal of
Autism and Developmental Disorders, 24, 331-334. #(2), #(3)

Taylor, J.J., & Achenbach, T.M. (1980). Moral and cognitive development in
retarded and nonretarded children. American Journal of Mental Deficiency, 80,
43-50. #(25) 

Taylor, R.L. (1982). Assessment. In L. Sternberg & G.L. Adams (Eds.),
Educating severely and profoundly handicapped students (pp. 47-93).
Rockville, MD: Aspen Publications. #(21), #(29), #(38)

Taylor, S.J., Biklen, D., & Knoll, J. (Eds.). (1987). Community integration
for people with severe disabilities. New York: Teachers College Press. #(34),
#(27)

Teal, M.B., & Wiebe, M.J. (1986). A validity analysis of selected instruments
used to assess autism. Journal of Autism and Developmental Disorders, 16,
485-494. #(29), #(2) 

Teasdale, G., & Jennett, B. (1974). Assessment of coma and impaired
consciousness: A practical scale. Lancet, 2, 81-84. #(21)

Teller, D.Y., & Bornstein, M.H. (1987). Infant color perception. In P.
Salapatek & L. Cohen (Eds.), Handbook of infant perception: Vol. 1. From
sensation to perception. New York: Academic Press. #(12), #(38)

Tenney, Y.J. (1975). The child's conception of organization and recall.
Journal of Experimental Child Psychology, 19, 100-114. #(11)

Tennyson, R.D. (1975). Adaptive instructional models for concept acquisition.
Educational Technology, 15, 7-15. #(25)

Tennyson, R.D., & Boutwell, R.C. (1974). Methodology for defining instance
difficulty in concept teaching. Educational Technology, 14, 19-24. #(25)

Tennyson, R.D., & Boutwell, R.C. (1974). Methodology for the sequencing of
instances in classroom concept teaching. Educational Technology, 14, 45-50.
#(25) 

Tennyson, R.D., & Park, O. (1980). The teaching of concepts: A review of
instructional design research literature. Review of Educational Research, 50,
55-70. #(25), #(32) 

Tennyson, R.D., Steve, M.W., & Boutwell, R.C. (1975). Instance sequence and
analysis of instance attribute representation in concept acquisition. Journal
of Education Psychology, 67, 821-827. #(25)

Tennyson, R.D., Wooley, F.R., & Merill, M.D. (1972). Examplar and nonexamplar
variables which produce correct concept classification behavior and specified
classification errors. Journal of Educational Psychology, 63, 144-152. #(25)

Terman, L.M. (1960). A measurement of intelligence. Boston: Houghton Mifflin.
#(34), #(25) 

Terman, L.M., & Merrill, M.A. (1937). Measuring intelligence. Boston:
Houghton Mifflin. #(34), #(29), #(25)

Terman, L.M., & Merrill, M.A. (1960). Stanford-Binet Intelligence Scale.
Boston: Houghton Mifflin. #(44)

Terrace, H.S. (1963). Discrimination learning with and without "errors".
Journal of the Experimental Analysis of Behavior, 6, 1-27. #(6), #(3)

Terrace, H.S. (1963). Errorless transfer of a discrimination across two
continua. Journal of the Experimental Analysis of Behavior, 6, 223-232. #(3),
#(6)

Terrace, H.S. (1966). Stimulus control. In W.K. Honig (Ed.), Operant
behavior: Areas of research and application (pp. 271-344). New York:
Appleton-Century-Crofts. #(6), #(38), #(3)

Terrace, H.S. (1968). Discrimination learning, the peak shift, and the
behavioral contrast. Journal of the Experimental Analysis of Behavior, 11,
727-741. #(3), #(6) 

Terrace, H.S. (1972). By-products of discrimination learning. In G.H. Bower
(Ed.), The psychology of learning and motivation (pp. 195-265). New York:
Academic Press. #(6), #(38)

Terrace, H.S. (1979). Is problem solving language? A review of Premack's
"Intelligence in apes and man." Journal of the Experimental Analysis of
Behavior, 31, 161-175. #(30)

Terrace, H.S. (1979). Nim. New York: Knopf. #(34), #(30)

Terrace, H.S. (1982). Evidence for sign language in apes: What the ape signed
or how well was the ape loved? Contemporary Psychology, 27, 67-68. #(30)

Terrace, H.S. (1982). Simultaneous chaining: The problem it poses for
traditional chaining theory. In M.L. Commons, A.R. Wagner, & R.J. Herrnstein
(Eds.), Quantitative studies in operant behavior: Discrimination processes
(pp. 115-137). New York: Ballinger. #(38), #(3), #(6)

Terrace, H.S. (1985). In the beginning was the "Name". American Psychologist,
40, 1011-1028. #(30)

Terrace, H.S., Petitto, L.A., Sanders, R.J., & Bever, T.G. (1979). Can an ape
create a sentence? Science, 206, 891-902. #(30)

Terreberry, S. (1968). The evolution of organizational environments.
Administrative Science Quarterly, 12, 590-613. #(42)

Terrell, C. (1958). The role of incentive in discrimination learning in
children. Child Development, 29, 231-236. #(6)

Terrell, C., & Stevenson, H.W. (1965). The effectiveness of normal and
retarded peers as reinforcing agents. American Journal of Mental Deficiency,
70, 373-381. #(7), #(45) 

Test, D.W. (1985). Evaluating education software for the microcomputer.
Journal of Special Education Technology, 7, 37-46. #(16), #(29)

Test, D.W., Spooner, F., & Cooke, N.L. (1987). Educational validity
revisited. Journal of the Association for Persons with Severe Handicaps, 12,
96-102. #(29)

Texas Regional Resource Center (1976). Individualized programming for the
severelymultiply handicapped. Austin, TX: Texas Regional Resource Center.
#(9), #(21), #(34) 

Thiagarajan, S., Semmel, D.S., & Semmel, M.I. (1974). Instructional
development for training teachers of exceptional children: A sourcebook.
Reston, VA: Council for Exceptional Children. #(9), #(34)

Thinesen, P., & Bryan, A. (1981). The use of sequential picture cues in the
initiation and maintenance of grooming behaviors with mentally retarded
adults. Mental Retardation, 19, 246-250. #(45), #(33), #(9)

Thistlethwaite, D.L., & Campbell, D.T. (1960). Regression-discontinuity
analysis: An alternative to the ex post facto experiment. Journal of
Educational Psychology, 51, 309-317. #(43)

Thomas, D.R., Becker, W.C., & Armstrong, M. (1968). Production and elimina-
tion of disruptive classroom behavior by systematically varying teacher's be-
havior, 1, 35-45. #(3), #(5)

Thomas, D.R., & Williams, J.L. (1963). A further study of stimulus general-
ization following three-stimulus discrimination training. Journal of the
Experimental Analysis of Behavior, 6, 171-176. #(6), #(7)

Thomas, J.R. (1979). Matching-to-sample accuracy on fixed-ratio schedules.
Journal of the Experimental Analysis of Behavior, 32, 183-189. #(6), #(14)

Thomas, M.A. (Ed.). (1976). Hey, don't forget about me! Reston, VA: Council
for Exceptional Children. #(9), #(34), #(21)

Thomas, M.A. (1980). Current trends in preparing teachers of the severely and
profoundly retarded: A conversation with Susan and William Stainback.
Exceptional Children, 45, 43-49. #(21),

Thomas, M.A. (1981). Educating handicapped students via microcomputer/video-
disc technology: A conversation with Ron Thorkildsen. Education and Training
of the Mentally Retarded, 16, 264-269. #(16)

Thomas, N.C. (1975). Education in national politics. New York: David McKay.
#(23), #(34)

Thomas, R.L., & Howard, G.A. (1971). A Treatment program for a self-
destructive child. Mental Retardation, 9(6), 16-18. #(19), #(45)

Thompson, G., Iwata, B.A., & Poynter, H. (1979). Operant control of
pathological tongue thrust in spastic cerebral palsy. Journal of Applied
Behavior Analysis, 12, 325-333. #(3), #(30), #(4)

Thompson, M.S. (1980). Benefit-cost analysis for program evaluation. Newbury
Park, CA: Sage Publications. #(38), #(47)

Thompson, T., Axtell, S., & Schaal, D.W. (1993). Self-injurious behavior: 
Mechanisms and interventions. In J.L. Matson & R.P. Barrett (Eds.), Psy-
chopathology in the mentally retarded (Vol.2, pp. 179-211). Boston: Allyn
& Bacon. #(19)

Thompson, T., & Grabowski, J. (Eds.). (1977). Behavior modification of the
mentally retarded (2nd ed.). New York: Oxford University Press. #(3), #(34),
#(45)

Thoreau, H.D. (1854/1968). Walden. New York: Macmillan. #(35), #(34)

Thorndike, E.L. (1905). The elements of psychology. New York: A.G. Seiler.
#(34), #(25)

Thorndike, E.L. (1912). Education. New York: Macmillan. #(34), #(15)

Thorndike, E.L. (1932). Fundamentals of learning. New York: Teachers College
Press. #(34), #(15)

Thorndike, R.L., Hagen, E., & Sattler, J.M. (1986). Stanford-Binet Intelli-
gence Scale (4th ed.). Chicago: Riverside Press. #(30), #(34), #(29)

Thorndyke, P.W. (1977). Cognitive structures in comprehension and memory of
narrative discourse. Cognitive Psychology, 9, 77-110. #(17), #(11)

Thornton, C. (1984). Benefit-cost analysis of social programs. In R.H.
Bruininks & K.C. Lakin (Eds.), Living and learning on the least restrictive
environment (pp. 225-244). Baltimore: Paul H. Brookes. #(38), #(47)

Thorson, J.A., & Powell, F.C. (1991). Measurement of sense of humor.
Psychological Reports, 69, 691-702. #(18)

Throne, J.M. (1972). Genetic factors in mental retardation: A radical
behaviorist point of view. Mental Retardation, 10(6), 32-35. #(21), #(25),
#(45)

Throne, J.M. (1973). Contingency and cause in cognitive research in mental
retardation: Zigler, Zeaman and House, Ellis (and Bijou). Mental Retardation,
11(3), 45-47. #(3), #(45)

Throne, J.M. (1975). The replicability fetish. Mental Retardation, 13(4),
14-17. #(29)

Throne, J.M. (1976). Can creativity be taught? Educational Technology, 16,
57-58. #(25)

Throne, J.M. (1979). Deinstitutionalization: Too wide a swath. Mental
Retardation, 17, 171-175. #(31), #(45)

Thurston, P., & House, E.R. (1981). The NIE adversary hearing on minimum
competency testing. Phi Delta Kappan, 62, 87-94. #(26), #(29)

Thurston, P.W. (1980). Is good law good education? In D. Berliner (Ed.),
Review of research in education (pp. 296-335). Washington, DC: American
Educational Research Association. #(10), #(38)

Tiegerman, E., & Primavera, L. (1981). Object manipulation: An interactional
strategy with autistic children. Journal of Autism and Developmental
Disorders, 11, 427-438. #(2), #(41)

Tiegerman, E., & Primavera, L. (1984). Imitating the autistic child:
Facilitating communicative gaze behavior. Journal of Autism and Developmental
Disorders, 14, 27-38. #(2), #(41), #(30)

Tighe, L.S., & Tighe, T.J. (1966). Discrimination learning: Two views in
historical perspective. Psychological Bulletin, 66, 353-370. #(6)

Tighe, T.J. (1982). Modern learning theory: Foundations and fundamental
issues. New York: Oxford University Press. #(34), #(15)

Timm, N.H. (1975). Multivariate analyses with applications in education and
psychology. Monterey, CA: Brooks/Cole. #(34), #(22)

Timpane, P.M. (1970). Educational experimentation in national social policy.
Harvard Educational Review, 40, 547-566. #(23), #(29)

Tindal, G., & Marston, D. (1986). Approaches to assessment. In J.K. Torgesen
& B.Y. L. Wong (Eds.), Psychological and educational perspectives on learning
disabilities (pp. 55-84). New York: Academic Press. #(29), #(38), #(28)

Tobias, J., & Cortazzo, A.D. (1963). Training severely retarded adults for
greater independence in community living. Training School Bulletin, 60,
23-27. #(21), #(36) 

Tobias, S. (1973). Review of the response mode issue. Review of Educational
Research, 43, 193-204. #(32), #(6)

Tobin, S.S., & Lieberman, M.A. (1976). Last home for the aged: Critical
implications of institutionalization. San Francisco: Jossey-Bass. #(34),
#(46)

Toffler, A. (1970). Future shock. New York: Random House. #(34), #(35)

Toffler, A. (1980). The third wave. New York: William Morrow. #(34), #(35)

Tolman, E.C. (1949). There is more than one kind of learning. Psychological
Review, 56, 144-155. #(12), #(25)

Tom, A.R. (1980). The reform of teacher education through research: A futile
quest. Teachers College Record, 82, 15-29. #(26)

Tondow, F.M. (1964). Computers in special education--An introduction.
Exceptional Children, 31, 111-116. #(16)

Tondow, F.M. (1981). The microcomputer--Its applicability to special
education. Focus on Exceptional Children, 14, 1-14. #(16)

Topping, J.S., & Larmi, O.K. (1973). Response elimination effectiveness of
omission and two extinction training proceures. The Psychological Record, 23,
197-202. #(3)

Topping, J.S., Larmi, O.K., & Johnson, D.L. (1972). Omission training:
Effects of gradual introduction. Psychonomic Science, 28, 279-280. #(3)

Torgesen, J.K. (1975). Problems and prospects in the study of learning
disabilities. In E.M. Hetherington (Ed.), Review of child development
research (Vol. 5, pp. 385-440). Chicago: University of Chicago Press. #(38),
#(28)

Torgesen, J.K. (1978). Performance of reading disabled children in serial
memory tasks: A review. Reading Research Quarterly, 19, 57-87. #(28), #(17),
#(11), #(32) 

Torgesen, J.K. (1984). Instructional uses of microcomputers with elementary
aged mildly handicapped children. Special Services in the Schools, 1(1),
37-48. #(16) 

Torgesen, J.K. (1986). Computers and cognition in reading: A focus on
decoding fluency. Exceptional Children, 53, 157-162. #(16) 

Torgesen, J.K., & Houch, D.G. (1980). Processing deficiencies of learning
disabled children who perform poorly on the digit span test. Journal of
Educational Psychology, 72, 141-160. #(28), #(11)

Torrance, E.P. (1966). Tests of creative thinking. Lexington, MA: Personnel
Press. #(34), #(50)

Torres, S. (Ed.). (1977). A primer on individualized education programs for
handicapped children. Reston, VA: The Foundation for Exceptional Children.
#(34), #(10) 

Torshen, K.P. (1977). The mastery approach to competency-based education. New
York: Academic Press. #(26), #(34)

Touchette, P.E. (1968). The effects of graduated stimulus change on the
acquisition of a simple discrimination in severely retarded boys. Journal of
the Experimental Analysis of Behavior, 11, 39-48. #(6), #(21)

Touchette, P.E. (1969). Tilted lines as complex stimuli. Journal of the
Experimental Analysis of Behavior, 12, 211-214. #(3), #(6)

Touchette, P.E. (1971). Transfer of stimulus control: Measuring the moment of
transfer. Journal of the Experimental Analysis of Behavior, 15, 347-354.
#(3), #(6) 

Touchette, P.E., & Howard, J.S. (1984). Errorless learning: Reinforcement
contingencies and stimulus control transfer in delayed prompting. Journal of
Applied Behavior Analysis, 17, 175-188. #(6), #(14), #(9)

Touchette, P.E., MacDonald, R.F., & Langer, S.N. (1985). A scatter plot for
identifying stimulus control of problem behavior. Journal of Applied Behavior
Analysis, 18, 343-351. #(1), #(6)

Toulmin, S. (1988). The recovery of practical philosophy. American Scholar, 
57, 337-352. #(35)

Trabasso, T. (1963). Stimulus emphasis and all-or-none learning of concept
identification. Journal of Experimental Psychology, 65, 398-406. #(6)

Trabasso, T. (1968, October). Pay attention. Psychology Today, pp. 30-36.
#(1) 

Trabasso, T. (1977). The role of memory as a system in making transitive
inferences. In R.V. Kail & J.W. Hagen (Eds.), Perspectives on the development
of memory and cognition. Hillsdale, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum. #(38), #(11)

Trabasso, T., & Bower, G.H. (1968). Attention in learning: Theory and
research New York: John Wiley. #(1), #(34)

Trabasso, T., Deutsch, J.A., & Gelman, R. (1966). Attention in discrimination
learning of young children. Journal of Experimental Child Psychology, 4,
9-19. #(1), #(6) 

Trace, M., Cuvo, A., & Criswell, J. (1977). Teaching coin equivalence to the
mentally retarded. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 10, 85-92. #(6),
#(45) 

Trach, J. (1990). Supported employment program characteristics. In F.R. Rusch
(Ed.), Supported Employment: Models, methods, and issues (pp. 65-81).
Sycamore, IL: Sycamore Publishing Co. #(33), #(38)

Treffry, D., Martin, G.L., Samels, J.L., & Watson, C. (1970). Operant
conditioning of grooming behavior of severely retarded girls. Mental
Retardation, 8(4), 29-33. #(3), #(45), #(21), #(9), #(18)

Treisman, A.M. (1960). Contextual cues in selective listening. Quarterly
Journal of Experimental Psychology, 12, 242-248. #(11)

Treisman, A.M. (1964). Verbal cues, language and meaning in selective
attention. American Journal of Psychology, 77, 206-219. #(11)

Treisman, A.M. (1966). Our limited attention. Advances in Science. 22,
600-611. #(1) 

Treisman, A.M. (1969). Strategies and models of selective attention.
Psychological Review, 76, 282-299. #(1)

Treisman, A.M., & Riley, J.R. (1969). Is selective attention selective
perception or selective response? A further test. Journal of Experimental
Psychology, 79, 27-34. #(1), #(29) 

Trifetti, J., Frith, B., & Armstrong, S. (1984). Microcomputers vs. resource
room for learning disabled students: A preliminary investigation of the
effects on math skills. Learning Disability Quarterly, 67,69-76. #(16), #(28)

Trott, M.C. (1977). Application of Foxx and Azrin toilet training for the
retarded in a school program. Education and Training of the Mentally
Retarded, 12, 336-338. #(3), #(45) 

Trovato, J., & Bucher, B. (1980). Peer tutoring with or without home-based
reinforcement for reading remediation. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis,
13, 129-141. #(3), #(17), #(14), #(36)

Tryon, W.W. (1976). Behavior modification therapy and the law. Professional
Psychology, 7, 468-474. #(10)

Tryon, W.W. (1982). A simplified time-series analysis for evaluating
treatment interventions. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 15, 423-429.
#(26)

Tucker, D.J., & Horner, R.D. (1977). Competency-based training of paraprofes-
sional teaching associates for education of the severely and profoundly
handicapped. In E. Sontag (Ed.), Educational programming for the severely and
profoundly handicapped (pp. 405-417). Reston, VA: Council for Exceptional
Children. #(26), #(21), #(38)

Tuckman, H.P. (1971). High school inputs and their contributions to school
performance. Journal of Human Resources, 6, 490-509. #(42), #(47)

Tudor, R.M., & Bostow, D.E. (1991). Computer-programmed instruction: The rela-
tion of required interaction to practical application. Journal of Applied Be-
havior Analysis, 24, 361-368. #(16)

Tulving, E. (1962). Subjective organization in free recall of "unrelated"
words. Psychological Review, 69, 344-354. #(11)

Tulving, E. (1972). Episodic and semantic memory. In E. Tulving & W. Don-
aldson (Eds.), Organization of memory (pp. 381-403). New York: Academic
Press. #(38), #(11) 

Tulving, E. (1983). Elements of episodic memory. Oxford, England: Clarendon
Press. #(11), #(34)

Tulving, E. (1985). How many memory systems are there? American Psychologist,
40, 385-398. #(11)

Tulving, E. (1986). Episodic and semantic memory: Where should we go from
here? Behavioral and Brain Sciences, 9, 573-577. #(11)

Tulving, E. (1986). What kind of a hypothesis is the distinction between
episodic and semantic memory? Journal of Experimental Psychology: Learning,
Memory, and Cognition, 12, 307-311. #(11)

Tulving, E., & Donaldson, W. (Eds.). (1972). Organization of memory. New
York: Academic Press. #(34), #(11)

Tulving, E., & Osler, S. (1968). Effectiveness of retrieval cues in memory
for words. Journal of Experimental Psychology, 77, 593-601. #(11)

Turkel, S.B., & Podell, D.M. (1984). Computer-assisted learning for mildly
handicapped students. Teaching Exceptional Children, 16, 258-262. #(16) 

Turkkan, J.S. (1989). Classical conditioning: The new hegemony. Behavioral
and Brain Sciences, 12, 121-179. #(3)

Turnbull, A.P., & Turnbull, R. (1985). Developing independence. Journal of
Adolescent Health Care, 6, 108-119. #(39)

Turnbull, A.P. (1982). Preschool mainstreaming: A policy and implementation
analysis. Educational Evaluation and Policy Analysis, 4, 281-291. #(8),
#(39), #(23) 

Turnbull, B.J. (1981). Promises and prospects of education program consolida-
tion at the federal level. Educational Evaluation and Policy Analysis, 3(3),
21-32. #(23) 

Turnbull, H.R. (1978). The past and future impact of court decisions in
special education. Phi Delta Kappan, 59, 523-528. #(10)

Turnbull, H.R. (1976). Accountability: An overview of the impact of
litigation on professionals. In F.J. Weintraub, A. Abeson, J. Ballard, & M.L.
LaVor (Eds.), Public policy and the education of exceptional children (pp.
362-368). Reston, VA: Council for Exceptional Children. #(10), #(38)

Turnbull, H.R. (1979). Law and the mentally retarded citizen. Syracuse Law
Review, 30, 1093-1143. #(40), #(45)

Turnbull, H.R. (1981). Rights for developmentally disabled citizens: A
perspective for the 80's. University of Arkansas Law Review, 4, 400-447.
#(10), #(40), #(45) 

Turnbull, H.R. (1986). Free appropriate public education: The law and
children with disabilities. Denver, CO: Love Publishing Co. #(34), #(39),
#(10)

Turnbull, H.R. (1988). Fifteen questions: Ethical inquiries in mental
retardation. In J.A. Stark, F.J. Menolasino, M.H. Albarelli, & V.C. Gray
(Eds.), Mental retardation and mental health: Classification, diagnosis,
treatment, services (pp. 368-377). New York: Springer-Verlag. #(38), #(45),
#(35)

Turnbull, J.R., Guess, D., Backus, L.H., Barber, P.A., Fiedler, C.R., 
Helmstetter, E., & Summers, J.A. (1986). A model for analyzing the moral 
aspects of special education and behavioral interventions: The moral aspects 
of aversive procedures. In P.R. Dokecki & R. M. Zaner (Eds.), Ethics of deal-
ing with persons with severe handicaps (pp. 167-210). Baltimore: Paul H. 
Brookes. #(38), #(3), #(14)

Turnure, J.E. (1970). Children's reactions to distractors in a learning
situation. Developmental Psychology, 2, 115-122. #(1)

Turvey, M.T. (1973). On peripheral and central processes in vision: Infer-
ences from an information-processing analysis of masking with patterned
stimuli. Psychological Review, 80, 1-52. #(12)

Tustin, F. (1981). Autistic states in children. London: Routledge & Kegan
Paul. #(34), #(2) 

Tversky, A. (1977). Features of similarity. Psychological Review, 84,
327-352. #(11), #(6)

Twardosz, S., & Baer, D.M. (1973). Training two severely retarded adolescents
to ask questions. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 6, 655-661. #(3),
#(30), #(37) 

Twentyman, C.T., & Zimering, R.T. (1979). Behavioral training of social
skills: A critical review. In M. Hersen, R.M. Eisler, & P.M. Miller (Eds.),
Progress in behavior modification (Vol. 7, pp. 319-400). New York: Academic
Press. #(38), #(32), #(37, #(3)

Tyler, R.W. (1949). Basic principles of curriculum and instruction. Chicago:
University of Chicago Press. #(5), #(34)

Tyler, R.W. (1983). A place called school. Phi Delta Kappan, 64, 462-464.
#(15) 

Tyler, R.W. (1983). The contribution of "A study of schooling" to educational
research. Educational Leadership, 40, 33-34. #(35), #(23)

Ullman, D.G. (1974). Breadth of attention and retention in mentally retarded
and intellectually average children. American Journal of Mental Deficiency,
78, 640-648. #(1), #(11), #(14), #(21), #(45), #(9)

Ullman, D.G., & Routh, D.K. (1971). Discrimination learning in mentally
retarded and nonretarded children as a function of the number of relevant
dimensions. American Journal of Mental Deficiency, 76, 176-180. #(6), #(45)

Ullmann, L.P., & Krasner, L. (1975). A psychological approach to abnormal
behavior (2nd ed.). Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall. #(3), #(34)

Ullmann, L.P., & Krasner, L. (1975). Behavior modification. In L.P. Ullmann
& L. Krasner, A psychological approach to abnormal behavior (2nd ed., pp.
224-247). Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall. #(3), #(38)

Ulrich, R., Stachnik, T., & Mabry, J. (Eds.). (1970). Control of human
behavior: From cure to prevention. Glenview, IL: Scott, Foresman. #(34), #(3)

Underwood, B.J. (1957). Interference and forgetting. Psychological Review,
64, 49-60. #(11)

Underwood, B.J. (1963). Stimulus selection in verbal learning. In C.N. Cofer
& B.S. Musgrave (Eds.), Verbal behavior and learning: Problems and processes
(pp. 33-48). New York: McGraw-Hill. #(6), #(30), #(38)

Underwood, B.J. (1964). Degree of learning and the measurement of forgetting.
Journal of Verbal Learning and Verbal Behavior, 3, 112-129. #(11)

Underwood, B.J. (1983). Attributes of memory. Glenview, IL: Scott, Foresman.
#(34), #(11) 

Underwood, B.J., Ham, M., & Ekstrand, B. (1962). Cue selection in paired-
associate learning. Journal of Experimental Psychology, 64, 405-409. #(6)

Ungerer, J.A., & Sigman, M. (1981). Symbolic and language comprehension in
autistic children. Journal of the American Academy of Child Psychiatry, 20,
318-337. #(30), #(2) 

United States Department of Education. (1986). What works: Research about
teaching and learning. Washington, DC: Author. #(26)

University of Pennsylvania Law Review. (1976). Educational malpractice.
Author, 124, 755-805. #(10), #(40)

Utley, B.L., Holovoet, J.F., & Barnes, K. (1977). Handling, positioning, and
feeding the physically handicapped. In E. Sontag (Ed.), Educational
programming for the severely and profoundly handicapped (pp. 279-299).
Reston, VA: Council for Exceptional Children. #(21), #(38)

Uzgiris, I.C., & Hunt, J. (1975). Assessment in infancy: Ordinal scales of
psychological development. Urbana, IL: University of Illinois Press. #(29),
#(34), #(44) 

Vacc, N.N. (1987). Word processor versus handwriting: A comparative study of
writing samples produced by mildly mentally handicapped students. Exceptional
Children, 54, 156-165. #(16), #(45)

Vallet, R.E. (1963). Developing linguistic auditory memory patterns. Journal
of Learning Disabilities, 16, 462-466. #(11), #(30)

Vallet, R.E. (1967). The remediation of learning disabilities. Palo Alto, CA:
Fearon. #(29), #(28), #(34), #(44)

VanBierliet, A. (1977). Establishing words and objects as functionally
equivalent through manual sign training. American Journal of Mental
Deficiency, 82, 178-186. #(7), #(30) 

VanDen Pol, R.A., Iwata, B.A., Ivancic, M.T., Page, T.J., Neef, N.A., &
Whitley, P. (1981). Teaching the handicapped to eat in public places:
Acquisition, generalization, and maintenance of restaurant skills. Journal of
Applied Behavior Analysis, 14, 61-69. #(27), #(7), #(6)

Vanderheiden, G.C. (1976). Non-vocal communication techniques and aids for
the severely physically handicapped. Baltimore: University Park Press. #(30),
#(34), #(21) 

Vanderheiden, G.C. (Ed.). (1978). Nonvocal communication resource book.
Baltimore: University Park Press. #(30), #(34)

Vanderheiden, G.C., & Grilley, K. (1976). Nonvocal communication techniques
and aids for the severely physically handicapped. Baltimore: University Park
Press. #(30), #(34), #(21)

Vanderheiden, G.C., & Harris-Vanderheiden, D. (1976). Communication
techniques and aids for the nonvocal severely handicapped. In L.L. Lloyd
(Ed.), Communication assessment and intervention strategies (pp. 607-652).
Baltimore: University Park Press. #(30), #(38), #(29)

van der Linden, W.J. (1981). A latent look at pretest-postest validation of
criterion-referenced test items. Review of Educational Research, 51, 379-402.
#(29) 

Van Etten, C., & Van Etten, G. (1976). The measurement of pupil progress and
selecting instructional materials. Journal of Learning Disabilities, 9, 4-19.
#(9), #(29), #(21) 

Van Geel, T. (1978). Parental preferences and the politics of spending public
education funds. Teachers College Record, 79, 339-363. #(23)

Van Hasselt, V.B., Hersen, M., Whitehill, M.B., & Bellack, A.S. (1979).
Social skill assessment and training for children: An evaluative review.
Behaviour Research and Therapy, 17, 413-433. #(37), #(29), #(32)

Van Houten, R. (1979). Social validation: The evolution of standards of
competency for target behaviors. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 12,
581-592. #(27) 

Van Houten, R., Axelrod, S., Bailey, J.S., Favell, J.E., Foxx, R.M., Iwata,
B.A., & Lovaas, O.I. (1988). The right to effective behavioral treatment. The
Behavior Analyst, 11, 111-114. #(3), #(9), #(10)

Van Houten, R., & Rolider, A. (1991). Applied behavior analysis. In J.L.
Matson & J.A. Mulick (Eds.), Handbook of mental retardation (2nd ed., pp.
569-585). New York: Pergamon Press. #(38), #(3)

VanHover, K.I. (1974). A developmental study of three components of
attention. Developmental Psychology, 10, 330-339. #(1)

VanMaanen, J. (1979). The process of program evaluation. The Grantsmanship
Center News, 5, 29-74. #(29)

Van Meter, D.S., & Asher, H.B. (1972). Causal analysis: Its promise for
policy studies. Policy Studies Journal, 2, 103-108. #(29)

Van Meter, D.S., & Van Horn, C.E. (1975). The policy implementation process:
A conceptual framework. Administration & Society, 6, 445-488. #(8), #(23)

Van Riper, C. (1954). Speech correction: Principles and methods (3rd ed.).
Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall. #(30), #(34)

Van Riper, C. (1971). The nature of stuttering. Englewood Cliffs, NJ:
Prentice-Hall. #(34), #(30)

Van Tatenhove, G.M. (1987). Teaching power through augmentative communica-
tion. Journal of Childhood Communication Disorders, 10, 185-199. #(30)

VanWitsen, B. (1979). Perceptual training activities handbook (2nd ed.). New
York: Teachers College Press. #(12), #(34)

Varella, J.A. (1977). Social technology. American Psychologist, 32, 914-923.
#(3), #(37)

Vargas, E.A., & Vargas, J.S. (1991). Programmed instruction: What it is and
how to do it. Journal of Behavioral Education, 1, 235-252. #(3), #(9)

Varley, C.K. (1984). Attention deficit disorder (the hyperactive syndrome):
A review of selected issues. Journal of Developmental and Behavioral
Pediatrics, 5, 254-258. #(1), #(32)

Varni, J.W., Lovaas, O.I., Koegel, R.L., & Everett, N.L. (1979). An analysis
of observational learning in autistic and normal children. Journal of
Abnormal Child Psychology, 7, 31-43. #(3), #(2)

Vars, G.F. (1979). Fire protection for innovative programs. Educational
Leadership, 37, 221-224. #(8)

Vaughan, M.E., & Michael, J.L. (1982). Automatic reinforcement: An important
but ignored concept. Behaviorism, 10, 217-227. #(3), #(14)

Vazquez, C.A. (1994). Brief report: A multitask controlled evaluation of
facilitated communication. Journal of Autism and Developmental Disorders, 24,
369-379. #(30) 

Vellutino, F.R., & Shub, M.J. (1982). Assessment of disorders in formal
school language: Disorders in reading. Topics in Language Disorders, 2,
20-33. #(29), #(17) 

Verdonik, F. (1988). Reconsidering the context of rememberings: The need for
a social description of memory processes and their development. In F.E.
Weinert & M. Perlmutter (Eds.), Memory development: Universal changes and
individual differences. Hillsdale, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum. #(38), #(11)

Verhaaren, P., & Connor, F.P. (1981). Physical Disabilities. In J.M. Kauffman
& D.P. Hallahan (Eds.), Handbook of special education (pp. 248-288).
Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall. #(21), #(38)

Vernon, P.E., Ryba, K.A., & Lang, R.J. (1978). Simultaneuos and successive
processing: An attempt at replication. Canadian Journal of Behavioural
Science, 10, 1-15. #(11), #(29)

Verplanck, W.S. (1954). Burrhus F. Skinner. In A.T. Poffenberger (Ed.), Modern 
learning theory: A critical analysis of five examples (pp. 267-316). New York: 
Appleton-Century-Crofts. #(38), #(3)

Viggiano, J. (1981). Ignorance as handicap. Asha, 23, 551-552. #(39), #(45)

Vincent, L.J., & Broome, K.A. (1977). A public school service delivery model
for handicapped children between birth and five years of age. In E. Sontag
(Ed.), Educational programming for the severely and profoundly handicapped
(pp. 177-185). Reston, VA: Council for Exceptional Children. #(27), #(38)

Vincent, L.J., Salisbury, C., Walter, G., Brown, P., Gruenewald, L., &
Powers, M. (1980). Program evaluation and curriculum development in early
childhood/special education: Criteria of the next environment. In W. Salior,
B. Wilcox, & L. Brown (Eds.), Methods of instruction for severely handicapped
students (pp. 303-328). Baltimore: Paul H. Brookes. #(38), #(5), #(29)

Vincent-Smith, L., Bricker, D.D., & Bricker, W.A. (1973). Receptive
vocabulary: Performances and selection strategies of delayed and non-delayed
toddlers. American Journal of Mental Deficiency, 77, 579-584. #(30), #(9)

Vleeming, R.G. (1979). Machiavellianism: A preliminary review. Psychological
Reports, 44, 295-310. #(42), #(23), #(32)

Vockell, E.L. (1987). Model programs for instruction. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: 
Prentice-Hall. #(34), #(5)

Voelker, S.L., Carter, R.A., Sprague, D.J., Gdowski, C.L., & Lachar, D.
(1989). Developmental trends in memory and metamemory in children with
attention deficit disorder. Journal of Pediatric Psychology, 14, 75-88. #(1),
#(11)

Voeltz, L.M., & Evans, I.M. (1983). Educational validity: Procedures to
evaluate outcomes in programs for severely handicapped learners. Journal of
The Association for Persons with Severe Handicaps, 8, 3-15. #(27), #(21)

Voeltz. L.M. (1984). Program and curriculum innovations to prepare children
for integration. In N. Certo, N. Haring, & R. York (Eds.), Public school
integration of severely handicapped students: Rational issues and progressive
alternatives (pp. 155-183). Baltimore: Paul H. Brookes. #(38), #(8)

Volkmar, F., Cohen, D., & Paul, R. (1986). An evaluation of DSM-III criteria
for infantile autism. Journal of the American Academy of Child Psychiatry,
25, 190-197. #(2), #(44) 

VORT Corporation. (1980). BCP Methods Books. Palo Alto, CA: Author. #(29),
#(5), #(34), #(44)

Voyat, G. (1970). Minimizing the problems of functional illiteracy. Teachers
College Record, 72, 171-186. #(15)

Vukelich, B., & Hake, D.F. (1971). Reduction of dangerously aggressive
behavior in a severely retarded resident through a combination of positive
reinforcement procedures. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 4, 215-225.
#(3), #(21), #(14)

Vurpillot, E. (1968). The development of scanning strategies and their
relation to visual differentiation. Journal of Experimental Child Psychology,
6, 632-650. #(25), #(1) 

Vyse, S.A. (1986). Methodology, the matching law, and applied behavior
analysis. Behavior Analyst, 9, 157-160. #(3), #(6) 

Wabash Center for the Mentally Retarded. (1977). Guide to early developmental
training. Boston: Allyn & Bacon. #(29), #(9), #(34), #(21), #(14), #(45),
#(44) 

Wachs, T.D., & DeRemer P. (1978). Adaptive behavior and Uzgiris-Hunt scale
performance of young, developmentally disabled children. American Journal of
Mental Deficiency, 83, 171-176. #(21), #(29), #(45)

Wacker, D.P., & Berg, W.K. (1983). Effects of picture prompts on the
acquisition of complex vocational tasks by mentally retarded adolescents.
Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 16, 417-433. #(9), #(33), #(45)

Wacker, D.P., & Berg, W.K. (1984). Training adolescents with severe handicaps
to set up job tasks independently using picture prompts. Analysis and Inter-
vention in Developmental Disabilities, 4, 353-365. #(9), #(21), #(33)

Wacker, D.P., & Berg, W.K. (1985). Use of peers to train and monitor the
performance of adolescents with severe handicaps. Education and Training of
the Mentally Retarded, 8, 109-112. #(7), #(21), #(37)

Wacker, D.P., Berg, W., Berrie, P., & Swatta, P. (1985). Generalization and
maintenance of complex skills by severely handicapped adolescents following
picture prompt training. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 18, 329-336.
#(6), #(7), #(21), #(9)

Wacker, D.P., Wiggins, B., Fowler, M., & Berg, W. (1988). Training students
with profound or multiple handicaps to make requests via microswitches.
Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 18, 331-343. #(16), #(45), #(42)

Wager, W. (1976). The formative evaluation outcomes matrix. Educational
Technology, 16, 36-38. #(29)

Wagner, A.C. (1973). Changing teacher behavior: A comparison of microteaching
and cognitive discrimination training. Journal of Educational Psychology, 64,
299-305. #(5)

Wagner, P. (1974). Children tutoring children. Mental Retardation, 12(5),
52-55. #(27), #(36) 

Wagner, P., & Sternlickt, M. (1975). Retarded persons as "teachers": Retarded
adolescents tutoring retarded children. American Journal of Mental Deficien-
cy, 79, 674-679. #(21), #(36)

Wagner, R.K., & Sternberg, R.J. (1984). Alternative conceptions of intelli-
gence and their implications for education. Review of Educational Research,
54, 179-223. #(27) 

Wahler, R.G. (1969). Oppositional Children: A quest for parental reinforce-
ment control. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 2, 159-170. #(3), #(14)

Wahler, R.G. (1969). Setting generality: Some specific and general effects of
child behavior therapy. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 2, 239-246.
#(3), #(7)

Wahler, R.G. (1975). Some structural aspects of deviant child behavior.
Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 8, 27-42. #(3)

Wahler, R.G., & Fox, J.J. (1981). Setting events in applied behavior
analysis: Toward a conceptual and methodological expansion. Journal of
Applied Behavior Analysis, 14, 327-338. #(3)

Wahler, R.G., & Nordquist, V.M. (1973). Adult discipline as a factor in
childhood imitation. Journal of Abnormal Child Psychology, 1, 40-56. #(3),
#(41), #(4) 

Wainwright-Sharp, J.S., & Bryson, S.E. (1993). Visual orienting deficits in
high-functioning people with autism. Journal of Autism and Developmental
Disorders, 23, 1-13. #(1), #(2) 

Waite, W.W., & Osborne, J.G. (1972). Sustained behavioral contrast in
children. Journal of the Experimental Analysis of Behavior, 18, 113-117.
#(3), #(6)

Walberg, H.J. (1970). Curriculum evaluation: Problems and guidelines.
Teachers College Record, 71, 557-586. #(29), #(5)

Walberg, H.J., Schiller, D., & Haertel, G.D. (1979). The quiet revolution in
educational research. Phi Delta Kappan, 60, 179-183. #(29)

Waldo, L., Guess, D., & Flanagan, B. (1982). Effects of concurrent and serial
training on receptive labeling by severely retarded individuals. Journal of
The Association for Persons with Severe Handicaps, 6, 56-65. #(21), #(9),
#(30), #(45)

Walker, C.M., & Bourne, L.E. (1961). The identification of concepts as a
function of amounts of relevant and irrelevant information. American Journal
of Psychology, 74, 410-417. #(25)

Walker, D.F., & Schaffarzick, J. (1974). Comparing curricula. Review of
Educational Research, 44, 83-112. #(5)

Walker, H.M., & Buckley, N.K. (1968). The use of positive reinforcement in
conditioning attending behavior. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 1,
245-250. #(3), #(14) 

Walker, H.M., & Buckley, N.K. (1972). Programming generalization and
maintenance of treatment effects across time and across settings. Journal of
Applied Behavior Analysis, 5, 209-224. #(3), #(7)

Walker, H.M., Hops, H., & Johnson, S.M. (1975). Generalization and mainte-
nance of classroom treatment effects. Behavior Therapy, 6, 188-200. #(7),
#(9)

Wallace, G., & Kauffmann, J.M. (1986). Teaching students with learning and
behavior problems (3rd ed.). Columbus, OH: Charles E. Merrill. #(34), #(28),
#(3) 

Wallach, G.P., & Butler, K.G. (Eds.). (1984). Language learning disabilities
in school-age children. Baltimore: Williams & Wilkins. #(34), #(28), #(30)

Wallach, G.P., & Liebergott, J.W. (1984). Who shall be called "learning
disabled": Some new directions. In G.P. Wallach & K.G. Butler (Eds.),
Language learning disabilities in school-age children (pp. 1-14). Baltimore:
Williams & Wilkins. #(38), #(28), #(30)

Wallach, G.P., & Miller, L. (1988). Language intervention and academic
success. San Diego, CA: College-Hill Press. #(30), #(34)

Wallach, L., & Wallach, M.A. (1976). The teaching all children to read kit.
Chicago: University of Chicago Press. #(34), #(17)

Walls, R.T., Haught, P., & Dowler, D.L. (1982). Moments of transfer of
stimulus control in practical assembly tasks by mentally retarded adults.
American Journal of Mental Deficiency, 87, 309-315. #(6), #(45)

Walls, R.T., Zane, T., & Thvedt, J.E. (1980). Trainers' personal methods
compared to two structured training strategies. American Journal of Mental
Deficiency, 84, 495-507. #(9) 

Walker, C.E., & Roberts, M.C. (Eds.). (1992). Handbook of clinical child psy-
chology (2nd ed., pp. 451-473). New York: Wiley. #(25)

Walsh, B.F., & Lamberts, F. (1979). Errorless discrimination and picture
fading as techniques for teaching sight words to TMR students. American
Journal of Mental Deficiency, 83, 473-479. #(6)

Walster, E. (1966). Second-guessing important events. Human Relations, 20,
239-250. #(25), #(35)

Walter, R. (1993). The secret guide to computers (15th ed.). Somerville, MA:
Author. #(16), #(34)

Walters, A.S., Barrett, R.P., & Feinstein, C. (1990). Social relatedness and
autism: Current research, issues, directions. Research in Developmental
Disabilities, 11, 303-326). #(2), #(37)

Wang, M.C. (1979). Maximizing the effective use of school time by teachers
and students. Contemporary Educational Psychology, 4, 187-201. #(26)

Wang, M.C. (1980). Adaptive instruction: Building on diversity. Theory into
Practice, 19, 122-128. #(26)

Wang, M.C., & Birch, J. (1984). Effective special education in regular
classes. Exceptional Children, 50, 391-398. #(39), #(5)

Wang, M.C., & Reynolds, M.C. (1985). Avoiding the "Catch 22" in special
education reform. Exceptional Children, 51, 497-502. #(42)

Wang, M.C., Reynolds, M.C., & Walberg, H.J. (Eds.). (1988). Handbook of
special education: Research and practice (Vol. 2). New York: Pergamon Press.
#(34), #(43) 

Wang, M.C., & Walberg, H.J. (1983). Adaptive instruction and classroom time.
American Educational Research Journal, 20, 601-626. #(9)

Ward, A.J. (1970). Early infantile autism: Diagnosis, etiology, and
treatment. Psychological Bulletin, 73, 350-362. #(21), #(2)

Ward, G. (1994, March-April). To facilitate or not to facilitate. The
Advocate, p. 28. #(20, #(30)

Warger, C.L., Murphy, L.B., & Kay, B.R. (1985). The use of microcomputers
with autistic adults: Planning, implementation, evaluation. Teaching
Exceptional Children, 18(1), 5256. #(16), #(2), #(8), #(29), #(16) 

Warren, S., & Burns, N.R. (1970). Crib confinement as a factor in repetitive
and stereotyped behavior in retardates. Mental Retardation, 8(5), 25-29.
#(26), #(45)

Warren, S., & Kaiser, A. (1986). Incidental language teaching: A critical
review. Journal of Speech and Hearing Disorders, 51, 291-298. #(30), #(32)

Warren, S., Rogers-Warren, A.K. (1985). Teaching functional language: An
introduction. In S.F. Warren & A.K. Rogers-Warren (Eds.), Teaching functional
language: Generalization and maintenance of language skills (pp. 3-23).
Austin, TX: Pro-ed. #(30), #(7), #(38) 

Warren, S., & Rogers-Warren, A.K. (1986). Teaching functional language:
Generalization and maintenance of language skills. Baltimore: University Park
Press. #(3), #(7), #(34)

Warren, S., Rogers-Warren, A.K., Baer, D.M., & Guess, D. (1980). Assessment
and facilitation of language generalization. In W. Sailor, B. Wilcox, & L.
Brown (Eds.), Methods of instruction for severely handicapped students (pp.
227-258). Baltimore: Paul H. Brookes. #(38), #(30< #(7), #(29)

Warrington, E.K., & Weiskrantz, L. (1970). Amnesic syndrome: Consolidation or
retrieval? Nature, 228, 628-630. #(4)

Warton, P., & Bussey, K. (1988). Assisted learning: Levels of support.
British Journal of Developmental Psychology, 6, 115-123. #(9)

Washington, R., & Chisolm, G.B. (1979). Considerations in the design and the
implementation of staff development programs and activities. Planning and
Changing, 10, 181-188. #(8), #(43), #(42)

Waterhouse, L., & Fein, D. (1982). Language skills in developmentally
disabled children. Brain and Language, 15, 307-353. #(30), #(21)

Watkins, M.J. (1984). Models as toothbrushes. Behavioral and Brain Sciences,
7, 86, 91-94. #(35)

Watkins, M.J., & Tulving, E. (1975). Episodic memory: When recognition fails.
Journal of Experimental Psychology: General, 104, 5-29. #(11)

Watkins, M.W., & Webb, C. (1981). Computer assisted instruction with learning
disabled students. Educational Computer Magazine, 1(3), 24-27. #(16), #(28)

Watson, J.B. (1913). Psychology as the behaviorist views it. The Psychologi-
cal Review, 20, 158-177. #(3)

Watson, J.B. (1925). The ways of behaviorism. New York: Harper. #(3), #(34)

Watson, J.B. (1930). Behaviorism (rev. ed.). Chicago: The University of
Chicago Press. #(3), #(34)

Watson, J.E., Singh, N.N., & Winton, A.S.W. (1986). Suppressive effects of
visual and facial screening on self-injurious finger-sucking: A comparative
analysis. American Journal of Mental Deficiency, 90, 526-534. #(19), #(3)

Watson, L. (1985). The TEACCH communication curriculum. In E. Schopler & G.
Mesibov (Eds.), Communication problems in autism (pp. 187-206). New York:
Plenum Press. #(38), #(30)

Watson, L., Lord, C., Schaeffer, B., & Schopler, E. (1989). Teaching
spontaneous communication to autistic and developmentally handicapped
children. New York: Irvington. #(34), #(30)

Watson, L.S., & Uzzell, R. (1980). A program for teaching behavior modifica-
tion skills to institutional staff. Applied Research in Mental Retardation,
1, 41-53. #(3), #(42), #(9) 

Watson, L.S., & Uzzell, R. (1981). Teaching self-help skills to the mentally
retarded. In J. Matson & J. McCartney (Eds.), Handbook of behavior modifica-
tion with the mentally retarded (pp. 151-177). New York: Plenum Press. #(38),
#(18), #(45)

Watson, L.S., Orser, R., & Sanders, C. (1967). Reinforcement preferences of
severely mentally retarded children in a generalized reinforcement context.
American Journal of Mental Deficiency, 72, 748-756. #(14), #(7), #(21), #(45)

Watson, L.S., & Uzzell, R. (1981). Teaching self-help skills to the mentally
retarded. In J.L. Matson & J.R. McCartney (Eds.), Handbook of behavior
modification with the mentally retarded (pp. 151-175). New York: Plenum
Press. #(38), #(45), #(18)

Watson, R.I. (1967). Psychology: A prescriptive science. American Psycholo-
gist, 22, 435-443. #(25)

Watts, A.W. (1963). The two hands of God: Myths of polarity. New York:
Macmillan. #(34)

Waugh, N.C., & Norman, D.A. (1965). Primary memory. Psychological Review, 72,
89-104. #(11)

Waugh, R.P. (1980). But I haven't been trained to teach the handicapped.
ducation Unlimited, 2(1), 14-17. #(21)

Weatherby, A.M. (1984). Possible neurolinguistic breakdown in autistic
children. Topics in Language Disorders, 4, 19-33. #(2)

Wetherby, A.M. (1985). Speech and language disorders in children: An
overview. In J.K. Darby (Ed.), Speech and language evaluation in neurology:
Childhood disorders (pp. 332). New York: Grune & Stratton. #(38), #(30),
#(32)

Wetherby, A.M. (1986). Ontogeny of communicative functions in autism. Journal
of Autism and Developmental Disorders, 15, 295-315. #(30), #(2)

Wetherby, A.M., & Prutting, C. (1984). Profiles of communicative and
cognitive-social abilities in autistic children. Journal of Speech and
Hearing Research, 27, 364-377. #(2), #(30)

Weatherley, R.A. (1979). Reforming special education: Policy implementation
from state level to street level. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press. #(8), #(34),
#(23)

Weatherley, R.A., & Lipsky, M. (1977). Street-level bureaucrats and
institutional innovation: Implementing special education reform. Harvard
Educational Review, 47, 171-197. #(8), #(23)

Webb, E.J., Campbell, D.T., Schwartz, R.D., & Sechrest, L. (1966). Unobtru-
sive measures: Nonreactive research in the social sciences. Chicago: Rand
McNally. #(29), #(34)

Webb, N.M. (1985). Student interaction and learning in small groups: A
research summary. In R.E. Slavin, S. Sharan, S. Kagan, R. Hertz-Lazarowitz,
C. Webb, & R. Schmuck (Eds.), Learning to cooperate, cooperating to learn
(pp. 147-172). New York: Plenum Press. #(38), #(25), #(32)

Webb, R.C. (1969). Sensory-motor training of the profoundly retarded.
American Journal of Mental Deficiency, 74, 283-295. #(12)

Webb, R.C., & Koller, J.R. (1979). Effects of sensorimotor training on
intellectual and adaptive skills of profoundly retarded adults. American
Journal of Mental Deficiency, 83, 490-496. #(12)

Weber, M.C. (1987). The end of responsible relative liability. Exceptional
Children, 54, 171-175. #(10)

Webster, C.D. (1977). A negative reaction to the use of electric shock with
autistic children. Journal of Autism and Childhood Schizophrenia, 7, 199-202.
#(3), #(2) 

Webster, C.D., McPherson, H., Sloman, L., Evans, M.A., & Kuchar, E. (1973).
Communication with an autistic boy by gestures. Journal of Autism and
Childhood Schizophrenia, 3, 337-346. #(2), #(30)

Webster, D.R., & Azrin, R.H. (1973). Required relaxation: A method of
inhibiting agitativedisruptive behavior of retardates. Behavior Research and
Therapy, 11, 67-78. #(3), #(14) 

Wechsler, D. (1974). Wechsler Intelligence Scale for Children-Revised. New
York: Psychological Corporation. #(2), #(30), #(44), #(29)

Wechsler, D. (1981). Wechsler Adult Intelligence Scale-Revised. New York:
Psychological Corporation. #(2), #(30), #(44), #(29)

Weeks, M., & Gaylord-Ross, R. (1981). Task difficulty and aberrant behavior
in severely handicapped students. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 14,
449-463. #(3), #(21) 

Wehman, P. (1977). Research on leisure time and severely developmentally
disabled. Rehabilitation Literature, 38, 98-105. #(37), #(21)

Wehman, P. (1979). Curriculum design for the severely and profoundly
handicapped. New York: Human Services Press. #(5), #(34), #(33), #(21)

Wehman, P. (1981). Competitive employment: New horizons for severely disabled
individuals. Baltimore: Paul H. Brookes. #(34), #(33)

Wehman, P. (1983). Recreation and leisure needs: A community integration
approach. in E. Schopler & G. Mesibov (Eds.), Autism in adolescents and
adults (pp. 111-132). New York: Plenum Press. #(38), #(27)

Wehman, P. (1992). Life beyond the classroom: Transition strategies for young
adults with disabilities. Baltimore: Paul H. Brookes. #(27), #(34), #(15)

Wehman, P., & Hill, J. (1981). Competitive employment for moderately and
severely handicapped individuals. Exceptional Children, 47, 338-345. #(45),
#(33)

Wehman, P., Hill, J., & Koehler, F. (1979). Placement of developmentally
disabled individuals into competitive employment: Three case studies.
Education and Training of the Mentally Retarded, 14, 269-276. #(33), #(21)

Wehman, P., & Hill, M. (1982). Preparing severely handicapped youth for less
restrictive environments. Journal of The Association for Persons with Severe
Handicaps, 7, 33-39. #(33), #(21)

Wehman, P., Hill, M., Goodall, P., Brooke, V., Pendleton, P., Britt, C., &
Cattey, J. (1982). Job placement and follow-up of moderately and severely
handicapped individuals after three years. Journal of The Association for
Persons with Severe Handicaps, 7, 5-16. #(27), #(33), #(21) 

Wehman, P., Hill, M., Hill, J., Brooke, V., Pendleton, P., & Britt, C.
(1985). Competitive employment for persons with mental retardation: A follow-
up six years later. Mental Retardation, 23, 274-281. #(27), #(33), #(45)

Wehman, P., & Kregel, J. (1985). A supported work approach to competitive
employment of individuals with moderate and severe handicaps. Journal of The
Association for Persons with Severe Handicaps, 10, 3-11. #(27), #(33), #(21) 

Wehman, P., & Kregel, J. (1989). Supported employment for persons with
disabilities: Focus on excellence. New York: Human Sciences Press. #(34),
#(33)

Wehman, P., Kregel, J., Banks, P.D., Hill, M., & Moon, M.S. (1987). Sheltered
versus supported work programs: A second look. Rehabilitation Counseling
Bulletin, 31(1), 42-53. #(33)

Wehman, P., Kregel, J., & Barcus, J.M. (1985). From school to work: A
vocational transition model for handicapped students. Exceptional Children,
52, 25-37. #(27), #(33) 

Wehman, P., Kregel, J., & Seyfarth, J. (1985). Employment outlook for young
adults with mental retardation. Rehabilitation Counseling Bulletin, 29,
90-99. #(45), #(33) 

Wehman, P., & McLaughlin, P. (1980). Vocational curriculum for developmental-
ly disabled persons. Baltimore: University Park Press. #(34), #(33)

Wehman, P., & Melia, R. (1985). The job coach: Function in transitional and
supported employment. American Rehabilitation, 11(2), 4-7. #(27), #(33) 

Wehman, P., & Moon, M.S. (1986). Critical values in employment programs for
persons with developmental disabilities: A position paper. Journal of Applied
Rehabilitation Counseling, 18(1), 12-16. #(33)

Wehman, P., & Moon, M.S. (Eds.). (1988). Vocational Rehabilitation and
Supported Employment. Baltimore: Paul H. Brookes. #(27), #(33), #(34), #(38) 

Wehman, P., Moon, M.S., Everson, J.M., Wood, W., & Barcus, J.M. (1988).
Transition from school to work: New challenges for youth with severe
disabilities. Baltimore: Paul H. Brookes. #(34), #(33)

Wehman, P., Moon, M.S., & McCarthy, P. (1986). Design of high school programs
for severely handicapped students. Baltimore: Paul H. Brookes. #(34), #(21)

Wehman, P., & Parent, W. (1992). Critical issues in planning vocational
services in the 1990's. In L. Rowitz (Ed.), Mental Retardation. New York:
Springer. #(27), #(33), #(38)

Wehman, P., Renzaglia, A., & Bates P. (1985). Functional living skills for
moderately and severely handicapped adults. Austin, TX: Pro-Ed. #(34), #(21),
#(33) 

Wehman, P., Renzaglia, A., & Schutz, R. (1977). Behavioral training
strategies in sheltered workshops for the developmentally disabled. AAESPH
Review, 2(1), 24-36. #(3), #(33), #(45)

Weick, K.E. (1964). Reduction of cognitive dissonance through task enhance-
ment and effort expenditure. Journal of Abnormal and Social Psychology, 68,
533-539. #(18) 

Weick, K.E. (1976). Educational organizations as loosely coupled systems.
Administrative Science Quarterly, 21, 1-19. #(42)

Weick, K.E. (1982). Administrating education in loosely coupled schools. Phi
Delta Kappan, 63, 673-676. #(42)

Weiderholt, J.L., Cronin, M.E., Stubbs, V. (1982). Measurement of functional
competencies and the handicapped: Constructs, assessments, and recommenda-
tions. In J.T. Neisworth (Ed.), Assessment in special education (pp.
101-115). Rockville, MD: Aspen Publications. #(29), #(38)

Weiher, R.G., & Harman, R.E. (1975). The use of omission training to reduce
self-injurious behavior in a retarded child. Behavior Therapy, 6, 261-268.
#(45), #(19) 

Weil, C.M., McCauley, C., & Sperber, R.D. (1978). Category structure and
semantic priming in retarded adolescents. American Journal of Mental
Deficiency, 83, 110-115. #(45), #(30), #(25)

Weinberg, S. (1985). Computerphobia. New York: Banbury Books. #(34), #(16)

Weinberg, W.A., & McLean, A. (1986). A diagnostic approach to developmental
specific learning disorders. Journal of Child Neurology, 2, 158-172. #(28),
#(29)

Weiner, B. (1979). A theory of motivation for some classroom experiences.
Journal of Educational Psychology, 71, 3-25. #(14), #(35)

Weiner, B. (1985). An attributional theory of achievemeent motivation and
emotion. Psychological Review, 92, 548-573. #(35), #(14)

Weiner, H. (1962). Some effects of response cost upon human operant behavior.
Journal of the Experimental Analysis of Behavior, 5, 201-208. #(3)

Weinert, F.E., & Perlmutter, M. (Eds.). (1988). Memory development: Universal
changes and individual differences. Hillsdale, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum. #(11),
#(34) 

Weingold, J.T. (1973). Rights of the retarded. Mental Retardation, 11(2),
50-52. #(10), #(45) 

Weintraub, F.J. (1972). Recent influences of law regarding the identification
and educational placement of children. Focus on Exceptional Children, 4,
1-11. #(39), #(10) 

Weintraub, F.J. (1977). Understanding the individualized education program
(IEP). Amicus, 2, 26-31. #(10)

Weintraub, F.J. (1974). A new education policies for the handicapped: The
quiet revolution. Phi Delta Kappan, 55, 526-529, 569. #(23)

Weintraub, F.J. (1976). Politics--the name of the game. In F.J. Weintraub, A.
Abeson, J. Ballard, & M.L. LaVor (Eds.), Public policy and the education of
exceptional children (pp. 278-283). Reston, VA: Council for Exceptional
Children. #(23), #(38)

Weintraub, F.J., & Abeson, A.B. (1974). New education policies for the
handicapped: The quiet revolution. Phi Delta Kappan, 55, 526-529, 569.

Weintraub, F.J., Abeson, A., Ballard, J., & LaVor, M.L. (Eds.). (1976).
Public policy and the education of exceptional children. Reston, VA: Council
for Exceptional Children. #(23), #(34)

Weisberg, P. (1971). Operant procedures with the retardate: An overview of
laboratory research. In N.R. Ellis (Ed.), International review of research in
mental retardation (pp. 113-145). New York: Academic Press. #(38), #(45),
#(3)

Weiss, C.H. (1977). Research for policy's sake: The enlightenment function of
social research. Policy Analysis, 3, 531-545. #(43), #(23)

Weiss, D.S. (1977). On quantity, quality, and accountability. Mental
Retardation, 15(3), 4850. #(26), #(26)

Weiss, W., & Margolius, G. (1954). The effect of context stimuli on learning
and retention. Journal of Experimental Psychology, 48, 318-322. #(6)

Weissman, M.M., Wichramaratne, P., Warner, V., John, K., Prusoff, B.A.,
Merikangas, K., & Gammon, G.D. (1987). Assessing psychiatric disorders in
children. Child Psychiatry, 44, 747-753. #(3), #(29)

Welch, S.J., & Pear, J.J. (1980). Generalization of naming responses to
objects in the natural environment as a function of training stimulus
modality with retarded children. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 13,
629-643. #(27), #(7)

Welch, W.W. (1969). Curriculum evaluation. Review of Educational Research,
39, 429-444. #(29), #(5)

Wellman, H.M. (1989). The early development of memory strategies. In F.W.
Weinert & M. Perlmutter (Eds.), Memory development: Universal changes and
individual differences. Hillsdale, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum. #(38), #(11)

Wells, M.E. (1981). The effects of total communication versus traditional
speech training on word articulation in severely mentally retarded individu-
als. Applied Research in Mental Retardation, 2, 323-333. #(30), #(45)

Wender, P.H. (1987). The hyperactive child, adolescent and adult: Attention
Deficit Disorder through the lifespan. New York: Oxford University Press.
#(34), #(1), #(4) 

Wepman, J.M. (1958, 1971). Auditory Discrimination Test. Chicago: Language
Research Associates. #(2), #(30), #(29), #(44)

Wepner, S.B. (1984). Motivations and computers: A real incentive for
teachers. Reading Teacher, 37, 34-37. #(16), #(3) 

West, R.L., & Odom, R.D. (1979). Effects of perceptual training on the
salience of information in a recall problem. Child Development, 50,
1261-1264. #(11), #(9) 

Westling, D.L. (1979). The elimination of vomiting through systematic
alteration of food consistency. Mental Retardation, 17(1), 38-40. #(3), #(4)

Westling, D.L., & Koorland, M.A. (1979). Some considerations and tactics for
improving discrimination learning. Teaching Exceptional Children, 11, 97-100.
#(6) 

Wetherby, A. (1984). Possible neurolinguistic breakdown in autistic children.
Topics in Language Disorders, 4, 19-33. #(2), #(30)

Wetherby, A., & Gaines, B.H. (1982). Cognition and language development in
autism. Journal Speech Hearing Disorders, 47, 63-70. #(2), #(30)

Wetherby, A., & Prutting, C. (1984). Profiles in communicative and cognitive-
social abilities in autistic children. Journal of Speech and Hearing
Disorders, 27, 364-377. #(30), #(2) 

Wetherby, A., Yonclas, D., & Bryan, A. (1989). Communicative profiles of pre-
school children with handicaps: Implications for early identification.
Journal of Speech and Hearing Disorders, 54, 148-158. #(30), #(21)

Wetherby, B., Karlan, G.R., & Spradlin, J.E. (1983). The development of
derived stimulus relations through training in arbitrary-matching sequences.
Journal of the Experimental Analysis of Behavior, 40, 69-78. #(6)

Wetzel, R.J. (1970). Behavior modification techniques and the training of
teachers' aides. Psychology in the Schools, 7, 325-330. #(3), #(42)

Wexler, D.B. (1972). Therapeutic justice. Minnesota Law Review, 57, 329-335.
#(40), #(10) 

Wexler, D.B. (1973). Token and taboo: Behavior modification, token economies,
and the law. California Law Review, 61, 81-109. (Same article also published
same year in Behaviorism, 1, 1-24.) #(3), #(10), #(40)

Wexler, D.B. (1974). Mental health law and the movement toward voluntary
treatment. California Law Review, 62, 671-692. #(10), #(40)

Wexler, D.R. (1975). Reflections on the legal regulation of behavior
modification in institutional settings. Arizona Law Review, 17, 132-141.
#(3), #(10), #(40)

Weymouth, F.W. (1963). Visual acuity of children In M.J. Hirsh & R.E. Wick
(Eds.), Vision of children (pp. 119-143). Philadelphia: Chilton. #(2), #(38)

Whalen, C.K. (1989). Attention deficit and hyperactivity. In T.H. Ollendick
& M. Hersen (Eds.), Handbook of child psychopathology (2nd ed., pp. 131-169).
New York: Plenum Press. #(38), #(4), #(1)

Whalen, C.K., & Henker, B. (1969). Creating therapeutic pyramids using
mentally retarded patients. American Journal of Mental Deficiency, 74,
331-337. #(3), #(45) 

Whalen, C.K., & Henker, B. (1984). Hyperactivity and the attention deficit
disorders: Expanding frontiers. Pediatric Clinics of North America, 31,
397-427. #(1), #(4) 

Whalen, C.K., Henker, B., Collins, B.E., Finck, D., & Dotemoto, S. (1979). A
social ecology of hyperactive boys: Medication effects in structured
classroom environments. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 12, 65-81.
#(3), #(18), #(4)

Whalen, C.K., Henker, B., & Hinshaw, S.P. (1985). Cognitive-behavioral ther-
apies for hyperactive children: Premises, problems, and prospects, Journal
of Abnormal Child Psychology, 13, 391-410. #(3), #(4)

Whaley, D.L., & Malott, R.W. (1971). Elementary principles of behavior. New
York: Appleton-Century-Crofts. #(3), #(34)

Wharton, P., & Bussey, K. (1988). Assisted learning: Levels of support.
British Journal of Developmental Psychology, 6, 115-123. #(9)

Wheeler, D.L., Jacobson, J.W., Paglieri, R.A., & Schwartz, A.A. (1993). An
experimental assessment of facilitated communication. Mental Retardation, 31,
49-60. #(30) 

Wheeler, J., Ford, A., Nietupski, J., Lommis, R., & Brown, L. (1980).
Teaching moderately and severely handicapped adolescents to shop in
supermarkets using pocket calculators. Education and Training of the Mentally
Retarded, 15, 105-112. #(27), #(21), #(45)

White, D.M., & Rusch, F.R. (1983). Social validation in competitive
employment: Evaluating work performance. Applied Research in Mental
Retardation, 4, 343-354. #(27), #(33) 

White, G.D., Nielsen, G., & Johnson, S.M. (1972). Timeout duration and the
suppression of deviant behavior in children. Journal of Applied Behavior
Analysis, 5, 111-120. #(3) 

White, J.C., & Taylor, D.J. (1967). Noxious conditioning as a treatment for
rumination. Mental Retardation, 5(1), 30-33. #(3), #(45)

White, O.R. (1971). A glossary of behavioral terminology. Champaign, IL:
Research Press. #(3), #(34)

White, O.R. (1980). Adaptive performance objectives. In W. Sailor, B. Wilcox,
& L. Brown (Eds.), Methods of instruction for severely handicapped students
(pp. 47-69). Baltimore: Paul H. Brookes. #(5), #(38), #(21)

White, O.R. (1985). The evaluation of severely mentally retarded populations.
In D. Bricker & J. Filler (Eds.), Severe mental retardation: From theory to
practice (pp. 161-184). Lancaster, PA: Lancaster Press. #(29), #(38), #(21),
#(45)

White, O.R. (1986). Precision teaching--Precision learning. Exceptional
Children, 52, 522-534. #(3), #(9)

White, O.R., & Haring, N.G. (1978). Uniform performance assessment system
(Birth 6 year level). Seattle, WA: University of Washington. #(5), #(34),
#(21), #(44) 

White, O.R., & Haring, N.G. (1980). Exceptional teaching (2nd ed.). Columbus,
OH: Charles E. Merrill. #(34), #(15)

White, O.R., & Liberty, K.A. (1976). Behavioral assessment and precise
educational measurement. In N.G. Haring & R.L. Schiefelbusch (Eds.), Teaching
special children (pp. 31-71). New York: McGraw-Hill. #(29), #(38)

White, S.H. (1965). Evidence for a hierarchical arrangement of learning
processes. In R.P. Lipsitt & C.C. Spiker (Eds.), Advances in child develop-
ment and behavior (Vol. 2, pp. 187-220). New York: Academic Press. #(15)

White, S.M. (1965). Discrimination learning with ever-changing positive and
negative cues. Journal of Experimental Child Psychology, 2, 154-162. #(6),
#(14)

Whitehead, A.N. (1929). The aims of education. New York: Macmillan. #(34),
#(15) 

Whitehurst, G.J. (1978). Observational learning. In A.C. Catania & T.A.
Brigham (Eds.), Handbook of applied behavior analysis: Social instructional
processes (pp. 142-178). New York: Irvington Press. #(38), #(41)

Whitehurst, G.J., Kedesdy, J., & White, T.G. (1982). A functional analysis of
meaning. In S.A. Kuczaj, II (Ed.), Language development: Syntax and semantics
(pp. 397-425). Hillsdale, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum. #(38), #(3), #(30)

Whitehurst, G.J., & Zimmerman, B.J. (Eds.). (1979). The functions of language
and communication. New York: Academic Press. #(34), #(30)

Whitman, T.L. (1987). Self-instruction, individual differences, and mental
retardation. American Journal of Mental Deficiency, 92, 213-223. #(9), #(21),
#(18), #(45)

Whitman, T.L., & Johnston, M.B. (1987). Mental retardation. In M. Hersen & V.B.
Van Hasselt (Eds.), Behavior therapy with children and adolescents: A clinical
approach (pp. 184-223). New York: Wiley. #(38), #(45), #(3)

Whitman, T.L., Mercurio, J.R., & Caponigri, V. (1970). Development of social
responses in two severely retarded children. Journal of Applied Behavior
Analysis, 3, 133-138. #(3), #(21)

Whitman, T.L., & Scibak, J.W. (1979). Behavior modification research with the
severely and profoundly retarded. In N.R. Ellis (Ed.), Handbook of mental
deficiency, psychological theory and research (2nd ed., pp. 289-340).
Hillsdale, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum. #(3), #(21), #(38)

Whitman, T.L., Scibak, J.W., Butler, K.M., Richter, R., & Johnson, M.R.
(1982). Improving classroom behavior in mentally retarded children through
correspondence training. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 15, 545-564.

Whitman, T.L., Scibak, J.W., & Reid, D.H. (1983). Behavior modification with
the severely and profoundly retarded: Reward and application. New York:
Academic Press. #(34), #(3), #(45)

Whitman, T.L., Zarakas, M., & Chardos, S. (1971). Effects of reinforcement
and guidance procedures on instruction-following behavior of severely
retarded children. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 4, 283-290. #(3),
#(14), #(21), #(45) 

Whitney, R., & Streifel, S. (1981). Functionality and generalization in
training the severely and profoundly handicapped. Journal of Special
Education Technology, 4(3), 33-39. #(7), #(21), #(9)

Wicker, A.W. (1979). An introduction to ecological psychology. Monterey, CA:
Brooks/Cole. #(34), #(27)

Widom, C.S. (1989). Does violence beget violence? A critical examination of
the literature. Psychological Bulletin, 106, 3-28. #(27), #(32)

Wiederholt, J.L., Cronin, M.E., & Stubbs, V. (1982). Measurement of
functional competencies and the handicapped: Constructs, assessments, and
recommendations. In J.T. Neisworth (Ed.), Assessment in special education
(pp. 101-115). Rockville, MD: Aspen Publications. #(27), #(21), #(38), #(29)

Wiemann, J.M., & Backlund, P. (1980). Current theory and research in
communicative competence. Review of Educational Research, 50, 185-199. #(30)

Wiesen, A.E., Hartley, G., Richardson, C., & Roske, A. (1967). The retarded
child as a reinforcing agent. Journal of Experimental Child Psychology, 5,
109-113. #(3), #(14), #(36)

Wilcox, B. (1977). A competency-based approach to preparing teachers of the
severely and profoundly handicapped: Perspective I. In E. Sontag (Ed.),
Educational programming for the severely and profoundly handicapped (pp.
418-428). Reston, VA: Council for Exceptional Children. #(26), #(21), #(38)

Wilcox, B., & Bellamy, G.T. (1982). Design of high school programs for
severely handicapped students. Baltimore: Paul H. Brookes. #(21), #(34)

Wilcox, B., & Bellamy, G.T. (1987). A comprehensive guide to the activities
catalog: An alternative curriculum for youth and adults with severe
disabilities. Baltimore: Paul H. Brookes. #(38), #(21), #(31)

Wilcox, B., & Thompson, A. (Eds.). (1980). Critical issues in educating
autistic children and youth. Washington, DC: Department of Education, Office
of Special Education. #(21), #(2), #(34)

Wildavsky, A. (1979). Analysis as art. In A. Wildavsky (Ed.), Speaking truth
to power (pp. 1-32). Boston: Little, Brown and Company. #(29), #(34), #(38)

Wiley, D.E., & Harnischfeger, A. (1974). Explosion of a myth: Quantity of
schooling and exposure to instruction, major educational variables.
Educational Researcher, 3(4), 7-12. #(26)

Wildman, B.G., Wildman, H.E., & Kelly, W.J. (1986). Group conversational-
skills training and social validation with mentally retarded adults. Applied
Research in Mental Retardation, 7, 443-458. #(37), #(27), #(45)

Wildman, R.W. II, & Wildman, R.W. (1975). The generalization of behavior
modification procedures: A review with special emphasis on classroom
applications. Psychology in the Schools, 12, 432-448. #(3), #(7), #(9), #(32)

Wilhelm, H., & Lovaas, O.I. (1976). Stimulus overselectivity: A common
feature in autism and mental retardation. American Journal of Mental
Deficiency, 81, 26-31. #(6), #(2), #(45)

Wilhite, S.C., & Payne, D.E. (1992). Learning and memory: The basis of
behavior. Needham Heights, MA: Allyn and Bacon. #(34), #(11)

Wilkinson, A.C. (Ed.). (1983). Classroom computers and cognitive science. 
New York: Academic Press. #(34), #(16), #(5)

Wilkinson, I., Wardrop, J.L., & Anderson, R.C. (1988). Silent reading
reconsidered: Reinterpreting reading instruction and its effects. American
Educational Research Journal, 25, 127-144. #(17)

Will, M. (1984). Let us pause and reflect--but not too long. Exceptional
Children, 5, 11-16. #(21)

Willems, E.P. (1974). Behavioral technology and behavioral ecology. Journal
of Applied Behavior Analysis, 7, 151-165. #(3)

Willer, B., & Intagliata, J. (1984). An overview of the social policy of
deinstitutionalization. In N.R. Ellis & N.W. Bray (Eds.), International
review of research in mental retardation (Vol. 12, pp. 1-23). New York:
Academic Press. #(38), #(45), #(39)

Williams, A. (1986). A rationale for the use of microcomputers in special
education. Australian Journal of Special Education, 10, 30-34. #(16) 

Williams, A. (1987). Computer-based learning environments for children with
special needs. Australian Journal of Special Education, 11, 36-43. #(16)

Williams, B.A. (1976). Behavioral contrast as a function of the temporal
location of reinforcement. Journal of the Experimental Analysis of Behavior,
26, 57-64. #(3), #(14) 

Williams, G.E., & Cuvo, A.J. (1986). Training apartment upkeep skills to
rehabilitation clients: A comparison of task analytic strategies. Journal of
Applied Behavior Analysis, 19, 39-51. #(33), #(3)

Williams, R.C. (1980). A political perspective on staff development. Teachers
College Record, 80, 95-106. #(3)

Williams, J.A., Koegel, R.L., & Egel, A.L. (1981). Response reinforcer
relationships and improved learning in autistic children. Journal of Applied
Behavior Analysis, 14, 53-60. #(3), #(2), #(14)

Williams, J.A., & Stokes, T.R. (1982). Some parameters of correspondence
training and generalized verbal control. Child and Family Behavior Therapy,
4, 11-31. #(30)

Williams, P.A., Haertel, G.D., Haertel, G.D., & Walberg, H.J. (1982). The
impact of leisuretime television on school learning: A research synthesis.
American Educational Research Journal, 19, 19-50. #(16)

Williams, W., Brown, L., & Certo, N. (1975). Basic components of instruction-
al programs. Theory Into Practice, 14, 123-136. #(9)

Williams, W., & Gotts, E.A. (1977). Selected considerations on developing
curriculum for severely handicapped students. In E. Sontag (Ed.), Educational
programming for the severely and profoundly handicapped (pp. 221-236).
Reston, VA: Council for Exceptional Children. #(5), #(9), #(21), #(38)

Willis, J. (1993). What conditions encourage technology Use? It depends on 
the context. Computers in the Schools, 9(4), 13-32. #(16)

Wills, K. (1981). Manual communication training for nonspeaking hearing
children. Journal of Pediatric Psychology, 6(1), 15-27. #(30)

Wilson, B.A. (1987). Rehabilitation of memory. New York: Guilford Press.
#(34), #(11)

Wilson, J.O. (1963). Innovation in organization: Notes toward a theory. In
J.D. Thompson (Ed.), Approaches to organizational design (pp. 193-218).
Pittsburgh: University of Pittsburgh Press. #(38), #(42)

Wilson, J.Q. (1967). The bureaucracy problem. Public Interest, 6, 3-9. #(42)

Wilson, M.H., Baker, S.P., Teret, S.P., Shock, S., & Garbarino, J. (1991).
Saving children: A guide to injury prevention. New York: Oxford University 
Press. #(34), #(18) 

Wilson, P.G., Reid, D.H., Phillips, J.F., & Burgio, L.D. (1984). Normaliza-
tion of institutional mealtimes for profoundly retarded persons: Effects and
noneffects of teaching familystyle dining. Journal of Applied Behavior
Analysis, 17, 189-201. #(31)

Wilson, S. (1977). The use of ethnographic techniques in educational
research. Review of Educational Research, 47, 245-265. #(29), #(42)

Wilson, V.L. (1986). Analysis of interactions in aptitude-treatment inter- 
action research. In C.R. Reynolds & V.L. Wilson (Eds.), Methodological
and statistical advances in the study of individual differences, New York:
Plenum Press. #(26), #(22), #(38)

Wilson, V., & Parks, R. (1970). Promoting ambulation in the severely retarded
child. Mental Retardation, 8(5), 17-19. #(21), #(45)

Windell, I., Dickson, S., & Griffith, R. (1976). Opinions on teacher control
techniques. Mental Retardation, 14(2), 30-33. #(3), #(9)

Winer, B.J. (1971). Statistical principles in experimental design (2nd Ed.).
New York: McGraw-Hill. #(34), #(22)

Wing, L. (1972). Autistic children: A guide for parents and professionals.
New York: Brunner/Mazel. #(2), #(34)

Wing, L. (Ed.). (1976). Early childhood autism: Clinical, educational, and
social aspects (2nd ed.). New York: Pergamon Press. #(21), #(2), #(34)

Wing, L. (1981). Language, social, and cognitive impairments in autism and
severe mental retardation. Journal of Autism and Developmental Disorders, 11,
31-44. #(2), #(30) 

Wing, L., Gould, J., Yeates, S., & Brierley, L. (1977). Symbolic play in
severely mentally retarded and in autistic children. Journal of Child
Psychology and Psychiatry, 18, 167-178. #(2), #(37), #(45)

Winkelstein, E., Shapiro, B.J., Tucker, D.G., & Shapiro, P.P. (1974). Early
childhood educational objectives for normal and retarded children. Mental
Retardation, 12(5), 41-45. #(5), #(45)

Winnet, R.A., & Winkler, R.C. (1972). Current behavior modification in the
classroom: Be still, be quiet, be docile. Journal of Applied Behavior
Analysis, 5, 499-504. #(3)

Winston, K.I. (1974). On treating like cases alike. California Law Review,
62, 1-39. #(10), #(40)

Winterling, V., Dunlap, G., & O'Neill, R.E. (1987). The influence of task 
variation on the aberrant behaviors of autistic students. Education and 
Treatment of Children, 10, 105-119. #(2), #(5)

Winters, J.J., & Semchuk, M.T. (1986). Retrieval from long-term store as a
function of mental age and intelligence. American Journal of Mental Defic-
iency, 90, 440-448. #(11) 

Wise, A.E. (1979). Legislated learning. Berkeley, CA: University of
California Press. #(10), #(34)

Wise, B.W. (1992). Whole words and decoding for short-term learning:
Comparisons on a "talking-computer" system. Journal of Experimental Child
Psychology, 54, 147-167. #(30), #(17)

Wise, B.W., & Olson, R. (1991). Remediating reading disabilities. In J.
Obrzut & G. Hynd (Eds.), Neuropsychological foundations in learning
disabilities: A handbook of issues, methods, and practice (pp. 631-652). New
York: Academic Press. #(38), #(17), #(28)

Wisocki, P.A. (1984). Behavioral approaches to gerontology. In M. Hersen,
R.M. Eisler, & P.M. Miller (Eds.), Progress in behavior modification (Vol. 6,
pp. 121-157). New York: Academic Press. #(38), #(3), #(46)

Witt, J.C. (1986). Teachers' resistance to the use of school-based interven-
tions. Journal of School Psychology, 24, 37-44. #(42)

Wittgenstein, L. (1953). Philosophical investigations. Oxford: Blackwell.
#(35), #(34)

Wodtke, K.H., & Brown, B.R. (1967). Social learning and imitation. Review of
Educational Research, 37, 514-538. #(41)

Wohlhueter, M.J., & Sindberg, R.M. (1975). Longitudinal development of object
permanence in mentally retarded children: An exploratory study. American
Journal of Mental Deficiency, 79, 513-518. #(13), #(45)

Wohlwill, J.F. (1958). The definition and analysis of perceptual learning.
Psychological Review, 58, 283-295. #(12)

Wohlwill, J.F. (1960). Developmental studies of perception. Psychological
Bulletin, 57, 249-288. #(12)

Wohlwill, J.F. (1966). Perceptual learning. Annual Review of Psychology, 17,
201-232. #(12)

Wolchik, S.A., & Harris, S.L. (1982). Language environments of autistic and
normal children matched for language age: A preliminary investigation.
Journal of Autism and Developmental Disorders, 12, 43-55. #(30), #(2)

Wolcott, H.F. (1990). On seeking--and rejecting--validity in qualitative
research. In E.W. Eisner & A. Peshkin (Eds.), Qualitative inquiry in
education: The continuing debate (pp. 121-152). New York: Teachers College
Press. #(34), #(43), #(29)

Wolcott, H.F. (1990). Writing up qualitative research. Newbury Park, CA: Sage
Publications. #(34), #(43), #(29)

Wolery, M., Bailey, D.B., & Sugai, G.M. (1988). Effective teachings:
Principles and procedures of applied behavior analysis with exceptional
children. Boston: Allyn & Bacon. #(3), #(34)

Wolery, M., & Gast, D.L. (1990). Re-framing the debate: Finding middle ground
and defining the role of social validity. In A.C. Repp & N.N. Singh (Eds.),
Perspectives on the use of nonaversive and aversive interventions for persons
with developmental disabilities (pp. 129-143). New York: Sycamore Publishing
Co. #(3), #(27), #(38)

Wolery, M., Kirk, K., & Gast, D.L. (1985). Stereotypic behavior as a
reinforcer: Effects and side effects. Journal of Autism and Developmental
Disorders, 15, 149-161. #(20), #(2), #(14)

Wolf, M.M. (1978). Social validity: The case for subjective measurement, or
how applied behavior analysis is finding its heart. Journal of Applied
Behavior Analysis, 11, 203-214. #(27), #(29)

Wolf, M.M., & Risley, T.R. (1971). Reinforcement: Applied research. In R.
Glaser (Ed.), The nature of reinforcement (pp. 310-325). New York: Academic
Press. #(38), #(14) 

Wolf, M.M., Risley, T., Johnston, M., Harris, F., & Allen, E. (1967).
Application of operant conditioning procedures to the behavior problems of an
autistic child: A follow-up and extension. Behaviour Research and Therapy, 5,
103-111. #(3), #(2)

Wolf, M.M., Risley, T., & Mees, H. (1964). Application of operant condition-
ing procedures to the behavior problems of an autistic child. Behavior
Research and Therapy, 1, 305-312. #(3), #(2)

Wolf, R.M. (1979). The nature of educational evaluation. In R.M. Wolf,
Evaluation of education (pp. 1-17). New York: Prager. #(29), #(38)

Wolf, R.M. (1979). A framework for evaluation. In R.M. Wolf, Evaluation of
education (pp. 18-33). New York: Prager. #(29), #(38)

Wolfe, V.F., & Cuvo, A.J. (1978). Effects of within-stimulus and extra-
stimulus prompting on letter discrimination by mentally retarded persons.
American Journal of Mental Deficiency, 83, 297-303. #(6), #(45), #(9)

Wolfe, W.C. (1979). Linking knowledge producers and knowledge users. Planning
& Changing, 10, 48-63. #(23)

Wolfensberger, W. (1972). The principle of normalization in human services.
Toronto: National Institute of Mental Retardation. #(34), #(39), #(45)

Wolfensberger, W. (1975). How to exclude mentally retarded children from
school. Mental Retardation, 13(6), 30-31. #(21), #(45), #(39)

Wolfensberger, W. (1975). The origin and nature of our institutional models.
Syracuse, NY: Human Policy Press. #(34), #(39)

Wolfensberger, W. (1980). The definition of normalization: Update, problems,
disagreements, and misunderstandings. In R.J. Flynn & K.E. Nitsch (Eds.),
Normalization, social integration and community services (pp. 71-116).
Baltimore: University Park Press. #(38), #(39)

Wolfensberger, W. (1988). Common assets of mentally retarded people that are
commonly not acknowledged. Mental Retardation, 26, 63-70. #(21), #(45)

Wolfensberger, W., & Glenn, L. (1975). Program Analysis of Service Systems
(PASS): A method for the quantitative evaluation of human services. Vol. 1:
Handbook (3rd ed.). Toronto: National Institute on Mental Retardation. #(34),
#(44), #(29), #(39)

Wolfensberger, W., Nirje, B., Olshansky, S., Perske, R., & Roos, P. (1972).
The principle of normalization in human services. Toronto: National Institute
on Mental Retardation. #(34), #(39)

Wollner, S. (1983). Communicating intentions: How well do language-impaired
children do? Topics and Language Disorders, 4, 1-14. #(30)

Wolman, B. (Ed.). (1982). Handbook of developmental psychology. Englewood
Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall. #(38), #(25)

Wolosin, R.J., Sherman, S.J., & Till, A. (1973). Effects of cooperation and
competition on responsibility attribution after success and failure. Journal
of Experimental Social Psychology, 9, 220-235. #(37), #(18)

Wolpe, J. (1969). The practice of behavior therapy. New York: Pergamon Press.
#(3), #(34)

Wolraich, M., & Routh, D. (Eds.). (1982). Advances in developmental and
behavioral pediatrics. Greenwich, CT: JAI Press. #(34), #(4)

Wolters, G. (1984). Memory: Two systems or one system with many subsystems?
Behavioral and Brain Sciences, 7, 256-257. #(11)

Woof, F.H., & Braaten, S. (1983). Developing guidelines for the use of
punishing interventions in the schools. Exceptional Education Quarterly,
4(4), 68-75. #(14) 

Wood, D., Bruner, J.S., & Ross, G. (1976). The role of tutoring in problem
solving. Journal of Child Psychology and Psychiatry, 17, 89-100. #(9)

Wood, D., & Middleton, D. (1975). A study of assisted problem-solving.
British Journal of Psychology, 66, 181-191. #(9)

Wood, F.H., McQuarrie, F.O., & Thompson, S.R. (1982). Practitioners and
professors agree on effective staff development practices. Educational
Leadership, 40, 28-31. #(26)

Wood, W.S. (1975). Issues in evaluating behavior modification. Champaign, IL:
Research Press. #(29), #(34)

Woodcock, R. (1987). Woodcock Reading Mastery Tests--Revised. Circle Pines,
MN: American Guidance Service. #(44)

Woodcock, R., Clark, C.R., & Davies, C.O. (1968). Peabody rebus reading
program. Circle Pines, MN: American Guidance Service. #(30), #(44)

Wooden, W., & Berkey, M.L. (1984). Children and arson: America's middle-class
nightmare. New York: Plenum Press. #(34), #(4)

Woods, T.S. (1981). Developing a computer-assisted data-management system.
Education and Treatment of Children, 4, 71-86. #(16), #(29)

Woodson, M. (1974). Seven aspects of teaching concepts. Journal of Education-
al Psychology, 66, 184-188. #(25), #(9)

Woodward, J., Carnine, D., Gersten, R., Gleason, M., Johnson, G., & Collins,
M. (1986) Applying instructional design principles to CAI for mildly
handicapped students: Four recently conducted studies. Journal of Special
Education Technology, 8, 13-26. #(16)

Woodward, W.M. (1979). Piaget's theory and the study of mental retardation.
In N.R. Ellis (Ed.), Handbook of mental deficiency, psychological theory and
research (2nd ed., pp. 169-195). Hillsdale, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum. #(13),
#(38), #(45)

Wooley, S.C., Wooley, O.W., & Dyrenforth, S.R. (1979). Theoretical,
practical, and social issues in behavioral treatments of obesity. Journal of
Applied Behavioral Analysis, 12, 3-25. #(3), #(18), #(35)

Wortman, P.M. (1975). Evaluation Research: A psychological perspective.
American Psychologist, 30, 562-575. #(29)

Wright, J.C., & Vliestra, A.G. (1975). The development of selective attention
From perceptual exploration to logical search. In H.W. Reese (Ed.), Advances
in child development and behavior (Vol. 10, pp. 195-239). New York: Academic
Press. #(1), #(38)

Wright, L. (1973). Aversive conditioning of self-induced seizures. Behavior
Therapy, 4, 712-713. #(3)

Wulfert, E., & Hayes, S.C. (1988). The transfer of conditional sequencing 
through conditional equivalence classes. Journal of the Experimental Analy-
sis of Behavior, 50, 125-144. #(6), #(7)

Wulff, S.B. (1985). The symbolic and object play of children with autism: A
review. Journal of Autism and Developmental Disorders, 15, 139-148. #(2),
#(32), #(37) 

Wyatt, W.J., Hawkins, R.P., & Davis, P. (1986). Behaviorism: Are reports of its
death exaggerated? The Behavior Analyst, 9, 101-105. #(3)

Wyatt v. Stickney (1972). 344 F. Supp. 387 (M.D., Ala.). #(10)

Wyckoff, L.B. (1952). The role of observing responses in discrimination
learning. Part I. Psychological Review, 59, 431-442. #(6)

Wynne, E.A. (1981). Looking good at schools. Phi Delta Kappan, 62, 377-381.
#(26)

Wysocki, T., Fuqua, W., Davis, V.J., & Breuning, S.E. (1981). Effects of
Thioridazine (Mellaril) on titrating delayed matching-to-sample performance
of mentally retarded adults. American Journal of Mental Deficiency, 85,
539-547. #(6), #(45)

Yale Law Journal. (1975). The Wyatt Case: Implementation of a judicial decree
ordering institutional change. Author, 86, 1338-1379. #(8), #(10), #(40),
#(29), #(45) 

Yairi, E. (1990). Subtyping child stutters for research purposes. ASHA
Reports, 18, 50-57. #(30)

Yairi, E., & Ambrose, N. (1992). A longitudinal study of stuttering in
children: preliminary report. Journal of Speech and Hearing Research, 35,
755-760. #(30) 

Yairi, E., & Lewis, B. (1984). Disfluencies at the onset of stuttering.
Journal of Speech and Hearing Research, 27, 154-159. #(30)

Yates, A.J. (1970). Behavior therapy. New York: John Wiley. #(3), #(34)

Yeaton, W.H. (1982). A critique of the effectiveness of applied behavior
analysis research. Advances in Behaviour Research and Therapy, 4, 75-96. #(3)

Yelton, A.R., Wildman, B.G., & Erickson, M.T. (1977). A probability-based
formula for calculating interobsrver agreement. Journal of Applied Behavior
Analysis, 10, 127-141. #(29), #(43)

Yendovitskaya, T.V. (1971). Development of attention. In A.V. Zaporozhets &
D.B. Elkonin (Eds.), The psychology of preschool children (pp. 65-88).
Cambridge, MA: MIT Press. #(38), #(1)

Yin, R.K. (1989). Case study research: Design and methods (rev. ed.). Beverly
Hills, CA: Sage Publications. #(34), #(43)

Yin, R.K., Bingham, E., & Heald, K.A. (1976). The difference that quality
makes: The case of research reviews. Sociological Methods and Research, 5,
139-156. #(32)

Yirmiya, N., & Sigman, M. (1991). High-functioning individuals with autism:
Diagnosis, empirical findings and theoretical issues. Clinical Psychology
Review, 11, 669-684. #(2), #(29)

Yirmiya, N., Sigman, M., & Freeman, B.J. (1994). Comparison between
diagnostic instruments for identifying high-functioning children with autism.
Journal of Autism and Developmental Disorders, 24, 281-291. #(2), #(29)

Yolton, J. (1970). Locke and the compass of human understanding. Cambridge,
England: Cambridge University Press. #(34), #(35)

York, J., Nietupski, J., & Hamre-Nietupski, S. (1985). A decision-making
process for using microswitches. Journal of The Association for Persons with
Severe Handicaps, 10, 214-223. #(16)

Young, C.C., Hecimovic, A., & Salzberg, C.L. (1983). Tutor-tutee behavior of
disadvantaged kindergarten children during peer teaching. Education and
Treatment of Children, 6, 123-135. #(3), #(36)

Young, M. (1961). The rise of the meritocracy. New York: Penguin Books.
#(34), #(24), #(23)

Young, M. (1975). Onset, prevalence, and recovery from stuttering. Journal of
Speech and Hearing Disorders, 40, 49-58. #(30)

Young, R.K., Teeters, T.D., & Zelazny, C. (1966). Transfer as a function of
stimulus selection. Psychonomic Science, 6, 163-164. #(6)

Youniss, J. (1980). Parents and peers in social development: A Piaget-
Sullivan perspective. Chicago: University of Chicago Press. #(34), #(13)

Ysseldyke, J.E., & Algozzine, B. (1982). Critical issues in special education
and remedial education. Boston: Houghton Mifflin. #(21), #(34)

Ysseldyke, J.E., & Shinn, M.R. (1981). Psychoeducational evaluation. In J.M.
Kauffman & D.P. Hallahan (Eds.), Handbook of special education (pp. 418-440).
Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall. #(29), #(38)

Ysseldyke, J.E., & Salvia, J. (1974). Diagnostic-prescriptive teaching: Two
models. Exceptional Children, 41, 181-185. #(5)

Ysseldyke, J.E., Thurlow, M., Mecklenburg, C., & Graden, J. (1984).
Opportunity to learn for regular and special education students during
reading instruction. Remedial and Special Education, 5, 29-37. #(17)

Yuwiler, A., Geller, E., & Ritvo, E. (1985). Biochemical studies in autism.
In A. Lejtha (Ed.), Handbook of neurochemistry (Vol. 10, pp. 671-691). New
York: Plenum Press. #(38), #(2), #(25)

Zadeh, L.A. (1965). Fuzzy sets. Information and Control, 8, 338-353. #(11)

Zajonc, R.B. (1980). Feeling and thinking: Preferences need no inferences.
American Psychologist, 35, 151-175. #(37)

Zane, T., Sulzer-Azaroff, B. et al. (1982). Validation of a competency-based
training program in developmental disabilities. Journal of The Association
for Persons with Severe Handicaps, 8, 21-31. #(27), #(29)

Zane, T., Walls, R.T., & Thvedt, J.E. (1981). Prompting and fading guidance
procedures: Their effect on chaining and whole task strategies. Education and
Training of the Mentally Retarded, 16, 125-135. #(9)

Zawlocki, R.J., & Walls, R.T. (1983). Fading on the S+, the S-, both, or
neither. American Journal of Mental Deficiency, 87, 462-464. #(6)

Zeaman, D. (1965). Learning processes of the mentally retarded. In S.F. Osler
& R.E. Cooke (Eds.), The biosocial basis of mental retardation (pp. 107-127).
Baltimore: The Johns Hopkins University Press. #(6), #(38), #(45)

Zeaman, D. (1973). One programmatic approach to retardation. In D.K. Routh
(Ed.), The experimental psychology of mental retardation (pp. 78-132).
Chicago: Aldine. #(6), #(38), #(45)

Zeaman, D. (1978). Some relations of general intelligence and selective
attention. Intelligence, 2, 55-73. #(25), #(1)

Zeaman, D., & House, B.J. (1959). Discrimination learning in retardates.
Training School Bulletin, 56, 62-67. #(6)

Zeaman, D., & House, B.J. (1963). The role of attention in retardate
discrimination learning. In N.R. Ellis (Ed.), Handbook of mental deficiency:
Psychological theory and research (pp. 159-223). New York: McGraw-Hill. #(1),
#(6), #(38)

Zeaman, D., & House, B.J. (1974). Interpretations of developmental trends in
discriminative transfer effects. In A.D. Pick (Ed.), Minnesota symposia on
child psychology (Vol. 8, pp. 144-186). Minneapolis: University of Minnesota
Press. #(38), #(6)

Zeaman, D., & House, B.J. (1979). A review of attention theory. In N.R. Ellis
(Ed.), Handbook of mental deficiency: Psychological theory and research (2nd
ed., pp. 63-120). Hillsdale, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum. #(1), #(38), #(32)

Zeaman, D., & House, B.H. (1984). Intelligence and the process of generaliza-
tion. In P.H. Brookes, R. Sperber, & C. McCawley (Eds.), Learning and
cognition in the mentally retarded (pp. 295-309). Hillsdale, NJ: Lawrence
Erlbaum. #(38), #(45), #(7)

Zeaman, D., House, B.H., & Orlando, R. (1968). Use of special training
conditions in visual discrimination learning with imbeciles. American Journal
of Mental Deficiency, 63, 453-459. #(3), #(1), #(6)

Zehrback, R.R. (1975). Determining a preschool handicapped population.
Exceptional Children, 42, 76-83. #(21)

Zeiler, M.D. (1964). Component and configurational learning in children.
Journal of Experimental Psychology, 68, 292-296. #(6)

Zentall, S.S. (1985). Stimulus control factors in the search performance of
hyperactive children. Journal of Learning Disabilities, 18, 480-485. #(6),
#(4) 

Zentall, S.S. (1985). A context of hyperactivity. Advances in Learning and
Behavioral Disabilities, 4, 273-343. #(4)

Zentall, S.S. (1988). Production deficiencies in elicited language but not in
the spontaneous verbalizations of hyperactive children. Journal of Abnormal
Child Psychology, 16, 657-673. #(4), #(11)

Zentall, S.S., Falkenberg, S.D., & Smith, L.B. (1985). Effects of color
stimulation on the copying performance of attention-problem adolescents.
Journal of Abnormal Child Psychology, 13, 501-511. #(1)

Zentall, S.S., & Kruzczek, T. (1988). The attraction of color for active
attention-problem children. Exceptional Children, 54, 357-362. #(1)

Zentall, S.S., & Zentall, T.R. (1976). Activity and task performance of
hyperactive children as a function of environmental stimulation. Journal of
Consulting and Clinical Psychology, 44, 693-697. #(1), #(4)

Zentall, S.S., & Zentall, T.R. (1983). Optimal stimulation: A model of
disordered activity and performance in normal and deviant children.
Psychological Bulletin, 94, 446-471. #(14) 

Ziarnik, J.P., & Bernstein, G.S. (1982). A critical examination of the effect
of inservice training on staff performance. Mental Retardation, 20, 109-114.
#(42) 

Zifferblatt, S.M. (1973). Behavior systems. In N.L. Gage (Ed.), The seventy-
second yearbook of the national society for the study of education (pp.
317-350). Chicago: The University of Chicago Press. #(3), #(38)

Zifferblatt, S.M., & Hendricks, C.G. (1974). Applied behavioral analysis of
societal problems: Population change, a case in point. American Psychologist,
29, 750-761. #(3) 

Zigler, E. (1966). Motivational determinants in the performance of retarded
children. American Journal of Orthopsychiatry, 36, 848-856. #(14)

Zigler, E. (1967). Familial retardation: A continuing dilemma. Science, 155,
292-298. #(45)

Zigler, E. (1969). Developmental versus difference theories of mental
retardation and the problem of motivation. American Journal of Mental
Deficiency, 73, 536-556. #(45) 

Zigler, E., Balla, D., & Hodapp, R. (1984). On the definition and classifica-
tion of mental retardation. American Journal of Mental Deficiency, 89,
215-230. #(21), #(45) 

Zimbardo, P.G. (1988). Psychology and life (12th ed.). Glenview, IL: Scott,
Foresman. #(34), #(25)

Zimilies, H. (1978). Early childhood education: A selective overview of
current issues and trends. Teachers College Record, 79, 509-527. #(21)

Zimmerman, I.L., Steiner, V.G., & Pond, R.E. (1979). Preschool language scale
manual (rev. ed.). Columbus, OH: Charles E. Merrill. #(30), #(44)

Zivolich, S., & Bamberg, E. (1991). Free marketing strategies for improving
employment services: Transitioning segregated day activity programs to
integrated employment services. Journal of Vocational Rehabilitation, 1(8),
65-72. #(27), #(33)

Zubek, J.P. (1969). Sensory deprivation: Fifteen years of research. New York:
Appleton-Century-Crofts. #(12), #(34)

Zucker, S.H., D'Alonzo, B.J., McMullen, M.R., & Williams, R.L. (1980).
Training eye-pointing behavior in a nonambulatory profoundly mentally
retarded child using contingent vibratory stimulation. Education and Training
of the Mentally Retarded, 15, 4-7. #(3), #(45)

Zuriff, G.E. (1979). Covert events: The logical status of the first-person
reports. The Psychological Record, 29, 125-133. #(3)

Zusman, J. (1976). Can program evaluation be saved from its enthusiasts?
American Journal of Psychiatry, 133, 1300-1305. #(29), #(3), #(30)